Geo 5 User

User's Guide
Edition 2019
GEO5 – User's Guide © Fine Ltd. 2018
Content
Using the Help.............................................................................................................41
Using the Search Function.........................................................................................41
User Interface..............................................................................................................42
Application Window...................................................................................................43
Control Menu...........................................................................................................44
Tool and Control Bars................................................................................................45
File.....................................................................................................................46
Edit.....................................................................................................................47
Template.............................................................................................................48
Construction Stages..............................................................................................48
Visualization........................................................................................................49
Modes.................................................................................................................51
Outputs...............................................................................................................51
3D Visualization........................................................................................................52
Drawing Settings......................................................................................................53
Drawing Styles Administrator.................................................................................55
Frames....................................................................................................................56
Tables.....................................................................................................................58
Dialog Windows........................................................................................................60
Active Dimensions and Objects...................................................................................61
Mouse Functions.......................................................................................................62
Mouse Context Menu.................................................................................................64
Units - Metric / Imperial............................................................................................66
Copy to Clipboard.....................................................................................................66
GeoClipboard™........................................................................................................67
Copying and Pasting Project Data...........................................................................67
Copying and Pasting 2D Interfaces..........................................................................68
Copying and Pasting Soils and Rigid Bodies..............................................................69
Copying and Pasting 2D Assignment.......................................................................70
Options...................................................................................................................71
Options - Input.....................................................................................................71
Options - Copy to Clipboard...................................................................................72
Options - Print and Pictures...................................................................................73
Common Input.............................................................................................................74
Input and Edit of Soils...............................................................................................75
-1-
Classification of Soils.............................................................................................76
Soil and Rock Symbols..........................................................................................78
Manual Classification of Soils..................................................................................79
Interfaces in 2D Environment.....................................................................................80
Adding Interface...................................................................................................81
Editing Interface Points......................................................................................82
Editing and Removing Interface..............................................................................84
Input Interface Corrector.......................................................................................86
World Coordinates................................................................................................87
Input of Objects and Data..........................................................................................90
Add.....................................................................................................................90
Add Graphically....................................................................................................91
Assigning Soils.........................................................................................................92
Design Coefficients...................................................................................................93
Running Several Analyses / Verifications......................................................................94
Program Connection..................................................................................................95
Saved Views............................................................................................................96
Drawing Settings : Analysis...................................................................................97
Setting a Color Range...............................................................................................98
Scale Color Definition............................................................................................99
DXF Import and Export............................................................................................100
Loading Data into Template..................................................................................101
Loading Data into Interface..................................................................................102
Loading Data into GeoClipboard............................................................................103
Data Input using Templates..................................................................................103
Modification of Template During Data Input............................................................104
DXF Export........................................................................................................105
DXF Import........................................................................................................106
Table Data Import...................................................................................................107
(1) Input File......................................................................................................110
(2) Input File Preview..........................................................................................111
(3) Parameters for Input File Splitting into Columns................................................112
(4) Input File Split into Columns...........................................................................113
(5) Assign Columns to Imported Data....................................................................113
(6) Result of Import Preview................................................................................114
Import LandXML.....................................................................................................114
Heredity - Construction Stage..................................................................................116
-2-
Site view on Google Maps........................................................................................117

Standards and Analysis Methods...................................................................................119
Administrator.........................................................................................................120
Import and Export of Settings..............................................................................120
Settings List...........................................................................................................121
Analysis Settings....................................................................................................122
Materials and Standards......................................................................................123
Wall Analysis......................................................................................................124
Pressure Analysis................................................................................................126
Stability Analysis................................................................................................127
Settlement.........................................................................................................128
Spread Footing...................................................................................................128
Anchors.............................................................................................................130
Pile...................................................................................................................130
Pile CPT.............................................................................................................131
Micropiles..........................................................................................................132
Pile Group..........................................................................................................133
Adding New Settings...............................................................................................133
Verification Methodology..........................................................................................134
Analysis According to the Safety Factor (ASD)........................................................135
Analysis According to the Theory of Limit States (LSD)............................................136
Verification According to EN 1997.........................................................................136
Partial Factors.................................................................................................137
Design Approaches......................................................................................137
Design Approach 1..................................................................................138
Design Approach 2..................................................................................139
Design Approach 3..................................................................................139
National Annex (NA)....................................................................................140
Partial Factors on Water...................................................................................140
Analysis of Walls (Support Structures)...............................................................142
Analysis of Sheeting Structures........................................................................143
Analysis of Foundations (Spread Footing, Piles)..................................................143
Slope Stability Analysis....................................................................................144
Load Combinations..........................................................................................145
Analysis According to LRFD..................................................................................146
LRFD - Design Situations.................................................................................147
LRFD - Analysis of Retaining Walls (Support Structures)......................................148
-3-
LRFD - Analysis of Spread Foundations..............................................................149

LRFD - Slope Stability Analysis.........................................................................150
Analysis According to Chinese Standards...............................................................151
Design Situations....................................................................................................151
Individual Programs....................................................................................................152
Program Earth Pressure...........................................................................................153
Project..............................................................................................................154
Settings.............................................................................................................154
Geometry..........................................................................................................155
Profile...............................................................................................................156
Soils..................................................................................................................156
Basic Data.....................................................................................................157
Assign...............................................................................................................158
Terrain...............................................................................................................159
Water................................................................................................................160
Surcharge..........................................................................................................161
Earthquake........................................................................................................162
Stage Settings....................................................................................................163
Analysis.............................................................................................................164
Program Cantilever Wall..........................................................................................165
Project..............................................................................................................165
Settings.............................................................................................................166
Geometry..........................................................................................................167
Material.............................................................................................................168
Profile...............................................................................................................170
Soils..................................................................................................................171
Basic Data.....................................................................................................172
Assign...............................................................................................................173
Foundation.........................................................................................................174
Backfill..............................................................................................................175
Terrain...............................................................................................................176
Water................................................................................................................177
Surcharge..........................................................................................................178
Front Face Resistance..........................................................................................179
Applied Forces....................................................................................................180
Earthquake........................................................................................................181
Base Anchorage..................................................................................................182
-4-
Stage Settings....................................................................................................183
Verification.........................................................................................................184
Bearing Capacity.................................................................................................185
Dimensioning.....................................................................................................187
Stability.............................................................................................................188
Program Gravity Wall...............................................................................................189
Project..............................................................................................................190
Settings.............................................................................................................190
Geometry..........................................................................................................191
General Wall Shape.........................................................................................193
Material.............................................................................................................196
Profile...............................................................................................................198
Soils..................................................................................................................199
Basic Data.....................................................................................................200
Assign...............................................................................................................201
Foundation.........................................................................................................202
Backfill..............................................................................................................203
Terrain...............................................................................................................204
Water................................................................................................................205
Surcharge..........................................................................................................206
Applied Forces....................................................................................................208
Earthquake........................................................................................................209
Stage Settings....................................................................................................210
Verification.........................................................................................................211
Dimensioning.....................................................................................................213
Stability.............................................................................................................214
Program Prefab Wall................................................................................................215
Project..............................................................................................................216
Settings.............................................................................................................216
Geometry..........................................................................................................217
Profile...............................................................................................................218
Soils..................................................................................................................219
Basic Data.....................................................................................................220
Assign...............................................................................................................221
Foundation.........................................................................................................222
-5-
Backfill..............................................................................................................223
Terrain...............................................................................................................224
Water................................................................................................................225
Surcharge..........................................................................................................226
Applied Forces....................................................................................................228
Earthquake........................................................................................................229
Stage Settings....................................................................................................230
Verification.........................................................................................................230
Dimensioning.....................................................................................................233
Slip on Georeinforcement.....................................................................................234
Stability.............................................................................................................235
Program Masonry Wall.............................................................................................236
Project..............................................................................................................237
Settings.............................................................................................................237
Geometry..........................................................................................................238
Types of Blocks...................................................................................................239
Material.............................................................................................................240
Profile...............................................................................................................241
Soils..................................................................................................................242
Basic Data.....................................................................................................243
Assign...............................................................................................................244
Foundation.........................................................................................................245
Backfill..............................................................................................................246
Terrain...............................................................................................................247
Water................................................................................................................248
Surcharge..........................................................................................................249
Applied Forces....................................................................................................251
Earthquake........................................................................................................252
Base Anchorage..................................................................................................253
Stage Settings....................................................................................................254
Verification.........................................................................................................255
Dimensioning.....................................................................................................257
Stability.............................................................................................................258
-6-
Program Gabion......................................................................................................259
Project..............................................................................................................260
Settings.............................................................................................................260
Material.............................................................................................................261
Geometry..........................................................................................................262
Profile...............................................................................................................263
Soils..................................................................................................................264
Basic Data.....................................................................................................265
Assign...............................................................................................................266
Foundation.........................................................................................................267
Backfill..............................................................................................................268
Terrain...............................................................................................................269
Water................................................................................................................270
Surcharge..........................................................................................................271
Applied Forces....................................................................................................273
Earthquake........................................................................................................274
Stage Settings....................................................................................................275
Verification.........................................................................................................275
Dimensioning.....................................................................................................278
Stability.............................................................................................................279
Program Abutment..................................................................................................280
Project..............................................................................................................281
Settings.............................................................................................................281
Geometric Section...............................................................................................282
Wings................................................................................................................283
Geometry Plane View..........................................................................................284
Footing Steps.....................................................................................................285
Material.............................................................................................................286
Profile...............................................................................................................287
Soils..................................................................................................................288
Basic Data.....................................................................................................289
Assign...............................................................................................................290
Load - LC...........................................................................................................291
Foundation.........................................................................................................292
Backfill..............................................................................................................293
-7-
Terrain...............................................................................................................294
Water................................................................................................................295
Surcharge..........................................................................................................296
Applied Forces....................................................................................................298
Earthquake........................................................................................................299
Stage Settings....................................................................................................300
Verification.........................................................................................................301
Dimensioning.....................................................................................................303
Stability.............................................................................................................304
Program Nailed Slope..............................................................................................305
Project..............................................................................................................306
Settings.............................................................................................................306
Geometry..........................................................................................................307
Types of Nails.....................................................................................................308
Geometry of Nails...............................................................................................309
Material.............................................................................................................310
Profile...............................................................................................................311
Soils..................................................................................................................312
Basic Data.....................................................................................................313
Assign...............................................................................................................314
Terrain...............................................................................................................315
Water................................................................................................................316
Surcharge..........................................................................................................317
Earthquake........................................................................................................318
Stage Settings....................................................................................................319
Internal Stability.................................................................................................319
Verification.........................................................................................................320
Dimensioning.....................................................................................................323
Stability.............................................................................................................323
Program Redi-Rock Wall...........................................................................................324
Project..............................................................................................................325
Settings.............................................................................................................326
Blocks...............................................................................................................326
Geometry..........................................................................................................327
-8-
Footing..............................................................................................................328
Profile...............................................................................................................329
Soils..................................................................................................................330
Basic data......................................................................................................331
Assign...............................................................................................................332
Types of Reinforcements......................................................................................333
Reinforcements...................................................................................................334
Terrain...............................................................................................................337
Water................................................................................................................338
Surcharge..........................................................................................................339
Applied Forces....................................................................................................341
Earthquake........................................................................................................342
Stage Settings....................................................................................................343
Analysis - Gravity Wall.........................................................................................343
Verification.....................................................................................................344
Dimensioning.................................................................................................345
Bearing Capacity.............................................................................................346
Analysis - MSE Wall.............................................................................................347
Verification.....................................................................................................349
Dimensioning.................................................................................................350
Bearing Capacity.............................................................................................351
Slip on Georeinforcement.................................................................................352
Internal Stability.............................................................................................353
Stability.............................................................................................................354
Program Sheeting Design.........................................................................................355
Project..............................................................................................................356
Settings.............................................................................................................356
Profile...............................................................................................................357
Soils..................................................................................................................358
Basic Data.....................................................................................................359
Assign...............................................................................................................360
Geometry..........................................................................................................361
Material.............................................................................................................362
Anchors.............................................................................................................363
Props................................................................................................................364
Supports............................................................................................................365
-9-
Pressure Determination.......................................................................................366
Redistribution of Earth Pressures......................................................................367
Terrain...............................................................................................................369
Water................................................................................................................369
Surcharge..........................................................................................................370
Applied Forces....................................................................................................371
Earthquake........................................................................................................372
Stage Settings....................................................................................................373
Analysis.............................................................................................................373
Dimensioning.....................................................................................................375
Stability.............................................................................................................376
Program Sheeting Check..........................................................................................378
Project..............................................................................................................379
Settings.............................................................................................................379
Profile...............................................................................................................380
Modulus Kh........................................................................................................381
PMTs.................................................................................................................382
DMT..................................................................................................................383
Soils..................................................................................................................384
Basic Data.....................................................................................................385
Geometry..........................................................................................................386
Material.............................................................................................................387
Assign...............................................................................................................389
Excavation.........................................................................................................390
Terrain...............................................................................................................391
Water................................................................................................................392
Surcharge..........................................................................................................393
Applied Forces....................................................................................................394
Anchors.............................................................................................................395
Props................................................................................................................396
Supports............................................................................................................397
Earthquake........................................................................................................398
Stage Settings....................................................................................................399
Analysis.............................................................................................................400
External Stability................................................................................................405
-10-
Heave Failure.....................................................................................................406
Dimensioning.....................................................................................................407
Anchors Verification.............................................................................................408
Program Anti-Slide Pile............................................................................................409
Project..............................................................................................................410
Settings.............................................................................................................411
Profile...............................................................................................................411
Modulus Kh........................................................................................................412
PMTs.................................................................................................................414
DMT..................................................................................................................415
Soils..................................................................................................................416
Basic Data.....................................................................................................416
Geometry..........................................................................................................417
Material.............................................................................................................418
Rock..................................................................................................................420
Assign...............................................................................................................421
Front Face..........................................................................................................422
Terrain...............................................................................................................423
Water................................................................................................................424
Surcharge..........................................................................................................425
Applied Forces....................................................................................................426
Anchors.............................................................................................................427
Supports............................................................................................................428
Earthquake........................................................................................................429
Stage Settings....................................................................................................430
Analysis.............................................................................................................431
Dimensioning.....................................................................................................434
Anchors Verification.............................................................................................435
Program Shaft........................................................................................................436
Project..............................................................................................................437
Settings.............................................................................................................437
Geometry..........................................................................................................438
Profile...............................................................................................................439
Soils..................................................................................................................440
Basic data......................................................................................................441
Assign...............................................................................................................442
-11-
Water................................................................................................................443
Surcharge..........................................................................................................444
Stage settings....................................................................................................446
Load Analysis.....................................................................................................446
Dimensioning.....................................................................................................447
Program Slope Stability...........................................................................................449
Project..............................................................................................................450
Settings.............................................................................................................450
Interface............................................................................................................451
Embankment......................................................................................................452
Earth Cut...........................................................................................................453
Soils..................................................................................................................454
Basic Data.....................................................................................................455
Rigid Body.........................................................................................................456
Assign...............................................................................................................457
Anchors.............................................................................................................458
Nails.................................................................................................................459
Reinforcements...................................................................................................460
Anti-Slide Piles...................................................................................................461
Surcharge..........................................................................................................462
Water................................................................................................................463
Earthquake........................................................................................................464
Stage Settings....................................................................................................465
Analysis.............................................................................................................465
Input of Slip Surface.......................................................................................468
Restrictions on the Optimization Procedure.........................................................469
Height Multiplier.............................................................................................470
Program Rock Stability............................................................................................471
Project..............................................................................................................472
Settings.............................................................................................................472
Terrain - Plane and Polygonal Slip Surface..............................................................473
Rock..................................................................................................................475
Slip Surface - Plane.............................................................................................476
Slip Surface - Polygonal.......................................................................................477
Water - Plane Slip Surface....................................................................................478
Water - Polygonal Slip Surface..............................................................................479
Parameters - Polygonal Slip Surface......................................................................480
-12-
Surcharge - Plane and Polygonal Slip Surface.........................................................482

Applied Forces - Plane Slip Surface........................................................................482
Anchors - Plane and Polygonal Slip Surface............................................................483
Earthquake........................................................................................................484
Stage Settings....................................................................................................485
Analysis - Plane Slip Surface................................................................................485
Analysis - Polygonal Slip Surface...........................................................................486
Geometry - Rock Wedge......................................................................................487
Slip Surface - Rock Wedge...................................................................................489
Parameters - Rock Wedge....................................................................................491
Water - Rock Wedge............................................................................................493
Surcharge - Rock Wedge......................................................................................495
Anchors - Rock Wedge.........................................................................................497
Analysis - Rock Wedge.........................................................................................499
Program MSE Wall...................................................................................................501
Project..............................................................................................................502
Settings.............................................................................................................502
Geometry..........................................................................................................503
Material.............................................................................................................504
Types of Reinforcements......................................................................................505
Adding and Editing Type of Reinforcement..........................................................506
User's Catalog................................................................................................507
Reinforcement....................................................................................................509
Reinforcement....................................................................................................510
Profile...............................................................................................................511
Soils..................................................................................................................512
Basic Data.....................................................................................................513
Assign...............................................................................................................514
Terrain...............................................................................................................515
Water................................................................................................................516
Water................................................................................................................517
Surcharge..........................................................................................................518
Applied Forces....................................................................................................520
Earthquake........................................................................................................521
Stage Settings....................................................................................................522
Verification.........................................................................................................523
-13-
Dimensioning.....................................................................................................524
Slip on Georeinforcement.....................................................................................526
Global Stability...................................................................................................528
Stability.............................................................................................................529
Program Spread Footing..........................................................................................530
Project..............................................................................................................531
Settings.............................................................................................................531
Profile...............................................................................................................532
DMT..................................................................................................................533
Soils..................................................................................................................534
Basic Data.....................................................................................................535
Assign...............................................................................................................536
Foundation.........................................................................................................537
Load..................................................................................................................538
Geometry..........................................................................................................539
Footing Bottom...................................................................................................541
Sand-Gravel Cushion...........................................................................................541
Material.............................................................................................................542
Surcharge..........................................................................................................543
Water, Incompressible Subsoil..............................................................................544
Earthquake........................................................................................................545
Stage Settings....................................................................................................546
Settlement and Rotation......................................................................................548
Dimensioning.....................................................................................................549
Program Spread Footing CPT....................................................................................550
Project..............................................................................................................551
Settings.............................................................................................................551
CPT...................................................................................................................552
SPT...................................................................................................................553
PMTs.................................................................................................................554
Soil Classification................................................................................................555
Profile...............................................................................................................556
Soils..................................................................................................................557
Basic Data.....................................................................................................558
-14-
Assign...............................................................................................................559
Water ...............................................................................................................560
Foundation.........................................................................................................561
Load..................................................................................................................562
Geometry..........................................................................................................563
Material.............................................................................................................565
Analysis.............................................................................................................565
Dimensioning.....................................................................................................566
Program Pile...........................................................................................................567
Project..............................................................................................................568
Settings.............................................................................................................569
Profile...............................................................................................................570
Modulus of Subsoil Reaction.................................................................................571
Soils..................................................................................................................571
Basic Data.....................................................................................................572
Assign...............................................................................................................573
Load..................................................................................................................574
Geometry..........................................................................................................575
Material.............................................................................................................576
Water, Incompressible Subsoil..............................................................................577
Negative Skin Friction..........................................................................................578
Stage Settings....................................................................................................579
Vertical Bearing Capacity - Analytical Solution........................................................579
Vertical Bearing Capacity - Spring Method..............................................................580
Settlement - Linear Load-Settlement Curve (Poulos)...............................................582
Settlement - Non-Linear Load-Settlement Curve (Masopust)....................................582
Horizontal Bearing Capacity - Elastic Subsoil (p-y Method).......................................583
Horizontal Bearing Capacity - Brom's Method.........................................................586
Program Pile CPT....................................................................................................587
Project..............................................................................................................588
Settings.............................................................................................................588
CPT...................................................................................................................589
GWT + NSF........................................................................................................590
Soil Classification................................................................................................592
Profile...............................................................................................................593
Soils..................................................................................................................593
Basic Data.....................................................................................................594
-15-
Assign...............................................................................................................595
Construction.......................................................................................................596
Group of Piles.................................................................................................598
Geometry..........................................................................................................599
Effect of Finished Ground.................................................................................600
Settlement.........................................................................................................602
Program Pile Group.................................................................................................604
Project..............................................................................................................604
Settings.............................................................................................................605
Structure...........................................................................................................606
General Pile Group Shape................................................................................607
Geometry..........................................................................................................611
Material.............................................................................................................612
Load..................................................................................................................613
Load Acting on a Pile Group..............................................................................614
Profile...............................................................................................................616
Soils..................................................................................................................616
Basic Data.....................................................................................................617
Assign...............................................................................................................618
Water................................................................................................................619
Negative Skin Friction..........................................................................................620
Vertical Springs..................................................................................................621
Horizontal Modulus..............................................................................................622
Stage Settings....................................................................................................623
Vertical Bearing Capacity - Analytical Solution........................................................623
Settlement - Cohesive Soil...................................................................................624
Settlement - Cohesionless Soil (Load-Settlement Curve)..........................................625
Analysis - Spring Method.....................................................................................626
Dimensioning.....................................................................................................627
Bearing capacity.................................................................................................628
Program Micropile...................................................................................................630
Project..............................................................................................................631
Settings.............................................................................................................631
Profile...............................................................................................................632
Soils..................................................................................................................633
Basic Data.....................................................................................................634
-16-
Geometry..........................................................................................................635
Material.............................................................................................................636
Assign...............................................................................................................637
Load..................................................................................................................638
Water................................................................................................................639
SPT...................................................................................................................640
PMTs.................................................................................................................641
Verification of Cross-Section.................................................................................642
Root Verification.................................................................................................643
Program Slab.........................................................................................................644
Project..............................................................................................................645
Settings.............................................................................................................645
Joints................................................................................................................646
Lines.................................................................................................................647
Macroelements...................................................................................................648
Openings...........................................................................................................649
Joint Refinements...............................................................................................650
Line Refinements................................................................................................651
Macroelement Refinements..................................................................................652
Mesh Generation.................................................................................................653
Mesh Generator Warning..................................................................................656
Joint Supports....................................................................................................658
Line Supports.....................................................................................................660
Beams...............................................................................................................661
Catalog of Materials.........................................................................................662
Editor of Materials...........................................................................................664
Types of Cross-Section....................................................................................665
Catalog of Profiles...........................................................................................666
Cross-Section Editor........................................................................................667
Internal Hinges...................................................................................................668
Macroelement Subsoils........................................................................................669
Winkler-Pasternak Parameters C1 a C2..............................................................670
Calculation of Winkler-Pasternak Constants from Deformation Parameters of Soils. .670
Load Cases........................................................................................................671
Load Case Parameters.....................................................................................672
Joint Loads.........................................................................................................674
Line Loads.........................................................................................................675
-17-
Temperature Load...........................................................................................676
Macroelement Loads............................................................................................676
Free Point Loads.................................................................................................677
Free Line Loads..................................................................................................678
Free Area Loads..................................................................................................679
Combination ULS................................................................................................680
Parameters of ULS Combinations......................................................................681
Generator of ULS Combinations........................................................................682
Combination SLS................................................................................................685
Parameters of SLS Combinations.......................................................................686
Generator of SLS Combinations........................................................................687
Dimensioning Parameters....................................................................................687
Macroelement Dimensioning.................................................................................688
Analysis.............................................................................................................689
Analysis Procedure..........................................................................................690
Results..........................................................................................................691
Tool Bar - Results........................................................................................692
Results Visualization Settings.......................................................................693
List of Variables..........................................................................................693
List of Variables of Dimensioning...................................................................694
Reduction of Bending Moments.....................................................................695
Values...............................................................................................................697
Distributions.......................................................................................................698
Coordinate System (Sign Convention)...................................................................699
Program Beam.......................................................................................................701
Project..............................................................................................................702
Settings.............................................................................................................703
Winkler-Pasternak Parameters C1 a C2..............................................................704
Calculation of Winkler-Pasternak Parameters C1 and C2 from Geological Profile......704
Calculation of Winkler-Pasternak Constants from Deformation Parameters of Soils. .704
Geometry..........................................................................................................705
Subsoil..............................................................................................................705
Interface............................................................................................................706
Location.............................................................................................................707
Soils..................................................................................................................708
Basic Data.....................................................................................................709
Assign...............................................................................................................710
-18-
Water................................................................................................................711
Supports............................................................................................................712
Load Cases........................................................................................................713
Load Case parameters.....................................................................................714
Load..................................................................................................................716
Combination ULS................................................................................................717
Parameters of ULS Combinations......................................................................718
Generator of Combinations...............................................................................719
Combination SLS................................................................................................722
Parameters of SLS Combinations.......................................................................723
Generator of Combinations...............................................................................724
Analysis.............................................................................................................724
Program Settlement................................................................................................725
Project..............................................................................................................726
Settings.............................................................................................................726
Interface............................................................................................................727
Embankment......................................................................................................728
Earth Cut...........................................................................................................729
Incompressible Subsoil........................................................................................730
Soils..................................................................................................................731
Basic Data.....................................................................................................732
Assign...............................................................................................................733
Surcharge..........................................................................................................734
Water................................................................................................................735
Stage Settings....................................................................................................736
Analysis.............................................................................................................737
Consolidation Parameters.................................................................................738
Program Ground Loss..............................................................................................740
Project..............................................................................................................741
Settings.............................................................................................................741
Buildings............................................................................................................742
Profile...............................................................................................................743
Soils..................................................................................................................743
Assign...............................................................................................................744
Geometry..........................................................................................................745
Measurement.....................................................................................................746
Stage settings....................................................................................................747
-19-
Analysis.............................................................................................................748
Damage.............................................................................................................749
Program Terrain......................................................................................................751
Project..............................................................................................................751
Basic Data.........................................................................................................752
Global Coordinate System................................................................................752
Soils..................................................................................................................753
Assign...............................................................................................................754
Points................................................................................................................755
Import of Points..............................................................................................756
Automatic Calculation of Height........................................................................757
Edges................................................................................................................759
Water................................................................................................................760
Boreholes..........................................................................................................761
Earth Grading.....................................................................................................763
Construction site.................................................................................................765
Generate...........................................................................................................766
Modeling Terrain on Edges................................................................................767
Point Constructions.............................................................................................768
Line Constructions..............................................................................................770
Launching..........................................................................................................771
Program Stratigraphy..............................................................................................773
Project..............................................................................................................773
Settings.............................................................................................................774
2D Modelling..................................................................................................775
Coordinate systems.........................................................................................776
Templates..........................................................................................................777
Creation of User-defined Template....................................................................779
Input data......................................................................................................780
Print of Output Protocols..................................................................................783
Construction Site................................................................................................785
Active edges...................................................................................................786
Terrain Points.....................................................................................................787
Terrain Edges.....................................................................................................788
Field Tests (Exploration Points).............................................................................789
Additional Data of Field Tests............................................................................790
Import of Tests...............................................................................................791
-20-
Borehole........................................................................................................792
Geological Documentation................................................................................794
Soils..................................................................................................................795
Soil Profiles........................................................................................................796
Relation between Field Test, Soil Profile and Borehole..........................................797
Creation of Soil Profile from Borehole................................................................798
Creation of Soil Profile from CPT.......................................................................798
Creation of Soil Profile using Classification of Soils..........................................799
Creation of Test Profile from SPT, DPT, PMT........................................................801
Geological Sections.............................................................................................801
Drawing of Geological Section...........................................................................802
Geological Model.................................................................................................804
Creation of a Geological Model..........................................................................805
Process of Creation of Geological Model.........................................................805
Creation of a Terrain Model...........................................................................806
Geological Model with Horizontal Layers.........................................................808
Geological Model with Layers Following the Terrain..........................................811
Construction Site Edges - Active Edge...........................................................813
Editation of Soil Layers................................................................................816
Creation of Soil Lens...................................................................................817
Creation of a New Layer into the Model..........................................................821
Modelling of Fault........................................................................................824
Borehole Status..............................................................................................832
Master Borehole..............................................................................................834
Edit Borehole..................................................................................................836
Add Borehole..................................................................................................838
Compatibility of Boreholes................................................................................840
Definition of Interface in Borehole.....................................................................842
Order of layer generation.................................................................................845
Output Profiles...................................................................................................846
Output Sections..................................................................................................847
Copying data from the Stratigraphy program to other GEO5 programs...................848
Program FEM..........................................................................................................850
Topology............................................................................................................851
Coordinate Systems........................................................................................851
Project...........................................................................................................854
Settings.........................................................................................................854
-21-
Stability Analysis.........................................................................................855
Plane Strain Analysis...................................................................................855
Axial Symmetry..........................................................................................856
Tunnels......................................................................................................860
Consolidation..............................................................................................860
Principle of Numerical Solution of Consolidation..........................................861
Ko Procedure..............................................................................................864
Water Flow.................................................................................................865
Flow Analysis..........................................................................................866
Interface........................................................................................................867
Soils..............................................................................................................868
Materials Models.........................................................................................869
Linear Models.........................................................................................870
Elastic Model......................................................................................871
Modified Elastic Model..........................................................................871
Nonlinear Models....................................................................................872
Mohr-Coulomb (MC)............................................................................874
Mohr-Coulomb Model with Tension Cut Off..........................................874
Modified Mohr-Coulomb (MCM).............................................................875
Drucker-Prager...................................................................................875
Softening and Hardening......................................................................876
Angle of Dilation.................................................................................877
Influence of Material Model...................................................................878
Modified Cam-Clay Model (MCC)...........................................................879
Generalized Cam-Clay Model (GCC).......................................................881
Numerical Implementation of MCC and GCC Models.................................883
Hypoplastic Clay.................................................................................885
Variable Stiffness....................................................................................892
Material Models in Flow Analysis................................................................893
Coefficient of Permeability........................................................................897
Basic Data..................................................................................................898
Geostatic Stress, Uplift Pressure...................................................................900
Rigid Bodies...................................................................................................901
Assign...........................................................................................................903
Contact Types.................................................................................................903
Contact Elements........................................................................................905
Lining............................................................................................................906
-22-
Module Lining - FEM....................................................................................907

Free Points.............................................................................................908
Free Lines..............................................................................................909
Line Refinement......................................................................................910
Settings.................................................................................................911
Generator of Lining Shape............................................................................912
Generator of Anchored Regions.....................................................................913
Stages of Construction.................................................................................914
Free Points.....................................................................................................915
Free Lines......................................................................................................918
Point Refinement............................................................................................919
Line Refinement..............................................................................................920
Free Refinements............................................................................................921
Mesh Generation.............................................................................................922
Mesh Generator Warning..............................................................................924
Adjusting Original Geometry.........................................................................926
Standard Boundary Conditions......................................................................927
Construction Stages............................................................................................928
Excavation.....................................................................................................929
Activation......................................................................................................930
Activity of Regions Below GWT......................................................................932
Assign...........................................................................................................933
Lining............................................................................................................934
Beams.......................................................................................................935
Anchors.....................................................................................................936
Beam Loads...............................................................................................937
Generator of Anchors on Free Line................................................................938
Beams...........................................................................................................939
Types of Cross-Section.................................................................................941
Beam End-Points Connection........................................................................942
Degradation and Strengthening of Beams......................................................943
Catalog of Profiles.......................................................................................944
Cross-Section Editor....................................................................................945
Catalog of Materials.....................................................................................945
Editor of Materials.......................................................................................946
Contacts........................................................................................................947
Contacts and Beams (Water Flow).....................................................................948
-23-
Point Supports................................................................................................949
Point Flow......................................................................................................950
Line Supports.................................................................................................950
Line Flow.......................................................................................................951
Anchors.........................................................................................................952
Anchor End Points.......................................................................................954
Anchors in the Stability Analysis...................................................................955
Props.............................................................................................................956
Reinforcements...............................................................................................957
Anchoring Geo-Reinforcements.....................................................................959
Axial Stiffness of Geosynthetics....................................................................961
Surcharge......................................................................................................962
Elastic Regions...............................................................................................964
Beam Loads...................................................................................................965
Water............................................................................................................967
Analysis.........................................................................................................968
Transient Flow Analysis................................................................................969
Recommended Modeling Procedure...............................................................974
Loss of Convergence of Nonlinear Analysis.....................................................975
Settings and Analysis Description..................................................................976
Solution Method......................................................................................977
Change of Stiffness Matrix........................................................................977
Initial Solution Step.................................................................................979
Maximum Number of Iterations.................................................................979
Convergence Criterion.............................................................................979
Setting Newton-Raphson Method..............................................................979
Setting Arc-Length Method.......................................................................980
Setting Arc Length..............................................................................981
Automatic Arc Length Control...............................................................983
Line Search Method.................................................................................983
Plasticity................................................................................................984
Course of Analysis.......................................................................................985
Results......................................................................................................986
Results Tool Bar......................................................................................987
Drawing Settings : Analysis......................................................................987
List of Variables......................................................................................988
Monitors........................................................................................................990
-24-
Monitors Settings........................................................................................990
Graphs..........................................................................................................991
Stability.........................................................................................................992
Setting Basic Parameters of Slope Stability Analysis........................................994
Setting Driving Parameters of Relaxation of Reduction Factor............................995
No Reduction Regions..................................................................................996
Earthquake................................................................................................996
Outputs.....................................................................................................................997
Adding Pictures.......................................................................................................998
List of Pictures......................................................................................................1000
Print and Export Document....................................................................................1002
Print and Export Desktop View................................................................................1004
Control bar - Print and Export.................................................................................1006
Page Setup...........................................................................................................1008
Setting Header and Footer.....................................................................................1008
Page Numbering...................................................................................................1009
About the Company...............................................................................................1010
Theory.....................................................................................................................1012
Stress in a Soil Body.............................................................................................1012
Geostatic Stress, Uplift Pressure.........................................................................1012
Effective/Total Stress in a Soil.............................................................................1013
Increment of Earth Pressure due to Surcharge......................................................1015
Increment of Earth Pressure under Footing...........................................................1016
Earth Pressures....................................................................................................1017
Sign Convention................................................................................................1017
Active Earth Pressure.........................................................................................1018
Active Earth Pressure - The Mazindrani Theory (Rankine)...................................1019
Active Earth Pressure - The Coulomb Theory....................................................1020
Active Earth Pressure - The Müller-Breslau Theory.............................................1021
Active Earth Pressure - The Caquot Theory.......................................................1022
Active Earth Pressure - The Absi Theory...........................................................1023
Active Earth Pressure - Total Stress.................................................................1024
Passive Earth Pressure.......................................................................................1024
Passive Earth Pressure - The Rankine and Mazindrani Theory..............................1025
Passive Earth Pressure - The Coulomb Theory...................................................1026
Passive Earth Pressure - The Caquot - Kérisel Theory........................................1027
Coefficient of Passive Earth Pressure Kp.......................................................1027
-25-
Reduction Coefficient of Passive Earth Pressure.............................................1030

Passive Earth Pressure - The Müller - Breslau Theory.........................................1031
Passive Earth Pressure - The Absi Theory.........................................................1032
Passive Earth Pressure - The Sokolovski Theory................................................1032
Passive Earth Pressure - Total Stress...............................................................1035
Earth Pressure at Rest.......................................................................................1035
Earth Pressure at Rest for an Inclined Ground Surface or Inclined Back of the Structure
..................................................................................................................1036
Increased Active Pressure..................................................................................1037
Distribution of Earth Pressures in case of Broken Terrain........................................1037
Influence of Water.............................................................................................1038
Without Ground Water, Water is not Considered................................................1039
Hydrostatic Pressure, Ground Water behind the Structure..................................1039
Hydrostatic Pressure, Ground Water behind and in front of the Structure.............1040
Hydrodynamic Pressure.................................................................................1041
Special Distribution of Water Pressure..............................................................1042
Uplift Pressure in Footing Bottom....................................................................1043
Influence of Tensile Cracks.............................................................................1044
Minimum Dimensioning Pressure.........................................................................1044
Earth - Pressure Wedge.....................................................................................1045
Surcharge........................................................................................................1047
Surface Surcharge - Active Earth Pressure........................................................1047
Strip Surcharge - Active Earth Pressure...........................................................1048
Trapezoidal Surcharge - Active Earth Pressure..................................................1049
Concentrated Surcharge - Active Earth Pressure...............................................1049
Line Surcharge - Active Earth Pressure............................................................1050
Increment of earth pressure due to horizontal surcharge ...................................1052
Surcharge in Non-Homogeneous Soil...............................................................1053
Surface Surcharge - Earth Pressure at Rest......................................................1053
Strip Surcharge - Earth Pressure at Rest..........................................................1054
Trapezoidal Surcharge - Earth Pressure at Rest.................................................1055
Concentrated Surcharge - Earth Pressure at Rest..............................................1055
Surface Surcharge - Passive Earth Pressure......................................................1056
Influence of Earthquake.....................................................................................1056
Mononobe-Okabe Theory...............................................................................1059
Arrango Theory.............................................................................................1060
NCMA - SRW................................................................................................1061
-26-
Influence of Water.........................................................................................1062
EN 1998-5 Seismic Effects..............................................................................1063
Forces from Earth Pressure at Rest Acting on the Rigid Structure........................1064
Influence of Earthquake according to Chinese Standards....................................1064
Influence of Earthquake according to JTJ 004-89...........................................1064
Influence of Earthquake according to JTS 146-2012.......................................1066
Influence of Earthquake according to SL 203-97...........................................1068
Seismic Fortification Intensity according to Chinese Standards........................1069
Water Influence according to Chinese Standards...........................................1070
Importance Coefficient for Seismic Design Ci................................................1072
Adjusting Coefficient for Seismic Bearing Capacity ξa.....................................1073
Influence of Friction between Soil and back of the Structure...................................1074
Table of Ultimate Friction Factors for Dissimilar Materials....................................1075
Adhesion of Soil............................................................................................1076
Parameters of Rocks..........................................................................................1077
Analysis of Walls...................................................................................................1078
Evaluation of Forces in the Footing Bottom...........................................................1079
Verification - Limit States...................................................................................1079
Verification - Safety Factor.................................................................................1080
Internal Sliding.................................................................................................1081
Reinforcements.................................................................................................1082
Base Anchorage................................................................................................1083
Accounting for Wall Jump...................................................................................1085
Bearing Capacity of Foundation Soil.....................................................................1086
Wall Dimensioning.............................................................................................1087
Counterfort/Buttress Wall Dimensioning...............................................................1089
Internal Stability of a Gabion..............................................................................1090
Internal Stability of a Gabion Wall - Safety Factor..............................................1093
Internal stability of a Gabion Wall - Limit States................................................1094
Calculating Abutment Forces..............................................................................1095
Reduced Passive Earth Pressure..........................................................................1096
Nailed Slope.........................................................................................................1097
Analysis of Internal Stability...............................................................................1097
Analysis of Bearing Capacity of the Nails..........................................................1098
Recommended Values of Skin Friction..........................................................1100
Total Bearing Capacity of a Nail.......................................................................1102
Verification - Factor of Safety..........................................................................1103
-27-
Verification - Theory of Limit States.................................................................1104

Nail Force.....................................................................................................1104
Dimensioning of Concrete Cover.........................................................................1105
Excavation Design.................................................................................................1106
Cross-Sections Input.........................................................................................1106
Pile Curtain..................................................................................................1107
Reinforced Concrete Rectangular Wall..............................................................1108
Sheet Pile.....................................................................................................1109
Plastic Sheet Pile (Vinyl)................................................................................1110
Steel I-section..............................................................................................1111
Steel 2xU-profile...........................................................................................1112
User Input of A, I, E, G..................................................................................1113
User Catalog.................................................................................................1115
Automatic Calculation of the Coefficient of Pressure Reduction Below Ditch Bottom
..................................................................................................................1116
Sheeting Design................................................................................................1117
Analysis of Sheet Pile Wall..............................................................................1117
Analysis of Anchored Wall Fixed in Heel............................................................1118
Analysis of Anchored Wall Simply Supported at Heel..........................................1119
Sheeting Check.................................................................................................1120
Anchor Types................................................................................................1122
Prestressed Bar.........................................................................................1124
Strand Anchor...........................................................................................1125
Helical Anchor...........................................................................................1126
Non-Prestressed Bar..................................................................................1128
Deadman.................................................................................................1129
Anchor Strength........................................................................................1131
Pull-out Resistance (Soil)...........................................................................1132
Pull-out Resistance (Grouting)....................................................................1133
Method of Dependent Pressures......................................................................1134
Spring Method According to JGJ 120-2012........................................................1136
Modulus of Subsoil Reaction...........................................................................1136
Modulus of Subsoil Reaction According to Schmitt.........................................1137
Modulus of Subsoil Reaction According to Chadeisson....................................1138
Modulus of Subsoil Reaction According to CUR 166........................................1138
Modulus of Subsoil Reaction Determined from Iteration..................................1139
Modulus of Subsoil Reaction According to Menard..........................................1141
-28-
Modulus of Subsoil Reaction According to NF P 94-282...................................1142

Modulus of Subsoil Reaction Specified by Dilatometric Test (DMT)...................1143
Modulus of Subsoil Reaction According to Chinese standards..........................1144
Nonlinear Modulus of Subsoil Reaction.............................................................1145
Soldier Pile Wall (Braced Sheeting)..................................................................1146
Strengthening of the Soil...............................................................................1147
Internal Stability of Anchors...........................................................................1148
Failure by Heave...........................................................................................1149
Terrain Settlement behind the Shoring Structure...............................................1150
Triangle Method........................................................................................1151
Index Method...........................................................................................1152
Parabolic Method.......................................................................................1152
DG/TJ08-61-2010.....................................................................................1153
Anti-Slide Pile...................................................................................................1155
Determination of Forces Acting on an Anti-Slide Pile..........................................1156
Distribution of Pressures Above the Slip Surface................................................1157
Shaft...................................................................................................................1158
Calculation of Load Acting on a Shaft...................................................................1158
Flexible Shaft Structure..................................................................................1160
Semirigid Shaft Structure...............................................................................1161
Rigid Shaft Structure ....................................................................................1162
Calculation of Internal Forces on a Shaft (Dimensioning)........................................1163
Slope Stability......................................................................................................1164
Soil Body.........................................................................................................1164
Influence of Water.............................................................................................1164
Surcharge........................................................................................................1167
Anchors...........................................................................................................1168
Nails................................................................................................................1168
Reinforcements.................................................................................................1170
Reinforcement End........................................................................................1171
Anti-Slide Piles..................................................................................................1173
Influence of an Earthquake.................................................................................1174
Earthquake Effect - Standard Analysis.............................................................1174
Earthquake Analysis According to GB 50111-2006.............................................1175
Earthquake Analysis According to NB 35047-2015.............................................1176
Earthquake Analysis According to GB 50330-2013.............................................1177
Earthquake Analysis According to JTG B02-2013...............................................1177
-29-
Verification According to EN 1997........................................................................1178

Analysis According to the Theory of Limit States / Safety Factor..............................1179
Polygonal Slip Surface.......................................................................................1179
Sarma.........................................................................................................1181
Spencer.......................................................................................................1183
Janbu..........................................................................................................1185
Morgenstern-Price.........................................................................................1189
Shahunyants................................................................................................1192
ITF Method (Imbalance Thrust Force Method)...................................................1195
Surplus sliding force..................................................................................1199
Optimization of Polygonal Slip Surface.............................................................1199
Changing the Inclination of Dividing Planes......................................................1200
Circular Slip Surface..........................................................................................1200
Fellenius / Petterson......................................................................................1202
Bishop.........................................................................................................1202
Spencer.......................................................................................................1202
Janbu..........................................................................................................1203
Morgenstern-Price.........................................................................................1203
Shahunyants................................................................................................1203
ITF Method (Imbalance Thrust Force Method)...................................................1203
Optimization of Circular Slip Surface................................................................1203
Foliation...........................................................................................................1204
Influence of Tensile Cracks.................................................................................1204
Rock Stability.......................................................................................................1204
Plane Slip Surface.............................................................................................1205
Stepped Slip Surface.....................................................................................1206
Tensile Strength of Rock.............................................................................1207
Undulated Slip Surface...................................................................................1207
Anchorage of Rock Slope................................................................................1208
Surcharge of Rock Slope................................................................................1209
Influence of Water Acting on Slip Surface.........................................................1209
GWT Above Slope Toe................................................................................1210
GWT on Tension Crack...............................................................................1211
GWT on Tension Crack, Max. Tens. Crack......................................................1212
Water Acting Only on Tension Crack.............................................................1214
Own Water Force Acting Only on Slip Surface................................................1214
Own Water Force Behavior.........................................................................1215
-30-
Polygonal Slip Surface.......................................................................................1215

Geometry of Rock Block.................................................................................1216
Anchor Forces, Surcharge...............................................................................1217
Influence of Water.........................................................................................1217
Solution Procedure........................................................................................1219
Cone Friction Concept................................................................................1220
Rock Wedge.....................................................................................................1221
Geometry of Rock Wedge...............................................................................1222
Stereographic Projection............................................................................1223
Influence of Ground Water.............................................................................1225
Resolution of Acting Forces.............................................................................1226
Verification.......................................................................................................1227
Verification According to the Factor of Safety....................................................1227
Verification According to the Theory of Limit States...........................................1227
Rock - Shear Resistance Criteria.........................................................................1228
Mohr - Coulomb............................................................................................1228
Mohr - Coulomb Parameters.......................................................................1228
Hoek - Brown...............................................................................................1229
Parameters Hoek - Brown...........................................................................1230
Calculation of Hoek-Brown Parameters.........................................................1233
Barton - Bandis.............................................................................................1235
Barton - Bandis Parameters........................................................................1235
Unit Weight of Rocks.........................................................................................1238
Influence of Seismic Effects................................................................................1239
MSE Wall..............................................................................................................1241
Internal Stability...............................................................................................1241
Verification - Safety Factor.............................................................................1243
Verification - Limit States...............................................................................1243
Shapes of Slip Surfaces..................................................................................1244
Extensible Reinforcements - Active Earth Pressure............................................1245
Inextensible Reinforcements - Combination of Earth Pressures............................1246
Foundation Bearing Capacity..................................................................................1247
Bearing Capacity on Drained Subsoil....................................................................1248
Analysis of Seismic Bearing Capacity...............................................................1249
Standard Analysis.........................................................................................1250
Bearing Capacity on Undrained Subsoil................................................................1252
-31-
Bearing Capacity of Foundation on Bedrock..........................................................1253

Solution According to CSN 73 1001.................................................................1254
Analysis According to EC 7-1 (EN 1997-1:2003)................................................1254
Parameters to Compute Foundation Bearing Capacity........................................1255
Horizontal Bearing Capacity of Foundation............................................................1258
Homogenization of Layered Subsoil.....................................................................1259
Effective Area...................................................................................................1261
Determination of Cross-Sectional Internal Forces..................................................1262
Verification of Foundation Eccentricity..................................................................1263
Analysis of Uplift...............................................................................................1264
Standard Approach........................................................................................1264
Cone Method................................................................................................1265
DL/T 5219 - 2005..........................................................................................1266
Pile Analysis.........................................................................................................1268
Vertical Bearing Capacity....................................................................................1268
Analytical Solution.........................................................................................1268
NAVFAC DM 7.2........................................................................................1269
Pile Base Resistance..............................................................................1269
Pile Shaft Resistance..............................................................................1269
Bearing Capacity Factor Nq.....................................................................1270
Coefficient of Lateral Earth Pressure K.....................................................1270
Friction Angle on Pile Skin......................................................................1271
Adhesion Coefficient..............................................................................1272
Critical Depth........................................................................................1272
Tomlinson.................................................................................................1273
Adhesion Coefficient..............................................................................1274
Effective Length....................................................................................1274
Effective Stress Method..............................................................................1275
Coefficients of Pile Bearing Capacity........................................................1275
CSN 73 1002............................................................................................1276
Verification...............................................................................................1277
Verification According to the Theory of Limit States...................................1277
Design Coefficients............................................................................1278
Verification According to the Safety Factors..............................................1278
Vertical Bearing Capacity - Spring Method........................................................1279
Load-Settlement Curve..............................................................................1280
-32-
Shear Strength of Skin...............................................................................1280

Coefficient of Increase of Limit Skin Friction.................................................1281
Depth of Deformation Zone........................................................................1281
Incompressible Subsoil..............................................................................1284
Negative Skin Friction................................................................................1284
Influence of Technology.............................................................................1285
Shear Resistance on Skin...........................................................................1285
Stiffness of Subsoil Below the Pile Heel........................................................1287
Distributions of Forces Acting on a Pile.........................................................1287
Dependence of Shear on Deformation..........................................................1288
Pile Settlement.................................................................................................1288
Nonlinear Theory (Masopust)..........................................................................1288
Approach According to Masopust.................................................................1289
Regression Coefficients..............................................................................1291
Coefficients m1, m2...................................................................................1292
Secant Modulus of Soil Es...........................................................................1293
Settlement-Influence Factor Is....................................................................1295
Linear Theory (Poulos)...................................................................................1296
Settlement of Piles According to Poulos........................................................1296
Secant Modulus of Soil Es...........................................................................1298
Correction Factor for Soil Poisson's Ratio Rv..................................................1299
Correction Factor for Stiffness of Bearing Stratum Rb.....................................1300
Base-Load Proportion for Incompressible Pile BETAo......................................1301
Correction Factor for Pile Compressibility Ck.................................................1302
Correction Factor for Poisson's Ratio of Soil Cv..............................................1303
Correction Factor for Stiffness of Bearing Stratum Cb.....................................1304
Pile-Stiffness Factor K................................................................................1305
Basic Settlement-Influence Factor Io...............................................................1305
Correction Factor for Pile Compressibility Rk.....................................................1306
Correction Factor for Finite Depth of Layer on a Rigid Base Rh............................1307
Horizontal Bearing Capacity - Elastic Subsoil (p-y Method).....................................1308
Constant Distribution of Modulus of Subsoil Reaction.........................................1309
Linear Modulus of Subsoil Reaction..................................................................1309
Modulus of Subsoil Reaction According to CSN 73 1004......................................1310
Modulus of Subsoil Reaction According to Matlock and Reese..............................1311
Modulus of Subsoil Reaction According to Vesic.................................................1312
Pile Horizontal Bearing Capacity - Brom’s Method .................................................1313
-33-
Pile CPT...............................................................................................................1315
Bearing Capacity...............................................................................................1315
EN 1997-2....................................................................................................1316
NEN 6743.....................................................................................................1317
LCPC (Bustamante).......................................................................................1318
Determination of Equivalent Average Cone Tip Resistance..............................1318
Schmertmann...............................................................................................1319
Determination of Average Cone Tip Resistance..............................................1320
Correlation Coefficient K.............................................................................1321
Negative Skin Friction....................................................................................1322
Shaft Friction Coefficient ALFAs.......................................................................1323
Influence of Overconsolidation (OCR)..............................................................1326
Coefficient of Influence of Pile Shape s.............................................................1327
Coefficient of Influence of Pile Widened Base BETA............................................1327
Coefficient of Reduction of a Pile Base Bearing Capacity ALFA p...........................1328
Pile Group....................................................................................................1329
Calculation of Pile Base Settlement......................................................................1330
Graphs to Calculate Settlement.......................................................................1330
Calculation of Load-Settlement Curve..............................................................1331
Verification.......................................................................................................1332
Verification According to EN 1997-2.................................................................1332
Correlation Coefficients for Evaluating of Bearing Capacity of Piles from CPTs....1333
Verification According to the Safety Factor........................................................1334
Verification According to Limit States...............................................................1334
Spread Footing CPT...............................................................................................1334
Bearing capacity analysis...................................................................................1334
Meyerhof Method (CPT)..................................................................................1335
Schmertmann Method (CPT)...........................................................................1336
Skempton Method (CPT)................................................................................1338
Meyerhof Method (SPT)..................................................................................1340
NF P94-261 (PMT).........................................................................................1342
Settlement analysis...........................................................................................1344
Schmertmann Method (CPT)...........................................................................1345
NAVFAC DM7 Method (SPT)............................................................................1347
NF P94-261 (PMT).........................................................................................1349
Pile Group............................................................................................................1351
Analytical Solution.............................................................................................1351
-34-
Cohesionless Soil (Analysis for Drained Conditions)...........................................1351

Efficiency of a Pile Group............................................................................1351
Cohesive Soil (Analysis for Undrained Conditions).............................................1352
Analysis According to the Safety Factor............................................................1353
Analysis According to the Theory of Limit States...............................................1353
Pile Group Settlement....................................................................................1354
Spring Method..................................................................................................1355
Calculation of Stiffness of Vertical Springs........................................................1357
Micropile..............................................................................................................1357
Verification Based on Safety Factor......................................................................1358
Verification Based on Limit States.......................................................................1358
Verification of the Micropile Tube.........................................................................1359
Coupled Section Bearing Capacity...................................................................1360
Micropile Lifetime......................................................................................1360
Coefficient of the Influence of Corrosion...................................................1360
Bearing Capacity of Cross-Section Loaded by Normal Force............................1361
Bearing Capacity of Cross-Section Loaded by Combination of Bending Moment and
Normal Force............................................................................................1362
Influence of Buckling.................................................................................1363
Internal Stability of Section............................................................................1364
Geometric Method (Euler)..........................................................................1365
Salas Theory.............................................................................................1367
Constant A Reflecting the Type of Support in the Micropile Head..................1367
Coefficient f..........................................................................................1368
Véas-Souche Theory..................................................................................1368
Modulus of Horizontal Reaction of Subsoil.................................................1369
Calculation of the Modulus of Horizontal Reaction of Subsoil Er................1369
Values of the Modulus of Subsoil Reaction Ep............................................1370
Bearing Capacity of the Micropile Root Section......................................................1371
Lizzi Theory..................................................................................................1372
Skin Friction of the Micropile Root................................................................1372
Littlejohn Theory...........................................................................................1374
Zweck Theory...............................................................................................1374
Bowles Theory..............................................................................................1375
Véas Theory.................................................................................................1375
Coefficients of Type of Application of Micropile..............................................1377
Bearing Capacity of the Root in Rock...............................................................1377
-35-
Skin Friction and Bearing Capacity of the Micropile Root in Rock......................1377

Bustamante (SPT, Pressiometer PMT)...............................................................1378
Skin Friction of the Micropile Root - Graphs..................................................1378
Field Testing.........................................................................................................1381
CPT (Cone Penetration Tests)..............................................................................1381
Classification of Soils According to Robertson....................................................1382
Coefficient of Penetrometer (Net Area Ratio).................................................1386
Import CPT...................................................................................................1386
DPT (Dynamic Penetration Test)..........................................................................1387
SPT (Standard Penetration Test).........................................................................1389
PMT (Pressuremeter Test)..................................................................................1391
DMT (Dilatometric Test).....................................................................................1392
Settlement Analysis...............................................................................................1394
Stress in the Footing Bottom..............................................................................1395
Overall Settlement and Rotation of Foundation......................................................1397
Influence of Foundation Depth and Incompressible Subsoil.....................................1397
Influence of Sand-Gravel Cushion........................................................................1398
Analysis Using the Oedometric Modulus...............................................................1399
Analysis Using the Compression Constant............................................................1400
Analysis Using the Compression Index.................................................................1400
Analysis According to NEN (Buismann, Ladd)........................................................1400
Analysis Using the Soft Soil Model.......................................................................1402
Analysis According to the Janbu Theory...............................................................1403
Analysis for Cohesionless Soils........................................................................1403
Analysis for Coarse-Grained Soils....................................................................1403
Analysis for Sands and Silts............................................................................1404
Analysis for Overconsolidated Sands and Silts...................................................1404
Analysis for Cohesive Soils.............................................................................1405
Analysis for Overconsolidated Cohesive Soils....................................................1405
Settlement Analysis Using DMT (Constrained Soil Modulus)....................................1406
Theory of Settlement.........................................................................................1406
Primary Settlement.......................................................................................1408
Secondary Settlement...................................................................................1410
Consolidation Analysis...................................................................................1411
Determination of the Influence Zone Depth..........................................................1413
Theory of Structural Strength.........................................................................1413
Method of Restriction of the Primary Stress Magnitude.......................................1414
-36-
Characteristics of Settlement Analyses.................................................................1415

Compression Index........................................................................................1415
Oedometric Modulus......................................................................................1418
Compression Constant...................................................................................1419
Compression Constant 10...............................................................................1420
Void Ratio....................................................................................................1421
Recompression Index.....................................................................................1422
Janbu Characteristics.....................................................................................1422
Influence of Load History...............................................................................1423
Coefficient m................................................................................................1424
Modified Compression Index...........................................................................1425
Index of Secondary Compression....................................................................1425
Overconsolidation Index of Secondary Compression..........................................1427
Ground Loss.........................................................................................................1427
Analysis of Subsidence Trough............................................................................1427
Volume Loss.................................................................................................1427
Recommended Values of Parameters for Volume Loss Analysis........................1428
Classic Theory..............................................................................................1430
Analysis for Layered Subsoil.......................................................................1431
Shape of Subsidence Trough...........................................................................1433
Coefficient of Calculation of Inflection Point..................................................1433
Subsidence Trough with Several Excavations....................................................1434
Analysis of Subsidence Trough in Depth...........................................................1434
Calculation of Other Variables.........................................................................1435
Analysis of Failure of Buildings............................................................................1435
Tensile Cracks...............................................................................................1436
Gradient Damage..........................................................................................1436
Relative Deflection.........................................................................................1437
Failure of a Section of a Building.....................................................................1437
Concrete Structures..............................................................................................1438
EN 1992-1-1 (EC2) or EN 1992-2........................................................................1439
Materials, Coefficients, Notation......................................................................1439
Standard Values of Coefficients.......................................................................1440
Verification of Rectangular Cross-Section Made of Plain Concrete.........................1442
Verification of Rectangular RC Cross-Section.....................................................1443
Verification of Circular RC Cross-Section...........................................................1445
Verification of Spread Footing for Punching Shear..............................................1447
-37-
Design of Longitudinal Reinforcement for Slabs.................................................1449

Design of Shear Reinforcement for Slabs..........................................................1450
Verification of Crack Width.............................................................................1450
CSN 73 1201 R.................................................................................................1451
CSN 73 6206....................................................................................................1459
PN-B-03264:2002.............................................................................................1460
BS 8110:1997..................................................................................................1468
IS 456.............................................................................................................1475
Verification of Rectangular Cross-Sections Made of Plain Concrete.......................1476
ACI 318-11......................................................................................................1483
-38-

AS 3600 - 2001................................................................................................1490
Verification of Rectangular Cross-Sections Made of Plain Concrete.......................1491
SNiP 52-101-2003.............................................................................................1497
GB 50010-2010................................................................................................1503
NZS 3101-2006................................................................................................1512
-39-

CSA A23.3-14...................................................................................................1521
NBR 6118-2014................................................................................................1529
Steel Cross-Sections Verification.............................................................................1537
EN 1993-1-1 (EC3)............................................................................................1539
CSN 731401.....................................................................................................1540
Verification According to the Safety Factor............................................................1541
Verification According to the Theory of Limit States...............................................1542
GB 50017-2003................................................................................................1543
Timber Cross-Section Verification............................................................................1544
EN 1995-1-1 (EC5)............................................................................................1545
Verification According to the Safety Factor............................................................1546
Verification According to the Theory of Limit States...............................................1547
Masonry Cross-Sections Verification........................................................................1548
AS 3700 - Masonry Wall....................................................................................1548
EN 1996-1-1 - Masonry Wall...............................................................................1549
EN 1996-1-1 - Gravity Wall................................................................................1551
GB 50003-2011 - Gravity Wall...........................................................................1552
Plastic Sheet Pile Verification..................................................................................1554
-40-
Using the Help

The contextual help for all GEO5 programs is displayed in a standard dialog window. Help can
either be lauched by directing through the program menu (items "Help", "Content"), or by
pressing "F1" button anywhere in the program.
Some dialog windows (e.g., "Add new soils") allow opening a corresponding chapter of Help
by pressing the help button " ".
The dialog window contains:
• A tool bar with basic control buttons. The "Print" button opens the print dialog window.
The ("Back/Forward") buttons allow listing through pages, which have been recently
opened. The buttons "Previous/Next" allows listing through pages in the "Tree".
• Input field "Search".
• "Tree", which containst the list of topics - individual items in the tree are opened/closed
by clicking the symbols " "/" " in front of the name.
• Window for displaying the help itself - the window header contains the name of currently
shown page.
The text of each help may contain further cross references to other items. The text of these
references is colored in green.
"Help" dialog window - "Content" tab
Using the Search Function

The "Search" function allows you to find an arbitrary text in the help subjects:
• Write the search texts into the "Search" field.
-41-
• The searching is launching automatically by text input

• The algorithm searches the entered text in each expression in which it is only partially
contained.
• The searched text is highlighted in yellow.
• The list of found pages containing the searched text is displayed in the left part of the
dialog window.
• The buttons " / " allow listing through found pages in the "Tree".
• The searching is terminated and the original help tree is shown using button " ", "Undo"
or clicking on any context link.
Dialog window "Help" - "Search" tab
User Interface
GEO5 programs are standard Windows applications and respect the standard properties of
Windows interface.
User environment is described on pages:
• Application Window
• Control Menu
• Tools and Control Bars
• 3D Visualization
• Drawing Settings
• Frames
-42-
• Tables
• Dialog Windows
Mouse functions are described on pages:

• Active Dimensions and Objects
• Mouse Functions
• Mouse Context Menu
All GEO5 programs support two sets of units (Metric / Imperial).
Clipboard functions are described on pages:

• Copy to Clipboard
• Geoclipboard
Programs allows to set other individual settings for Print parameters, Copy to clipboard
and Input parameters (undo - redo function, snap to grid, horizontal and vertical rulers)
in dialog window "Options".
Application Window
The application is launched in a standard dialog window containing all the managing tools
typical for a Windows environment (minimizing, maximizing and closing the program window).
The window header displays information about currently executed task (file name and location)
- see picture:
Control tools of the application window

Program window consists of control menu, tool and control bars and desktop, which visualizes
the executed task. The bottom part of the desktop displays frames that allows the user to
introduce various input parameters into the task. Location of the individual elements on the
desktop is evident from the following figure:
-43-
Program tools arrangement
Control Menu
Item in the menu can be selected by clicking the left mouse button over it, or alternatively
by using the keyboard by pressing ALT + underlined letter in the selected item menu.
As typical for the Windows environment, some options in the menu can be replaced by buttons
on individual toolbars, or with keyboard shortcuts (existing keyboard shortcut is displayed next
to the item in the menu - for example, Save - CTRL + S).
Some options in the program can only be set using the menu - e.g., "Options".
-44-
Control menu of a GEO5 program
Tool and Control Bars

Each program contains the following tool and control bars:
• (1) File
• (2) Edit
• (3) Template
• (4) Stage
• (5) Visualization
• (6) Modes
• (7) Outputs
-45-
Tool and Control Bar Location on the Desktop
File
Buttons on the tool bar are for working with files. The tool bar contains the following buttons:
Tool bar "File"

Several buttons are divided into two parts and the button can control more functions (right
part with the arrow).
Using the button for more functions

Individual buttons functions are following:
New file • Opens a new file - if there is an existing task opened in
the same window, the program prompts the user to save
unsaved data.
-46-
Open file • Opens an existing file - if there is an existing task opened

in the same window, the program prompts the user to
save unsaved data.
Open recent files • Opens a list of recently edited files.
Save data into file • Saves data of currently opened task - if no name is
assigned to the task, the program opens the "Save as"
dialog window.
Save as • Opens the "Save as" dialog window - currently running
task can be saved under a different name or to a different
location.
Edit
Buttons on the tool bar are used for controls of data in a running task. The tool bar has a
different appereance in 1D and 2D programs. The tool bar contains the following buttons:
Tool bar "Edit" - 1D programs
Tool bar "Edit" - 2D programs

part with the arrow).

Copy data to • Copies the data from the current task to clipboard
clipboard
Paste • Opens a dialog window and pastes selected data from a

different GEO5 program - for example from the "Earth
Pressures" program to "Gravity Wall" program.
Undo • Returns the last performed step (the function is available
only in programs with 2D environment and must be
allowed in "Options").
-47-
Undo (more steps) • Opens a list of steps, that can be undone.
Redo • Restores one returned step (the function is available only

in programs with 2D environment and must be allowed in
"Options").
Redo (more steps) • Opens a list of steps, that can be redone.
Template
Buttons on the tool bar are used to work with DXF templates. The tool bar contains the
following buttons:
Tool bar "Template"

part with the arrow). The button gets this function only after loading the template.

Template • Imports template from a DXF file. If the template is
loaded, turnes on / off its visualization on the desktop.
Edit • Opens a dialog window for template layer editing.
Import from the • Opens a dialog window for import of a new template from
DXF file a DXF file.
Construction Stages
This tool bar manages the construction stages. The following picture shows the location of
individual buttons:
-48-
Tool bar "Stages"

Adds construction stage • adds new construction stage at the end of list
Removes construction • removes the last construction stage from the list
stage
Construction stage 1,2 ... • switches between individual stages of construction
- selection is performed using the left mouse
button
This bar allows to define stages of construction. Construction stages serve to model gradual
building of the construction (essential for programs "Sheeting check", "Settlement",
"FEM"). This function can also be used for parametric studies and in each construction stage
assume different soil assignment or different design coefficients. It is rather advantageous to
model earthquake effects on a structure in a separate stage of construction as it is then
possible to assume different factors of safety or different design coefficients.
For individual types of input (soil assignment, anchors, supports…) there always exists
relationship over construction stages (Heredity).
Some programs show construction stage analysis status using a color stripe.
"Stages" tool bar with analysis status color stripes

The colors have the following meaning:
• green - there is an analysis in the construction stage which IS SATISFACTORY
• red - there is an analysis in the construction stage which IS NOT SATISFACTORY
• grey - there is an analysis in the construction stage which was not performed yet
Visualization
Buttons on the tool bar allow the user to change setting of visualization on the desktop. The
tool bar has different appereance in 2D and 3D mode. The tool bar contains the following
buttons:
-49-
Tool bar "Visualization" - tool bar appereance in 2D and 3D mode

Functions of individual buttons functions are following:
2D view • Applies the 2D visualization mode.
3D view • Applies the 3D visualization mode.
Move displayed area • Moves the current view in an arbitrary direction - to

proceed move mouse in the desired location while keeping
the left mouse button pressed.
Rotates the scene • Rotates the displayed drawing in an arbitrary direction (3D
view) - to move the drawing slide the mouse while
pressing the left mouse button.
Shows marked area • Shows and scales up the marked region - the region is
selected using the left mouse button.
Modify scale • Scales the view such that all objects are visible (pressing
the left mouse button).
Pre-defined 3D view • Sets the predefined 3D view of drawing (3D view).
-50-
2D view • View in the direction of the Z-axis
Perspective view • Sets the perspective view of drawing (3D view).
Axonometric view • Sets the axonometric view of drawing (3D view).
Drawing Settings • The button opens the frame "Drawing Settings". The
parameters for picture drawing can then be changed in the
frame.
Modes
The vertical tool bars let the user select the desired mode of inputting data (Project, Geometry,
Profile etc.) including analysis type and verification. Selection of the mode from this bar
displays in the bottom part of the desktop the corresponding frame for data input.
The tool bar only contains those frames, where the input of data makes sense. This means,
that if a task has more construction stages, the tool bar is complete, however some items are
missing in further construction stages. Data cannot be changed in the missing frames.
Control bar "Frames" for switching between input data modes
Outputs
A standalone tool bar serves to manage pictures and output document.
The "Add picture" button opens the "New picture" dialog window. The next line in the bar
provides the number of stored pictures in the given mode of data input. The "Total" line shows
-51-
the total number of stored pictures for this file. The "Picture list" button opens the list of
pictures.
The two other buttons open the dialog windows "Print and export document" and "Print and
export desktop view".
"Copy picture" buttons saves the current view from the desktop to clipboard.
Control bar "Outputs"
3D Visualization
Programs (1D and 2D) enable 3D visualization on the desktop. 3D visualization is informative
and serves for better orientation in the structure (for example dislocation of objects) and for
results presentations.
3D vizualization is set on the "Visualization" tool bar, which also contains tools for working with
the visualization.
-52-
3D visualization
Drawing Settings
Using the frame "Drawing Settings", it is possible to set the parameters of the visualization
(what is showed on the desktop). In any frame, it is possible to switch to the "Drawing
Settings" mode, just by clicking the the button on the "Vizualization" tool bar.
Button of drawing settings

Individual columns in the window correspond with the individual frames. On the left is always
the settings for the current frame (frame "Water" on the figure). In other columns,
visualization of ther objects is defined. It is possible to set visualization only of the objects,
which are currently viewed.
-53-
Frame "Drawing Settings"

Button "Use everywhere" in the bottom part of each column sets the defined parameters of
visualization to all frames.
Button "Default settings" sets all the parameters to default.
Settings in this frame mainly serves for defining parameters of the visualization on
the desktop - the settings of parameters of drawing for outputs (print) are defined in
the "Add Picture" mode.
The frame can also contain columns with special settings, which are only displayed in several
cases in some programs:
• Vizualization settings of analysis results (1).
• Desktop (2D programs) - defines several special settings (defining range, scale) and are
global settings for all frames (2).
• Global - Height multiplier (2D programs) - enables change of scale in vertical direction ( z)
(3).
• Global - Stretch Drawing (1D programs) - enables change of scale in horizontal direction
(x) (3).
• Global - 3D width - defines the width of the visualized structure in 3D visualization mode
(3).
• Store views (programs Settlement, FEM) (4).
Settings of background colors, styles of lines and fills is defined for all programs in the
"Drawing Styles Administrator".
Frame "Visualization Settings" - special settings

First column in the frame is sometimes divided into several sections (eg. visualization results
settings). In this case, the columns are merged into one in other frames. It is possible to select
-54-
the frame, of which the visualization is to be set using the button in the header of the column.
Frame "Visualization Settings" - merge multiple sections (columns)
Drawing Styles Administrator

Drawing styles administrator enables to globally set the picture styles (colors of displayed
objects, colors of lines, line styles, filling styles, selections colors). The dialog window is
available from the menu (items "Settings", "Drawing style"). The user can define the style
of visualization for pictures on the desktop and in the outputs for all GEO5 programs.
The style of the structure visualization is defined in the combo lists "Desktop" and "Pictures".
Dialog window "Drawing styles administrator"

Program contains three predefined drawing styles - two for desktop visualization (black and
white background) and one for pictures. There is possibility to input user-defined drawing
styles too.
How to create user-defined Drawing style:
Select one of the styles in "Drawing style list".
Press the button "Add" - the dialog window "Add drawing style" will open.
In combo box "Show settings for the program" it is possible to filtr showed modes
according to individual programs or show modes for all GEO5 programs.
In the box "Name" input name of the new setting.
-55-
In the list "Mode" (left part of the window) select the mode (e.g. Applied forces, Backfill,
Base anchorage...), in which you want to change the style of drawing. In the right part of
window input new drawing styles of objects in selected mode (e.g. Water tables, Dimensions,
Gradient...).
The list of affected GEO5 programs is shown in the bottom part of the window.
Example: If we change drawing style (color, line type, thickness) of "Tensile crack" (mode
Water) in the program Cantilever wall, the new settings will be valid for all programs in the
list in the bottom part of dialog window ("Abutment", "Anti-slide pile", "Beam"....). New
settings will be stored by pressing button "OK". This new settings will be added to the
"Drawing style list" and will be available in combo lists "Desktop" and "Pictures" - after
adding new style, it is necessary to select it in corresponcing combo list for visualization on
desktop or print.
Dialog window "Add drawing style"
Frames
Frame is a permanently opened window in the bottom part of the application window. Frames
are changed depending on the selected input data mode of a given task selected from the
control bar "Frames" and using the button on the control bar "Drawing Settings". Frame may
contain the following items: table, combo list, fields for data input (h1, h2….) and command
-56-
buttons.
When selecting data using keyboard, use the "Tab" function key together with cursor arrows
for moving within the selected element (for example combo list). Selection of the checkboxes
is done by the space button. When selecting using the mouse, we use the left mouse button.
The buttons that open dialog windows ("Add", "Add in dialog" and "Add graphically") can
only be controlled by the left mouse button.
If the frame window is not enough wide (or high) so all elements could be visualized, it is
possible to move the frame in vertical or horizontal direction using the arrows.
Frame control elements

Frame can be minimized using the button in the upper left corner. In this case the frame space
is taken by the drawing space. The height of the frame can also be changed by clicking the left
mouse button on the upper frame edge and dragging upwards or downwards. In some cases it
is more advantageous to exploit the frame space for increasing the drawing space area, which
is possible owing to the fact that the program uses the system of active dimensions and active
objects, which means frames doesn't need to be displayed all the time.
To maximise the frame back, pres the button in the left bottom corner of the desktop showing
the frame name. Providing the frame is minimized, e.g. in the mode "Water" it remains hidden
even when switching to other input data modes.
-57-
Frame control elements
Tables
Table is a list of input data (for example a list of surcharges, soils, profile interfac etc.). The
table header contains a list of items (surcharge, name, width, size…).
Adding new items to the table
The form of the table depends on the selected frame. Graphical bonds between the items in
the table and on the desktop are important. Some data (objects) can be only input textually,
others also graphically using the mouse. If the program enables both, textual and graphical
input, both buttons are shown in the table.
If the table does not contain any items yet, or no item is selected in the table, only
buttons "Add", "Add textually" or "Add graphically" are visible above the table. Using these
buttons, new items are added into the table.
Adding a new item into the table
-58-
Table item editing

If a row is selected (highlighted green), buttons "Edit" and "Remove" are activated above the
table. The number of the item is given in the brackets. Using these buttons, individual rows
can be edited.
Selection of items is made by pressing the left mouse button. Clicking the right mouse button
opens the context menu.
Table item editing

If the operation enables it (eg. removal of an item from table), it is possible to edit more
items (rows) at a time. There are two selected rows on the figure below. From the picture, we
can see that the only option in this case is removal of both items from the table, and therefore,
the "Edit" button is not available.
Selection of more items (rows) in a table is done by holding CTRL and clicking the
left mouse button. By holding SHIFT and clicking the left mouse button, all rows above or
below the selected rows are selected.
By clicking outside of the selected table rows, the selection is cancelled.
Editing more table items

The state of selection of rows in the table corresponds with the states of visualization of the
objects on the desktop (and reverse). If a row or multiple rows are selected in the table, the
relevant objects on the desktop are highlighted with the same colour. If the mouse marker is
over one of the objects, the objects is shown bold. After clicking on "Remove", the objects
and table rows are shown red.
-59-
Visualization of selected objects

Marking objects using these colors is implicitly set. This setting, however, can be modified in
the dialog window "Drawing styles administrator".
Dialog Windows
A dialog window is one of the elements that allows to input data into the program. In all GEO5
programs, dialog windows apply to conventional windows management typical for the Windows
environment. A left mouse button is used when selecting objects in the window or alternatively
the "Tab" function key when using the keyboard. When moving inside an object (for example
input field) use the arrow buttons and the "ENTER" key.
A dialog window can contain the following items: table, combo list, fields for inputting data
(number, text) and command buttons. The "OK" command button confirms the selection, while
the "Cancel" button leaves the input mode.
Providing the window contains a certain non-typical control element (or this element has some
other than typical effect) its function is described in the corresponding data input regime.
As an example consider the following picture showing the "Edit surcharge" dialog window
that contains the "OK+ " and "OK+ " buttons. These buttons allow the user to move within
the list of input surcharges and at the same time to confirm changes made in the window.
Pressing this button results in the same action as if closing the window with the "OK" button
and opening it again for the next element in the list.
-60-
Dialog window example
Active Dimensions and Objects

The system of active dimensions and objects allows faster editing of input data.
• Active dimension is a dimension that can be edited directly on the desktop. The value of
active dimension is labeled by a frame (dashed line). Clicking the left mouse button on the
value then changes the frame view (is plotted by a solid line), the cursor starts to blink
and the dimension can be edited. The "Enter" button closes the editing mode. The change
is immediately displayed on the desktop.
• Active object functions in a similar way. Clicking the object (double click) then activates
the editing mode. In this case, however, the values are not edited directly on the desktop,
but rather in the dialog window originally used to create the object. The picture shows an
example of an active object ( surcharge), when clicking on the desktop opens the "Edit
surcharge" dialog window. With active objects, it is also possible to use the context menu
option.
-61-
Example of using active dimensions and active objects
Mouse Functions
As well as other Windows application, GEO5 programs use the mouse for controls.
Utilizatio Mouse Icon Mouse Button Function Description
n
Selection left Active object or table row is selected by clicking the
left mouse button.
Sample of utilization
Multiselec CTRL + left, Arbitrary number of active objects or table rows is
tion SHIFT + left added (or removed) to selection by holding CTRL
and clicking the left mouse button. All rows of a
table below or above the selected row are selected
by holding SHIFT and clicking the left mouse
-62-
button.
Graphical left By holding the left mouse button and dragging the
Selection mouse, a highlighted area is created. Active objects
in the area (even partially selected) are added to
the selection.
Scale Middle (mouse Rotating the mouse wheel zooms in or out leaving
Change wheel) the center of the frame.
Scale Middle (mouse Double clicking the mouse wheel scales the
Change wheel) visualization to the maximum zoom, while all
objects are still visible on the desktop.
Shift Middle (mouse By pressing and holding the middle mouse button
wheel) (wheel), and moving the mouse, we can shift the
view in any direction.
-63-
Rotation Middle (mouse Holding CTRL button and pressing the middle
wheel) mouse button (wheel) will rotate 3D visualization
scene.
Open a left Double clicking the left mouse button on an active
Dialog object or table row opens the relevant dialog
Window window.
Context right Clicking the right mouse button on an active object
Menu or table row opens the context menu.
Mouse Context Menu

Programs have an implemented context menu of the right mouse button. Context Menu opens
by clicking the right mouse button on an object or table row.
-64-
Context menu when editing tables

If a row in a table is selected by the right mouse button, the context menu will appear. The
number in the brackets next to individual items shows the number of the edited object. The
required item in the context menu can be selected by either left or right mouse button.
Context menu when editing tables

Context menu when editing objects
If an object is selected by the right mouse button, the context menu will appear. The number
in the brackets next to individual items shows the number of the edited object (corresponds
with the number of the table item). The required item in the context menu can be selected by
either left or right mouse button.
Context menu when editing objects

Context menu can be also used for assignment of soils.
Context menu - assignment of soils

Alternatively, it is possible to use active dimensions and objects.
-65-
Units - Metric / Imperial

The program allows you to select either metric or imperial units in the frame "Project".
Change of units
Use combo list to select the desired type of units. A prompt message appears requesting to
confirm the selection.
Dialog window to confirm the change of units
Copy to Clipboard
The program allows using the Windows clipboard in two different ways:
• It is possible to copy the current desktop view. The picture can be then inserted into an
arbitrary editor (MS Word, Paintbrush, Adobe Photoshop, etc.). Copying the pictures to
clipboard can either be done using the control menu (items "Outputs", "Copy picture")
or by the button on the control bar "Outputs". The settings of parameters is defined in the
dialog window "Options", tab "Copy to clipboard".
-66-
• It is possible to copy the program input data (soil parameters, profile and interfaces,
surcharges, water impact, terrain, etc.). The copied data can be then pasted into the same
or another GEO5 program as a new project. Copy to clipboard can be either done using
the control menu (items "Edit", "Copy data", "Paste data into new project") or using
the button on the tool bar "Edit".
It is also possible to use a special GeoClipboard™ of the GEO5 software, which enables data
transfer between input modes or construction stages of one or more programs.
GeoClipboard™
GeoClipboard is a special clipboard used in GEO5 software. It allows to copy and paste data
between modes and stages of the same or another program.
Basic characteristics of the GeoClipboard are:
• GeoClipboard can simulteneously contain different data, e.g. copying soils after interfaces
doesn't remove interface data
• data are saved after program exit and computer restart till they are replaced by other data
from same data category
• every computer user has its own GeoClipboard
• during pasting data form GeoClipboard the preview of changes is always shown and the
user can change pasting parameters
GeoClipboard controls are always placed into the relevant frame. It looks like this:
GeoClipboard
GeoClipboard is implemented for the following data:
• project data
• 2D interfaces, including copying the analysed GWT and topology of stages in FEM
• soils and rigid bodies
• 2D assignment
• field tests
Copying and Pasting Project Data

GeoClipboard allows to copy and paste project data.
While copying all enetered non-empty data is copied.
-67-
Pasting of project data is done in the following window:
Pasting of project data from GeoClipboard

In this window it can be specified which project data is pasted ("Paste" column). Pasting is
done and data is changed when the "Paste" button is pressed.
Copying and Pasting 2D Interfaces

GeoClipboard allows to copy and paste 2D interfaces between the following modes:
• Interface
• Embankment and Earth cut
• Water
• Imcompressible Subsoil
It also allows to copy data from FEM program:
• in "Analysis" regime it allows to copy analyzed GWT, especially after water flow analysis
• in "Activity" regime it allows to copy interfaces with respect to active and inactive areas
It is possible to copy the following items:
• current interface
• selected interfaces
• terrain of current stage
• complete 2D profile
Pasting of interfaces
Pasting interfaces from GeoClipboard is the same process as if the user enters interfaces step
by step. The pasting parameters can be entered in the following window:
-68-
Pasting of 2D interfaces from GeoClipboard

In this window it can be specified, which interfaces are pasted ("Paste" column), the order of
pasting (change by mouse click on or by keys Ctrl+Shift+up or down arrow) and
locate it to the desired place. In the same mode there is a possibility to paste only standalone
interface, thereafter the "Paste" column acts like a radio button and the "Order" column is
hidden.
Program always shows preview of changes caused by pasting and the result of pasting is
described in "Note" column. Data are changed when "Paste" button is pressed.
There is a possibility to repeatedly paste one interface with changed location to enter skew-
layered profile.
Pasting of complete 2D profile
This mode allows pasting of complete 2D profile from GeoClipboard to the current 2D profile.
The interfaces to be pasted cannot be specified, only locating to the desired place can be done.
The program shows the preview of the resulting 2D profile. The profile is pasted and the data
is changed when the "Paste" button is pressed.
Pasting of complete 2D profile from GeoClipboard
Copying and Pasting Soils and Rigid Bodies

GeoClipboard allows to copy and paste soils and rigid bodies.
It is possible to copy the following items:
• current soil (rigid bodies)
• selected soils (rigid bodies)
• all soils (rigid bodies)
-69-
Pasting of soils (rigid bodies) is done in the following window:
Pasting of soils from GeoClipboard

In this window it can be specified which soils (rigid bodies) are pasted ("Paste" column). If the
name of the pasted soil (rigid body) is identical to the name of the soil (rigid body) already
contained in the data, the program changes the name to be unique. Pasting is done and the
data is changed when the "Paste" button is pressed.
Copying and Pasting 2D Assignment

GeoClipboard allows to copy and paste assignments.
While copying the surfaces as polygons with assigned soils are copied to the GeoClipboard.
Pasting of assignments is done in the following window:
Pasting of assignments from GeoClipboard

In this window it can be specified which 2D assignments of soils are pasted ("Paste" column).
The location of the pasted surfaces can be changed. The resulting state is available as a
preview, with marked surfaces and information about pasted soil assignments. All surfaces in
-70-
the data completely contained in each pasted surface are affected.

The assigned soils, which are not already found in the data, are added to the list of soils.
Pasting is done and data is changed when the "Paste" button is pressed.
Options
"Options" dialog window allows to set some of the program's special functions (Input, Copy to
clipboard, print view, etc.).
The "Options" dialog window is opened from the control menu (items "Settings",
"Options").
The window contains individual tabs (number and content may vary depending on the
program), which allow to specify corresponding settings.
Dialog window "Options"
Options - Input
The "Input" tab allows setting the "Grid" parameters and parameters of functions "Undo" and
"Redo".
This tab is implemented only in 2D programs (FEM, Slope stability, Settlement, Beam, etc.).
Grid • sets the grid origin and step in the x and z directions
Show grid • shows / hides grid on the desktop
Snap to grid • turns on / off the snap to grid option using the mouse (when
shifting the mouse the cursor jumps over the defined grid - a point
off the grid can be specified by holding the "CTRL" key)
-71-
Horizontal rule • shows / hides horizontal rule with a scale of distances on the
desktop
Vertical rule • shows / hides vertical rule with a scale of distances on the desktop
"Undo and Redo" • turns on / off the possibility of using these functions in the
functions program (on tool bar these buttons are "foggy")
In some modules it is possible to specify if the results are stored with undo data by checking
"Keep results". Storing results with undo can be very time consuming. If the results are not
stored, it is necessary to make the calculation again after pressing "Undo".
"Options" dialog window - tab "Input"
Options - Copy to Clipboard

The "Copy to clipboard" tab allows setting the controlling parameters:
Picture size • This setting defines the picture size. Enter the picture width and the
height is calculated according to the picture contents automatically.
Picture format • This setting defines the picture format (*.EMF, *.WMF, *.BMP), its
resolution, color and orientation. Recommended setting is displayed in
the figure (format: *.EMF, resolution: 600 dpi, color).
Options • This setting defines the picture frame and header. If both options are
checked, the picture contains both the frame and header.
• Option "Soils legend" adds legend of used soils into the picture.
-72-
The "Default" button in the window sets original implicit values.
"Options" dialog window - tab "Copy to clipboard"
Options - Print and Pictures

The "Print and pictures" tab allows setting the picture parameters assumed for "Print and
export desktop view" and "Print and export document" dialog window.
Picture format This setting defines the picture format (*.EMF, *.WMF, *.BMP).
Options to print This setting defines the picture frame and header. If both options are
view checked, the picture contains both the frame and header.
Option "Soils legend" adds legend of used soils into picture. This is valid
only for "Print and export picture".
The "Default" button in the window sets original implicit values.
-73-
"Options" dialog window - tab "Print and pictures"
Common Input
This chapter contains explanations common to more GEO5 programs:
• Input and Edit of Soils
• Interface in 2D Enviroment
• Input of Objects and Data
• Assigning Soils
• Design Coeffiicient
• Running Several Analyses / Verifications
Very important function in all GEO5 programs is possibility to define Construction Stages.
Some GEO5 programs allows to run another GEO5 programs with automatical data transfer.
Basic functions for work with graphical outputs in programs FEM, Settlement are described
on pages:
• Saved Views
-74-
• Setting a Color Range
Following pages describe Data Import:

• DXF Import and Export
• Table Data Import
• Import LandXML
Clipboard functions are described on pages:

• Copy to Clipboard
• Geoclipboard
Input and Edit of Soils

In the "Add new soil" dialog window, we input a name of a soil and parameters that should
be obtained from laboratory measurements or geological survey.
All input fields in the window are mandatory. The only exception is the value of γsat (unit weight
of saturated soil) in the section "Uplift". If this field remains empty, the program automatically
adds the value of γ (unit weight of soil).
The Hint button " " provides information about the theory of analyses linked to individual
values put in.
Color and pattern category of a soil can be set in the combo lists in the right part of the dialog
window.
If no geological survey or laboratory experiments are available, the soil can be specified with
help of the soil database containing approximate values of basic characteristics. The "Classify"
button opens the "Classification of soils" dialog window with values offered to insert into the
window. The "Delete" button allows to remove information about classified soil from the
catalog. Soil parameters that do not appear in the catalog ("Friction angle struc-soil" in the
picture) must be assigned manually in any case. The characteristics of rocks is not listed in the
built database, these parameters must be also defined manually. Approximate parameters of
rocks are presented in the theoretical part of the Help (for solution of earth pressures, for
calculation of rock stability or for analysis of bearing capacity of foundation on bedrock).
The specified soil is inserted into the list of soils by pressing the "Add" button.
-75-
"Add new soils" dialog window
Classification of Soils
Approximate values for a specific soil can be obtained from the catalog of soils. Select the
desired soil in the combo list and specify its consistency or compactness, respectively. The soil
parameters obtained from the catalog appears in the window.
The "Manually" button opens the "Manual classification of soils" dialog window that allows to
classify the soil if its parameters are known, e.g., from laboratory measurements (grading,
moisture, compactness….).
-76-
"Classification of soils" dialog window

Pressing the "OK" button shows recommended values next to corresponding input fields (see
picture) in the "Add new soils" dialog window. Pressing the "OK+Assign" button then
assigns the average values of soil parameters into individual input fields. The "Cancel" button
leaves the window with no action.
Soil classification - recommended range of values
-77-
Soil and Rock Symbols

It is possible to select a pattern category from a combo list for each input soil (patterns of
GEO5 software, full color, gINT patterns or patterns according to the YS 5204 Chinese standard
1) and the color of the pattern. These are displayed in the input profile.
The color you choose in the combo list is used to plot soils or rocks on the desktop and to
pictures, which are either stored in the "Picture list" or printed using "Print and export desktop
view" (to visualize the same (full) colors in pictures, the option "full color" in the "Drawing
Settings" must be set).
The pattern color should be chosen with respect to the desktop background or printout paper,
to be sure it is sufficiently visible.
"Add new soils" dialog window - selection of color and pattern category
Patterns of soils- GEO5
-78-
Patterns of soils - gINT
Patterns of soils - YS 5204 - 2000

Literature:
1
- YS 5204-2000 - Specification for mapping symbol of geotechnical investigation report
Manual Classification of Soils

This dialog window allows to specify the soil parameters, which are then added into the
catague of soils. The "OK" button returns back to the "Classification of soils" dialog window
with the setting and classified soil.
-79-
"Manual classification of soils" dialog window
Interfaces in 2D Environment
The left part of the frame contains a table with a list of interfaces. Above the table are two
basic buttons, which are required for interface input:
Setup Ranges Opens the "World coordinates" dialog window that allows to set the world
dimensions (left and right edge).
Add interface Turns on the mode for inputting a new interface - individual interfaces can be
added in an arbitrary order. Each interface is automatically stored in the list of
interfaces when leaving the input mode.
Interfaces are ordered in the table downwards and it is possible to edit and delete them.
Table with the list of interfaces

Every change made to a given interface can be reverted using the "UNDO and REDO" buttons
on the tool bar.
-80-
It is possible to copy and paste interfaces using GeoClipboard.
Frame "Interface"
Adding Interface
The "Add interface" button starts the mode of inputting points of a new interface. The mouse
mask is changed to an axes cross and the visualization of the frame changes.
Frame "Interface"
By pressing the left mouse button on the desktop, it is possible to input points of the interface.
Waipoints (x, z) of every input point are added into the "New interface points" table.
Alternatively, it is possible to add points in a dialog window by pressing the button "Add point
in dialog". Input point is always rounded to four significant figures (two decimal places) -
input by mouse and keyboard is then completely equivalent.
During the input, it is possible to edit and delete individual points.
Input is terminated by pressing button "OK Add interface" (adds the input interface into the
interface list), or by pressing button "Cancel" (input interface is discarded).
-81-
When inputting, it is possible to use the function of the grid.
Mode of interface points input

When inputting points, it is possible to use templates obtained from DXF import.
The program also allows to introduce vertical interfaces - in such a case the program requests
to insert the point to the left or right. The buttons for confirming the action are colored - the
same color is also used to visualize both input variants on the desktop.
Vertical interfaces
The program also contains an automatic corrector of input interface that determines the
interface end points and then adds the interface to the list of interfaces.
Editing Interface Points

When inputting or editing an interface, it is possible to edit or remove individual points,
graphically and textually in a dialog window.
Editing interface point
Move the mouse cursor on the point, which is to be edited. The area around the point is
-82-
highlighted.
Editing interface points

The point is moved by holding the left mouse button and dragging. By releasing the left mouse
button, the point is changed.

Alternatively, it is possible to press "Edit point" in the table, and change the coordinates in
the dialog window. Editing is terminated by clicking the button "OK".
Editing interface points - result of coordinates change
-83-
Removing interface point

Move the mouse cursor on the point, which is to be deleted. The area around the point is
highlighted. After clicking the right mouse button, the context menu appears. Select the
"Remove point" item. The program highlights the point and the lines which are affected by
deleting the point in red. After confirmation by the user, the program deletes the point and
adjusts the interface.
Removal of interface point - graphically

Alternatively, it is possible to select the point in the table and click on "Remove point".
Further process is identical to the one described earlier.
Removal of interface point - textually
Editing and Removing Interface

Editing Interface
An interface is selected in the table or on the desktop by pressing the left mouse button.
By double-clicking the mouse button on the interface, or by pressing the button , the
interface editing mode is turned on. The interface being edited is highlighted in blue and it is
possible to change its shape.
-84-
Editing Interface
Input is terminated by pressing the button (adds the input interface into the
interface list), or by pressing the button (changes are discarded).
Deleting Interface
In the table list, or on the desktop select an interface. Pressing the right mouse button on the
interface (table row) opens the context menu. After pressing "Remove" the program
highlights the interface and the table row in red. After confirmation by the user, the interface is
removed.
Removing Interface
Alternatively, it is possible to select interface in a table and press "Remove". Further process
is the same as described earlier.
-85-
Removing Interface
After interface edit, automatic interface corrector (as after adding interface), which checks the
interface shape, and corrects the end points if required.
Input Interface Corrector

When the inputting or editing process is completed the program automatically modifies the
input interface to comply with the software requirements, i.e. the end points touch the world
edges or other interfaces. The automatic corrector can be further used to simplify the input
process - for example if only one point is used to specify an interface, the program
automatically creates a horizontal interface containing the defined point.
If two interfaces collide, the corrector creates new end points of the current interface. These
points then also become the points of the interface being touched. All lines of individual
interfaces thus start and end in a point.
In case of an incorrect input (see the picture below) the interface cannot be stored. In this
case the interface must be modified or the inputting process must be stopped using the
"Cancel" button.
Here are some examples of interface corrector functions (correct and incorrect input):
-86-
Correct and incorrect interface shapes
World Coordinates
This dialog window is used to specify the world coordinates (dimensions) for a given task - left
and right edges. The depth from the lowest point of the interface is for most of the programs
auxiliary input - does not have any effect on the analysis itself. In the FEM program,
determination of correct world dimensions is very important and can effect the analysis results
drastically.
The world coordinates can be changed at any time - when increasing dimensions, all input
interfaces are automatically prolonged, when reducing dimensions all points falling off the new
world coordinates are automatically removed.
-87-
"World coordinates" dialog window

Recommended world coordinates for the FEM program are evident from the pictures.
Recommended world coordinates (boundaries) - Spread Footing (Shallow foundations)
Recommended world coordinates (boundaries) - Deep and pile foundations
-88-
Recommended world coordinates (boundaries) - Excavations
Recommended world coordinates (boundaries) - Supporting structures and Walls
Recommended world coordinates (boundaries) - Embankments and Slopes
-89-
Recommended world coordinates (boundaries) - Shallow tunnels saved
Recommended world coordinates (boundaries) - Tunnels with high overburden
Input of Objects and Data

Input data can be entered to the GEO5 programs in several ways. Data is input in frames and
dialog windows. Access to individual frames (input modes) is provided by the "Frames" tool
bar. Apart from direct input in the frames, it is also possible to add data (coordinates of points,
profile depths...) and objects (surcharge, anchors, georeinforcements etc.) using the buttons
"Add", "Add in dialog" and "Add graphically".
Add
Add (Add in dialog)
The button "Add" ("Add in dialog") opens a dialog window, where required data is input (for
example parameters of soils, surcharge, forces etc.). After confirmation, the data are saved
and the item is added into the table.
Visualization of the buttons
-90-
If the frame is used the first time (the table with the list of items is empty), or the
table contains items, but none of those are selected, the programs opens an empty
dialog window, and all the data needs to be input. If there is a selected item in the
table and then the dialog window is opened, it will use the data from the selected
item, which can be further modified and saved as a new item in the table list.
The figure below shows an easy example. The frame was used the first time, all fields in the
dialog window are empty (left picture). The parameters are input, and added into the table.
The table contains selected item "Soil 1". Then, the "Add in dialog" button is used again, and
the dialog window contains pre-defined parameters from "Soil 1". After required revision of
the parameters, it is possible to save the new data as another item of the table list.
Input modes - using existing data
Add Graphically
Add Graphically
The button "Add graphically" turns on the mode of graphical input. The mouse mask changes
to an axes cross, and using the left mouse button, it is possible to add the required object. For
example when adding anchors, by clicking on the desktop, the initial and end point of the
anchor are input. After inputting the second point, the program opens a dialog window. From
now on, the process is the same as describe in the chapter "Add"
-91-
Graphical input mode
Assigning Soils
Three options are available to assign soils into individual profile layers.
Clicking the left mouse button on the tool bar button above the table selects the desired soil
(positioning the mouse cursors in the bar above the soil button displays a bubble hint with the
soil name). The soil is inserted by moving the mouse cursor (the cursor mask changes into a
"hand") first into a specific layer and then by pressing the left mouse button.
The second option requires to open a combo list of a specific interface and then select the
desired soil to be assigned. All changes in the soil assignment are automatically displayed on
the desktop.
Last option is to use the mouse context menu.
-92-
Frame "Assign"
Design Coefficients
The "Analysis" or "Verification" (for verification methodology - Classical way) frames that
display the list of computed forces allow to specify design coefficients. A design coefficient
multiplies the corresponding force. When inputting the coefficient the results are automatically
recomputed and the desktop shows modified forces.
Design coefficients are advantageous for example for:
• Structure testing when a structure response to an increase of force specified directly in the
analysis window can be visualized.
• Excluding several forces from verification or their reduction.
• Specifying design combinations - e.g., different coefficients can be assigned in the sense
of EC to main load variables and side variable loads.
The following combinations can be specified, for example when performing the wall
verification:
Analysis 1 Analysis 2 Analysis 3
• Wall 1.0 1.0 1.0
• Active pressure 1.0 1.0 1.0
• Surcharge 1 1.0 0.5 0.5
• Surcharge 2 0.5 1.0 0.5
• Surcharge 3 0.5 0.5 1.0
-93-
Frame "Verification" - application of design coefficients
Running Several Analyses / Verifications

Most frames that display the analysis results allow to define more than one analysis to be run.
Several analyses within one construction stage are carried out for example for:
• Dimensioning structure in more locations
• Analyses of various slip surfaces
• Verification with various design coefficients
The tool bar in the top part of the frame lets you to manage individual analyses.
Frame "Analysis" - "Running more analyses / verification" tool bar

Add • adds additional analysis onto the tool bar
Remove • removes the currently selected analysis
Analysis • switches between individual analyses

1,2,3 ...
-94-
Frame "Analysis" - "running more analyses / verification"
Program Connection
In some cases, it is possible to launch another program from a currently running program. For
example, the "Cantilever wall" program allows to run the "Slope stability" program to verify
the external stability of a structure, or the "Spread footing" program to verify the bearing
capacity of a footing of a structure.
The new program loads the data of the structure and then it behaves as a standalone program
- closing the program, however, is different. Pressing the "Exit and save" button (on the right
below the tool bars) closes the program and the analysis data are passed to the original
running program. This is not the case if closing the program by pressing the "Exit without
saving" button.
When running it for the first time, the program creates data of a structure and passes on
the structure dimensions, geology, loads, surcharges and other data. The program then
requires you to input some additional data, e.g. the analysis method, analysis setting, slip
surfaces, stages of construction, etc.
When running it again (always necessary if some changes were made in the original
program) the program regenerates the data to be passed on, but keeps the data already
input to this program. For example, when connecting the original program with the "Spread
footing" program the new program keeps the additionally input sand-gravel cushion together
with input soil - the footing dimensions, foundation geometry, and geological profile are,
however, regenerated.
Some actions are not allowed in the new program - e.g. to change the basic setting of the
-95-
project, unit, etc. The generated task, however, can be saved into new data using the "Save
as" button and work with it as with any other independent task.
"Spread footing" runned from "Cantilever wall" program
Saved Views
The programs offer a number of ways of displaying results. A specific option can be selected
from the "Drawing Settings : Analysis" frame. Quite often, it is necessary to go through a
complex and tedious setting of views - for example, if we are interested in the distribution of
internal forces developed in beams using FEM, it is necessary to turn off the color range, draw
only undeformed structure, select a variable to be displayed, select a suitable magnification,
etc.
To simplify the way of managing individual views the programs allows us to store the current
view using the "Saved views" bar, and also to go from one view to another in a relatively
simple way.
The stored view keeps:
• All settings from the frame "Drawing Settings : Analysis".
• Drawn variables
• Color range
• Picture zoom
The view is stored for all stages of construction - if it is not possible in a certain construction
stage to perform such a setting (e.g. in the first construction stage the settlement and
-96-
depression are not defined) the programs displays the closest possible setting and the defined
view is switched to <none>.
Control elements are is shown in the "Analysis" frame in the "Drawing Settings" frame.
"Saved views" - control elements

The following control units are available to manage views:
Select view • Combo list allows for selecting an already
specified and stored view.
Store current view • Opens the "New view" dialog window to store
a new view.
Open view manager • Opens the window "Picture manager" with a list
of views.
Drawing Settings : Analysis

The "Drawing Settings : Analysis" frame provides tools for a lucid way of displaying the
results both on the screen and in the printed document:
• Parameters to draw depression line and influence zone
• Setting surface views and color scale drawing
• Setting and drawing tilted sections
The programs based on the finite element method further allows to set:
• Parameters to draw the finite element mesh
• Parameters to draw construction - deformed / undeformed (note that undeformed
option must be selected when displaying beam internal forces)
• Distribution of internal forces along interfaces and on beam elements
All information specified in this frame (including the setting of current magnification) can be
stored using the "Saved Views" bar.
-97-
Frame "Visualization Settings" - results visualization settings
Setting a Color Range

The color range is an important tool providing a lucid way of visualization of results. The
program offers two predefined types of color ranges - "Uniform" and "Across zero". Both
ranges have a moving minimum and maximum value and predefined colors. The minimum and
maximum values are automatically regenerated whenever the variable or a stage of
construction is changed. The "Uniform" range means that colors are uniformly spread from
the minimum to the maximum value. The "Across zero" range draws the positive values using
warm colors (yellow, red), while cold colors (green, blue) are used to represent negative
values.
The program allows to introduce user-defined ranges with both the fixed minimum and
maximum and the moving minimum and maximum. A user-defined range is specified in
the "Scale color definition" dialog window. The range is always defined for the current unit
(e.g. kPa, m) - when switching the units the program always adjusts the range particular for a
given unit.
Control units of a tool bar "Ranges"

The following control units are available to manage ranges:
Select range • a combo list for selecting an already specified
and stored range
Define color ranges • opens the "Scale color definition" dialog
window to create a user-defined range
Store current range • opens the "New range" dialog window to
-98-
store a new range

Open range manager • opens the window with a list of automatic and
user-defined ranges
Scale Color Definition

The "Scale color definition" dialog window lets you to create a user-defined color scale.
The "Floating minimum and maximum" check box determines the basic type of a scale. If
checked, the minimum and maximum values of a scale are automatically adjusted whenever
the corresponding variable or a construction stage is changed. In such a case it possible to
adjust the following:
• Scale refinement (the minimum number of levels is 4 and the maximum is 100)
• Scale color
• Uniform scale / across zero
The number of scale levels and scale type are specified in the "Scale generation" dialog
window, which opens after pressing the "Generate values" button. It is possible to adjust
both values and colors in the table in the left part of the dialog window. The range values can
be easily changed in the table. If the box in the "Control color" column is checked, it is
possible to choose an arbitrary color from the combo box. The color on intermediate not
checked rows are automatically blended from the input colors in checked rows. The default
values can be recalled anytime after pressing the "Predefined colors" button.
An important property of the program is a definition of ranges with the fixed minimum and
maximum. If the "Floating minimum and maximum" check box is not checked, the color
range is fixed and its minimum and maximum values are input. As oppose to the moving range
it is further possible to specify:
• Range end points (in the "Scale generation" dialog window)
• Colors to display values out of the range
When changing a variable or a construction stage the color range remains still the same,
keeping the same end ranges. The values found outside the range (below the minimum or
above the maximum value) are drawn using colors specified in the right part of the
window. The minimum and maximum range values are input in the "Scale generation"
dialog window. The input minimum and maximum values are linked to the same unit - e.g.
when specifying the rage of 0 - 200 kPa, this range is kept the same for all variables being
specified in kPa - when changing the currently displayed variable to the variable settlement,
the current range is switched to that corresponding to the unit of settlement.
For both the fixed and floating scale it is possible to choose whether the colors in the ranges
are distributed uniformly or across zero. The "Uniform" scale means that colors are
smoothly spread from the minimum to the maximum value of the scale. The "Across zero"
scale draws the colors above the selected value using warm colors (yellow, red), while cold
colors (green, blue) are used to represent the colors below the selected value.
-99-
"Scale color definition" dialog window
DXF Import and Export

2D programs ("Slope stability", "Settlement", "FEM", "Beam") allow to import and export
data in DXF format.
1D programs ("Cantilever wall", "Gabion", "Spread footing", "Pile"…) only allow to export
data in the *.DXF format.
The program main menu (item "File") contains "Import" - "Format DXF to template",
"Format DXF to interface", "Format DXF to GeoClipboard" and "Export" - "Format DXF"
items.
-100-
Menu and tool bar - Export - Import DFX"

Data import proceeds in several steps:
• Loading data into template
• Loading data into interface
• Inputting data using template
• Modifying template during data input
The data input to the program can be exported in DXF format anytime.
Loading Data into Template

Select the "Import", "Format DXF into template" item in the program menu ("File") and
then select the file to be imported. The loaded data is displayed in the dialog window DXF
Import and then is read into the template. The layer selection can be modified anytime.
When importing data, it is possible to adjust the world margins based on the imported data -
this is particularly useful when defining a new task.
Imported data is not transferred directly into the program. Instead, it is read into a template,
which is used to transfer data into program later on. When the data is loaded, the template is
displayed on the desktop and the buttons on a horizontal tool bar, which are used to manage
the template, are made available.
Loading data into a template
-101-
Modifying world margins
Loading Data into Interface

Select the "Import", "Format DXF into interface" item in the program menu ("File") and
then select the file to be imported.
The loaded data is displayed in the dialog window DXF Import, which allows to select individual
layers and specify other parameters. Program automatically adjusts the world margins based
on the loaded data.
After pressing the "OK" button a new file is created and DXF data is loaded into interfaces.
If not all selected layers of the structure are successfully loaded, the program allows to use the
loaded DXF file as a template.
Loading data into an interface
-102-
Loading Data into GeoClipboard

Select the "Import", "Format DXF into GeoClipboard" item in the program menu ("File")
and then select the file to be imported.
The loaded data is displayed in the dialog window DXF Import, which allows to select individual
layers and to specify other parameters.
After pressing the OK button the selected layers of DXF file are converted into interfaces and
copied into GeoClipboard. Data from GeoClipboard can be afterwards pasted into various
places in the program.
Information about succesfull copying into GeoClipboard
Data Input using Templates

Inputting data using a template is essentially the same as standard input of data in the
program. The main difference appears in the possibility of adding a point from a template into
the data being input. During the input the mouse cursor appears as an axial cross - when
approaching the template it turns into a small cross and long axes disappear. When a point is
now input (using the left mouse button) the point from the template is inserted (the input
point has now the same coordinates as the point in the template). To accelerate the input of
individual lines it appears useful to employ the zooming tools. After interfaces are put in, the
procedure can be applied to input other entities. During input it is possible to modify the
template anytime.
-103-
Inputting data using a template
Modification of Template During Data Input

When inputting data, the template can be modified anytime by pressing the "Modify" button
on the "Template DXF" tool bar. This opens a dialog window with individual layers of the
template. For example, when inputting anchors, it is possible to turn off all layers except
anchors - inputting anchors then becomes simple and lucid.
-104-
Turning on/off layers in a template
Display after modifying layers in a template
DXF Export
In the program menu (item "File") select the item "Export", "Format DXF". Next, select the
file name intended for export. Using a dialog window the program then provides information
regarding the performed data export.
Information regarding the performed data export

The exported data can be verified by importing them back into the program.
-105-
Check of exported data
DXF Import
In the dialog window DXF Import the parameters of the DXF import are specified.
In the upper part there is the preview of the imported data.
In the left part the layers to be read can be selected.
In the lower part the unit used when creating the DXF file can be specified. The program
attempts to estimate it but it is always necessary to check whether the unit is specified
correctly.
The structure can also be moved. The program offers the following options:
• do not move - this option reads the data in the same way as they were entered
• automatically from zero - this option moves the structure left bottom corner to the
coordinate system origin
• input - this option allows to define the shift manually
If the program does not allow to input arcs and circles, the way of splitting it into line
segments can be specified.
-106-
Dialog for DXF Import and its parameters
Table Data Import

This tool is made for importing table data (i.e. data organized in columns) into tables in the
program, e.g. load, coordinates, etc. The tool can read the following formats:
• text file separated by delimiters, e.g. commas, semicolumns, tabs, file extension CSV
• generic text file with fixed width of columns, data is organized into columns using
spaces or tabs, usual file extension TXT
• Microsoft Office Excel tables (Office Open XML) - file extension XLSX
• OpenOffice system tables (OpenDocument) - file extension ODS
Import is organized gradually in three steps, which moreover varies according to the loaded
format. At the top of the window brief help is displayed. The program attempts to analyze the
file content and to suggest the best parameters of the transfer. If the user changes some
parameters, the program tries to remember these changes and use them appropriately for
other files.
1st step: select a file, determine the file type and view its contents
In this step the visible parts are (1) Input file and (2) Input file preview.
-107-
1st step
2nd step: splitting the input file into columns
In this step the visible parts are (2) Input file preview, (3) Parameters for input file splitting
into columns and (4) Input file split into columns.
-108-
2nd step
3rd step: Assigning columns to data
In this step the visible parts are (4) Input file split into columns, (5) Assign columns to
imported data and (6) Result of import preview.
-109-
3rd step
After pressing the "OK" button the data is transferred into program.
(1) Input File

In this section the input file and its basic parameters are specified. The file is opened in the
standard way by pressing the "Open file" button. The program analyzes the input file and fills
in the data in this section.
If the text file is imported, the following parameters are determined:
• Encoding - encoding (language) in which the file is written can be changed
• The style of separating columns - it is specified whether the file is separated by special
characters (which are then entered here) or whether the columns have fixed width
• The number of characters in a tab - program replaces the tabs with spaces for further
processing, this parameter can affect how
-110-
Text file
If the spreadsheet file is imported (e.g. Excel), here it is possible to determine which sheet is
imported.
Spreadsheet file
In both cases it is possible to check the result in (2) Input file preview. If everything is OK, go
further by clicking "Next".
(2) Input File Preview

If the text file with delimiters is being imported, commonly used delimiters are highlighted in
the preview .
Text file with delimiters

If the text file with fixed width is being imported, the preview looks like this.
Text file with fixed width

If the spreadsheet file is being imported, the preview contains cell addresses.
-111-
Spreadsheet file
(3) Parameters for Input File Splitting into Columns

The program analyzes the input file and fills this part with the parameters obtained.
If the text file with delimiters is being imported, the following parameters are specified:
Text file with delimiters

• the first and the last row to be loaded is determined, if any row contains a header and
possibly the first and the last row of the header
• determine the column separators by checking the switches of each type, or check "Other"
and add another separator into the input line
• "Treat consecutive delimiters as one" switch determines how the program will handle
immediately following delimiters (even various types of delimiter)
• text qualifiers specify whether the text columns are marked left and right with a character
• comment qualifier specifies the character from which the contents of the file is ignored to
the end of the row
The "Analyse delimiters" button reanalyses the parameters after changing the row range.
If the text file with fixed width is being imported, column count and width of each column is
specified.
Text file with fixed width

• the first and the last row to be loaded is determined, if any row contains a header and
possibly the first and the last row of the header
• the "Add" button inserts a column at the end of the list, the "Remove" button removes
the last column
• in the "Columns in the file" table the width of each column is specified
The "Analyse columns" button reanalyses the parameters after changing the row range.
If the spreadsheet file is being imported, only the first and the last row to be loaded is
determined if a row contains a header and possibly the first and the last row of the header
Spreadsheet file
-112-
In all cases it is possible to check the result in the part (4) Input file split into columns. If
everything is OK, go further by clicking "Next".
(4) Input File Split into Columns

In this part the input file splitted by parameters is displayed. The first header row contains the
letters A and further, the second row specifies the type of data in the column, the third header
row possibly contains the retrieved header from the imported file. The data type can be:
• (ABCDEFG) is a general text
• (123,45) is a number with the decimal point
• (123) is a number without the decimal point
Processed input file
(5) Assign Columns to Imported Data

The program prepares the initial assignment of columns. It is then possible to change the
assignment manually. The system remembers the user changes and uses it preferably in the
same cases.
Assignment of columns is carried out in the following table:
Column assignment
• The table header contains the columns that are required by the program mode to which
the import is done.
• In the first table row the input file column is assigned to be forwarded to the appropriate
column of data. The columns can be used repeatedly, but of course you can only assign a
compatible data type, i.e. you cannot for example use a text column for number.
• In the second table row the multiplier for numbers can be entered, pressing the "Assign"
button shows the window in which it is specified how the values with a Yes/No type and
similar are treated. The current assignments and other information is displayed in the
hint-bubble if the focus is in the appropriate column.
-113-
Value assignment
Hint bubble
In all cases it is possible to check the result in the part (6) Result of import preview. If any
problems arise, an error message is displayed in the window.
If everything is OK, you can complete the import by pressing the "OK" button.
(6) Result of Import Preview

This section shows the data that will be passed into the program.
Result of the import
Import LandXML
Programs "Terrain" and "Stratigraphy" allow you to import data in LandXML format. Select
the "Import", "Format LandXML" item in the program menu ("File") and then select the file
to be imported in the standard way.
-114-
Import LandXML
The loaded data is displayed in the dialog window, which allows to select individual layers to be
loaded as points and interfaces. The same dialog window also allows to modify the unit used
when creating the LandXML file. The structure can also be moved. The program offers the
following options:
• do not move - this option reads data in the same way as they were input
• automatically from zero - this option moves the structure left bottom corner to the
coordinate system origin
• input - this option allows to define the shift manually
Up on import the program automatically adjusts the world margains based on the loaded data.
Supported LandXML elements: Units, Alignments, CgPoints, Parcels, PlanFeatures, Roadways,
Surfaces, Survey.
Not supported LandXML elements: GradeModel, Spiral curves except clothoids.
-115-
Loading data
Heredity - Construction Stage

Construction stages (Tool bar Construction Stages) allow to create the construction step by
step and check all construction stages (this is necessary in programs Sheeting Check,
Settlement, FEM).
For individual input types (soil assignment, anchors, supports…) there always exists
relationship over construction stages.
There are two types:
Defined heredity - (anchors, supports, surcharges…) - these objects always remember the
stage, in which they were created. This is also the stage where these objects can be edited. In
all subsequent stages these objects can be either removed or it is possible to change some of
their properties (post-stressing anchor, change of surcharge magnitude, translating support…).
When defining a new construction stage these objects are automatically carried over to that
stage.
Automatic heredity - (assigning of soils, terrain profile, influence of water, analysis setting…)
- for such types of inputs the properties from the previous stage are carried over to a new one
if created. When changing properties in the current construction stage the program proceeds
as follows:
• If the property in the next stage remains the same as in the previous stage it also receives
the tag new - this change also applies to all subsequent stages.
• If the property in the next stage differs from the one in the previous stage (this means
-116-
that this property has been in the next stage already changed) then this change is not
carried over to subsequent stages.
Changes within stages of construction - automatic heredity
Site view on Google Maps

GEO5 programs allow to show the location of the construction on Google Maps. In the most
GEO5 programs it is possible to define GPS coordinates in the frame "Profile".
In the Czech version of programs local S-JTSK coordinates can be introduced too.
Input of GPS coordinates

By pressing the button "View on map" you can show the location on the Google Maps.
-117-
The site on Google Maps

In the program Stratigraphy it is possible to show the shape of construction site and input
boreholes and field tests. If the coordinate system is S-JTSK, GPS coordinates are calculated
automatically. For another coordinate systems it is neccesary (in the frame Construction
Site) to input one point in both - local coordination system and GPS coordinates.
Input of the point in both coordinate systems
-118-
The construction site with provided tests on Google Maps
Standards and Analysis Methods

GEO5 allows setting of standards and analysis methods centrally for all GEO5 programs.
In all GEO5 programs, these parameters can be specified in the frame "Settings", which
enables the user to:
• select analysis parameters in the Settings list
• store and manage settings in the Settings Administrator
• create and manage new user settings
The program allows to perform the structure verification according to five methodologies:
• Verification according to factor of safety
• Verification according to limit states
• Verification according to EN 1997
• Verification according to LRFD
• Verification according to the Chinese standards
The programs allows to define design situations (for different construction stages), which may
differ by the partial factors.
-119-
Administrator
The Administrator is the main tool for managing individual "Settings" or "Templates". In
particular, it enables the user to:
• determine the visibility of Settings (Templates) in the "Settings list (List of tests
templates)" (it is determined by checking the box in the "Visible" column)
• specify the default Settings (Template) for new data files of the current program (the
"Default" column)
• view basic Settings (Template) which are currently selected (available by pressing the
"View" button)
• add user Settings (Template), (pressing the "Add" button opens "New settings"
dialog window with a copy of the currently selected Settings/Template)
• edit input user Settings (Template) (by pressing the "Edit" button)
• delete user Settings (Template) (by pressing the "Remove" button)
In addition, the Settings Administrator enables exporting and importing Settings (Templates)
stored on the disk.
Visibility and default settings (templates) are switched using the mouse or pressing the Space
key (visibility) or Shift+Space (default).
"Administrator" dialog window
Import and Export of Settings

The selected user settings (template) in the "Administrator (Administrator of tests templates)"
can be saved into a file ("Export") in formats *.gxt (Settings) or *.gxc (Templates) and
subsequently loaded ("Import") on a different computer that has GEO5 programs installed. It
enables sharing analysis settings (or templates) between several users, for example in
companies that share more licenses distributed among several subdivisions.
These formats may be particularly useful when solving various problems with our hotline.
-120-
Export (Import) of the selected "Settings" of analysis parameters
Settings List
The "Settings list (List of tests templates)" dialog window allows to choose the current
"Settings", which will then drive both the calculation and verification analysis of the given task
or "Template" for geological documentation.
This list contains two types of settings (templates):
• basic, which accompanies the software distribution and cannot be edited or deleted
• user, which is defined by the user
The list applies to all GEO5 programs, only some of the Settings can be restricted to a specific
program.
For lucidity, only Settings (Templates), which are checked in the "Settings Administrator" as
visible, are displayed. When running the program the first time, the Settings (Template)
visibility is determined according to the country of destination. Subsequently, the program
remembers the changes made by the user.
To work efficiently with the GEO5 programs, it is for most countries sufficient to create one or
several specific "Settings" or "Templates" Then, for the solution of individual tasks the user
just selects the particular Setting or Template. The analysis methods, values of coefficients
and the verification methodology then do not need to be specified. This results in a lucid and
simpler work with the given program.
-121-
"Settings list" dialog window
Analysis Settings
An analysis setting is a set of data, which is a key for performing various calculations in the
program. These include, in particular:
• methods and theories of the analyses
• verification methodology; the way of proving safety of the structure (factor of safety, limit
states, EN 1997, LRFD, chinese standards)
• actual values of partial factors and degrees of safety for individual design situations
An analysis setting is typically the same for a large number of tasks - owing to this, the
program enables creating a "Settings list". Individual settings can be edited, exported and
imported in the "Settings Administrator".
A setting can be valid for all GEO5 programs or for one selected program only.
• Materials and Standards
• Wall Analysis
• Pressure Analysis
• Stability Analysis
• Settlement
• Spread Footing
• Anchors
• Pile
• Pile CPT
• Micropiles
• Pile Group
-122-
"Edit current settings" dialog window
Materials and Standards

This tab allows to input materials and analysis standards for:
• Concrete structures
• Concrete structures of bridge abutments
• EC 2 coefficients are specified for the analysis of Concrete structures according to EN
1992-1-1. Both default and user-defined values can be adopted.
• Parameter of cross-section determination - this coefficient determines the location of
the critical section for the calculation of bending moment within the wall foundation.
Default value for concrete and steel-reinforced concrete columns is k = 0, i.e. the critical
section is found at an exposed column face. For masonry structures, it is recommended to
choose the value of this coefficient equal to 0,25.
Critical section for the maximum bending moment within the wall foundation
-123-
• Parameter of wall jump k - this parameter determines whether the load-bearing

reinforcement of the wall front jump is verified or not. For jump length x ≤ k*t the
reinforcement verification is not performed. When choosing the option "according to
standard" the wall short jump parameter is automatically back calculated according to
the selected standard for dimensioning of RC structures. When choosing the option "input
parameter" the value of parameter k is input by the user. The parameter of short jump of
wall is considered for the analysis of walls and for the analysis of spread footings.
Scheme for determining the parameter of short jump of wall

• Masonry structures (defined in the "Masonry Wall" program only)
• Steel structures (defined in "Slab", "Sheeting Check" and "Anti-Slide Pile" programs)
• Loads and combinations (defined in "Slab" and "Beam" programs only)
• AASHTO - enables the reduction of friction between the soil-soil interface in the wall
analysis to the value of:
• SNiP - enables inputting design coefficients in the sense of Russian standards SNiP.
"New settings" dialog window - "Materials and standards" tab
Wall Analysis
This tab allows to input parameters for the wall analysis:
• Active earth pressure calculation (Caquot, Coulomb (ČSN 730037), Müller-Breslau (DIN
-124-
4085), Mazindrani (Rankine), Absi).

• Passive earth pressure calculation (Caquot-Kerisel (ČSN 730037), Coulomb, Müller-
Breslau, Sokolovski (DIN 4085), Mazindrani (Rankine), Absi).
• Earthquake analysis (Mononobe-Okabe, Arango, JTJ 004-89, JTS 146-2012, SL 203-97).
• Shape of earth wedge (Calculate as skew, Consider always vertical).
• Base key (The base key is considered as front face resistance; the base key is considered
as inclined footing bottom).
• Allowable eccentricity - for assesment of contact stress at footing bottom is the value
assumed of maximum allowable eccentricity in range of 0.1 to 0.4.
• Internal stability - this way of calculation is adopted in "MSE Wall". Slip surface has a
different shape (straight, broken) according to the selected standard of calculation.
• Hinge Height Concept - represents the way of analysis of precast walls according to
AASHTO, in which the favorably acting gravity force of a part of the structure is reduced.
It is used only in "Redi Rock Wall" program. This program also allows for inputting the
"Coefficient of reduction of first block-base".
• In the case of verification methodology according to the limit states and factor of safety, it
is possible to reduce the parameters of the foundation - soil interface. The coefficient of
reduction of structure - soil interface µ represents the amount of wall resistance against
slip resp. against translation when in contact with the soil.
• When running the verification analysis according to the theory of limit states, the program
enables the reduction of the tangent of the angle of internal friction φ employing the
coefficient γmφ.
• Verification methodology (factor of safety, limit states, analysis according to EN 1997,
analysis according to LRFD, analysis according to the chinese standards).
• Design situations are specified for all verification methodologies.
-125-
"New settings" dialog window - "Wall analysis" tab
Pressure Analysis
This tab allows to input parameters for the analysis of excavations and earth pressures:
• Active earth pressure calculation (Caquot, Coulomb (ČSN 730037), Müller-Breslau (DIN
4085), Mazindrani (Rankine), Absi).
• Passive earth pressure calculation (Caquot-Kerisel (ČSN 730037), Coulomb, Müller-
Breslau, Sokolovski (DIN 4085), Mazindrani (Rankine), Absi).
• Method of calculation (dependent pressures, JGJ 120-2012).
• Earthquake analysis (Mononobe-Okabe, Arango, JTJ 004-89, JTS 146-2012, SL 203-97).
• Modulus of subsoil reaction (standard, input, pressiometer PMT, dilatometer DMT, CUR
166, chinese standards). Standard settings contains recommended international methods
for calculation of modulus of subsoil reaction (for Sheeting Check program in the frame
"Modulus Kh") - other methods described herein are used only in specific countries.
• Shape of earth wedge (Calculate as skew, Consider always vertical).
• Consider reduction of the modulus of subsoil reaction for a braced sheeting - this option is
used only in "Sheeting Check" and "Anti-Slide Pile" programs, when program during
the analysis reduces values of the modulus of subsoil reaction automatically.
• Terrain settlement (not input, triangle method, index method, parabolic method, DG/TJ08-
61-2010) - this option is used only in "Sheeting Check" program.
analysis according to LRFD, analysis according to the chinese standards).
-126-
"New settings" dialog window - "Earth pressures" tab
Stability Analysis
The tab allows to input parameters for stability analysis:
• Earthquake analysis (Standard, GB 50111-2006, NB 35047-2015, GB 50330-2013, JTG
B02-2013)
analysis according to LRFD, analysis according to Chinese standards)
• Design situations are specified for all verification methodologies
• The "Methods of analysis for polygonal slip surface" and "Methods of analysis for
circular slip surface" buttons opens a dialog window that allows to select the analysis
method. The program allows to calculate for the selected slip surface (polygonal, circular)
all analysis methods. However, some of them are very exotic and known only at the
country of their origin. Thus the methods, the user is not interceded in, can be turned off.
Dialog window - "Analysis methods for polygonal slip surface" - selecting the method of
analysis
-127-
"New settings" dialog window - "Stability analyses" tab
Settlement
This tab allows to input parameters for the settlement analysis:
Analysis methods:
• CSN 73 1001 (Analysis using oedometric modulus)
• Analysis using compression coefficient
• Analysis using compression index
• NEN (Buismann, Ladd)
• Soft soil model
• Janbu’s theory
• Analysis using constrained modulus
Restriction of the influence zone:
• based on structural strength
• by percentage of σor (The coefficient to bound the influence zone is input in [%])
"New settings" dialog window - "Settlement" tab
Spread Footing
This tab allows to input parameters for the analysis of bearing capacity of foundation:
Analysis for drained conditions:
-128-
• standard approach
• CSN 73 1001
• PN-81B-03020
• IS:6403-1981
• EC 7-1 (EN 1997-1:2003)
• NCMA
• GB 50007-2002
• SNiP 2.02.01-83
• DS/EN 1997-1 DK NA:2013
Analysis for undrained conditions:
• CSN 73 1001
• IS:6403-1981
• EC 7-1 (EN 1997-1:2003)
• DS/EN 1997-1 DK NA:2013
Analysis of spread footing on rock subsoil:
• CSN 73 1001
• EC 7-1 (EN 1997-1:2003)
Analysis of uplift
• cone method
• DL/T 5219-2005
Allowable eccentricity - for assesment of the eccentricity of foundation is assumed the value
of maximum allowable eccentricity in range of 0.1 to 0.4.
Verification methodology (factor of safety, limit states, analysis according to EN 1997, analysis
according to LRFD, analysis according to Chinese standards).
Design situations are specified for all verification methodologies.
-129-
"New settings" dialog window - "Spread Footing" tab
Anchors
This tab allows to input parameters for the analysis of anchors bearing capacity:
Verification methodology (factor of safety, limit states).
Input safety factors or coefficients of reduction reduce computed bearing capacities of anchor.
"New settings" dialog window - "Anchors" tab
Pile
This tab allows to input parameters for the analysis of pile:
Analysis for drained conditions:
• CSN 73 1002
• Effective stress
• NAVFAC DM 7.2
-130-
Analysis for undrained conditions:

• Tomlinson
• NAVFAC DM 7.2
Load-settlement curve:
• nonlinear (Masopust)
• linear (Poulos)
Horizontal bearing capacity:
• Elastic subsoil (p-y method)
• Broms method
Verification methodology (factor of safety, limit states, analysis according to EN 1997).
"New settings" dialog window - "Pile" tab
Pile CPT
This tab allows to input parameters for the analysis of pile CPT:
Verification methodology (factor of safety, limit states, NEN 6743, EN 1997-2).
Analysis type:
• EN 1997-2
• NEN 6743
• LCPC (Bustamante)
• Schmertmann
-131-
"New settings" dialog window - "Pile CPT" tab
Micropiles
This tab allows to input parameters for the analysis of micropiles:
Calculation of stem bearing capacity:
• geometric method (Euler)
• Salas theory
• Véas-Souche theory
Calculation of root bearing capacity:
• Lizzi theory
• Littlejohn theory
• Bowles theory
• Zweck theory
• Véas theory
• root in the rock
• Bustamante (SPT, Pressiometer PMT)
Verification methodology (factor of safety, limit states).
"New settings" dialog window - "Micropiles" tab
-132-
Pile Group
Theis tab allows to input parameters for the analysis of group of piles:
• Analysis for drained conditions: CSN 73 1002, Effective stress, NAVFAC DM 7.2
• Efficiency of pile group: UFC 3-220-01A, La Barré (CSN 73 1002), Seiler-Keeney, input
efficiency
• Verification methodology (factor of safety, limit states, analysis according to EN 1997).
"New settings" dialog window - "Pile group" tab
Adding New Settings

The program contains a relatively large number of basic Settings applicable to individual
countries and theoretical approaches. Despite that, it is quite probable that most users will
require to modify it and create their own user Settings.
A setting can be valid for all GEO5 programs or for the current program only (this can be
specified in the right upper corner of the dialog window).
Pressing the "Add to administrator" button opens a dialog window, which displays the
current setting of the program:
• if the "Input for the current task" is the current setting, the window is opened in the
regime pertinent to the current program
• if the current setting is selected from the Settings list, a copy of this Setting with the
same validity is opened
After editing and specifying the name of the new Setting, this Setting is saved into the
"Settings Administrator" by pressing the "Add" button so it can be subsequently selected from
the "Settings list".
User-defined Settings is reasonable to create for example:
1) based on countries and standards
• settings for Boguto
• settings for Borito
• settings for pro Borito, bridge structures
-133-
2) based on investor
• settings for highways
• settings for railways
• settings for buildings
3) based on analysis methods
• analysis based on Mazindrani
• analysis based on Coulomb
4) individually
• my way
• Peter’s way
The goal is to create a "Settings list" so the user does not need to care for the way of inputting
various types of analysis and accompanied coefficients. The created settings can be "Exported"
and made available to other users. Providing such Settings have a broader validity the
company FINE will implement them into the pre-defined Settings so that they become
available to all users of the GEO5 software.
Verification Methodology
The program allows to perform the structure verification according to these methodologies:
• Verification according to factor of safety
• Verification according to EN 1997
• Verification according to LRFD
• Verification according to the Chinese standards
Specific calculations (e.g. pressure calculation, determination of bearing capacity of foundation
soil) are the same for all verification methodologies - they differ only in the way of introducing
the design coefficients, combinations and the procedure for verifying the structure safety.
Verification methodology can be selected in dialog window "Settings".
-134-
Selection of verification methodology
Analysis According to the Safety Factor (ASD)

The verification methodology based on the "Safety factor" is historically the oldest and most
widely used approach for structure safety verification. The principal advantage is its simplicity
and lucidity.
In general, the safety is proved using the safety factor:
where: FS - Computed safety factor

Xpas - A variable resisting the failure (resisting force, strength, capacity)
Xact - A variable the causing failure (sliding force, stress)
FSre - Required factor of safety
q
When performing the analysis using the "Safety factor", neither the load nor the soil
parameters are reduced by any of the design coefficients.
Detailed description for individual programs and types of structures can be found in the
following chapters (Walls and retaining structures, Slope Stability, Spread Footing, Pile, Rock
Stability, Micropile, Pile CPT, Pile Group).
-135-
Analysis According to the Theory of Limit States

(LSD)
The verification methodology based on the theory of "Limit states" proves the safety by
comparing a resisting variable (resisting force, strength, bearing capacity) and a variable
causing failure (sliding force, stress).
where: Xpas - A variable resisting the failure (resisting force, strength, capacity)
Xact - A variable causing the failure (sliding force, stress)
Xact is in general determined from the design parameters of soils and load:
• soil parameters are reduced by corresponding coefficients
• load (its action) is increased by corresponding coefficients
Xpas is determined based on the following assumptions:
• soil parameters are reduced by corresponding coefficients
• the calculated structure resistance is reduced by a corresponding coenfficient
In general, it can be stated that the verification based on "Limit states" is more modern and
apt approach in comparing to the "Safety factor". However, it is less lucid.
Modern standars used for verification of structure safety (EN 1997, LRFD) arise from the
concept of limit states. In addition, they introduce various values for the coefficients of partial
factors for favorably and unfavorably acting loads.
Detailed description for individual programs and types of structures can be found in the
following chapters (Walls and retaining structures, Slope Stability, Spread Footing, Pile, Rock
Stability, Micropile, Pile CPT, Pile Group).
Verification According to EN 1997

Designing a structure according to EN 1997-1 essentially follows the analysis of limit states.
Partial factors, adjusting the characteristic values of load, material and resistance, are
introduced into the analysis depending on the selected "Design approach".
Partial factors are identical for all analyses in a given program. However, a "Design situation"
can be selected for individual stages.
The programs can be grouped into several categories based on the selected approach:
• Analysis of walls, supporting structures (Walls, Abutment, Nailed Slope)
• Analysis of sheeting structures (Sheeting Design, Sheeting Check, Earth Pressures)
• Foundation analysis (Spread Footing, Pile)
• Slope stability analysis
GEO5 programs support following National Annexes:
Finland, France, Poland, Germany, Slovakia, Austria, Singapore, Denmark, Belgium,
Netherland, United Kingdom, Greece, Hungary, Bulgaria, Slovenia, Italy, Portugal, Norway.
Desired National Annex can be selected in "Settings List".
-136-
Partial Factors
The "Settings" dialog window allows to input the partial factors for the analysis based on EN
1997.
The "Design approach" combo list allows to select one of the three "Design approaches".
Depending on the selected design approach, the dialog window displays the partial factors
on actions, material or resistance and coefficients of combination for variable load actions.
The section for inputting partial factors on actions also enables to input partial factors reducing
the action of water.
The "Settings administrator" and the "Settings list" contain a large number of pre-defined
settings for individual countries EU - settings EN 1997 according to selected national
annexes (NA). In most countries, only one Design approach is then specified depending on
NAD and used program (type of geotechnical task) - several pre-defined settings are available
only for some countries.
The program enables to input each set of parameters four times - for individual design
situations. The program then adopts the coefficients based on the design situation set in the
frame "Stage settings".
"New settings" dialog window - input of partial factors for the analysis based on EN 1997
Design Approaches
EN 1997-1 introduces three design approaches into the analysis; they differ by the
application of partial factors.
According to EN 1997-1 the partial factors are generally applied to load actions, their impact
on properties of foundation soil M, resistance R or both. The values of partial factors not only
differ by the assumed design approach, but also by the type of the analyzed geotechnical
task (support structures, piles, etc.). The values of partial factors are in general specified by
-137-
the Eurocode in Annexes A; the national choice of values of partial factors specifies NA. The
program automatically displays the required coefficients depending on the selected design
approach or on the selection of other parameters in the setting.
Regarding the fact that individual Design approaches introduce the partial factors into the
analysis in a different way (e.g., partial factors on actions on a structure and the resulting
structure resistance or actions and soil parameters) it is logical that the results attributed to
these design approaches may also considerably differ. If the National Annex does not
recommend a Design approach for a given geotechnical task, it is up to the designer to
select it (and therefore also to evaluate whether the results correspond to the analyzed
situation).
• Design approach 1 - Verification is performed for two sets of coefficients (Combination 1
and Combination 2) used in two separate analyses. Coefficients are applied to load
actions and to material parameters.
• Design approach 2 - Applies partial factors to load actions and material resistance
(bearing capacity).
• Design approach 3 - Applies partial factors to load actions and at the same time to
material (material parameters of soil).
"New settings" dialog window, analysis based on EN1997 - Selection of design approach
Design Approach 1
The verification analysis is performed for two sets of coefficients (Combination 1 and
Combination 2) used in two separate analyses. For combination 1, the partial factors are
applied to load actions only, the remaining coefficients are set equal to 1.0. For
combination 2 the partial factors are applied to material parameters (material
parameters of soil) and to variable load actions, the remain coefficients are set equal to
1.0.
-138-
In programs analyzing walls and performing stability analyses the analysis is carried out for
both combinations automatically and the results are presented for the most severe
situation. Detailed description of the results for both combinations is available in the output
protocol.
This approach is not applicable for the "Sheeting Check" program. The combination, for which
the analysis should be carried out, must be selected in the "Pressure Analysis" dialog windows.
In "Spread Footing" and "Pile" programs, it is neccessary to specify service load even for the
bearing capacity analysis. The design load is adopted with combination 1, the service load
then with combination 2.
Input of partial factors for design approach 1
Design Approach 2
Design approach 2 applies the partial factors to load actions and to material resistance
(bearing capacity).
Design Approach 3
Design approach 3 applies the partial factors to load actions and at the same type to
-139-
material (material parameters of soil).

Contrary to other design approaches, it distinguishes geotechnical loads - State GEO (load
actions caused by soils - e.g. earth pressures, pressures due to surcharge, water action) and
loads applied to structures - State STR (the program considers the self weight of a
structure, input forces acting on the structure, anchors, geo-reinforcements, mesh overhangs).
A different set of coefficients, specified in the "Partial factors" dialog window, is used for each
type of load. Partial factors applied to geotechnical loads are mostly smaller than those applied
to structure loads.
National Annex (NA)

National annex (NA) offers details on the method of application of the Eurocode at a national
level (in individual EU countries) and it was usually issued together with ENV of the given
country.
The National Annex therefore determines the choice of partial factors at a national level and
the application of design approaches for individual geotechnical tasks. Owing to the fact that
the content of NA remains open in some member countries, national annexes are not
implemented into individual programs for all member countries.
Individual national annexes can be selected from the pre-defined settings available in the
settings administrator and settings list.
New settings can be created by users from the existing ones and in that way to define own
National annexes.
Partial Factors on Water

Partial factor on water action adjusts the force magnitude due to water action; the magnitude
of pore pressure respectively.
-140-
Partial factors applied to action of water

The partial factor on water action can be input, because EN 1997 offers several ways how to
account for the influence of water. The two basic approaches are:
• Variant 1 - the coefficient of water action is set to 1.3 or 1.35, respectively (some NA). In
this case the actual ground water table is considered and its influence is multiplied by the
input partial factor.
• Variant 2 - the coefficient of water action is set to 1.0 or in other words, the action of
water is not considered in the analysis. In this case the maximum allowable ground water
table must be considered.
Partial factors on water

Selection of a particular option for the verification remains upon the user.
Providing the user adopts both options, we recommend introducing two settings in the
"Settings administrator", which differ by the magnitude of coefficient γw.
-141-
Settings list - pre-setting for both variants of partial factors on water action
Analysis of Walls (Support Structures)

Analysis based on EN 1997 introduces several partial factors according to selected Design
approach (DA).
Load reduction (DA1, DA2, DA3):
All design approaches consider partial factors reducing load. These are used to multiply all
forces entering the analysis. For actual verification of individual modes of failure the program
determines, whether the force or pressure acts favorably or unfavorably. Depending on
that these actions are then multiplied by the corresponding partial factor. Information
regarding the applied partial factors is stored in the analysis protocol.
Analysis protocol
The frame analysis allows to define "Secondary variable actions" - corresponding partial
factors are then multiplied by the combination coefficients of load.
When analyzing supporting structures, the water actions and so the determination of the
corresponding partial factor for water become very important.
Reduction of material (DA1, DA3):
Soil parameters are automatically reduced by corresponding partial factors.
Reduction of resistance (DA2):
Corresponding magnitudes of resistant forces, moments and bearing capacities are reduced.
When performing analysis according to the Design approach 1, all verifications are carried out
twice for both combinations of load. For a given limit state the highest stressed design is
displayed on the desktop.
-142-
Analysis of Sheeting Structures

approach (DP).
In programs that consider the overall earth pressure in the analysis (Earth Pressures,
Sheeting Design, Sheeting Check) the partial factors are used to multiply individual
components of pressure acting on a structure.
The basic assumption of the analysis is that the active earth pressure acts unfavorably
whereas the passive earth pressure is considered as favorable. Individual pressure
diagrams are therefore multiplied by the corresponding partial factor.
Parameters of soils are automatically reduced by the corresponding partial factors.
Reduction of resistance (DA2): is considered. Partial factor on resistance reduce the
passive earth pressure in front of structure.
In simple words, DA1 - Combination 2, DA2 and DA3 increase the magnitude of active
pressure and reduce the magnitude of passive pressure, while DA1 - combination 1 only
increases the magnitude of active pressure.
This approach may therefore change in some cases the structure behavior and deliver
misleading results. Caution must therefore be exercised when reducing input parameters.
Response of sheeting structure after excavation of soil
Analysis of Foundations (Spread Footing, Piles)

approach (DP).
Load of foundation is taken as a result of analysis of the upper structure.
• load cases are determined according to rules provided by EN 1990:2002
-143-
• combinations of load cases are calculated according to EN 1991

The results of calculated combinations then serve as an input to "Spread footing" and "Pile"
programs.
Either design (bearing capacity analysis, dimensioning of foundation) or service (analysis of
settlement) load is considered. In Design approach 1, the analysis is performed for both the
input design load (combination 1) and input service load (combination 2).
Only the structure self-weigh or the weight of soil above footing is multiplied by the
partial factors in the program. The specified design load must be determined in accord with the
EN 1990 and EN 1991 standards - individual components of load must be multiplied by the
corresponding partial factors - the program does not change the input load any further.
Reduction of load (DA2), for piles (DA1, DA2, DA3):
The program "Pile" assumes partial factors being dependent on the type of pile (bored,
driven, CFA). The window allows to define all partial factors. The analysis then adopts partial
factors depending on the type of pile selected in the frame "Geometry". Verification of the
tensile pile always considers the pile self weight. For the compressive pile the pile self-
weight can be neglected depending on the settings in the frame "Load". The actual verification
analysis is performed according to the theory of limit states.
Vertical and horizontal bearing capacity of foundation is reduced in the "Spread Footing"
program.
Slope Stability Analysis

approach (DP).
Loads acting on a strip are reduced in the analysis by partial factors. Depending on the
inclination of the slip surface the program evaluates whether the gravity force acting on a
given block is favorable or not. If the favorable action of force is greater than the unfavorable
one, the program adopts the favorable coefficient. Based on that the weight of block W is pre-
multiplied by the partial factor for the permanent load.
Action of water is reduced by the partial factor, which multiplies the resulting pore pressure
and forces due to unconfined water above terrain.
-144-
Determining whether the force action is favorable or not

For input surcharges, the program first evaluates whether these act favorably or not, and then
pre-multiplies the overall load by the corresponding partial factor.
Reduction of resistance (DA2):
Resistance on a slip surface is reduced.
WARNING ! Calculation of slope stability according to DA2 or DA1 (comb. 1) using
!! total parameters gives very unrealistic results. These are caused by a
different reduction of the self-weight of massive (favorable and unfavorable). If
adopting the above mentioned approaches we recommend to adjust the
partial factors manually (i.e. increase the partial factor on resistance on the
slip surface and decrease partial factors on load actions).
Load Combinations
Actions of loads that act simultaneously are introduced into the analysis with the help of load
combinations defined in EN 1990 Basis of Structural Design. Most of the loads are
considered as permanent. Surcharges and input forces can be specified as variable load. The
program automatically determines the values of individual partial factors depending on
whether a given load acts in favor or unfavorably.
By default the variable loads are considered as primary. Nevertheless, the "Verification" and
"Dimensioning" frames allow to specify the variable loads as secondary - such a load is then
pre-multiplied by the corresponding coefficient reducing its magnitude. Providing that all loads
are considered in the basic combination as secondary the program prompts a warning and the
verification is not accepted.
Four types of combinations can be specified in the frame "Stage settings":
Persistent and transient design situation:
where: Gk,j -characteristic value of jth permanent load
γG,j -partial factor of jth permanent load
Qk,i -characteristic value of secondary ith variable load
Qk,1 -characteristic value of primary variable load

γQ,i -partial factor of ith variable load
ψ0 -factor for quasi-permanent value of variable load
Accidental design situation:
where: Gk,j - th
characteristic value of j permanent load
-145-
Qk,1 - characteristic value of primary variable load

ψ1,i - factor for frequent value of variable load
ψ2,i - factor for combination value of variable load
Ad - design value of extreme load
Seismic design situation:
where: Gk,j -characteristic value of jth permanent load
Qk,i -characteristic value of secondary jth variable load
ψ2,i -factor for quasi-permanent value of variable load

AEd -design value of seismic load
Load partial factors and combination coefficients are introduced in the "Partial factors"
dialog window.
Input of secondary loads
Analysis According to LRFD

When performing analysis according to LRFD (Load Resistance Design Factor) we follow the
theory of limit states.
The analysis according to LRFD introduces two types of design coefficients:
• coefficients modifying the load magnitude (Load factors)
• coefficients reducing the soil resistance (Resistance factors)
LRFD is implemented in the program to perform:
• Analysis of retaining walls (support structures)
• Analysis of spread foundations
• Slope stability analysis
LRFD introduces new types of design situations (Strength I, Service I, Extreme I).
-146-
LRFD - Design Situations

LRFD introduces the following design situations for the analysis of support structures (retaining
walls), foundations, and slope stability:
• Strength I: : the basic design situation that reduces the structure resistance and the
magnitude of load.
• Service I: this design situation assumes for most cases the partial factors (load,
resistance reduction) equal to 1.0.
• Extreme I: this design situation assumes for most cases the partial factors of resistance
reduction equal to 1.0.
The type of design situation is selected in the "Stage settings" frame. The values of partial
factors (load, resistance reduction) can be modified in the "Settings" frame.
LRFD - Selection of design situation
-147-
Analysis based on LRFD - input of partial factors
LRFD - Analysis of Retaining Walls (Support

Structures)
Analysis according to LRFD introduces two types of design coefficients - coefficients modifying
the load magnitude (Load factors) and coefficients reducing the soil resistance (Resistance
factors).
These coefficients enter the analysis according to the selected design situation.
When evaluating individual cases of failure, the program determines, whether the force or
pressure acts favorably or unfavorably. It is then multiplied by the corresponding partial
factor.
When performing the final verification the overall resistance of the structure against failure is
multiplied by the corresponding resistance factor.
Analysis based on LRFD - input of partial factors for wall analysis
-148-
For support structures (walls), the information about the applied design factors are provided in
the analysis protocol.
Analysis protocol
LRFD - Analysis of Spread Foundations

factors).
Partial factors for load are used to multiply the self weight of spread foundation and the
weight of soil above foundation (overburden) only. Individual components of load must
be multiplied by corresponding partial factors - the input load is not adjusted by the program
in any way.
When performing the final verification, the overall resistance of the structure against failure is
multiplied by the corresponding resistance factor.
-149-
Analysis based on LRFD - input of partial factors for foundations
LRFD - Slope Stability Analysis

factors).
The input loads are verified, whether they act favorably or unfavorably. The surcharge
magnitude is then multiplied by the corresponding partial factor for load (ES or LL,
respectively).
Resistance reduction (Resistance factors):
The overall resistance on slip surface is reduced by the ϕSS partial factor. When evaluating
safety, the following condition on the slip surface must be satisfied:
where: ϕSS - resistance factor on stability

Fpas - resisting (passive) forces acting on slip surface
Fact - active forces acting on slip surface
-150-
Analysis based on LRFD - input of partial factors for stability analyses
Analysis According to Chinese Standards

GEO5 programs allow to perform various analyses based on the methodologies provided by
Chinese standards.
Geotechnical analyses are verified using the safety factor. Neither calculated forces or soil
parameters are reduced by any coefficient.
Dimensioning of steel-reinforced concrete and masonry structures follows the GB
50153-2008 or JTS D30-2004 standards. In this case, each force entering a combinations is
pre-multiplied by the corresponding coefficient.
Another coefficient influencing the dimensioning is the Coefficient of structure importance
(GB 50153-2008, 8.2.2-1) to be specified in the "Settings" frame when performing the
structure verification according to GB 50010-2010.
Earthquake analysis and seismic combination analysis according to GB 50010-2010 further
exploit Seismic coefficients of strength (GB 50011-2010), which increase the calculated
bearing capacity of a cross-section. These coefficients are specified in the "Settings" frame in
the "Materials and standards" tab.
Analysis of sheeting structures follows to JGJ 120-2012 standard (Technical specification for
retaining and protection of building foundation excavations). This is eg. a determination of
modulus of subsoil reaction.
Design Situations
The programs allows to define four design situations, which may differ by the analysis
coefficients. These are:
• Permanent design situation - most common situation and type of verification, adopted
when proving the safe design of a structure for the assumed lifetime.
• Transient design situation - can be used for temporary structures (construction
stages). Typically, lower safety is required in comparison to the permanent design
situation.
-151-
• Accidental design situation - adopted for extraordinary loads (e.g. blast, vehicle
impact, flood, fire, etc.). The values of partial factors are typically equal to one.
• Seismic design situation - applied to the analysis of earthquake. It might seem similar
to the accidental design situation, but for earthquake higher safety is sometimes required.
In some countries, the required safety is even the same as for the permanent design
situation.
LRFD introduces new types of design situations (Strength I, Service I, Extreme I).
Safety coefficients and partial factors are specified in the analysis settings.
The corresponding design situation for a given construction stage is selected in the frame
"Stage settings".
Selection of design situation
Individual Programs
This chapter contains basic description of individual ways of inputting data into the program:
• Earth Pressure
• Cantilever Wall
• Gravity Wall
• Prefab Wall
• Masonry Wall
• Gabion
• Abutment
• Nailed Slope
• Redi-Rock Wall
• Sheeting Design
• Sheeting Check
• Anti-Slide Pile
• Shaft
• Slope Stability
• Rock Stability
-152-
• MSE Wall
• Spread Footing
• Spread Footing CPT
• Pile
• Pile CPT
• Pile Group
• Micropile
• Slab
• Beam
• Settlement
• Ground Loss
• Terrain
• Stratigraphy
• FEM (and modules Consolidation, Water Flow, Tunnel)
Program Earth Pressure

This program computes basic earth pressures (active pressure, passive pressure, and pressure
at rest) acting upon an arbitrary shaped structure.
The help in the program "Earth Pressure" includes the folowing topics:
• Input of data into individual frames:

Project Settings Geometry Profile Soils Assign
Terrain Water Surcharge Earthquake Stage Settings Analysis
• Standards and analysis methods
• Theory for analysis in the program "Earth Pressure":

Stress in Soil Body Earth Pressures
• Outputs
• General information about the work in the User Environment of GEO5 programs
• Common input for all programs
-153-
Project
The frame "Project" is used to input basic project data and to specify overall settings of the
analysis run. The frame contains an input form to introduce the basic data about the analyzed
task, i.e. project information, project description, date, etc. This information is further used in
text and graphical outputs.
The frame also allows user to switch analysis units (metric / imperial). Project data can be
copied within all GEO5 programs using "GeoClipboard".
Frame "Project"
Settings
The frame "Settings" allows to introduce the basic settings of the program, such as standards
and theories of analysis, the way of proving safety of a structure and individual coefficients of
the analysis.
The programs not only contain the pre-defined basic Settings for individual countries, but
also allow the user to create their own user-defined Settings, which can be subsequently
used in all GEO5 programs.
The "Select" button allows to choose an already created setting from the "Settings list".
The "Settings Administrator" button opens the "Administrator" dialog window, which allows
for viewing and modifying individual Setting. It is also possible to identify the visible settings in
the Settings list. Data in the Settings administrator can be also exported and imported.
The "Add to the administrator" button allows to create user-defined Settings, which are
subsequently added to the Settings administrator.
The "Modify" button enables a quick visualization and editing of the current Setting in the
opened program. Modifying any of the parameters changes the title to "Input for the current
task". Individual analyses are then performed with this local setting. Should we consider this
setting as suitable also for other tasks, we add the setting into the "Settings administrator"
by pressing the "Add to the administrator" button.
The "Input for the current task" setting is usually created when importing older data.
Settings of analysis parameters are performed in the "Materials and standards" and the
"Pressure Analysis" tabs.
-154-
Frame "Settings"
Geometry
The "Geometry" frame contains table listing the points of a structure. Adding (editing) points
is performed in the "New point" dialog window.
The existing geometry points can be further edited on the desktop with the help of active
objects - double clicking on a selected point opens a dialog window to edit the point.
The program makes it possible to export the geometry of a structure in the *.DXF format.
Frame "Geometry"
-155-
Profile
The "Profile" frame contains a table with a list of input interfaces. After specifying interfaces it
is possible to edit thicknesses of individual layers with the help of active dimensions.
Adding layer is performed in the "New interface" dialog window. The z-coordinate of interface
measured from the top of a structure (z) or thickness of layer (t) is specified.
In this frame it is also possible to enter optional information about the structure location:
• terrain elevation - an altitude column for the layers is displayed in the table after input
of terrain elevation
• GPS coordinates - it is possible to show a structure on the Google Maps using "View on
map" button after input of coordinates.
The program allows for raising or lowering the top point of a structure in the "Change of
terrain elevation" dialog window so that the whole interface can be translated while keeping
the thicknesses of individual layers. This function is important when copying the profile from
program "Terrain" or "Stratigraphy".
Frame "Profile"
Soils
The "Soils" frame contains a table with a list of input soils. The table also provides information
about currently selected soil displayed in the right part of the frame. If there are more items
(soils) selected in the table, the information about individual soils is ordered consecutively.
Adding a soil is performed in the "Add new soils" dialog window.
The soil characteristics needed in the program are further specified in the following chapters:
"Basic data", "Earth pressure at rest" and "Uplift pressure".
Data of input soils can be copied within all GEO5 programs using "GeoClipboard".
-156-
Frame "Soils"
Basic Data
This part of the window allows to introduce basic parameters of the soils - unit weight, angle
of internal friction and cohesion. The particular values are obtained from geotechnical
survey or from laboratory experiments. If these data are not available, it is possible to exploit
built-in soils database, which contains values of selected characteristics of soils. The
characteristics of rocks are not listed in the built-in database, these parameters must be
defined manually. Approximate parameters of rocks are presented in the theoretical section.
Either effective or total parameters of the angle of internal friction and cohesion are specified
depending on the settings in the "Stress analysis" combo list. Whether to use effective or
total parameters depends primarily on the type of soil and load, structure duration and water
conditions.
For effective stress, it is further needed to specify the angle of internal friction between the soil
and the structure, which depends on the structure material and type of soil. Possible values of
this parameter are listed in the table of recommended values.
For total stress, it is further needed to specify the adhesion of soil to the structure face a.
The associated theory is described in detail in the chapter "Earth pressures".
-157-
Dialog window "Add new soils" - "Basic data"
Assign
The "Assign" frame contains a list of layers of profile and associated soils. The list of soils is
graphically represented using buttons in the bar above the table, or is accessible from a combo
list for each layer of the profile.
The procedure to assign soil into a layer is described in detail herein.
-158-
Frame "Assign"
Terrain
The "Terrain" frame allows, by pressing the button, for specifying the terrain shape. The
selected shape with graphic hint ("Chart of parameters") of input values is displayed in the
left part of the frame. The terrain shape can be edited either in the frame by inserting values
into input fields, or on the desktop with the help of active dimensions.
The last option to choose from is a general shape of a terrain. In this case the frame contains a
table with a list of terrain points. The first point with coordinates [0,0] coincides with the top
point of a structure.
Analysis of earth pressures in case of inclined terrain is described in the theoretical part of the
help "Distribution of earth pressures for broken terrain".
-159-
Frame "Terrain"
Water
The "Water" frame allows, by pressing the button, for selecting the type of water. The selected
type together with a graphic hint ("Chart of parameters") of input values is displayed in the
left part of the frame. Water parameters (h1, h2...) can be edited either in the frame by
inserting values into input fields, or on the desktop with the help of active dimensions.
The last option is a manual input of pore pressure both in front and behind the structure. Two
tabs "In front of structure" and "Behind structure" appear with tables. The table is filled
with values of pore pressure in front, or behind the structure at a depth of "z" (z-axis).
The ground water table can also be specified above the structure or earth profile,
respectively - in such a case the depth of water is input with a negative value.
Analysis of earth pressures with influence of water is described in the theoretical part of the
help, chapter "Influence of water".
The program further allows for specifying a depth of tensile cracks filled with water.
-160-
Frame "Water"
Surcharge
The "Surcharge" frame contains a table with a list of input surcharges. Adding surcharge is
performed in the "New surcharge" dialog window. The input surcharges can be edited on the
desktop with the help of active dimensions or by active objects.
The z-coordinate measured from the top point of a structure is specified (positive direction
downwards) when inputting the surcharge at a certain depth. In case when the surcharge is
found out off the terrain the program prompts an error message before calculation.
Either permanent, variable or accidental surcharge can be specified. Selecting the
particular type of surcharge also renders the corresponding design coefficient to multiply the
resulting load action. Accidental surcharge with favorable effect is not considered in the
analysis.
Analysis of earth pressures due to surcharges is described in the theoretical part of the help,
chapter "Influence of surcharge".
-161-
Frame "Surcharge"
Earthquake
The "Earthquake" frame serves to input earthquake parameters. Directions of input
earthquake effects are displayed on the desktop.
If not provided by measurements the coefficients kh and kv can be calculated following the
approach adopted from EN 1998-5.
Analysis of earth pressures while accounting for earthquake is described in the theoretical part
of the help, chapter "Influence earthquake".
-162-
Frame "Earthquake"
Stage Settings
The frame "Stage settings" serves to input settings valid for a given construction stage.
Selected design situation determines the safety coefficients to be used in the analysis of a
given construction stage.
The frame view depends on the selected verification methodology.
Frame "Stage settings"
-163-
Analysis
The frame "Analysis" shows the analysis results. Several computations can be carried out for
a single task.
The frame appearance is adjusted based on the selected verification methodology:
• Verification according to the factor of safety, or the theory of limit states - the last column
in the table allows for inputting the design coefficients, which multiply the calculated
forces. These forces are displayed on the desktop and are updated for every change of
data and setting in the frame.
• Analysis according to EN 1997 - the last column in the table allows for specifying whether
the load acting on a structure is considered as secondary one. This is explained in more
detail in section "Load combinations". Providing the analysis is carried out according to
"Design approach 1", it is necessary to enter the combination number in the right part of
the window.
• Analysis according to LRFD - in the case the last column is not displayed.
The "Analysis" frame displays the analysis results. The frame serves to select type of
computed earth pressure (active pressure, pressure at rest, passive pressure). Two options
"Create soil wedge" and "Minimum dimensioning pressure" are available when computing the
active earth pressure.
The analysis results are displayed on the desktop and are updated immediately for an arbitrary
change in input data or setting. Visualization of results can be adjusted in the frame "Drawing
Settings".
Frame "Analysis"
-164-
Program Cantilever Wall

This program is used to verify cantilever wall design. It offers a number of wall shapes and
analyzes reinforced concrete cross-sections.
The help in the program "Cantilever Wall" includes the folowing topics:

Project Settings Geometry Material Profile Soils Assign
Foundation Backfill Terrain Water Surcharge Front Face Applied
Resistance Forces
Earthquake Base Stage Verification Bearing Dimensionin Stability
Anchorage Settings Capacity g
• Theory for analysis in the program "Cantilever Wall":

Stress in Soil Earth Pressures Analysis of Walls Analysis of Dimensioning of
Body Foundation Concrete
Bearing Capacity Structures
• Outputs
Project
-165-
Frame "Project"
Settings
the analysis.
Settings of analysis parameters are performed in the "Materials and standards" and "Wall
analysis" tabs.
-166-
Frame "Settings"
Geometry
The "Geometry" frame serves for selecting the wall shape. The buttress or counterfort wall
can be defined for some wall shapes. The selected shape with a graphic hint "Chart of wall
geometry" appears in the left part of the frame. The shape of a wall can be edited either in
the frame by inserting values into input fields, or on the desktop with the help of active
dimensions.
In case the structure is composed of inclined segments it is required to enter the ratio of sides
of an inclined segment 1:x. The straight structure is specified by entering the value zero.
-167-
Frame "Geometry"
Material
The frame "Material" allows to enter material parameters. The input field in the upper part of
the frame serves to specify the structure unit weight.
Two options can be used for setting the parameters of the material:
• The "Catalog" button opens the "Catalog of materials" dialog window, where required
material can be selected.
• The "User defined" button opens the "Editor of material", which allows to input the
specification of material parameters manually by user.
The content of catalogs depends on the selection of relevant standard for the dimensioning of
concrete structures in the "Materials and standards" tab.
-168-
Frame "Material"
-169-
Frame "Material"
Profile
-170-
Frame "Profile"
Soils
-171-
Frame "Soils"
Basic Data
This part of the window serves to introduce basic parameters of soils - unit weight, angle of
internal friction and cohesion. The particular values are obtained from geotechnical survey
or from laboratory experiments. If these data are not available, it is possible to exploit built-in
database of soils, which contains values of selected characteristics of soils. The characteristics
of rocks are not listed in the database built, these parameters must be defined manually.
Approximate parameters of rocks are presented in the theoretical part of the Help herein.
depending on the setting in the "Stress analysis" combo list. Whether to use effective or total
parameters depends primarily on the type of soil, type of load, structure duration and water
conditions.
For effective stress further needs to specify the angle of internal friction between the soil and
structure, which depends on the structure material and the type of soil. Possible values of this
parameter are listed in the table of recommended values.
For total stress further needs to specify the adhesion of soil to the structure face a.
The associated theory is described in detail in chapter "Earth pressures".
-172-
Assign
-173-
Frame "Assign"
Foundation
The "Foundation" frame serves to specify the type of wall foundation. The following types of
wall foundation are available:
• soil from geological profile - the wall is founded on the soil assigned from the
geological profile specified in the "Profile" frame.
• input parameters of contact base-soil - parameters of the contact between footing
bottom and structure are specified. Option "input angle of friction base-soil" requires
inputting the friction angle ψ [°] between foundation and soil. Option "input friction
coefficient" requires specifying the friction coefficient μ [-]. Both options require inputting
the cohesion a [kPa] between foundation (base) and soil.
• strip foundation - strip foundation material is represented either by soil (input in "Soils"
frame), or concrete - requires inputting the unit weight of foundation material γ and
parameters of contact base-soil (friction coefficient f, cohesion c, additional resistance
F).
• pile foundation - the wall can be founded on one row of piles or two rows of piles,
respectively.
Strip foundation and pile foundation can be adopted for the wall foundation only if the type
wall with straight footing bottom without jump is selected in the "Geometry" frame. The
geometry of wall foundation (strip foundation, pile foundation) can be modified either in
the frame by entering specific values into the inputting fields or on the desktop with the help of
active dimensions.
-174-
The input data introduced in this frame influence the actual wall analysis (check for slip) and
further the bearing capacity of foundation soil.
Frame "Foundation"
Backfill
The frame "Backfill" allows selection of backfills behind the structure.
The soil assigned to the backfill is selected in the combo list in the frame (parameters of the
soil are defined in the frame "Soils"). Also, the angle of the backfill is input.
-175-
Frame "Backfill"
Terrain
help, chapter "Distribution of earth pressures for broken terrain".
-176-
Frame "Terrain"
Water
The combo list serves to specify whether the influence of uplift pressure of water due to
different tables at the foundation joint is considered. The uplift pressure can be assumed to be
linear, parabolic or it may not be considered at all. When verifying the wall, the uplift pressure
in base of footing joint due to different water tables is introduced in terms of a special force.
-177-
Frame "Water"
Surcharge
The "Surcharge" frame contains a table with a list of input surcharges. Adding (editing)
surcharge is performed in the "New surcharge" dialog window. The input surcharges can be
edited on the desktop with the help of active dimensions or by active objects.
analysis.
-178-
Frame "Surcharge"
Front Face Resistance

The "Front face resistance" frame allows by pressing the button for specifying the terrain
shape and parameters of front face resistance. The selected shape with a graphic hint ("Chart
of parameters") of input values is displayed in the left part of the frame. The terrain shape
can be edited either in the frame by inserting values into input fields, or on the desktop with
the help of active dimensions.
Combo lists in the frame allows the user to select the type of resistance and a soil (the combo
list contains soils introduced in the frame "Soils"). The magnitude of terrain surcharge in front
of the wall or soil thickness above the wall lowest points can also be specified in the frame.
The resistance on a structure front face can be specified as a pressure at rest, passive
pressure or reduced passive earth pressure. The resulting force due to reduced passive
pressure is found as a resultant force caused by passive pressure multiplied by a
corresponding coefficient, which follows from the input type of reduced passive pressure.
-179-
Frame "Front face resistance"
Applied Forces
The "Applied forces" frame contains a table with a list of forces acting on a structure. Adding
forces is performed in the "New force" dialog window. The input forces can also be edited on
the desktop with the help of active objects.
Applied forces represent an additional load on the structure of the wall, sheeting or MSE wall.
We can model such as an anchoring crash barrier, crash vehicle, load from billboards and
hoardings etc. Program doesn`t adjust the applied forces in the calculation in any way except
multiplying them with the corresponding coefficients according to the selected type of load
(EN1997, LRFD).
External load acting to the ground surface is necessary to define as surcharge.
-180-
Frame "Applied forces"
Earthquake
-181-
Frame "Earthquake"
Base Anchorage
The frame "Base anchorage" serves to input parameters (anchorage geometry, bearing
capacity against pulling-out and pulling-apart) specifying an anchorage of the wall foundation.
Geometry of footing anchorage can be edited either in the frame by inserting values in the
inputting boxes or on the desktop with the help of active dimensions. The bearing capacity
values can be either input or computed by the program from the input parameters.
-182-
Frame "Base anchorage"
Stage Settings
Next, the frame serves to specify the type of pressure acting on a wall based on the allowable
wall deformation. Providing the wall is free to move, an active pressure is assumed, otherwise,
a pressure at rest is used. The third option enables to load the wall by an increased active
pressure.
The wall stem is loaded either by pressure at rest or by the same pressure as acting on the
whole wall.
-183-
Verification
The frame "Verification" shows the analysis results. Several computations can be carried out
for a single task.
The frame appearance is adjusted based on the selected verification methodology.
detail in section "Load combinations".
The wall is loaded either by active pressure or pressure at rest depending on input in the frame
"Stage settings".
The procedure for wall verification is described in the theoretical part of the help.
The computed forces are displayed on the desktop and are automatically updated with every
change of input data and setting. The right part of the frame shows the result of verification of
a wall against overturning and translation. The "In detail" button opens the dialog window,
which contains detailed listing of the results of verification analysis.
Visualization of results can be adjusted in the frame "Drawing Settings".
-184-
Frame "Verification"
Bearing Capacity
The "Bearing capacity" frame displays the results from the analysis of foundation soil bearing
capacity. The stress in the footing bottom (assumed constant) is derived from all verifications
performed in the frame "Verification". The programs "Spread footing", "Spread footing
CPT", "Pile" and "Pile group" then considers all verifications as load cases. In the program
"Pile CPT", just normal load is used.
The frame contains following analysis options:
• Insert bearing capacity of The foundation soil bearing capacity is input. The
foundation soil eccentricity and bearing capacity analysis results are
displayed in the right part of the frame. The "In detail"
button opens a dialog window that displays detailed listing
of the results.
• Analyse bearing capacity by Pressing the "Run program Spread footing" button
program "Spread footing" opens the program "Spread footing" which allows to
calculate the soil bearing capacity or settlement and
rotation of the footing. Pressing the "OK" button leaves the
analysis mode - the results and all plots are transferred
into the program "Cantilever wall". The "Spread
footing" program must be installed for the button to be
active. Overall length of wall foundation is input.
• Analyse bearing capacity by The procedure is identical as if calculating soil bearing
-185-
program "Spread footing capacity by the "Spread footing" program.

CPT"
program "Pile" capacity by the "Spread footing" program. The "Run
program Pile" is available if the wall has pile foundation
(frame "Foundation"). Pile spacing s is input.
program "Pile CPT" capacity by the "Pile" program.
program "Pile group" capacity by the "Spread footing" program. The "Run
program Pile group" is available if the wall has pile
foundation with more then one pile (frame "Foundation").
Pile spacing s, overall number of pile rows n and loading
length l are input.
• Do not calculate (pile The foundation soil bearing capacity is not calculated.
footing)
The program allows to specify a shape of stress in the footing bottom.

Frame "Bearing capacity"
-186-
Dimensioning
The "Dimensioning" frame serves to design and verify the reinforcement of wall cross-section
- the cross-section subjected to dimensioning is selected from the list at the left part of the
screen.
• Wall stem verification - front reinforcement
• Wall stem verification - back reinforcement
• Wall jump verification
• Verification of heel of wall
• Stress relief plate check
For the Counterfort wall and Buttress wall the follow cross-sections are verified:
• Wall stem verification - front vertical and horizontal reinforcement
• Wall stem verification - back vertical and horizontal reinforcement
• Wall jump verification - upper and lower reinforcement
• Verification of heel of wall - upper and lower reinforcement
• Verification of rib (buttress and counterfort wall)
Calculation of forces and their action on the analyzed cross-section is described here.
The wall stem and construction joint are always loaded by the pressure at rest. When verifying
the front wall jump the wall is loaded either by the active pressure or the pressure at rest
depending on input specified in the frame "Stage settings".
The procedure to derive distribution of internal forces in individual cross-sections is described
in the theoretical part of this documentation. In addition, force from earth pressure at rest is
taken into account when considering earthquake analysis.
Dimensioning of the reinforced concrete is performed according to the standard set in the
"Materials and standards" tab.
Several computations for different reinforcement variants can be carried out. Various design
coefficients of individual forces can also be specified. The resulting forces are displayed on the
desktop and are updated with an arbitrary change in data or setting specified in the frame. The
"In detail" button opens the dialog window that contains detailed listing of the dimensioning
results.
-187-
Frame "Dimensioning"
Stability
Pressing the "Stability" button launches the "Slope stability" program. This program then
allows us to check the overall stability of the analyzed structure. The button is available only if
the program "Slope stability" is installed.
After completing all analyses press the "Exit and save" button to leave the program - all data
are then carried over to the analysis protocol of the "Cantilever wall" program.
-188-
Frame "Stability"
Program Gravity Wall

The program is used for analysis of gravity walls. It offers a range of wall shapes and verifies
mass concrete cross-sections.
The help in the program "Gravity Wall" includes the folowing topics:

Project Settings Geometry Material Profile Soils Assign
Resistance Forces
Earthquake Stage Verification Bearing Dimensionin Stability
Settings Capacity g
• Theory for analysis in the program "Gravity wall":

-189-

• Outputs
Project
Frame "Project"
Settings
the analysis.
-190-
analysis" tabs.
Frame "Settings"
Geometry
The "Geometry" frame allows to select the desired wall shape. The selected shape with a
graphic hint ("Chart of wall geometry") appears in the left part of the frame. The shape of
the wall can be edited either in the frame by inserting values into the input fields, or on the
desktop using active dimensions.
In case the structure is composed of inclined segments, it is required to enter the ratio of sides
of an inclined segment 1:x. A straight structure is specified by entering the value zero.
Defined wall shapes

If defined wall shapes are not satisfactory for the wall geometry input, program allows to enter
general shape of gravity wall. General wall shape is entered by coordinates of points, but it is
also possible (by pressing the button "Generate general shape") to generate coordinates of
structure from already input predefined wall.
-191-
General wall shape input

The program allows to export the geometry of the structure in *.DXF format.
Frame "Geometry"
-192-
Frame "Geometry" - general wall shape
General Wall Shape

Input of general wall shape in a new task
The program allows to input general wall shape in two ways:
1. Input of general wall shape using points
Pressing the icon with question mark on the "Wall geometry scheme" tool bar, will create a
rectangular shape and a first structure point [0,0]. Minimum input number of points is 3 (in
case less number is input, the program will show an error message).
-193-
Frame "Geometry" - new task

Using the "Add" button, which opens a dialog window "New point", more structure points
are input (it is possible to input points by clicking on the desktop).
Frame "Geometry" - general wall shape input using points

Input points are being added to the table, and it is then possible to edit them, insert more in
between and delete them using the desired buttons "Edit", "Insert" and "Remove" or by
-194-
clicking the points on the desktop in the corresponding mode. Points can be moved right on
the desktop by mouse after clicking on the special icon .
Frame "Geometry" - edit points

The maximum inclination of footing bottom is considered 45 °. In case of wrong inclination of
footing bottom input, or if the wall shape is intersecting, the program checks the general
geometry of the wall and warns the user of an error. In that case, the wall geometry has to be
changed.
Frame "Geometry" - point input error message

2. Input of general wall shape using general shape generator
The structure defined by the scheme of construction and its dimensions can be taken to the
general wall shape input by pressing the "Generate general shape" button. It is possible to
work with the newly generated points and edit the generated wall shape.
-195-
Frame "Geometry" - input of general wall shape using general shape generator
Frame appereance is then changed as in the first case of general wall shape input. It is
possible to work with the picture of the structure as already described.
Frame "Geometry" - frame appereance after point input
Material
-196-
the frame serves to specify the wall unit weight.

If the wall is made from concrete, the program offers two options:
concrete and steel structures in the "Materials and standards" tab.
If the wall is made from stone masonry, material characteristics of masonry units according to
selected standard are specified in the "Materials and standards" tab:
• EN 1996-1-1 - strength of masonry units fb, mortar origin and strength of mortar fm
• GB 50003-2011 - type of masonry units, strength grade of stone, strength grade of
mortar
If the "User values" button is checked, it is possible to input user defined material
characteristics.
Frame "Material" - concrete
-197-
Frame "Material" - stone masonry
Profile
-198-
Frame "Profile"
Soils
Adding (editing) a soil is performed in the "Add new soils" dialog window.
-199-
Frame "Soils"
Basic Data
conditions.
-200-
Assign
-201-
Frame "Assign"
Foundation
F).
respectively.
active dimensions.
-202-
Frame "Foundation"
Backfill
-203-
Frame "Backfill"
Terrain
selected shape with graphic hint of input values is displayed in the left part of the frame. The
terrain shape can be edited either in the frame by inserting values into input fields, or on the
desktop with the help of active dimensions.
-204-
Frame "Terrain"
Water
in foundation joint due to different water tables is introduced in terms of a special force.
-205-
Frame "Water"
Surcharge
analysis.
-206-
Frame "Surcharge"

-207-
Applied Forces
(EN1997, LRFD).
-208-
Earthquake
-209-
Frame "Earthquake"
Stage Settings
pressure.
-210-
Verification
for a single task.
• Analysis according to LRFD - in this case the last column is not displayed.
Bearing Capacity
The "Bearing capacity" frame displays the analysis of foundation soil bearing capacity result.
The stress in the footing bottom (assumed constant) is derived from all verifications performed
-211-
in the frame "Verification". The programs "Spread footing", "Spread footing CPT", "Pile"
and "Pile group" then considers all verifications as load cases. In the program "Pile CPT",
just normal load is used.
of the results.
into the program "Gravity wall". The "Spread footing"
program must be installed for the button to be active.
Overall length of wall foundation is input.
CPT"
length l are input.
footing)

-212-
Dimensioning
- the cross-section subjected to dimensioning is selected in the combo list.
• Wall stem verification
• Construction joint verification - depth of construction joint from construction top edge
is specified
Calculation of forces and their action on the analyzed cross-section is described here. The wall
stem and construction joint are always loaded by the pressure at rest.
-213-
in the theoretical part of the help.

Several computations for various cross-sections can be carried out. Various design coefficients
of individual forces can also be specified. The resulting forces are displayed on the desktop and
are updated with an arbitrary change in data or setting specified in the frame. The "In detail"
button opens the dialog window that contains detailed listing of the dimensioning results.
Stability
After completing all analyses press the "OK" button to leave the program - all data are then
carried over to the analysis protocol of the "Gravity wall" program.
-214-
Frame "Stability"
Program Prefab Wall

This program is used to verify retaining walls made of prefabricated blocks.
The help in the program "Prefab Wall" includes the folowing topics:

Project Settings Geometry Profile Soils Assign Foundation
Backfill Terrain Water Surcharge Front Face Applied Earthquake
Resistance Forces
Stage Verification Bearing Dimensionin Slip on Stability
Settings Capacity g Georeinforce
ment
• Theory for analysis in the program "Prefab Wall":

Stress in Soil Body Earth Pressures Analysis of Walls Analysis of
Foundation Bearing
Capacity
-215-
• Outputs
Project
Frame "Project"
Settings
the analysis.
-216-
The program allows to specify a value of the minimum dimensioning pressure k (by checking
the option "Consider the minimum dimensioning pressure"). For real structures showed
that when considering cohesive soil behind the wall of the upper blocks of structure behaves
problematically. For this reason, it is recommended to implement a value of k into the
calculation for the case of backfill consisting of cohesive soils.
analysis" tabs.
Frame "Settings"
Geometry
The "Geometry" frame contains a table with a list of input structural precast units (blocks) of
a wall (the lowest block is labeled as No. 1). Adding blocks is performed in the "New block"
dialog window.
This dialog window serves to define the geometry of a block, parameters of reinforcement
(length, anchorage length, tensile strength and pull out resistance) and material
characteristics (self weight, shear resistance between two blocks, cohesion).
The program allows for adding (inserting) another block in between two already existing blocks
of a structure. Inserting a new block is performed in the "Insert block" dialog window that
complies with the "New block" dialog window. The inserted block is ordered such to proceed
the currently selected block of a structure.
The input blocks can be further edited on the desktop with the help of active dimensions or
active objects - double clicking on a structure opens a dialog window with a given block. When
using the regime of active objects the visualization of detailed dimensions must be
turned in the "Drawing Settings" frame.
-217-
Frame "Geometry"
Profile
-218-
Frame "Profile"
Soils
-219-
Frame "Soils"
Basic Data
conditions.
-220-
Assign
-221-
Frame "Assign"
Foundation
F).
respectively.
active dimensions.
-222-
Frame "Foundation"
Backfill
-223-
Frame "Backfill"
Terrain
-224-
Frame "Terrain"
Water
-225-
Frame "Water"
Surcharge
analysis.
-226-
Frame "Surcharge"

-227-
Applied Forces
(EN1997, LRFD).
-228-
Earthquake
-229-
Frame "Earthquake"
Stage Settings
Verification
for a single task.
-230-

Bearing Capacity
-231-
of the results.
into the program "Prefab wall". The "Spread footing"
CPT"
length l are input.
footing)

-232-
Dimensioning
The "Dimensioning" frame allows to verify joints between individual blocks of a wall. The
"Joint above block No." field serves to select the desired joint subjected to verification
analysis. The verification against overturning and translation is performed in the same way
as for the entire wall - friction between blocks and cohesion of a block material are input in the
frame "Geometry".
-233-
Slip on Georeinforcement
The frame serves to verify the limit state for slip along reinforcement - the frame is therefore
accessible only in stages, where the reinforcements are defined.
The window requires inputting the reinforcement number - the forces entering verification
analysis together with the shape of sliding block are then displayed. The calculated forces are
stored in the table.
Several calculations for various reinforcements can be carried out. Various design coefficients
The verification procedure depends on settings in the "Wall analysis" tab - either based on
factors of safety or according to the theory of limit states. The solution procedure is
described herein.
-234-
Frame "Slip on georeinforcement"
Stability
carried over to the analysis protocol of the "Prefab wall" program.
-235-
Frame "Stability"
Program Masonry Wall

This program is used for design and analysis of reinforced masonry block wall according to
various standards.
The help in the program "Masonry Wall" includes the folowing topics:

Project Settings Geometry Types of Material Profile Soils
Blocks
Assign Foundation Backfill Terrain Water Surcharge Front Face
Resistance
Applied Earthquake Base Stage Verification Bearing Dimensionin
Forces Anchorage Settings Capacity g
Stability
• Theory for analysis in the program "Masonry Wall":

-236-

• Outputs
Project
Frame "Project"
Settings
the analysis.
-237-
analysis" tabs.
Frame "Settings"
Geometry
The "Geometry" frame allows by pressing the button for selecting the wall shape. The
selected shape with a graphic hint "Chart of wall geometry" appears in the left part of the
frame. The shape of a wall can be edited either in the frame by inserting values into input
fields, or on the desktop with the help of active dimensions.
Based on the selected shape of a wall, you specify in the frame "Geometry and masonry
material" the number and dimensions of masonry blocks in individual columns, or if applicable
also the thickness of vertical joint between blocks. In addition it is necessary to input
compressive strength of masonry, which serves as the basic input parameter for the bearing
capacity verification of reinforced masonry (according to EN 1996-1-1 or AS 3700).
-238-
Frame "Geometry"
Types of Blocks
The "Types of blocks" frame contains a table with a list of input blocks. Adding (editing)
blocks is performed in the "New type of block (Edit type of block)" dialog window.
This dialog window serves to define the geometry of a block (width and height).
of a structure. Inserting a new block is performed in the "Inserted type of block" dialog
window that complies with the "New type of block" dialog window. The inserted block is
ordered such to proceed the currently selected block of a structure.
-239-
Frame "Types of blocks"
Material
the frame serves to specify the wall unit weight.
The catalogs content depends on the selection of standard for the design of concrete structures
set in the "Materials and standards" tab.
-240-
Frame "Material"
Profile
-241-
Frame "Profile"
Soils
-242-
Frame "Soils"
Basic Data
conditions.
-243-
Assign
-244-
Frame "Assign"
Foundation
F).
respectively.
active dimensions.
-245-
Frame "Foundation"
Backfill
-246-
Frame "Backfill"
Terrain
-247-
Frame "Terrain"
Water
-248-
Frame "Water"
Surcharge
analysis.
-249-
Frame "Surcharge"

-250-
Applied Forces
(EN1997, LRFD).
-251-
Earthquake
-252-
Frame "Earthquake"
Base Anchorage
The frame "Base anchorage" serves to input parameters (anchorage geometry, bearing
capacity against pulling-out and pulling-apart) specifying an anchorage of the wall foundation.
Geometry of footing anchorage can be edited either in the frame by inserting values in the
inputting boxes or on the desktop with the help of active dimensions. The bearing capacity
values can be either input or computed by the program from the input parameters.
-253-
Frame "Base anchorage"
Stage Settings
pressure.
-254-
Verification
for a single task.
"Stage settings".
-255-
Bearing Capacity
of the results.
into the program "Masonry wall". The "Spread footing"
CPT"
length l are input.
footing)

-256-
Dimensioning
- the cross-section subjected to dimensioning is selected in the combo list.
• Construction joint verification - the number of a joint between masonry blocks is input
• Verification of heel of wall
Calculation of forces and their action on the analyzed cross-section is described here.
The wall is loaded either by the active earth pressure or by the pressure at rest depending on
the setting in the frame "Stage settings". The procedure to derive distribution of internal forces
in individual cross-sections is described in the theoretical part of this documentation. In
-257-
addition, force from earth pressure at rest is taken into account when considering earthquake
analysis.
Joints between masonry blocks are verified according to AS 3700 or EN 1996-1-1 depending
on the setting in the "Materials and standards" tab. The program verifies the bearing capacity
for bending, shear and combination of compression and bending. Reinforcement can be
specified on both front and back sides of a structure. An additional load applied to a cross-
section (bending moment, compressive normal force and shear force) can also be specified.
These additional forces are added to the computed ones.
Dimensioning of reinforced concrete is performed according to the standard set in the
Stability
-258-
carried over to the analysis protocol of the "Masonry wall" program.
Frame "Stability"
Program Gabion
This program is used for analysis of gabions. It allows analysis of any structure shapes
including overhangs requiring anchoring.
The help in the program "Gabion" includes the folowing topics:

Project Settings Material Geometry Profile Soils Assign
Resistance Forces
Earthquake Stage Verification Bearing Dimensionin Stability
Settings Capacity g
• Theory for analysis in the program "Gabion":

Stress in Soil Body Earth Pressures Analysis of Walls Analysis of
Foundation Bearing
Capacity
-259-
• Outputs
Project
Frame "Project"
Settings
the analysis.
-260-
Program allows to specify a value of the minimum dimensioning pressure k (by checking the
option "Consider the minimum dimensioning pressure"). For real structures showed that
when considering cohesive soil behind the wall of the upper blocks of structure behaves
problematically. For this reason, it is recommended to implement a value of k into the
calculation for the case of backfill consisting of cohesive soils.
analysis" tabs.
Frame "Settings"
Material
The "Material" frame contains a table with a list of input filling (aggregates) and material
parameters of applied gabion wire netting. Adding material and netting is performed in the
"New material" dialog window.
The material parameters of filling and netting of currently selected gabion block are displayed
in the right part of the frame.
An approximate value of the angle of internal friction of the material of gabion filler is for a well
graded gravel in the range of 35 - 40, for a quarry masonry it can be larger.
-261-
Frame "Material"
Geometry
The "Geometry" frame contains a table with a list of input blocks of a wall (the lowest block is
labeled as No. 1). Adding blocks is performed in the "New block" dialog window.
This dialog window serves to define the geometry of a block, and parameters of mesh
overhang (overhang length, overhang anchorage, bearing capacity against pull out).
of a structure. Inserting a new block is performed in the "Insert block" dialog window that
complies with the "New block" dialog window. The inserted block is ordered such to proceed
the currently selected block of a structure.
The input blocks can be can be further edited on the desktop with the help of active
dimensions or active objects - double clicking on a structure opens a dialog window with a
given block. When using the regime of active objects the visualization of detailed
dimensions must be turned off in the "Drawing Settings" frame.
-262-
Frame "Geometry"
Profile
-263-
Frame "Profile"
Soils
-264-
Frame "Soils"
Basic Data
conditions.
-265-
Assign
-266-
Frame "Assign"
Foundation
F).
respectively.
active dimensions.
-267-
Frame "Foundation"
Backfill
-268-
Frame "Backfill"
Terrain
-269-
Frame "Terrain"
Water
-270-
Frame "Water"
Surcharge
analysis.
-271-
Frame "Surcharge"

The "Front face resistance" frame allows by pressing the button for specifying theterrain
-272-
Applied Forces
(EN1997, LRFD).
-273-
Earthquake
-274-
Frame "Earthquake"
Stage Settings
Verification
for a single task.
-275-

Bearing Capacity
-276-

of the results.
into the program "Gabion". The "Spread footing"
CPT"
length l are input.
footing)

-277-
Dimensioning
The "Dimensioning" frame allows to verify individual joints of gabion blocks. The "Joint
above block No." field serves to select the desired joint subjected to verification analysis. The
verification against overturning, translation, for side pressure and joint between blocks is
performed.
-278-
Stability
carried over to the analysis protocol of the "Gabion" program.
-279-
Frame "Stability"
Program Abutment
This program is used to design abutments inculding wing walls. It allows to check the
abutment for overturning, translation, bearing capacity of foundation soil and dimensioning of
decisive or reinforced concrete sections (including wings).
The help in the program "Abutment" includes the folowing topics:

Project Settings Geometric Wings Geometry Footing Material
Section Plane View Steps
Profile Soils Load - LC Assign Foundation Backfill Terrain
Water Surcharge Front Face Applied Earthquake Stage Verification
Resistance Forces Settings
Bearing Dimensionin Stability
Capacity g
• Theory for analysis in the program "Abutment":
-280-

• Outputs
Project
Frame "Project"
Settings
the analysis.
-281-
analysis" tabs.
Frame "Settings"
Geometric Section
The frame "Geometric section" allows for selecting the shape of bridge abutment. The
selected shape with a graphic hint "Chart of wall geometry" appears in the left part of the
frame. The shape of a wall can be edited either in the frame by inserting values into input
In case the structure is composed of inclined segments it is required to enter the ratio of sides
of an inclined segment 1:x. The straight structure is specified by entering the value zero.
The frame serves to specify the final shape of abutment including the closure wall. The
abutment can be verified also for the construction state (without the closure wall) based on the
choice in the frame "Load - LC". The abutment length and the length of abutment foundation is
specified in the frame "Geometry plane view".
-282-
Frame "Geometric section"
Wings
The frame "Wings" allows for inputting the bridge wings dimensions. The wings can be either
symmetrical or unsymmetrical. Assuming unsymmetrical wings requires inputting the right and
left wing dimensions separately. The screen always displays the currently input wing - only the
left wing is then visualized in the remaining frames.
The frame "Geometry plane view" can also be used to input or edit the wing thicknesses and
lengths.
The Wing-abutment joint cross-section can also be verified in the frame "Dimensioning". The
load due to moment is considered. The whole wing is loaded by active pressure developed
behind the wall. The "Dimensioning" dialog window serves to input the magnitude of surface
surcharge to determine the wing pressure. The surcharge specified in the frame "Surcharge"
is then not taken into account and the terrain behind the wing is considered as flat. The
resulting moment applied to the joint is obtained by multiplying the overall magnitude of soil
pressure acting on the wall surface and by the difference of centroids of the pressure resultant
and the joint.
The length of cross-section used for dimensioning is considered by default as the wing height -
a different length of wing-abutment joint can also be specified after selecting the option
"Reduce for dimensioning".
When using prolonged wing walls it is possible to input dimensions of the foundation below the
wall. Such foundation jumps are reflected in the analysis by computing a fictitious width of the
foundation as:
-283-
where: Atot -overall area of foundation including all jumps

S -length of abutment foundation
dfict -fictitious width of foundation for verification analysis
The foundation is then considered as being rectangular, which is simplified but rather
conservative assumption.
Frame "Wings"
Geometry Plane View

The frame "Geometry plane view" allows for inputting the abutment length, length of
abutment foundation and also dimensions of abutment wings.
Dimensions can be edited either in the frame by inserting values into input fields, or on the
For details on the effect of abutment dimensions on verification analysis we refer the
reader to section "Calculating of abutment forces".
-284-
Frame "Geometry plane view"
Footing Steps
The frame "Footing steps" serves to input the steps of foundation below abutment. This
option thus allows for specifying additional shapes of bridge abutment.
Adding foundation step is performed in the "New step" dialog window. Input footing steps can
be edited on the desktop with the help of active dimensions or active objects, respectively.
-285-
Frame "Footing steps"
Material
the frame serves to specify the structure unit weight.
set in the "Materials and standards" tab. The input field in the upper part of the frame serves
to specify the abutment unit weight.
-286-
Frame "Material"
Profile
-287-
Frame "Profile"
Soils
-288-
Frame "Soils"
Basic Data
conditions.
-289-
Assign
-290-
sFrame "Assign"
Load - LC
The frame "Load - LC" serves to specify individual load cases (construction, service) and the
load caused by the bridge and transition slab. Verification and dimensioning analyses of the
whole bridge abutment or only its part are carried out according to the specified type of LC.
When performing the analysis according to EN 1997 or LRFD, the input load due to bridge and
transition slab is not INCREASED by any partial factors. The input forces must be
determined in accordance with the corresponding standards (EN 1990, EN 1991).
No load specified in the case of construction state and the abutment is verified in a given
stage of construction without a closure wall and bridge wings.
In the case of service state the abutment is loaded by the bridge and transition slab, the
whole abutment is verified.
For abutment verification it appears advantageous to exploit the stage of construction and
specify in individual stages different load cases (e.g. construction state, service state without
live load, service state with all loads). Individual stages then allow inputting different loads,
surcharges, terrain shapes, type of pressure analysis (active, at rest), design coefficients, etc.
-291-
Frame "Load - LC"
Foundation
F).
respectively.
active dimensions.
-292-
Frame "Foundation"
Backfill
-293-
Frame "Backfill"
Terrain
-294-
Frame "Terrain"
Water
-295-
Frame "Water"
Surcharge
analysis.
-296-
Frame "Surcharge"

-297-
Applied Forces
(EN1997, LRFD).
-298-
Earthquake
-299-
Frame "Earthquake"
Stage Settings
pressure.
-300-
Verification
for a single task.
F in the table allows for inputting the design coefficients, which multiply the calculated
"Stage settings".
-301-
Bearing Capacity
of the results.
into the program "Abutment". The "Spread footing"
Overall length of wall foundation is put in.
CPT"
length l are input.
footing)

-302-
Dimensioning
The "Dimensioning" frame serves to design and verify the reinforcement of abutment cross-
section - the cross-section subjected to dimensioning is selected in the combo list. The table
shows the abutment forces.
Offer of cross-sections that can be verified depends on the selected load case (construction,
service). The following cross-sections are available for both the construction and service state:
• Wall stem verification
• Construction joint verification - depth of construction joint from construction top edge
is specified
The service state makes also possible to verify:
• Verification of closure wall
• Verification wing - abutment - the surface surcharge due to terrain is input, for actual
analysis we refer to section "Wings"
-303-
The abutment is loaded either by active pressure or pressure at rest depending on the input
specified in the frame "Stage settings", an active earth pressure is used when analyzing wing
walls.
in the theoretical part of the help.
"Materials and standards" tab. Verification analysis based on the standard CSN 73
6206 "Design of concrete and steel reinforced concrete bridge structures" is
described herein.
Stability
-304-
carried over to the analysis protocol of the "Abutment" program.
Frame "Stability"
Program Nailed Slope

The program analyses nailed walls and slopes of various shapes.
The help in the program "Nailed Slope" includes the folowing topics:

Project Settings Geometry Types of Geometry of Material Profile
Nails Nails
Soils Assign Terrain Water Surcharge Earthquake Stage
Settings
Internal Verification Bearing Dimensionin External
Stability Capacity g Stability
-305-
• Theory for analysis in the program "Nailed Slope":

Stress in Soil Earth Pressures Analysis of Walls Nailed Slope Dimensioning of
Body Concrete
Structures
• Outputs
Project
Frame "Project"
Settings
the analysis.
-306-
Settings of analysis parameters are performed in the "Materials and standards", "Wall analysis"
and "Stability analisis" tabs.
When calculating the pull-out resistance of nail, skin friction can be inserted as a soil
parameter.
Frame "Settings"
Geometry
The frame "Geometry" contains a table with a list of input points of the structure front face.
Adding points is performed in the "New point" dialog window.
The input points can also be edited on the desktop with the help of active objects - double-
clicking an already input point then opens a dialog window for its editing.
One needs to specify depth (z-coordinate from the top point of a structure - positive direction
is assumed downwards) and an x-coordinate (negative direction is assumed to the left, no
overhang of a structure is allowed.
The program makes it possible to export the structure geometry in the *.DXF format.
-307-
Frame "Geometry"
Types of Nails
The frame "Types of nails" serves to specify a nail type in a specific table. The strength
parameters of nails can be either input by the user or directly determined by the
program depending on the input data.
The table lists the following input data; either input or computed - nail head strength, nail
tensile strength and its pull - out resistance per 1 m (1 ft).
-308-
Frame "Types of nails"
Geometry of Nails
The frame "Geometry of nails" contains a table with a list of input nails. Adding nails is
performed in the "New nail" dialog window. The input nails can also be edited on the desktop
with the help of active objects.
The user is required to specify the nail depth, depth of a bench from a given nail (the next
nail must be introduced as deep as to be located below the bench of the upper nail), nail
length, its diameter and distance.
Inclination of nails is regarded from the horizontal line in clockwise direction and is constant for
all nails.
-309-
Frame "Geometry of nails"
Material
The "Material" frame allows for the selection of material parameters for concrete and
longitudinal steel reinforcements.
Two options are available when selecting the material type:
• The "Catalog" button opens the "Material catalog" dialog window (for concrete or steel
reinforcements), the list of materials then serves to select the desired material.
• The "Own" button opens the "Concrete" dialog window (for concrete) or the
"Reinforcing steel bars" dialog window (for longitudinal steel reinforcements), which
allows for manual specification of material parameters.
-310-
Frame "Material"
Profile
-311-
Frame "Profile"
Soils
"Basic data", "Earth pressure at rest", "Uplift pressure" and "Skin friction" (see frame
"Settings").
-312-
Frame "Soils"
Basic Data
conditions.
-313-
Assign
-314-
Frame "Assign"
Terrain
-315-
Frame "Terrain"
Water
-316-
Frame "Water"
Surcharge
analysis.
-317-
Frame "Surcharge"
Earthquake
-318-
Frame "Earthquake"
Stage Settings
Internal Stability
The frame allows for the verification of internal stability of a structure assuming
either plane or broken slip surface.
The verification of internal stability is performed:
-319-
• According to EN 1997 (the actual verification is performed according to the theory of limit
states).
• According to LRFD (the actual verification is performed according to the theory of limit
states).
• Verification according to the factor of safety, or the theory of limit states (verification is
performed depending on the setting in the "Stability analysis" tab)
Individual steps of the verification procedure are described herein.
This frame also allows for the verification of nails bearing capacity.
To determine the nail force, in this frame is defined reduction coefficient of active earth
pressure kn.
Frame "Internal stability"
Verification
for a single task.
-320-
To verify the external stability a fictitious structure (wall) is created and further subjected to
the verification analysis. A fictitious wall consists of the structure front face, a line connecting
end points of individual nails, a vertical line constructed from the end point of the first nail up
to the terrain depth and from the end point of the last nail up to the structure depth (thus the
bottom edge of a fictitious structure is always horizontal). The wall points that cause a concave
curvature of the structure back face are automatically excluded by the program. The structure
is loaded by an active earth pressure.
Bearing Capacity
performed in the frame "Verification". The programs "Spread footing" and "Spread footing
CPT" then considers all verifications as load cases.
Three basic analysis options are available in the frame:
• Input the foundation soil The input field serves to specify the foundation soil bearing
-321-
bearing capacity capacity. The results of verification analysis of a soil for

eccentricity and bearing capacity are displayed in the right
part of the frame. The "In detail" button opens the dialog
window that displays detailed listing of the results of
verification analysis of foundation soil bearing capacity.
• Compute the foundation Pressing the "Run program Spread footing" button starts
soil bearing capacity using the program "Spread footing" that allows for computing
the program "Spread the soil bearing capacity or settlement and rotation of a
footing" footing. Pressing the "OK" button leaves the analysis
regime - the results and all plots are copied to the program
"Nailed Slope". The program "Spread footing" must be
installed for the button to be active. Overall length of wall
foundation is input.
• Analyse bearing capacity The procedure is identical as if calculating soil bearing
by program "Spread capacity by the "Spread footing" program.
footing CPT"
• Do not compute (pile The foundation soil bearing capacity is not computed.
footing)

-322-
Dimensioning
The frame "Dimensioning" allows for the design and verification of the reinforcement of the
structure concrete cover. The upper part of the frame serves to choose whether the vertical
or horizontal reinforcement and its location will be verified. The program then determines
internal forces developed on the selected section.
The table in the bottom part of the frame serves to specify locations for the verification of the
designed reinforcement depending on the input standard for dimensioning of reinforced
concrete (the standard is specified in the "Materials and standards" tab). A cross-section is
loaded by the bending moment in a given point. An amount of the tensile reinforcement in
the cross-section is input. If the moment is negative, the designed reinforcement is placed at
the structure front face and if it is negative, then at the structure back face.
Stability
carried over to the analysis protocol of the "Nailed Slope" program.
-323-
Frame "Stability"
Program Redi-Rock Wall

This program is used for design and verification of retaining walls, slopes and MSE walls. The
structure of wall is made of prefabricated Redi-Rock blocks.
The help in the program "Redi-Rock Wall" includes the folowing topics:

Project Settings Blocks Geometry Footing Profile Soils
Assign Types of Reinforceme Terrain Water Surcharge Front Face
Reinforceme nts Resistance
nts
Applied Earthquake Stage
Forces Settings
Analysis -
Gravity Wall
Verification Dimensionin Bearing
g Capacity
-324-
Analysis -
MSE Wall
Verification Dimensionin Bearing Slip on Internal
g Capacity Georeinforce Stability
ment
Stability
• Theory for analysis in the program "Redi-Rock Wall":

Stress in Soil Body Earth Pressures Analysis of Walls Dimensioning of
Concrete Structures
• Outputs
Project
The frame also allows user to switch analysis units (metric / imperial).
The website of manufacturer (https://www.redi-rock.com) can be opened by "Get a Quote"
button.
Project data can be copied within all GEO5 programs using "GeoClipboard".
-325-
Frame "Project"
Settings
the analysis.
analysis" tabs.
The type of structure has to be selected in this frame.
• Gravity Wall
• MSE Wall
Frame "Settings"
Blocks
In the "Blocks" frame, the prefabricated blocks of manufacturer are shown in the table.
Some parameters of blocks (unit weight, minimum and maximum shear strength, friction
between blocks) can be edited, the dimensions of blocks cannot be changed.
-326-
Frame "Blocks"
Geometry
The "Geometry" frame contains a table with a list of input structural precast units (blocks) of
a wall (the lowest block is labeled as No. 1). Adding blocks is performed in the "New block"
dialog window.
A group of blocks that is defined by a number of blocks and setbacks between them.
The program allows to add (insert) another group between two already existing blocks of a
structure. Inserting a new group is performed in the "Insert" dialog window that complies with
the "Add" dialog window. The inserted block is ordered such to proceed the currently selected
block of a structure.
The program allows to export the geometry of a structure in the *.DXF format.
-327-
Frame "Geometry"
Footing
In The "Footing" frame, it is necessary to select material of footing (soil, concrete) and input
its dimensions. In the case of concrete footing, the unit weight, shear cub (key) bearing
capacity and friction between a concrete footing and the first block must be also specified.
A restriction according to Fig. 4-4, page 73 of NCMA manual is neither automatically
enforced nor checked by the program.
The bearing pad must be introduced into the program such that it complies with the design
criteria.
-328-
Frame "Footing"
Profile
The "Profile" frame contains a table with a list of input interfaces. After specification of
interfaces, it is possible to edit thicknesses of individual layers with the help of active
dimensions.
Adding layer is performed in the "Add interface" dialog window. The z-coordinate of interface
The program allows to raise or lower the top point of a structure in the "Change of terrain
elevation" dialog window so that the whole interface can be translated while keeping the
thicknesses of individual layers. This function is important when copying the profile from the
-329-
Frame "Profile"
Soils
about currently selected soil displayed in the right part of the frame.
Adding a soil is performed in the "Add soil" dialog window.
-330-
Frame "Soils"
Basic data
conditions.
-331-
Assign
-332-
Frame "Assign"
Types of Reinforcements
The "Types of reinforcements" frame contains a table with the list of input geo-
reinforcements and their parameters (long-term bearing capacity of reinforcements and
coefficients of interaction). The geo-reinforcement can be edited by "Edit" button.
The "Types of reinforcements" frame is available just in the case of MSE Wall calculation.
The type of structure is selected in the frame "Settings".
-333-
Frame "Types of reinforcements"
Reinforcements
In the "Reinforcement" frame, parameters of reinforcement are specified.
Input mode
• 1 reinforcement type - the wall is reinforced by one type of reinforcement. The type of
reinforcement is selected in the combo list. The reinforcements are generated from the
bottom row of blocks to the row, which is selected in the combo list.
• 2 reinforcement type - the wall is reinforced by two types of geo-reinforcement. There is
different reinforcement in the upper and bottom part of wall. The input is same as in the
case of one type of reinforcement.
• table of reinforcements - the reinforcements are specified for each row of blocks
Reinf. installation
• in every row of blocks (50%) - the reinforcements are placed in every block
-334-
• in every other row of blocks (25%) - the reinforcements are placed in every other block
Top reinforcement
• straight (25%) - the reinforcements in upper row are placed in every other block
-335-
• anchored tail - upper part of reinforcements in upper row of blocks is directed in the angle
to its bottom
Reinforcement geometry
-336-
• identical length of reinforcements - all reinforcements have same length l

• identical ending of reinforcements - all reinforcements end in the same distance from the
wall lk
If the soil between the reinforcements is different than soil assigned to geological profile, then
program allows to specify this soil by checking the option "Input different reinforced soil".
Subsequently, in combo list user selects the type of soil (the combo list contains soils
introduced in the frame "Soils").
The "Types of reinforcements" frame is available just in the case of MSE Wall calculation.
The type of structure is selected in the frame "Settings".
Frame "Reinforcement"
Terrain
The "Terrain" frame allows, by pressing the button, to specify the terrain shape. The selected
shape with graphic hint ("Chart of parameters") of input values is displayed in the left part of
the frame. The terrain shape can be edited either in the frame by inserting values into input
-337-
Frame "Terrain"
Water
-338-
Frame "Water"
Surcharge
analysis.
-339-
Frame "Surcharge"

-340-
Applied Forces
-341-
Earthquake
-342-
Frame "Earthquake"
Stage Settings
Analysis - Gravity Wall

Verification of Gravity wall made of RediRock blocks is performed in these frames:
-343-
• Verification - verification of a wall against overturning and slip
• Dimensioning - verification of joints between individual blocks of a wall against

overturning and slip
• Bearing capacity - verification of the foundation soil bearing capacity
• Stability - verification of the overall stability of the analyzed structure
Pictures from: Design Manual for Segmental Retaining Walls (NCMA, 3rd Edition)
Verification
for a single task.
-344-
Visualization of results can be adjusted in the "Drawing Settings" frame.
Dimensioning
The "Dimensioning" frame allows to verify joints between individual blocks of a wall against
overturning and slip. The "Automatic verification" checks the most critical joint above the
block or it is possible to perform verification for each joint.
in the table allows to input the design coefficients, which multiply the calculated forces.
These forces are displayed on the desktop and are updated for every change of data and
setting in the frame.
• Analysis according to EN 1997 - the last column in the table allows to specify whether the
load acting on a structure is considered as secondary one. This is explained in more detail
in section "Load combinations".
-345-
button opens a dialog window that contains detailed listing of the dimensioning results.
Bearing Capacity
enforced nor checked by the program. The bearing pad must be introduced into the
program so it complies with the design criteria.
• Input the foundation soil The input field allows to specify the foundation soil bearing
• Compute the foundation Pressing the "Run Spread footing" button starts the
soil bearing capacity using program "Spread footing" that allows for computing the
-346-
the program "Spread soil bearing capacity or settlement and rotation of a footing.
footing" Pressing the "OK" button leaves the analysis regime - the
results and all plots are copied to the program "Redi Rock
wall". The program "Spread footing" must be installed for
the button to be active. Overall length of wall foundation is
input.
footing CPT"
footing)

Analysis - MSE Wall

Verification of retaining MSE Wall made of Redi-Rock blocks and Mirafi reinforcements is
performed in following frames:
• Verification - verification of a wall against overturning and slip
-347-
• Dimensioning - verification of joints between individual blocks of a wall against

overturning and slip
• Bearing capacity - verification of the foundation soil bearing capacity
• Slip on georeinforcement - slip verification of reinforced soil block along a geo-

reinforcement
• Internal stability - verification of tensile and pull-out resistance of geo-reinforcement
-348-
• Stability - verification of the overall stability of the analyzed structure
Pictures from: Design Manual for Segmental Retaining Walls (NCMA, 3rd Edition)
Verification
for a single task.
Verification can be performed in the place:
• bottom of leveling pad
• bottom of blocks
-349-
Dimensioning
The "Dimensioning" frame allows to verify joints between individual blocks of a wall against
overturning and slip. Only the joints which are not reinforced by geo-reinforcements can be
verified. The "Automatic verification" checks the most critical joint above the block or it is
possible to perform verification for each joint.
in the table allows to input the design coefficients, which multiply the calculated forces.
These forces are displayed on the desktop and are updated for every change of data and
setting in the frame.
• Analysis according to EN 1997 - the last column in the table allows to specify whether the
load acting on a structure is considered as secondary one. This is explained in more detail
in section "Load combinations".
button opens a dialog window that contains detailed listing of the dimensioning results.
-350-
Bearing Capacity
enforced nor checked by the program. The bearing pad must be introduced into the
program so it complies with the design criteria.
• Input the foundation soil The input field allows to specify the foundation soil bearing
• Compute the foundation Pressing the "Run Spread footing" button starts the
soil bearing capacity using program "Spread footing" that allows for computing the
the program "Spread soil bearing capacity or settlement and rotation of a footing.
footing" Pressing the "OK" button leaves the analysis regime - the
results and all plots are copied to the program "Redi Rock
wall". The program "Spread footing" must be installed for
-351-
the button to be active. Overall length of wall foundation is

input.
footing CPT"
footing)

The "Slip on georeinforcement" frame enables to verify a slip of the reinforced soil block
along a geo-reinforcement checking the field "Reinforcement number". Selecting the option
"Automatic verification" provides verification of the most critical reinforcement. The
reinforced soil block is bounded by the wall front face, the checked geo-reinforcement, a
vertical line passing through the geo-reinforcement end point and terrain. The reinforced soil
block is loaded by an active earth pressure and by stabilizing forces due to geo-reinforcements
-352-
exceeding the boundary of the reinforced block.

The solution procedure of slip on georeinforcement is described in the theoretical part of the
help.
forces.
The frame enables to perform more verification analyses of individual geo-reinforcements.
Various design coefficients of individual forces can also be specified. The resulting forces are
displayed on the desktop and are updated with an arbitrary change in data or setting specified
in the frame. The "In detail" button opens the dialog window, which contains a detailed listing
of the results of internal stability.
Internal Stability
The "Internal stability" frame enables to check a strength of geo-reinforcement, bearing
capacity for pull-out from the earth body and strength of connections. Checking the field
-353-
"Reinforcement number" yields verification for individual reinforcements only. Selecting the
option "Automatic verification" provides verification of all reinforcements. The result for the
most critical reinforcement is displayed on the right part of the desktop. The solution
procedure of internal stability is described in the theoretical part of the help.
In the table,forces caused by an active earth pressure acting on the front face of the wall in
individual geo-reinforcements and points of application of these forces are shown. Further,
bearing capacity of geo-reinforcements for tensile strength Rt, pull-out resistance Tp,
connection bearing capacity Rcon and resulting utilization is shown for each geo-reinforcement.
The frame enables to perform more analyses of individual geo-reinforcements. The calculated
forces are displayed on the desktop are automatically updated with every change of input data.
The "In detail" button opens the dialog window, which contains a detailed listing of the results
of reinforcement bearing capacity.
Stability
allows to check the overall stability of the analyzed structure. The button is available only if the
program "Slope stability" is installed.
carried over to the analysis protocol of the "Redi Rock wall" program.
-354-
Frame "Stability"
Program Sheeting Design

This program is used for fast design of non-anchored and preliminary design of anchored
retaining walls. The results are required embedment lengths, internal forces on the structure
and forces in anchors. "Sheeting Design" provides only preliminary analysis.
Final analysis of multiplied anchored walls should be provided by "Sheeting Check" program
(elasto-plastic nonlinear method).
The help in the program "Sheeting Design" includes the folowing topics:

Project Settings Profile Soils Assign Geometry Material
Anchors Props Supports Pressure Terrain Water Surcharge
Determinati
on
Applied Earthquake Stage Analysis Dimensionin Stability
Forces Settings g
-355-
• Theory for analysis in the program "Sheeting Design":

Stress in Soil Body Earth Pressures Sheeting Design Braced Sheeting
• Outputs
Project
Frame "Project"
Settings
the analysis.
-356-
Frame "Settings"
Profile
-357-
Frame "Profile"
Soils
-358-
Frame "Soils"
Basic Data
conditions.
-359-
Assign
-360-
Frame "Assign"
Geometry
The "Geometry" frame is used to specify the depth of a construction ditch and shape of the
terrain in front The selected shape with a graphic hint ("Parameter chart") appears in the
left part of the frame. The dimensions of a structure can be edited either in the frame by
The frame can be further used to input surcharge of a construction ditch bottom.
The cross-section type is also entered in this frame. When loading data from older version
"Sheeting Design" program, the cross-section is entered as "not input". Editing cross-section is
performed using the "Edit" button.
The cross-section type does not affect the analysis of internal forces.
Results of the assessment of cross-section are shown in the frame "Dimensioning".
-361-
Frame "Geometry"
Material
The frame "Material" allows to enter material parameters. The appearance of the frame
varies according to the selected material (concrete, steel, timber, plastic) in the frame
"Geometry".
concrete, steel, timber or plastic structures set in the "Materials and standards" tab.
-362-
Frame "Material"
Anchors
The "Anchors" frame contains a table with a list of input anchors. Adding anchors is
performed in the "New anchor" dialog window. The input anchors can be edited on the
desktop with the help of active objects.
-363-
Frame "Anchors"
Props
The "Props" frame contains a table with a list input props. Adding props is performed in the
"New prop" dialog window. The input props can also be edited on the desktop with the help of
active dimensions or active objects, respectively.
-364-
Frame "Props"
Supports
The "Supports" frame contains a table with a list of input supports. Adding supports is
performed in the "New support" dialog window. The input supports can also be edited on the
desktop with the help of active dimensions or active objects, respectively.
-365-
Frame "Supports"
Pressure Determination
The "Pressure Determination" frame is used to specify the earth pressures acting on the
wall.
The type of pressure acting on the wall can be specified as active, at rest or increased
active - according to the allowable wall deformation. It is also possible to define minimum
dimensioning pressure, which is required by many standards.
Input of increased active pressure

Upper bar with buttons determines whether the calculated earth pressure is redistributed.
-366-
Option 1 is used for non-anchored walls ( ) - there is no redistribution of pressure.

For anchored and strutted walls it is appropriate to use a redistribution of earth
pressures. Additional options (buttons) are for various possibilities of pressure redistribution.
The last option ( ) allows to input any distribution of final earth pressure manually -
this pressure does not depend on input geological profile.
The program allows to enter a position of null point, but it is recommended to let it calculate
automatically.
Frame "Pressure determination"
Redistribution of Earth Pressures

The program allows to choose the most common shapes of redistributed pressure.
The choice of redistributed pressure shape

Practices in using redistributions are very different by country. The program contains both
classical schemes of redistribution, then shapes according to the standards EAB, AASHTO.
-367-
The program is designed to be completely universal and user can redistribute the pressure
according to his habits.
For selections , the program calculates a position of maximal pressure

automatically according to the location of anchors (props). This variant is the easist for
entering and it is also recommended by authors of program.
For selections , , , it is necessary to enter coefficients (x1 až x6),

which determine final shape of redsitributed pressure.
The user can also specify, whether redistributed pressure acts to the null point (standard
procedure), or to the ditch bottom (EAB).
The procedure of calculating the pressure on the structure is as follows:
• the position of null point is calculated (the magnitude of passive pressure in front of
structure is the same as a magnitude of earth pressure behind the wall - the total sum of
the pressure at this point is zero)
• basic pressure behind structure is calculated (active, at rest, increased active) to the
depth of null point. The minimum dimensioning pressure can be considered.
• redistributed pressure with the same area as the area of basic pressure is calculated.
Only a basic pressure (calculated from geological profile) is redistributed. The pressure
from surcharge or water pressure are not redistributed.
• the pressure from surcharge, water or earthquake is added to the redistributed pressure
(total pressure)
All pressures are drawn on the desktop:
Graphical representation of pressures

Visualization of pressures can be activated in the frame "Drawing settings". Settings of colors
and types of lines can be edited in the dialog window "Drawing Styles Administrator".
Literature:
EAB - 2012 Ernst & Sohn A Wiley Company, 5.Auflage, Empfehlungen des Arbeitskreises
-368-
"Baugruben".
AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications, Seventh Edition, 2014.
Terrain
Frame "Terrain"
Water
-369-

Frame "Water"
Surcharge
analysis.
Analysis of earth pressures due to surcharge is described in the theoretical part of the help,
-370-
Frame "Surcharge"
Applied Forces
(EN1997, LRFD).
-371-
Earthquake
-372-
Frame "Earthquake"
Stage Settings
Analysis
The "Analysis" frame displays the analysis results.
The frame has two variants. The first variant applies to a non-anchored wall (sheet pile) and
-373-
the second one to an anchored (strutted) wall.

It is possible to enter a coefficient of reduction of passive earth pressure for both variants.
Using the verification methodology Limit States or Safety Factor, it is possible to specify factor
of safety for a non-anchored wall.
A type of heel support (fixed, free) is specified for an anchored wall.
When performing the analysis according to EN 1997 or LRFD the design coefficients are
introduced in the "Pressure Analysis" tab. Providing the analysis according to Design approach
1, it is necessary to also enter the combination number.
The analysis results are displayed on the desktop. Visualization of results can be adjusted in
the frame "Drawing Settings".
Frame "Analysis" - non-anchored wall
-374-
Frame "Analysis" - anchored wall
Dimensioning
In the frame "Dimensioning", it is possible to display an envelope of internal forces and
displacements from all analyses and stages of constructions. Normally, the envelope is
constructed from the results of all construction stages, however, it can only be created from
the selected stages. The "Modify" button opens the dialog window "Construction stage
selection", where it is possible to select the constructions stages that are used to generate
the current envelope (by pressing corresponding buttons).
The maximum values of calculated internal forces (bending moments and shear forces) are
displayed at the bottom part of the frame.
The program allows to check reinforced concrete, steel, timber and plastic cross-sections (by
checking the option "Check cross-section").
When checking the cross-section, it is possible to input the reduction coefficient of bearing
capacity, which multiplies values of internal forces. For dimensioning of steel cross-sections, it
is possible to assume influence of normal force in these ways:
• normal forces - do not consider: program doesn't consider influence of normal force
• normal forces - input: user-defined value of normal force N [kN/m, lbf/ft]
-375-
Stability
The "Stability" frame serves to export designed wall to other programs - "Slope Stability"
(verification of global stability) and "Sheeting Check" (calculation of deformations and
modeling of the real behavior of the structure, assessment of anchors and anchor system).
In the frame is input the Depth of the structure in soil , which is the same for all
construction stages. For anchored walls the corresponding "Anchor force" should be specified.
The program displays minimum or recommended depth of structure in soil - the depth
based on results from all analysis from all construction stages. If the input depth is greater
than the calculated necessary depth, information is displayed green, otherwise red.
The "Slope Stability" button launches the "Slope stability" program and all necessary data
are transferred into it. The program allows to check the overall stability of structure. The
button is available only if the program "Slope stability" is installed. After performing
calculations and leaving by "OK" button, the results are transferred to the protocol of the
calculation into the program "Sheeting design".
By pressing the "Data for Sheeting Check" button all data are copied to the clipboard. These
data can be paste into the program "Sheeting Check" as a new task.
-376-
Frame "Stability"
-377-
Program "Slope stability"
Program Sheeting Check

This program is used to analyze deep excavations and retaining structures by the method of
elasto-plastic non-linear analysis i.e. the magnitude of pressures acting upon a structure
depend on its deformation. It models real behavior of the structure during construction process
and determinates internal forces and deformations.
Preliminary design of wall dimensions, internal forces and anchor loads can be performed by
"Sheeting Design" program.
The help in the program "Sheeting Check" includes the folowing topics:
Project Settings Profile Modulus Kh Pressuremet Dilatometric Soils

er Tests Tests (DMT)
(PMT)
Geometry Material Pressure Assign Excavation Terrain Water
Determinati
on
Surcharge Applied Anchors Props Supports Earthquake Stage
-378-
Forces Settings
Analysis Internal External Heave Dimensionin Anchors
Stability Stability Failure g Verification
• Theory for analysis in the program "Sheeting Check":

Stress in Soil Earth Pressures Sheeting Check Dimensioning of Dimensioning of
Body Concrete Steel Cross-
Structures Sections
• Outputs
Project
Frame "Project"
Settings
The frame "Settings" allows to introduce the basic settings, such as standards and theories of
analysis, the way of proving safety of a structure and individual coefficients of the analysis.
-379-
The "Select settings" button allows to choose an already created setting from the "Settings
list".
When performing analysis according to EN 1997 or according to the theory of limit states, the
program enables to set whether to reduce the soil parameters for the calculation of limit
pressures. When modeling a real behavior of the structure we recommend not to reduce these
pressures.
The frame allows the user to specify subdivision of a wall in to finite elements (by default, the
number of elements equals 40) and the specify whether the structure is loaded by the
minimum dimensioning pressure.
Frame "Settings"
Profile
-380-
Frame "Profile"
Modulus Kh
This frame serves to specify a type of analysis for calculation of the modulus of subsoil
reaction, which is an important input parameter when analyzing a sheeting structure by using
the method of dependent pressures.
The way of calculation of the modulus of subsoil reaction kh is selected in the "Settings" frame
(in the "Edit current settings" dialog window in the "Pressure Analysis" tab).
The frame can take different forms depending on the selected method of calculation:
• standard (option "analyze – Schmitt", "analyze – Chadeisson", "manual iteration" or
"automatic iteration")
• input (selecting the option "Input by distribution" opens a table in the frame that
allows to input the values of the modulus of subsoil reaction kh both in front of and behind
the structure. For option "Input as a soil parameter" the modulus kh is specified in the
"Soils" frame, where the modulus of subsoil reaction is considered either as linear, or as
nonlinear - curve)
• pressiometer PMT (modulus of subsoil reaction kh is input either by pressuremeter test,
or as a parameter of soil in the "Soils" frame. Then there is specified method of calculation
- according to NF P 94-282 or according to Menard)
• chinese standards (for "m" method is defined horizontal displacement at the ditch
-381-
3
bottom vb [mm] and magnitude of modulus A [MN/m ], or option input as a parameter of
soil – "c" method, "k" or "m" method)
Frame "Modulus kh"
PMTs
The frame "PMT" contains a table with list of pressuremeter tests (PMT).
-382-
Frame "PMT"
The results of pressuremeter tests (PMT) can be imported into the program by inserting the file
in different formats (eg. *.TXT, *.CSV, *.XLSX, *.ODS).
Data of PMTs can be copied within "Micropile", "Sheeting Check", "Anti-Slide Pile",
"Spread Footing CPT" and "Stratigraphy" programs using "GeoClipboard".
Note: The frame is accessible only in the case, when an option "pressiometer PMT" is selected
for determination of subsoil reaction modulus in the "Settings" frame (the "Pressure Analysis"
tab).
DMT
The frame "DMT" serves to input the way of introducing of constrained soil modulus into the
program - either as a parameter of soil (by checking the option "Input MDMT as a soil
parameter"), or by importing of a dilatometric tests (DMT).
This frame contains a table with list of the input values of dilatometric tests (DMT).
-383-
Frame "Dilatometric tests (DMT)"

If during the evaluation of dilatometric test, the zero value of constrained soil modulus MDMT
is measured, then program allows the automatic correction of measurement errors - the
arithmetic average of the next upper and lower non-zero value of MDMT is considered instead
of zero value in the calculation.
It is also necessary to enter a coefficient of reduction B.
The results of dilatometric test (DMT) can be imported into the program by inserting the file in
format UNI (*.uni).
Data of DMTs can be copied within "Spread Footing", "Sheeting Check", "Anti-Slide Pile"
and "Stratigraphy" programs using "GeoClipboard".
Note: The frame is accessible only in the case, when an option "dilatometer DMT" is selected
tab).
Soils
"Basic data", "Earth pressure at rest", "Uplift pressure" and "Modulus of subsoil reaction".
-384-
Frame "Soils"
Basic Data
conditions.
-385-
Geometry
The "Geometry" frame contains a table with a list of input structural sections forming the
sheeting structure. For each section the table stores its cross-sectional characteristics (A -
area, I - Moment of inertia - these variables are always expressed with respect to 1 m run of
structure length) and material characteristics (E - Modulus of elasticity, G - Shear modulus).
Adding sections is performed in the "New section" dialog window.
The input sections can be further edited on the desktop with the help of active objects -
double-click on a structure opens a dialog window with a given section.
-386-
Frame "Geometry"
Material
varies according to the selected material (concrete, steel, timber, plastic) in the frame
"Geometry".
-387-
Frame "Material"
The frame "Pressure determination" allows to input the values of earth pressure behind
sheeting structure manually (by pressing the "Input" button). The frame is accessible only in
the case, when in the "Settings" frame is selected an option "JGJ 120-2012" (the "Pressure
Analysis" tab).
This frame contains a table with list of the input values of earth pressure. Adding of these
values is performed in the "New point" dialog window, where is specified the depth of point
[m] and the value of earth pressure [kPa].
It is possible to calculate the values of active earth pressure, or earth pressure at rest
automatically (by pressing the "Calculate" button).
-388-
Frame "Pressure determiaterial"
Assign
-389-
Frame "Assign"
Excavation
The "Excavation" frame serves to input the depth of a construction ditch h [m] and by
pressing the button to select the shape of the ditch base in front of sheeting structure. The
selected shape with a graphic hint "Chart of parameters" appears in the left part of the
frame. The dimensions of a structure can be edited either in the frame by inserting values into
input fields, or on the desktop with the help of active dimensions.
The frame also allows to specify ditch bottom surcharge or a thickness of layer of landfill of soil
below the ditch bottom (the soil can be selected from a combo list containing soils input in the
frame "Soils"). When introducing the landfill of soil with braced sheeting it is assumed that
there is a sheeted structure in the location of landfill of soil, i.e., all pressures are acting on the
entire width of a structure as above the construction ditch base.
In this frame it's possible to input strenghtening of the soil at the heel of sheeting structure.
The principle of calculation is described in more detail herein.
-390-
Frame "Excavation"
Terrain
The "Terrain" frame allows to specify shape of the terrain by pressing the button. The selected
shape with graphic hint ("Chart of parameters") of input values is displayed in the left part of
the frame. The terrain shape can be edited either in the frame by inserting values into input
table with a list of terrain points. The first point with coordinates [ 0,0] coincides with the top
-391-
Frame "Terrain"
Water
The "Water" frame allows to select the type of water by pressing the button. The selected
left part of the frame. Parameters of water (h1, h2 etc.) can be edited either in the frame by
The last option is a manual input of pore pressure both in front of and behind the structure.
Two tabs "In front of structure" and "Behind structure" appear with tables. The table is
filled with values of pore pressure in front of, or behind the structure at a depth of " z" (z-axis).
The ground water table (GWT) can also be specified above the structure or earth profile,
The program further allows to specify a depth of tensile crack ht filled with water.
-392-
Frame "Water"
Surcharge
analysis.
Analysis of earth pressures due to surcharge is described in the theoretical part of the help,
-393-
Frame "Surcharge"
Applied Forces
Applied forces represent an additional load on the structure of the wall, braced sheeting or
MSE wall. We can model such as an anchoring crash barrier, crash vehicle, load from billboards
and hoardings etc. Program doesn`t adjust the applied forces in the calculation in any way
except multiplying them with the corresponding coefficients according to the selected type of
load (EN1997, LRFD).
External load acting to the ground surface is necessary to define as a surcharge.
-394-
Anchors
The anchor is automatically placed on already deformed structure (displacement is obtained
from the previous construction stage).
Anchors can be entered as pre-stressed (not specified, prestressed bars, strand) and non-
prestressed (helical, non-prestressed bars, deadman). Stiffness of prestressed anchors
manifests itself in its own calculation in subsequent stages of construction. The pre-stressed
anchor stiffness becomes effective in next stages of construction. Due to the displacement of
the sheeting structure the forces in anchors are changed according to deformation.
In subsequent stages the anchor cannot be changed, it's only possible to post-stress the
anchor.
-395-
Frame "Anchors"
Props
The "Props" frame contains a table with a list of input props. Adding props is performed in the
"New prop" dialog window. The input props can also be edited on the desktop with the help of
active dimensions or by active objects.
The prop is introduced on already deformed structure automatically (obtained from the
previous stage of construction). In subsequent stages the props can no longer be edited, it's
only possible to change stiffness of props. In the analysis props are modeled in the same way
as anchors but with the initial force equal to zero.
Note: The program doesn't check the prop bearing capacity neither for compression or for
buckling.
-396-
Frame "Props"
Supports
The "Supports" frame contains a table with a list of input supports. Adding supports is
performed in the "New support" dialog window. The input supports can also be edited on the
The support is input on already deformed structure automatically (obtained from the
previous stage of construction). In subsequent stages the supports can no longer be edited, it
is only possible to input forced displacement of supports.
-397-
Frame "Supports"
Earthquake
of the help in chapter "Influence earthquake".
-398-
Frame "Earthquake"
Stage Settings
-399-
Analysis
The frame "Analysis" displays the analysis results. Switching to this regime automatically runs
the analysis. The frame contains four buttons to show the analysis results:
Kh + pressures
Variation of the modulus of subsoil reaction is displayed in the left part of the desktop (by
default a blue color with hatching) is assumed. Referring to the method of depending pressures
some of the springs (values of modules of subsoil reaction) are removed (spring stiffness set
equal to zero) from the analysis. The analysis may fail to converge providing the critical
(limit) state developed both in front and behind the structure and there is not enough
constrains available (anchors, supports). The program exists without finding a solution. An
error message appears in the bottom part of the frame - such a case calls for modification in
problem input - e.g., add an anchor, change a depth of excavation, improve soil parameters,
etc.
Some construction stages display (by default a yellow dotted line is assumed) deformation at
the onset of mobilization of the earth pressure at rest - this is a complementary information
showing plastic deformation of a structure.
Distributions of limiting pressures (by default a green dashed line is assumed) are presented in
the right part of the window (passive pressure, pressure at rest and active pressure). The
actual pressure acting on a structure is plotted in a solid blue line.
Both deformed (by default a solid red color is assumed) and undeformed structure appears in
the right part of the desktop. Forces and displacements developed in anchors, supports and
props are also shown.
Internal forces
Plot of a structure together with forces acting in anchors, reactions and deformations of
supports and props appear in the left part of the desktop. Distributions of bending moment and
shear force are then plotted on the right.
Displacement + Stress
supports and props appear in the left part of the desktop. The deformed shape of a structure
together with overall pressure acting on a sheeting structure is then plotted on the right.
Terrain settlement
Plot of a structure is displayed in the left part of the desktop. Terrain settlement is plotted on
the right. Method for calculation of terrain settlement is selected in the frame "Settings" in
"Pressure Analysis" tab.
Providing the modulus of subsoil reaction is found by iteration it is necessary to check the
course of manual iteration in the dialog window "Iteration". Details are provided in the
theoretical part of the help, chapter "Modulus of subsoil reaction determined by iteration".
-400-
Frame "Analysis" - modulus of subsoil reaction, earth pressures and displacement
-401-
Frame "Analysis" - bending moment and shear force
-402-
Frame "Analysis" - displacement and earth pressure acting on structure
-403-
Frame "Analysis" - terrain settlement
Internal Stability
This frame serves to check the internal stability of anchors - the frame is therefore accessible
only in stages, in which the anchors are introduced. For each row of anchors the table shows
input anchor forces and the maximum allowable forces in each anchor. Overall check for
the most stressed row of anchors is displayed in the right part of the frame.
-404-
External Stability
By pressing the "External stability" button launches the "Slope stability" program. This
program then allows us to check the overall stability of the analyzed structure. The button is
available only if the program "Slope stability" is installed.
After completing all analyses press the "Exit and save" button to leave the program - all data
are then carried over to the analysis protocol of the "Sheeting check" program.
-405-
Frame "External stability"
Heave Failure
This frame "Heave failure" serves to check the failure by heave and failure by piping. The
frame is accessible only in the case, where the influence of water is considered as
"Hydrodynamic pressure" (the base of a structure is sunk into permeable subsoil, which allows
free water flow below the structure).
-406-
Frame "Heave failure"
Dimensioning
displacements from all analyses (stages of constructions). Normally, the envelope is
The maximum values of calculated internal forces (bending moments and shear forces) and
the magnitude of displacement are displayed at the bottom part of the frame.
The program allows to dimension reinforced concrete, steel and timber cross-sections (by
checking the option "Check cross-section").
When checking the cross-section, it is possible to input the reduction coefficient of bearing
capacity, which reduces the overall bearing capacity of a cross-section. When performing the
analysis with the reduction of earth pressures this coefficient should be considered 1.0.
For analysis without earth pressures reduction (to ensure a realistic behavior of a sheeting
structure), it is necessary to increase the calculated forces, by adopting a coefficient greater
than 1.0 (For EN 1997 is the value in interval 1.35-1.5).
For dimensioning of steel cross-sections, it is possible to assume influence of normal force
in these ways:
• normal forces - do not consider: program doesn't consider influence of normal force.
-407-
• normal forces - from nearest anchor: program assumes maximum value of local
normal force near the anchor as N = F*sin α, where α represents slope of the anchor
• normal forces - sum of all anchors: program adds influence of normal force from input
anchors as the sum of influence of all anchors.
• normal forces - input: user-defined value of normal force N
The frame allows to perform a larger number of analyses pro dimensioning of a cross-section.
The "In detail" button at the right part of the frame opens the "Dimensioning" dialog
window to show detailed results.
Anchors Verification
The "Anchors verification" frame contains a table with a list of input anchors.
The overall bearing capacity of anchors is verified in this frame.
The anchors can be check for three different types of failure.
• Strength of anchor Rt
• Pull-out resistance (soil) Re
• Pull-out resistance (grouting) Rc
Computed bearing capacities of anchors are reduced by corresponding safety factor or
reduction coefficient, which are defined in the frame "Settings", tab "Anchors". The verification
of anchor is satisfactory, when the maximum force in the anchor Pmax is lower then all
-408-
computed bearing capacities.
Frame "Anchors verification"
Program Anti-Slide Pile

This program is used for design of pile walls stabilizing slope movement or increasing safety
factor of the slope. The first analysis should be done in the Slope Stability program, where the
active and passive forces acting on pile wall are computed. Next, the load and slip surface
position are transferred to the Anti-Slide Pile program, where other analyses are performed
(determination of internal forces on pile, pile deformation and dimensioning of pile
reinforcement).
The help in the program "Anti-Slide Pile" includes the folowing topics:
Project Settings Profile Modulus Kh Pressuremet Dilatometric Soils

er Tests Tests (DMT)
(PMT)
-409-
Geometry Material Pressure Rock Assign Front Face Terrain

Determinati
on
Water Surcharge Applied Anchors Supports Earthquake Stage
Forces Settings
Analysis Dimensionin Anchors
g Verification
• Theory for analysis in the program "Anti-Slide Pile":

Stress in Soil Earth Sheeting Anti-Slide Pile Dimensioning Dimensioning
Body Pressures Check of Concrete of Steel Cross-
Structures Sections
• Outputs
Project
Frame "Project"
-410-
Settings
The frame "Settings" allows to introduce the basic settings, such as standards and theories of
analysis, the way of proving safety of a structure and individual coefficients of the analysis.
When performing analysis according to EN 1997 or according to the theory of limit states, the
program enables to set whether to reduce the soil parameters for the calculation of limit
pressures. When modeling a real behavior of the structure we recommend not to reduce these
pressures.
The frame allows the user to specify subdivision of a wall in to finite elements (by default, the
number of elements equals 40) and the specify whether the structure is loaded by the
minimum dimensioning pressure.
Frame "Settings"
Profile
The "Profile" frame contains a table with a list of input interfaces. After specifying interfaces
it's possible to edit thicknesses of individual layers with the help of active dimensions.
-411-
Frame "Profile"
Modulus Kh
This frame serves to specify a type of analysis for calculation of the modulus of subsoil
reaction, which is an important input parameter when analyzing a sheeting structure by using
the method of dependent pressures.
The way of calculation of the modulus of subsoil reaction kh is selected in the "Settings" frame
(in the "Edit current settings" dialog window in the "Pressure Analysis" tab).
The frame can take different forms depending on the selected method of calculation:
• standard (option "analyze – Schmitt", "analyze – Chadeisson", "manual iteration" or
"automatic iteration")
• input (selecting the option "Input by distribution" opens a table in the frame that
allows to input the values of the modulus of subsoil reaction kh both in front of and behind
the structure. For option "Input as a soil parameter" the modulus kh is specified in the
"Soils" frame, where the modulus of subsoil reaction is considered either as linear, or as
nonlinear - curve)
• pressiometer PMT (modulus of subsoil reaction kh is input either by pressuremeter test,
or as a parameter of soil in the "Soils" frame. Then there is specified method of calculation
- according to NF P 94-282 or according to Menard)
• chinese standards (for "m" method is defined horizontal displacement at the ditch
-412-
3
bottom vb [mm] and magnitude of modulus A [MN/m ], or option input as a parameter of
soil – "c" method, "k" or "m" method)
Frame "Modulus kh" - selection "input by distribution"
Frame "Modulus kh" - selection "pressiometer Ménard"
-413-
Frame "Modulus kh" - selection "Chinese standards"
PMTs
The frame "PMTs" contains a table with list of pressuremeter tests (PMT).
Frame "Pressuremeter tests"

Data of PMTs can be copied within "Micropile", "Sheeting Check", "Anti-Slide Pile",
"Spread Footing CPT" and "Stratigraphy" programs using "GeoClipboard".
Note: The frame is accessible only in the case, when an option "pressiometer PMT" is selected
-414-
tab).
DMT
Frame "Dilatometric tests (DMT)"

It is also necessary to enter a coefficient of reduction B.
format UNI (*.uni).Data of DMTs can be copied within "Spread Footing", "Sheeting Check",
"Anti-Slide Pile" and "Stratigraphy" programs using "GeoClipboard".
Note: The frame is accessible only in the case, when an option "dilatometer DMT" is selected
tab).
-415-
Soils
"Basic data", "Earth pressure at rest", "Uplift pressure" and "Modulus of subsoil reaction".
Frame "Soils"
Basic Data
conditions.
-416-
Geometry
The "Geometry" frame contains a table with a list of input structural sections forming the anti-
slide pile. For each section the table stores its cross-sectional characteristics (A - area, I -
Moment of inertia - these variables are always expressed with respect to 1 m run of structure
length) and material characteristics (E - Modulus of elasticity, G - Shear modulus ).
Adding sections is performed in the "New section" dialog window.
The input sections can be further edited on the desktop with the help of active objects -
double-click on a structure opens a dialog window with a given section.
-417-
Frame "Geometry"
Material
varies according to the selected material (concrete, steel, timber) in the frame "Geometry".
-418-
Frame "Material"
The frame "Pressure determination" allows to input the depth of the slip surface and
load on the anti-slide pile above the slip surface.
If the standard selection "Calculate" is checked, the load is specified by active horizontal
force and passive horizontal force that acts on the pile above the input slip surface. Active and
passive forces can be calculated in the "Slope stability" program and transferred into the
program "Anti-Slide Pile". Next, the shape of the pressure distribution must be specified
behind (active force) and in front of the pile (passive force). Program does NOT INCREASE
the input passive and active force by any partial factor during the analysis - it is necessary to
determine them according to required standards and rules.
If the forces are obtained from the Slope stability program, they correspond with the way of
analysis set in the program. For example, when analysis is done according to Eurocode EN
1997-1, the received values are already design values of forces.
The values of the resulting pressure acting on the structure above the slip surface can be input
in the table (option "Input") too.
-419-
Frame "Pressure Determination"
Rock
The frame "Rock" allows to input the length of the pile fixed into rock l [m] and rock bearing
capacity R [MPa].
The rock is only modelled as elastic material and no limit passive pressure is considered -
contact stress can reach any values. In the frame "Analysis" the program checks, if maximum
stress does not exceed design rock bearing capacity. Active pressure of the rock is not
considered.
Note: In many cases, the slip surface follows the rock subsoil, hence this case should be
always investigated.
-420-
Frame "Rock"
Assign
-421-
Frame "Assign"
Front Face
The "Front Face" frame serves to input the shape of the terrain in front of the structure. The
selected shape with a graphical hint appears in the left part of the frame. The dimensions of a
structure can be edited either in the frame by inserting values into input fields, or on the
In this frame, it is possible to input strenghtening of the soil at heel of the piles. The
principle of calculation is described in more detail herein.
-422-
Frame "Front Face"
Terrain
-423-
Frame "Terrain"
Water
The "Water" frame allows to select the type of water by pressing the appropriate button.
Parameters of water can be edited either in the frame by inserting values into input fields, or
on the desktop with the help of active dimensions.
-424-
Frame "Water"
Surcharge
downwards) when inputting the surcharge at a certain depth.
analysis.
-425-
Frame "Surcharge"
Applied Forces
(editing) forces is performed in the "New force" dialog window. The input forces can also be
edited on the desktop with the help of active objects.
Applied forces represent an additional load on the structure of the wall, braced sheeting or
MSE wall. We can model such as an anchoring crash barrier, crash vehicle, load from billboards
and hoardings etc. Program doesn`t adjust the applied forces in the calculation in any way
except multiplying them with the corresponding coefficients according to the selected type of
load (EN1997, LRFD).
-426-
Anchors
The "Anchors" frame contains a table with a list of input anchors. Adding (editing) anchors is
The anchor is automatically placed on already deformed structure (displacement is obtained
Anchors can be entered as pre-stressed (undefined, prestressed bars, strand) and non-
prestressed (helical, non-prestressed bars, deadman). Stiffness of prestressed anchors
manifests itself in its own calculation in subsequent stages of construction. The pre-stressed
anchor stiffness becomes effective in next stages of construction. Due to the displacement of
the structure the forces in anchors are changed according to its deformation.
In subsequent stages the anchor cannot be changed, it's only possible to post-stress the
anchor.
-427-
Frame "Anchors"
Supports
The "Supports" frame contains a table with a list of input supports. Adding (editing) supports
is performed in the "New support (Edit support)" dialog window. The input supports can
also be edited on the desktop with the help of active dimensions or by active objects.
The support is automatically placed on already deformed structure (displacement is obtained
In subsequent stages the supports can no longer be edited, it is only possible to input forced
displacement of supports.
-428-
Frame "Supports"
Earthquake
of the help in chapter "Influence earthquake".
-429-
Frame "Earthquake"
Stage Settings
-430-
Analysis
The frame "Analysis" displays the results of analysis of the anti-slide pile. Switching to this
mode automatically runs the analysis.
The maximum values of internal forces and displacement are shown in the bottom window.
If the pile is fixed in the rock, the check of the rock bearing capacity is performed.
The frame contains three options to show the analysis results, that can be changed by buttons
in the right part of the frame.
• Modulus of subgrade reaction + earth pressures
Variation of the modulus of subsoil reaction is displayed in the left part of the desktop (by
default a blue color with hatching) is assumed. Referring to the method of depending pressures
some of the springs (values of modules of subsoil reaction) are removed (spring stiffness set
equal to zero) from the analysis. The analysis may fail to converge providing the critical
(limit) state developed both in front and behind the structure and there is not enough
constrains available (anchors, supports). The program exists without finding a solution. An
error message appears in the bottom part of the frame - such a case calls for modification in
problem input - e.g., add an anchor, change a depth of excavation, improve soil parameters,
etc.
Distributions of limiting pressures (by default a green dashed line is assumed) are presented in
the right part of the window (passive pressure, pressure at rest and active pressure). The
actual pressure acting on a structure is plotted in a solid blue line.
Both deformed (by default a solid red color is assumed) and undeformed structure appears in
the right part of the desktop. Forces and displacements developed in anchors, supports and
props are also shown.
• Moment + Shear force
supports and props appear in the left part of the desktop. Distributions of bending moment and
shear force are then plotted on the right.
• Displacement + Stress
supports and props appear in the left part of the desktop. The deformed shape of a structure
together with overall pressure acting on a sheeting structure is then plotted on the right.
Providing the modulus of subsoil reaction is found by iteration it is necessary to check the
course of manual iteration in the dialog window "Iteration". Details are provided in the
theoretical part of the help, chapter "Modulus of subsoil reaction determined by iteration".
-431-
Frame "Analysis" - modulus of subsoil reaction, earth pressures and displacement
-432-
Frame "Analysis" - bending moment and shear force
-433-
Frame "Analysis" - displacement and earth pressure acting on structure
Dimensioning
displacements from all analyses (stages of constructions). Normally, the envelope is
The maximum values of calculated internal forces (bending moments and shear forces) and
the magnitude of displacement are displayed at the bottom part of the frame.
The program allows to dimension steel-reinforced concrete and steel cross-sections (by
checking the option "Check cross-section"). When checking the cross-section, it is possible
to introduce the reduction coefficient of bearing capacity, which reduces the overall
bearing capacity of a cross-section. The magnitude of this coefficient depends on the way, how
active and passive forces (frame "Pressure determination") were computed. If these values are
design values (already increased by partial factors), this coefficient should be 1.0 - if not, this
coefficient should be higher then 1.0. (For EN 1997 is this value in interval 1.35 - 1.5).
The frame allows to perform a larger number of analyses pro dimensioning of a cross-section.
The "In detail" button at the right part of the frame opens the "Dimensioning" dialog
window to show detailed results.
-434-
Anchors Verification
The "Anchors verification" frame contains a table with a list of input anchors.
The overall bearing capacity of anchors is verified in this frame.
• Strength of anchor Rt
• Pull-out resistance (soil) Re
• Pull-out resistance (grouting) Rc
Computed bearing capacities of anchors are reduced by corresponding safety factor or
reduction coefficient, which are defined in the frame "Settings", tab "Anchors". The verification
of anchor is satisfactory, when the maximum force in the anchor Pmax is lower then all
computed bearing capacities.
-435-
Frame "Anchors verification"
Program Shaft
This program is used to analyze spatial earth pressures on circular shaft and determination of
internal forces on the structure.
The help in the program "Shaft" includes the folowing topics:

Project Settings Geometry Profile Soils Assign
Water Surcharge Stage Settings Load Analysis Dimensioning
• Theory for analysis in the program "Shaft":

Geostatic Strip Concentrated Line SurchargeConcentrated Shaft
Stress, Uplift Surcharge - Surcharge - - Active Earth Surcharge -
Pressure Active Earth Active Earth Pressure Earth Pressure
Pressure Pressure at Rest
-436-
• Outputs
Project
Frame "Project"
Settings
the analysis.
-437-
Settings of analysis parameters are performed in the "Pressure Analysis" tab.
Frame "Settings"
Geometry
In the frame "Geometry", the shaft type (flexible, semirigid, rigid) is selected and shaft
diameter d, shaft depth l and depth of walers.
The frame contains a table with a list of waler depths. Adding segments is performed in the
"New waler" dialog window.
Dimensions of the structure and depth of walers can be modified in the frame by editing values
in the input fields or on the desktop by using active dimension.
The program allows to export the geometry of a structure in *.DXF format.
-438-
Frame "Geometry"
Profile
-439-
Frame "Profile"
Soils
"Basic data" and "Uplift pressure".
-440-
Frame "Soils"
Basic data
This part of the window introduces basic parameters of soils - unit weight, angle of internal
friction and cohesion. The particular values are obtained from a geotechnical survey or
laboratory experiments. If these data are not available, it is possible to exploit built-in
database of soils, which contains the values of selected soil characteristics. The characteristics
-441-
Assign
-442-
Frame "Assign"
Water
The frame "Water" serves to enter a depth of ground water table.
The values can be edited either in the frame by entering values into particular fields, or on the
The GWT changes the geostatic stress in the soil profile.
-443-
Frame "Water"
Surcharge
performed in the "New surcharge" dialog window. The input surcharges can also be edited on
It is possible to input surcharge as permanent, variable or accidental. Type of surcharge is
either surface or local. The final effect is multiplied by corresponding verification coefficient
according to the type of surcharge.
In case of considering surcharge in a different depth then on surface (for example foundation
of surrounding buildings), depth h under the surface is input (positive direction downwards).
-444-
Frame "Surcharge"
Dialog window "New surcharge"
-445-
Stage settings
Load Analysis
The frame "Load analysis" allows to determine the final load in vertical direction, final load
on the walers or in the input depth (for shafts without walers). Program computes all partial
loads, multiplies them by corresponding partial factors and shows the final load on the screen.
Calculated uniform earth pressure can be modified (in the complience with DIN or SNIP
standards) by reduction coefficient, so the former "circular" load is changes to "elliptical". It
is possible to specify the way of modification (increase and decrease the load, only decrease
the load) and the value of the reduction coefficient (recommended value is 25 %).
Computed load is the input for analysis of internal forces in the frame "Dimensioning". Program
automatically computes the load on all walers or in input depth (shaft without walers).
Several computations can be carried out for a single task.This is very useful for determination
of combinations of load cases - in the frame "Dimensioning" you can work with all here
computed combinations.
• Verification according to the safety factor, or the theory of limit states - the last column in
the table allows for inputting the design coefficients, which multiplies the calculated
The analysis results are displayed on the desktop and are updated immediately for an arbitrary
change in input data or setting. Visualization of results can be adjusted in the frame "Drawing
Settings".
-446-
Frame "Load analysis"
Dimensioning
In the frame "Dimensioning", the program computes the internal forces on the shaft for the
load, already defined in the frame "Analysis". Two types of analysis can be performed:
• internal forces in vertical direction
• internal forces on walers or in specified depth (for shafts without walers)
The analysis is performed for the selected load or the envelopes of internal forces computed
for all specified loads (load cases).
Several computations can be carried out for a single task. Maximum values of internal forces
are displayed in the output window. The "In detail" button opens a dialog window that
contains detailed listing of dimensioning results.
When analysing in vertical direction, the program allows to select specific section (considering
local surcharge is input, so more sections are available) or compute envelope of internal forces
for all sections.
-447-
Frame "Dimensioning" - vertical direction

When analysing in horizontal direction (Internal forces on the waler or in input depth), the
modulus of subsoil reaction has to be inputed for the soil in a specified depth.
The program shows the load, bending moment and shear force - the rendering form is defined
in the part "Visualization". The "Maximum values" button hides all values except the
maximum values.
Part of the picture is marked with a bold line - this the the part of the shaft, that deforms into
soil. In this part, the subsoil springs are considered in the analysis by polygonal method.
-448-
Frame "Dimensioning" - waler
Program Slope Stability

This program is used to perform slope stability analysis (embankments, earth cuts, anchored
retaining structures, MSE walls, etc.). The slip surface is considered as circular (Bishop,
Fellenius/Petterson, Janbu, Morgenstern-Price or Spencer methods) or polygonal (Sarma,
Janbu, Morgenstern-Price or Spencer methods).
The help in the program "Slope Stability" includes the folowing topics:

Project Settings Interface Embankmen Earth Cut Soils Rigid Body
t
Assign Anchors Nails Reinforceme Anti-Slide Surcharge Water
nts Piles
Earthquake Stage Analysis
Settings
-449-
• Theory for analysis in the program "Slope Stability":

Stress in Soil Body Parameters of Rocks Anti-Slide Pile Slope Stability
• Outputs
Project
Frame "Project"
Settings
the analysis.
The "Select settings" button allows to choose an already created setting from the "Settings
list".
-450-

Settings of analysis parameters are performed in the "Materials and standards" and "Stability
analysis" tabs.
When calculating the pull-out resistance of nail, skin friction can be inserted as a soil
parameter.
Frame "Settings"
Interface
The "Interface" frame serves to introduce individual soil interfaces into the soil body. Detailed
description how to deal with interfaces is described herein.
The program makes it possible to import or export interfaces in the *.DXF format. Input
interfaces can be copied within all 2D GEO5 programs using "GeoClipboard".
-451-
Frame "Interface"
Embankment
The "Embankment" frame allows to input interfaces to create an embankment above the
current terrain. The frame contains a table with a list of interfaces forming the embankment. A
table listing the points of currently selected interface of the embankment is displayed in the
mid section of the frame. Inputting an embankment interface follows the same steps as used
for standard interfaces.
An embankment cannot be specified in the first stage of construction. An embankment cannot
be built if there is an earth cut already specified in a given stage - in such a case either a new
stage of construction must be introduced for embankment input or the existing open cut must
be first removed.
Input interfaces of an embankment can be copied within all 2D GEO5 programs using
"GeoClipboard".
-452-
Frame "Embankment"
Earth Cut
The "Earth cut" frame serves to specify the shape of an open cut. This function allows to
modify the terrain profile within a given stage of construction. Several earth cuts can be
introduced at the same time. In such a case some of the lines in the cut appear partially above
the terrain.
A table listing individual interface points is displayed in the left part of the frame. Inputting an
earth cut interface follows the same steps as used for standard interfaces.
An open cut cannot be specified in the first stage of construction. An earth cut cannot be built
if there is an embankment already specified in a given stage - in such a case either a new
stage of construction must be introduced for earth cut input or the existing embankment must
be first removed.
Input interfaces of an earth cut can be copied within all 2D GEO5 programs using
"GeoClipboard".
-453-
Frame "Earth cut"
Soils
"Basic data", "Uplift pressure", "Foliation", "Parameters for rapid draw down" and "Skin
friction" (see frame "Settings"). An input of parameters further depends on the selected type
of analysis (effective / total stress state), which is set in the combo list.
-454-
Frame "Soils"
Basic Data
The analysis method of slope stability differs for:
• drained conditions: for the slope stability calculations to determine equilibrium
conditions on the slip surface (circular, polygonal) is considered effective stress according
to the equation N*tgφef + cef*l.
• undrained conditions: in case of total stress for the calculation of passive forces on the
slip surface (circular, polygonal) is considered according to the equation cu*l.
In some countries it is customary to specify both shear strength parameters φu, cu for total
stress. In this case it is necessary to specify the task as an effective stress using parameters
φef, cef in program "Slope Stability".
The associated theory is described in detail in chapter "Slope stability analysis".
-455-
Rigid Body
The "Rigid bodies" frame contains a table with a list of input rigid bodies. The rigid bodies
serve to model regions with a high stiffness - e.g., sheeting structures or rock subgrade.
This table also provides information about the currently selected rigid body displayed in the
right part of the frame.
Adding rigid bodies is performed in the "Add new rigid body" dialog window. This window
serves to input the unit weight of the rigid body material and to select color and pattern. The
rigid bodies are in the frame "Assign" ordered after input soils.
Rigid bodies are introduced in the program as regions with high strength so they are not
intersected by a potential slip surface. Providing we wish the slip surface to cross a rigid
body (e.g., pile wall) it is recommended to model the rigid body as a soil with a cohesion
corresponding to pile bearing capacity against slip.
Input rigid bodies can be copied within all 2D GEO5 programs using "GeoClipboard".
-456-
Frame "Rigid bodies"
Assign
The procedure to assign soil into a layer is described in detail here.
Assign of soils can be copied within all 2D GEO5 programs using "GeoClipboard".
-457-
Frame "Assign"
Anchors
performed in the "New anchors" dialog window. The inputted anchors can be edited on the
The dialog window serves to input the location of anchor (starting point x, z), its free length l,
root length lk, inclination of anchor α, spacing between anchors b, shift of anchor row bs and
pre-stress force F. Starting point of the anchor is always attached to the terrain (ground
surface). All input parameters can be modified in the stage of construction, in which the
anchor was introduced. In subsequent stages the program allows to modify the magnitude of
an anchor pre-stress force (by checking the "Anchor post-stressing" option).
Influence of anchors on the analysis is described in more detail in the theoretical part of the
help.
-458-
Frame "Anchors"
Nails
The "Nails" frame contains a table with a list of input nails. Adding nails is performed in the
"New nails" dialog window. The inputted nails can be edited on the desktop with the help of
active objects.
The dialog window serves to input the location of nails (starting point x, z), its length l and
inclination of nail α, spacing between nails b, tension strength Rt pull out resistance Tp and nail
head strength Rf. Starting point of the nail is always attached to the terrain (ground
surface). All input parameters can be modified in the stage of construction, in which the nail
was introduced.
-459-
Frame "Nails"
Reinforcements
The "Reinforcements" frame contains a table with a list of input reinforcements. Adding
reinforcement is performed in the "New reinforcement" dialog window. The inputted
reinforcements can be edited on the desktop with the help of active objects.
The dialog window serves to input the location of reinforcement, anchorage length (from both
left and right end), tensile strength of reinforcement Rt and end of reinforcement (fixed or
free). For the calculation of bearing capacity is selected one of three options in a combo list:
"Calculate bearing capacity" (coefficient of iteraction C is defined), "Input anchorage
length" lk, or "Input bearing capacity" (Pull out resistance Tp is defined). All input
parameters can be modified only in the stage of construction, in which the reinforcement was
introduced. In subsequent stages the geo-reinforcement can only be removed.
Influence of reinforcements in the analysis is described in more detail in the theoretical part of
the help.
-460-
Frame "Reinforcements"
Anti-Slide Piles
The "Anti-slide piles" frame contains a table with a list of input piles. Piles are input one of
two ways (the "Add in dialog" or "Add graphically" button).
The "New pile", or "Modify pile properties" dialog window serves to input the location of
pile (coordinates x, z, length of pile l and spacing between piles b).
The "Locate to the terrain" button places the starting point of pile head on the ground
surface. Sometimes, an anti-slide pile can be located in mass directly (in this case it's possible
to analyze slope stability, but it's not possible to run the "Anti-Slide Pile" program).
Then it's specified the cross-section of pile (circle - diameter of pile d, rectangle -
dimensions sx, sy) and the parameters of pile - distribution of bearing capacity along the pile
length (linear, constant), maximum bearing capacity Vu, gradient K and direction of passive
force (prependicular to the pile, parallel to slip surface). All input parameters can be modified
in the stage of construction, in which the anti-slide pile was introduced. In subsequent stages
the anti-slide pile can only be removed.
Influence of anti-slide piles on the assessment of slope stability is described in more detail in
the theoretical part of the help. Other calculations of the anti-slide piles (analysis of an internal
forces, dimensioning of reinforcement of piles) are based on the analysis of active and passive
forces in the "Anti-Slide Pile" program.
-461-
Frame "Anti-slde piles"
Surcharge
All input parameters of a surcharge can be modified in the construction stage where the
surcharge was specified. Only the surcharge magnitude can be modified in all subsequent
construction stages (option "Adjust surcharge").
particular type of surcharge also renders the corresponding design coefficient. Accidental
surcharge with favorable effect is not considered in the analysis.
Influence of surcharge on stability analysis of slopes is described in the theoretical part of the
help.
-462-
Frame "Surcharge"
Water
The "Water" frame serves to set the type of ground water table. Six options to specify the
type of water are available from the combo list.
Inputting the ground water table or isolines, respectively, is identical with the standard input of
interfaces.
A field for specifying a value of coefficient Ru or pore pressure appears next to the table if
introducing water using isolines of Ru-interfaces or pore pressure, respectively. Pressing the
button with a blue arrow next to the input field opens the "Coefficient Ru" or "Pore
pressure" dialog window to enter the desired value. It is advantageous to input all values at
once using the "OK+ " and "OK+ ". The value of a given quantity found in a specific point
between two isolines is approximated by linear interpolation of values pertinent to given
isolines. For option "Coefficient Ru" the first (the most top one) is always identical with
terrain - it therefore cannot be deleted.
The ground water table (resp. table of suction or original GWT) is specified as continuous
interfaces, which can be located even above the terrain.
If the input data in individual stages are different, the program then allows for accepting the
data from the previous stage of construction by pressing the "Adopt" button.
Input interfaces of water can be copied within all 2D GEO5 programs using "GeoClipboard".
-463-
Frame "Water"
Earthquake
If not provided by measurements the coefficients Kh and Kv can be calculated following the
Slope stability analysis while accounting for earthquake is described in the theoretical part of
the help, chapter "Influence of earthquake".
-464-
Frame "Earthquake"
Stage Settings
Analysis
The "Analysis" frame displays the analysis results. Several analyses can be performed for a
single task.
-465-
The starting point in the slope stability analysis is the selection of the type of slip surface. The
input is available from a combo list in the left top part of the frame containing two options -
circular slip surface and polygonal slip surface. After introducing the slip surface the
analysis is started using the "Analyze" button. The analysis results appear in the right part of
the frame.
The type of analysis is selected in the mid section of the frame - seven methods are
available for the circular slip surface (Fellenius/Petterson, Bishop, Spencer, Janbu,
Morgenstern-Price, Shahunyants or ITFM), and six methods are available for the polygonal slip
surface (Sarma, Spencer, Janbu, Morgenstern-Price, Shahunyants or ITFM). For both cases of
the assumed slip surfaces it is possible to perform the analysis employing all methods at once
(in such a case, however, the slip surface cannot be optimized).
The actual verification of slope stability can be performed, depending on the settings in the
"Stability analysis" tab:
• Verification according to EN 1997, where the load is reduced by the analysis partial factors
and the verification is performed according to the theory of limit states.
• Verification according to the factor of safety
• Verification according to the theory of limit states
The combo list (items "Standard" and "Optimization") allows for optimizing either the
circular or polygonal slip surface. Choosing the "Optimization" option activates the
"Restrictions" button - pressing this button changes the frame appearance and makes it
possible to introduce restrictions on the optimization procedure.
It is also possible to specify how to deal with anchors in the analysis (box "Assume anchors
as infinite").
The slip surface, even the optimized one, must be introduced in the frame.
The analysis results appear in the left part of the frame and the optimized slip surface on the
desktop. Visualization of results can be adjusted in the frame "Drawing Settings".
-466-
Frame "Analysis" - circular slip surface
-467-
Frame "Analysis" - polygonal slip surface
Input of Slip Surface

Select the slip surface type from the list (circular, polygonal). It is possible to input the slip
surface according to its type in several ways:
• Circular slip surface
Graphically - after pressing the button , input three points that define the
circular slip surface using the left mouse button.
It is possible to change the input slip surface in the dialog window "Circular slip surface"
after pressing the button , or replace the slip surface using the mouse button by
pressing .
The button cancels the slip surface input.
The button converts the circular slip surface to polygonal.
The button removes the slip surface.
Textually - by pressing the button the dialog window "Circular slip

surface" is opened, and x, y coordinates, and the diameter is input.
• Polygonal slip surface
-468-
Graphically - by pressing the button on the tool bar, the slip surface input mode is
turned on - while adding, the process is the same as with interface input.
Textually - press the button and using the button above the table
a dialog window "New points" is opened. In the dialog window, the
points of the slip surface are added using the x, y coordinates.
The button converts polygonal slip surface into circle slip surface.
Functions of the rest of the buttons are the same as with the circular slip surface.
Restrictions on the Optimization Procedure

The "Analysis" frame allows (after pressing the "Restrictions") for specifying restrictions on
the optimization process.
Regardless of the assumed type of slip surface (circular, polygonal) it is possible to
introduce into the soil body (with the help of mouse) segments, which should not be crossed
by the optimized slip surface. These segments also appear in the table in the left part of the
frame.
Polygonal slip surface also allows for excluding some points from optimization, either
entirely or partially only in specified direction. "Keeping the point fixed" during optimization
process is achieved by checking the box in the table with corresponding point.
This input mode is quitted by pressing the red button "Return to analysis".
-469-
Frame "Analysis" - restrictions on slip surface optimization by segments
Height Multiplier
Providing the analyzed slope is too long or has small height the plotted slip surface might not
be sufficiently visible. This problem can be solved by selected courser scale in the vertical
direction with the help of height multiplier. The value of this multiplier is set in the frame
"Drawing Settings" dialog window, tab "Global 2D". Using standard setting ("Height
multiplier" equal to one) plots undistorted structure proportional to its dimensions.
Only polygonal slip surface can be input graphically when exploiting the height multiplier
option. The circular slip surface must be in such a case input manually in the "Circular slip
surface" dialog window using the "Input" button.
Setting height multiplier
-470-
Visualization of the resulting slip surface when using height multiplier
Program Rock Stability

This program is used to analyze the stability of rock slopes and walls for a specified type of
failure, including a planar or polygonal slip surface or rock wedge.
The help in the program "Rock Stability" includes the folowing topics:
• Input of data into individual frames: Project, Settings

Plane and Terrain Rock Slip Surface Slip Surface Water (Plane Water
polygonal (Plane) (Polygonal) Slip Surface) (Polygonal
slip surface: Slip Surface)
Surcharge Applied Anchors Earthquake Stage Analysis Analysis
Forces Settings (Plane Slip (Polygonal
Surface) Slip Surface)
Rock Geometry Slip Surface Parameters Water Surcharge Anchors

Wedge:
Earthquake Stage Analysis
Settings
-471-
• Theory for analysis in the program "Rock Stability":

Parameters of Rocks Rock Stability
• Outputs
Project
Frame "Project"
Settings
the analysis.
-472-
Settings of analysis parameters are performed in the "Stability analysis" tab.
The frame also allows to select the type of slip surface:
• Plane slip surface
• Polygonal slip surface
• Earth wedge
Frame "Settings"
Terrain - Plane and Polygonal Slip Surface

Two possibilites of terrain input are available it the frame "Terrain". Terrain can be defined by
sections of rock slope or it can be defined by coordinates X and Z. This frame contains a table
with a list of defined sections of a rock slope or table with list of coordinates of each terrain
point. In the program, the slope is always oriented from the left to the right.
The coordinates of the origin - the first point of terrain followed by defined sections - are
entered in the upper part of the frame if the method of definition of sections of rock slope
(inclination and length) is used.
Adding section is performed in the "New section" dialog window. These sections can also be
edited on desktop with the help of active objects.
Each section can be defined by its dip, by the overall length of section, by the horizontal length
and height of section of a rock slope. Only two selected values are used while the others are
determined by the program automatically (if more than two entry fields are checked than the
input and computation are not carried out). Both vertical and horizontal sections as well as
overhangs can be represented. Terrain must be defined from the bottom up.
-473-
In case of a proper input the program automatically plots the defined section on desktop
using dashed line, so that before accepting the defined section by pressing the "Add" button it
is possible to check, whether the section is correctly defined.
Frame "Terrain" - Inclination and length

If you use the coordinates for definiton of terrain, the surface of terrain must be defined from
bottom up. Adding point is performed in the "New point" dialog window. These points can
also be edited on desktop with the help of active objects. Both vertical and horizontal sections
as well as overhangs can be represented. The program allows importing points from table
data.
-474-
Frame "Terrain" - Coordinates
Rock
The frame "Rock" allows for entering the material parameters (approximate values) of a rock
slope (depending on the type of shear strength) including the unit weight of a rock. Three
types of shear strengths on a slip surface are available in the program:
• Mohr - Coulomb
• Barton - Bandis
• Hoek - Brown
Material parameters of rock are then entered based on the selected method.
-475-
Frame "Rock"
Slip Surface - Plane

The frame "Slip surface" serves to specify the shape and parameters of a plane slip surface.
The slip surface is defined by a point in the rock body and by its gradient. The program
automatically determines intersections of the slip surface with terrain.
The program also allows for defining a tension crack with an arbitrary gradient (not available
for stepped slip surface). The crack is defined by a horizontal distance from the origin and by
its gradient.
The plane slip surface can further be labeled as smooth, undulated or stepped.
-476-
Frame "Slip surface - plane"
Slip Surface - Polygonal

The frame "Slip surface" contains a table with a list of defined sections of a slip surface.
Adding section is performed in the "New section" dialog window. These sections can also be
edited on desktop with the help of active objects.
The coordinates of the slip surface origin - a point on the slip surface followed by other
sections - are entered in the upper part of the frame. This point can be found even out of the
soil body - the program then automatically calculates the intersection of slip surface with
terrain.
Individual sections of the slip surface can be defined by their dip, by the overall length of
section, by the horizontal length and height of section of a rock slope. Only two selected
values are used while the others are determined by the program automatically (if more than
two entry fields are checked than the input and computation are not carried out). Both vertical
and horizontal sections as well as overhangs can be represented.
In case of a proper input the program automatically plots the defined section on desktop
using dashed line, so that before accepting the defined section by pressing the "Add" button it
is possible to check, whether the section is correctly defined.
General assumptions for the calculation of polygonal slip surface are listed here.
-477-
Frame "Slip surface - polygonal"
Water - Plane Slip Surface

left part of the frame. Water parameters can be edited either in the frame by inserting values
Solution procedure when accounting for water is described in the theoretical part of the help
"Influence of water on slip surface".
-478-
Frame "Water" - plane slip surface
Water - Polygonal Slip Surface

The "Water" frame serves to input influence of water (not considered, input forces on
blocks, input horizontal water level, input GWT). Water parameters can be edited either in the
frame by inserting values into input fields, or on the desktop with the help of active
dimensions.
"Influence of water on polygonal slip surface".
For option "input forces on blocks" the forces of water acting on the slip surface Fv or forces
from the water acting on the inner sliding surface U are entered in the frame "Parameters"
(by pressing the button "Edit").
-479-
Frame "Water" - polygonal slip surface
Parameters - Polygonal Slip Surface

The frame "Parameters" contains a table with a list of blocks, which are created by entering a
polygonal slip surface. Parameters of individual blocks are edited in the "Edit block" dialog
window. Blocks can also be edited on desktop with the help of active objects.
The Mohr-Coulomb strength parameters on a slip surface and in the joints separating individual
blocks including the unit weight of a rock are specified here.
This window also serves to introduce forces due to water in rock blocks.
General assumptions for the calculation of polygonal slip surface are listed here.
-480-
Frame "Parameters" - polygonal slip surface
Dialog window "Edit block"
-481-
Surcharge - Plane and Polygonal Slip Surface

analysis.
Introducing surcharge forces into the analysis differs for a plane and a polygonal slip surface.
Frame "Surcharge" - plane and polygonal slip surface
Applied Forces - Plane Slip Surface

The "Applied forces" frame contains a table with a list of forces acting on a rock block.
Adding forces is performed in the "New force" dialog window. The input forces can be also
edited on the desktop with the help of active objects.
Applied forces represent an additional load on the rock block. We can model such as rope
anchorage of bridges or pedestrian overpath etc. Program doesn`t modify the applied forces in
the calculation in any way except multiplying them with the corresponding coefficients
according to the selected type of load (EN1997, LRFD).
External load acting to the ground surface is necessary to define as a surcharge.
-482-
Anchors - Plane and Polygonal Slip Surface

The following is specified - location (origin), depth, free length, anchor slope, spacing between
anchors and anchor force. The anchor origin can automatically be positioned on terrain (by
checking the particular entry field). All anchor parameters can be modified only in the
construction stage, where it was introduced. The subsequent stages allow only adjusting the
anchor force (option "Post-stressing anchor").
The plane slip surface allows input of active and passive anchors. Only active anchors are
allowed using the polygonal slip surface.
-483-
Frame "Anchors" - plane and polygonal slip surface
Earthquake
Rock slope analysis while accounting for earthquake is described in the theoretical part of the
help, chapter "Influence earthquake".
-484-
Frame "Earthquake"
Stage Settings
Analysis - Plane Slip Surface

single task.
-485-
Assessment of the rock slope for plane slip surface can be carried out according to the selected
verification methodology based on the input in the "Settings" frame. The analysis results are
displayed in the frame in the bottom part of desktop.
In this frame the program makes it possible to determine the anchor force needed for
obtaining the required safety factor. In such a case the "Compute required anchor force"
entry field must be checked and the slope of anchor force from horizontal must be entered.
Frame "Analysis" - plane slip surface
Analysis - Polygonal Slip Surface

single task.
Assessment of the rock slope for polygonal slip surface can be carried out according to the
selected verification methodology based on the input in the "Settings" frame. The analysis
results are displayed in the frame in the bottom part of desktop.
Visualization of results can be adjusted in the frame "Drawing Settings" frame.
-486-
Frame "Analysis" - polygonal slip surface
Geometry - Rock Wedge

The frame "Geometry" allows for entering the shape of a rock slope (earth wedge).
Geometry of earth wedge is defined by directions and gradients of fall lines of faces forming
the wedge. Geometry of earth wedge is displayed on desktop using 3D view or using
stereographic projection.
Pressing the button "Overhang rock face" can be modeled overhang rock faces.
-487-
Frame "Geometry" - rock wedge - 3D view
-488-
Frame "Geometry" - rock wedge - input using directions and gradients of fall lines of faces
Slip Surface - Rock Wedge

The frame "Slip surface" serves to enter the shape of a slip surface using directions and
gradients of fall lines of faces forming the wedge. A tension crack can also be defined.
Geometry of earth wedge is displayed on desktop using 3D view or using stereographic
projection.
-489-
Frame "Slip surface" - rock wedge - 3D view
-490-
Frame "Slip surface" - rock wedge - stereographic projection
Parameters - Rock Wedge

The frame "Parameters" serves to enter parameters of an earth wedge. The unit weight of a
rock and the Mohr-Coulomb strength parameters of slip surfaces must be specified.
projection.
-491-
Frame "Parameters" - rock wedge - 3D view
-492-
Frame "Parameters" - rock wedge - stereographic projection
Water - Rock Wedge

The frame "Water" allows for introducing water into analysis. If the influence of water is taken
into account then checking the respective entry field opens the field for entering the height of
GWT above the lowest point of an earth wedge.
"Influence of ground water".
projection.
-493-
Frame "Water" - rock wedge - 3D view
-494-
Frame "Water" - rock wedge - stereographic projection
Surcharge - Rock Wedge

performed in the "New surcharge" dialog window.
Surcharge forces are introduced into the stability analysis of earth wedge using resolution of
forces.
projection.
-495-
Frame "Surcharge" - rock wedge - 3D view
-496-
Frame "Surcharge" - rock wedge - stereographic projection
Anchors - Rock Wedge

performed in the "New anchor" dialog window.
Anchor forces are introduced into the stability analysis of earth wedge using resolution acting
of forces.
projection.
-497-
Frame "Anchors" - rock wedge - 3D view
-498-
Frame "Anchors" - rock wedge - stereographic projection
Analysis - Rock Wedge

single task.
Assessment of the rock slope, that is considered as rock wedge can be carried out according to
the selected verification methodology based on the input in the "Settings" frame. The analysis
results are displayed in the frame in the bottom part of desktop.
In this frame the program makes it possible to determine the anchor force needed for
obtaining the required safety factor. In such a case the "Compute required anchor force"
entry field must be checked and the slope of anchor force from horizontal and its direction
must be entered.
projection.
-499-
Frame "Analysis" - rock wedge - 3D view
-500-
Frame "Analysis" - rock wedge - stereographic projection
Program MSE Wall

This program is used for verification of mechanically stabilized earth walls and segmental
retaining walls reinforced by geogrids (georeinforcements).
The help in the program "MSE Wall" includes the folowing topics:

Project Settings Geometry Material Types of Reinforceme Reinforceme
Reinforceme nt (Blocks) nt
nts
Profile Soils Assign Terrain Water Water Surcharge
(Blocks)
Front Face Applied Earthquake Stage Verification Dimensionin Bearing
Resistance Forces Settings g Capacity
Slip on Internal Global Stability
Georeinforce Stability Stability
ment
-501-
• Theory for analysis in the program "MSE Wall":

Stress in Soil Earth Pressures Analysis of Walls Slope Stability MSE Wall
Body
• Outputs
Project
Frame "Project"
Settings
the analysis.
-502-
Settings of analysis parameters are performed in the "Materials and standards", "Wall analysis"
and "Stability analysis" tabs.
Frame "Settings"
Geometry
The "Geometry" frame allows by pressing the button for selecting the wall shape.
The shape of a wall can be edited either in the frame by inserting values into input fields, or on
the desktop with the help of active dimensions.
The first type of geometry (wall) enables to define foundation, for other types
(embankments) the program allows for inputting the cover. The selected type of geometry
influences other frames and their inputting modes (water, surcharge, reinforcement). The
following verification options are available for individual types of geometries:
Geometry type Verification
1 Wall with the option to define Verification, dimensioning, bearing capacity, internal
foundation stability, reinforcement bearing capacity, global
stability, slope stability
2 One-sided slope Verification, bearing capacity, internal stability, global
-503-

3 Two-sided slope Global stability, slope stability
4 One-sided zoned by benches Verification, bearing capacity, internal stability, global
5 Two-sided zoned by benches Global stability, slope stability
Frame "Geometry"
Material
The "Material" frame serves to choose parameters of the material adopted for blocks or cover.
Defining materials depends on the selected type of "Geometry". The first type of geometry
(structure with blocks) requires inputting the unit weight of blocks γ, cohesion c, friction f and
shear bearing capacity of joint Rs [kN/m].
The other types of geometry (structure without blocks) enable to consider a cover, which
requires inputting the unit weight γ and shear resistance Rs [kPa].
If the soil between the reinforcements is different than soil assigned to geological profile, then
program allows to specify this soil by checking the option "Input different reinforced soil".
Subsequently, in combo list user selects the type of soil (the combo list contains soils
introduced in the frame "Soils").
-504-
Frame "Material"
Types of Reinforcements
The "Types of reinforcements" frame contains a table with the list of input geo-
reinforcements and their parameters (long-term bearing capacity of reinforcements and
coefficients of interaction). Adding reinforcement is carried in the "New type of reinforcement"
dialog window.
-505-
Frame "Types of reinforcements"
Adding and Editing Type of Reinforcement

The "New type reinforcement (Edit type of reinforcement, Inserted type of
reinforcement)" dialog window contains the following items:
Reinforcement group • a combo list contains reinforcement group and individual types of
and Type of reinforcements from a database, or its allows for inputting the
reinforcement "user-defined" type of reinforcement
Short-term • the strength value can be changed only for reinforcements stored
characteristic with the help of "User's catalog"
strength
Analysis of long-term • a combo list enables to choose the way of analysis of long-term
strength strength: "input reduction factors" (direct input of factors),
"calculate reduction factors" (factors are determined based on
the selected lifetime of a reinforcement, soil Ph and grain size) or
"input strength" (already reduced long-term strength is input)
Reduction factors • the values of factors reducing a short-term tensile strength - can
be input directly or calculated based on the selected options in
combo lists (lifetime, chemistry, grain size)
Overall coefficient of • the value of factor to reduce a short-tem strength is input
model uncertainty
-506-
Long-term design • calculated value of s long-term tensile strength

strength
Slip resistance • the "Coefficient of direct slip along reinforcement" can be
input directly or calculated based on the type of soil
Pull out resistance • the "Coefficient of interaction of soil and geo-
reinforcement" can be input directly or calculated based on the
type of soil
The "User's catalog" button in the bottom part of the window opens the "User's catalog"
dialog window.
Dialog window "New type of reinforcement"
User's Catalog
The user's catalog allows to define and store own types of reinforcements and their material
characteristics. At first use of the catalog (has not been yet created) the program prompts a
-507-
warning message that no catalog was found. Then, pressing the button "OK" opens the "Save
as" dialog window that allows for entering the catalog name and saving it into a specified
location by pressing the "Save" button (by default a folder used for saving the project data is
assumed).
The program allows the user to create more than one catalog. The next catalog is created by
pressing the "New" button - the program asks, whether the current catalog should be replaced
(the currently loaded catalog is not DELETED!) and saves the new catalog under a new
name. The "Open" button allows for load an arbitrary user catalog and by pressing the "Save
as" button for saving it under a different name.
Dialog window at first use - user catalog of types of reinforcements

The "User catalog" dialog window contains a table listing the user defined reinforcements.
The "Add" button opens the "New type of reinforcement" dialog window that allows for
specifying and subsequent saving of characteristics of a new reinforcement into the catalog.
Buttons "Edit" and "Remove" serve to edit individual items in the table.
The "Adopt" button accepts the current reinforcement characteristics specified in the "New
type of reinforcement" dialog window and opens the "New type of reinforcement" dialog
window that allows for their modification and saving.
-508-
Dialog window "User's catalog"
Reinforcement
The "Reinforcement" frame contains a table with the list of input geo-reinforcements and
their geometries.
The "Generate" button opens the "Generate" dialog window that enables to set automatic
parameters of generating group of reinforcements. Geo-reinforcements can be positioned only
in joints between the blocks (checking the option "Apply reinforcement"). Next step is to
define the type of reinforcement, instalation type (continuous or strip), the initial and the last
block, the number of blocks to reenter the reinforcement, reinforcement geometry (the same
length of reinforcements or the same type of reinforcement finishing). The input
reinforcements can also be edited on the desktop with the help active dimensions or active
objects, respectively.
The "Edit" button opens the "Edit block" dialog window that enables to change the type of
reinforcement, its geometry or to specify whether the reinforcement between the blocks is to
be considered. The "Remove" button removes all geo-reinforcements.
-509-
Dialog window "Generate"
Reinforcement
The "Reinforcement" frame contains a table with the list of input groups of reinforcements
and their geometries.
-510-
Adding groups of geo-reinforcements is performed in the "New reinforcement" dialog
window. The input reinforcements can also be edited on the desktop with the help active
dimensions or active objects, respectively. Each input group of reinforcements requires input of
the number of reinforcements and type, instalation type (continuous or strip), height of the
first reinforcement, reinforcement spacing and their geometry.
Dialog window "Edit reinforcement"
Profile
-511-
Frame "Profile"
Soils
-512-
Frame "Soils"
Basic Data
One further needs to specify the angle of internal friction between the soil and structure, which
depends on the structure material and the type of soil. Possible values of this parameter are
listed in the table of recommended values.
-513-
Assign
-514-
Frame "Assign"
Terrain
table with a list of terrain points. The first point with coordinates [0, 0] coincides with the top
-515-
Frame "Terrain"
Water
-516-
Frame "Water"
Water
The "Water" frame allows for selecting the type of water. The ground water table can be
specified in two ways. The first option allows for specifying the height of a flat ground water
table. The second option enables to define an arbitrary shape of the ground water table with
the help of coordinates.
The water parameters (water table height, coordinates of points) can be edited either in the
frame by inserting values into the input fields or on the desktop using the active dimensions or
active blocks.
-517-
Frame "Water"
Surcharge
analysis.
-518-
Frame "Surcharge"

-519-
Applied Forces
(EN1997, LRFD).
-520-
Earthquake
-521-
Frame "Earthquake"
Stage Settings
-522-
Verification
The frame "Verification" shows the analysis results.
To perform verification of external stability the program creates a fictitious structure (wall)
which is then checked for overturning and slip. The fictitious wall consists of the structure
front face and a curve bounding the end points of geo-reinforcements. The fictitious structure
is loaded by an active earth pressure. The actual verification procedure is described in the
theoretical part of the help.
Several computations can be carried out for a single task. The computed forces are displayed
on the desktop and are automatically updated with every change of input data and setting. The
right part of the frame shows the result of verification of a wall against overturning and slip.
The "In detail" button opens the dialog window, which contains detailed listing of the results
of verification analysis.
-523-
Dimensioning
The "Dimensioning" frame enables to verify individual joints between blocks for overturning
and slip. The option "Entire wall" allows for verifying the overall structure above the
foundation joint as well as the foundation soil bearing capacity in the "Bearing capacity"
frame. Checking the option "Automatic verification" provides verification of the most critical
joint above the block. Or it is possible to input the "Joint above block number" to prompt
the program to perform the analysis for a given joint only. The procedure for wall dimensioning
is described in the theoretical part of the help.
forces.
The frame enables to perform more analyses of individual joints of the wall blocks. Various
design coefficients of individual forces can also be specified. The resulting forces are displayed
on the desktop and are updated with an arbitrary change in data or setting specified in the
frame. The "In detail" button opens the dialog window that contains detailed listing of the
dimensioning results.
-524-
Bearing Capacity
The "Bearing capacity" frame displays the results of the analysis of foundation soil bearing
capacity. Stress in the foundation joint (assumed constant) is determined from all forces
calculated in the "Verification" frame. In case of the input foundation, the bearing capacity is
determined from all forces calculated in the "Dimensioning" frame (the option "Entire wall"
must be selected). The programs "Spread footing" and "Spread footing CPT" adopts
individual verifications as load cases.
of the results.
into the program "MSE Wall". The "Spread footing"
-525-

CPT"
footing)

The "Slip on georeinforcement" frame enables to verify a slip of the reinforced soil block
along a geo-reinforcement checking the field "Reinforcement number". Selecting the option
"Automatic verification" provides verification of the most critical reinforcement. The
reinforced soil block is bounded by the wall front face, the checked geo-reinforcement, a
vertical line passing through the geo-reinforcement end point and terrain. The reinforced soil
block is loaded by an active earth pressure and by stabilizing forces due to geo-reinforcements
exceeding the boundary of the reinforced block.
The solution procedure of slip on georeinforcement is described in the theoretical part of the
-526-
help.
forces.
The frame enables to perform more verification analyses of individual geo-reinforcements.
Various design coefficients of individual forces can also be specified. The resulting forces are
displayed on the desktop and are updated with an arbitrary change in data or setting specified
in the frame. The "In detail" button opens the dialog window, which contains a detailed listing
of the results of internal stability.
Internal Stability
The "Internal stability" frame enables to check a strength of geo-reinforcement, bearing
capacity for pull-out from the earth body and strength of connections. Checking the field
"Reinforcement number" yields verification for individual reinforcements only. Selecting the
option "Automatic verification" provides verification of all reinforcements. The result for the
-527-
most critical reinforcement is displayed on the right part of the desktop. The solution
procedure of internal stability is described in the theoretical part of the help.
In the table,forces caused by an active earth pressure acting on the front face of the wall in
individual geo-reinforcements and points of application of these forces are shown. Further,
bearing capacity of geo-reinforcements for tensile strength Rt, pull-out resistance Tp and
resulting utilization is shown for each geo-reinforcement.
The frame enables to perform more analyses of individual geo-reinforcements. The calculated
forces are displayed on the desktop are automatically updated with every change of input data.
The "In detail" button opens the dialog window, which contains a detailed listing of the results
of reinforcement bearing capacity.
Frame "Reinforcement bearing capacity"
Global Stability
The "Global stability" frame enables to perform the slope stability analysis along a circular
slip surface. It is required to input parameters of the slip surface (center and radius or 3 points
input) and the analysis method (Spencer, Bishop).
By pressing the "Substitute" button, it is possible to input points of the slip surface using
mouse on the desktop.
If the "Optimize" option is checked, the stability analysis is performed on the most critical slip
surface. The program allows to "keep" the end points of the slip surface (by checking the
"Keep the left end point of the slip surface" or "Keep the right end point of the slip
-528-
surface" option).
The "Initial slip surface" enables to input the circular slip surface automatically. The analysis
is then performed after the "Analyze" button is pressed.
The actual slope stability verification analysis is carried out depending on the setting in the
"Stability analysis" tab:
• According to EN 1997, where load is reduced by the partial factors of analysis and the
verification is performed based on the theory of limit states.
• According to LRFD, the analysis is carried out similarly to the theory of limit states
• According to the safety factor / the theory of limit states depending on the setting in
"Wall analysis" tab.
More analyses can be performed for a single task. The "In detail" button opens the dialog
window, which contains a detailed listing of the results of stability analysis, i.e. parameters of
the resulting slip surface and the factor of safety, alternatively utilization (for limit states).
The results are displayed in the right part of the frame, the optimized slip surface on the
desktop.
Frame "Global stability"
Stability
-529-

carried over to the analysis protocol of the "MSE Wall" program.
Frame "Stability"
Program Spread Footing

This program is used for the design of spread footings subject to general load. It computes
vertical and horizontal bearing capacity, settlement and rotation of a footing, and determines
required longitudinal and shear reinforcement (punching).
The help in the program "Spread Footing" includes the folowing topics:

Project Settings Profile Dilatometric Soils Assign Foundation
Tests (DMT)
Load Geometry Footing Sand-Gravel Material Surcharge Water,
Bottom Cushion Incompressi
ble Subsoil
Earthquake Stage Bearing Settlement Dimensionin
Settings Capacity and Rotation g
-530-
• Theory for analysis in the program "Spread Footing":

Stress in Soil Parameters of Analysis of Settlement Dimensioning of
Body Rocks Foundation Analysis Concrete
• Outputs
Project
Frame "Project"
Settings
the analysis.
-531-
Settings of analysis parameters are performed in the "Materials and standards", "Settlement"
and "Spread Footing" tabs.
Four options are available to calculate the vertical bearing capacity of a spread footing:
• analysis for drained conditions
• analysis for undrained conditions
• analysis of foundation on rock subgrade
• input vertical bearing capacity of soil Rd
Frame "Settings"
Profile
-532-
Frame "Profile"
DMT
-533-
Frame "DMT"
format UNI (*.uni).
Data of DMTs can be copied within "Spread Footing", "Sheeting Check", "Anti-Slide Pile"
and "Stratigraphy" programs using "GeoClipboard".
Note: The frame is accessible only in the case, when method of calculation is selected as
"Dilatometer DMT" in the "Settings" frame ("Settlement" tab).
Soils
"Basic data", "Uplift pressure", "Foundation bearing capacity" and "Settlement".
-534-
Frame "Soils"
Basic Data
Soil parameters differ according to the analysis type and analysis method ("Settings" frame,
"Spread Footing" and "Settlement" tabs).
The analysis type differs according:
• analysis for drained conditions: effective parameters of shear strength of soil cef, φef
are used commonly.
• analysis for undrained conditions: vertical bearing capacity of foundation depends on
undrained shear strength of soil cu. Effective angle of internal friction φef is defined only
for calculaction of earth pressure to solve horizontal bearing capacity of foundation.
• analysis of foundation on rock subgrade: for this analysis method program defines
angle of internal friction of rock φ, compressive strength σc, coeficient of damage of rock
D, coefficient of structural strength mi and Geological Strength Index.
The associated theory is described in detail in chapter "Analysis of bearing capacity of
foundation".
-535-
Assign
-536-
Frame "Assign"
Foundation
The "Foundation" frame allows to select a type of foundation. The selected type with graphic
hint ("Geometry scheme") of input values is displayed in the left part of the frame. The
values can be edited either in the frame by inserting values into input fields, or on the desktop
with the help of active dimensions. The frame also serves to specify the unit weight of
overburden.
The following types of foundations can be selected:
• Centric spread footing • Circular spread footing
• Eccentric spread footing • Circular stepped spread
• Strip footing • Centric spread footing with batter
• Stepped centric spread footing • Eccentric spread footing with batter
• Stepped eccentric spread footing
The soil profile is specified from the original ground. The foundation bearing capacity
depends mainly on the depth of foundation measured from the finished grade. When the
finished grade is found above the original ground then it is required to assign the same depth
to both, the finished grade and original ground, and introduce into subsoil a layer with a new
made-up-ground. This frame also allows for inputting the foundation thickness.
When completed the foundation is usually filled up with a soil - its unit weight must be
specified (Overburden unit weight γ1). Providing the analysis follows the theory of limit
states its weight is multiplied by the coefficient γmγ input in the "Spread Footing" tab.
For foundations with drained subsoil (type of analysis is selected in the frame "Settings") it is
-537-
possible to introduce an inclination of the finished grade and footing bottom. In all other
cases both the ground and footing bottom are horizontal.
Frame "Foundation"
Load
The "Load" frame contains a table with a list of input loads. Adding loads is performed in the
"New load" dialog window. Input of individual forces follows the sign convention displayed in
the right part of the dialog window.
The following types of load can be specified:
• design load serves to verify the foundation bearing capacity
• service load serves to compute the foundation settlement and rotation
Dimensioning of reinforcements assumed for the foundation is carried out for both types of
load.
When performing the analysis according to EN 1997 or LRFD (selected in the "Spread
Footing" tab) it is assumed that the design load is determined in accordance with the
corresponding standards and individual components of load are already pre-multiplied by
corresponding partial factors - the program does not modify the input load any further.
The foundation is loaded always at the contact point between column and foundation. The
program automatically computes the foundation self weight and the weight of
overburden.
The "Service" button allows for creating the service loads from the already input design loads
(analysis according to the factor of safety or the theory of limit states).
The program also allows for import of load using the "Import" button.
-538-
Frame "Load"
Geometry
The "Geometry" frame allows to specify the foundation shape. The selected shape with
graphic hint ("Geometry scheme") of input values is displayed in the left part of the frame.
The values can be edited either in the frame by inserting values into input fields, or on the
Foundation type and its thickness are specified in the "Foundation" frame.
The program automatically computes the self weight of both foundation and overburden
above the foundation. The foundation self weight is specified in the "Material" frame.
Providing the analysis is carried out employing the theory of limit states the footing self weight
is multiplied by coefficients specified in the "Spread Footing" tab.
-539-
Frame "Geometry"
The "Dimensions design" button opens the "Foundation dimensions design" that serves
with the help of the program to compute dimensions of a foundation. The dialog window
allows for inputting the bearing capacity of foundation soil Rd or to select the option
"Analyze". In such a case the program determines all dimensions of a foundation based on
input parameters (soils, profile, water impact, send-gravel-cushion, setting, etc.).
While leaving the dialog window by pressing the "OK" button the specified dimensions are
loaded into the "Geometry" frame.
Dialog window "Foundation dimensions design"
-540-
Footing Bottom
The "Footing bottom" frame serves to input characteristics of the action of footing bottom:
• soil from geological profile - the spread footing is founded on the soil assigned from
the geological profile specified in the "Profile" frame.
bottom and soil are specified. Option "input angle of friction base-soil" requires
The input data introduced in this frame influence the spread footing bearing capacity.
Frame "Footing bottom"
Sand-Gravel Cushion
The "Sand-gravel cushion" frame allows to input parameters of the sand-gravel cushion
below foundation. The cushion thickness and overhang over foundation edge are required. The
with the help of active dimensions.
The cushion filling can be selected from a combo list that contains soils specified in the frame
"Soils".
The input sand-gravel cushion influences the analysis of both the foundation load bearing
capacity and settlement.
-541-
Frame "Sand - gravel cushion"
Material
the frame allows to specify the unit weight of structure.
concrete and steel structures in the "Materials and standards" tab.
-542-
Frame "Material"
Surcharge
performed in the "New surcharge" dialog window. The values are specified according to
"Geometry" chart displayed in the right part of the dialog window. The input surcharges can
also be edited on the desktop with the help of active objects.
The z-coordinate measured from the foundation joint of a structure is specified (positive
direction downwards) when inputting the surcharge at a depth different from the depth of
foundation joint.
The surcharge is considered only when computing settlement and rotation of a foundation,
in which case it increases the stress in soil below foundation. When computing the
foundation bearing capacity, the surcharge is not considered - its presence would increase
the bearing capacity.
-543-
Frame "Surcharge"
Water, Incompressible Subsoil

The "Water + IS" frame serves to specify the depth of ground water table and level of
incompressible subsoil.
The incompressible subsoil cuts off the influence zone below foundation and also
influences reduction in settlement.
-544-
Frame "Water, incompressible subsoil"
Earthquake
Analysis of foundation bearing capacity while accounting for earthquake is described in the
theoretical part of the help, chapter "Analysis of Seismic Bearing Capacity".
During seismic analysis, the program performs the calculation of bearing capacity for both
cases - with and without seismic effect. The resultant bearing capacity is lower from these two
values.
-545-
Frame "Earthquake"
Note: The frame is accessible only in the case, when analysis for drained conditions is
selected in the "Settings" frame.
Stage Settings
-546-
Bearing Capacity
The "Bearing capacity" frame serves to verify the vertical and horizontal bearing
capacity of a footing. More computations can be performed in the frame. The verification can
be performed either for individual loads or the program finds the most critical one (can be
selected from a combo list).
The analysis follows the theory approach selected in the "Spread Footing" tab. This tab serves
to choose the verification methodology (according to EN 1997, LRFD, factor of safety, limit
states).
The vertical bearing capacity analysis requires selection of the type of contact pressure
(general shape, rectangle). The shape of contact pressure is plotted in the left part of the
desktop.
For both limit states (strength, usability) program assesses the eccentricity of the foundation.
The value of the maximum allowable eccentricity of foundation ealw is assumed in the frame
"Settings" in the "Spread Footing" tab.
The horizontal bearing capacity analysis requires selection of the type of earth resistance that
can be assumed as the pressure at rest, passive pressure or the reduced passive
pressure.
The soil parameters (friction angle structure-soil, cohesion structure-soil) can be further
reduced when computing the horizontal bearing capacity.
When evaluating the uplift resistance the view of the "Verification on uplift" dialog window is
adjusted according to the analysis method selected in the "Settings" frame.
Detailed listing of the results is displayed in the right part of the desktop. Visualization of
results can be adjusted in the frame "Drawing Settings".
-547-
Settlement and Rotation

The "Settlement" frame serves to compute the foundation settlement and rotation. The frame
allows for more analyses. The verification can be performed either for individual loads or the
program finds the most critical one (can be selected from combo list).
The analysis of foundation settlement and rotation is carried out according to the theory
specified in the frame "Spread Footing" tab.
The value of the maximum allowable eccentricity of foundation ealw is assumed in the frame
"Settings" in the "Spread Footing" tab.
The stress in the footing bottom can be subtracted from the geostatic stress given by:
• original ground
• finished grade
• not specified
Distributions of the geostatic stress and the stress increment below foundation are
displayed in the left part of the desktop. The label below footing represents the depth of
deformation zone. The stress is drawn below footing at the point with a characteristic
deformation.
The frame also allows for specifying the coefficient of reduction of computation of settlement.
The detailed listing of the verification analysis results is displayed in the right part of the
desktop. Visualization of results can be adjusted in the frame "Drawing Settings".
-548-
Frame "Settlement"
Dimensioning
The "Dimensioning" frame allows for designing and verifying the longitudinal reinforcement
of a foundation and also for verifying the foundation against being pushed through. The
verification can be performed either for individual loads or the program finds the most critical
one (can be selected from a combo list).
The program derives the stress in the construction joint and determines the internal forces in
individual cross-sections.
The resulting information are displayed on the desktop and are updated with an arbitrary
change in data or setting specified in the frame. The "In detail" button opens the dialog
window that contains detailed listing of the dimensioning results.
-549-
Program Spread Footing CPT

This program is used for the design and verification of spread footings based on data from
cone penetration tests (CPT), standard penetration tests (SPT) or Pressumeter test (PMT).
It computes vertical bearing capacity, settlement and determines required longitudinal and
shear reinforcement (punching).
The help in the program "Spread Footing CPT" includes the folowing topics:

Project Settings CPT SPT PMT Soil Profile
Classificatio
n
Soils Assign Water Foundation Load Geometry Material
Analysis Dimensionin
g
-550-
• Theory for analysis in the program "Spread Footing CPT":

Stress in Soil Body Spread Footing CPT Field Testing
• Outputs
Project
Frame "Project"
Settings
the analysis.
-551-
Settings of analysis parameters are performed in the "Materials and standards".
The type of field tests (CPT, SPT, PMT) used for analysis of bearing capacity and settlement is
selected in this frame. According to the selected type of field tests, the frame "CPT", "SPT" or
"PMT" is displayed.
In the case of CPT tests, the type of analysis for bearing capacity is also selected (Meyerhof,
Schmertmann, Skempton).
In the case of analysis according to the Meyerhof method (CPT or SPT), the frames "Profile",
"Soils" and "Assign" are not displayed. All calculations are based just on the data from field
tests.
In this frame is also possibility to decide if we want to analyse spread footing settlement or
carry out soil classification.
Frame "Settings"
CPT
The frame "CPT" contains a table with list of cone penetration tests (CPT).
-552-
Frame "CPT"
The results of cone penetration tests (CPT) can be imported into the program by inserting the
file in different formats (eg. *.TXT, *.CPT, *.GI3, *.GEF, *.AGS).
Data of CPT can be copied within "Pile CPT", "Spread Footing CPT" and "Stratigraphy"
programs using "GeoClipboard".
SPT
The frame "SPT" contains a table with list of standard penetration tests (SPT).
-553-
Frame "SPT"
The results of standard penetration tests (SPT) can be imported into the program by inserting
the file in different formats (eg. *.TXT, *.CSV, *.XLSX, *.ODS).
Data of SPTs can be copied within "Micropile", "Spread Footing CPT" and "Stratigraphy"
PMTs
The frame "PMT" contains a table with list of pressuremeter tests (PMT).
-554-
Frame "SPT"
The results of pressumeter tests (PMT) can be imported into the program by inserting the file
Data of PMTs can be copied within "Micropile", "Sheeting Check", "Anti-Slide Pile" "Spread
Footing CPT" and "Stratigraphy" programs using "GeoClipboard".
Soil Classification
Classification of soils according to Robertson (1986 or 2010) allows to specify soil behavior
type (SBT) and other parameters directly from the results of CPT - then input parameters of
soils it's not necessary to input. We recommend to check generated soil parameters before the
calculation.
In the frame "Soil classification" is selected test for classification (defined in the "CPT"
frame). Classification of soils is performed according to Robertson (1986 or 2010).
This frame serves to input penetrometer net area ratio α [-].
The unit weight of soil γ is possible to input with the same value for all layers of soils or it's
calculated automatically from the results of CPT (for each layer separately). The frame serves
to input a minimum thickness of the layer of soil h. It affects the distribution and number of
individual layers of soil in the geological profile of solved task.
By checking the option "Insert the results of classification into a geological profile
automatically" assigns generated geological profile to the current task automatically (when
user change any data in the frame).
During deactivation of previous option the manual assign of soil is performed by pressing the
-555-
"Insert profile and soils" button.
Frame "Soil classification"
Profile
The frame "Profile" is not available in the case of analysis according to the Meyerhof method
(CPT or SPT).
-556-
Frame "Profile"
Soils
In the program "Spread Footing CPT", just input of unit weight γ and saturated unit weight
γsat is required. These characteristics are used for calculation of geostatic stress and uplift
pressure.
The frame "Profile" is not available in the case of analysis according to the Meyerhof method
(CPT or SPT).
-557-
Frame "Soils"
Basic Data
This part of the dialog window serves to specify the unit weight of soil.
-558-
Assign
graphically represented using buttons in the bar above the table, or it is accessible from a
combo list for each layer of the profile.
The frame "Assign" is not available in the case of analysis according to the Meyerhof method
(CPT or SPT).
-559-
Frame "Assign"
Water
The "GWT" frame serves to specify the depth of ground water table. The values can be
edited either in the frame by inserting values into input fields, or on the desktop with the help
of active dimensions.
-560-
Frame "Water"
Foundation
The "Foundation" frame allows to select a type of foundation. The selected type with graphic
hint ("Geometry scheme") of input values is displayed in the left part of the frame. The
with the help of active dimensions. The frame also serves to specify the unit weight of
overburden.
The following types of foundations can be selected:
• Centric spread footing • Stepped eccentric spread footing
• Eccentric spread footing • Centric spread footing with batter
• Stepped centric spread footing • Eccentric spread footing with batter
The soil profile is specified from the original ground. The foundation bearing capacity
depends mainly on the depth of foundation measured from the finished grade. When the
finished grade is found above the original ground then it is required to assign the same depth
to both, the finished grade and original ground, and introduce into subsoil a layer with a new
made-up-ground. This frame also allows for inputting the foundation thickness.
When completed the foundation is usually filled up with a soil - its unit weight must be
specified (Overburden unit weight γ1).
-561-
Frame "Foundation"
Load
The "Load" frame contains a table with a list of input loads. Adding loads is performed in the
"New load" dialog window. Input of individual forces follows the sign convention displayed in
the right part of the dialog window.
The foundation is loaded always at the contact point between column and foundation. The
program automatically computes the foundation self weight and the weight of
overburden.
-562-
Frame "Load"
Geometry
The "Geometry" frame allows to specify the foundation shape. The selected shape with
graphic hint ("Geometry scheme") of input values is displayed in the left part of the frame.
Foundation type and its thickness are specified in the "Foundation" frame.
The program automatically computes the self weight of both foundation and overburden
above the foundation. The foundation self weight is specified in the "Material" frame.
-563-
Frame "Geometry"
The "Dimensions design" button opens the "Foundation dimensions design" that serves
with the help of the program to compute dimensions of a foundation. The dialog window allows
for inputting the bearing capacity of foundation soil Rd or to select the option "Analyze". In
such a case the program determines all dimensions of a foundation based on input
parameters (soils, profile, water impact, settings etc.).
While leaving the dialog window by pressing the "OK" button the specified dimensions are
loaded into the "Geometry" frame.
Dialog window "Foundation dimensions design"
-564-
Material
the frame allows to specify the unit weight of structure.
concrete structures in the "Materials and standards" tab.
Frame "Material"
Analysis
The "Analysis" frame serves to verify the vertical bearing capacity and settlement of a footing.
More computations can be performed in the frame. The verification can be performed either for
individual loads or the program finds the most critical one (can be selected from a combo
list).
The value of the maximum allowable eccentricity of foundation is entered in the left part of
frame.
The analysis is performed according to the selected type of field tests in the frame
-565-
"Settings", where analysis type is also chosen in the case of using CPT tests.
The analysis can be performed for the worst field test, the average from all tests or
selected test from a combo list.
Further it is necessary to enter a safety factor for bearing capacity. It is recommended to
use a SF = 3 for all methods using CPTs, SPTs or PMTs.
The stress in the footing bottom used for settlement analysis can be reduced by the
geostatic stress given by:
• original ground
• finished grade
• not specified
In the case of inclined footing bottom or analysis according to the Schmertmann method it is
also necessary to enter an angle of internal friction φ in the footing bottom.
When calculating bearing capacity from the SPT tests (Meyerhof method), the correlation for
saturated fine or silty sands can be used.
Detailed listing of the results is displayed in the right part of the desktop. Visualization of
results can be adjusted in the frame "Drawing Settings".
Dimensioning
The "Dimensioning" frame allows for designing and verifying the longitudinal reinforcement
-566-
of a foundation and also for verifying the foundation against being pushed through. The
verification can be performed either for individual loads or the program finds the most critical
one (can be selected from a combo list).
The program derives the stress in the construction joint and determines the internal forces in
individual cross-sections.
The resulting information are displayed on the desktop and are updated with an arbitrary
change in data or setting specified in the frame. The "In detail" button opens the dialog
window that contains detailed listing of the dimensioning results.
Program Pile
This program is used for analysis of vertical bearing capacity of a single pile loaded both in
tension or compression, pile settlement as well as horizontal bearing capacity of a single pile.
The help in the program "Pile" includes the folowing topics:
-567-
Project Settings Profile Modulus of Soils Assign Load

Subsoil
Reaction
Geometry Material Water, Negative Stage Vertical Vertical
Incompressi Skin Friction Settings Bearing Bearing
ble Subsoil Capacity Capacity
(Analytical (Spring
Solution) Method)
Settlement Settlement Horizontal Horizontal
(Poulos) (Masopust) Bearing Bearing
Capacity Capacity
(Brom's
Method)
• Theory for analysis in the program "Pile":

Stress in Soil Body Pile Analysis Dimensioning of Concrete
Structures
• Outputs
Project
-568-
Frame "Project"
Settings
the analysis.
Settings of analysis parameters are performed in the "Materials and standards" and "Piles"
tabs.
The pile vertical bearing capacity can be found either by using the analytical solution or the
spring method. Analytical solution is defined for:
• analysis for drained conditions (CSN 73 1002, Effective stress method, NAVFAC DM
7.2)
• analysis for undrained conditions (Tomlinson, NAVFAC DM 7.2)
-569-
Frame "Settings"
Profile
Frame "Profile"
-570-
Modulus of Subsoil Reaction

The combo list serves to select one of the methods for the evaluation of modulus of subsoil
reaction - the required material parameters of soils are input in the frame "Soils" based on the
selected method.
Selecting the option "Input by distribution" opens a table that allows for specifying the
values of the modulus of subsoil reaction along the pile.
Frame "Modulus of subsoil reaction"
Soils
about currently selected soil displayed in the right part of the frame.
"Basic data", "Uplift pressure", "Oedometric modulus", "Modulus of subsoil reaction", "Empirical
coefficient of adhesion" and "Consistency coefficient". The specified soil parameters depend on
the set up of modulus of subsoil reaction and selected theory of analysis specified in the "Piles"
tab.
-571-
Frame "Soils"
Basic Data
Soil parameters differ according to the analysis type and analysis method ("Settings" frame,
"Piles" tab).
The analysis type differs according:
• Analysis for drained conditions: effective parameters of shear strength of soil cef, φef
are used commonly ("CSN 73 1002","Effective stress").
• Analysis for undrained conditions: in program is defined total shear strength of soil cu
("Tomlinson").
• Method NAVFAC DM 7.2: this method combines two types of calculation. For each layer
of soil is defined, whether the soil is calculated as drained (cohesionless) or undrained
(cohesive).
The associated theory is described in detail in chapter "Pile analysis".
-572-
Assign
-573-
Frame "Assign"
Load
The "Load" frame contains a table with a list input loads. Adding load is performed in the
"New load" dialog window. The forces are input following the sign convention displayed in the
upper part of the dialog window.
The following types of load can be specified:
• design load serves to verify the vertical and horizontal bearing capacity
• service load serves to compute the settlement of pile (Poulos, Masopust)
When performing the analysis according to EN 1997 or LRFD (selected in the "Piles" tab) it is
assumed that the design load is determined in accordance with the corresponding standards
and individual components of load are already pre-multiplied by corresponding partial
factors - the program does not modify the input load any further.
The "Service" button allows for creating the service loads from the already input design loads
(analysis according to the factor of safety or the theory of limit states).
-574-
Frame "Load"
Geometry
The "Geometry" frame allows for specifying the pile cross-section (circular, circular variable,
pipe, square, rectangle, I-cross-section, user defined...).
Then for the selected section type it is necessary to select material (concrete, steel, wood) and
technology (bored, driven, CFA).
The frame also serves to specify the pile location (pile lift out and the depth of finished grade).
The pile lift out can also be negative - in such a case the pile is placed under terrain.
-575-
Frame "Geometry"
Material
The "Material" frame allows for specifying the material parameters. The unit weight of a
structure is introduced in the input field in the upper part of the frame. The appearance of the
frame varies according to the selected material (concrete, steel, timber) in the frame
"Geometry".
concrete, steel, or timber structures set in the "Materials and standards" tab.
-576-
Frame "Material"
Water, Incompressible Subsoil

The "Water + IS" frame serves to specify the depth of ground water table and level of
incompressible subsoil.
The incompressible subsoil cuts off the influence zone below foundation and also
influences reduction in settlement.
-577-
Frame "Water, incompressible subsoil"
Negative Skin Friction

The "Negative skin friction" frame serves to specify the settlement of surrounding terrain
and the depth of influence zone. For more information on the influence of negative skin friction
the user is referred to theoretical section.
The setting option in the frame is active only when the spring method is selected for the
analysis in the frame "Settings".
-578-
Frame "Negative skin friction"
Stage Settings
Vertical Bearing Capacity - Analytical Solution

The "Vertical bearing capacity" frame serves to verify the vertical bearing capacity of a pile.
Several analyses can be carried out in the frame. The verification can be performed for
individual loads, or the program locates the most critical one (can be selected from a combo
list). The frame appearance changes depending on the analysis type setting in the frame
-579-
"Settings".
The analysis is performed based on the theory defined in the "Piles" tab. This tab serves to
choose the verification methodology (EN 1997-1, factor of safety, limit states).
Calculation of the pile vertical bearing capacity by using the analytical solution is performed
for:
• drained conditions (CSN 73 1002, Effective stress method, NAVFAC DM 7.2)
• undrained conditions (Tomlinson, NAVFAC DM 7.2)
The "In detail" button opens the dialog window containing detailed listing of the verification
results.
The analysis results are displayed in the right part of the desktop. Visualization of results can
be adjusted in the frame "Drawing Settings".
Frame "Vertical bearing capacity" - analysis based on classic theory
Vertical Bearing Capacity - Spring Method

The "Vertical bearing capacity" frame allows for verifying the pile vertical bearing
capacity. The analysis is performed automatically when switching to this frame. More
computations can be performed in the frame. The verification can be performed either for
individual loads or the program finds the most critical one (can be selected from a combo
list).
The analysis is performed with the help of spring method. The results are automatically
updated whenever one of the analysis parameters "Maximal deformation", "Coefficient
increasing limit skin friction due to technology" or "Procedure determining influence
zone" is changed.
Two options are available to determine influence zone:
-580-
• By default the evaluation of the depth of influence zone below the pile base follows the
procedure described in the theoretical part of the help in section "Depth of influence
zone". The depth of influence zone on the pile skin is determined as a k-multiple of the
pile diameter. The value of k increases from 1 for zero load to the value of 2.5 when
exceeding the limit skin friction.
• The second option assumes the depth of influence zone below the foot and on the skin to
th
be set conservatively a k multiple of the pile diameter, where the value of k can be
selected. During a gradual increase of pile surcharge the value of k for the depth of
influence zone on the pile skin is continuously changed from 1 at the onset of load to the
specified value when exceeding the limit skin friction. The value of k for the influence zone
below the pile base remains constant during the analysis.
The second method, originally used in the old version GEO4, with the value of k = 2.5 offers
less accurate results and usually underestimates the pile bearing capacity. Therefore a new
option that allows for specifying the depth of influence zone through analysis is offered and is
also recommended by the default setting.
Switching between results is available in the left part of the frame (load-settlement curve,
distributions of internal forces, dependence of shear on displacement). The shear-displacement
relationship is derived for a given depth measured from the pile head. The results are updated
whenever the depth is changed.
The "In detail" button opens the dialog window, which contains detailed listing of the results
of verification analysis.
Frame "Vertical bearing capacity" - analysis using spring method
-581-
Settlement - Linear Load-Settlement Curve (Poulos)

The "Settlement" frame serves to display the pile load-settlement curve. More
computations can be performed in the frame.
Next, it is necessary to enter the value of limit settlement. The program constructs the load-
settlement curve of pile always such that this limit settlement should be reached.
The analysis is carried out according to the selected theory of settlement analysis (linear). The
analysis theory is selected in the "Piles" tab. The table in the left bottom part of the frame
directly allows to specify values of the secant modulus of soil for the relevant layers of soil.
The analysis results are displayed in the right part of the desktop. The "In detail" button
opens the dialog window containing detailed listing of the verification results.
The analysis results (load-settlement curve of pile) are displayed in the right part of the
desktop.
Frame "Settlement" - linear load-settlement curve of pile (Poulos)
Settlement - Non-Linear Load-Settlement Curve

(Masopust)
The "Settlement" frame serves to display the pile load-settlement curve. More analyses
can be performed in the frame.
The combo list serves to choose the type of load (design, service). Next, it is possible to
enter the coefficient of influence of pile shaft. The analysis of load-settlement of pile is always
performed up to the limit settlement of 25 mm.
-582-
The analysis is performed according to the selected theory of settlement analysis (nonlinear).
The analysis theory is selected in the "Piles" tab. The table in the bottom part of the frame
directly allows with the help of the mouse for editing the defined parameters. Buttons "Edit a,
b", "Edit e, f" and "Edit Es" open dialog windows with a help section for entered parameters of
regression coefficients and secant modulus of soil. Pressing the "OK" button in a particular
window stores the input parameters for a given layer into the table.
The analysis results are displayed in the right part of the desktop. The "In detail" button
opens the dialog window containing detailed listing of the verification results.
The analysis results (load-settlement curve of pile) are displayed in the right part of the
desktop.
Frame "Settlement" - nonlinear load-settlement curve of pile (Masopust)
Horizontal Bearing Capacity - Elastic Subsoil (p-y

Method)
The program calculates internal forces on pile and verify the bearing capacity of cross-section
(concrete, steel, wooden).
The internal forces can be carried out for:
• individual loads
• prescribed displacement
• the most critical load
Assuming the prescribed displacement type of load requires introduction of boundary
conditions in pile head (translation and rotation).
-583-
The fixed end type of boundary condition prescribed in the pile heel can be assumed for all
types of load.
The combo list serves to specify the direction of pile verification ( x, y,results in the most
stressed direction).
Frame "Horizontal bearing capacity" - Elastic subsoil (p-y method)

According to the selected cross-section and material the program verify a bearing capacity of
cross-section. (The cross-section and material are selected in the frame "Geometry".). In some
special cases (user-defined, concrete pipe) are displayed only internal forces and deformations
- the verification of cross-section can not be performed.
Reinforced Concrete
Program verifies the reinforcement according to standard selected in the frame "Materials and
standards" tab. The pile is verified for shear, bending + compression and reinforcement
ratio. The reinforcement is entered using check box "Pile reinfrocement".
In the case of circular pile profile of reinforcement, number of profiles and concrete
cover are input. Reinforcement of square pile is according to the picture.
-584-
Verification of RC pile - entering reinforcement parameters

Steel, Timber
The pile is verified for shear and bending + compression.
Shear and bending + compression verification of pile
Verification of pile is not performed

The "In detail" button opens the dialog window that contains detailed listing of the verification
results.The analysis results are displayed on the desktop. Visualization of results can be
adjusted in the frame "Drawing Settings".
-585-
Horizontal Bearing Capacity - Brom's Method

The horizontal bearing capacity of a pile is verified in the "Horizontal bearing capacity"
frame. Several analyses can be carried out. The verification analysis can be carried out for
individual loads, prescribed displacements, or the program finds the most critical load (can
be selected from a combo list). Assuming the prescribed displacement type of load requires
introduction of boundary conditions in pile head (translation and rotation).
The reinforced concrete pile requires inputting the reinforcement profile, number of
profiles and reinforcement cover, which influence the pile bending stiffness.
The input parameters for the analysis of pile horizontal bearing capacity are the pile material
characteristics (modulus of elasticity and strength of a given material), pile geometry (pile
length l and its diameter d) and also the pile load due to shear force and bending moment.
When adopting the analysis according to the Broms method the program ignores up to now
input soil layers and checks the single pile horizontal bearing capacity only for the soil defined
in the "Horizontal capacity" frame. Soil parameters are specified based on the type of soil:
• cohesive - requires inputting the undrained cohesion of soil cu, modulus of subsoil
reaction kh, coefficient of cross-section bearing capacity γk and the coefficient of bearing
capacity reduction γQu.
• cohesionless - requires inputting the effective angle of internal friction φ, unit weight of
soil γ, furthermore the coefficient of subsoil reaction nh, coefficient of cross-section bearing
capacity γk and the coefficient of pile bearing capacity reduction γQu.
The frame further allows for inputting the criteria of type of pile:
• standard - in this case the pile stiffness coefficient β*l, respectively η*l is calculated
automatically by the program.
• user-defined - this option allows the user to set the pile stiffness coefficient β*l,
respectively η*l to check short as well as medium piles.
Type of pile can be considered in two ways:
• free head - rotation at pile head is not constrained
• restrained - pile is constrained against rotation at its head. In such cases we typically
deal with piles that are part of a planar pile grid or a pile group.
The reduction coefficient of cross-section strength γk serves to reduce the flexure bearing
capacity Mu.
The reduction coefficient of bearing capacity γQu serves to reduce the overall value
horizontal bearing capacity of a single pile Qu.
The result of an analysis is horizontal bearing capacity of a single pile Qu and displacement of a
pile at the terrain surface u.
The "In detail" button opens the dialog window that contains detailed listing of the verification
results.
The analysis results are displayed on the desktop. Visualization of results can be adjusted in
-586-
Frame "Horizontal bearing capacity" - Broms method
Program Pile CPT

This program verifies the vertical bearing capacity and settlement of a single pile or a group of
piles, based on the results provided by (static) cone penetration tests (CPT).
The help in the program "Pile CPT" includes the folowing topics:

Project Settings CPT GWT + NSF Soil Profile Soils
Classificatio
n
Assign Construction Geometry Bearing Settlement
Capacity
• Theory for analysis in the program "Pile CPT":

Stress in Soil Body Pile CPT
-587-
• Outputs
Project
Frame "Project"
Settings
the analysis.
-588-
Settings of analysis parameters are performed in the "Piles CPT" tab.
This frame also allows to introduce negative skin friction. Parameters of the negative skin
friction are defined in the frame "GWT+NSF".
This frame also allows to introduce soil behavior type (SBT) - classification of soils, which is
performed in the frame "Soil Classification".
If the analysis is performed according to EN 1997, other partial factors are defined:
Partial factor of model uncertainty γcal reduces vertical bearing capacity of pile.
Partial factors ξ3 and ξ4 can be either input by user, or program can calculate standard values
depending on number of tests.
Frame "Settings"
CPT
The frame "CPT" contains a table with list of cone penetration tests (CPT).
-589-
Frame "CPT"
The results of cone penetration tests (CPT) can be imported into the program by inserting the
file in different formats (eg. *.TXT, *.CPT, *.GEF, *.AGS).
Data of CPT can be copied within "Pile CPT", "Spread Footing CPT" and "Stratigraphy"
GWT + NSF
The frame "GWT" ("GWT + NSF") serves to specify the depth of ground water table and
the level of incompressible subsoil.
desktop with the help of active dimensions. The GWT changes the geostatic stress in the soil
profile.
The incompressible subsoil cuts off the influence zone below foundation. It also influences
a reduction of the settlement.
-590-
Frame "GWT" - without influence of NSF

If the option "Consider influence of negative skin friction" is set in the frame "Settings",
then it becomes possible to enter parameters of the negative skin friction using the "GWT +
NSF" frame - boundaries of the region, where the influence of negative skin friction is
considered, or sliding region and its material and cohesion.
-591-
Frame "GWT" - with influence of NSF
Soil Classification
Classification of soils according to Robertson (1986 or 2010) allows to specify soil behavior
type (SBT) and other parameters directly from the results of CPT - then input parameters of
soils it's not necessary to input. We recommend to check generated soil parameters before the
calculation.
In the frame "Soil classification" is selected test for classification (defined in the "CPT"
frame). Classification of soils is performed according to Robertson (1986 or 2010).
This frame serves to input penetrometer net area ratio α [-].
The unit weight of soil γ is possible to input with the same value for all layers of soils or it's
calculated automatically from the results of CPT (for each layer separately). The frame serves
to input a minimum thickness of the layer of soil h. It affects the distribution and number of
individual layers of soil in the geological profile of solved task.
By checking the option "Insert the results of classification into a geological profile
automatically" assigns generated geological profile to the current task automatically (when
user change any data in the frame).
During deactivation of previous option the manual assign of soil is performed by pressing the
"Insert profile and soils" button.
Frame "Soil classification"
-592-
Profile
The frame "Profile" contains a table with the list of input interfaces. After specifying interfaces
it is possible to edit thicknesses of individual layers with the help of active dimensions.
Frame "Profile"
Soils
The frame "Soils" contains a table with the list of input soils. The table also provides
information about the currently selected soil displayed in the right part of the frame. If there
are more items (soils) selected in the table, the information about individual soils is ordered
consecutively.
These parameters depend on the theory of analysis specified in the "Piles CPT" tab.
-593-
Frame "Soils"
Basic Data
The associated theory is described in detail in chapter "Analyses in program Pile CPT".
For calculation of shaft resistance according to the EN 1997-2, NEN 6743 and LCPC
(Bustamante) further needs to specify coefficient reducing the shaft friction αs. For coarse-
grained soils - sands and gravels further needs to specify the magnitude of overconsolidation
(OCR) and type of grains.
-594-
Assign
The frame "Assign" contains the list of layers of the profile and associated soils. The list of
soils is graphically represented using buttons in the bar above the table, or it is accessible from
a combo list associated with each layer of the profile.
The procedure to assign a soil to a layer is described in detail herein.
-595-
Frame "Assign"
Construction
The frame"Construction" serves to select the type of structure - a single pile or a group of
piles. This frame also serves to input the values of surcharge - design and standard value. The
design value is used to calculate the pile bearing capacity, while the standard value is used to
calculate the pile settlement, for both types of load when the NEM standard is employed (state
1B and 2).
-596-
Frame "Structure" - single pile

If the option "Consider influence of negative skin friction" is set in the frame "Settings",
then it is also possible to enter the surface surcharge using the "GWT + NSF" frame.
Frame Structure - single pile (influence NSF)
-597-
Group of Piles
When defining a group of piles it is necessary to input the structure stiffness, which then the
drives the analysis and verification of the structures. The basic assumption is that for a stiff
structure all piles experience the same settlement, while for a compliant structure each pile
deforms independently. When running the analysis according to NEM6473 this frame also
serves to select the way the CPT is carried out.
For both stiff and compliant structures the program allows for defining locations of individual
piles using their coordinates. In such a case the coordinates of each pile are required (in the x,
y coordinate system) and the load acts on each input pile. If the option "Consider influence
of negative skin friction" is set in the frame "Settings", then it is also possible to enter the
surface surcharge using the "GWT + NSF" frame. Adding a new pile is performed in the
"New pile" dialog window.
Frame "Group of piles" - entering locations of piles using their coordinates

If the user does not enter the coordinates of piles locations, then their parameters are defined
directly in the frame "Construction". Selecting the stiff structure allows for specifying the
number of piles below the structure (the piles are then spread uniformly).
-598-
Frame "Group of piles"
Geometry
The frame "Geometry" serves to input the pile cross-section (circular, rectangular, circular
with enlargement, rectangular with enlargement) and a type of the pile (cast in place screw
piles, prefabricated screw pile, continuous Flight Auger - CFA). Using input fields the cross-
section dimensions are then specified for the selected cross-section.
This frame also serves to input a material of the pile (timber, concrete, steel) a geometry
of position of the pile (a pile length in the soil, a pile head offset and a depth of finished
grade). The selected shape with a graphical hint of input values is displayed in the right part of
the frame.
If the original terrain, from which the CPT tests were carried out, is excavated before piles
performing, the measured values of cone resistance qc are reduced due to a decrease of the
geostatic stress.
The base bearing capacity coefficient αp is specified in the center part of the frame. This
coefficient is by default automatically calculated based on the selected procedure while taking
into account the type of pile and the surrounding soil.
When analyzing rectangular piles the pile shape coefficient s is introduced to reduce the base
bearing capacity. When analyzing piles with enlargement the expanded pile base coefficient β is
introduced to adjust the expanded base bearing capacity.
-599-
Frame "Geometry"
Effect of Finished Ground

If the original terrain, from which the CPT tests were carried out, is excavated before piles
performing, the measured values of cone resistance qc are reduced due to a decrease of the
geostatic stress at all test points as follows:
Where: qc,i,red - reduced cone resistance in the i

th
layer
qc,i - original cone resistance in the i
th
layer
χi - reduction coefficient in the i
th
layer
Reduction coefficient χi is determined as follows:
Where: σz,i - original geostatic stress in the i

th
layer
σd - original geostatic stress in the place of finished ground (in the depth
d)
σCPT - original geostatic stress in the place of first point of CPT test
-600-
Cone resistance reduction due to effect of finished ground

In the case, that CPT test were carried out on the finished ground, cone resistance values are
not reduced.
Bearing Capacity
The frame"Bearing capacity" serves to verify the pile vertical bearing capacity. The
analysis results are plotted in the right bottom part of the frame. The "In details" button
opens the dialog window, which contains a detailed printout of results from the verification
analysis.
-601-
Settlement
The frame "Settlement" serves to verify the pile settlement. The analysis results are plotted
in the right bottom part of the frame. The "In details" button opens the dialog window, which
contains a detailed printout of results from the verification analysis.
When calculating settlement according to the NEN 6743 standard the program plots, apart
from the load-settlement curve, also the load diagram (force/displacement curve).
The analysis results are displayed in the top part of the frame. Visualization of results can be
adjusted in the frame "Drawing Settings".
-602-
Frame "Settlement" - Load-settlement curve
Frame "Settlement" - Distributions force/settlement
-603-
Program Pile Group

This program is used to analyze a pile group (pile raft foundation with a rigid pile cap) using
both spring method (FEM), or analytical solutions. Both floating piles and piles fixed into
subsoil can be considered.
The help in the program "Pile Group" includes the folowing topics:

Project Settings Structure Geometry Material Load Profile
Soils Assign Water Negative Vertical Horizontal Stage
Skin Friction Springs Modulus Settings
Vertical Settlement Settlement Analysis Dimensionin Bearing
Bearing (Cohesive (Cohessionle (Spring g capacity
Capacity Soil) ss Soil) Method)
• Theory for analysis in the program "Pile Group":

Stress in Soil Body Pile Group Dimensioning of Concrete
Structures
• Outputs
Project
-604-
Frame "Project"
Settings
the analysis.
Settings of analysis parameters are performed in the "Materials and standards" and "Pile
Group" tabs.
The right part of the frame allows to select the type of analysis - analytical solution, spring
method or spring method - micropiles.
The analytical solution requires defining the type of subsoil:
• cohesionless soil (analysis for drained conditions)
• cohesive soil (analysis for undrained conditions)
The spring method requires input of:
• type of pile (pile acts vertically)
-605-
• connection piles / pile cap

• modulus of subsoil reaction (pile acts horizontally)
The spring method - micropiles requires input of:
• connection piles / pile cap
• modulus of subsoil reaction (pile acts horizontally)
Frame "Settings"
Structure
The frame "Structure" allows to input the dimensions of the pile cap according to the
defined scheme, number of piles (micropiles), their diameter and spacing.
Defined pile group shapes

Piles
Individual piles in the group share the same diameter. A correct and reliable design of a pile
group requires meeting the construction rules regarding:
• the number of piles in a group (3 - 20)
• the diameter of piles (from 0,3 m to 4,0 m)
• the spacing of piles (s = 1,5d to 6d), where d is the diameter of individual piles in the group
• the overhang of a pile cap from the obverse of outer piles (o = 0 to 2d)
If defined pile cap shapes are not satisfactory for the pile group geometry input, program
allows to enter general shape of pile group. General shape of pile cap is entered by coordinates
of points, but it is also possible (by pressing the button "Generate general shape") to
generate coordinates of structure from already input predefined pile cap.
Input of general pile cap shape
-606-
If the general shape of a pile cap is selected, it is possible to input inclination of piles α. This
option (α ≠ 0°) is available only for spring method, not for analytical solution. For analytical
solution all piles are considered as vertical (α = 0°). So, for calculation of vertical bearing
capacity or settlement of pile group an inclination of piles is not considered.
The program allows to export the geometry of the structure in *.DXF format.
Micropiles
Individual micropiles in the group have the same diameter. Micropile group requires meeting
the construction rules regarding:
• the number of micropiles in a group (3 - 20)
Frame "Structure"
General Pile Group Shape

Input of general pile group shape in a new task
The program allows to input general pile group shape in two ways:
1. Input of general pile group shape using points
By pressing the icon for creating a general pile group shape on the tool bar, the program will
delete the desktop. Minimum input number of piles is 3 (in case less number is input, the
program will show an error message).
-607-
Frame "Structure" - new task

Using the "Add" button, which opens a dialog window "New point", pile center points are
input (it is possible to input points by clicking on the desktop).
Frame "Structure" - input of general pile group shape using points

Input points are being added to the table, and it is then possible to edit them, and delete them
using the desired buttons "Edit" and "Remove" or by clicking the points on the desktop in
the corresponding mode. Points can be moved right on the desktop by mouse after clicking on
the special icon .
-608-
Frame "Structure" - edit points

The minimum number of piles in a group is 3. In case of incorrect input (contravention of
maximum alloqable spacing of piles, intersecting piles) the program checks the geometry and
warns the user of an error. In that case, it is necessary to change the location of the piles.
Frame "Structure" - error messages of general pile group shape input

2. Input of general pile group shape using general shape generator
The structure defined by the scheme of construction and its dimensions can be taken to the
general pile group shape input by pressing the "Generate general shape" button. It is
possible to work with the newly generated points and edit the generated pile cap shape.
-609-
Frame "Structure" - input of pile group shape using general shape generator
Frame appereance is then changed as in the first case of general pile group shape input. It is
possible to work with the picture of the structure as already described.
-610-
Frame "Structure" - frame appereance after point input
Geometry
The frame "Geometry" allows to input the parameters of piles (micropiles). The appearance of
the frame varies according to the selected analysis type in the frame "Settings" (spring
method, analytical solution, spring method - micropiles).
The analytical soluiton and spring method requires input of:
• depth from ground surface
• pile head offset
• thickness of pile cap
• length of piles
The spring method - micropiles requires input of:
• thickness of pile cap
• length of micropiles
• diameter of root
• root length
• resistance of foundation soil - this input is very important and has a big influence on
results of analysis - the magnitude of resistance of subsoil depends on type of subsoil,
process of building of structure and history of loading. The force N is subtracted from the
entered load in all load cases.
-611-
where: A -foundation area

R -entered resistance of foundation soil
Limit values of soil resistance

• entered resistance is equal to zero => all load is transferred to the micropiles, the soil
under the foundation is not considered
• entered resistance is higher than total load and own weigth of cap => no load is
transferred to the micropiles and the settlement of foundation is zero.
Individual piles in the group are always of the same length.
Frame "Geometry"
Material
The frame "Material" allows to enter material parameters.
concrete or steel structures set in the "Materials and standards" tab. The input field in the
-612-
upper part of the frame allows to specify the unit weight of structure.
Frame "Material"
Load
The frame "Load" contains a table with the list of input loads. Adding (editing) a load is
performed in the "New (edit) load" dialog window. The forces are input according to the sign
convention displayed in the right part of the dialog window.
The program also allows to import a load using the "Import" button.
The load applied to a pile group acts at the level of the pile cap upper base at point [0,0]. This
point cannot be located outside the pile cap. These values can be easily obtained from the
analysis by an arbitrary program that performs static analysis.
The program automatically back-calculates the pile cap self weight to be added to the
already existing load. This program further enables to consider the self weight of pile
(using the button in the left part of the desktop)
The pile cap self weight Gcap is provided by:
where: Acap -base area of pile cap [m2]
t -thickness of pile cap [m]

γ -unit weight of structure [kN/m3]
-613-
Frame "Load"
Load Acting on a Pile Group

The pile group can be used to found both bridge abutments and arbitrary civil engineering
structures. To determine the load acting on a pile group can be rather complicated. The load
can be applied at several locations as concentrated load (column), distributed along the line
(wall) or over the area. The procedure shows a simple way of determining the load at a given
point by adopting an arbitrary static program.
1. We start from the model of a structure in the static program
2. Providing no joint is defined in the center of the pile cap, we introduce it.
3. A fixed support in all 6 directions is assigned to the joint (fixed, fixed, fixed, fixed,
fixed, fixed)
4. If the joint is not found on the pile cap (beam model), we connect it with the actual
structure (The stiffness should correspond to other elements)
5. Apart from the new joint we remove all boundary conditions on the analyzed model
6. Perform analysis - the joint reactions correspond to the load, which is input into the
"Pile group" program - the function for importing the load can also be utilized
Note: internal hinges found in the structure must be changed to fixed-end supports for the
static program to find a solution.
-614-
Structure with a fixed support
Support reactions ready for import into the "Pile group" program
Load imported into "Pile group" in the frame "Load"
-615-
Profile
Frame "Profile"
Soils
"Basic data", "Uplift pressure", "Settlement", "Modulus of subsoil reaction". These parameters
depend on the type of soil specified in the frame "Settings" and the theory of analysis specified
in the "Pile Group" tab.
-616-
Frame "Soils"
Basic Data
or from laboratory experiments. If these data are not available, it is possible to exploit the
built-in database of soils, which contains values of the selected characteristics of soils. The
characteristics of rocks are not listed in the database built, these parameters must be defined
manually. Approximate parameters of rocks are presented in the theoretical part of the help
herein.
The calculation of "Pile Group" differs according to the type of subsoil:
• cohesionless soil: effective parameters of shear strength of soil cef, φef are used
commonly.
• cohesive soil: in program is defined only the value of total shear strength of soil cu,
which determines vertical bearing capacity of pile group (or earth block).
Additional parameters are input depending on the settings in the frame "Settings" and in the
"Pile Group" tab.
The associated theory is described in detail in chapter "Pile Group".
-617-
Assign
-618-
Frame "Assign"
Water
The "Water" frame serves to specify the depth of ground water table.
The value can be edited either in the frame by inserting the value into the input field, or on the
-619-
Frame "Water"

The "Negative skin friction" frame serves to specify the settlement of surrounding terrain
and the depth of influence zone. For more information on the influence of negative skin friction
the user is referred to theoretical section.
-620-
Frame "Negative skin friction"
Vertical Springs
The frame "Vertical springs" is active only when analyzing a floating pile. The input springs
are displayed in the table.
The option "input the stiffness of springs" requires inputting:
• spring at the pile base [MN/m]
3
• shear modulus of subsoil reaction along the pile [MN/m ].
The input values are the same for all piles. In the analysis the vertical stiffnesses of inner and
outer piles in the group are reduced by particular coefficients.
The option "Compute the stiffness of springs from soil parameters" requires inputting
the typical load to obtain the spring stiffnesses from calculation.
-621-
Frame "Vertical springs"
Horizontal Modulus
The frame "Horizontal modulus" serves to input the horizontal modulus of subsoil reaction
characterizing the pile response in the horizontal direction.
The input values of the modulus of subsoil reaction at a given depth of the profile are displayed
in the table.
-622-
Frame "Horizontal modulus"
Stage Settings
Vertical Bearing Capacity - Analytical Solution

The frame "Vertical bearing capacity" serves to verify the pile group vertical bearing
capacity. Several analyses can be carried out in the frame.
-623-
The verification analysis can be carried out for individual loads or the program identifies the
most critical one (can be selected from the combo list).
The analysis is performed according to the theory set in the frame "Settings" (analytical
solution):
• for cohesive soil (undrained conditions) - analysis of bearing capacity of an earth block
according to FHWA
• for cohesionless soil (drained conditions) - NAVFAC DM 7.2, Effective stress, CSN 73 1002
The parameters needed for the pile group analysis are introduced for individual methods in left
part of the frame.
The verification analysis is carried out according to the verification methodology selected in the
"Pile Group" tab (factors of safety, theory of limit states, EN 1997-1).
The "In detail" button opens the dialog window containing detailed listing of the verification
results.
The analysis results are displayed in the right part of the desktop.
Frame "Vertical bearing capacity" - analytical solution
Settlement - Cohesive Soil

This frame serves to calculate the pile group settlement for cohesive soils. The analysis of
settlement is performed according to the selected theory set in the "Pile Group" tab. The
analysis results are displayed in the right part of the desktop.
The "In detail" button opens the dialog window that contains a detailed description of the
-624-
results of the verification analysis.
Frame "Settlement" - cohesive soil
Settlement - Cohesionless Soil (Load-Settlement

Curve)
The frame "Settlement" displays linear load-settlement curve for the settlement of a pile
group in a cohesionless soil. Several analyses can be carried out in the frame.
The load-settlement curve of pile group is calculated always for the input limit settlement.
The table in the left bottom part of the frame directly allows to specify values of the secant
modulus of soil for the relevant layers of soil.
The analysis results are displayed in the right part of the frame. The "In detail" button
opens the dialog window that contains a detailed description of the results of the verification
analysis.
The analysis results (load-settlement curve of pile group) are displayed in the right part of the
desktop.
-625-
Frame"Settlement" - cohesionless soil (load-settlement curve of pile group)
Analysis - Spring Method

This frame serves to analyze a group of piles using the spring method. The analysis is run by
pressing the "Analysis" button.
Upon performing the analysis, the results appear in the right part of the frame ("Results")
providing information about the maximum internal forces, displacements and rotations
of a structure. Displacements of the structure shown in the window are determined for
service loads. The "In detail" button opens the dialog window that contains a detailed
description of the results of the verification analysis.
The left part of the frame allows for defining the way of plotting the results on the screen:
• Results - the results can be displayed for individual load cases or for their envelope
• Show results - the results can be displayed for all piles or for individual piles only
• Values - visualization of values of individual variable (moments, normal and shear forces,
displacements, springs)
• Structure - allows for plotting a deformed structure (only undeformed structure can be
displayed for envelopes of load cases), next it is possible to show the magnitudes of pile
cap deflections, reactions and magnitudes of springs at the pile base.
• Drawing mode - defines the style of describing the results
The displayed results can be added to the "List of pictures" at any time and used in the
analysis protocol.
-626-
Rotation, zooming and illumination of a structure can be adjusted with the help of
"Visualization" tool bar. Visualization of results can be adjusted in the frame "Drawing
Settings".
Frame "Analysis" - spring method
Dimensioning
The frame "Dimensioning" allows the programs to adopt the results obtained from the
calculations performed in the frame "Analysis". Both the envelope of loads and individual load
cases can be selected. The reinforcement can be design for the selected pile or the same
reinforcement for all piles in the group can be assumed.
The verification analysis of a steel-reinforced concrete pile is carried out according to the
standard selected in the "Materials and standards" tab.
-627-
Frame "Dimensioning" - spring method
Bearing capacity
The program "Pile" or "Micropile" can be launched from the frame "Vertical cap." according
to the selected analysis type in the frame "Settings". (spring method, spring method -
micropiles).
Pile
Pressing "Bearing capacity" button the program "Pile" is launched and all necessary data are
transfered into it. In this program it is possible to verified a vertical capacity of the pile. If
the program "Pile" is not installed, the button is not available.
After performing calculations we leave by "Exit and save" button and the results are
transferred to the protocol of the calculation into the program "Pile Group".
-628-
Program "Pile"
Micropile
Pressing "Bearing capacity" button the program "Micropile" is launched and all necessary
data are transfered into it. In this program it is possible to verified a cross-section and root
of the micropile. If the program "Micropile" is not installed, the button is not available.
After performing calculations we leave by "Exit and save" button and the results are
transferred to the protocol of the calculation into the program "Pile Group".
-629-
Program "Micropile"
Program Micropile
This program is used for verification of steel tube micropiles. When calculating the micropile
bearing capacity, the program verifies both the root and shaft.
The help in the program "Micropile" includes the folowing topics:

Project Settings Profile Soils Geometry Material Assign
Load Water Standard Pressuremet Verification Root
Penetration er Tests of Cross- Verification
Tests (SPT) Section
• Theory for analysis in the program "Micropile":

Micropile Field Testing
-630-
• Outputs
Project
Frame "Project"
Settings
the analysis.
-631-
Settings of analysis parameters are performed in the "Micropiles" tab.
Frame "Settings"
Profile
-632-
Frame "Profile"
Soils
"Basic data" "Uplift pressure". These parameters depend on the theory of analysis specified in
the "Micropiles" tab.
-633-
Frame "Soils"
Basic Data
When calculating the tube bearing capacity according to Salase, moreover, enters elastic
modulus E.
The associated theory is described in detail in chapter "Micropile".
-634-
Geometry
The frame "Geometry" serves to input a micropile cross-section (welded, rolled). The
selected shape with a graphical hint of input values is displayed in the left part of the frame.
The micropile cross-section is selected in dialog windows opened by pressing the "Enter
welded" "Enter rolled" buttons (the selection for rolled cross-sections is performed from a
catalog in the dialog window). An info window, displaying a detailed description of data of the
selected cross-section, can be activated in the window. The selected data can be edited after
choosing the type of micropile cross-section.
The basic geometrical data are specified in the right top part of the frame:
• free length of micropile (distance between the micropile head and the origin of micropile
base is considered)
• root length
• root diameter
• micropile inclination (range from -60° to 60° measured from vertical, a positive value of an
inclination angle is measured counterclockwise)
• head offset (end of micropile above terrain (range from 0 to 10 m).
-635-
Frame "Geometry"
Material
The frame "Material" serves to specify material parameters of cement mixture and steel.
Two options are available when selecting the material type:
• The "Catalog" button opens the "Catalog of materials" dialog window, where the
required material can be selected.
• The "Own" button opens the "Editor of material" which allows to input the specification
of material parameters manually by user.
The content of catalogs depends on the selection of relevant standard for the concrete or steel
-636-
Frame "Material"
Assign
-637-
Frame "Assign"
Load
The "Load" frame contains a table with a list input loads. Adding load is performed in the
"New load" dialog window. Forces and moments are entered according to the sign convention
displayed in the right part of the dialog window.
-638-
Frame "Load"
Water
The frame "Water" serves to enter a depth of ground water table.
The values can be edited either in the frame by entering values into particular fields, or on the
-639-
Frame "Water"
SPT
The frame "SPT" contains a table with list of standard penetration tests (SPT).
The SPTs are used in the analysis according to the Bustamante method.
-640-
Frame "SPT"
The results of standard penetration tests (SPT) can be imported into the program by inserting
the file in different formats (eg. *.TXT, *.CSV, *.XLSX, *.ODS).
PMTs
The frame "PMTs" contains a table with list of pressuremeter tests (PMT).
The PMTs are used in the analysis according to the Bustamante method.
-641-
Frame "Pressuremeter tests"

Verification of Cross-Section
The results of the analysis of the micropile tube bearing capacity loaded either in tension or
compression are displayed in the frame "Verification of cross-section". More computations
can be carried out for a single task. The left part of the frame allows for inputting the modulus
of subsoil reaction and to account for the influence of corrosion on the analysis.
When calculating the tube bearing capacity (micropile cross-section) the program differentiates
between a micropile loaded in tension or in compression.
In case of tension the program determines coupled section bearing capacity (strength of
cement mixture is not considered).
In case of compression the program examines both, coupled section bearing capacity and
internal stability of section, depending on the method set in the "Micropiles" tab.
The results of the verification analysis are displayed in the right part of the window. The "In
detail" button opens a dialog window listing in detailed the results of the analysis.
-642-
Frame "Verification of cross-section"
Root Verification
The analysis results are displayed in the frame "Root verification". Several calculations can
be carried out for a single task. The limit skin friction can be specified in the left part of the
frame.
The procedure to examine the micropile root is described in detail herein.
The results of the verification analysis are displayed in the right part of the window. The "In
detail" button opens a dialog window listing in detailed the results of the analysis.
-643-
Frame "Root verification"
Program Slab
The program Slab (formerly: Plate) is used for analysis of foundation mats and slabs of any
shape on elastic subsoil, using the Finite Element Method.
The help in the program "Slab" includes the folowing topics:

Project Settings Joints Lines Macroeleme Openings Joint
nts Refinements
Line Macroeleme Mesh Joint Line Beams Internal
Refinements nt Generation Supports Supports Hinges
Refinements
Macroeleme Load Cases Joint Loads Line Loads Macroeleme Free Point Free Line
nt Subsoils nt Loads Loads Loads
Free Area Combination Combination Dimensionin Macroeleme Analysis Values
Loads ULS SLS g nt
Parameters Dimensionin
g
Distributions
-644-
• Theory for dimensioning of concrete structures
• Outputs
Project
Frame "Project"
Settings
the analysis.
-645-
Settings of analysis parameters are performed in the "Materials and standards" tab.
The program allows the user to specify support dimensions and reduce dimensioning moments.
Frame "Settings"
Joints
The frame "Joints" contains a table with the list of input joints. Adding joints is performed in
the "New joints" dialog window.
The input joints can also be edited on the desktop with the help of active objects.
-646-
Frame "Joints"
Lines
The frame "Lines" contains a table with the list of input lines. Adding lines is performed in the
"New lines" dialog window.
The lines are defined between individual points (segments, arcs, circles) or around
individual points (circles). The lines may arbitrarily cross or touch each other - intersection of
input lines are identified by the program automatically when correcting the input geometry.
The type of line is selected from the combo box. The following modes are available:
• Line A combo list is used to select the desired type of line (segment, arc, circle).
type
- Clicking the left mouse button on the joint introduces the line location.
segment
- arc Use the combo list to choose a particular mode of defining an arc
segment (third point, center, radius, height). Clicking the left mouse
bottom on the desktop then selects points to define the arc. When
selecting one of the following options - center, radius or included
angle, you are further requested to select the orientation (positive,
negative) from the combo list.
- circle Use the combo list to choose a particular mode of defining a circle
(center and radius, three points). Clicking the left mouse button on
the desktop then selects points to define the circle. The combo list is
-647-
also used to select the orientation (positive, negative).
The lines can also be edited on the desktop with the help of active objects.
Frame "Lines"
Macroelements
The frame "Macroelements" contains a table with the list of input macroelements. Adding
macroelements is performed in the "New macroelements" dialog window. The dialog window
servers to input a list of lines defining the macroelement outline, its thickness and material.
The macroelement material can be either selected from the catalog of materials or its material
parameters can be input manually using the "Edit material" dialog window.
The input macroelements can also be edited on the desktop with the help of active objects.
-648-
Frame "Macroelements"
Openings
The frame "Openings" contains a table with the list of input openings. Adding openings is
performed in the "New openings" dialog window.
The input openings can also be edited on the desktop with the help of active objects.
-649-
Frame "Openings"
Joint Refinements
The frame "Joint refinements" contains a table with the list of input joint refinements.
Adding joint refinements is performed in the "New joint refinements" dialog window.
Refining the finite element mesh around joints is an important feature, which allows us to
create an appropriate finite element mesh.
The input joint refinements can also be edited on the desktop with the help of active objects.
-650-
Frame "Joint refinements"
Dialog window "New joint refinements"
Line Refinements
The frame "Line refinements" contains a table with the list of input line refinements. Adding
line refinements is performed in the "New line refinements" dialog window.
Refining the finite element mesh around lines is an important feature, which allows us to
The input line refinements can also be edited on the desktop with the help of active objects.
-651-
Frame "Line refinements"
Dialog window "New line refinements"
Macroelement Refinements
The frame "Macroelement refinements" contains a table with the list of input macroelement
refinements. Adding macroelement refinements is performed in the "New macroelement
refinements" dialog window.
Refining the finite element mesh of macroelements is an important feature, which allows
us to create an appropriate finite element mesh.
The input macroelement refinements can also be edited on the desktop with the help of active
objects.
-652-
Frame "Macroelement refinements""
Dialog window "New macroelement refinements"
Mesh Generation
The frame "Mesh generator" serves to define the basic setting to generate mesh (element
edge length, mesh type, mesh smoothing) and to view information about the generated mesh
(right part). The "Error analysis" button allows for visualization of error listing in the right
part of the frame (list of problems the structure has).
Information about the resulting mesh including warnings for possible weak points in the mesh
is displayed in the right bottom window.
An arbitrary part of the slab specified by lines (segments, arches and circles) can be meshed.
The slab can be formed by one or more macroelements all having a constant thickness and
identical material properties and may contain an arbitrary number of openings. In addition, it
-653-
is possible to introduce internal points and lines which are then considered as mesh nodes and
edges. The joints along lines and inside macroelements allow for mesh refinement, which is
characterized by the required length of element edges in the center of the refinement and by
the refinement radius. The user may choose either a purely triangular mesh or a hybrid mesh
consisting of both triangular and quadrilateral elements. The meshing algorithm is based on
Delaunay triangulation enhanced by several methods to modify and optimize the finite element
mesh. The mesh nodes are automatically renumbered to minimize the computational effort.
Properly generated finite element mesh is the stepping stone for obtaining accurate results.
Optimal are equilateral triangular and square quadrilateral elements. The program contains a
built-in automatic mesh generator considerably simplifying this task. The basic mesh density is
specified in the "Mesh generator" window. Refining the mesh increases accuracy of the
results. However, high mesh density considerably slows down both the solution and
subsequent visualization of the results. The goal is thus to create an optimally refined mesh -
this strongly depends on user’s experience.
Thanks to efficiency of the mesh generator there is no problem to adjust input parameters
until obtaining an optimal mesh. The mesh quality is further maintained with the help of built-
in smoothing algorithm, which can be turned off. The actual analysis step is extremely fast
even for relatively dense meshes.
The following procedure to generate the finite element mesh is recommended:
Correctly generated finite element mesh is the major step in achieving accurate and reliable
results. The program FEM has an automatic mesh generator, which may substantially simplify
this task. Nevertheless, certain rules should be followed when creating a finite element
mesh:
- First, a uniform mesh linked to the slab thickness (1-5 multiple of its thickness) is generated
throughout the slab.
-654-
Frame "Mesh generation" - a mesh with no local refinement

- The finite element mesh should be sufficiently fine in the locations where large stress
gradients are expected (point supports, corners, openings, etc.). The mesh refinement can
be specified around individual joints, lines and on the macroelements. Its radius should be
at least 2-3 multiple of the density assumed in the center of the refinement and both values
(density, radius) should be reasonable with respect to the refinement prescribed for the
neighboring regions. This assures a smooth transition between regions with different mesh
densities. Singular lines should be tackled in the same way.
Defining mesh refinement around a circular line
-655-
New mesh after refining the original mesh around a circular line
Mesh Generator Warning

In the "Mesh generation result" dialog window the user is prompted for possible locations on
the structure that may cause problems during automatic mesh generation. When positioning
the cursor on individual warnings the corresponding critical region on a structure is highlighted
with a red color. The following items are checked:
• whether the distance between two points is greater than one tenth of the required
element edge length
• whether the distance between a point and a line is greater than one tenth of the element
edge length
• whether the area of a region is greater than twice the element edge length
• whether points and/or lines are found inside the structure (in the soil)
These warnings suggest locations, in which the mesh generator experience problems. The
following possibilities may occur:
• the mesh is not generated => this calls for a new input of geometrical data
• the mesh is generated => in this case it is up to the user to decide whether the mesh is
reasonable - in any case, the warning can be further ignored and the analysis can be
carried out
-656-
Warning after identifying critical sections in FE mesh
-657-
Critical section after zooming in - two points are too close to each other
Joint Supports
The frame "Joint supports" contains a table with the list of input joint supports. Adding joint
supports is performed in the "New joint supports" dialog window.
The input joint supports can also be edited on the desktop with the help of active objects.
The following types of joint supports are considered:
• free
• fixed
• spring
In the case of reduction of dimensioning moments, support geometry can be entered (frame
"Settings"). The support geometry can be entered as circular (radius R parameter) or
rectangular (parameters dimensions dx and dy and rotation α).
-658-
Frame "Joint supports"
Dialog window "New joint supports"
-659-
Line Supports
The frame "Line supports" contains a table with the list of input line supports. Adding line
supports is performed in the "New supports of lines" dialog window.
The input line supports can also be edited on the desktop with the help of active objects.
The following types of line supports are considered:
• free
• fixed
• spring
In the case of reduction of dimensioning moments, support geometry can be entered (frame
"Settings"). Enter the wall thickness w, the circular area is considered at the end of the wall.
Frame "Line supports"
-660-
Dialog window "New supports of lines"
Beams
The frame "Beams" contains a table with the list of beams. Adding beams is performed in the
"New beams" dialog window.
The dialog widow serves to define the line number of the beam location and material and
cross-section of the beam. Choosing the type of material (concrete, steel, other) then allows
for assigning the material parameters either from the catalog of materials or manually using
editor of materials. The cross-section parameters (based on type of cross-section) can be
either calculated in the window "Calculation of cross-sectional parameters" or manually
input in the "Input of cross-sectional parameters" window.
Added beams can also be edited on the desktop with the help of active objects.
-661-
Frame "Beams"
Dialog window "New beams"
Catalog of Materials
The program contains a built-in catalog of materials for concrete, steel and other materials.
-662-
Only the type of material has to be specified in the dialog window. The type of cross-section is
selected from the "Calculation of cross-sectional parameters" dialog window or "Input of
cross-sectional parameters" dialog window.
Dialog window "Catalog of materials" - concrete
Dialog window "Catalog of materials" - steel
-663-
Dialog window "Catalog of materials" - other
Editor of Materials
Apart from using the "Catalog of materials" the program allows the user to enter the material
parameters for steel, concrete and other materials (dialog window "Editor of material -
General") digitally. Only the type of material (material parameters) has to be specified in the
dialog window. The type of cross-section is selected from the "Calculation of cross-sectional
parameters" dialog window or "Input of cross-sectional parameters" dialog window.
Dialog window "Editor of material - Concrete"
-664-
Dialog window "Editor of material - Structural steel"
Dialog window "Editor of material - General"
Types of Cross-Section
The program allows the user to either input the cross-section parameters in "Calculation
of cross-sectional parameters" and "Input of cross-sectional parameters" dialog
windows. The cross-sectional characteristics are selected from the catalog of profiles, cross-
section editor dialog windows.
-665-
Dialog window "Calculation of cross-sectional parameters"
Catalog of Profiles
In the case of steel cross-sections the program allows for choosing a particular cross-section
from the catalog of profiles. Only the type of cross-section has to be specified in the dialog
window. The type of material of the cross-section is selected from the "Catalog of materials",
or defined in the "Editor of materials".
Dialog window "Catalog of profiles"
-666-
Cross-Section Editor
In the case of steel and concrete cross-section the program allows for introducing the user
defined cross-section. Only the shape of cross-section has to be specified in the dialog window.
The cross-sectional characteristics are selected from the catalog of materials, editor of
materials dialog windows.
Dialog window "Cross-section editor - Structural steel, solid welded"
Dialog window "Cross-section editor - Structural steel, composite rolled"
-667-
Dialog window "Cross-section editor - Concrete, standard"
Internal Hinges
The frame "Internal hinges" contains a table with the list of internal hinges. Adding internal
hinges is performed in the "New internal hinges" dialog window. The dialog widow serves to
define the line number of the internal hinges location and type of internal hinge (free, spring).
The internal hinge is a boundary condition that allows for the introduction of independent
rotation about the x and y axis between the two parts of the slab along a specified line while
keeping the vertical deflection along this line the same. The internal hinge can be prescribed
along an arbitrary line creating a boundary between two macroelements. The rotation can be
either free or controled by the spring torsional stiffness Kϕ,T.
The input internal hinges can also be edited on the desktop with the help of active objects.
-668-
Frame "Internal hinges"
Dialog window "New internal hinge"
Macroelement Subsoils
The frame "Macroelement subsoils" contains a table with the list of input macroelement
subsoils. Adding line supports is performed in the "New macroelement subsoils" dialog
window.
The dialog window serves to define the macroelement number and parameters C1 and C2. The
Winkler-Pasternak constants C1 and C2 can specified either directly or calculated by the
program. The latter option further requires inputting deformation parameters of soils
(deformation modulus, Poisson's ratio and depth of influence zone) in the "Compute C1 and
C2" dialog window. These parameters can be determined using the program "Spread footing"
(2. limit state) and introduced into the program.
-669-
The input macroelement subsoils can also be edited on the desktop with the help of active
objects.
Frame "Macroelement subsoils"
Winkler-Pasternak Parameters C1 a C2
The Winkler - Pasternak model for the solution of an elastic layer introduces the
balance equation in the vertical direction as:
where: c1, c2 -constants characterizing the Winkler - Pasternak model

w -displacement in the vertical direction
fz -vertical load acting on a layer
The elastic subsoil is introduced into the program using local stiffness matrices which are
added to the stiffness matrices of individual elements resting on the subsoil. The contact stress
σ is provided as an output.
Calculation of Winkler-Pasternak Constants from

Deformation Parameters of Soils
The Winkler - Pasternak constants C1 and C2 are calculated in the program from the condition
of equal compliance matrices of infinitely stiff infinite strip footing resting on the Winkler -
-670-
Pasternak and elastic subsoil. This condition is represented by the following equalities:
where: [C] -matrix of constants C1 a C2

b -half width of foundation
c1w, c2w -Winkler’s constants
H depth of deformation zone
Load Cases
The frame "Load cases" contains a table with the list of input load cases. Adding load cases
and their parameters is performed in the "New load case" dialog window. Editing can be
carried out with the help of "Modify" button or by clicking the row with the required load case
in the list using the left mouse button.
-671-
Frame "Load cases"
Load Case Parameters

The following parameters are defined in the "New load case" dialog window:
Load case identifier
The load case identifier, which is composed of the load case number and a uniliteral prefix, is
displayed in front of the field for entering the name of the load case. The prefix is determined
by the type of load case:
G - permanent load
Q - variable load
A - accidental load
The load case identifier is mainly used in printouts of combinations.

Load case code
The load case code determines, what load can be specified for this load. The following options
are available.
Self-weight -In this load case the load represents the structure self-weight and it is
generated automatically by the program. Only one load case with this code can
be considered in each task.
Force -An arbitrary type of force load (forces, moments) can be introduced into the
load case with this code. The number of LCs is not limited.
-672-
Load type
It determines the character of load cases based on their variability in time. Selecting a
particular type of load corresponds to classification according to EN 1990 standard, art. 4.1.1.
Load coefficients
It allows for specifying the load partial factor γf. This coefficient accounts for unfavorable
deviations of values of loads from the representative ones. For permanent load it is necessary
to introduce different values for favorable (γf, inf) and for unfavorable (γf, sup) load action in a
combination. If the load input follows EN 1990 the default values of coefficients are taken from
table A1.2(B).
Category
Classification of load cases into categories corresponds to the classification of load according to
table A1.1 of EN 1990 standard. Based on this the variable load cases are assigned
combination coefficients ψ0, ψ1 a ψ2. The category of "User-defined input" allows for defining
the user self-values of these coefficients. Choosing a category is possible only for load cases
input according to EN 1990 (the "Material and standards" tab serves to select the particular
standard).
Combination coefficients
Basic values of coefficients to create combinations arise from EN 1990 standard and depend on
the load case category. When user input is assumed, it is possible to define the user self-values
of these coefficients. The following coefficients are used to create a combination:
ξ - Coefficient of reduction of permanent loads in alternative combination - this
coefficient is assigned to all permanent loads and is used when compiling alternative
combinations for the bearing capacity limit state (combination to relation 6.10.b, EN
1990).
ψ0 - Coefficient of combination value - coefficient for variable loads, it is used when
compiling combinations for both the bearing capacity and service limit states
ψ1 - Coefficient of frequent value - coefficient for variable loads, it is used when
compiling accidental combinations and combinations for the service limit state
ψ2 Coefficient of quasi-permanent value - coefficient for variable loads, it is used
when compiling accidental combinations and combinations for the service limit state
The combination coefficients are available only for load cases input according to EN 1990 (the
"Material and standards" tab serves to select the particular standard).
-673-
Dialog window "New load case"
Joint Loads
The frame "Joint loads" contains a table with the list of input joint loads. Each joint load is
assigned to a certain load case and input joint. Selection of the load is performed in the
"Active load case" combo list. Adding (editing) joint loads is performed in the "New load of
joints" dialog window.
The program allows for specifying either mechanical (e.g. forces) or deformational (e.g.
prescribed displacements of supports) actions.
The input joint loads can also be edited on the desktop with the help of active objects.
The program employs the following coordinate systems (sign convention).
-674-
Frame "Joint loads"
Line Loads
The frame "Line loads" contains a table with the list of input line loads. Each line load is
assigned to a certain load case and input lines. Selection of the load is performed in the
"Active load case" combo list. Adding line loads is performed in the "New loads of lines"
dialog window.
The program allows for specifying either mechanical (e.g. forces), deformational (e.g.
prescribed displacements of supports), or temperature actions.
The input line loads can also be edited on the desktop with the help of active objects.
-675-
Frame "Line loads"
Temperature Load
Temperature load assumes a linear distribution of temperature throughout the slab thickness.
Such thermal gradient causes moments in the slab given by:
where: E - elastic modulus

ν - Poisson's ratio
h - slab thickness
α - coefficient of thermal expansion
Δt - temperature difference
Macroelement Loads
The frame "Macroelement loads" contains a table with the list of input macroelement loads.
Each macroelement load is assigned to a certain load case and input macroelement. Selection
of the load is performed in the "Active load case" combo list. Adding macroelement loads is
performed in the "New macroelement loads" dialog window.
-676-
The program allows for specifying either mechanical (e.g. forces) or temperature actions.
The input macroelement loads can also be edited on the desktop with the help of active
objects.
Frame "Macroelement loads"
Free Point Loads

The frame "Free point loads" contains a table with the list of input free point loads. Each free
point load is assigned to a certain load case and can receive an arbitrary location on the slab
surface. Selection of the load is performed in the "Active load case" combo list. Adding free
point loads is performed in the "New free point loads" dialog window.
The input free point load can also be edited on the desktop with the help of active objects.
-677-
Frame "Free point loads"
Free Line Loads

The frame "Free line loads" contains a table with the list of input free line loads. Each free
line load is assigned to a certain load case and with using points it can receive an arbitrary
direction and location on the slab surface. Selection of the load is performed in the "Active
load case" combo list. Adding free line loads is performed in the "New free line loads"
dialog window.
The input free line load can also be edited on the desktop with the help of active objects.
-678-
Frame "Free line loads"
Free Area Loads

The frame "Free area loads" contains a table with the list of input free area loads. Each free
area load is assigned to a certain load case and with using points it can receive an arbitrary
shape and location on the slab surface. Selection of the load is performed in the "Active load
case" combo list. Adding free area loads is performed in the "New free surface loads" dialog
window.
The input free area load can also be edited on the desktop with the help of active objects.
-679-
Frame "Free area loads"
Dialog window "New free surface loads"
Combination ULS
The frame "Combinations ULS" contains a table with the list of input combinations of the
bearing capacity limit state. Adding (editing) combinations and their parameters is performed
in the "New combination of load cases" dialog window. Editing can be carried out with the
help of "Modify" button or by clicking the row with the required combination in the list using
the left mouse button.
-680-
The built-in generator of combinations of load cases can be used to create individual
combinations.
Frame "Combination ULS"
Parameters of ULS Combinations

The following parameters are specified in the "New combination of load cases" dialog
window:
New combination
A brief description of combination is displayed in front of the field where the combination is
defined. All considered load cases are tagged using their identifiers. The major variable loads
are moved at the beginning of the list and separated from the remaining LCs by colon.
Type of combination (for combinations based on EN 1990 only)
The following combinations can be created for the bearing capacity limit state:
Basic -Basic combination based on expression 6.10 of EN 1990 standard
Alternative -Combinations based on expressions 6.10a and 1.10b of EN 1990 standard. In
this case, two variants of combination are used in the analysis, one with
reduced permanent LCs and the other with reduced major variable LC.
Accidental -Accidental combination based on 6.11 of EN 1990 standard.
Selection of load cases

The table listing individual load cases allows for their selection to create a combination. The
-681-
load case can be introduced into a combination by checking the field in the column "Consider"
for a particular LC. Further setting in the table depends on the selection of way of inputting
loads in the "Material and standards" tab.
Load according to EN 1990
A second field is available for each load case in the column "Consider". This field allows for
assigning a favorable effect of action to permanent LCs (adopting coefficient γf, inf) or for
specifying a variable load as the major one, respectively. The number of major variable loads
in the combination is not limited. An accidental load can be introduced into combinations
tagged as "Accidental" (only LCs tagged as "Accidental" are available for the selection). For
accidental combinations it is also necessary to choose, whether a major variable load should be
reduced by the coefficient ψ1 or ψ2.
General load
A coefficient of usability can be specified for each load case to adjust the degree of usability of
the load case in the combination.
Dialog window "New combination of load cases"
Generator of ULS Combinations

The "Generator of combinations - 1st order" dialog window allows for a collective
compilation of combinations of load cases based on the introduced combination rules. Referring
to standard EN 1990 the number of generated combinations can be relatively large and in
extreme cases could considerably slow down calculations. Owing to this, information about
expected number of combinations to be generated is displayed in the right bottom corner.
Therefore, before launching generation the user may check, how many combinations will be
generated and possibly adjust generator conditions. The top part of the window serves to
define conditions for generating combinations; the bottom part contains various generator
settings.
-682-
Dialog window "Generator of combinations - 1st order"

Mutually interacting load states and groups
This part makes it possible to merge those load states that should appear in combinations
always together. Permanent and variable loads cannot be merged into one group. If the field
All permanent loads always in combination is checked in the Generator parameters, the
creation of groups of permanent loads has no effect on their appearance in combinations as
each generated combination will always contain all permanent LCs. In such case, merging
permanent LCs will only influence consideration of favorable/unfavorable effects of LCs
providing the field Permanent loads act only unfavorably is not checked.
Dialog window "Generator of combinations" - Mutually interacting load states

Excluded interaction of load states
This part makes it possible to define, which LCs should not appear in a combination together.
Arbitrary load cases or merged groups can be mutually excluded in dependent of the type of
load case. Two options are available to define groups to be excluded:
Mutual -An arbitrary number of load cases can be introduced into one group. In such a
exclusion case, the program will not generate any combination that contains at least two
load cases from this group.
Exclusionby -Providing it is necessary to create a larger number of excluding groups of two
-683-
pairs sorts, where one LC is the same (e.g. exclusion of assembly variants of
permanent loads with all service load cases), it is possible to adopt this option.
A load case to be excluded is first selected in the first column. The second
column is then used to select an arbitrary number of LCs, which are needed to
create excluding groups.
Dialog window "Generator of combinations" - Excluded interaction of load states

Load cases and groups acting as the main variable load
This part is available only when inputting loads according to EN 1990 is considered (the
standard is selected in the "Material and standards" tab). When automatic regime is assumed
then each variable load is taken as major in created combinations. If this regime is turned off,
it is possible to manually adjust the list of major variable loads. For example, it is possible to
remove an arbitrary load case from the list so that it will not be considered as major variable in
combinations. If a new item with more load cases is add to the list then all load cases will be
considered as major variable in those combinations, where they appear together.
Dialog window "Generator of combinations" - Load cases and groups acting as the main
variable load
Generator parameters (parameters that can be set in the bottom part of the dialog
window)
Combo list "Original combinations"
Retain original - By pressing the "Generate" button the program will add new
combinations combinations, created according to the specified rules, to the
original ones
Remove allcombinations - By pressing the "Generate" button the program will delete all
original combinations and will replace them by the new ones
-684-
Remove generated - By pressing the "Generate" button the program will delete older
combinations combinations and will add new ones created according to the
specified rules
Remove all - By pressing the "Generate" button the program will delete all
combinations of the combinations of a given type and will replace them by the new
current type ones
combinations of the combinations of a given type and will add new ones created
current type according to the specified rules
Combo list "Generate combinations"

The following types of generated combinations can be chosen for loads based on EN 1990:
Basic - Generates basic combinations for the bearing capacity limit state
based on expression 6.10 of EN 1990 standard
Alternative - Generates combinations for the bearing capacity limit state based
on expressions 6.10a and 1.10b of EN 1990 standard. This
variant generates two times more combinations but it provides
better results.
Accidental - Generates accidental combinations for the bearing capacity limit
state based on 6.11 of EN 1990 standard. An accidental load case
to appear in accidental combinations can be specified. It is also
necessary to choose, whether a major variable load will be
Permanent loads act only unfavorably

If this setting is not checked, the program creates all possible combinations, where
introduction of all variants of favorable and unfavorable actions of permanent loads will be
considered.
All permanent loads always in combination
If this setting is not checked, the program creates combinations in such a way that a
successive introduction of all LCs into a combination will be considered.
Combination SLS
The frame "Combinations SLS" contains a table with the list of input combinations of the
service limit state. Adding (editing) combinations and their parameters is performed in the
"New combination of load cases" dialog window. Editing can be carried out with the help of
"Modify" button or by clicking the row with the required combination in the list using the left
mouse button.
The built-in generator of combinations of load cases can be used to compile individual
combinations.
-685-
Frame "Combination SLS"
Parameters of SLS Combinations

Combinations SLS serve to evaluate states that refer to the structure appearance, comfort of
people or to functioning of a structure while in ordinary use. Typically, only deformations,
vibrations, etc. are checked. The "New combination of load cases" dialog window (similarly
to combinations for ULS) serves to define the following parameters:
Type of combination according to EN 1990
The following combinations can be created for the service limit state:
Characteristic - combination based on expression 6.14 of EN 1990 standard
Frequent - combination based on expression 6.15 of EN 1990 standard
Quasi-permanent - combination based on expression 6.16 of EN 1990 standard

for a particular LC. A coefficient of usability can be specified for generally input combinations
(select in the "Material and standards" tab) to adjust the degree of usability of the load case in
the combination.
-686-
Dialog window "Combination of load cases"
Generator of SLS Combinations

compilation of combinations of load cases for the service limit state. Functions of generator of
combinations are explained in section devoted to the generator of combinations for the bearing
capacity limit state.
If inputting loads according to EN 1990 is set in the "Material and standards" tab, it is possible
to generate the following combinations for the service limit state:
Dimensioning Parameters
The frame "Dimensioning parameters" serves to define data for dimensioning longitudinal
and shear reinforcement. The combination number (or all combinations) of a combination
to be analyzed must be specified. The material of longitudinal reinforcements is selected either
from "Catalog of materials", or can be introduced manually in the "Editor of materials".
Shear reinforcement is specified in terms of crooks, or stirrups (crooks require to define their
angle).
When running the dimensioning analysis the program generates values of the following
quantities. The analysis is carried out according to the standard set in the "Material and
standards" tab.
-687-
Frame "Dimensioning parameters"
Macroelement Dimensioning
The frame "Macroelement dimensioning" contains a table with the input macroelements.
Editing reinforcement properties (reinforcement direction and distance of centroid of top
and bottom reinforcement from the slab edge can be modified) is performed in the
"Modify properties of macroelement dimensioning" dialog window.
When running the dimensioning analysis the program generates values of the following
quantities. The analysis is carried out according to the standard set in the "Material and
standards" tab.
The macroelement dimensioning can also be edited on the desktop with the help of active
objects.
-688-
Frame "Macroelement dimensioning"
Analysis
The analysis results are displayed in the frame "Analysis". The "Analysis" is carried out using
the finite element method. The dimensioning analysis is performed according to the standard
set in the "Material and standards" tab.
The analysis can be stopped any time by pressing the "Interrupt" button.
Upon completing the analysis the program immediately displays the results and information
about the solution process. This information (with possible listing of errors) is shown in window
in the bottom part of the frame. The principal output tool is the visualization of results on the
screen. The tool bar in the top part of the screen serves to manage the graphical
representation of output quantities.
The color rangeand the bottom for its setting are found in the top part of the desktop.
The way the results appear on the screen can be set in the "Drawing Settings" frame.
-689-
Frame "Analysis" - screen after completing analysis
Analysis Procedure
The solution procedure is split into several steps including localization of the global stiffness
matrix while taking into account the support conditions (fixed or spring supports at joint or
along lines, elastic subsoil), setting up the load vector and analysis of the system of equations
using the Gaussian method with the Cholesky decompositions of the global stiffness matrix,
which in this case is symmetric and band. The values of primary variables wz, φx a φy
calculated at mesh nodes are then used to determine the internal forces mx, my, mxy, vx and vy
together with the derived quantities m1, m2 and the values of reactions developed in supports.
2D-elements
The quality of results of the slab problem derived using the finite element method is strongly
influenced by the type of slab element. The present formulation exploits a deformation variant
of the finite element method to derive triangular and quadrilateral elements denoted as DKMT
and DKMQ (Discrete Kirchhoff-Mindlin Triangle a Quadrilateral).
Formulation of the slab element implemented in the program is based on the discrete Kirchhoff
theory of bending of thin slabs, which can be considered as a special case of the Mindlin plate
theory developed upon the following assumptions:
• compression of slab in the z-direction is negligible compare to the vertical displacement Wz
• normals to the mid-plane of the slab remain straight after deformation but not necessarily
normal to the deformed mid-plane of the slab
• normal stress σz is negligible compare to stresses σx, σy
-690-
DKMT and DKMQ elements have 9 and 12 degrees of freedom, respectively - three
independent displacements at each node:
W- deflection in the direction of z-axis
z
φ- rotation about x-axis
x
φ- rotation about y-axis
y
The elements satisfy the following criteria:

• the stiffness matrix has correct rank (no zero energy states are generated)
• fulfill the patch test
• are suitable for the analysis of both this and thick slabs
• they show good convergence properties
• not computationally expensive
In case of well generated mesh the quadrilateral elements are preferable as show better
behavior compare to triangular elements.
1D-elements
The slab can be reinforced by beams formulated on the basis of one dimensional beam
element with embedded torsion and is compatible with slab elements (details can be found in
literature). The primary variables are Wz, φx and φy and corresponding internal forces are M1,
M2 and V3 (twisting and bending moments and shear force). The beam is characterized by the
moment of inertia It a I2 (torsion, bending), area A and shear area As. These parameters can
be calculated by the program based on the type of cross-section. The analysis constructs 6x6
local stiffness matrices subsequently localized in to the global stiffness matrix of the structure.
Literature:
I. Katili, A new discrete Kirchhoff-Mindlin element based on Mindlin-Reissner plate theory and
assumed shear strain fields - part I: An extended DKT element for thick-plate bending
analysis, Int. J. Numer. Meth. Engng., Vol. 36, 1859-1883 (1993).
I. Katili, A new discrete Kirchhoff-Mindlin element based on Mindlin-Reissner plate theory and
assumed shear strain fields - part II: An extended DKQ element for thick-plate bending
analysis, Int. J. Numer. Meth. Engng., Vol. 36, 1885-1908 (1993).
Z. Bittnar, J. Sejnoha, Numericke metody mechaniky, CVUT, Praha, 1992.
Results
Visualization and interpretation of results is one of the most important parts of the program.
Based on the tool bar setting the program displays variables (deflection, moments, rotation)
for an arbitrary load case or LC combination, or if needed variables for dimensioning (values of
necessary reinforcement areas calculated according to the standard selected in the "Material
and standards" tab).
Calculation of values in user-defined points, or on lines, can be set in frames "Values" or
"Distributions", respectively.
The program provides several basic types of graphical output defined in the "Slab - results
-691-
visualization settings" dialog window.

• plotting structure
• surface plot of quantities
• plotting finite element mesh
• plotting grid-plotting distributions (diagrams)
• plotting values on surface
• plotting directions of moments and reactions
The tool bar "Results" in the upper part of the screen serves to selected variables to be
displayed and the way they should appear on the screen. The color range is shown in the right
part of the desktop. Its particular setting can be adjusted using the "Color range" tool bar.
Because properly setting outputs might be often time consuming, the program disposes of a
comfortable system of selecting and storing view settings.
All outputs and selected results can be further printed out from the analysis protocol.
Tool Bar - Results

The tool bar contains the following operating elements:
Tool bar "Setting visualization of graphical outputs"

Individual elements operate as follows:
Plotting style • opens the "Slab - results visualization
setting settings" dialog window which allows
the user to be more specific in defining
the plotting style
List of plots • a combo list containing names of plots
saved by the user
Save plot • saves the current plot displayed on the
desktop, the dialog window serves to
enter the name of the plot
Manager of • opens the "Manager of plots" dialog
plots window which serves to manage
(delete, change order, rename) already
saved plots
Results (loads, • displays the selected load cases,
load cases, combination (ULS, SLS), envelopes
combination, (ULS, SLS) or dimensioning
dimensioning)
Type of variable • displays the selected variable or
variable of dimensioning
Surface plot • turns on/off plotting of isolines,
isosurfaces
Mesh • turns on/off the style of plotting the FE
mesh (only edges, or according to the
setting in the "Slab - results
-692-
visualization settings" dialog window

Plotting of • plotting of topology of construction
topology
The tool bar contains the most often used operating elements needed to view the results
on the desktop. Detailed setting of the style of plotting the results is available in the "Slab -
results visualization settings" dialog window.
Similar to our other programs the results can be saved and printed. The plotting style can be
adjusted in the "Drawing Settings" frame.
Results Visualization Settings

The "Slab - results visualization settings " dialog window serves to specify the values to be
plotted and the way of their visualization. Individual settings can be later saved using the tool
bar "Results".
The item "Basic" serves to set the basic parameters for plotting the results, quantities and
mesh information - additional items can be then used to define visualization of other outputs.
Dialog window "Slab - results visualization settings"
List of Variables
List of quantities displayed by the program for individual load cases, combinations of
load cases (ULS, SLS) or envelopes (ULS, SLS)
Variable Unit Description
Deflection Wz [mm] Displacement in the Z-direction
Rotation φx [mrad] Rotation about X-axis
Rotation φy [mrad] Rotation about Y-axis
Moment mx [kNm/m] Value of the moment about X-axis
Moment my [kNm/m] Value of the moment about Y-axis
Moment mxy [kNm/m] Value of moment
-693-
Shear force Vx [kN/m] Value of the shear force in the X-direction
Shear force Vy [kN/m] Value of the shear force in the Y-direction
Moment m1 [kNm/m] Value of the principal (extreme) moment
Moment m2 [kNm/m] Value of the principal (extreme) moment
Shear force [kN/m] Value of the shear force (extreme)

Vmax
Contact stress σ [kN/m2] Value of the contact stress
List of Variables of Dimensioning

To perform dimensioning analysis it is first necessary to choose the option "Carry out
dimensioning" in the frame "Dimensioning parameters". Visualization of values for
dimensioning can be set in the tool bar "Results". Notation of variables (particularly indexes of
variables) changes according to the standards used for dimensioning of concrete and steel
structures set in the "Material and standards" tab.
List of quantities displayed by the program for dimensioning
Variable Unit Description
Moment Mdim1, min [kNm/m] Minimal dimensioning moment in direction of reinforcement

1
Moment Mdim1, max [kNm/m] Maximal dimensioning moment in direction of reinforcement

1
Moment Mdim2, min [kNm/m] Minimal dimensioning moment in direction of reinforcement

2
Moment Mdim2, max [kNm/m] Maximal dimensioning moment in direction of reinforcement

2
Reinforcement area 2
[mm /m] Area of upper reinforcement in direction 1
Au1
[mm /m] Area of bottom reinforcement in direction 1
Ab1
[mm /m] Area of upper reinforcement in direction 2
Au2
[mm /m] Area of bottom reinforcement in direction 2
Ab2
Ratio of [%] Reinforcement ratio of upper reinforcement in direction 1

reinforcement μh1
Ratio of [%] Reinforcement ratio of bottom reinforcement in direction 1
-694-
reinforcement μd1
Ratio of [%] Reinforcement ratio of upper reinforcement in direction 2

reinforcement μh2
Ratio of [%] Reinforcement ratio of bottom reinforcement in direction 2

reinforcement μd2
Shear force VEd [kN/m] Dimensioning shear force
Reinforcement area 2 2
[mm /m ] Requested area of shear reinforcement
Ab,nut
Shear force VRd, c [kN/m] Shear strength of cross-section without shear reinforcement
Shear force VRd, max [kN/m] Maximal allowable shear force
Reduction of Bending Moments

Dimensioning moments above supports will be reduced, if the "Input dimensions of
supports and reduce resulting bending moments" in the "Settings" frame is selected. This
will then display the "Geometry of Support" section in the properties of the individual
supports ("Joint Supports", "Line Supports") and will reduce the dimensioning moments in the
analysis.
Interpretation in the analysis
The program reduces the dimensioning moments in the areas of defined geometry of support.
-695-
• The areas of defined geometry of the individual supports that overlap or touch are joined
• The values lying at the boundary of the merged areas are calculated
• Values in the mesh nodes within the merged areas are limited by a value that is calculated
from the boundary values so that the nearest boundary values have the highest influence
• The values of dimensioning moments and dimensioning shear force are limited
Limiting value
The limiting value is calculated according to the formula:
where:
where: υlim(xy) - limiting value at the calculated point xy

N - number of border points
υi - value at boundary point
d(xy, - distance of the calculated point from the boundary point
-696-
xyi)
Values
The frame "Values" allows for defining points (or joints) arbitrarily placed on the slab surface.
For these points (joints) it is possible to display variables (deflections, moments, rotations) for
an arbitrary load case or LC combination, or if needed variables for dimensioning (values of
necessary reinforcement areas calculated according to the standard selected in the "Material
and standards" tab).
The frame contains a table with the list of input points (joints). Adding (editing) is performed
in the "New values" dialog window. The window serves to specify the type of input (point,
joint), coordinates and for what load case, combination, or dimensioning the resulting
quantities should be displayed. The value in the supported joint corresponds to the reaction
force at this support.
In the dimensioning analysis some quantities can be denoted by symbol [*]. In such a case
the necessary reinforcement area and minimal degree of reinforcement is required. If the point
is found on the boundary of two macroelements, the program displays two sets of values for
dimensioning.
Values (points) can also be introduced using the mouse. This inputting mode is activated by
clicking an appropriate button on the horizontal tool bar "Values". The following modes are
available:
• Add Clicking the left mouse button on the desktop introduces the point location
(value).
• Modify Clicking the left mouse button on already existing point (value) opens the
"Modify properties of value" dialog window, which allows for modifying
its parameters.
• Remove Clicking the left mouse button on the point (value) opens the remove
point dialog window - accepting this action removes the selected point
(value).
• Select Clicking the left mouse button on the point (value) highlights the selected
point (value). The point (value) is simultaneously marked in the table list.
The option allows for editing several points (values) at once (e.g.
deleting).
The input points (values) can also be edited on the desktop with the help of active objects.
-697-
Frame "Values"
Distributions
The frame "Distributions" serves to define general lines or lines located on the slab surface.
For these segments (lines) it is possible to display variables (deflections, moments, rotations,
etc.) for an arbitrary load case or LC combination, or if needed variables for dimensioning
(values of necessary reinforcement areas calculated according to the standard selected in the
"Material and standards" tab).
The frame contains a table with the list of input segments (lines). Adding (editing) is
performed in the "New distributions" dialog window. The window serves to specify the type
of input (segment, line), coordinates of the first and the last point, load case, combination,
dimensioning and quantity.
The frame displays:
- General distributions general distributions (diagrams) on an arbitrary segment (line)
- Distributions on if a beam is assigned to the line it is possible to display
beams distributions (diagrams) of other quantities (shear force V3,
bending moment M2, twisting moment M1)
- Distributions on if the line is supported it is possible to display distributions
supported line (diagrams) of other quantities (vertical reaction rz, moment
reaction rm, t).
Distributions can also be introduced using the mouse. This inputting mode is activated by
clicking an appropriate button on the horizontal tool bar "Distributions". The following modes
are available:
-698-
• Add Clicking the left mouse button on the joint introduces the distribution
location.
• Modify Clicking the left mouse button on already existing distribution opens the
"Modify properties of distribution" dialog window, which allows for
modifying its parameters.
• Remove Clicking the left mouse button on the distribution opens the remove
distribution dialog window - accepting this action removes the selected
distribution.
• Select Clicking the left mouse button on the distribution highlights the selected
distribution. The distribution is simultaneously marked in the table list. The
option allows for editing several distributions at once (e.g. deleting).
The input distributions can also be edited on the desktop with the help of active objects.
Frame "Distributions"
Coordinate System (Sign Convention)

Internal forces
Internal forces are defined as:
-699-
The positive direction of internal forces is evident from the following figure:
The principal moments and directions of principal axes are provided by:
The meaning of individual variables is the following: internal forces can be transformed from
-700-
the (x, y) coordinate system to the (x', y') coordinate system by rotating the (x, y) plane
through a certain angle about the z-axis. The angle α, in particular, corresponds to a rotation
angle for which the transformed mx'y' moment attains a zero value whereas the mx' and my'
moments attain their maximum and minimum values m1 and m2, respectively.
The maximum shear force is obtained similarly:
and the angle between vmax and the x-axis:
Load
The sign convention of the applied force and moment load is evident from the following figure:
It is worth to point out a different sign convention applied to the load moment M (at a point or
along a line) and to internal moment m. While the Mx moment rotates about the x-axis (as
usual for beams), the internal moment rotating about the x-axis is denoted as my.
Program Beam
This program provides the analysis of foundation beams resting on elastic subsoil.
The help in the program "Beam" includes the folowing topics:
-701-
Project Settings Geometry Subsoil Interface Location Soils

Assign Water Supports Load Cases Load Combination Combination
ULS SLS
Analysis
• Theory for analysis in the program "Beam":

Geostatic Stress (Uplift Analysis Using the Determination of the
Pressure) Oedometric Modulus Influence Zone Depth
• Outputs
Project
Frame "Project"
-702-
Settings
the analysis.
Settings of analysis parameters are performed in the "Materials and standards" tab.
This frame also allows to specify the subdivision of beam into finite elements (default
setting is 20 elements). Next, it is possible to define whether the soil acts in tension - we
always recommend calculating assuming tension cutoff of soils.
A combo list allows to select one of three ways of defining the Winkler-Pasternak subsoil:
• Calculation of C1 and C2 - the Winkler-Pasternak parameters of subsoil are calculated by
the program from input parameters of the geological profile. Geostatic stress is calculated
from finished ground or from footing bottom. It is possible to enter number of iterations
C1 and C2.
• Input of C1 and C2 - the Winkler-Pasternak parameters of subsoil are directly specified.
• Input of Edef, ny, hz - the Winkler-Pasternak parameters of subsoil are calculated from the
deformation modulus Edef, Poisson's ratio ν and depth of influence zone hz.
In the first case, when parameters C1 and C2 are calculated, the frame "Subsoil" is not
accessible. For the remaining approaches the frames "Interface", "Location", "Soils", "Assign",
and "Water" are not accessible.
Frame "Settings"
-703-
Winkler-Pasternak Parameters C1 a C2
The Winkler - Pasternak model for the solution of an elastic layer introduces the
balance equation in the vertical direction as:
where: c1, c2 -parameters of the Winkler - Pasternak model

w -deflection in the vertical direction
fz -vertical load acting on a layer
The program allows to calculate the parameters C1, C2 from deformation parameters of soils,
or from geological profile.
Calculation of Winkler-Pasternak Parameters C1 and

C2 from Geological Profile
A characteristic combination of load must be chosen when calculating the Winkler-Pasternak
parameters (C1, C2) from geological profile. This combination should be considered as service
and should correspond to the most frequently appearing load. Using this combination, a
surcharge at the footing bottom is calculated next followed by calculation of the influence zone.
Deformation parameters (Poisson's ratio, deformation modulus) are determined for the
calculated influence zone as a weighted average of deformation parameters of soils. Given
these parameters the Winkler-Pasternak constants (C1, C2) are then calculated in the following
way.
Calculation of Winkler-Pasternak Constants from

Deformation Parameters of Soils
The Winkler - Pasternak constants C1 and C2 are calculated from the condition of equal
compliance matrices of infinitely stiff infinite strip footing resting on the Winkler - Pasternak
and elastic subsoil. This condition is represented by the following equalities:
-704-
where: [C] -matrix of constants C1 a C2

b -half width of foundation
c1w, c2w -Winkler’s constants
H depth of deformation zone
Geometry
The frame "Geometry" contains a table with a list of input beam sections. Adding points is
performed in the "New segments" dialog window. The window requires defining the section
length, width and height (for rectangular cross-section). The program allows for defining a
general cross-section of a beam (cross-sectional area and moment of inertia are specified).
Material of the cross-section is specified next, either using the program catalog, or by
entering the material parameters (modulus of elasticity, shear modulus, self-weight).
Frame "Geometry"
Subsoil
The frame "Subsoil" contains a table with the list of values of the parameters of Winkler-
Pasternak subsoil C1 and C2 or deformation parameters of soils (Edef, ny, hz), respectively,
depending on the setting in the frame "Settings".
Adding parameters is performed in the "New parameters of subsoil" dialog window.
The table shows values of the parameter that is selected from the combo list above the table.
-705-
Adding (editing) points is performed in the "New subsoil parameters" dialog window. The
window serves to specify the X -coordinate and the value of the parameter.
Frame "Subsoil"
Interface
The frame "Interface" serves to introduce individual soil interfaces into the soil body. Detailed
description on how to deal with interfaces is described herein.
-706-
Frame "Interface"
Location
The frame "Location" serves to specify the beam location. One needs to specify the beam
origin - point having x and z coordinates.
-707-
Frame "Location"
Soils
The frame "Soils" contains a table with the list of input soils. The table also provides
information about currently selected soil displayed in the right part of the frame. If there are
more items (soils) selected in the table, the information about individual soils is ordered
consecutively.
"Basic data", "Settlement - oedometric modulus", "Settlement - determination of the depth of
influence zone" and "Uplift pressure".
-708-
Frame "Soils"
Basic Data
This part of the dialog window serves to specify the unit weight.
-709-
Assign
The frame "Assign" contains a list of layers of the profile and associated soils. The list of soils
is graphically represented using buttons in the bar above the table, or it is accessible from a
-710-
Frame "Assign"
Water
The frame "Water" serves to input the ground water table. Distribution GWT is introduced the
same way as interfaces of soils.
-711-
Frame "Water"
Supports
The frame "Supports" contains a table with the list of input supports. Adding supports is
performed in the "New supports" dialog window. Editing can be carried out with the help of
"Modify" button or by clicking the row with the required support in the list using the left
mouse button.
The type of support is determined according to a particular boundary condition specified at a
given point (translation, rotation).
The following boundary condition can be specified at a point:
• free
• fixed
• deformation
• spring
-712-
Frame "Supports"
Load Cases
The frame "Load cases" contains a table with the list of input load cases. Adding (editing)
load cases and their parameters is performed in the "New load case" dialog window. Editing
can be carried out with the help of "Modify" button or by clicking the row with the required
load case in the list using the left mouse button.
-713-
Frame "Load cases"
Load Case parameters

The following parameters are defined in the "New load case" dialog window:
Load case identifier
The load case identifier, which is composed of the load case number and a uniliteral prefix, is
displayed in front of the field for entering the name of the load case. The prefix is determined
by the type of load case:
G - permanent load
Q - variable load
A - accidental load
The load case identifier is mainly used in printouts of combinations.

Load case code
The load case code determines, what load can be specified for this load. The following options
are available.
Self-weight -In this load case the load represents the structure self-weight and it is
generated automatically by the program. Only one load case with this code can
be considered in each task.
Force -An arbitrary type of force load (forces, moments) can be introduced into the
load case with this code. The number of LCs is not limited.
Load type
-714-
It determines the character of load cases based on their variability in time. Selecting a
particular type of load corresponds to classification according to EN 1990 standard, art. 4.1.1.
Load coefficients
It allows for specifying the load partial factor γf. This coefficient accounts for unfavorable
deviations of values of loads from the representative ones. For permanent load it is necessary
to introduce different values for favorable (γf, inf) and for unfavorable (γf, sup) load action in a
combination. If the load input follows EN 1990 the default values of coefficients are taken from
table A1.2(B).
Category
Classification of load cases into categories corresponds to the classification of load according to
table A1.1 of EN 1990 standard. Based on this the variable load cases are assigned
combination coefficients ψ0, ψ1 a ψ2. The category of "User-defined input" allows for defining
the user self-values of these coefficients. Choosing a category is possible only for load cases
input according to EN 1990 (the "Materials and standards" tab serves to select the particular
standard).
Combination coefficients
Basic values of coefficients to create combinations arise from EN 1990 standard and depend on
the load case category. When user input is assumed, it is possible to define the user self-values
of these coefficients. The following coefficients are used to create a combination:
ξ - Coefficient of reduction of permanent loads in alternative combination - this
coefficient is assigned to all permanent loads and is used when compiling alternative
combinations for the bearing capacity limit state (combination to relation 6.10.b, EN
1990).
ψ0 - Coefficient of combination value - coefficient for variable loads, it is used when
compiling combinations for both the bearing capacity and service limit states
ψ1 - Coefficient of frequent value - coefficient for variable loads, it is used when
compiling accidental combinations and combinations for the service limit state
ψ2 Coefficient of quasi-permanent value - coefficient for variable loads, it is used
when compiling accidental combinations and combinations for the service limit state
The combination coefficients are available only for load cases input according to EN 1990 (the
frame "Analysis methods" serves to select the particular standard).
-715-
Dialog window "New load case"
Load
The frame "Load" contains a table with the list of input loads. Adding (editing) a load is
performed in the "New loads (Edit loads)" dialog window. Editing can be carried out with the
help of "Modify" button or by clicking the row with the required load in the list using the left
mouse button.
Each load is assigned to a load case. The load case can be selected from the "Active load
case" combo list above the table.
-716-
Frame "Load"
Combination ULS
The frame "Combinations ULS" contains a table with the list of input combinations of the
bearing capacity limit state. Adding (editing) combinations and their parameters is performed
in the "New combination of load cases" dialog window. Editing can be carried out with the
help of "Modify" button or by clicking the row with the required combination in the list using
the left mouse button.
The built-in generator of combinations of load cases can be used to create individual
combinations.
-717-
Frame "Combination of ULS"
Parameters of ULS Combinations

The following parameters are specified in the "New combination of load cases" dialog
window:
New combination
A brief description of combination is displayed in front of the field where the combination is
defined. All considered load cases are tagged using their identifiers. The major variable loads
are moved at the beginning of the list and separated from the remaining LCs by colon.
Type of combination (for combinations based on EN 1990 only)
The following combinations can be created for the bearing capacity limit state:
Basic -Basic combination based on expression 6.10 of EN 1990 standard
Alternative -Combinations based on expressions 6.10a and 1.10b of EN 1990 standard. In
this case, two variants of combination are used in the analysis, one with
reduced permanent LCs and the other with reduced major variable LC.
Accidental -Accidental combination based on 6.11 of EN 1990 standard.

for a particular LC. Further setting in the table depends on the selection of way of inputting
loads in the "Materials and standards" tab.
Load according to EN 1990:
-718-
A second field is available for each load case in the column "Consider". This field allows for
assigning a favorable effect of action to permanent LCs (adopting coefficient γf, inf) or for
specifying a variable load as the major one, respectively. The number of major variable loads
in the combination is not limited. An accidental load can be introduced into combinations
tagged as "Accidental" (only LCs tagged as "Accidental" are available for the selection). For
accidental combinations it is also necessary to choose, whether a major variable load should be
General load
A coefficient of usability can be specified for each load case to adjust the degree of usability of
the load case in the combination.
Generator of Combinations
compilation of combinations of load cases based on the introduced combination rules. Referring
to standard EN 1990 the number of generated combinations can be relatively large and in
extreme cases could considerably slow down calculations. Owing to this, information about
expected number of combinations to be generated is displayed in the right bottom corner.
Therefore, before launching generation the user may check, how many combinations will be
generated and possibly adjust generator conditions. The top part of the window serves to
define conditions for generating combinations; the bottom part contains various generator
settings.
-719-
Dialog window "Generator of combinations - 1st order"

Mutually interacting load states and groups
This part makes it possible to merge those load states that should appear in combinations
always together. Permanent and variable loads cannot be merged into one group. If the field
"All permanent loads always in combination" is checked in the Generator parameters, the
creation of groups of permanent loads has no effect on their appearance in combinations as
each generated combination will always contain all permanent LCs. In such case, merging
permanent LCs will only influence consideration of favorable/unfavorable effects of LCs
providing the field "Permanent loads act only unfavorably" is not checked.
Dialog window "Generator of combinations" - Mutually interacting load states

Excluded interaction of load states
This part makes possible to define, which LCs should not appear in a combination together.
Arbitrary load cases or merged groups can be mutually excluded in dependent of the type of
load case. Two options are available to define groups to be excluded:
Mutual -An arbitrary number of load cases can be introduced into one group. In such a
exclusion case, the program will not generate any combination that contains at least two
load cases from this group.
Exclusion by -Providing it is necessary to create a larger number of excluding groups of two
pairs sorts, where one LC is the same (e.g. exclusion of assembly variants of
permanent loads with all service load cases), it is possible to adopt this option.
-720-
A load case to be excluded is first selected in the first column. The second
column is then used to select an arbitrary number of LCs, which are needed to
create excluding groups.
Dialog window "Generator of combinations" - Excluded interaction of load states

Load cases and groups acting as the main variable load
This part is available only when inputting loads according to EN 1990 is considered (the
standard is selected in the "Materials and standards" tab). When automatic regime is assumed
then each variable load is taken as major in created combinations. If this regime is turned off,
it is possible to manually adjust the list of major variable loads. For example, it is possible to
remove an arbitrary load case from the list so that it will not be considered as major variable in
combinations. If a new item with more load cases is add to the list then all load cases will be
considered as major variable in those combinations, where they appear together.
Dialog window "Generator of combinations" - Load cases and groups acting as the main
variable load
Generator parameters (parameters that can be set in the bottom part of the dialog window).
Combo list "Original combinations"
Retain original - By pressing the "Generate" button the program will add new
combinations combinations, created according to the specified rules, to the
original ones
combinations original combinations and will replace them by the new ones
combinations combinations and will add new ones created according to the
specified rules
combinations of the combinations of a given type and will replace them by the new
current type ones
-721-
combinations of the combinations of a given type and will add new ones created
current type according to the specified rules
Combo list "Generate combinations"

The following types of generated combinations can be chosen for loads based on EN 1990:
Basic - Generates basic combinations for the bearing capacity limit state
based on expression 6.10 of EN 1990 standard
Alternative - Generates combinations for the bearing capacity limit state based
on expressions 6.10a and 1.10b of EN 1990 standard. This
variant generates two times more combinations but it provides
better results.
Accidental - Generates accidental combinations for the bearing capacity limit
state based on 6.11 of EN 1990 standard. An accidental load case
to appear in accidental combinations can be specified. It is also
necessary to choose, whether a major variable load will be
Permanent loads act only unfavorably

If this setting is not checked, the program creates all possible combinations, where
introduction of all variants of favorable and unfavorable actions of permanent loads will be
considered.
All permanent loads always in combination
If this setting is not checked, the program creates combinations in such a way that a
successive introduction of all LCs into a combination will be considered.
Combination SLS
The frame "Combinations SLS" contains a table with the list of input combinations of the
service limit state. Adding (editing) combinations and their parameters is performed in the
"New combination of load cases" dialog window. Editing can be carried out with the help of
"Modify" button or by clicking the row with the required combination in the list using the left
mouse button.
The built-in generator of combinations of load cases can be used to compile individual
combinations.
-722-
Frame "Combination SLS"
Parameters of SLS Combinations

Combinations SLS serve to evaluate states that refer to the structure appearance, comfort of
people or to functioning of a structure while in ordinary use. Typically, only deformations,
vibrations, etc. are checked. The "New combination of load cases" dialog window (similarly
to combinations for ULS) serves to define the following parameters:
Type of combination according to EN 1990
The following combinations can be created for the service limit state:

for a particular LC. A coefficient of usability can be specified for generally input combinations
(select in the "Materials and standards" tab) to adjust the degree of usability of the load case
in the combination.
-723-
Generator of Combinations
compilation of combinations of load cases for the service limit state. Functions of generator of
combinations are explained in section devoted to the generator of combinations for the bearing
capacity limit state.
If inputting loads according to EN 1990 is set in the "Materials and standards" tab, it is possible
to generate the following combinations for the service limit state:
Analysis
The frame "Analysis" also serves to display the analysis results. The analysis is carried using
the finite element method incorporating the Winkler-Pasternak subsoil. Several analyses,
including presentation of results, can be carried out for one task. Information about the
performed analysis is displayed in the top right corner of the frame. Should the analysis
parameters change it is necessary to re-run the analysis by pressing the "Analyze" button.
If the subsoil parameters are calculated from the geological profile, it is necessary to choose
"Characteristic combination for subsoil analysis" in the combo list.
The "Results" combo list serves to set combinations of load for ULS or SLS (possibly
envelopes of combinations of load cases) for which the results should be displayed on the
desktop.
The bottom part of the window serves to define, which variables are visualized (Displacements,
Shear force, Moment…) and the way of their appearance on the desktop.
-724-
Frame "Analysis"
Program Settlement
This program is used to determine vertical settlement and time-dependent consolidation of
soils under embankments, foundations, earth dams and surface loads (surcharges).
The help in the program "Settlement" includes the folowing topics:

Project Settings Interface Embankmen Earth Cut Incompressi Soils
t ble Subsoil
Assign Surcharge Water Stage Analysis
Settings
• Theory for analysis in the program "Settlement":

Stress in Soil Body Settlement Analysis
• Outputs
-725-
Project
Frame "Project"
Settings
the analysis.
-726-
Settings of analysis parameters are performed in the "Settlement" tab.
The frame also allows to specify whether to perform the consolidation analysis.
Frame "Settings"
Interface
The "Interface" frame serves to introduce individual soil interfaces into the soil body. Detailed
description how to deal with interfaces is described herein.
-727-
Frame "Interface"
Embankment
The "Embankment" frame allows for inputting interfaces to create an embankment above the
current terrain. The frame contains a table with a list of interfaces forming the embankment. A
table listing the points of currently selected interface of the embankment is displayed in the
mid section of the frame. Inputting an embankment interface follows the same steps as used
for standard interfaces.
An embankment cannot be specified in the first stage of construction. An embankment cannot
be built if there is an earth cut already specified in a given stage - in such a case either a new
stage of construction must be introduced for embankment input or the existing open cut must
be first removed.
Input interfaces of an embankment can be copied within all 2D GEO5 programs using
"GeoClipboard".
-728-
Frame "Embankment"
Earth Cut
The "Earth cut" frame serves to specify the shape of an open cut. This function allows for
modifying the terrain profile within a given stage of construction. Several earth cuts can be
introduced at the same time. In such a case some of the lines in the cut appear partially above
the terrain.
A table listing individual interface points is displayed in the left part of the frame. Inputting an
earth cut interface follows the same steps as used for standard interfaces.
An open cut cannot be specified in the first stage of construction. An earth cut cannot be built
if there is an embankment already specified in a given stage - in such a case either a new
stage of construction must be introduced for earth cut input or the existing embankment must
be first removed.
Input interfaces of an earth cut can be copied within all 2D GEO5 programs using
"GeoClipboard".
-729-
Frame "Earth cut"
Incompressible Subsoil
The frame "Incompressible subsoil" serves to input a depth of incompressible subsoil.
Inputting the depth of incompressible subsoil is the same as when inputting standard
interfaces.
Inputting an incompressible subsoil is one the options how to restrict an influence zone - if
input, then both ranges and tilted sections are drawn up to a depth of incompressible subsoil.
No ground deformation appears below the incompressible subsoil.
Input interfaces of an Incompressible subsoil can be copied within all 2D GEO5 programs using
"GeoClipboard".
-730-
Frame "Incompressible subsoil"
Soils
"Uplift pressure" and "Settlement analysis". In consolidation analysis the coefficient of
permeability or consolidation coefficient must be entered. The input parameters of soils are
determined based on the selected theory of analysis in the "Settlement" tab.
The particular values are obtained from geotechnical survey or from laboratory experiments. If
these data are not available, it is possible to exploit built-in database of soils, which contains
values of selected characteristics of soils.
-731-
Frame "Soils"
Basic Data
This part of the dialog window serves to specify the unit weight of soil.
-732-
Assign
-733-
Frame "Assign"
Surcharge
All input parameters of a surcharge can be modified in the construction stage where the
surcharge was specified. Only the surcharge magnitude can be modified in all subsequent
construction stages (option "Adjust surcharge").
Influence of surcharge on the change of stress in the soil body is described in the theoretical
part of the help section.
-734-
Frame "Surcharge"
Water
The "Water" frame serves to set the type of ground water table.
Inputting the ground water table or isolines, respectively, is identical with the standard input of
interfaces.
If the input data in individual stages are different, the program then allows for accepting the
data from the previous stage of construction by pressing the "Accept" button.
-735-
Frame "Water"
Stage Settings
The frame allows for specifying the position of control holes and thicknesses and locations of
layers where the stress values are calculated.
The program determines stresses at individual control holes. The terrain is always
subdivided into twenty holes with even spacing. Additional holes are automatically generated
in points specifying terrain, embankment, GWT, soil layer interfaces and end points of
surcharge. The control (calculation) holes can be plotted in the frame "Analysis".
Individual holes are divided into layers according to the input values. The first layer always
coincides with the original ground. In addition, all points specifying interfaces, GWT and
incompressible subsoil are included. The default setting of thicknesses of layers ensures
reasonable speed and accuracy of the analysis.
The layers are introduced up to depth of 250 m. In actual analyses, however, the depth of
influence zone is restricted either by the input incompressible subsoil or by the reduction of
magnitude of stress change or by the structural strength, respectively (depending on the
setting in the "Settlement" tab).
The number and location of calculation holes can be adjusted when selecting the option "User-
defined". In such a case it is possible to select both the location of holes and thicknesses and
location of layers. The holes are then created according to the input - in addition, the program
automatically includes all important points. When selecting the option exact distribution,
the holes are included into all terrain points, soil layer interfaces, embankments, GWP and into
-736-
end points of surcharge. When selecting the option minimal distribution, the holes are not
included into points of interfaces of soil and embankment layers.
For standard analyses we recommend keeping the default setting of the analysis.
Frame "Settings"
Analysis
The "Analysis" frame displays the analysis results.
It is always required to model the structure using construction stages. First construction
stage represents the original state, so the settlement is null. New surcharges or
embankments are added in further construction stages, where the terrain settlement is
calculated. Information about the analysis process, maximum settlement, depth of deformation
zone are listed in the window in the bottom part of the frame.
In consolidation analysis (set in the frame "Settings") this section of the frame allows to
enter consolidation parameters.
The settlement is calculated using the analysis theory, which is input in the tab
"Settlement". The depth of deformation zone is defined either by input incompressible
subsoil, method of restriction of the primary stress magnitude, or by theory of structural
strength.
The results, as the main output, are displayed on the screen. To view the results, use
the horizontal bar in the upper section of the screen and "Drawing Settings : Analysis" frame.
The frame "Drawing Settings : Analysis" allows for specifying:
- drawing parameters: parameters to display depression line and influence zone, to draw
tilted sections, isosurfaces and isolines, etc.
- option to store individual views
The bar contains the following control items:
- selecting values for visualization - either total values, or their change during the last
calculation stage or their change in comparison with previous stages can be plotted.
The setting is available only in problems where it makes sense. It is therefore possible to
display the change of stress, settlement or deformation in comparison with previous stages -
however, always the current depth of influence zone is plotted.
- selecting variables
• SigmaZ,tot - overall vertical total stress [kPa, ksf]
• SigmaZ,eff - overall vertical effective stress [kPa, ksf]
-737-
• Pore pressure - stress due to water [kPa, ksf]

• Settlement - settlement of a point [mm, feet]
• Deformation - relative settlement of a layer [-]*1000
- plotting option (do not plot, isosurfaces, isolines)
The color range is visible on the right part of the desktop. The buttons for setting the color
range are located below.
Frame "Analysis"
Consolidation Parameters
In consolidation analysis (set in the frame "Settings") the bottom window in the frame
"Analysis" allows to enter consolidation parameters.
The first construction stage of calculation represents only geostatic stress at initial time of
construction. Top and bottom interface of consolidated soil layer and direction of water outflow
from this layer (upwards, downwards and both downwards and upwards) is entered in the first
construction stage.
Program allows to draw a time course of settlement (graph on the right of the desktop)
according to relevant theory of settlement. The vertical axis shows degree of consolidation U
[%], on the horizontal axis is shown time of settlement t [days].
-738-
Frame "Analysis" - primary geostatic stress (first construction stage)

In other construction stages time of stage duration and load action are entered. Program
allows for choosing from two options of load acting: whole load introduced at the beginning of
stage or load linearly increases during stage duration. The calculation is then launched from
the first construction stage to the construction stage where "Overall settlement" is checked
(may be checked in whatever stage except first one).
-739-
Frame "Analysis" - consolidation (other construction stage)

Example: determine settlement from surcharge after 5 days, 1 month, 1 year and 5 years?
Enter construction stages according to following scheme:
1. stage Only geostatic stress
2. stage Surcharge, time: 5 days
3. stage No changes, time: 25 days
6. stage Check option "Overall settlement" and run the calculation
Program Ground Loss

This program is used for analysis and determination of the shape of subsidence trough above
excavations and to evaluate the damage to buildings situated in the affected area.
The help in the program "Ground Loss" includes the folowing topics:

Project Settings Buildings Profile Soils Assign Geometry
-740-
Measuremen Stage Analysis Damage

ts Settings
• Theory for analysis in the program "Ground Loss":

Stress in Soil Body Ground Loss
• Outputs
Project
Frame "Project"
Settings
The frame "Settings" allows to specify standards or methods that are used to perform the
analysis.
The frame "Settings" allows to select the method for determining subsidence trough (Volume
-741-
loss, classic theories) and its shape (Gauss, Aversin). It also allows to input the coefficient of
calculation of inflection point, (for classic theories only), which influences the shape of
subsidence trough.
Frame "Analysis methods"
Buildings
The frame "Buildings" allows to input objects above excavation. An arbitrary number of
buildings can be specified both on a ground surface and at a given depth.
Frame "Buildings"
-742-
Profile
The "Profile" frame contains a table with a list of input interfaces. After interfaces
specification, it is possible to edit thicknesses of individual layers using the active dimensions.
The program allows to raise or lower the top point of a structure in the "Change of terrain
elevation" dialog window, so that the whole interface can be translated while keeping the
thicknesses of individual layers. This function is important when copying the profile from the
Data input in the frame is allowed if the classic theory of analysis is selected in the frame
"Settings".
Frame "Profile"
Soils
The frame "Soils" contains a table with a list of input soils. The table also provides information
Inputting data into the frame is allowed if the classic theory of analysis is selected in the
frame "Settings". The particular values are obtained from geotechnical survey or from
laboratory experiments. If these data are not available, it is possible to exploit built-in
database of soils, which contains values of selected characteristics of soils.
-743-
Possible values of the angle of internal friction and cohesion are available in chapter "Rocks
parameters".
Frame "Soils"
Assign
Inputting data in the frame is allowed if the classic theory of analysis is selected in the
frame "Settings".
-744-
Frame "Assign"
Geometry
The frame "Geometry" contains a table with a list of input excavations. The "New
excavation" dialog window allows to add excavations. The input excavations can also be
modified on the desktop using the active objects.
Parameters of excavation differ depending on the analysis method selected in the frame
"Settings". Each excavation can be specified either by the radius or the area of excavation.
Providing a sequential excavation is being input it is useful to specify the excavation area and
place a fictitious center of excavation to a center of gravity of this area.
Additional input parameters are explained in more detail when describing individual analysis
methods (Volume loss, classic theories).
The program allows to export the geometry of a structure in the *.DXF format.
-745-
Dialog window "New excavation"
Frame "Geometry"
Measurement
The frame "Measurement" contains a table with a list input measurements. The "New
measurement" dialog window allows to add measurements. The input measurements can
also be modified on the desktop using the active objects.
Input measurements do not influence the actual analysis - their introduction into the
program has resulted purely from designers needs. After excavating the first part of a
-746-
sequential tunnel it is useful to input the values measured in the construction site into the
program and subsequently to add the excavation input parameters such that the calculated
and measured values are the same. Practical experience shows that the values of input
parameters acquired from this procedure (e.g. coefficient of volume loss) are valid also for
subsequent stages.
Frame "Measurement"
Stage settings
The frame "Stage settings" allows to input settings valid for a given construction stage.
The frame allows to introduce bounds on the tensile and gradient damage. These values allow
to verify the building damage in the frame "Damages". The program offers a default pre-
setting (default setting for masonry buildings) and a user-defined setting - here, it is
possible to define arbitrary criteria recommended by standards or gained from practical
experience for arbitrary types of buildings.
The boundary values must be defined either in a descending or ascending order, respectively.
Should you need to define fewer regions than specified in the program, it is possible to
characterize certain boundaries by the same value.
-747-
Frame "Settings"
Analysis
The frame "Analysis" provides the results from the analysis of subsidence trough. More than
one analysis at different depths below the terrain surface can be performed for a single task.
The computed values are displayed on a desktop and are continuously updated whenever a
certain change in the input data or setting in the frame is introduced.
Visualization of results can be adjusted in the frame "Drawing Settings". For a quick switch
between different styles of graphical presentation of results (subsidence trough,
distribution of values), the user may use the buttons in section "Visualization".
Frame "Analysis" - "Settlement"
-748-
Frame "Analysis" - "Diagrams"
Damage
The frame "Damages" provides the results of failure analysis of buildings. The program offers
four types of verification:
• Verification of tensile cracks
• Verification of gradient damage
• Verification of relative deflection of buildings (hogging, sagging)
• Verification of the input section of a building
The program allows to perform an analysis for the current and all previous stages (envelope
from all stages) or it is possible to input individual stages and evaluate their influence. Such
a procedure makes it possible to find, e.g. an optimal process of excavation of sequential
tunnels.
Several analyses can be carried out for a single task. Visualization of results can be adjusted in
-749-
Frame "Damages" - visualization of tensile cracks
Frame "Damages" - visualization of gradient damage
-750-
Program Terrain
This program is used to create digital terrain models (DEM, DTM) from inputted points and
holes. It calculates volumes of excavation and also serves as task manager for other GEO5
programs.
The help in the program "Terrain" includes the folowing topics:

Project Basic Data Soils Assign Points Edges Water
Boreholes Earth Construction Generate Point Line Launching
Grading site Construction Construction
s s
• Outputs
Project
In this input mode, the assumed setting can be modified only in the first construction stage.
Frame "Project"
-751-
Basic Data
The frame "Basic data" serves to input basic parameters of the task.
The frame contains a table with a list of specified layers. Layers can be added, inserted or
removed using the buttons on the right from the table. The first layer can be neither removed,
nor can another layer be inserted in front of it.
Crossing the item "Input in the global coordinate system" opens the way for introducing
the data in the global coordinate system (JTSK, Gauss-Krüeger).
In the "Type of layers input" combo list it is possible to determine the way of inputting
layers. Layers can be introduced with the help of layers thicknesses or their points.
In this input regime the assumed setting can be modified only in the first construction stage.
Visualization of drawing on the desktop can be modified in any input regime based on the
setting adjusted in the "Drawing Settings" frame and with the help of buttons on tool bar
"Visualization".
Frame "Basic data"
Global Coordinate System

The "Coordinate systems" dialog window allows for defining the type of the global coordinate
system.
Essential advantage is the possibility of specifying the coordinates of points and boreholes both
in the local and global coordinate systems and switching between the two systems.
-752-
Orientation of the global coordinate system with respect to the local one is defined using two
points, where one point is always introduced in the local coordinate system and its image in
the global coordinate system.
Direction and sign convention is displayed for each type of the global coordinate system in the
legend chart.
Dialog window "Coordinate system"
Soils
The program "Terrain" calls only for specification of the coefficient of bulking to compute
yardage of excavation pits or embankments. The remaining data are used only for possible
export into our other programs and have no effect on actual calculations performed in program
"Terrain".
-753-
Frame "Soils"
Assign
In subsequent stages of construction the program automatically adds a new layer, to which a
soil adjacent to terrain is automatically assigned. In many cases (excavation pits) this layer
may have no volume - its introduction is necessary providing the new terrain is found above
the terrain of the previous stage. The soil is always assigned, since it is not possible to a prior
estimate, whether some part of the terrain in the new stage will be located above the original
one.
-754-
Frame "Assign"
Points
The frame "Points" serves to define the coordinates of terrain points. There are two options
available to define coordinates of individual points:
With the help of table: points are defined in the table. Pressing the "Add" button opens the
"New point" dialog window; coordinates of points are then specified and by pressing the
"Add" button added to the table. An arbitrary number of points can be defined in this way. The
"Cancel" button is used at last to close the window. These points can be further modified (in
the dialog window) using the "Edit" button or removed with the help of "Remove" button
(more points can be marked in the table to remove them all at once - before removing, the
selected points are displayed on the desktop in red). Each change is immediately reflected on
the desktop.
With the help of the mouse: this inputting mode is turned on by pressing a respective
button on the horizontal bar. The following options are available:
Add • to input a point, click the left mouse button on the desktop (the mouse cursor
changes - see picture) - the program then opens the "New point" dialog window,
which allows for modifying the point coordinates, or to input its Z-coordinate - after
pressing the "OK" button the program adds this point into the table. Providing the
point cannot be added (e.g. duplicity of coordinates) the program prompts a
warning message
• grid functions can also be used when specifying a point
Edit • clicking an already existing point (see active object) using the left mouse button
opens the "Edit point" dialog window, which allows for editing the point coordinates
- in the dialog window the following buttons ("OK+ " and "OK+ ") can be used
-755-
Rem • clicking the point using the left mouse button opens a dialog window, which requests
ove to confirm deletion of the selected point
Selec • actives the regime of graphical selection of points (type of selection is set in the tool
t bar "Selection"
The selected points can also be imported from files in formats TXT, Atlas DMT, DXF and
LandXML.
The program allows for importing further points and edges into the processed task (e.g. in
subsequent stages).
When defining points the program in some cases automatically calculates their Z-coordinates.
Only one point can be assigned to a single coordinate X, Y.
Providing the option of inputting layres with the help of "Points of layers" in the "Basic data"
frame is selected, the "Points" bar contains the "Layres" combo list. This list serves to choose
a layer into which the points will be input.
"Visualization".
Frame "Points"
Import of Points
The program allows for data import in formats DXF, LandXML, ATLAS DMT and ASCII. When
-756-
importing, all old data are deleted and replaced by the new ones. The world dimensions are
automatically determined according to minimal and maximal values of coordinates x and y - it
is therefore desirable to subsequently adjust the world dimensions in the frame "Basic data".
The program allows for importing ASCII data from respective files. Each point is written on
a separate line of the file, coordinates are separated by space or tab character. If the file
contains for each point first its name, it is necessary to check the item "Labeling of points".
In the dialog window it is then necessary to specify the order of coordinates. If the data has an
opposite sign convention, it possible to multiply the corresponding line by the value -1. The
data import is performed after pressing the "OK" button.
Dialog window "Import" - format "TXT"
Dialog window "Import" - format "Atlas"
Automatic Calculation of Height

When defining points, boreholes and points of ground water table the program in some cases
automatically calculates the point height (z-coordinate) and eventually the layer thickness. This
function is particularly valuable when editing terrain or layers.
-757-
The possibility of height calculation depends on the status of generated terrain:

• If no terrain is generated, the height is not calculated and the respective field remains
empty (blank).
• If terrain is generated for the current data (displayed on the desktop in a non-transparent
mode and in regimes Generation, Point constructions, Line constructions and
Launching also in a color mode), the required values are then automatically calculated
from the model of terrain - for a point it is the z-coordinate, for a borehole the program
further determines the layer thickness and possibly also the depth of the ground water
table - when a point or a borehole is specified the status of generated terrain is changed
and the drawing is switched to a transparent mode (the terrain is generated for the
original input, not for the current input).
• When the terrain is generated, but it is not the current one, the z-coordinates and layers
thicknesses are automatically calculated for the last generated terrain.
Information regarding the terrain status (not generated, generated, generated for the
original data) are displayed on the vertical tool bar. The frame "Generate" allows for terrain
generating or removing the generated model.
Dialog window - add new point and calculate the Z-coordinate
-758-
Dialog window - add new borehole and calculate the Z-coordinate, thickness of GWT and layer
thicknesses
Edges
The frame "Edges" serves to input edges connecting the terrain points. Two options are
available to define edges:
With the help of table: edges are defined in the table. Pressing the "Add" button opens the
"New edge" dialog window; sequence numbers of the starting and end points are then
specified and by pressing the "Add" button added to the table. An arbitrary number of edges
can be defined in this way. The "Cancel" button is used at last to close the window. These
edges can be further modified (in the dialog window) using the "Edit" button or removed with
the help of "Remove" button (more edges can be marked in the table to remove them all at
once - before removing, the selected edges are displayed on the desktop in red). Each change
is immediately reflected on the desktop.
Add • to input an edge, click the starting and end points using the left mouse
button (the mouse cursor changes - see picture) - after clicking the end
point the program adds the corresponding edge into the table and at the
same time displays this edge on the desktop. Providing the edge cannot be
added (duplicity reason, crossing, etc.) the program prompts a warning
message
Edit • clicking an already existing edge (see active objects) using the left mouse
button opens the "Edit edge" dialog window, which allows for editing the
sequence numbers of the starting and end points of the edge - in the dialog
-759-
window the following buttons ("OK+ " and "OK+ ") can be used
Remove • clicking the edge using the left mouse button opens a dialog window, which
requests to confirm deletion of the selected edge
Select • activates the regime of graphical selection of edges (type of selection is set
in the bar "Selections")
Edges can intersect neither other edges nor earth grading. Only one edge can be defined
between two points.
"Visualization".
Frame "Edges"
Water
The frame "Water" serves to specify the ground water table (GWT). A combo list "Type of
water" contains the following items:
• No water - no water specified
• Water specified by points - the GWT points are defined in the table in the same way as
when defining terrain points. This approach is particularly suitable if having a horizontal
water table - then it is sufficient to define only one point of a given coordinate Z and the
program automatically generates a horizontal line representing the GWT.
• Water specified in boreholes - Ground water is defined within boreholes. A particular
depth of GWT measured from terrain surface is specified. This approach is suitable when
boreholes with measured depths of GWT are available.
-760-
"Visualization".
Frame "Water"
Boreholes
The frame "Boreholes" serves to define boreholes, which allow for the modeling individual
geological layers (depending on the setting in the frame "Basic data") or ground water
tables (depending on the setting in the frame "Water").
To input points that determine the location of individual boreholes proceed in the similar way
as when defining terrain points. Apart from coordinates it is necessary to enter the borehole
name and thicknesses of layers. The generated geological profile can be easily modified
exploiting the option of automatic calculation of height z from the thicknesses of individual
layers.
Boreholes can be defined only in the first stage of construction. The program automatically
assures that a lower layer always lies below an upper layer - "Crossing of layers" is not
acceptable - the dominant layer is always the upper layer.
setting adjusted in the "Drawing Settings" dialog window and with the help of buttons on tool
bar "Visualization".
-761-
Frame "Boreholes" - input, edit
Frame "Boreholes" - defined boreholes
-762-
Earth Grading
The frame "Earth grading" serves to define terrain earth grading. The earth grading cannot
be defined in the first stage of construction.
The earth grading should considerably simplify an input of excavation pits or embankments.
The essential part of earth grading is the shape of bottom, from which the slopes of
excavations or embankments are directed towards the original terrain. The original terrain
points and edges, found in the region of earth grading, are automatically removed during
generation.
More than one earth grading can be defined within a single stage of constructions. They must
not, however, cross each other. If that happens, they need to be combined into a single
earth grading. No part of earth grading can also exceed the world dimensions - in such a case
one should realize that faces of earth grading may exceed the world dimensions even if the
bottom is defined well inside.
The earth grading can be edited only in the stage, where it is defined. In the next stage of
construction, the earth grading is transferred in terms of terrain new points and edges.
With the help of table: earth grading is defined in the table. The "Add" button opens the
"New earth grading" dialog window, which allows for specifying the name of earth grading
(by checking individual boxes it is possible to define a uniform depth of the bottom and a
uniform gradient of the slope). This dialog window contains a table to introduce points, which
define the ground plan (general polygon) of earth grading. To enter these points, proceed in
the similar way as when defining terrain points. Pressing the "Add" button closes the dialog
window and the new earth grading is inserted into the table.
The earth grading can be further modified (in the dialog window) using the "Edit" button or
removed with the help of "Remove" button (more than one earth grading can be marked in
the table to remove them all at once - before removing, the selected earth grading is displayed
on the desktop in red). Each change is immediately reflected on the desktop.
Add earth • To input an earth grading, click the left mouse button on the desktop to
grading successively define individual points of the polygon, which determines a
ground plan of an earth grading - the polygon must be closed (the last
clicked point serves as the first point of the polygon) - after closing the
polygon the program opens the "New earth grading" dialog window; to
continue follow the same steps as when an input using the table is assumed
- providing the earth grading cannot be defined, or it overlays an already
existing one, the program prompts a warning message
Edit earth • clicking an already existing earth grading using the left mouse button (see
grading active objects) opens the "Edit earth grading" dialog window, which allows
for editing the respective grading (is possible using buttons in the dialog
window "OK+ " a "OK+ ")
Remove • clicking an earth grading using the left mouse button opens a dialog window,
earth which requests to confirm deletion of the selected earth grading
grading
"Visualization".
-763-
Frame "Earth grading" - input, edit
Frame "Earth grading" - defined earth grading
-764-
Construction site
In the frame "Construction site" it is possible to define a boundary of inserted elements in
the project (construction site boundary). In all cases the points of boundary have a same Z-
axis coordiate as the nearest inserted element.
The program allows to enter three types of construction site boundary:
• Rectangle
The rectangle is defined by the limit coordinates (X, Y - axis). The default option in the program
is "Generate rectangle automatically" - the limit coordinates are calculated automatically
from the minimum and maximum coordinates of inserted elements.
Other option is to insert limit coordinates manually (<min, max> in the direction of X - axis,
<min, max> in the direction of Y - axis)
• Convex hull
The program calculate automatically the smallest convex polygon for inserted elements.
• Defined polygon
Input of closed polygon is required (button "Replace graphically"). This polygon defines
boundary of construction side. Peaks of polygons can be made by new inserted points,
originally specified points in the task or by their any combination.
The program allows to use points from existing rectangle or convex hull for creating new
polygon (buttons: "Copy from the rectangle", "Copy from the convex hull"). After copying
these points, it is possible to edit them (change coordiantes, add new points).
New point can be added just in the diialog window "New point" using the button "Insert".
It is also possible to edit inserted points by active dimensions.
Construction site boundary type - rectangle, convex hull and entered polygon
If some elements stay out of the polygon (rectangle) boundary, the program shows the
warning and user can delete these points using button "Remove". The elements out of the
polygon are marked in red by default.
-765-
Deleting elements out of the construction site

"Visualization".
Frame "Construction site"
Generate
The frame "Generate" serves to generate a model of the terrain.
Parameters to generate the model, which are valid for all subsequent stages, are specified
in the first stage of construction.
These are:
• model smoothing (none, medium, maximal)
• active edge - allows for modeling of terrain along edges
The frame further serves to define drawing parameters (grid step, contour line step).
The actual model is generated by pressing the "Generate" button. The generated model can
be canceled by pressing the "Cancel model" button - this can be useful to enhance clarity of
input.
Selecting the option "Compute yardage" allows for yardage calculation (in a combo list it is
possible input the construction stage number for which the calculation should be carried out).
This choice is not available in first stage of construction.
-766-
"Visualization".
Frame "Generate"
Modeling Terrain on Edges

A special attention has to be given to boundary condition to correctly create a digital model
of terrain - heights of points in corners and boundaries (edges) of the world (world
dimensions).
The corner points can be either entered or they are inserted automatically during the first
stage of construction. When automatically generated, the corner point receives the same
height as the closest point has or borehole already defined.
When generating terrain the corner points are connected by an edge. In some cases
(slopes) we wish the edges to model the overall shape and inclination of terrain. In such
cases an active edge option can be used. An active edge is introduced as a percentage
fraction of the world dimensions. All points found on an active edge are, during
generation, automatically projected in the normal direction on to an edge - new points are
then created at the same locations (on edge) having the same z-coordinate. The new points
are stored in data associated with the next stage of construction.
Subsequent layers of the terrain model behave the same way. The thicknesses of these layers
on edges are calculated according to thicknesses of layers of the closest boreholes.
The role of an active edge is evident from the following figure.
-767-
Terrain generated without and with an active edge
Point Constructions
The frame "Point constructions" serves to introduce point constructions into the terrain.
To input points that determine the location of individual point constructions proceed in the
similar way as when defining terrain points (using either table or mouse). The "New point
construction" ("Edit point construction") dialog window allows also for specifying the name
of the program to analyze the corresponding construction. The frame "Launching" is then used
to run the calculation program and to transfer thicknesses of layers and assignment of soils
into the program.
Point constructions can be defined only if a correct model of the terrain is generated.
"Visualization".
-768-
Frame "Point constructions" - input, edit
Frame "Point constructions" - defined constructions
-769-
Line Constructions
The frame "Line constructions" serves to introduce line constructions into the terrain.
To input lines that determine the location of individual line constructions proceed in the similar
way as when defining terrain edges (using either table or mouse). The "New line
construction" ("Edit line construction") dialog window allows for specifying the name and
type of a construction line:
"Longitudinal line construction" is defined by coordinates of the starting and end points
(the table is a part of the dialog window). A combo list serves to select a particular calculation
program (Settlement, Slope stability, FEM…). To run the program, use the frame "Launch".
Terrain shape and interfaces are transferred in the same way as when assigning soils to layers.
"Line with points" is defined by coordinates of a broken line and can be used to specify new
point construction. Point constructions are defined in the table "Point constructions on line",
which is a part of the "New line construction" dialog window. The frame "Launching" is then
used to run the calculation program and to transfer thicknesses of layers and assignment of
soils into the program.
Line constructions can be defined only if a correct model of the terrain is generated.
"Visualization".
Frame "Line constructions" - input, edit
-770-
Frame "Line constructions" - defined constructions
Launching
The frame "Launching" contains a table with a list of defined point or line constructions.
Based on the selection in the table and after pressing the "Launch" button the program
associated with a particular task is launched (the corresponding calculation module must be
purchased). The required data are transferred into the program. The program then allows for
performing the specific calculations and verifications. If the program is not purchased, the
launching button is not accessible.
When all calculations are completed the program is exited by pressing the "OK" button - the
results and defined pictures are transferred back into a corresponding calculation protocol in
program "Terrain".
-771-
Frame "Launching"
Launching program "Spread footing" from program "Terrain"
-772-
Program Stratigraphy
Purpose of the program:
• Creation of a digital terrain model of the construction site
• Import of all boreholes and field tests from the geological survey
• Creation of geological documentation
• Creation of a subsoil model
• Data export to other GEO5 programs (Cross sections - "Slope Stability", "Settlement";
Output profiles - "Spread Footing", "Piles"...)
The help in the program "Stratigraphy" includes the folowing topics:

• Data input into individual frames:
Project Settings Construction Terrain points Terrain Edges Field Tests
site (Exploration
Points)
Soils Soil Profiles Geological Geological Output ProfilesOutput
sections model Sections
Some frames are accesible just for users with purchased specific module:
Templates - for users with module "Logs"
Geological Sections - for users with module "Cross Sections"
• Outputs
• Theory for field test input in the program "Stratigraphy":

Field Testing
Project
text and graphical outputs and during creation of geological documentation.
The frame also allows the user to switch analysis units (metric / imperial). Project data can be
-773-
Frame "Project"
Settings
The basic parameters of task are entered in the frame "Settings":
- Type of model:
• classical 3D model
• simplified 2D model - designed especially for line constructions
- Type of terrain model and layers smoothing. Intermediate smoothing is recommended for
realistic model and fast generation.
- Coordinate system - determines orientation of x, y axis. Entered coordinates x, y are not
recalculated after change of coordinate system
- Altitude system of task - is used just in description of geological documentation. It has no
influence on the model generation. Altitude coordinates z are not recalculated after change
of altitude system.
Furthermore, the way of modelling must be determined. Generation of geological model is
performed automatically when the terrain or boreholes are changed, or manually using the
"Generate" button in the "Geological Model" frame.
The orthophotomap can be projected on the generated terrain model (DMT). This map is
defined by three points (1, 2, 3) which are placed to the coordinates of the model. Points 1 and
2 define bottom corners of the map, point 3 defines its perpendicular distance to the bottom
edge of the map (connection between points 1 and 2). It is necessary to input points 1 and 2,
the point 3 can be undefined (then original ratio of the map is applied). Input of point 3 can be
used also for mirroring of the map - in this case points 1 and 2 define upper edge of the map.
Frame "Settings"
-774-
2D Modelling
The 2D mode allows to model a 2D cross section from "Boreholes" and "Terrain points".
This mode is appropriate for line constructions or for modeling difficult cross sections and
slopes - after completion, it is possible to extract this model to 3D model and edit it.
In the 2D mode, the program has just one view - it is not possible to switch to 3D view. Work
is exactly the same as in 3D mode - only simpler with one dimension less.
2D model
After switching to 2D mode, these changes are performed:
• Construction site boundary is always defined as a "Rectangle". Only coordinates Smin,
Smax are entered or calculated.
• Terrain points, Tests, Soil profiles, Boreholes, Output profiles 1D, Output
sections - there is no input of coordinates x, y (only S).
• Geological model - In the drawing, the "Shape of terrain" and "Layers" are not visible
(defined). Cross section is displayed in the range Smin, Smax.
• Output sections - there is an automatically created cross section in the whole task
length. This output section cannot be deleted.
The "z-axis multiplier" is an important tool in 2D modelling of large slopes with small cant.
-775-
Drawing Settings
2D model can be switched to 3D model in the frame "Settings". In this case, dimensions of
"Construction Site" in Y-direction are set as Ymin= -S/2, Ymax=S/2 and the type is changed to
rectangle. Coordinates S are tranferred to X.
Coordinate systems
The Stratigraphy program allows to input coordinates in these global coordinate systems:
Right-handed coordinate systems
• Arbitrary north rotation
Left-handed coordinate systems

• Arbitrary north rotation
S-JTSK
• Left-handed coordinate system, default coordinate system for Czech Republic and
Slovakia. Allows automatic transmition to GPS cooridnates.
-776-
Gauss-Krüger
• Left-handed coordinate system with fixed north rotation in direction of X-axis (-90
degrees)
Cartesian
• Right-handed coordinate system with fixed north rotation in direction of Y-axis (0 degrees)
• Default coordinate system for all states except Czech Republic and Slovakia
Templates
Frame "Templates" serves for working with geological documentation. It is available just
for users with purchased module "Logs".
The templates define a geological documentation provided by program. The template contains:
• definition of input data
• definition of output protocols
The way of working with templates is almost same as using settings in the "Settings"
frame in other GEO5 programs.
-777-
Frame "Templates"
The "Select" button allows to choose an already created template from the "List of tests
templates".
The "Templates administrator" button opens the "Administrator of tests templates" dialog
window, which allows for viewing and modifying individual templates. It is also possible to
identify the visible template in the "List of tests templates". Data in the "Administrator of tests
templates" can be also exported and imported.
The programs not only contain the pre-defined Basic templates, but also allow the user to
create their own User-defined template. The "Add into the administrator" button opens a
dialog window with copy of current template, what can be modified. Created template is saved
into the Templates administrator.
The "Modify" button enables a quick visualization and editing of the current Template.
Modifying any of the parameters changes the title to "Input for the current task". The
program is then working with this local template. Should we consider this template as
suitable also for other tasks, we add the template into the "Template administrator" by
pressing the "Add into the administrator" button.
-778-
Creation of User-defined Template

The programs contains the pre-defined basic templates for creation of geological
documentation for all field tests (borehole, CPT, SPT...). Because of big amount of
requirements for geological protocols (logs), it is also possible to create User-defined
templates.
The best way to create own template is to start with predefined template and modify it
according to the specific requirements. Using "Add into the administrator" button we define
own template in the "Templates" frame.
The dialog window for creation of new template contains of 4 parts:
1. Part A - the name of new template is defined here (e.g. according to the country, name
of company, standard...).
2. Part B - it is switched between field tests by tabs here. A separate tab is used for a
description of borehole layers. Each template defines all field tests.
3. Part C - input data for selected tab (field test) are defined here.
4. Part D - the form of output protocols is defined here for each type of field test. The
editing is done in spreadsheet and it is similar to work e.g. in MS Excel.
Dialog window "Add tests template"

Templates are compatible with each other and preserve the specified data as much as possible.
The content of any fields that are taken from the basic templates will remain unchanged when
the individual templates are switched.
The creation of User-defined Template is described in detail in the engineering
manual No. 40 - Creation of User-defined Template.
-779-
Input data
The data, that we want to enter for each field test and later print in output protocols are
defined in the dialog window "Modification of tests template".
We can add new "New data type" (using "Add" button) for current template. Firstly, it is
necessary to select a source of data - we can use:
• Global data type - data types used in predefined templates as a part of "Stratigraphy"
program
• Existing user data type - data types used in user-defined templates
• New user data type - it is possible to define own data type
It is always useful to use already defined data types. For example, if you define a new
template and want to add a "Drill machine" data, it's always better to find a data in the
global library - in this case, the "Drilling equipment". We can edit the description when
creating a template - but the relevant data (here the name of drill machine) contained in other
templates or imported from different already defined formats will be automatically loaded
into this data type.
Selection of data type

It is possible to define data of different types:
• string
• multiline string
• date, time
• enumeration
• number - it is possible to define units which are converted automatically when changing
system of units
• tables - general or specific with compulsory depth, thickness of layer or depth interface
(from-to) input
-780-
These optional input data are entered while entering field tests in the "Field tests" frame.
Global (default) data types cannot be edited, it is possible just remove them. If any type is
missing, it is possible to add it from the predefined or user database. If the required type is
not in the database, it is possible to create it. Newly created type is automatically saved into
the user database.
For better clarity it is possible to sort data types into editing groups, which determines tabs
in field tests entering. Editing groups can be arbitrary modified using "Editing groups" button.
Using of editing groups in "Field Tests" frame

It is also possible to define conditional input depending on previous enumeration. We can
show it on easy example. We use a global data type "GWT type", what contains two items
(GWT bored and GWT steady). Next, we want to enter description for steady GWT. For this
reason we define new data type "GWT description" where we use a conditional input just for
"GWT type = GWT steady".
-781-
Definition of master enumeration (GWT type)
Set of conditional input (according to the GWT type)
Conditional input (according to the GWT type)
-782-
Print of Output Protocols

Design of output protocols is defined in the right side of the template dialog window. It is
possible to define arbitrary amount of output protocols for each template - also for one type of
field test.
In the upper part of window we define general look of output - there we select if the protocol is
used for field ests or soil profiles and also we define scale of protocol (one or two pages,
1:50, 1:100).
We select an edited part of protocol by using tabs.
Editing of cell/field is similar to working e.g. in MS Excel - use a double click on field. The field
can contain data from various sources - as you can see on the picture.
It is possible to enter these data to each field:
• basic data of field test
• user-defined data of field test from the current template
• project data - used in "Project" frame
• company data - used in "About the company" dialog window
• it is possible to select from predefined strings - item "Global multilanguage text"
• it is possible to select from predefined pictures - item "Picture - name"
• or write an arbitrary own text into the field.
It is important to distinguish between items "Name" and "Data". "Name" inserts name of
-783-
data type (e.g. Drilling foreman), "Data" inserts entered information (e.g. Mr. Smith).
Output regarding soil layers data has a different form - it is edited in columns.
After editing protocol we can check a final created template in the "Field Tests" or "Soil
Profiles" frames - after selection of field test and pressing "Print log" button, the view of print
is displayed.
-784-
View on print of log
Construction Site
A "Construction Site" defines a boundary of the generated model. It can be entered
(rectangle, polygon) or automatically calculated (rectangle, convex hull) from the
entered terrain points and all tests.
Entered points of construction site boundary, don't have a defined z-coordinate, which is
automatically calculated as a coordinate of the nearest valid point of model (point, field test
with z-coordinate).
Points and layers in active edge are also displayed in the construction site boundary.
Terrain points and field tests can also be entered (imported) out of construction site boundary.
If the dimensions of the construciton site are manually entered, these points and tests have a
description "Out of construction site" and they are not displayed on the desktop. In case of
automatically calculated dimensions, the construction site is regenerated.
It is also possible to enter geographic coordinates for showing construction site on the Google
Maps.
If the dimensions of the construction site are unrealisticly large (distance between points is
larger than 5000 m), the program does not draw a construction site, and it is neccesary to
revise the model.
-785-
Frame "Construction Site"
Active edges
The boundary conditions (points heights in corners and edges of the construction site) are
very important for a correct generation of the geological and terrain model.
The points and boreholes on edges of the construction site are automatically created
when the geological model is generated. First, the z-coordinate of the closest point (or test) is
assigned to the construction site points. Then, the nearest borehole is assigned to these
points.
This modelling is suitable for flat terrains. In case of slope modelling, the model is not
created correctly on the edges, where boundary conditions are not defined. Active edge
helps to define a boundary condition on the edges of the construction site.
An active edge is shown in red color.
When a model of terrain is generated, all points and tests with entered z-coordinate in the
active edge create an assistant point on the boundary of the model. Connections between
points (tests) and assistant points are shown in blue.
When a geological model is generated, all boreholes in the active edge create an assistant
borehole on the boundary of the model. Connections between boreholes and assistant
boreholes on the edges are shown in orange.
-786-
Frame "Construction Site" - active edge settings

The use of active edges is also explained in the example of Construction Site Edges.
Terrain Points
The coordinates of the terrain points are entered in the frame "Terrain Points". The dialog
window "New terrain points" serves to add new points.
When new points are entered to an already generated model, the heights of points Z are
automatically calculated. Only one point can be added to one X, Y coordinate.
-787-
Frame "Terrain Points"

The terrain model is generated always after every addition or change of an arbitrary point.
The points can be also imported using the "Import" button in various formats.
• Text tables
• XLSX and ODS Tables
• LandXML (*.xml)
• DXF (*.dxf) - import of points is similar as using LandXML data
Visualization of drawing on the desktop can be modified in any input mode based on the
"Visualization".
Terrain Edges
The edges connecting terrain points are entered in the frame "Terrain Edges". The dialog
window "New terrain edge" serves to add new points.
The edge is defined between terrain points or field tests.
Furthermore, the type of edge is selected:
• straight - points are connected by straight line
• curved - points are connected by curve (the edge is smoothed according to the terrain)
Just one edge can be defined between two points. The edges cannot intersect.
Frame "Terrain Points"

The terrain model is always generated after any change of an edge.
-788-
"Visualization".
Field Tests (Exploration Points)

The "Field Tests" (Exploration Points) - frame contains a table with all inputted tests. The
name, type, coordinates and state of test are visible in the table. Next to the table, the
selected test is displayed.
This frame serves to the input the raw data of all field tests, which were carried out on the
construction site. It is possible to enter not only the data required to create a geological model,
but also optional data for the creation of geological documentation.
The tests should be entered in this frame always as uncorrected in the real state (as carried
out on the construction site). The modification or interpretation of tests is performed in the
"Soil Profiles" frame. Each test automatically creates a soil profile (if it is not disabled using the
"Field test generates a soil profile" button).
When a large number of field tests is imported, some tests can be located out of the
construction site. In this state, the test does not create a soil profile and is not
displayed.
The tests can be added using the "Add" button or imported using the "Import" button.
The "Stratigraphy" program supports these types of field tests:
• Borehole
• CPT - Cone penetration tests
• DPT - Dynamic penetration test
• SPT - Standard penetration tests
• PMT - Pressuremeter tests
• DMT - Dilatometric tests
Frame "Field Tests"
-789-
Visualization of the drawing on the desktop can be modified in any input regime based on the
setting adjusted in the "Drawing Settings" frame and with the help of buttons on the tool bar
"Visualization".
The "Undo" button is an important program tool. It allows to return back to the original state
before any modification.
Additional Data of Field Tests

In the dialog windows for field tests input, the basic data needed to create the geological
model and the basic data required for further calculations in the GEO5 programs are entered.
For users with purchased modul "Logs" it is also possible to enter arbitrary amount of
geological data, defined in the "Templates" frame - for each test and also for each layer. These
data are important for geological documentation print.
Input of user data

Log style is defined in the "Templates" frame. The data are stored in the global databse - it
means that data are preserved when template changing, only some of them are shown - no
imported or entered data get lost after template switch.
Using bigger amount of data it is possible to sort it into the groups. Groups are defined when
defining field test data.
-790-
Editing groups
Import of Tests
The "Import" button opens a dialog window "Type of new field test". In this dialog window,
the type of field test for import must be specified.
Dialog window "Type of new field test"

The "Stratigraphy" program supports import of these types of field tests:
Borehole
*.txt, *.xlss, *.csv, - a general text or table format
*.ods
*.son,*.so2 - a data format used in Czech and Slovak Republic, originally from the
GeProDo software
CPT (Cone Penetration Test)

*.ods
*.spe - a data format used in Czech and Slovak Republic, originally from the
GeProDo software
*.cpt - a text file standard particularly for Netherlands (used e.g., in
programs Geodelft M-Serie), which serves to input elevations of
individual points and values of penetration resistance (may contain
more CPTs)
*.cpt - a text file Geotech AB CPT
*.cpt - a text file Gouda Geo CPT
-791-
*.cpt - a text file Hogentogler CPT

*.gef - GEF (Geotechnical Exchange Format) is a general language structure
for storing and transferring of geotechnical information.
Detailed information available online:
https://publicwiki.deltares.nl/display/STREAM/GEF-CPT
*.ags a format used for transferring of geotechnical information in Great
Britain.
http://www.agsdataformat.com/datatransferv4/intro.php
DPT (Dynamic Probing Test)

*.ods
*.pen - a data format used in Czech and Slovak Republic, originally from the
GeProDo software
SPT (Standard Penetration Test)

*.ods
DMT (Dilatometric Test)

*.ods
*.uni - a standardized and universal format for import of the measured data
obtained from dilatometric tests
PMT (Pressumetric Test)

*.ods
A general text or table format import allows for selecting a particular system of units to store
data of the test. When importing the program automatically converts the adopted system of
units to the one used in the program.
Providing you use a certain standard of a CPT text file not supported by the program, feel free
to contact us at [email protected] - it will be introduced into the forthcoming version.
Borehole
The name of the test and the depth of the first point of the borehole is entered in the "New
field test" dialog window. Input of coordinates is also required.
The height of first point (z-coordinate) can be calculated automatically, if the test was carried
out on the terrain level (or it can be entered manually).
Furthermore, it is possible to enter a ground water table (driven, steady) and description of
samples.
-792-
Dialog window "New field test"

The "Add" button opens a new dialog window "New layers". In this dialog window, the
thickness (or depth) of the layer is entered and soil (color, pattern) is assigned to this layer. It
is also possible to assign another soil from already entered soils.
Dialog window "New soils"
-793-
Geological Documentation
The program allows to print a geological documentation for tests and soil profiles.
After selecting one or more tests, the "Print log" button is shown on the toolbar.
Using this button, the dialog window for print is opened. Here it is possible to select a template
for output protocol (This function is available just for users with purchased module "Logs" - if
this module is not installed, only one default template is available for each type of field test).
When selecting more then one test, it is possible to print more tests of identical type together -
we can see three different CPTs on the picture in scale 1:100.
-794-
Soils
Adding a soil is performed in the "Add new soils" dialog window. It is also possible to add all
soils already entered in the frame "Field Tests" using "Adopt from field tests" button.
The "Stratigraphy" program does not need any soil parameters for creation of the
geological model, but these parameters can be entered for export to other GEO5 programs.
Data of input soils can be copied within all GEO5 programs using "GeoClipboard", or it is
possible to use an export in the "Output Profiles" or "Output Sections" frames.
-795-
Frame "Soils"
Soil Profiles
The "Soil profiles" frame contains a table with all inputted soil profiles. The name,
coordinates and type of the soil profile are visible in the table. Next to the table, the selected
test profile is displayed.
Soil profiles are created automatically from the field tests. The name of the test and its
coordinates cannot be entered or edited - they always correspond with the original field test.
In fact, the soil profile is an interpretion of the field test into a geological profile.
Test profiles are further used for creation of boreholes. The geological model is created from
the boreholes. Each correctly entered soil profile creates a borehole (if it is not disabled using
"Profile is active for geological model generation" button).
If one or more soil profiles are selected, the button "Print log" is shown on the toolbar. Using
this button we can print soil profile together with field test as a part of geological
documentation.
If the soil profile is not correctly entered, it is displayed in red in the table with "not
defined" description. In this case, the borehole is not created from the test.
If the soil profile is located out of the construction site, the soil profile is not visible and it
does not create a borehole.
Creation of test profile depends on type of field test:
• Creation of test profile from borehole
• Creation of test profile from CPT
• Creation of test profile from DPT, SPT, PMT, DMT
-796-
Frame "Soil profiles"

"Visualization".
Relation between Field Test, Soil Profile and Borehole

The soil profile is created from the test (exploration point) and the borehole is created
from the soil profile. It is not possible to edit coordinates of the soil profile and borehole -
they always correspond to the coordinates of the test.
If the type of the test is a borehole, the test profile is created automatically and it is not
necessary to do any modifications.
Relationship between the soil profile and test (borehole)
-797-
If the type of test is not a borehole, it is necessary to transfer this test into the test profile
(thickness of layers and assigned soils).
Relationship between soil profile and test (borehole)

If the data of field tests are changed, the soil profile is also changed automatically. If the soil
profile is changed, the borehole is also changed and it leads to the change of the whole
geological model.
Creation of Soil Profile from Borehole

If the soil profile is created from the borehole, the "Copy profile from field test" button
copies all layers as they were entered in the "Field Tests" frame. Using "Add soils" checkbox,
all types of soils are also copied from the field test.
Dialog window "Edit test profile" - borehole

An originally entered field test (borehole) is displayed in the left part of the dialog window. In
the right part, the soil profile is displayed. Thickness of layers and assigned types of soils can
be modified.
Creation of Soil Profile from CPT

If the soil profile is created from the CPT, the program allows two basic ways according to
classification type:
• "Robertson 2010", "Robertson 1986" - soil profile creation using the soil classification
• Do not classify - in this case the soil profile is created the same way as for DPT, SPT, PMT
-798-
Dialog window "Edit test profile" - CPT
Creation of Soil Profile using Classification of Soils

In the "Classification" part, the type of classification (Robertson 2010, Robertson 1986) and
other parameters (Coefficient of Penetrometer α , determination of unit weight γ) must be set.
Usually a large number of thin layers is a result of classification.
Dialog window "Edit soil profile" - CPT (without using minimum thickness of layer)
For this reason, it is appropriate to enter a minimum thickness of the layer h. This filter
reduces the amount of layers and the geological profile is clearer.
-799-
Dialog window "Edit soil profile" - CPT (with using minimum thickness of layer)
The "Table of soils" button opens a new dialog window "Table of soils Robertson (1986 or
2010)". It is possible to assign the entered into the descriptions of soils according to the
Robertson classification. If the soil was not already entered in the "Soils" frame, it is possible
to add it here using an "Add soil" button. It is not necessary to assign a soil into the
descriptions which were not classified.
Dialog window "Table of soils"

The "Copy profile from field test" button creates a test profile with the entered soils
corresponding to the layers from the CPT classification.
-800-
Dialog window "Edit soil profile" - CPT

The created profile can be edited using a buttons in the right part of the dialog window.
Creation of Test Profile from SPT, DPT, PMT

If the soil profile is created from DPT, SPT and PMT, it is necessary to create a soil profile
manually.
The measured field test (here DPT) is displayed in the left part of the dialog window. Using the
left mouse button, it is possible to create an interface of layers in the geological profile. These
layers are displayed in the right part of the dialog window.
It is possible to enter the depth of interfaces d manually using an "Insert interface into
profile" button. After the interface input, it is necessary to assign a soil to all layers in the
table in the rigth part of the dialog window. If the soil was not already entered in the "Soils"
frame, it is possible to add it here using the "Add soil" button.
Dialog window "Edit soil profile" - DPT
Geological Sections
Frame "Geological Sections" serves for creation of geological sections (fences), where
entered field tests, soil profiles and other user descriptions are displayed. It is available just
for user with purchased module "Cross Sections". Created geological sections can be
exported into several formats (*.DXF, *.DWG or *.PDF) in Drawing mode.
-801-
Firstly in this frame it is necessary to define designed cross section - straight or polygon.
(Graphical input is terminated by double click on the same point). After input, the dialog
window is opened in the "Topology" mode.
Topology mode
Next we assign all field tests to be displayed on the drawing. The field tests are normally
projected perpendicularly to the geological section, but it is possible to shift them too. The
chainage of field test s and its distance from the geological section D are displayed in
the "Assigned tests" table.
The final drawing is defined in "Drawing" mode.
Drawing of Geological Section

In the "Drawing" mode we define, what we want to plot.
-802-
Drawing mode
We define drawing columns and location of axis for each field test. The created settings
can be used for all tests of one type using "OK for all tests" button.
Definition of field test description - drawing columns

Global drawing settings is edited in the middle part of dialog window.
Buttons for drawing definition

Created drawing can be exported into DXF, DWG or PDF formats using buttons in the right
part of dialog window. It is important to select the correct version of the format according to
the target CAD program.
-803-
Geological Model
The geological model is generated from boreholes. The boreholes are displayed in the table
and they are the only input for the generation of geological model.
Frame "Geological model"

The boreholes are created in two ways (the way of creation depends on the status of
borehole):
• Original borehole or Modified borehole are created automatically from the soil profiles
• New borehole is created using an "Add graphically" or "Add textually" buttons
One borehole is always determined as the "Master borehole". The geological profile is
generated from this master borehole and from the compatible boreholes with the master
borehole. The aim of modelling is to use all boreholes and create the geological model, which
corresponds to all input data.
When modelling a geological model, the boreholes are subsequently edited. It is necessary to
change an incompatible borehole to a compatible borehole performing changes in soil layers -
this way, the boreholes are added to geological model.
The generated model can be canceled any time using the "Model Again" button. In this case,
all newly created boreholes will be deleted and the boreholes created from soil profiles will
be restored to the original state.
The same procedure is used when deleting the boreholes - the new boreholes can be deleted,
the boreholes created from test profiles are always restored from the corresponding test
profile.
If we don't want to consider a created borehole for generation of the geological model, it is
possible to turn off the "Active" button in the table.
For new users, we recommend you to go through individual modeling examples first.
settings adjusted in the "Drawing Settings" frame and with the help of buttons on the
-804-
"Visualization" tool bar.

Creation of a Geological Model

The "Stratigraphy" program allows to create a 3D geological model in a very simple way. It is
possible to model even the most difficult examples logically step by step.
The program does not make any decisions automatically, all decisions must be taken by the
user. After understanding the basic principles, it is a an easy and pleasant work.
The following examples show the basic procedures for creation and modification of the
geological model.
• Process of Creation of a Geological Model
• Creation of a Terrain Model
• Geological Model with Horizontal Layers
• Geological Model with Layers Following the Terrain
• Construction Site Edges - Active Edge
• Editation of Soil Layers
• Creation of Soil Lens
• Creation of a New Layer into the Model
• Modelling of Fault
Process of Creation of Geological Model

Next example
It is necessary to know a procedure of a geological model generation for a correct
understanding of the creation of the geological model.
1. First, the digital terrain model is created from the terrain points and tests (exploration
points) with defined z-coordinate. Then, the boreholes are placed into the model.
2. Assistant boreholes corresponding to the closest active borehole are automatically

generated to all corner points of the "construction site". On the boundaries of the construction
site, all boreholes from the active edge are also projected.
-805-
3. The soil layers and ground water tables are generated from the boreholes and assistant
boreholes (in points on construction site boundaries).
4. The layers are verified if they do not intersect the terrain (or other layers). The layer
above the terrain is cutted to follow the terrain.
Next example
Creation of a Terrain Model

Previous example Next example
The creation of a digital terrain model is the first step for most tasks. The digital model of
the terrain is created in the construction site dimensions from the entered terrain points.
The terrain points can be entered or imported. The terrain is generated automatically after
each change of the entered points. The shape of the terrain is also influenced by the field tests
with defined z-coordinate. When modelling slopes and broken terrains, the input of active
edge is important.
In this example, the slope modelled from six points [x; y; z] is shown: [0; 0; 0], [0; 10; 0], [7;
0; 3], [7; 10; 3], [20; 0; 5], [20; 10; 5].
-806-
Terrain with medium smoothing

The shape of the model can be greatly influenced by smoothing the surfaces between the
triangles. The smoothing is entered in the frame "Settings". The above model was designed for
"intermediate" smoothing. If the smoothing is set to "none", the model looks as follows.
Terrain without smoothing

Larger smoothing allows to create more realistic models, but the generation can be slower in
case of higher number of layers. Sometimes, for a larger model, it is recommended to create
whole model without smoothing and turn it on when output documentation or cross sections
are created.
-807-
Geological Model with Horizontal Layers

We will create a geological model with horizontal layers according to the following picture.
First, we enter a field test (type borehole) in the "Field Tests" frame - the name BH 1,
coordinates [x; y; z] - [5; 5; on terrain], thickness of layers [2; 1; 3].
Selection of field test type
-808-
Borehole input
The soils [blue, green, brown] can be added directly in the window "layers of borehole" or in
the "Soils" frame. The easiest way is copy all soils from the tests using "Adopt from field
tests" button. The list of soils used in tests is created.
Adding soils according to tests

The soil profile and borehole are created automatically from the test (type borehole). After
switching to the "Geological model" frame, the required model is generated (if the manual
generation is selected in the "Settings" frame, it is necessary to use the button "Generate").
-809-
Generated model
For a clearer view, it is appropriate to enter a cross section in the frame "Output Sections" -
points [x; y] - [0; 5], [20; 5].
Visualisation of the model using Cross section

It is necessary to change the drawing settings for correct visualisation of cross section in the
"Geological Model" frame.
-810-
Frame "Geological model" - drawing settings

Geological Model with Layers Following the Terrain

Now we create a geological model with the layers following the terrain.
We will continue with the previous example. The procedure of modification is evident from the
following picture - it is necessary to enter new boreholes on boundaries of the construction
site.
-811-
In the "Geological model" frame, select a borehole "BH 1"and define new boreholes in points
[0; 5], [20; 5] (using the "Add graphically" or "Add textually" buttons). If the borehole
were not selected before pressing "Add graphically" or "Add textually" button, new
boreholes will not copy borehole "BH 1", but they will correspond to the already created
geological model.
In the dialog window "New boreholes", we can see, that the data of the new borehole is
copied from the borehole "BH 1".
Dialog window "New borehole"

The model is created.
-812-
Final model
Construction Site Edges - Active Edge

Turn on the "Frame visualization of soils" in the drawing settings from the previous task.
Edges of the model are created just from assistant boreholes in the model corners - layers are
almost straight on the edges of the model.
-813-
Geological Model with straight layers on edges

Switch to the "Construction Site" frame and enter an "Active edge" [1 m]. The active edge is
red.
Active edge visualization - "Construction Site" frame

Borehole "BH1" is not in the active edge, so the generated model remains the same. Switch to
the "Geological model" frame, select borehole BH1, and add two new boreholes "BH 1(4)"
[5; 0.5] and "BH 1(5)" [5; 9.5] using the button "Add textually".
-814-
Input of new boreholes into the active zone

Both boreholes lie in the active zone - during generation of model, temporary assistent
boreholes with the same layers are created on the borders of the model.
The edges of model have significantly changed. Now the shape of the layers is the same as in
the cross section in the middle.
Final model
When modeling real constructions, it is reasonable to enter an active edge to reach the
closest points and boreholes from the construction site edge.
-815-
Editation of Soil Layers

Now we modify the green layer to expand into the edges of model.
Assignment - extension of the green layer

We use the dialog window "Edit borehole". We perform the same modifications for both new
boreholes BH 1(2) and BH 1(3) - increase a thickness of the green layer from [1 m] to
[3 m] and reduce the thickness of the blue layer from [2 m] to [1 m].
Dialog window "Edit borehole"

The model is modified.
-816-
Modified model
Creation of Soil Lens

Now we model a "soil lens" according to the following picture.
In the "Geological model" frame, we enter new borehole (Red 1) in the middle of lens
(coordinates: [11; 5]) and enter new layer (Red, thickness [0.5 m]) using "Insert (before
3)".
Note: When pressing "Add textually" no borehole can be selected in the table and the
geological model has to be already created. The information about way of borehole creation is
displayed in the dialog window "New borehole". In our case, description "Layers are
generated from the geological model" is shown. If the information is different (we copy
another borehole), it is always possible to change it by pressing the "Change status" button.
-817-
Input of new borehole in the middle of soil lens

After adding, this borehole is shown in red and it is not active - because it is not compatible
with the other boreholes.
Borehole in the middle of soil lens

Next we modify master borehole (always on the right side). We add a red layer between
-818-
green and brown layers. We will not enter a thickness of this layer, we set a location of lower
interface of layer as a "not specified".
Modification of master borehole

This red layer is subsequently transferred to all other boreholes, but it has no exact location.
The layer thickness used in the model generation is defined only in the borehole "Red 1".
Model after adding the red layer to Master borehole

Now we modify red soil layer in the borehole BH 1 (3). We change location of lower interface
from "not defined" to "define depth" and enter the depth of lower interface of red layer [2
m]. (The depth is measured from the top of the borehole, positive values downward, negative
upward).
-819-
Modification of borehole BH 1 (3)

The model with red soil len is ready.
Final model with soil lens

For better visualisation we can add a new cross section with coordinates [11; 0], [11; 10].
-820-
Final model with soil lens

Creation of a New Layer into the Model

We want to divide a blue layer from the previous example into two layers - blue and dark blue.
Dividing and merging of layers is common mainly due to changes in soil parameters in
depth.
In the "Geological model" frame, we edit the master borehole - first, we divide the blue layer
using "Divide layer (No.1)" button, and then, we change the new bottom layer to dark blue
using "Change soil (No.2)"
-821-
Dialog window "Edit master borehole" - before modification
-822-
Dialog window "Edit master borehole" - after modification

After model generation, the layer is changed.
-823-
Final model
Modelling of Fault
Previous example
The aim of this example is to model a geological fault, which crosses the construction site.
On the left side of the construction site, the subsoil is created by the yellow soil with a
thickness of [3 m], other layers are bellow this layer have a thickness [1 m].
Firstly we enter a fault interface to the master borehole using "Insert (before 1)" button. We
enter a depth of lower interface location as [-10 m] - it is located high above the terrain. The
fault is made up of new soil "Black".
-824-
Input of new soil / fault in master borehole

After generating, the model remains same, but we can see a new layer (fault) in the bottom
right corner. For better clarity we used a black color.
-825-
Model with new black layer what represents a fault

In following steps we define a location of fault on the terrain. We define boreholes ZZ 1 [3; 0],
ZZ 2 [3,7; 5] and ZZ 3 [4; 10] step by step.
During text input of borehole, firstly empty dialog window is shown. After coordinates input [3;
0], the gelogical profile is loaded from the model. Now we change properties of upper
black layer (fault) and enter its thickness as a [0 m].
Input of borehole ZZ 1 determining the location of fault on the terrain
-826-

We leave using "Add + close" and regenerate the model.
We repeate a process also for boreholes ZZ 2 and ZZ 3 (set a black layer as a [0 m]
thickness).
The model must be regenerated after each borehole input. It is necessary for
correspondation of borehole to original geological model.
-827-

After input of the fault on the terrain, we remove boreholes in front of the fault - in this case
borehole BH 1(2).
Removing of assistant boreholes in area in front of fault
-828-
Geological model after input of fault on the terrain

Now the model is ready for creation of area in front of the fault. We regenerate the model and
enter two new boreholes: Area 2 (coordinates [0; 0]) and Area 2(2) (coordinates [0; 10]).
We modify both boreholes using "Edit" button. We define interface of fault (layer 1) in depth of
[20 m], other layers have location of interface "not defined". Modified borehole Area 2 looks as
follows:
-829-
Input of fault in depth

We confirm an input by "Add" button and enter second borehole (Area 2(2)) in coordinates
[0; 10].
Then we generate a model - the fault is visible. The area in front of the fault is shown in grey.
Created geological fault

Now it is necessary to define layers in the area in front of the fault. We select one of boreholes
in front - Area 2 or Area 2(2) and add layers above the fault (using "Insert" button). We
define thickness of layers in this borehole -3 m - yellow, 1 m - blue, 1 m - dark blue, 1 m - green, 1
m - brown. In next step it is necessary to add new defined layers to the master borehole using
"Add upper layers (into master borehole)" button. Modified borehole Area 2 looks as
follows:
Input of layers into the area in front of fault

After generating model, it looks different than we supposed - new entered layers overlay whole
model (also behind the fault).
-830-
Generated model with wrong order of layers generating

It is possible to solve this problem using changes in order of layers generation. Firstly, we
generate fault (row 6-7 with black rectangle on the right side) and layers behind the fault (7-
8...etc). We leave a "Group order" as "1". Layers in area in front of the fault are in group "2".
The fault (row 6-7 with black rectangle on the right side) is usually straight - we do not use
smoothing here.
Group order of interfaces between layers

The model is created.
-831-
Final model
Final model - cross sections

Previous example
Borehole Status
The borehole status determines a relationship between original "Soil profile" and
"Borehole". It is not necessary to know the borehole status for generation of the geological
model, but it is good to know it for better understanding of the performed modifications of the
model.
-832-
Frame "Geological model" - Borehole Status

The boreholes can have three status:
Original - the borehole is generated from the soil profile and it corresponds to its geological
profile (which means the same soil at the same depth). The layers bellow the overall length of
the soil profile do not influence the borehole type. The borehole can have an arbitrary amount
of soil layers with zero thickness - the type is still original.
Changed - the borehole is created from the soil profile, but its geological profile was changed
- by change of soil or layer thickness.
New – this borehole was created separately, it has no relationship to the tests or soil profiles.
-833-
This borehole can be deleted from the model.
Master Borehole
The master borehole has the largest influence on the geological model. The geological model is
generated from the master borehole and from the boreholes, which are compatible with
the master borehole.
The master borehole is selected in the "Geological model" frame.
Frame "Geological model" - selection of master borehole

The master borehole should:
• maximally characterize the geological profile
• be the deepest
• be credible.
Usually it is more appropriate to select a borehole created from the core borehole than
from CPT interpretation.
During the creation of the model, it is necessary to modify incompatible boreholes with master
borehole to compatible - this way they are added into the geological model. If all boreholes are
compatible, the geological model is created from all boreholes (in this case, the master
borehole is not important). Incompatible boreholes have an "Active" column in red - these
boreholes cannot be used for the generation of the model.
-834-
If the master borehole is changed, the new compatible boreholes are determined and new
geological model is generated.
Modifications of the master borehole are performed in the "Edit master borehole" dialog
window. It is also possible to modify it when other boreholes are edited.
The upper "Edit thickness" and "Move interface" buttons are used just for the master
borehole.
Other buttons ("Insert", "Add", "Edit", "Divide", "Merge", "Remove") change also all
compatible boreholes with the master borehole - it is possible to modify more boreholes just
by one change. It can be used for example for creation of a new layer into the already
generated model.
-835-
Dialog window "Edit master borehole"
Edit Borehole
The boreholes are edited in the "Edit borehole" dialog window. This window allows to change
an edited borehole (in the left part of the dialog window) and also the master borehole (in
the right part of the dialog window).
The tools of the dialog window are described on the example:
-836-
Dialog window "Edit borehole" - not compatible boreholes

In the left part of the dialog window, the data of edited borehole are displayed. The state of
borehole (compatible/incompatible) is displayed above the borehole scheme. The aim of
modification is to change a borehole into compatible and add it into the model.
In the right part of the dialog window, the data of master borehole are displayed.
In the middle part of the dialog window, the boreholes connection is shown. The height of
boreholes is displayed correctly, so it is obvious which layers are horizontal. If the borehole
(master or changed) are created from the test, the length of test is displayed in gray. On the
picture, we can see, that the edited borehole was created from the test, which was not deep
enough to achieve a yellow layers. On the other hand, the master borehole the upper layers
are missing in its geological profile.
It is possible to use these buttons for borehole editing: ("Insert", "Add", "Edit", "Divide",
"Merge", "Exchange", "Move interface" "Remove") for both tables. (If no row is selected in
the table, only the "Add" button is available. After selecting a row, others buttons are
displayed).
The borehole can be changed from incompatible to compatible by these steps:
- Edit selected borehole on the left part of the dialog window - Using an "Add" button
for the , the layers "Gravel 2 " (yellow) and "Clay NG" (orange) are added. We can enter
their assumed thickness, depth of interface or do not specify exact location.
Dialog window "Edit borehole" - modification of edited borehole
-837-
- Edit master borehole on the right part of the dialog window- Using an "Insert (before 1)"
button (the first row in the master borehole table must be selected) for the master borehole in
the right part of the dialog window, the Layers "Silt" (red) and "Sand 1" (blue). In this case
the best way is not to specify exact location of the interface.
Dialog window "Edit borehole" - modification of master borehole

Because this way of modification is common and little bit lengthy (for bigger amount of layers),
the program allows to perform this operations in a simpler way using the "Add upper layers"
and "Add bottom layers" buttons in the upper part of the dialog window.
This way, the connection between boreholes is compatible.
Dialog window "Edit borehole" - compatible boreholes

The borehole type is also displayed in the dialog window - if the borehole is original
(corresponds to the test profile) or changed. It is possible to return to the original borehole
status using the "Copy from the soil profile" button.
Add Borehole
New boreholes can be added to the model using an "Add graphically" or "Add textually"
buttons.
-838-
Frame "Geological Model" - adding of new borehole

If there is no borehole selected, when "Add" button is used, the new borehole is
generated from the geological model.
Adding a new borehole with automatical generation of layers according to the geological model
is important for editation of the geological model (the model is edited using boreholes - if there
is no borehole in place of the model where we want to edit it, it is necessary to add a new
borehole at this location) or soil lens creation.
The layers of new borehole were generated from the geological model
If there is a borehole selected when "Add" button is used, the new borehole is a copy of
selected borehole.
Adding new borehole, that is a copy of the existing one, is used in the examples:
-839-
Stratigraphy Model with Layers following Terrain, Creation of Soil Lens, Modelling of Faults.
New borehole is a copy of selected borehole

Compatibility of Boreholes
The aim of generation of geological model is to create a maximaly realistic model - model,
where all boreholes are used. For this reason, all boreholes should be compatible.
Compatible borehole has an identical count and order of layers as master borehole. It is
shown in white in the "Active" column. If this borehole is also active, it is used for geological
model generation.
Incompatible boreholes with master borehole are shown in red in the "Active" column and
they cannot be used for generation of model.
-840-
Frame "Geological model" - compatibility of boreholes

Examples of compatible boreholes:
Examples of incompatible boreholes:
The incompatible boreholes can be changed to compatible in the "Edit borehole" dialog window
- using e.g. inserting of layers with zero thickness or adding (removing) soil layer.
Example of modification of incompatible boreholes to compatible:
-841-
Definition of Interface in Borehole

Thickness of layers are defined in the boreholes, it determines the position of layers.
In some cases, the layer is not within the borehole - then we have three options how to
define such layer:
• - enter thickness "0" m - generation of model is performed normally, just in the point
(borehole coordinates) the thickness layer is equal to zero. The final model usually does
not correspond to real state.
On the picture is the model of erosion with layers of zero thickness in the borehole S2 - the
result is not realistic.
-842-
Layers with "zero thickness" above borehole S2

• do not define an interface in the borehole - when generating model, no points of layer
interface are added in the position of borehole. It can be used when modeling soil lenses
or faults and also when borehole is not deep enough and we do not know the lower layers.
Location of not defined layers are than determined by surrounding boreholes.
The same model, but the upper layers are "not defined".
-843-
Model of erosion - "not defined" interfaces above borehole S2

• define depth of lower interface - the interface is generated with input depth of layer in
the position of borehole. The depth is measured from the top of the borehole, positive
values downward, negative upward.
This option can be used for soil lenses modeling or editing of layers shape. In some cases,
the order of interface generation is very important.
The previous model with input interfaces location in the borehole S2.
-844-
Model of erosion - specified locations of interfaces above borehole S2
Order of layer generation

While model creation, firstly the model of terrain is generated, then other interfaces between
layers. If the interface lays over the terrain, it is "cutted".
After the terrain, interfaces are generated from the top to the bottom and the individual
interfaces are always cut by the previous interface.
This process is clear, but it is not always appropriate for more complex tasks. Typical example
is the rock covered by layers of sediments.
Model of outcrop - order of generation is 4-5, 1-2, 2-3, 3-4

Interface between green soil and grey rock subsoil is generated as first after the terrain. We
-845-
reach this state using change of order in layer generation.
The same model with original order of layer generation - 1-2, 2-3, 3-4, 4-5
The same model with changed order of layer generation 4-5, 2-3, 3-4, 1-2
The possibility of changing layer generation order is important when modeling geological
faults. This way it is possible to model more individual models in one task - individual models
are seperated by faults generated as first - then the other layers are generated. It is also
possible to specify smoothing of the layers - again it is conviently for fault generating.
Output Profiles
The "Output Profiles" frame contains a table with all input output profiles. The name of
-846-
profile and the coordinates of the point, which define a profile, are visible in the table. Next
to the table, the selected profile is displayed.
Frame "Output Profiles"

"Visualization".
Data of 1D profiles can be copied within other GEO5 programs.
Output Sections
The "Output Sections" frame contains a table with all input output sections. The name of
cross section and coordinates of points, which define a cross section, are visible in the
table. Next to the table, the selected output section is displayed.
-847-
Frame "Output Sections"

"Visualization".
Data of output sections can be copied within other GEO5 programs.
Copying data from the Stratigraphy program to other

GEO5 programs
The Stratigraphy program enables the user to copy and paste Output Sections and Output
Profiles to other GEO5 programs.
The following procedure shows how a output section can be copied into the Slope
Stability program. The procedure for copying the output sections (profiles) into other GEO5
programs is identical.
1. In the Stratigraphy program, select the output section you want to copy and use the
button "Copy output section to Clipboard".
-848-
Copying a output section from the Stratigraphy program

2. Open the Slope Stability program and in the upper toolbar, click on "Edit" and then select
"Paste data". To confirm that all data will be pasted, press "OK".
Pasting an output section into the Slope Stability program

The result of this procedure is a copied cross section including all interfaces and soil
assignments.
-849-
The resulting copy of an output section in the Slope Stability program
Program FEM
Program FEM (and modules Consolidation, Water Flow, Tunnel) can model and analyze a wide
range of geotechnical problems including:
• terrain settlement, consolidation
• sheeting structures
• anchored support structures
• slope stability
• excavation, tunnel analysis
• calculations of tunnels, ground losses
• calculation of water flow etc.
The help in the program "FEM" includes the folowing topics:

Topology: Project Settings Interface Soils Rigid Bodies Assign
Contact Lining Free Points Free Lines Point Line Free
Types Refinement Refinement Refinements
Mesh
Generation
-850-
Construction Excavation Activation Assign Lining Beams Contacts

Stages:
Contacts Point Point Flow Line Line Flow Anchors Props
and Beams Supports Supports
Reinforceme Surcharge Elastic Beam Loads Water Analysis Monitors
nts Regions
Graphs Stability
• Outputs
Topology
To input data in the FEM program slightly differs from our other programs in that it requires
defining the topology of the structure prior to any calculation. This step includes introduction of
interfaces between individual layers of soils, line constructions, parameters of soils and
interfaces and at last generation of the finite element mesh. To avoid unexpected errors when
creating a computational model the user should first become familiar with available coordinate
systems.
The topology input regime is selected by clicking the "Topo" button on the horizontal bar
"Construction Stages".
Bar "Stages of construction" - switching between "Topology" regime and calculation stages
The actual analysis is performed in individual stages of construction (calculation stages), which
allow the user to define activity of structures, to input beams, anchors and surcharge, to
model the effect of water, etc.
Depending on the selected regime the vertical tool bar also adjusted.
Coordinate Systems
Global coordinate system
- is right-handed
- the positive X axis is directed from the left to the right
-851-
- the positive Z axis is directed from the bottom to the top

- the positive Y axis drills in to the XZ plane
- the rotation about the Y axis is positive when measured clockwise
- The GCS is used for coordinates

- in general, the positive surcharge is assumed to act in the opposite direction to the
positive axis and the positive rotation follows the positive sense of the global rotation
- particular definitions of the positive direction must be carefully examined for all cases
Surcharge
- is always assumed to act along the horizontal line (or at a point)
- the origin (point) and the length are the required input data
- the positive surcharge at zero angle is assumed to act in the opposite direction to the
positive direction of the Z axis
- the zero angle corresponds to vertical surcharge
- the angle increases clockwise
- the angle ranges from <-180º to 180º>
Anchors
- an anchor can also be specified by the origin and an angle
- the zero angle corresponds to the direction of the X axis
- the angle increases clockwise
- the angle ranges from <-180º to 180º>
Prescribed displacements and rotation of supports

- prescribed displacements are positive in the directions of the X, Z axes and about the Y
axis
-852-
- displacements are positive when developed in the opposite direction to the positive
directions of the coordinate axes
- the positive rotation is measured clockwise
Load of beams
- the local coordinate system is right-handed
- the positive XL axis of the beam is assumed in direction from the starting to the end point
- the positive ZL axis is perpendicular and rotated counterclockwise by 90º from the beam
axis
- load can be applied three directions:
- global Z
- global X
- local normal (Z)
- the positive load in the global direction acts in the opposite direction to the positive
direction of the corresponding axis
- the positive load in the normal direction acts in the opposite direction to the positive
direction of the local ZL axis
- the positive load angle α is measured clockwise
- the moment is positive when acting clockwise
- definition of load along the XL axis

- coordinates, coordinates of the origin
- load span
- types of load (always in above mentioned directions)
- concentrated force
- concentrated moment
- distributed uniform over the whole beam
- distributed trapezoidal over the whole beam
- distributed uniform over a segment of the beam
-853-
- distributed trapezoidal over a segment of the beam
Stresses and strains

- positive normal stress Sigma corresponds to compression, negative to tension
- positive normal strain Epsilon corresponds to compression, negative to tension
Internal forces along beams

- positive normal force corresponds to tension, negative to compression
- positive normal strain Epsilon corresponds to compression, negative to tension
Project
Frame "Project"
Settings
The frame "Settings" serves to specify standards or methods that are used to perform the
analysis.
The "Analyses" tab allows the user to define the basic characteristics of the analysis to be
carried out including the type of the problem and analysis, the method of calculating the initial
stress (geostatic stress, Ko procedure) and available standards for concrete and steel
structures.
The available problem (plane strain analysis, axial symmetry) and analysis (stress, slope
stability, water flow, tunnels, consolidation) types depend on the purchased configuration
of the program.
Providing all modes are available we recommend to proceed with extreme caution
when selecting the type analysis - more complex types require distinctively larger
number of input data and may unnecessarily complicate the use of the program.
-854-
This frame also serves to select the method for calculating the initial stress in the first stage of
construction - either standard calculation of geostatic stress or the Ko procedure.
It is also possible to select advanced program options, which are usually not necessary for
common analysis.
Available advanced options:
• Advanced mesh generating parameters
• Advanced soil parameters
• Advanced soil models
• Advanced water flow parameters
• Temperature load
• Detailed results
Frame "Settings"
Stability Analysis
There are two options available in the FEM program to solve the slope stability problem:
1. To set the solution type to "Slope stability" in the frame "Settings".
2. To run the module in the "Slope stability" regime in an arbitrary stage of construction
of a standard analysis by pressing the "Stability" button - in such a case, a new
secondary task (which can be saved independently) is generated. The solution then
proceeds as in the step 1.
Creating model and inputting data in the "Slope stability" regime is performed in the same
way as in the "Stress" regime - just the "Analysis" button launches the slope stability
analysis of a given structure. Individual slope stability analyses in construction stages are
completely independent and have no relation to the previous stages and calculations.
Plane Strain Analysis

This computational module is suitable for the analysis of longitudinal structures (tunnel,
embankment, dam, etc.) characterized by a longitudinal dimensions being of the orders of
magnitude larger than transverse dimensions of the analyzed domain.
-855-
Plane strain analysis

In such a case the analysis can be carried per 1 m run of the structure, see Figure. This
complies with the plane strain assumption. Components of the strain vector developed on
planes normal to the longitudinal axis can be then neglected. Therefore, we assume the soil
body be loaded by the components of the strain and stress vector pertinent to the transverse
plane normal to the longitudinal axis and by the longitudinal normal stress that arises due to
Poisson’s effect. The corresponding non-zero components of the stress and strain vector are:
Considering beam elements the analysis corresponds to the solution of a plate strip having the
cross-section width equal to 1 m. Non-zero components of nodal generalized displacements are
evident from the following Figure for a two-node beam element compatible with a three-node
triangular plane element and a three-node beam element compatible with a six-node triangular
plane element.
Two-node and three-node beam element

The corresponding components of internal forces, see Figure, assumed with respect to 1 m of
cross-sectional width are given by:
Axial Symmetry
This computational model is suitable for the analysis of structures of revolution. This
assumption must be satisfied from both the construction and load point of view. A typical
-856-
example is the solution of vertically loaded isolated pile, excavation of circular ditch, or
pumping of water from a circular hole.
Axisymmetric analysis
Similarly to the plane strain analysis the computational problem is three dimensional, which
can, however, be transformed into a two-dimensional problem, see Figure. The analysis is then
performed with respect to 1 m of arc length having diameter equal to x(r). The axis of
symmetry always corresponds to the origin of the x(r) coordinate. Shear strain components in
the direction of rotation can be neglected. We are then left with the stress and strain
components acting on the plane of symmetry cut and the normal strain and stress component
in the hoop (circumferential direction) direction. The corresponding non-zero components of
the stress and strain vector are:
It is clear that the hoop strain, and therefore also the affected normal stresses, attains an
infinite value at the axis of symmetry. Thus regarding the finite element approximation,
arriving at reliable and sufficiently accurate estimates of these values requires a relatively fine
mesh along the symmetry axis.
The application of line and surface load is also worth mentioning. Several examples of applying
the load on terrain surface are displayed in the following Figure. Clearly, their effect increases
with the distance from the axis of symmetry. Introducing such a type of load directly on the
axis of symmetry has, therefore, no effect. In such a case it is necessary to choose the type of
load of axis of symmetry. The program allows for the application of concentrated forces only.
-857-
Examples of load applied on terrain surface

Considering beam elements the analysis corresponds to the solution of a plane membrane of
revolution including bending effects. Non-zero degrees of freedom are identical adopted for
beam elements in plane strain analysis. Apart from axial (meridian) effects it is necessary to
consider also membrane and bending effects in the hoop direction, see the following Figure.
Beam element in axial symmetry

The corresponding components of internal forces, see Figure, assumed with respect to 1 m of
cross-sectional width are given by:
In a special case of a circular plate (angle α = 0) we may refer to radial and hoop components
of internal forces, see the following Figure.
-858-
Internal forces acting on a circular plate

Internal forces are related to corresponding strains and curvatures as follows:
After setting r equal to infinity we arrive at plane strain conditions. It is worth noting that in
case of shear forces their magnitudes are, unlike the plane strain analysis, significantly
dependent on the refinement of the finite element mesh. This holds also for vertical reactions.
Note to water flow
Recall that similarly to the reactions forces in the stress analysis the point fluxes at nodes with
prescribed pore pressures are evaluated with respect to 1 m of arc length having diameter
equal to x(r). In case of plane strain analysis the corresponding values are taken per 1 m run.
The corresponding overall fluxes (inflow/outflow) can be determined from point fluxes
3
[m /day/m] as follows:
Plane strain analysis
Axisymmetric analysis
where N is the number of nodes along a given mesh line, in which the point fluxes Qi
3
[m /day/m] are calculated. In the case of axisymmetric analysis xi represents the x-coordinate
of a given point. Therefore, the axisymmetric analysis provides total the inflow/outflow
3
[m /day] through for example a cylindrical surface (vertical line) or circular surface (horizontal
line).
-859-
Tunnels
The frame "Settings" in conjunction with the "Analyses" tab allows for selecting the option
"Tunnels". (This module has to be purchased by the user - otherwise this option is not
available). When selecting the "Tunnels" regime it is possible to define and calculate:
• excavations (Modeling a 3D effect at the tunnel face assuming the New Austrian method)
• gradual degradation of beams
• subjecting beams to thermal load
• thermal load applied to selected regions ("Advanced program options")
• prescribing swelling stress to selected regions
• monitoring results
The mode "Tunnels" can be switched on/off at any time. The previous results will be,
however, deleted. While switching from a standard regime to the "Tunnels" regime is safe,
proceeding in the opposite direction results into deleting all input data - a warning message,
however, appears before this action is completed.
Warning message about data modification when canceling the "Tunnels" regime
Consolidation
Consolidation analysis is the optional module of FEM program. We can switch the consolidation
analysis on in the "Settings" frame by switching "Analysis type" to "Consolidation".
The input has the following limitations:
• the "Tunnels" regime cannot be used
• only some materials models can be used: Elastic, Mohr-Coulomb, Modified Mohr-Coulomb
and Drucker-Prager
• active regions can be fully specified in the 1st construction stage only, in the following
construction stages only activating the regions located above the terrain of the previous
construction stage is allowed. No openings or cuts are possible.
• mesh is obligatorily generated using multinode elements
• water can be entered in the 1st construction stage only and "No water" or "GWT" can
only be used
• beams are always in transverse direction impermeable, only the drain along the beam on
each side of the beam can be specified
• no point flow is available, the line flow on the borders have only "permeable" or
"impermeable" boundary conditions
The data input and calculation is as follows:
• topology is defined the same way as in stress analysis, the finite element mesh is
generated
-860-
• in the first construction stage in the "Water" frame the pore pressure is specified by
entering ground water table
• in the following construction stages are entered: the data for stress analysis, the flow
boundary conditions, beam and contact flow parameters, analysis parameters, i.e. phase
time and load action
The results of the analysis are presented in the same way as in stress analysis, in addition, the
flow velocities are available.
The principle of the numerical solution is here.
Principle of Numerical Solution of Consolidation

Consolidation
In standard stress analysis the program GEO5 FEM allows for two specific approaches to the
modeling of pore pressure action on a soil body. In case of undrained conditions it is assumed
that all boundaries surrounding the undrained soil are impermeable, the soil is considered as
volumetrically incompressible, and the applied load results in the generation of excess pore
pressure within this layer. Introducing suitable boundary conditions that allow for a gradual
dissipation of excess pore pressure provides passage to drained conditions. In case of drained
conditions we assume that the resulting pore pressure is no longer influenced by the
deformation of the soil body. Transition from drained to undrained conditions describes the
theory of consolidation.
The term consolidation stands for the soil deformation in time caused by external load, which
can be either constant or time dependent. This is a reological process. For the present case we
limit our attention to so called primary consolidation characterized by the reduction of volume
of pores and thus the change of the internal soil structure due to load accompanied by the
escape of water from pores. The analysis assumes a fully saturated soil. Consolidation analysis
in a partially saturated soil is not addressed by the program. The governing equation
describing the flow of water (continuity equation, represents a time derivative of a given
quantity) in a fully saturated ( , ) deforming soil body is provided by (recall the
Richards equation for the description of transient water flow).
where: M - Biot‘s modulus, assumed in the range of M = (100-1000)Ksk (Ksk is unit

modulus of skeleton). In general, it is a large number enforcing a
volumetric incompressibility of a given fully saturated soil at very short
6
times at the onset of consolidation. A default setting is M = 10 kPa.
α - Biot’s parameter, typically assumed α = 1
p - pore pressure
p - pore pressure gradient
Ksat - permeability matrix storing coefficients of permeability for a fully saturated
soil, typical values for selected soils are stored in Table
ig - hydraulic gradient
The rate of change of total pressure is given by:
-861-
where: - current stiffness matrix

pex - excess pore pressure
- for plane strain or axial symmetry
Note that the total pore pressure p is a sum of steady state pore pressure pss and excess pore
pressure pex. It holds:
The continuity equation (1) can be thus written as:
adopting the zero excess pore pressure boundary condition at the boundary with prescribed
pressure as:
and the zero flow (q(t) = 0) across the boundary with prescribed water flux density:
where: n - components of outward unit normal
See: Setting hydraulic boundary conditions.

The overall total stress is then provided by:
where: - elastic stiffness matrix

ε - vector of overall strains
ε
pl - vector of overall plastic strains
The current values of strains and excess pore pressure in equation (7) follow from the
application of static equations of equilibrium and continuity equation (4) within the solution of
coupled stress and water transport problem using the principal of virtual displacements. As in
the case of transient water flow analysis a fully implicit forward Euler method is adopted to
perform time discretization of equation (4). Further details can be found in [1,2,3].
Consolidation analysis
As in the case of transient water flow analysis the first calculation stage serves to set initial
conditions, i.e. the distribution of geostatic stress and steady state pore pressure. The steady
state pressure values also equal to the overall pressure values at the end of consolidation. The
initial pore pressure values are set by specifying the ground water table (GWT) only. It is worth
to note that even if GWT table is found inside the analyzed soil body the soil below and above
GWT is assumed fully saturated. This applies also to soils being introduced into the analysis in
subsequent calculation stages (activating new regions). Removing or excavating soils
(deactivating existing regions) is not possible with the current version of the program. The
actual consolidation analysis is performed from the second stage on and requires setting the
-862-
hydraulic boundary conditions, setting the time duration of a given calculation stage, setting
the expected number of time steps and setting the way of introducing the load in to the
analysis.
Setting hydraulic boundary conditions
The program allows for introducing two types of hydraulic boundary conditions, recall
equations (5) and (6):
• Zero pore pressure condition (p = 0), which allows for free water outflow from the soil
body, i.e. condition representing a permeable boundary. More specifically, this condition
corresponds to the zero value of the excess pore pressure pex. The overall value of pore
pressure along this boundary is thus equal to pss. This is a default boundary condition and
is it assumed along all external domain boundaries, therefore also along the external
boundaries of new regions.
• Zero flux density condition (no inflow/outflow, q = 0), i.e. condition representing an
impermeable boundary. If needed, this condition has to be introduced manually.
The choice of a given boundary condition influences the rate of consolidation. Further details
can be found in [1].
Setting the time step size - expected number of time steps in a given stage
Unlike the transient water flow analyses the initial time step size (discrete value of time
increment when solving equation (4)) is in case of consolidation not directly assigned. Instead,
this step is set on the bases of the specified duration of calculation stage and the input number
of time steps expected for a given stage. In case of linear consolidation (all soils are assumed
linearly elastic) the input number of time steps is performed. A time step reduction can take
place in case of nonlinear consolidation if the lack of convergence for the current time step is
encountered. This increases the number of steps to complete the stage analysis. When
specifying the number of steps in relation to the stage duration one should keep in mind that
at the onset of consolidation the time step should be relatively small (particularly when
referring to a load stage in conjunction with nonlinear consolidation), while with gradual
progress of consolidation the time step size may reach several tens of days. Further details can
be found in [1].
Introducing load into the analysis
As in the case of transient flow analysis the program offers two options only:
• The load is applied at one step at the beginning of the calculation stage. More specifically,
a linear increase of load over the first time step is assumed. Thus if we are interested in
the behavior at t → 0, it is necessary to suitably choose the combination of number of
time steps and duration of the first stage (e.g. 1 and 0.001) . In case of a very short time
step and impermeable boundaries (q = 0) we simulate the response of volumetrically
incompressible soil (K → ∞) with a finite value of the shear modulus. The results for t → 0
will then agree well with the results derived from standard stress analysis with undrained
soils. Further details can be found in [1].
• The load linearly increases over the calculation stage. The load increment then depends on
the current time step size. Especially in case of nonlinear consolidation one should
properly specify the time span over which the load is introduced to avoid convergence
difficulties.
Providing there is no load change within a given stage the above setting options are irrelevant.
Application of beam elements in consolidation
The beam permeability depends on its location and the choice of hydraulic boundary
conditions. A beam found inside the soil body is in its normal direction impermeable. On
-863-
domain boundaries the beam permeability in normal direction, as in case of water flow
analyses, is driven by the selected boundary condition. In case of permeable boundary ( p = 0)
the beam on this boundary is fully permeable, while in case of impermeable boundary ( q = 0)
the beam on this boundary is also impermeable.
Application of contact elements in consolidation
The reason for introducing contact elements into the analysis is twofold. First, we wish to allow
for a relative mutual shift between two soils, soil and rock or soil and beam element, e.g. in
the analysis of interaction of soil and sheeting structure. Second, the aim is at modeling
potential drain along the beam or in general along a line to which the contact element is
assigned. In every case one should realize a coupled simulation of both phenomena, i.e. stress
and water flow analysis being carried out simultaneously. If not specified otherwise the
program assumes the flow within a contact element being dependent on permeabilities of
surrounding soils both in the longitudinal and transverse direction. In case of contact attached
to the beam element the normal permeability kn is irrelevant as the beam is assumed in this
direction either fully impermeable (kn = 0) or fully permeable (kn → ∞), see "Application of
beam elements in consolidation".
General comments
Time evolution of individual variables, e.g. settlement or excess pore pressure, will be in case
of linear consolidation always bounded by the solution of stress analysis when considering
either undrained soils (all active soils in the analyzed domain are specified as undrained) or
drained soils (standard setting, all active soils in the analyzed domain are specified as
drained). The latter case coincides with the steady state analysis with total dissipation of
excess pore pressure. The results of linear stress analysis with drained soils and linear
consolidation derived at t → ∞ must be identical. However, this does not hold for nonlinear
analyses as in such cases we cannot rely on the principle of superposition. Further details can
be found in [1].
Unlike water flow analyses, the solution of consolidation requires application of higher order
elements (e.g. 6-node triangular or 8-node quadrilateral elements). While displacements are
calculated at all nodes of a given element (quadratic approximation of displacement field),
pore pressure is calculated at the corner nodes only (linear approximation of pore pressure).
Unlike one-dimensional consolidation implemented in program "Settlement" the two-
dimensional consolidation yields at t → 0 zero volumetric strain and thus also zero mean
effective stress only. Individual components of the displacement field are generally nonzero.
Literature:
[1] M. Šejnoha, T. Janda, H. Pruška, M. Brouček, Metoda konečných prvků v geomechanice:
Teoretické základy a inženýrské aplikace, předpokládaný rok vydání (2015)
[2] Z. Bittnar and J. Šejnoha, Numerické Metody Mechaniky II. České vysoké učení technické v
Praze, 1992
[3] Z. Bittnar and J. Šejnoha, Numerical methods in structural engineering, ASCE Press, 1996
Ko Procedure
st
Ko procedure is the method that allows for the calculation of geostatic stress (1 stage) when
particular ration between vertical and horizontal stress components is needed. For
example, when dealing with overconsolidated soils the actual horizontal stress can attain
much higher values than found in normally consolidated soils.
When adopting standard analysis the initial stress is determined through the application of
-864-
the finite element method. Nonlinear material models can be used to account for evolution of
st
possible failure surfaces already in the 1 calculation stage. In the case of elastic response the
ratio between vertical σz and horizontal σx stress components is provided by:
where: σz - vertical normal stress

σx - horizontal normal stress
This analysis may lead to evolution of plastic strains.

st
The Ko procedure generates only elastic response. The horizontal stress in the 1 stage of
construction follows from:
where: Ko - coefficient of horizontal stress at reast defined by the user

σz - vertical normal stress
σx - horizontal normal stress
The Ko coefficient is assumed to be a soil parameter. If the Ko parameter is not assigned, it is

derived from the relation:
nd
The resulting stresses may, however, violate the plasticity condition in the 2 stage of
construction when nonlinear material models are used. Iteration of equilibrium is then carried
nd
out even if no changes occur in the 2 stage.
Water Flow
The program allows for performing either the steady state or the transient flow analysis
in a soil body. The transient flow analysis allows for monitoring the evolution of pore pressure
(pressure head) and the degree of saturation in time. Time after which the distribution of
pores pressure no longer changes determines the time needed to reach the steady state
conditions. This value depends both on the soil flow characteristics (coefficient of permeability,
parameters of models describing the retention curve - dependence of the degree of saturation
or water content on the negative pressure head or suction) and type of the analyzed problem
(e.g. confined/unconfined flow). In case of steady state flow analysis, the individual stages of
calculation are independent from each other. In case of transient flow analysis, the solution is
performed similarly to standard stress analysis. Individual calculation stages then depend on
each other. The first stage of construction stays independent and serves to set initial
conditions, i.e. to assign initial pore pressures/pressure heads and degree of saturation at the
onset of time dependent analysis in both a fully saturated (positive pore pressures) and a
partially saturated (negative pore pressures - suction) soil. The subsequently defined stages
require inputting the time duration of a given stage together with the load history (time history
of hydraulic boundary conditions). The current version of the program allows us to either
introduce the entire load at once at the beginning of the calculation stage or to assume that it
linearly increases with time during the course of stage calculation.
-865-
In both cases (steady state/transient flow) the program describes in general the flow in an
unsaturated or partially saturated medium. The flow in a fully saturated medium appears only
below the ground water table. Above the ground water table (flow in a partially saturated
medium) the flow is driven by a suitable material model. To analyze problems of unconfined
flow the program introduces three material models: the Log-linear model, the Gardner
model and the van Genuchten model. When performing the transient flow analysis we
recommend adopting the van Genuchten model, because this model is capable of credibly
representing the retention data of a soil. Since the choice of the material model influences the
setting of initial conditions (initial value of degree of saturation) the program does not allow for
changing material models in subsequent calculation stages. In the same spirit changing
geometry in comparison to the initial stage is also not possible.
When performing the transient soil analysis it is first necessary to set in the 1st stage the
initial values of the pore pressure/pressure head at time t = 0, particularly above the ground
water table in the unsaturated or partially saturated soil (suction region). The program offers
three options to introduce suction, either by performing the state analysis, or assuming an
equilibrium distribution given by p = -γwz, where z is measured from the current location of the
ground water table, or the initial values of suction can be specified directly by the user. When
solving practical region we recommend not to specify values of the negative pressure head hp
smaller than -10m (p > -100 kPa), especially in case of coarse texture soils. For example, for
sands the retention curve is almost flat for the values of hp <-1m and for large changes in
pressure head there is almost no change in the degree of saturation. This holds also for the
coefficient of relative permeability Kr, which serves to reduce the fully saturated permeability
in the unsaturated or partially saturated zones. A general recommendation for setting minimal
values of negative pressure head is, however, rather complicated since for fine texture soils
these values may reach several hundred and for clays even thousand meters.
The next step calls for defining the boundary conditions, either at a point or along a boundary
line at the beginning of a new calculation stage.
Beam and contact elements can be introduced inside the soil body. The analysis results are
presented in the form of pore pressure and total head distributions, suction, velocities and
directions of flow and information about the total inflow/outflow into or out of the soil body. In
case of transient flow it is also possible to plot the distribution of the degrese of saturation
inside the soil body.
Flow Analysis
Transient flow
Transient flow analysis in a partially saturated medium is driven by the solution of a general
Richard’s equation (equation of continuity):
where: n - material porosity

- rate of change of degree of saturation
Kr - coefficient of relative permeability
- permeability matrix of fully saturated soil
- gradient of total head
Time discretization of Richard’s equation is based on a fully explicit Picard’s iteration scheme
-866-
[1]. This corresponds to a hybrid formulation ensuring conservation of mass. Owing to the
solution of a generally nonlienear problem, the analysis is performed incrementally. Standard
Newton-Raphson iteration scheme is used to satisfy equilibrium conditions.
Note that speed and stability of the iteration process is influenced to a large extent by the
choice of the material model (the way of calculating the coefficient of relative permeability Kr,
degree of saturation S and the approximation of capacity term C = dS / dhp) in relation to the
nonlinear properties of a given soil. A significantly nonlinear behavior is for example typical of
sands where improperly prescribed initial conditions may cause numerical problems. Details
can be found in [2,3].
Steady state flow
The steady state analysis assumes no change of the degree of saturation in time. The
governing equation then reduces to:
Unlike transient flow, the analysis is therefore time independent and requires introduction of
the flow boundary conditions only. However, it is still a generally nonlinear problem (e.g.
unconfined flow analysis) calling for the application of the Newton-Raphson iteration method.
Details can be found for example in [2,3].
Literature:
[1] M. A. Celia and E. T. Bouloutas, A general mass-conservative numerical solutionfor the
unsaturated flow equation, Water Resources Research 26 (1990), no. 7, 1483-1496.
[2] M. Šejnoha, Finite element analysis in geotechnical design, to appear (2015).
Teoretické základy a inženýrské aplikace, předpokládaný rok vydání (2015).
Interface
The frame "Interface" serves to input interfaces between individual soils. Detailed description
how to deal with interfaces is described herein.
The width of the geometrical model can be usually estimated without much of a trouble (care
must be take in the stability analysis to provide for sufficiently large space surrounding the
critical region). The depth of a mesh however is quite important. The lowest point of a mesh
can be imagined as incompressible subsoil. If there is no such layer of the soil or rock material
in the geological profile it is possible to assume that at a certain depth from the ground the
internal forces will vanish so that there will be no deformation. This will be the lowest point of
the geometrical model.
If you are not certain about the margins of the geometrical model it is useful to proceed as
follows:
• First enter larger margins, use coarser mesh and compute changes in the stress
distributions within a soil body.
• In the next step modify the initial margins (regions with no apparent deformation or
changes in stresses can be cut off), generate new and finer mesh and carry out a new and
more accurate analysis.
Interfaces can be also imported from our other programs using clipboard.
-867-
Frame "Interface"
Soils
The frame "Soils" contains a table with the list of input soils. Basic information regarding the
current soil is displayed in the right part of the frame. If there are more items (soils) selected
in the table, the information about individual soils is ordered consecutively.
The soil input parameters depend on the selected material model, or material model in flow
analysis.
The basic material parameters are the Young modulus of elasticity E and the Poisson's ratio
(they are needed in all models). Most nonlinear models require defining the angle of internal
friction and cohesion of the soil. In both cases the analysis adopts effective parameters of
the angle of internal friction φef and cohesion cef.
The required list of material parameters to input also depends on the selected input mode.
Assuming advanced program options (can be selected in the frame "Settings") allows us to
define additional (advanced) material parameters (e.g. the Biot parameter, Effective unit
modulus of water etc.). In most practical applications these material parameters are not
particularly important and mostly serve to academic purposes.
Individual material models can be combined in the analysis - each soil can be assigned its own
material model.
-868-
Frame "Soils"
Materials Models
Selecting the most suitable material model together with inputting the required material
parameters is one the most important but also one of the most difficult tasks when modeling
structures using the finite element method.
The material model attempts to describe the soil (or rock) behavior as close to reality as
possible. They can be divided into two basic groups:
• linear models
• nonlinear models
Selecting a proper material model is essential for the prediction of a real soil response.
Most tasks require nonlienar models (e.g., modeling of sheeting structures with linear models
yields totally wrong results). In some cases, however, using linear models may prove useful
and adequate and may considerably simplify the analysis.
-869-
Dialog window "Add new soils" - selection of a material model
Linear Models
Linear models give relatively fast, but not very accurate estimate of the true material
response. These models can be used in cases, where only the stress or deformation states of a
soil mass are of interest. They provide no information about locations and possible
mechanisms of failure.
They can be used to model soil behavior in regions, where only the local failure with no effect
on the evolution of global failure occurs, but which may cause premature loss of convergence.
Providing the main interest is in a reliable description of the soil behavior it is necessary to
employ nonlinear models.
-870-
The linear models include:

• Elastic model
• Modified elastic model
Elastic Model
The linear model is the basic material model that assumes a linear relationship between the
stress and strain given by the Hooke law. The following data are required:
γ - unit weight of soil
E - modulus of elasticity
In a one dimensional problem the Hooke law describes the linear dependence of stress σ on
strain ε via the Young modulus E (modulus of elasticity), see the Figure below. In this
framework the linear model provides a linear variation of displacements as a function of
applied loads.
Stress-strain relationship for LM
Modified Elastic Model

It is clear that for soils the linear behavior is acceptable only for relatively low magnitudes of
applied loads. This becomes evident upon unloading that usually shows a rather small amount
of elastic deformation compare to the overall deformation. The modified linear model attempts
at least to some extent to take this into account by considering different modulus for loading
and unloading as plotted in the Figure.
A drop in the material stiffness along a given loading path attributed to the plastic yielding is
reflected through a deformation modulus Edef, which can be imagined as a secant modulus
associated with a certain stress level.
An elastic response is assumed upon unloading. To increase the clarity of model formulation
the elastic modulus for the unloading branch is replaced by the unloading-reloading modulus
Eur that governs the response of a soil upon unloading and subsequent reloading up to the
level of stress found in the material point prior to the unloading.
With reference to the following Figure these moduli are given by:
-871-
where: Edef -Deformation modulus [MPa]

Εur -Unloading/reloading modulus [MPa]
(a) Real stress-strain diagram of soil, (b) Simplified stress-strain diagram for MLM
During the primary loading the response of a soil is therefore governed by the secant modulus
while upon unloading it follows the path set by the unloading-reloading modulus Eur. An
approximate value of this modulus is 3*secant modulus Edef. In every case, both parameters
should be obtained from reliable experimental measurements.
Nonlinear Models
The basic nonlinear models can be again divided into two groups.
The first class of models originates from the classical Mohr-Coulomb failure criterion. In
particular, the Drucker-Prager, Mohr-Coulomb and Modified Mohr-Coulomb models fall in this
category. These models can also model the hardening and softening. A common feature to
these models is the evolution of unbounded elastic strains when loaded along the geostatic
axis. This is evident from the figure below that shows projections of the yield surfaces into
deviatoric and meridian planes, respectively. An example of the effect of the selected model is
given here.
The second group of basic material models is represented by the Modified Cam-clay,
Generalized Cam clay and Hypoplastic clay models employing the concept of the critical state
of soils.
-872-
Projection of yield surfaces into (a) deviatoric, (b) meridian plane

Employing nonlinear models allows us to capture the typical nonlinear response of soils.
These models describe the evolution of permanent (plastic) deformation of a soil material. The
onset of plastic deformation is controlled by so-called yield surface. The yield surface can be
either constant (elastic-perfectly plastic material), or it can depend on the current state of
stress (material with hardening/softening).
Stress-strain diagram for nonlinear models

Unlike the modified linear model the nonlinear models require specifying only the elastic
modulus. A drop in the material stiffness is a result of evolution of plastic strains and
corresponding redistribution of stresses. This consequently yields an instantaneous tangent
material stiffness as a function of the current state of stress represented in the Figure below by
an instantaneous tangent modulus ET.
In addition to basic material parameters decribed in section "Elastic model" the nonlinear
models call for the introduction of certain strength characteristics of the soil needed in the
definition of a given yield surface. With reference to the first group of materials the following
parameters must be specified.
φ - angle of internal friction [°]
c - cohesion of soil [kPa]
ψ - dilation angle [°]
The angle of internal friction and cohesion determine the onset of plastic deformation. The
-873-
angle of dilation controls the evolution of plastic volumetric strain (dilation).
Mohr-Coulomb (MC)
The model requires inputting the following parameters: modulus of elasticity E, the Poisson's
ratio, angle of internal friction and cohesion. The latter two parameters serve to define
the yield condition. The formulation of constitutive equations assumes effective parameters
of angle of internal friction φeff and cohesion ceff. The angle of dilation must also be specified.
The Mohr-Coulomb yield surface can be defined in terms of three limit functions that plot as a
non-uniform hexagonal cone in the principal stress space. Projections of this yield surface into
deviatioric and meridian planes appear in the Figure. As evident from this Figure (part a) the
MC yield function has corners, which may cause certain complications in the implementation of
this model into the finite element method. The advantage on the other hand is the fact that
the traditional soil mechanics and partially also the rock mechanics are based on this model.
Projection of yield surfaces into: (a) deviatoric, (b) meridian plane
Mohr-Coulomb Model with Tension Cut Off

The original formulation of the Mohr-Coulomb material model is extended by introducing the
Rankine type of plasticity condition, see Figure (a), allowing for the reduction of tensile
strength of soil, which in the case of standard Mohr-Coulomb model is given by c*cotgφ, where
c is the cohesion and φ the angle of internal friction. This value can be reduced by specifying
the value of tensile strength σt as evident from Figure (b). If σt > c*cotgφ the program
automatically sets σt = c*cotgφ. This model can be used if the advanced program options are
on.
-874-
a) Projection of the Rankine yield condition in the deviatoric plane, b) Projection of the
extended Mohr-Coulomb yield condition into the σ1, σ3 plane
Modified Mohr-Coulomb (MCM)

Similarly to the DP model the Modified Mohr-Coulomb model smoothes out the corners of the
MC yield surface. As suggested in the Figure the projection of the MCM yield surface into the
deviatoric plane passes through all corners of the Mohr-Coulomb hexagon and as the MC yield
function the MCM yield function depends on the effective mean stress σm and the Lode angle θ.
With reference to its definition a slightly stiffer response of the material can be expected with
the MCM plasticity model when compared to the MC and DP models.
MCM and MC yield surfaces in the deviatoric plane
Drucker-Prager
-875-
The Drucker-Prager model (sometimes also known as the extended von Mises model) modifies
the Mohr-Coulomb yield function to avoid singularities associated with corners. Unlike the
Mohr-Coulomb model the Drucker-Prager yield surface is smooth and plots as a cylindrical
cone in the principal stress space. Similarly to the MC model the DP yield surface depends on
the effective mean stress σm. The current version of the DP model implemented in FEM builds
upon the assumption of triaxial extension. In other words, the yield surface projection into the
0
deviatoric plane touches the inner corners of the Mohr-Coulomb hexagon ( θ = -30 ), where θ is
the Lode angle.
DP and MC yield surfaces in the deviatoric plane
Softening and Hardening

Standard formulation of the Drucker-Prager and Modified Mohr-Coulomb models assumes
elastic rigid-plastic behavior of the soil, when the strength parameters of soil c and φ remain
constant during the analysis. The enhanced version of both models ("Advanced program
options" on) allows for the evolution of these parameters as a function of the equivalent
deviatoric plastic strain:
where: - equivalent deviatoric plastic strain is given by the following expressions:
where: - equivalent deviatoric plastic strain
- deviatoric plastic strain tensor
- plastic strain tensor
- volumetric plastic strain
- Kronecker’s delta
-876-
The assumed, piecewise linear, variation of strength parameters is evident from figure.
Multi-linear hardening-softening law: dependence of a) cohesion and b) angle of internal

pl
frintion on equivalent deviatoric plastic deformation Ed
Dilation angle ψ can be assumed either constant or it may evolve as a function of the angle of
internal friction φ following the Rowes dilation theory:
where φcv is the angle of internal friction at constant volume consistent with the critical state of
soil (state at which the soil deforms at zero volumetric plastic strains). To prevent an infinite
increase of the dilation angle (increase of tensile volumetric plastic strains) it must be
bounded, e.g. in dependence on the maximum void ratio emax, acceptable for a given material.
The Rowes dilation theory requires introduction of the following parameters:
φcv - angle of internal friction at constant volume [-]
e0 - initial void ratio
emax - maximum void ratio [-]
The current void ratio e can be expressed in terms of the current volumetric strain εv and the
value of initial void ratio e0 as:
where: e - current void ratio

εv - overall volumetric strain
When the current void ratio e exceeds the maximum void ratio emax, the dilation angle ψ is set
to 0.
Angle of Dilation
The angle of dilation controls an amount of plastic volumetric strain developed during plastic
shearing and is assumed constant during plastic yielding. The value of ψ = 0 corresponds to the
-877-
volume preserving deformation while in shear.

Clays (regardless of overconsolidated layers) are characterized by a very low amount of
dilation (ψ ≈ 0). As for sands, the angle of dilation depends on the angle of internal friction. For
non-cohesive soils (sand, gravel) with the angle of internal friction φ > 30° the value of dilation
angle can be estimated as ψ = φ - 30°. A negative value of dilation angle is acceptable only for
rather loose sands. In most cases, however, the assumption of ψ = 0 can be adopted.
Influence of Material Model

To illustrate the effect of a particular model used to predict a structural response we present an
example of a shallow foundation loaded by the distributed load q. A certain simplification of
this task is the assumption of an infinitely stiff foundation loaded by the prescribed
displacements.
The geometrical model and finite element mesh for individual tasks appear in the Figure. The
influence of soil and foundation self-weight on the resulting response is neglected. Owing to
the symmetry of the model, only one half of the structure is analyzed.
Task assignment: strip foundation
Geometrical model and the finite element mesh
-878-
Analysis results
The results suggest a considerably stiffer response of the soil to the external load when using
the MCM model in comparison to the DP and MC models, which in the present example show a
similar behavior.
Modified Cam-Clay Model (MCC)

The MCC model was originally developed for triaxial load conditions. Experimental
measurements on soft clays provided the background for the development of the constitutive
model expressing the variation of void ratio e (volumetric strain εv) as a function of the
eff
logarithm of the effective mean stress σm , as evident from the following Figure. Both graphs
are related as follows:
κ - slope of swelling line [-]

λ - Slope of NCL (normal consolidation line) [-]
e - current void ratio [-]
-879-
Material response during isotropic consolidation (constitutive model)

The graph consists of a normal consolidation line (NCL) and a set of swelling lines. On the first
load the virgin soil moves down the NCL. Next, suppose that the soil was consolidated to a
certain level of stress, which is termed the preconsolidation pressure pc, and subsequently
unloaded up the current swelling line. Then, upon reloading the soil initially moves down the
swelling line until reaching the stress state given by the parameter pc, which existed prior to
the unloading. At this point the soil begins to move again down the normal consolidation line
(primary loading - compression line).
Parameters κ and λ can be estimated from the following expressions:
where: Cc -one-dimensional compression index

Cs -one-dimensional swelling index
These parameters follow from a simple oedometric test.

The yield surface is smooth without the possibility of evolution of tensile stresses. The MCC
model allows, unlike the first group of models, a direct modeling of strain hardening or
softening for normally consolidated or overconsolidated soils, a nonlinear dependence of the
volumetric strain on the effective mean stress and limit conditions of ideal plasticity. When
using the MCC model the soil loaded in shear can be plastically deformed without collapse
(points 1,2 for hardening, point 2 for softening) until reaching the critical state (points 3 and 2
for hardening and softening, respectively). The soil deforms further in shear under the
eff
assumption of ideal plasticity without the change of e and σm . Upon unloading, a linear
response of soil is assumed.
-880-
Projection of yield function into meridial and deviatoric planes

Evolution of the yield surface (hardening/softening) is driven by the current preconsolidation
pressure pc:
where: - current preconsolidation pressure
- increment of volumetric plastic strain
Apart from parameters κ and λ, the self-weight and the Poisson's ratio, the MCC model requires
specifying the following three parameters:
Mcs - slope of the critical state line [-]
OCR - overconsolidation ratio [-]
e0 - initial void ratio [-]
Reliable initialization of the model is described in section "Numerical implementation of MCC

and GCC models".
The slope of the critical state line Mcs can be determined from the expression:
, for triaxial compression
, for triaxial extension
where φcv is the angle of internal friction for constant volume corresponding to the critical
state.
Generalized Cam-Clay Model (GCC)

This model represents a considerable improvement of the Modified Cam clay (MCC) model,
particularly when modeling soils in the supercritical domain, see Figure, where the failure
-881-
surface follows the classical models of Mohr-Coulomb, Drucker-Prager and Modified Mohr-
Coulomb models. Unlike the Modified Cam clay model (dashed line) the GCC model plots,
similarly to the MMC model, as a rounded triangle in the deviatoric plane. The MCC model
plots, similarly to the Drucker-Prager model, as a circle. In the subcritical domain both models
behave identically. Upon unloading, a linear response of soil is assumed. GCC model is
available only when advanced program options are on. Reliable initialization of the model is
described in section "Numerical implementation of MCC and GCC models".
Projection of yield surface of MCC and GCC models into meridial and deviatoric planes
The material parameters required for the Generalized Cam clay model are identical to the
material data of MCC and MMC models:
κ - slope of swelling line
λ - slope of normal consolidation line (NCL)
OCR - overconsoliodation ratio
c - cohesion
φ angle of internal friction
φcv angle of internal friction at constant volume [-]
ν Poisson's ratio
Parameters κ and λ can be estimated from the following expressions:
where: Cc -one-dimensional compression index

Cs -one-dimensional swelling index
These parameters follow from a simple oedometric test.

Similarly to the MCC model the formulation of the GCC model is based on the relation between
the void ratio (volumetric strain) and the mean effective stress as shown in the following
-882-
Figure. Both graphs are linked as follows:
Response of material during isotropic compression (constitutive law)

Evolution of the yield surface (hardening/softening) is driven by the current preconsolidation
pressure pc.
where: - current preconsolidation pressure
- increment of volumetric plastic strain
Numerical Implementation of MCC and GCC Models

An important step, ensuring a reliable application of MCC and GCC models, is the
in
determination of the initial preconsolodation pressure pc and the corresponding unit modulus
in
K . These two parameters, however, are not directly specified by the user. Instead, they are
derived by the program based on the assumed distribution of initial geostatic stress. Recall
three basic options to derive the intial geostatic stress:
1. Using Ko procedure
The use of Ko procedure yields the following value of the initial mean stress:
where: Ko - coefficient of earth pressure at rest
-883-

h - current depth below terrain
in
Assuming normal consolidation, the value of pc is determined such that the stress derived
using the Ko procedure fullfils the yield condition:
where: Mcs - slope of critical state line

J - equivalent deviatoric stress
σm - mean stress
Values of J and σm are defined by the following expressions:
where: Ed - equivalent deviatoric stress

eij - deviatoric strain tensor
εij - overall strain tensor
εv - volumetric strain
σij - stress tensor
sij - deviatoric stress tensor
δij - Kronecker's delta
Dijkl - elastic stiffness tensor
G - elastic shear modulus
K - elastic unit modulus
E - Young's modulus
In case of triaxial compression or extension it is possible to determine the slope of critical state
line Mcs from the following expressions:
-884-
in
In case of overconsolidated soils the initial value of pc is modified as:
The initial value of the unit modulus follows from:
where the current void ratio e is written as:
For small stresses we get:
2. Standard (elastic) analysis

Recall that the program allows for replacing the material model between stages of
construction. Providing the Ko procedure cannot be used it is possible to carry out the analysis
assuming elastic response of the clayey soil. The resulting stresses are used to derive the
in in
initial values of pc and K employing the previously defined expressions. In the next stages
of construction the original elastic material model is replaced by the required MCC or GCC
models.
3. Standard (plastic) analysis
This option allows the soil to be consolidated under the assumption of nonlinear behavior when
generating the geostatic stress. This results in the evolution of plastic strains already in the
first stage of construction. As in the Ko procedure we consider a normally consolidated soil
which, during the course of deformation, moves down the normal consolidation line with the
in in
initial values of pc and K given by:
Before the next analysis step the resulting plastic strains are set equal to zero. In some cases
such an analysis may fail to converge.
Hypoplastic Clay
Hypoplastic clay is applicable for the modeling of soft fine grain soils. Similarly to all other
-885-
models it belongs to the family of standard phenomenological models. As for the description of
the soil response it falls into the group of critical state models (Cam clay, Generalized cam
clay). This model, however, accounts for the nonlinear response of soils both in load and
unloading. In comparison to other models based on the theory of plasticity, it allows for the
calculation of total strains only. It thus makes no difference between elastic and plastic strains.
Indication of type and location of a potential failure, in other models provided by the plot of
equivalent deviatoric plastic strain, can be in the case of hypoplastic clay represented by the
distribution of the mobilized angle of internal friction.
When describing the soil response, the model allows for refecting a different stiffness in
loading and unloding, softening or hardening in dependence on the soil compaction and the
change of volume in shearing (dilation, compression). The current stiffness depends on only
the load direction, but also on the current state of soil given by its porosity. Unlike Cam clay
models, it strictly exlcudes tensile stresses in soil, see Figure 1a.
Figure 1: State boundary of hypoplastic model - (a) comparison with the yield surface of Cam
clay model in the meridial plane, (b) comparison with the yield surface of Mohr-Coulomb
model in the deviatoric plane
In case of hypoplastic model the standard yield surface is replaced by so called Boundary state
surface. Its projection into the deviatoric plane is similar to the model, see Figure 1b. The flow
rule is nonassociated resulting into a nonsymetric stiffness matrix (compare e.g. with the
Mohr-Coulomb model when having different values for the angle of internal friction φ and the
dilation angle ψ). Details regarding the model formulation can be found in [1].
Model parameters
The basic variant of the model requires inputting five material parameters:
• Angle of internal friction for constant volume (critical angle of internal friction) φcv
• Slope of swelling line κ*
• Slope of normal consolidation line (NCL - normal consolidation line) λ*
• Origin of the normal consolidation line N
• Ratio of unit and shear modulus r
Parameters κ*, λ* and N determine a bilinear diagram of isotropic consolidation in a log-log
scale, Figure 2a. Providing the parameters of the bilinear Cam clay model (in semi-logaritmic
scale, Figure 2b) are available, it is possible to input these values and the parameters of the
hypoplastic model are back calculated. Paremeters of the bilinear Cam clay model are:
• Slope of swelling line κ (in semi-logaritmic scale)
• Slope of normal consolidation line λ (in semi-logaritmic scale)
-886-
• Void ratio emax for normal isotropic consolidation by pressure of 1kPa
Figure 2:Bilinear diagram of isotropic consolidation - (a) Hypoplastic clay, (b) Cam clay model
Critical angle of internal frition φcv
• Identical for both original (undisturbed) and reconstituted subsequently consolidated
sample
• Can be determined from standard triaxial test applying different cell pressures on a
reconstituted sample
• Both drained and undrained (faster) test can be performed
• Most common values are in range of 18° - 35°
Slope of normal consolidation line λ*
• It is determined graphically from the loading branche of oedometric or isotropic
consolidation test, see Figure 3
• For stiff clays it is preferable to run the test on a reconstituted sample
• Most common values are in range of 0.04 - 0.15
-887-
Figure. 3: Simulation of oedometric test with hypoplastic model

Slope of swelling line κ*
• It can be determined similarly as parameter λ* graphically or by performing a parametric
study - comparing measurements and simulation along the unloading branche of
oedometric or isotropic consolidation test, see Figure 3
• Most common values κ are in range of 0.01 - 0.02
• Ratio λ/κ should be large than 4.0
Origin of normal consolidation line N
• It is determined graphically from the loading branche of oedometric or isotropic
consolidation test
• The test should be performed on an undisturbed sample - when surching for the
intersection lambda line with the vertical axis it is possible to determine the slope lambda
obtained from a reconstituted sample, see Figure 3
• Most common values are in range 0.8 - 1.6
Ratio of unit and shear modulus r
• The physical meaning of this parameter is given by the expressio r = Ki/Gi
• Ki corresponds to the tangent unit modulus from isotropic compression according to the
normal consolidation line
• Gi corresponds to the tangent shear modulus for undrained shear test assuming the same
stress state
• Parameter r can be determined by a parametric study of shear triaxial test
Setting initial state of soil
-888-
In hypoplastic clay the current state of soil is associated with the current compaction
represented by the void ratio. Model implementation allows for inputting the initial or current
void ratio either directly or it can be back calculated using the input preconsolidation pressure
OCR. In the first case, the input value e0 corresponds to the void ratio measured on an
unloaded sample extracted from a given depth. In the second case, the inputed value of ecurr
corresponds to the void ratio of a stressed soil. In the last case, the value of OCR is specified.
This parameter represents the ratio between the mean stress on NCL and the initial mean
stress, see Figure 4b.
When intializing the task using the Ko procedure, the initial stress state at the beginning of the
second stage is assigned the current stress state. If adopting standard analysis in the first
stage (the hypoplastic clay model is introduced already in the first calculation stage) where the
soil is loaded by its self weight, the value of initial stress pin = 1 kPa is assumed and it holds
ecurr = e0. Providing a different material (e.g., elastic material is considered in the first
calculation stage) is replaced by the hypoplastic clay model, the initial state of stress derived in
the previous stage is adopted. Recall that when using elastic material in the first calculation
stage the resulting stress state corresponds to the results provided by Ko procedure for Ko (ν is
the Poisson's ratio).
Figure 4: Iniciation of void ratio - (a) with the help of initial void ratio, (b) initiation by OCR
It is clear from Figure 5 that for normally consolidated soils the state for which OCR = 1.0
corresponds to an isotropic consolidation only, thus for Ko = 1.0. If the soil experiences a non-
zero deviatoric stress state the corresponding OCR for a normally consolidated soil is greater
than 1.0. An exact value of depends on both the soil parameters and stress path (the value of
Ko). Figure 5 shows the dependence of the minimum for various values of Ko and different
types of claye soils. Particular values are also stored in Table 1. The basic material parameters
of this set of soils are listed in Table 2.
The choice of OCR = 1.0 for normally consolidated soils with Ko not equal to 1.0 creates a non-
acceptable stress state which may result in the loss of convergence.
-889-
Figure 5: Dependence of OCR on the coefficient of earth pressure at rest Ko
Table 1: Oveconsolidation ratio OCR of the selected soils as function of Ko value
-890-
Table 2: Material parameters of the selected soils

Intergranular strain
The basic version of the model is suitable in analyses with a prevailing direction of the stress
loading path. In cases with cyclic loading (loading-unloading-reloading) it is more suitable to
use an advaced formulation with the concept of intergranular strain. This allows for constraing
a unacceptable increase of perment deformation arising during small repeating changes in load
(ratcheting). Introducing intergranular strain allows for the modeling of large stiffnes, which
clays experience during small strains. This option is not part on any other models implemented
in GEO FEM. The concept of intergranular strain assumes that the total soil deformation
consists of a small deformation of an intergranular layer (integranular strain) and deformation
caused by mutual sliding of grains. Changing the load path changes first the intergranular
strain. Upon reaching the limit value of the intergranular strain, the deformation associated
with the motion of grains sets on.
Adopting the concept of intergranular strain requires five additional parameters:
• Range of elastic intergranular strain R
• Parameters mR and mT control the small strain stiffness
• Parameters βr and χ control the degree of stiffness degration with increasing shear strain
These parameters are calibrated after knowing already the material data of the basic
hypoplastic model.
Margin of elastic intergranular deformation R
• It determines the range of maximal intergranular strain
• It can be determined by a parametric study of the degradation curve G = G(εs), Figure 5
-4
• Alternatively it can be considered as material independent constant R = 10
-5 -4
• Most common values are in range 2*10 - 1*10
-891-
Figure 6: Curve describing the loass of stiffness of shear modulus

Parameter mR
• It determines the magnitude of the shear modulus when changing the loading path in the
meridial plane (σm - J) o 180°
• Linear ratio between parameter mR and the intial shear modulus G0 is provided by G0 =
p*(mr/(r* λ*)
• The initial shear modulus can be determined from the measurement of shear wave
propagation [2]
Parameter mT
• It determines the magnitude of the shear modulus when changing the loading path in the
meridial plane (σm - J) o 90°
• It holds mR/mT = G0/G90
• The ratio of initial moduli can be estimated from the ratio of these moduli for larger
strains.The value of the mR/mT ratio is commonly in the range of 1.0 - 2.0
• Most common values of mT are in range 2.0 - 20.0
Parameters βr and χ
• Determine the rate of stiffness degradation with increasing shear strain
• It can be determined by a parametric study of the degradation curve G = G(εs)
• Most common values of parametr βr are in fange 0.05 - 0.5
• Most common values of parametr χ are in range 0.5 - 6
Literature:
[1] D. Mašín, A hypoplastic constitutive model for clays, International Journal for Numerical
and Analytical Methods in Geomechanics., 29:311-336, 2005.
Variable Stiffness
The soil stiffness can be specified to vary with depth. This property is defined in the dialog
"Edit soil parameters" by choosing "Stiffness increasing with depth". Entering parameter
kd ensures that the finite elements will be assigned an individual value of Young's modulus
depending on their depth (vertical distance from the terrain in the first construction stage)
-892-
according to the equation
where: E0 - Young's modulus on terrain [MPa]

h - depth [m]
Material Models in Flow Analysis

The steady state flow analysis is driven by Darcy’s law specifying the relationship between the
flow velocity and the gradient of hydraulic head. The current version of the program assumes
constant values of coefficients of permeability independent of pore pressure.
The program also requires specifying the initial void ratio e0 for the determination of current
porosity n and subsequently the actual velocity of water flowing through pores only vs = v/n,
where v is the average flow velocity through the whole seepage area. Generally, the void ratio
e0 = 1 corresponds to soil porosity of n = 50%.
By introducing the relative coefficient of permeability Kr the program allows for tracking the
transition zone between fully saturated (S = 1, Kr = 1) and unsaturated (Kr - > 0) region of the
soil body. As an example we may consider the problem of unconfined flow. The process of
tracking the transition zone is governed by one of the three models of transition zone
determining the evolution of relative coefficient of permeability Kr as a function of pore
pressure head, see Figures.
(a) Log-linear model [1], (b) Van Genuchten model [2]

Log-linear model
The Log-linear transition zone model described e.g. in [1] is defined by the following
parameters:
hp
min - minimum value of pressure head in fully saturated region [kPa]
hTZ - transition zone width [m]

R - reduction parameter, a sufficiently large number R = 100 až 1000 [-], default
petting assumes R = 1000 [-]
The relative coefficicent of permeability Kr is given by:
-893-
Gardner model
This is an equivalent model depending on a single parameter α [1/m] only. The relative
coefficicent of permeability Kr is in this case given by [4]:
Van Genuchten model

In this case the value of relative coefficient of permeability Kr is given by:
where α [1/m], n, m = 1 - 1/n are model parameters. Their values can be obtained from
laboratory measurements of retention curves approximated by:
where: Ssat - degree of saturation of fully saturated soil, default setting Ssat = 1
Sr - residual degree of saturation
- normalized water content
Parameter is in general provided by:
d
where: θr - rezidual water content [m3/m3]
θS - water content of fully saturated soil [m3/m3]
The current degree of saturation S can be expresses as a ratio of the water kontent θ and
porosity n as follows (it is necessary to distinguish between n representing porosity and n,
which appears in the van Genuchten model, they are two different variables):
The Log-linear and Gardner models adopt a simplified version of the van Genuchten model
according to [5]:
-894-
where b > 0 [-] is a fitting parameter allowing for a better approximation of the retention data
of a given soil.
We recommend the following tables of parameters which are actually used in the program.
These parameters are derived from those given in the original tables.
Optimal values of parameters of the van Genuchten model for various classifications based on
USDA and FAO are presented in the following tables.
Table with regression coefficients for grain size USDA according to Van Genuchten
(1991)
Soil (grain size) Ksat RETC Rosetta

[m/day] e [-] Sr [-] α n [-] e [-] Sr [-] α n [-]
[1/m] [1/m]
Sand 7,13 0,75 0,11 14,5 2,68 0,60 0,14 3,5 3,18
Loamy sand 3,50 0,70 0,14 12,4 2,28 0,64 0,13 3,5 1,747
Sandy loam 1,06 0,70 0,16 7,5 1,89 0,63 0,10 2,7 1,448
Loam 0,25 0,75 0,18 3,6 1,56 0,66 0,15 1,1 1,474
Silt 0,06 0,85 0,07 1,6 1,37 0,96 0,10 0,7 1,677
Silt loam 0,11 0,82 0,15 2,0 1,41 0,78 0,15 0,5 1,663
Sandy clay loam 0,314 0,64 0,26 5,9 1,48 0,62 0,16 2,1 1,33
Clay loam 0,062 0,70 0,23 1,9 1,31 0,79 0,18 1,6 1,415
Silty clay loam 0,017 0,75 0,21 1,0 1,23 0,93 0,19 0,8 1,52
Sandy clay 0,029 0,61 0,26 2,7 1,23 0,63 0,30 3,3 1,207
Silty clay 0,0048 0,56 0,19 0,5 1,09 0,93 0,23 1,6 1,321
Clay 0,048 0,61 0,18 0,8 1,09 0,85 0,21 1,5 1,253
Table with regression coefficients for grain size FAO according to Van Genuchten
(1998)
Soil (grain size) Ksat e [-] Sr [-] α [1/m] n [-]

[m/day]
Top soil (up to depth 1 m)
Coarse (C) 0,600 0,68 0,062 3,83 1,3774
Medium (M) 0,121 0,78 0,023 3,14 1,1804
Medium fine (MF) 0,023 0,75 0,023 0,83 1,2539
-895-
Fine (F) 0,248 1,08 0,019 3,67 1,0120
Very fine (VF) 0,150 0,78 0,016 2,65 1,1033
Soil at depth (> 1 m)
Coarse (C) 0,700 0,58 0,068 4,30 1,5206
Medium (M) 0,108 065, 0,026 2,49 1,1689
Medium fine (MF) 0,040 0,70 0,024 0,82 1,2179
Fine (F) 0,085 0,93 0,021 1,98 1,0861
Very fine (VF) 0,082 1,17 0,019 1,68 1,0730
Table: FAO texture classification system
Soil Definition
Coarse (C) clay < 18% and sand > 65%

Medium (M) 18% < clay < 35% a 15% < sand
nebo: clay < 18% a 15% < sand < 65%
Medium fine (MF) clay < 35% a sand < 15%
Fine (F) 35% < clay < 60%
Very fine (VF) 60% < clay
Literature:
Details can be found in [2].
[1] D.M. Potts, L. Zdravkovič, Finite element analysis in geotechnical engineering - theory,
Thomas Telford, London, 1999.
[2] M. Th. Van Genuchten, A closed formulation for predicting the hydraulic conductivity of
unsaturated soils, Journal Soil Science Society of America 44, 239-259, 1988..
[3] M. Šejnoha, Finite element analysis in geotechnical design, to appear (2015)
[4] W. R. Gardner, Some steady-state solutions of the unsaturated moisture flow equation to
evaporation from a water table, Soil Science 85(4), 228-232, 1958.
Teoretické základy a inženýrské aplikace, předpokládaný rok vydání (2015)
[6] USDA 1951. Soil Survey Manual. Soil Conservation Service. U.S. Department of Agriculture
Handbook No. 18. US Government Printing Office. Washington DC.
[7] Wösten, J.H.M., et. al. 1998. Using existing soil data to derive hydraulic parameters for
simulation models in environmental studies and in land use planning. Final Report on the
European Union Funded project. DLO Winand Staring Centre. Report 156, Wageningen, NL. p.
-896-
106. ISSN 0927-04537.
Coefficient of Permeability
Ability of porous body (soils, rocks) to transport water of given properties (e.g. ground water)
is denoted as seepage. The amount of water flowing through a certain area can be represented
by the coefficient of permeability. The coefficient of permeability represents the slope of a
linear dependence of water flow velocity on the gradient of total head (gradient of hydraulic
head) in Dracy’s law written as:
where: - velocity of water flowing through pores

n porosity
Kr relative coefficient of permeability
permeability matrix storing coefficients of permeability of fully saturated soil
kx, ky, which may be different along individual coordinate axes
gradient of total head
Total head at a given point of region of flow is defined as a sum of the pressure head and
vertical coordinate and as such it determines the height of water in piezometer at a given
point:
where: γw - the weight of water
Example values of coefficients of permeability for various soils (Myslivec)
Type of soil Coefficient of Motion of water particle by1

permeability k cm for hydraulic gradient i = 1
per time
[m/day]
Soft sand 2
10 - 10 6 s - 10 min
Clayey sand 10
-1 -2
- 10 100 min - 18 hrs
Loess loam 10
-2 -4
- 10 18 hrs - 70 days
Loam 10
-4 -5
- 10 70 days - 2 years
Clayey soil 10
-5 -6
- 10 2 years - 20 years
Clay 10
-6 -7
- 10 20 years - 200 years
There are several ways for determining the coefficient of permeability k. They grouped as
follows:
a) Laboratory measurements
-897-
4 -6
Several types are available for the range of k 10 - 10 m/day.
b) Field measurements
6
Dwell or sink tests, measurement of filtration velocity of flow, for the range of k 10 - 1m/day.
c) Using empirical expressions
6
Suitable for non-cohesive soils, k 10 - 10m/day, they produce only guidance values - e.g.
according Terzaghi:
where: k - coefficient of permeability [cm/s]
d10 - diameter of effective solid particle [cm]
e - void ratio [-]
d) By calculation from time dependent consolidation process

One must know the coefficient of consolidation cv and consolidation curve (semi-logarithmic
dependence of deformation on time).This is only an indirect determination from the
expression:
where: e0 - initial void ratio

cv - coefficient of consolidation
ρw - unit density of water
g - gravitational acceleration
av - coefficient of compressibility
Basic Data
The following material parameters are required for all material models.
Unit weight γ - the unit weight of a dry soil (soil above the ground water table, GWT) is
assumed. The unit weight of a soil below the GWT is calculated from other parameters
introduced in section "Uplift".
Modulus of elasticity E
The modulus of elasticity describes the material stiffness that is assumed constant over the
entire load interval. In case of soils this assumption is, however, valid only for a very narrow
interval of recoverable deformations. Modulus of elasticity E has no significant effect on soil
behavior for nonlinear models after satisfying plasticity condition.
A straightforward answer to what definition and what value of this material parameter (initial,
tangent, secant) one should use in a given material model is, unfortunately, not available. To
select a given type of modulus one needs know the soil behavior in the analyzed geotechnical
task and to assign a particular magnitude the results from a triaxial test for corresponding
stress paths are necessary. Nevertheless, certain recommendations can be provided.
-898-
Distribution of idealized stress-strain curve and determination of individual types of soil

modules
The following interpretation of Young’s modulus E of elasticity is available:
• instantaneous modulus E0 in case of small loads (assumption o linear dependence of
strain and stress) or when instantaneous settlement is calculated
• secant modulus E50 is determined for a reference stress equal to 50% of stress at the
onset of failure (used for example when analyzing spread foundations and settlement of
pile foundations)
• deformation modulus Edef is determined from a stress-strain curve derived
experimentally. This modulus is required when using the modified elastic model, which it
assumes different behavior for load and unloading. Using this modulus when solving the
problem of soil unloading (e.g., underground structures, heaving of bottom a foundation
ditch) leads to larger deformations than when using the elastic modulus Eur determined
from unloading branch r of the stress-strain curve. Determining of deformation modulus of
soil is applicable by following approximate relation:
• oedometric modulus Eoed which depends on the level of stress in the soil should be used
depending on the expected range of stress in the soil may experience. The relation
between Edef and Eoed is provided by:
where: ν - Poisson's ratio

Ede - deformation (secant) modulus
f
• modulus of elasticity Eur determined from the unloading branch of stress-strain curve is
used when solving the problem of soil unloading (excavations) - must be defined when
using the modified elastic model
-899-
The values of modules of elasticity should be determined, if possible, from a triaxial shear test.
If other methods (penetration tests, pressuremeter tests etc.) are used then it becomes
necessary to introduce some correlation coefficients are described in literature.
For actual modeling we recommend to perform an analysis according to the elastic material
model at first and check the resulting strain field - such strains according to Hookes’s law are
linearly dependent on the applied load and the used elastic modulus. If the resulting strains
(displacements) are already too large the user should reassess the magnitude of the
originally applied elastic modulus.
Poisson's ratio ν - coefficient of transverse contraction is in the case elastic homogeneous
material loaded by normal stress in one direction given by:
where: εy - vertical strain

εx - horizontal strain
The Poisson's ratio is relatively easy to determine. To select its value one may take advantage
of the built-in soil database. If small loads are assumed and the instantaneous modulus E0 is
used, then also the value of the Poisson's ratio ν0 determined for the initial loading should be
employed.
Geostatic Stress, Uplift Pressure

Stress analysis is based on existence of soil layers specified by the user during input. The
program further inserts fictitious layers at the locations where the stress and lateral pressure
th
(GWT, points of construction, etc.) change. The normal stress in the i layer is computed
according to:
where: hi - thickness of the i

th
layer
γi - unit weight of soil
If the layer is found below the ground water table, the unit weight of soil below the water
table is specified with the help of input parameters of the soil as follows:
- for option "Standard" from expression:
where: γsat - saturated unit weight of soil

γw - unit weight of water
- for option "Compute from porosity" from expression:
where: n - porosity
γs - specific weight of soil
-900-
where: V - volume of soil

Vp - volume of voids
Gd - weight of dry soil
3
Unit weight of water is assumed in the program equal to 10 kN/m or 0,00625 ksi.
Assuming inclined ground behind the structure (β ≠ 0) and layered subsoil the angle β, when
th
computingthe coefficient of earth pressure K, is reduced in the i layer using the following
expression:
where: γ - unit weight of the soil in the first layer under ground
γi - th
unit weight of the soil in the i layer under ground
β - slope inclination behind the structure
Rigid Bodies
The frame "Rigid bodies" contains a table with the list of input rigid bodies.
The program allows for adding the rigid bodies. Here the only required input parameter is the
unit weight of the rigid body. The material of the rigid body is assumed an infinitely stiff.
These bodies serve mainly to model massive concrete structures and walls in both standard
and stability analyses.
Adding rigid bodies is performed in the dialog window "Add new rigid body".
Input rigid bodies can be copied within all 2D GEO5 programs using "GeoClipboard".
-901-
Frame "Rigid bodies"
Dialog window "Add new rigid body"
-902-
Assign
The frame "Assign" contains a list of layers of the profile and associated soils. The list of soils
is graphically represented using buttons in the bar above the table, or is accessible from a
The procedure to assign a soil into a layer is described in detail herein.
Unlike other programs the soils, which become active in calculations stages, are assigned to
regions rather than to interfaces. The regions are created automatically when creating the
computational model.
When a new soil is assigned in a topology regime, it is automatically assigned to all regions in
a given geological layer.
Frame "Assign"
Contact Types
The frame "Contact types" contains a table with the list of types of contacts. Adding contacts
is performed in the "New types of contact" dialog window.
This dialog window serves to define new contact elements which can be subsequently
introduced into the program using the "Beams" and "Contacts" frames. The material model of
a contact element can be either linear or nonlinear.
-903-
Frame "Contact types"

The contact elements are used in applications that require studying an interaction of a
structure and a soil. They can be further used to model joints or interfaces of two distinct
materials (soil - rock interface). A typical example of using contact elements is the modeling
of sheeting structures, retaining walls or tunnel lining. In such applications the contact
elements are used to model a relatively thin layer of a soil or rock loaded primarily in shear.
Contacts can be defined also independently along individual soil interfaces.
Location of contact elements when modeling a gravity wall

The contact element is an element with a zero thickness allowing for calculating an interfacial
stress as a function of a relative displacement developed along the interface.
-904-
Construction of a sheeting wall represented by beam and contact elements
Contact Elements
Two options of the contact element material model are available. One may select either the
elastic model with the possibility of plotting contact stresses while assuming the elastic
behavior along the interface or the plastic model. The plastic model is based on the classical
Mohr-Coulomb model extended by including the tension cut-off.
This model is therefore well suited when modeling tensile separation. In certain applications
such as sheeting structures this model is vital for receiving meaningful predictions of the soil
and structure response.
The basic model parameters are the cohesion c, coefficient of friction μ and angle of dilation ψ.
The parameters c and μ can be specified also indirectly by reducing the soil strength
parameters c and tan(φ) of adjacent to the contact. If the contact is assumed between two soils
(rocks) then the one having smaller values of c and φ is used in the reduction step.
The contact parameters are then defined as:
If no better information regarding the reduction of parameters is available one may use the
following values. For steel structures in sandy soils the reduction parameter equal to 2/3 is
reasonable while for clays the value of 1/3 can be used. These parameters usually attain higher
values when concrete structures are used. In general, the reduction parameters should be less
than 1. The dilation angle plays the same role as in the case of standard soil models. Just
recall that by setting ψ = 0 we prior assume elastic behavior in the tension/compression. The
plastic deformation is thus limited to shear.
Additional parameters of the contact material model are the elastic stiffnesses in the normal
and tangential directions kn and ks, respectively. They can be imagined as spring stiffnesses
along a given interface. A reliable selection of the values of these parameters is not an easy
task and is usually problem dependent. To shed a light on this subject one may relate these
stiffnesses to the material parameters of the soil adjacent to the contact. The following
-905-
relations then apply:
where: t -assumed (fictitious) thickness of contact (interface) layer

G -shear modulus of elasticity
E -Young’s modulus of elasticity
In case of distinct materials (E1, E2, G1, G2) we take the lower value of ks and kn.
Although in the case of a fully plastic behavior the selection of parameters ks and kn is not
essential, the values assigned to these parameters are decisive for the success of the solution
3
of a given nonlinear problem. Providing these values are two large (above 100000 kN/m ) the
iteration process may oscillate. On the other hand, setting the values of ks and kntoo low
3
(below 10000 kN/m ) lead to nonrealistic deformations of structure.
3
The default setting in the program is 10000 kN/m .
Visualization of elastic stiffnesses
Lining
The frame "Lining" contains a table with the list of input linings. This frame becomes
accessible in the program once the "Tunnel" regime is activated in the frame "Settings". The
"Lining - FEM" module simplifies modeling and positioning of individual tunnel linings.
The "Lining - FEM" module is an independent program used to design linings. Free points, free
lines, line refinement, anchors, beams and beam loads created in this module are passed into
the FEM program. Although behaving in a standard way, they cannot be edited in the FEM
program. Editing is only possible in the "Lining - FEM" module.
Adding lining is performed in the "Lining - FEM" module. The lining can also be edited on the
-906-
Frame "Lining"
Pressing the "Position" button opens the "Adjust lining location" dialog window, which
allows for modifying coordinates of the lining location. To adjust lining in the FEM program is
possible even without launching the "Lining - FEM" module.
Dialog window "Edit lining location"
Module Lining - FEM

The "Lining - FEM" module simplifies modeling and positioning individual linings of tunnels.
The module disposes of the features of the main FEM program including the "Topology"
regime and stages of construction. In the "Topology" regime the module contains the "Free
points", "Free lines", "Line refinement" and "Settings" frames. Frames accessible from stages
of constructions are described within the stages of construction regime of the FEM program.
The "Exit and save" button can be used to terminate the work in the module and to transmit
data into the FEM program, whereas the "Exit without saving" button just terminates the
-907-
work without data transmission.

The program makes it possible to import data in the *.DXF format.
The data of the lining module can be independently saved or loaded while in this dialog using
standard functions "Open" and "Save". This way allows for transmitted the lining between
several analyzed tasks or within a single task.
Load a lining, having less number of stages than the current state, will add the remaining
stages. In the case of lining having more stages, the corresponding stages are first added to
the dialog and then to the main window. The data from the lining regime cannot be loaded
directly into the main window.
Module "Lining FEM"
Free Points
The frame "Free points" contains a table with the list of input free points. Working with free
points follows the same guidelines as in the FEM program - frame "Free points".
The frame differs by the functions on the horizontal tool bar, which contains the "Generator of
shape of lining" and "Generator of anchored regions" buttons. The function of the "Range"
button is identical to that in the FEM program - frame "Interface".
-908-
Frame "Free points"
Free Lines
The frame "Free lines" contains a table with the list of input free points. Working with free
lines follows the same guidelines as in the FEM program - frame "Free lines".
The frame differs by the functions on the horizontal tool bar, which contains the "Generator of
shape of lining" and "Generator of anchored regions" buttons.
-909-
Frame "Free lines"
Line Refinement
The frame "Line refinement" contains a table with the list of input point refinements. Working
with free lines refinement follows the same guidelines as in the FEM program - frame "Line
refinement".
-910-
Frame "Line refinement"
Settings
The frame "Settings" allows for redefining the location of a point to be subsequently
positioned in the main window of the FEM program. The point location can be associated with
the selected free point or determined by the coordinate system origin or by an arbitrary
coordinate. This way allows for an exact positioning of a given point of the lining structure in
the main window of the FEM program.
The use of a second tube can be activated in the right part of the frame. The second tube will
appear in the frame "Settings" as a preview, and then after transmitting it into the FEM
program. The second tube is a clone of the first one. It differs only in the positioning with
respect to the originally defined structure.
-911-
Frame "Settings"
Generator of Lining Shape

Depending on particular parameters the generator creates corresponding elements which are
then operated on independently with no possibility for being parametrically modification. If the
parameters of generation are acceptable, the program displays during their modification the
current graphical representation of generated elements.
Six basic shapes of linings is available for generating free points and free lines in the "New
shape of lining" dialog window. Each shape is defined by several parameters (radii, angles,
height, spacing, subdivision number, control points).
-912-
Dialog window "New shape of lining" - tab "Basic shape"

The "Bottom arch" tab sheep allows us to choose, whether the lining invert will be flat of
arched, determined parametrically either by a radius or an angle.
Dialog window "New shape of lining" - tab "Bottom arch"

The "Location" tab allows, using coordinates, for changing the lining location.
Dialog window "New shape of lining" - tab "Location"
Generator of Anchored Regions

The "New anchored region" dialog window serves to generate free points and free lines
based, however, on already input lines. This generates a closed region, which is then assigned
in the FEM program a special soil characterizing a densely anchored region. The dialog window
requires specifying a line number and parameters based on the type anchoring system (over
entire line, angle sector, origin and length).
-913-
Dialog window "New anchored region"
Defining anchored region
Stages of Construction
Stages of construction in the "Lining - FEM" module and in the FEM program correspond to
each other. They, however, may vary in several features.
-914-
Different behavior of stages in the "Lining - FEM" module:

• Possible to switch to stages of construction from the "Topology" regime without
generating the FE mesh.
• Stages of construction added in the "Lining - FEM" module are, after confirming,
transferred also into the FEM program.
• Stages of construction, preceding the stage from which the "Lining - FEM" module was
launched, cannot be used.
• Stages of construction defined prior to launching the "Lining - FEM" module cannot be
deleted.
Free Points
The frame "Free points" contains a table with the list of input free points. Adding free points
is performed in the "New free point" dialog window.
The free points can also be edited on the desktop with the help of active objects.
The program allows for inputting an arbitrary number of free nodes anywhere inside or outside
the structure. Free nodes have several main functions:
• nodes to define structure (tunnel opening, lining, sheeting, beams)
• auxiliary points for the mesh refinement
• points to define a boundary condition, to input forces, etc.
If a free node is found inside or on the boundary of a structure, it becomes automatically a
part of the finite element mesh. This option allows an adjustment of the finite element
mesh or makes it possible to create own mesh.
-915-
Frame "Free points"
-916-
Mesh generated without free points
-917-
Mesh with free points
Free Lines
The frame "Free lines" contains a table with the list of input free points. Adding free points is
performed in the "New free line" dialog window.
The lines are defined between individual points (segments, arcs, circles) or around
individual points (circles). The lines can be introduced both between free points and between
points located on interfaces including the terrain surface.
The lines may intersect each other and may have an arbitrary number of contact
points - intersections of individual lines are determined by the program when adjusting the
geometrical model. The free lines may be used to introduce beam elements into the model.
The type of line is selected from the combo box. The following modes are available:
• Line type A combo list is used to select the desired line (segment, arc and circle).
- segment Clicking individual points on the desktop with the left mouse
button creates a point to point line
- arc Use the combo list to choose a particular mode of defining an arc
segment (third point, center, radius, height). Clicking the left
mouse bottom on the desktop then selects points to define an
arc. When selecting one of the following options - center, radius
or, you are further requested to select from the combo list the
orientation (positive, negative).
- circle Use the combo list to choose a particular mode of defining a circle
-918-
(center and radius, three points). Clicking the left mouse button
on the desktop then selects points to define a circle. The combo
list is also used to select the orientation (positive, negative).
The free lines can also be edited on the desktop with the help of active objects.
Frame "Free lines" - different types of free lines
Point Refinement
The frame "Point refinement" contains a table with the list of input point refinements. Adding
a point refinement is performed in the "New point refinement" dialog window.
Refining the finite element mesh around points is an important feature, which allows us
to create an appropriate finite element mesh. Both free points and points pertinent to
individual interfaces including terrain can be used to refine the original finite element mesh.
The point refinement can also be edited on the desktop with the help of active objects.
-919-
Frame "Point refinement"
Dialog window "New point refinement"
Line Refinement
The frame "Line refinement" contains a table with the list of input point refinements. Adding
a line refinement is performed in the "New line refinement" dialog window.
create an appropriate finite element mesh. Both free lines and lines pertinent to individual
interfaces including terrain can be used to refine the original finite element mesh.
The line refinement can also be edited on the desktop with the help of active objects.
-920-
Frame "Line refinement"
Dialog window "New line refinement"
Free Refinements
The frame "Free refinements" contains a table with the list of input free refinements. Adding
a free refinements is performed in the "New free refinements" dialog window.
The free refinements can also be edited on the desktop with the help of active objects.
-921-
Frame "Free refinement"
Mesh Generation
The frame "Mesh generator" serves to define the basic setting to generate mesh (left part)
and to view information about generated mesh (right part).
A successfully generated mesh completes the topology input stage - the analysis then
proceeds with the calculation stages. When generating mesh the program automatically
introduces standard boundary conditions. Information about the resulting mesh including
warnings for possible weak points in the mesh is displayed in the right bottom window.
Correctly generated finite element mesh is the major step in achieving accurate and reliable
results. The program FEM has an automatic mesh generator, which may substantially simplify
this task. Nevertheless, certain rules should be followed when creating a finite element
mesh:
• The basic mesh density can be specified in the "Mesh generator" dialog window. I is
generally accepted that the finer the mesh the better the results - computation as well as
post-processing, however, may slow down substantially. The goal thus becomes to find an
optimum mesh density - this mainly depends on the user experiences. Meshes generated
in example problems may serve as an initial hint.
-922-
Frame "Mesh generation" - a mesh with no local refinement

• The finite element mesh should be sufficiently fine in locations in which large stress
gradients are expected (point supports, corners, openings, etc.). To that end, it is possible
to specify the mesh refinement in the neighborhood of these locations. The mesh
refinement can be specified around individual points or lines. The spread of refinement
should be at least 3-5 times the desired refinement in the center of the refinement. Also,
both values (density and spread of refinement) should be reasonable in view of the
prescribed mesh density that applies to the surrounding region. This assures a smooth
transition between regions with different mesh densities. Singular lines should be tackled
in the same way. For more complicated problems it is useful to first carry out the analysis
with a rather coarse mesh and then after examining the results to refine the mesh
accordingly.
-923-
Defining mesh refinement around a circular line
New mesh after refining the original mesh around a circular line
By default program assumes 6-node triangular elements with mesh smoothing. The
accuracy of the results more or less corresponds to twice as fine mesh composed of 3-node
triangular elements. The 3-node elements are available only in the "Advanced program
options" mode (check box "6-node elements") and serve merely for research and testing
purposes. The stability analysis, however, can be performed with 6-node triangular elements
only. In case of nonlinear analysis, these elements should be used exclusively.
The "Advanced program options" mode allows also for the generation of mixed mesh
(triangular and quadrilateral elements).
Mesh Generator Warning

In the "Warning - structure critical locations" dialog window the user is prompted for
possible locations on the structure that may cause problems during automatic mesh
generation. When positioning the cursor on individual warnings the corresponding critical
region on a structure is highlighted with a red color. The following items are checked:
• whether the distance between two points is greater than one tenth of the required
element edge length,
• whether the distance between a point and a line is greater than one tenth of the element
edge length,
• whether the area of a region is greater than twice the element edge length,
• whether points and/or lines are found inside the structure (in the soil).
-924-
These warnings suggest locations, in which the mesh generator experience problems. The
following possibilities may occur:
• the mesh is not generated => this calls for a new input of geometrical data,
• the mesh is generated => in this case it is up to the user to decide whether the mesh is
reasonable - in any case, the warning can be further ignored and the analysis can be
carried out.
Warning after identifying critical sections in FE mesh
-925-
Critical section after zooming in - two points are too close to each other
Adjusting Original Geometry

The program contains a built-in automatic corrector of the specified geometry. This
means that prior to the mesh generation the program automatically locates all points of
intersection of lines, locates all closed regions and creates a corresponding geometrical
(calculation) model.
Such new regions can be then deactivated or they can be assigned a new soil. The main
advantage of this system becomes evident when creating a geometrical model for tunnels
(step by step excavation) or for sheeted structures. Creating even a very complicated model
thus becomes rather simple and can be performed very efficiently.
Correcting the original geometrical model may cause some points in the model to be too close
to each other or too small regions might be created. Warning message then appears in the
right bottom window identifying such week points in the model.
-926-
Regions after performing an automatic adjustment of the geometrical model
Standard Boundary Conditions

The program automatically generates standard boundary conditions. Therefore, in routine
problems the user does not have to enter the step of specifying supports.
The standard boundary conditions are:
• smooth pin along the bottom edge of the geometrical model,
• sliding pin along vertical edges of the geometrical model.
-927-
Standard boundary conditions
Construction Stages
The actual analysis is performed in individual stages of construction (calculation stages) after
the geometrical model and generating the finite element mesh (topology stage). One can move
between calculation stages and the "Topology" regime using the buttons on the horizontal
tool bar.
Tool bar "Construction stages" - switching between "Topology" regime and other stages of
constructions
The calculation stages serve to model gradually build structures. Their correct definition and
proper sequence is very important. The analysis of each stage builds (except for the stability
analysis) upon the results derived in the previous stage. Information about individual
objects and their properties are carried over from one stage to the other - when editing an
existing stage or creating a new stage the program applies the principle of heredity.
-928-
Some frames ("Water", "Activity", "Assign") contain at the right part of the bar the "Adopt"
button. The button becomes active once the data defined in the frame differ from those
defined in the previous stage. After pressing this button the corresponding data ("Water",
"Activity") are adopted from the previous stage.
Changing input data - accepting data from the previous stage of construction
The first stage of construction (calculation of geostatic stress) represents the initial state of
the soil (rock) body before the onset of construction - displacements associated with this stage
are therefore set equal to zero.
Loss of convergence may occur for a certain stage of construction. In this case (the results are
not available for non-converged structure) the subsequent stages cannot be analyzed. To avoid
modeling errors we recommend the user to follow the recommended way of the modeling and
analysis of a structure.
Excavation
The frame "Excavation" contains a table with the list of excavations. Adding excavations is
performed in the "New excavations" dialog window.
Excavation can only be defined in the second or the following construction stages.
The degree of deactivation [%] is specified in the dialog window "New Excavation".
-929-
Frame "Excavation"
The excavation feature enables to partially deactivate of the forces by which the soil within the
excavated profile supports the surrounding soil. This technique allows for modelling the
successive excavation within a 2D (plane strain) analysis. Standard use case consists of partial
deactivation of the excavated soil in one computational stage and installation of the primary
lining (beam) and deactivation of the remaining supporting stress in the following stage.
In literature, this procedure is known as the Convergence Confinement Method.
Activation
The program allows for removing (deactivating) soils from individual regions. As an
example we consider an embankment analysis. In such a case, it must be accounted for
st
already in the topology regime when creating the overall geometrical model. In the 1
calculation stage, however, it can be deactivated. Similar approach applies also to underground
or open excavations (tunnels, sheeting structures). When deactivating a region below the
ground water it is necessary to correctly model the region boundary.
-930-
Modeling embankment - 1st construction stage

The embankment can be subsequently reactivated in the next construction stage.
-931-
Modeling embankment - activity of embankment body

Using GeoClipboard there's a possibility to copy current profile as sorted interfaces and allow
to copy profile to another program. Copied interfaces are corrected to follow specifications to
2D profile entered from top to bottom.
Activity of Regions Below GWT

There are two cases to be considered when deactivating a region below the GWT.
1) The soil subjected to excavation is completely enclosed by active beam elements. The
beam is then considered to be impermeable and both the soil and water are removed
(removing total stresses - inactive region is free of water). Owing to impermeability of the
beam elements, the pore pressure distribution remains unchanged, see the figure.
Pore pressure distribution after removing soil from region enclosed by active beams
-932-
2) The removed soil is not enclosed by beam elements. In such case we assume that water
in the excavated region is still active. This state is evident from the pore pressure distribution
in the figure.
Pore pressure distribution after removing soil

Its effect can be removed by changing the ground water table.
Pore pressure distribution after modifying the ground water table
Assign
The frame "Assign" contains a list of layers of the profile and associated soils. Its functions are
similar to the case of assigning soils in the topology regime.
In calculations stages, the active soils are assigned to regions rather than to interfaces. The
regions are created automatically when creating the computational model.
-933-
Frame "Assign"
Lining
The frame "Lining" contains a table with the list of input linings. This frame becomes
accessible in the program once the "Tunnel" regime is activated in the frame "Settings". Only
editing is allowed in subsequent stages of construction.
To adjust the lining the program launches the module "Lining - FEM". Its function is described
in detail in the "Topology" regime in the "Lining" frame. In stages of construction the "Lining -
FEM" module contains the "Beams", "Anchors" and "Beam loads" frames.
-934-
Frame "Lining"
Beams
The frame "Beams" contains a table with the list of beams. Actions applying to beams are
identical to those used in stages of construction in the FEM program, frame "Beams".
Types of contacts to introduce contacts on beams are adopted from the FEM program.
-935-
Frame "Beams"
Anchors
The frame "Anchors" contains a table with the list of input anchors. Actions applying to beams
are identical to those used in stages of construction in the FEM program, frame "Anchors".
The frame differs by the function on the horizontal tool bar having the "Generator of anchors
on free line" button.
-936-
Frame "Anchors"
Beam Loads
The frame "Beam loads" contains a table with the list of input loads. Actions applying to beam
loads are identical to those used in stages of construction in the FEM program, frame "Beam
loads".
-937-
Frame "Beam loads"
Generator of Anchors on Free Line

The "New anchors" dialog window is an extension of the standard dialog window allowing for
a uniform distribution of several identical anchors along a line. Spacing of anchors is generated
the same way as used in the generator of anchored regions (over the entire line, over a part
defined by the angle or length). There are three options to generate the number of anchors:
by the number over a length, by the angle or spacing between individual anchors.
The generated anchors are attached in the FEM program to the free line defined therein.
-938-
Dialog window "New anchors"
Beams
The frame "Beams" contains a table with the list of beams. Adding beams is performed in the
"New Beams" dialog window.
The beam location is selected from the combo box (mesh line, terrain segment).
Added beams can also be edited on the desktop with the help of active objects. The program
employs the following coordinate systems.
The beam elements serve to model beams,linings, sheeting walls, etc. Distribution
internal forces such as moment, normal and shear forces developed along a beam axis can
are derived from the beam element end forces.
Beams are assigned to already defined lines (free lines, terrain segments) - the
corresponding line then represents the beam axis. The program offers several basic types of
cross-sections. Nevertheless, the user is free to introduce the required cross-section
independently.
-939-
An important step when modeling beams is the definition of contact elements characterizing
the interface behavior between the beam and the soil. Contact (interface) elements can be
assigned to both sides of a beam. A correct definition of contacts is essential especially when
modeling sheeting walls.
Types of end points connections can be specified for each beam.
In subsequent stages the beam can be either strengthened or degraged.
The program automatically includes the beam self-weight into the analysis. This feature,
however, can be turned off when defining the beam.
Beams are modeled using the beam elements with three degrees of freedom at each node.
The beam elements are formulated on the basis of the Mindlin theory. The theory assumes that
the plane cross-section normal to the beam axis before deformation remains plane after
deformation but not necessarily normal to the deformed beam axis. At present, the internal
forces are evaluated at the element nodes and from the beam end forces.
Dialog window "New beams"
-940-
Frame "Beams"
Types of Cross-Section
The program allows the user to either input the cross-section parameters digitally or to
choose from one of the predefined types of the cross-section. The type of material of the
cross-section is selected from the catalog of materials or is introduced digitally using the editor
of materials. The following types of the beam cross-section are implemented:
• rectangular concrete wall - a beam wall thickness must be specified
• pile wall - a pile diameter and their spacing must be specified
• steel sheet pile - selected from the built-in database
• steel I cross-section - a type of cross-section from the built-in database is selected,
their spacing must be specified (the type of cross-section is selected from the "Catalog of
cross-sections", or is defined in the "Editor of cross-sections", the type of material is
selected from the "Catalog of materials" or is specified digitally in the "Editor of
materials")
All input cross-sections are automatically recalculated per 1 m (feet) run. The results of
internal forces developed along the beams are also presented per 1 m (feet) run of a
structure. Thus if necessary, for piles or I cross-sections they must be adjusted depending on
their spacing by the user.
Providing you have your own database of sheet piles, which is not yet built-in the program,
we will be happy to implement it. You may reach us at [email protected].
-941-
Dialog window "New beams" - selection of the type of cross-section
Beam End-Points Connection

The program allows for three types of beam end-points connection:
fixed standard type
hinge (is used to introduce an internal hinge in between beams -

locations with zero bending moment)
foot
The foot is a special type of a beam end-point support in the soil. It is applicable for the
beam end-point located in the soil body. When the fixed type of connection is assumed the
beam and the soil element are connected at one point (a singular connection) often causing
evolution of plastic strains in the surrounding soil and loss of convergence. The foot allows
for more realistic redistribution of contact stresses and prevents the beam from
"penetrating" into the soil, consequently stabilizing the convergence process. By default the
foot length is assumed to be equal to the beam width - it can be arbitrarily adjusted (for
example to enlarge the pile heel).
-942-
Connection (a) without (b) with a foot
Degradation and Strengthening of Beams

In subsequent stages the beams cannot be edited in a standard way. Therefore, one of the
following options must be selected to modify them:
• removing the selected beam from the analysis
• degrading the selected beam (applicable only in the "Tunnels" mode)
• strengthening the selected beam cross-section
• modifying the beam contact properties
The type of modification is selected from the "Adjust beam properties" dialog window.
A degree of beam degradation is specified in percentage, one hundred percent corresponds
to beam removal.
Strengthening a beam element with a rectangular cross-section can be achieved by
enlarging its width (e.g., increasing the shotcrete thickness). Other cross-sections are modified
by directly inputting new (larger) values of the cross-section parameters.
-943-
Dialog window "Adjust beam properties" - beam strengthening
Catalog of Profiles
In the case of steel cross-sections the program allows for choosing a particular cross-section
from the catalog of profiles. Only the type of cross-section has to be specified in the dialog
window. The type of material of the cross-section is selected similarly to other cross-sections
(rectangular wall, pile wall, sheet pile…) from the "Catalog of materials", or defined in the
"Editor of materials". The type of cross-section (beam) is selected in the "New beams" dialog
window.
-944-
Dialog window "Catalog of profiles"
Cross-Section Editor
In the case of steel cross-section the program allows for introducing the user defined cross-
section. Only the shape of cross-section has to be specified in the dialog window. The type of
material of the cross-section is selected similarly to other cross-sections (rectangular wall, pile
wall, sheet pile…) from the "Catalog of materials", or defined in the "Editor of materials". The
type of cross-section (beam) is selected in the "New beams" dialog window.
Dialog window "Cross-section editor - solid welded"
Catalog of Materials
The program contains a built-in catalog of materials for concrete and steel. Only the type of
material has to be specified in the dialog window. The shape of cross-section is selected from
the "Catalog of profiles", or defined in the "Cross-section editor". For other types of cross-
sections (rectangular wall, pile wall, sheet pile…) the type of cross-section is selected in the
"New beams" dialog window.
-945-
Dialog window "Catalog of materials" - steel
Dialog window "Catalog of materials" - concrete
Editor of Materials
Apart from using the "Catalog of materials" the program allows the user to enter the material
parameters for steel and concrete digitally. Only the type of material (material parameters) has
to be specified in the dialog window. The shape of cross-section is selected from the "Catalog
of profiles", or defined in the "Cross-section editor". For other types of cross-sections
(rectangular wall, pile wall, sheet pile…) the type of cross-section is selected in the "New
beams" dialog window.
-946-
Dialog window "Editor of material - Structural steel"
Dialog window "Editor of material - Concrete"
Contacts
The frame "Contacts" contains a table with the list of contacts. Adding contacts is performed
in the "New contacts" dialog window.
The contact elements are used in applications that require a proper representation of
structure-soil interaction. They can be further used to model joints or interfaces of two distinct
-947-
materials (soil - rock interface). Contacts are assigned to already defined lines - free lines or
mesh lines (interfaces). The contact is defined by its type.
The contact location is selected from the combo box (mesh line, terrain segment).
The input contacts can also be edited on the desktop with the help of active objects.
Frame "Contacts"
Contacts and Beams (Water Flow)

The frame "Contacts" ("Beams") contains (in mode "Water flow") a table with the list of
contacts (beams). Adding contacts (beams) is performed in the "New contacts" ("New
beams") dialog window.
The contact location is selected from the combo box (mesh line, terrain segment).
The contact elements are used in applications that require a proper representation of
structure-soil interaction. They can be further used to model joints or interfaces of two distinct
materials (soil - rock interface). Contacts are assigned to already defined lines - free lines or
mesh lines (interfaces). The contact is defined by its type.
The input contacts can also be edited on the desktop with the help of active objects.
Beam or contact element can be defined as:
• permeable
• impermeable
• partially permeable
Contact elements allow us to model a certain barrier for flow in the soil body. Consider for
example a sheeting wall represented in the stress analysis by beam elements. The sheeting
wall anchored into the inside region can be considered either as fully permeable, or fully
-948-
impermeable or partially permeable. Although the first two cases can also be treated using
contact elements placed along the corresponding line, they are handled by the program
automatically without needing these elements. The third case represents a problem of flow in a
thin zone having a given thickness d, see figure:
Partially permeable contact

Corresponding fluxes in the tangent direction (s-direction) qs and normal direction (n-direction)
qn are given by:
Defining contact elements therefore requires inputting the following parameters:

ks - permeability in tangent direction (permeability longitudinal), [m/day]
kn - permeability in normal direction (permeability transverse), [m/day]
Point Supports
The frame "Point supports" contains a table with the list of point supports. Adding point
supports is performed in the "New point supports" dialog window.
The input point supports can also be edited on the desktop with the help of active objects. The
program employs the following coordinate systems.
The program contains a built-in automatic generator of standard boundary conditions.
Therefore, in most problems the boundary (support) conditions are not required to be
specified.
The following types of point supports are considered:
• free
• fixed
-949-
• spring
• prescribed deformation
Supports are defined in the global coordinate system.
Frame "Point supports"
Point Flow
The frame "Point flow" contains a table with the list of points with flow. Adding a point flow is
performed in the "New point flow" dialog window.
The input point flows can also be edited on the desktop with the help of active objects.
The following boundary conditions can be specified:
a) Pore pressure at a point
• Numerically - the value of pore pressure at a given point is specified [ kPa, ksf]
• By specifying the location of ground water table (total head) - coordinate of GWT is
specified
b) Point inflow/outflow
3 3
Pumping/injection rate is specified [m /day/m, ft /day/ft]
Line Supports
The frame "Line supports" contains a table with the list of line supports. Adding line supports
is performed in the "New line supports" dialog window.
The line support location is selected from the combo box (free line, terrain segment, mesh
-950-
line).
The input line supports can also be edited on the desktop with the help of active objects. The
The program contains a built-in automatic generator of standard boundary conditions.
Therefore, in most problems the boundary conditions are not required to be specified.
When assigning supports to a line it is first necessary to select the type of line (free line,
interface, mesh line).
The following types of line supports are considered:
• free
• fixed
• deformation
Frame "Line supports"
Line Flow
The frame "Line flow" contains a table with the list of lines with flow. Editing a line flow is
performed in the "New line flow" dialog window.
The input line flows can also be edited on the desktop with the help of active objects.
Flow boundary conditions must be defined on all boundary lines. The following boundary
conditions can be specified:
a) Impermeable
b) Permeable Pore pressure on a given line is equal to zero
-951-
c) Pore pressure
• distribution of pore pressure p can be specified numerically

• distribution of pore pressure can be specified by inputting the location of ground water
table (by prescribing the total head h)
d) Inflow/outflow on a line q - it is specified in velocity units e.g. [m/day, ft/day] - the flow
velocity into/out of the region is specified. The default setting corresponds to an impermeable
boundary for which q = 0.
e) Seepage surface - this boundary condition is introduced providing the boundary cannot be
uniquely divided into the part with prescribed pore pressure and the part with prescribed
inflow/outflow (the exit point is not known). In such a case the analysis is performed in two
steps. In the first step the program locates the exit point. The actual flow analysis with known
boundary conditions is then carried out in the second step. In some cases both steps must be
repeated several times. When enhanced input is considered the program requires entering a
fictitious permeability kv in units [m/day]. This is essentially a penalty term, a sufficiently large
number in general, ensuring that along an impermeable boundary the value of total h will be
equal to the y-coordinate of a given point (q = 0). For a part of boundary with no flow condition
we have kv = 0. Variables q and h are then related by:
if h > 0 (S = 1) inside soil body
if h < 0 (S < 1) inside soil body
Note: If in case of transient flow we directly define in the first calculation stage the location of
the ground water table (phreatic surface) as an initial condition, we should define in the next
calculation step along the boundaries below the water level in the region of fully saturated soil
a boundary with the prescribed pore pressure having a corresponding value and not the
seepage surface. In case of seepage surface the program would immediately label this
boundary as a boundary with zero pore pressure and not the originally assumed boundary with
the pore pressure distribution in accordance with the expected height of GWT. In such a case,
the analysis will not converge, because water, instead of flowing out of the domain at p = 0,
will have tendency to flow in, which not realistic.
Anchors
The frame "Anchors" contains a table with the list of anchors. Adding anchors is performed in
the "New anchors" dialog window.
The input anchors can also be edited on the desktop with the help of active objects. The
The anchor head (starting point) can be automatically hooked to the ground, an arbitrary
interface or opening (tunnel lining). The anchor head is then automatically positioned in to the
intersection of the anchor line determined by the input points and the selected line. The anchor
can also be introduced directly by specifying coordinates of the two end points.
Anchors as stabilizing or reinforcing elements are represented by elastic tensile-
compressive bar element with constant normal stiffness. The maximum allowable tensile
force the element can sustain controls tensile failure of the anchor.The bar element is anchored
into the soil only at its staring and end points. No mutual interaction between the soil and the
anchor along the anchor length is considered.
-952-
Anchors are defined by their starting and end points and by their stiffness. The program
automatically links the anchor element degrees of freedom to the actual degrees of freedom of
the predefined finite element mesh. Therefore, the anchor can be introduced anywhere in the
structure.
The anchor stiffness is specified in terms of the elastic modulus and its area. The program
makes it also possible to enter the anchor diameter - the area is then determined
automatically. In stability analysis problems the anchor stiffness is not considered. Its action is
realized only through the prestress force introduced automatically as external compressive
force acting at the anchor head.
Other important parameters are the prestress force and the tensile strength (the anchor
breaks when the tensile strength is exceeded). For elements with no prestress the prestress
force is set equal to zero. Sufficiently large value of the anchor tensile strength may be
specified to avoid anchor failure.
By default the anchor does not support a compressive force - anchor elements loaded in
compression during a certain stage of calculation are temporarily disabled. If tension occurs in
subsequent analysis run (due to change in load, geometry or material parameters of soil), the
program automatically introduces these elements back into the analysis. The program makes
also possible to include compressive response of an anchor. However, for elements loaded
primarily in compression we recommend to define these elements as props.
The anchor deforms during analysis. Such deformation together with the deformation of the
surrounding soil may cause reduction of the specified prestress force in the anchor.
Providing we wish to achieve a specific prestress force in the anchor, it is necessary to either
post-stress the anchor to a given value in the next calculation stage or to use a sufficiently
large magnitude of the prestress force right from the beginning to compensate for a possible
drop (the resulting anchor force after completion of the calculation step is displayed at the
anchor head below the prescribed prestress force).
In subsequent stages the program allows only for anchor post-stressing - change of the initial
prestress force, or for removing the anchor from the analysis.
Introducing pre-stressed anchors into the soil may lead to plastic deformation of the soil in the
vicinity of the anchor head or root. Some modifications of the original input are than required
to avoid often encountered loss of converge.
-953-
Anchor input
Anchor End Points

Introducing pre-stressed anchors into the soil may lead to plastic deformation of the soil in
the vicinity of the anchor head or root - the analysis then often fails to converge.
In such a case we recommend the following modifications of the original input:
• to place a beam element under the anchor head (this results into a better transition of
load into the soil),
• to place the anchor root into a sufficiently stiff soil (use the elastic or modified elastic
material model for the soil layer around the anchor).
-954-
Plastic regions in the vicinity of anchor head or root
Anchors in the Stability Analysis

When performing the stability analysis the actual pre-stressed anchor is automatically
replaced by corresponding compressive point forces acting at the anchor head.
The soil at the point of the applied force may, however, undergo plastic deformation. One
should therefore carefully assess the resulting distribution of plastic strains. Note that the
localization of equivalent plastic strain identifies the location of the potential slip surface.
Therefore, if the plastic strains at the anchor head become decisive, it is necessary to
introduce some modifications of the original input.
-955-
Modeling anchor in the slope stability analysis
Props
The frame "Props" contains a table with the list of anchors. Adding props is performed in the
"New props" dialog window. When inputting, it is possible to use the function of the grid.
The input props can also be edited on the desktop with the help of active objects. The program
The prop end points can be automatically hooked to the ground, an arbitrary interface or
opening (tunnel lining). These points are then automatically positioned in to the intersections
of the prop line determined by the input points and the selected lines. The prop can also be
introduced directly by specifying coordinates of the two end points.
Props are represented by elastic compressive bar element with constant normal stiffness.
The props can sustain only compressive load. When found in tension they are removed from
the analysis.
The prop is linked to the finite element mesh in its two end points. No interaction is considered
between the soil and the prop along its length when places into the soil.
Props are defined by their starting and end points and by their stiffness. The program
automatically links the prop element degrees of freedom to the actual degrees of freedom
of the predefined finite element mesh. Therefore, the prop can be introduced anywhere in the
structure.
The prop stiffness is specified in terms of the elastic modulus and its area. The program
makes also possible to enter the prop diameter - the area is then determined automatically.
In subsequent stages the prop cannot be edited - it can be either removed or input again.
-956-
Prop input
Props - Analysis
Reinforcements
The frame "Reinforcements" contains a table with the list of reinforcements. Adding
-957-
reinforcements is performed in the "New reinforcements" dialog window. When inputting, it

is possible to use the function of the grid.
The input reinforcements can also be edited on the desktop with the help of active objects. The
The reinforcement end points can be automatically hooked to the ground, an arbitrary
interface or opening (tunnel lining). These points are then automatically positioned in to the
intersections of the prop line determined by the input points and the selected lines. The
reinforcement can also be introduced directly by specifying coordinates of the two end points.
Reinforcements are tensile reinforcing elements (geotextiles, geodrids), which are defined
by their starting and end points and their stiffness.
Unlike anchors or props, the reinforcement is linked to an underlying finite element mesh
along its entire length. However, similar to anchors the program introduces the
reinforcement end points into the finite element mesh automatically so the reinforcement can
be specified anywhere within the mesh. Similar to anchors the reinforcement is modeled by a
tensile/compressive bar element with the possibility of transmitting only normal force.
Owing to its geometrical characteristics, the reinforcement calls for the input of the cross-
sectional stiffness taken per 1 m (foot) run of its width. The user should contact the
manufacturer for this information.
In subsequent stages the reinforcement cannot be edited - it can be only removed.
Reinforcement input
The program allows us to consider the reinforcement also in compression - by default however,
the part of reinforcement found in compression is disabled for the analysis. This state is
simulated in the figure showing the distribution of normal tensile forces over active parts of
individual reinforcements. The compressive part of the reinforcement is temporarily
excluded from the analysis. Similar to anchors, however, it can be automatically activated
once loaded again in tension.
-958-
Tensile stress in reinforcements
Anchoring Geo-Reinforcements
When introducing the reinforcement into the soil body it is necessary to keep in mind a
sufficient anchorage of the reinforcement since the program does not check the
reinforcement against the shear failure. A sudden increase of the normal force as shown
in the figure suggests singularity in contact stresses and probable shear failure of the
reinforcement. From that point of view the displayed results are misleading and essentially
unrealistic.
In such a case, the reinforcement should be either removed from the analysis or ensure its
sufficient anchorage as plotted in the figure.
-959-
Insufficiently anchored reinforcement
Correctly anchored reinforcement
-960-
Axial Stiffness of Geosynthetics

Geosynthetics are tensile reinforcing elements (geotextiles, geogrids) defined by their starting
and end points and by the axial (normal) stiffness Jz [kN/m].
For nonwoven fabrics the axial stiffness is usually not considered since these elements
typically serve as separating layers. Woven geotextiles experience for small deformations
very low initial stiffness - in the small strain region (up to 5%) we encounter a considerable
increase of deformations under constant load.
When designing geotextiles this property must be taken into account. We thus recognize both
the long-term tension strength in dependence on partial reduction factors (reflecting
damage of elements caused by installation, creep behavior of geosynthetics, biological and
chemical effects) and initial normal stiffness in the small strain region in the interval of
0.5% to 2%.
To determine the minimum axial stiffness of georeinforcements it is possible to use the
following expression where for the strength corresponding to the selected strain we accept
maximally 10% deviation from a linear part of tension test:
where: Tz - tensile strength at x% strain [kN/m]

ε - x% strain (relative extension) according to EN ISO 10 31 [%]
Tmax - maximal tensile strength according to EN ISO 10 319 [kN/m]
εmax - maximal strain (relative extension) according to EN ISO 10 319 [%]
Suppliers and producers of geotextiles typically provide the value of tensile strength at 2 %
strain. The expression then becomes:
The minimal (initial) axial stiffness of geotextiles from a short-term experiment (load rate
according to EN ISO 10 319) for x-%-strain is given by:
where: ε - x%-strain (relative extension) according to EN ISO 10 319 [-]
The maximum (theoretically attainable) axial stiffness of geotextiles for a short-term axial
strength is determined as follows:
where: εmax - maximum strain (relative extension) according to EN ISO 10 319 [-]
Intervals of recommended of values of axial (normal) stiffnesses of geosynthetics Jz [kN/m] are

listed in the following table:
Variable Initial axial Theoretical

description stiffness of (maximal) axial
geotextiles for stiffness of
-961-
ε = 2% geotextile
Notation (unit) Jε=x [kN/m] Jεmax [kN/m]
Georeinforcement --- ---

s category
Non-woven - -
geotextiles
Woven geotextiles 250 ÷ 500 1000
Unaxial geogrids 500 ÷ 1000 1500
Biaxial geogrids 100 ÷ 500 2500

for ε = 0.5%
Triaxial geogrids 250 ÷ 500 5000

for ε = 0.5%
Geomats 100 ÷ 500 1000
Drainage - -
geocomposites
Composites 100 ÷ 500 1500
Geomeshes - -
Geocells - -
Literature:
GEOMAT ltd. (www.geomat.cz): Types of geotextiles and their function in civil engineering
structures. Author: Martin Kašpar ([email protected]). In Czech.
HOLÝ, O., MIČA, L.: Determination of axial stiffness of geosynthetics for numerical modeling -
part 1. TU Brno (paper in conference proceedings „Civil engineering structures in view of
geomechanics“). In Czech.
EN ISO 10 319 (80 6125): Geotextiles - Tensile test on a wide strip. Czech standard institute,
2009. In Czech.
Surcharge
The frame "Surcharge" contains a table with the list of surcharges. Adding surcharge is
performed in the "New surcharge" dialog window. The input surcharges can also be edited on
the desktop with the help of active objects. The program employs the following coordinate
systems.
All input parameters of the surcharge can be modified in the stage of construction, in which the
surcharge was introduced. In subsequent stages it is only possible to modify its magnitude
(option "Adjust magnitude").
This frame serves to introduce surcharges applied only to the soil body. The surcharge
-962-
applied to a beam element is introduced in the frame - beam load.

An arbitrary number of surcharges can be specified in individual stages. The surcharge may act
either on the existing interface (including ground surface) or can be applied anywhere in
the soil body.
In subsequent stages we are free to either remove the input surcharge or to modify its
magnitude.
Note that applying the surcharge directly on the ground surface may lead to excessive
plastic deformations in the vicinity of the surcharge and the analysis may fail to converge.
In such a case, one may either place a beam element under the applied surcharge, or to
choose an elastic or modified elastic material model for the soil below the surcharge.
Frame "Surcharge"
-963-
Dialog window "New surcharges"
Elastic Regions
Frame "Elastic regions" contains table of defined elastic regions.
Input of elastic regions is identical to standard input of interfaces.
When loaded by stress reaching yield point the soil exhibits deformation which pertains also
after unloading. This persistent deformation is termed plastic strain and can be modeled by
standard models such as the Mohr-Coulomb or Drucker-Prager models or by the advanced
models such as the Cam clay.
When we want to suppress the evolution of plastic strain in chosen area and construction stage
we can use the "Elastic regions" feature. Elastic regions are specified in given stage by a
polygon. Each element that - at least partially - falls within this region allows for elastic strains
only.
-964-
Frame "Elastic regions"

Elastic regions affect only the behavior of:
• Mohr-Coulomb model
• Modified Mohr-Coulomb model
• Drucker-Prager model
The behavior of other material models remains unaffected.
Beam Loads
The frame "Beam loads" contains a table with the list of loads. Adding beam loads is
performed in the "New beam loads" dialog window.
The input loads can also be edited on the desktop with the help of active objects. The program
All input parameters of the load can be modified in the stage of construction, in which the load
was introduced. In subsequent stages it is only possible to modify its magnitude (option
"Adjust magnitude").
-965-
Frame "Beam loads"
Dialog window "New beam loads"
-966-
Water
There are three options in the program to introduce ground water:
• The ground water table can be specified as a continuous interface below and above the
ground surface. In such a case, the program automatically adjusts the soil self-weight
below the ground water table.
• The pore pressure values are entered via isoline. Input is the same as interface input.
The pore pressure values are inserted into the table "List of interfaces" in the left bottom
part of the screen. The values between isolines follow from linear interpolation.
• The pore pressure coefficient ru represents the ration between pore pressure and the
geostatic stress in the soil. The values of the coefficient ru are specified for individual
isolines. The first isoline always coincides with the ground surface. The remaining isolines
are introduced in the same way as interfaces between individual soil layers. The values are
inserted into the table "List of interfaces" in the left bottom part of the screen. The values
between isolines follow from linear interpolation.
When entering the values of pore pressure or the values coefficients ru the unit weight of soil
is assumed in the whole body to be equal to the unit weight γ regardless of the values of
pore pressures or coefficients ru.
The simplest way to check the input of water is to plot the distribution of pore pressure in the
output window.
Visualization of pore pressure
-967-
Analysis
The analysis is performed for individual calculation stages in the frame "Analysis" after
pressing the "Analyze" button.
During analysis the program attempts to arrive at such a solution that satisfies for given load
and boundary conditions the global equilibrium. In most cases this step results into an
iterative process. The process of iteration and convergence of the solution is displayed on the
screen.
The analysis can be stopped any time by pressing the "Interrupt" button. The results are
then available for the last converged load increment.
The correct results are obtained when 100% of the applied load is reached. Due to
convergence failure the program may stop before reaching the desired load level - only a
fraction of the total applied load is reached. In such a case it is possible to adjust standard
parameters of the analysis setting.
When modeling more complex engineering tasks we encourage the user to follow the
recommended modeling procedure.
The transient flow analysis can be selected in the frame "Settings".
The analysis results together with information about the course of analysis appear on the
screen immediately after completing the analysis.
Detailed information about the actual modeling approach is presented in section "Setting and
analysis description". Visualization of results can be adjusted in the frame "Drawing Settings".
In case of considering water in analysis, in most cases there's a possibility to copy analyzed
GWT to GeoClipboard and paste it into another program.
-968-
Screen after completing analysis
Transient Flow Analysis

The actual analysis proceeds in two and more stages ("Water flow"), where the first stage
serves to set the initial conditions, i.e. the distribution of initial pore pressure, initial pressure
head, degree of saturation and relative permeability at the onset of transient flow analysis.
Several options are available to set the initial pore pressure:
• With the help of ground water table
• Directly with the help of pore pressure interfaces
• Running the steady state flow analysis
The first option assumes a hydrostatic (linear) distribution of pore pressure over the height.
Below GWT the program generates positive pore pressures, whereas above GWT the negative
pore pressures (suction) are generated. The second option allows for considering a dry soil by
prescribing e.g. negative pore pressures over the entire infiltrated region. The third option
requires running the steady state analysis. Based on the assigned material model the program
then determines the initial degree of saturation and relative permeability as a function of the
initial pore pressure. Figure 1 shows the distribution of initial pore pressure provided by steady
state analysis for the assumed hydraulic conditions. Clearly, only the pressures below GTW are
presented. The initial state in an unsaturated or partially saturated region can be partially
judged by plotting for example the distribution of initial degree of saturation as seen in Figure
2. When selecting the "No water" option the initial pore pressure values are set equal to zero.
Figure 1 - First calculation stage: Distribution of initial pore pressure
-969-
Figure 2 - First stage: Distribution of initial degree of saturation

The transient flow analysis is performed from the second stage on where the next stage
follows the preceding one. Each stage requires setting the analysis time, time dependent
variation of boundary (hydraulic) conditions and the time step length. The current version of
the program allows us to either introduce the entire load at once at the beginning of the
calculation stage or to assume that it linearly increases with time during the course of stage
calculation ("Water flow"). In the first case the initial time step is set to 1/10 of the assigned
time step. Next, the calculation continues with the assigned time step. It is reasonable to
adjust the time step during the course of analysis. A shorter time step is recommended at the
beginning of the analysis. With longer times, when the solution approaches the steady state
conditions, the time step can be increased considerably (e.g. from 1/10 of day up to several
days). Figures 3 and 4 display an intermediate state and a steady state solution, respectively,
corresponding to a sudden increase of GWT in the second calculation stage. Figures 5 and 6
show similar states associated with a subsequent rapid drawdown simulated by resetting the
original level of GWT at the seventh calculation stage.
-970-
Figure 3 - Second calculation stage: Distribution of pore pressure at a given time of analysis
-971-
Figure 4 - Sixth calculation stage: Distribution of steady state pore pressure
-972-
Figure 5 - Seventh calculation stage: Distribution of pore pressure at a given time of analysis
-973-
Figure 6 - Eighth calculation stage: Distribution of steady state pore pressure
Recommended Modeling Procedure

Solving geotechnical problems using the finite element method is a relatively complex task.
But yet, most users attempt to analyze the entire complex structure right from the beginning -
to find the cause of possible loss of convergence may then become rather difficult. We
therefore recommend the following approach:
1) Define the whole topology of the structure
2) Assume elastic response of soils and contact elements (use linear models)
3) Generate coarse mesh
4) Define all calculation stages
5) Perform analysis of all calculation stages (it is sufficient to launch the analysis of the last
stage of construction - analyses of all previous stages are carried out automatically).
6) Asses the course of analysis
If the analysis fails, the computational model is not correctly defined - e.g. beams have too
many internal hinges resulting into a kinematically undetermined structure, props are not
properly hooked to the structure, etc. The program contains a number of built-in checking
procedures to warn the user for possible drawbacks in the model definition. Some of the
errors, however, cannot be disclosed prior to running the program.
If all stages were successfully analyzed, we recommend the user to check the resulting
displacements and this way also the objectivity of the used soil parameters and structure
stiffness. Note that using nonlinear models always results into larger displacements in
-974-
comparison to the pure elastic response - should the elastic displacements be already
excessively large, we must first adjust the computational model before adopting any of the
available plasticity models.
If the analysis succeeded and the displacements are reasonable, we may proceed as follows:
7) Replace linear models with suitable plastic models (Mohr-Coulomb, Drucker-Prager)
8) Perform analysis and evaluate the results according to step 6
9) Add nonlinear contact elements
10) Perform analysis and evaluate the results according to step 6
11) Refine and adjust the finite element mesh and perform the final analysis.
Although this approach may seem rather cumbersome and complicated, it may save a
considerable amount of time when searching for the cause of failure (loss of convergence) of
the analysis of complex problems.
Loss of Convergence of Nonlinear Analysis

Loss of convergence of the solution of nonlinear analysis calls for certain modifications of the
underlying computational model - the following steps can be adopted:
• Increase the stiffness of the structure
• Decrease the applied loads
• Split the soil excavation in more steps
• Improve material parameters of existing soils
• Change material model of soils in places of plasticity
• Add reinforcing members (beams, anchors)
• Add supports
• Change parameters settings affecting the iteration process (increase number of
iterations).
Distribution of plastic strains may provide some explanation to why the analysis failed to
converge. Note that the distribution of equivalent plastic strain locates the regions of probable
evolution of critical failure surfaces.
-975-
Analysis failed to converge - plot of equivalent plastic strain
Settings and Analysis Description

The default settings of parameters that drive the solution analysis are optimized to
ensure sufficient accuracy and efficiency of the analysis. Nevertheless, an experienced user
may require to change the default setting, or to examine the influence of parameters on the
accuracy and course of the analysis. The parameters setting can be adjusted in the "Analysis
settings" dialog window.
However, the change of standard setting deserves a word of caution. Prior to making any
changes, the user should be well aware of possible consequences. In particular, improper
setting may substantially slow down the computation process, may cause divergence and
eventually lead to incorrect results.
• Solution method
• Change of stiffness matrix
• Initial solution step
• Maximum number of iterations
• Convergence criterion
• Newton-Raphson method setting
• Arc-length method setting
• Line search method
• Plasticity
-976-
The default setting can be always recovered by pressing the "Standard" button.
Solution Method
The program FEM serves to analyze geotechnical problems characterized by nonlinear response
of the soil or rock body. A successful analysis of most of such problems calls for an iterative
solution of a given boundary value problem. Applying the finite element method (FEM) then
leads to an incremental form of the equilibrium conditions written as:
where: ΚΤ - instantaneous stiffness matrix

Δu - vector of nodal displacement increments
Δf - vector of out-of-balance force increments
This equation can be solved only approximately using a suitable numerical method. The goal of
the method is to arrive, during the process of iteration, at such a state of stress and strain that
satisfies the condition Δf = 0. To that end, the program offers two basic methods:
1. Newton-Raphson method - NRM
2. Arc-length method - ALM
Analysis settings - setting the solution method
Change of Stiffness Matrix

The full Newton-Raphson method assumes that the instantaneous tangent stiffness matrix
-977-
is formed at the beginning of each new iteration.

Forming a new tangent stiffness matrix only at the beginning of a new load increment leads to
so-called modified Newton-Raphson method.
If the stiffness matrix is formed only once at the beginning of the solution analysis we obtain
so called initial stress method.
Individual methods can be selected from the "Analysis settings" dialog window section
"Stiffness update". The corresponding settings are:
1. Keep elastic - initial stress method,
2. Each iteration - full Newton-Raphson method,
3. Each load step - modified Newton-Raphson method.
The default setting assumes the full Newton-Raphson algorithm (stiffness update after each
iteration). Note that the formulation of stiffness matrix is consistent with the stress update
algorithm. Such a formulation then ensures quadratic convergence of the full Newton-Raphson
(NRM) unlike the modified NRM or the initial stress method that, in comparison with the full
NRM, require considerably more interactions to attain equilibrium.
On the other hand, it is fair to mention that the computational cost per iteration is mainly
determined by the calculation and factorization of the tangent stiffness matrix. Assuming
elastic response of a structure it is clearly meaningless to set up the structural stiffness matrix
more then once (stiffness update - keep elastic). On the contrary, increasing the degree of
nonlinearity suggests more frequent stiffness reformulations (stiffness update - Each iteration).
Newton-Raphson method - stiffness matrix update options
-978-
Initial Solution Step

The actual analysis is carried out incrementally in several load steps until the overall prescribed
load is reached.
The program requires setting the initial load step only.
This parameter represents the ratio between the load applied in a given load step to the
overall prescribed load. Depending on the course of iteration this parameter is adaptively
adjusted.
The default setting assumes 25% of the total prescribed load. Similarly to what we have
already mentioned it holds that increasing the solution complexity from the nonlinear response
point of view requires reduction of this parameter. However, in the case of elastic response
this parameter can be set equal to 1, which corresponds to the solution of a given problem in
one load step.
Maximum Number of Iterations

This parameter represents the maximum number of iterations allowed for a single load
step to reach the state of equilibrium.
Exceeding this value prompts the program to automatically reduce the current value of the
assumed load step and restarts the solution from the last load level that complies with the
state of equilibrium. Similar action is taken when oscillation or divergence of the program is
imminent.
Convergence Criterion
For the incremental solution strategy based on one of the iterative methods to be effective, it
is necessary to select suitable criteria (preset tolerances for reaching equilibrium) for the
termination of the iteration process.
Note that loose convergence criteria may result in inaccurate results while too tight
convergence tolerances may lead to unjustified increase of computational cost spent to arrive
at the results of superfluous accuracy.
In the program the convergence is checked against the change of nodal displacement
increments, the change of out-of-balanced forces and also the change of internal energy. The
last criterion gives a certain idea about how both displacements and forces approach their
equilibrium values. The corresponding settings are:
1. Displacement error tolerance - tolerance for the change of displacement increment
norm.
2. Out-of-balanced forces tolerance - tolerance for the change of out-of-balance force
norm.
3. Energy error tolerance - tolerance of the change of internal energy.
The default setting is 0.01 for all convergence tolerances.
Setting Newton-Raphson Method

With the Newton-Raphson method the course of iteration can be driven by setting the following
parameters:
1) Relaxation factor - it represents the value of reduction of the current load step for the
restart providing the solution fails to converge. A new value of the assumed load step is found
-979-
from the expression:

new load step = old load step / relaxation factor.
2) Max. No. of relaxations for a single load step - this parameter determines how many
times it is possible to invoke the above action during the entire analysis. Exceeding this value
prompts the program to terminate the analysis. The results are then available for the last
successfully converged load level.
3) Min. No. of iterations for a single load step - this parameter allows for possible
acceleration of the analysis. In particular, providing the number of iterations to converge in the
last load step is less than the minimum one set, the load step for a new load increment is
increased as follows:
new load step = old load step * relaxation factor.
The default setting of the above parameters corresponds to values displayed in the figure:
Parameters driving the iteration process
Setting Arc-Length Method

The Arc-length method (ALM) is relatively robust method particularly suitable for the solution
of problems that require the search for the collapse load of a structure. Stability analysis of
earth structures (slopes, embankments) is just one particular example of such a task. Unlike
the NRM where the solution is driven purely by prescribing load increments, the ALM
introduces an additional parameter representing a certain constraint on the value of load
increment in a given load step. The value of the load step thus depends on the course of
iteration and is directly related to the selected arc length.
The basic assumption of the method is that the prescribed load varies proportionally during the
calculation. This means that a particular level of the applied load can be expressed as:
-980-
where: F - current fraction of the total applied load

λ - coefficient of proportionality
F - overall prescribed load
Note that with ALM the load vector F represents only a certain reference load that is kept
constant during the whole response calculation. The actual value of the load at the end of
calculation is equal to the λ multiple of F; λ < 1 represents the state when the actual bearing
capacity of a structure is less than the prescribed reference load; if λ at the end of response
calculation exceeds 1, the program automatically adjusts the arc length in order for the
solution to converge to value λ = 1 within a selected tolerance equal to 0.01 (1 % the maximum
applied load). This value cannot be changed.
The literature offers a number of ALM formulations. The program supports the method
suggested by Crisfield and the consistently linearized method proposed by Ramm. The latter
one is considerably simple, at least from the formulation point of view, than the Crisfield
method. On the other hand it is reportedly less robust. The default setting is the Crisfield
method.
Other important parameters of the method are "Setting arc length" and "Automatic arc length
control".
Arc-length - setting the type of Arc-length method
Setting Arc Length

The arc length is the basic parameter affecting the response calculation. An indicator for the
-981-
selection of arc length can be the course of iteration in the previous solution stage. Regardless
of that the program enables the following setting:
1. Determine from load step - the arc length is determined automatically from the
initial load step.
2. Adopt from the previous stage - the value of arc length at the end of the previous
calculation stage is used as a starting value for a new stage. This option becomes active
in the second stage of construction.
3. Input - the value of arc length can be directly prescribed.
Providing the structure response cannot be determined prior we recommend using the first
option. Depending on the course of calculation it is possible to adjust the value of arc length
and repeat the calculation. At no event, however, is it possible to ensure convergence for an
arbitrary value of arc length selected. Similarly to NRM, if the convergence problems occur the
program allows for the reduction of the current arc length and restarts the calculation.
The next parameter driving the iteration process is the Maximum No. of load steps. The
program always carries on the prescribed number of load steps providing:
• parameter λ exceeds 1,
• the maximum number of relaxations of arc length is exceeded.
Providing the analysis is terminated due to exceeding the maximum number of prescribed load
steps and parameter λ is less than 1, it is necessary to increase the number of steps and
restart the analysis.
Arc-length - arc length setting
-982-
Automatic Arc Length Control

Automatic arc length control strategy constitutes very important part of implementation of any
numerical method. The program makes it possible to adaptively adjust the current arc length
for a new load step depending on the course of iteration in the previous step by activating
option Optimize. The program will then attempt to select a value of arc length that keeps the
desired number of iterations in each load step needed for convergence - option Optim. No. of
iter. in a single load step.
The next parameter driving the process of iteration is the Ratio load/displacement. This
parameter represents a scalar factor, which adjusts the scales of load given by parameter λ
and displacement vector u. providing this parameter is sufficiently large the analysis is
essentially driven by load increment. Setting this parameter equal to 0 (default setting) we
obtain so-called cylindrical ALM and the analysis will be driven by displacement increment. This
approach is more stable and recommended by the authors. Nevertheless, the program allows
for optimization of this parameter by activating the option "Optimize". In such a case the
current value of this parameter is set equal to the Bergan current stiffness parameter that
provides a scalar measure of the degree of nonlinearity. With increasing the degree of
nonlinearity this parameter is decreasing. In the vicinity of collapse load the value of this
parameter approaches zero and the solution is driven by displacement increment. This strategy
thus supports the use of cylindrical method having the Ratio load/displacement parameter
equal to zero. As for the default setting this option is turned off.
Arc-length - automatic arc length control
Line Search Method

The basic goal of the Line search method is to determine a scalar multiplier η that is used to
scale the current displacement increment so that the equilibrium is satisfied in a given
-983-
direction. The actual displacement vector at the end of the i-th iteration thus becomes:
Consequently, the calculation process is either accelerated, η > 1, or damped, η < 1. Obviously,
with the Line search performed each iteration, the expense of the iteration increases. On the
other hand, this drawback is compensated by less number of iterations needed for
convergence and by the possibility of avoiding divergence or oscillation of the process of
iteration. By default the use of the Line search is enabled.
An inexperienced user is recommended to employ the default setting evident from the figure.
Line search method settings
Plasticity
The Plasticity dialog window serves to set parameters driving the stress update procedure.
The parameter Return to yield surface tolerance suggests the tolerance for satisfying the
selected yield condition. Assuming nonlinear hardening/softening as in the case of modified
cam clay model the stress return mapping requires an iteration process.
The maximum number of iterations allowed is then given by the Max. No. of iterations for a
single plastic step parameter. When employing the rigid-plastic version of the Mohr-
Coulomb, the Drucker-Prager or the modified Mohr-Coulomb model, these parameters will not
apply.
The default setting, evident in the figure, is recommended.
-984-
Parameters driving the stress return mapping
Course of Analysis
The course of analysis can be viewed in the bottom part of the screen.
An elastic analysis is completed in one computational step. A nonlinear analysis is
performed in several steps - the external load is gradually increased in several load
(calculation) steps. The analysis is completed successfully if there is no loss of overall
convergence so that 100 percent of the required load is reached.
The default setting of parameters that drive the solution analysis is optimized to ensure
sufficient accuracy and efficiency of the analysis. Nevertheless, an experienced user may
require to change the default setting, or to examine the influence of parameters on the
accuracy and course of the analysis. The parameters setting can be adjusted in the "Settings
and analysis description" dialog window:
• The Percent of the applied load parameter gives percentage of the overall load
(excepted value) at the end of the current load step assuming successful convergence for
the current load step.
• The Step size parameter provides the current scaling factor for the determination of load
increment in the current load step.
• The Safety factor parameter corresponds to the expected value of the safety factor
assuming successful convergence for given parameters c, φ.
The course of iteration within a given load step is characterized by the change of convergence
parameters:
• η - Line search method parameter
-985-
• change of the displacement increment norm

• change of the out-of-balance force norm
• change of internal energy
If all three errors are smaller than the preset error tolerance (can be edited in "Settings"
dialog window), the analysis is for the calculation step terminated.
The "Interrupt" button serves to terminate the calculation process. The results are then
available for the last load level that complies with the state of equilibrium.
Course of analysis
Results
Visualization (plotting) of results is one of the most important features of the program. The
program allows us to select from several basic styles of graphical outputs, which are defined in
the "Drawing settings : Analysis" dialog window.
• draw deformed mesh
• surface plot of variables developed inside the soil / rock body (the total values or their
increments with respect to other calculation stage can be displayed)
• internal forces distributed along beams, contacts
• forces in anchors and reaction forces
• depression curve
• tilted sections of variables
• vectors and directions of variables
To display results the program employs the following coordinate systems.
The tool bar "Results" in the upper part of the screen serves to selected variables to be
displayed and the way they should appear on the screen. The color scheme is shown in the
right part of the desktop. Its particular setting can be adjusted using the "Color scheme" tool
bar.
Because properly setting outputs might be often time consuming, the program disposes of a
comfortable system of storing and managing various settings.
All outputs and selected results can be further printed out from the analysis protocol.
-986-
Results Tool Bar

The control bar contains the following operating elements:
Control bar "Setting visualization of graphical outputs"

Individual elements operate as follows:
Values in stages of • displays calculated values (either total or
analysis incremental values with respect to the
selected stage of construction can be seen)
Variable type • displays the selected variable
Surface plot • turns on/off plotting of isolines, isosurfaces
Mesh • turns on/off the style of plotting the FE mesh

(only edges, or according to the setting in the
"Drawing settings : Analysis" dialog window
Displacements plot • selects the style of plotting deformed mesh -
undeformed/deformed (deformed by the
magnitude, deformed by the coefficient)
The tool bar contains the most often used operating elements needed to view the results
on the desktop. Detailed setting of the style of plotting the results is available in the "Drawing
Settings : Analysis" frame.
Similar to our other programs the results can be saved and printed. The plotting style can be
adjusted in the "Drawing Settings" frame.
Drawing Settings : Analysis

The "Drawing settings : Analysis" dialog window serves to select the type of variable to be
displayed and the way it should appear on the screen. Individual settings can be later saved
using the "Saved views" tool bar.
The tab "Values in grid" serves to set the basic parameters driving the visualization of
surface variables and FE mesh - other tabs are used to define other types of outputs.
Frame "Drawing settings : Analysis" - tab "Values in grid"
-987-
Owing to the clarity of graphical presentation it is not possible to plot some of the results at
the same time. It is not possible to plot a deformed mesh together with distributions of
internal forces along beams - only one option must be selected. If an unacceptable
combination is selected, the displays a warning message in the bottom part of the dialog
window. The present example shows an unacceptable combination of deformed mesh/values in
mesh grid set on the control bar "Results tool bar".
Warning for conflict in plotting of results
List of Variables
The following variables can be displayed (values in the soil/rock body):
List of variables displayed by the program - basic variables
Notation Description Variabl Unit

e
Settlement Displacement in the Z direction dz [mm]

dZ
Settlement Displacement in the X direction dx [mm]

dX
Sigma Z, tot. Total normal stress in the Z direction σz,tot [kPa]
Sigma Z, eff. Effective normal stress in the Z direction σz,eff [kPa]
Pore Pore pressure u [kPa]

pressure u
Sigma X, tot. Total normal stress in the X direction σx,tot [kPa]
Sigma X, eff. Effective normal stress in the X direction σx,eff [kPa]
Tau X, Y. Shear stress τxz [kPa]
Epsilon eq. Equivalent strain εeq [-]
Epsilon eq., Equivalent plastic strain εeq,pl [-]
-988-
pl.
List of variables displayed by the program - variables available in the regime

"Advanced program options".
Notation Description Variabl Unit

e
Epsilon vol. Volumetric strain εvol. [-]
Sigma m, tot. Mean total normal stress σm,tot [kPa]
Sigma m, eff. Mean total normal stress σm,eff [kPa]
Sigma eq. Equivalent deviatoric stress J [kPa]
Epsilon vol., Volumetric plastic strain εvol.pl [-]

pl.
Epsilon X Normal strain in the X direction εx [-]
Epsilon Z Normal strain in the X direction εz [-]
Gama XZ Shear strain in the XZ plane γxz
Epsilon 1, Maximal principal strain ε1,princ [-]

princ.
Epsilon 2, Intermediate principal strain ε2,princ [-]

princ.
Epsilon 3, Minimal principal strain ε3,princ [-]

princ.
Sigma 1, Maximal principal stress σ1,princ [kPa]

princ.
Sigma 2, Intermediate principal stress σ2,princ [kPa]

princ.
Sigma 3, Minimal principal stress σ3,princ [kPa]

princ.
Epsilon X, pl. Normal plastic strain in the X direction εx,pl [-]
Epsilon Z, pl Normal plastic strain in the Z direction εz,pl [-]
Gama XZ, pl. Shear plastic strain in the XZ plane γxz,pl
-989-
Monitors
The frame "Monitors" contains a table with the list of input monitors. Adding monitors is
performed in the "New monitors" dialog window. Either point or line-monitors can be
introduced. The dialog window then serves to specify coordinates of the monitor and monitor
activity.
The monitors can also be edited on the desktop with the help of active objects.
The program allows for inputting an arbitrary number of point and line-monitors anywhere in
the structure and also out of it. Monitors have several functions:
• displaying values of variables in a given point (point-monitor),
• displaying values of the difference of distance of two points in comparison with the
previous stage d[N] or in comparison with the input stage, where N is the stage number
(line-monitor).
The point monitors store also the values of variables recorded during the analysis in individual
stages. These can be written into an output protocol or used to create graphs.
The list of variables plotted for individual monitors is set in the "Monitor settings" dialog
window. To open the window use the "Settings" button in the horizontal tool bar "Monitors".
Frame "Monitors"
Monitors Settings
The "Monitor settings" dialog window serves to set variables whose values will be plotted for
a given monitor (point-monitors). Setting for a given list of variables can be adopted from the
previous stage of construction using the "Adopt from the previous stage" button. Four
variables are displayed by default. Additional variables can be added to the list using the "Add"
button. The variable can be removed from the list using the "Remove" button.
-990-
For line-monitors the dialog window serves to activate the plot of values in comparison with
the previous stage or the input stage, respectively.
For both point and line-monitors it is possible to specify the color range of plotted values.
Dialog window "Monitors settings"
Graphs
The frame "Graphs" contains a table with the list of input graphs. Adding (editing) monitors is
performed in the "New graphs" dialog window. The dialog window serves to enter the monitor
number for which the graph will be created and the variables adopted for the X and Y-axis
respectively.
The graphs can also be edited on the desktop with the help of active objects.
The program allows for inputting an arbitrary number of graphs at points of input monitors.
Graphs allow for plotting a mutual dependence of individual variables stored in monitors during
the course of analysis.
-991-
Frame "Graphs"
Stability
In stability (safety factor) analysis the program reduces the original strength parameters
- angle of internal friction and cohesion - until failure occurs. The analysis then results into a
factor of safety that corresponds to the classical methods of limit equilibrium.
The safety factor analysis requires using six-node elements. Since plastic slip is the main
failure mechanism we also require that the Mohr-Coulomb, the modified Mohr-Coulomb or the
Drucker-Prager plasticity model be used for all soils. Default setting can be adjusted in the
"Analysis settings" dialog window.
In the stability analysis mode the only variables available for graphical representation are
displacements (in the Z and X-directions) and equivalent total and plastic strains. The
deformation of a soil body corresponds to the state of failure attained for the reduced soil
parameters - therefore, it does not correspond to real state of deformation of the soil body.
Instead, it provides a good insight about the entire slope response of earth structure in general
at the onset of failure.
A suitable way of presenting the stability analysis results are vectors of displacements
plotted together with the equivalent plastic strain. The localized plastic deformation
provides visible evidence about the possible location of the critical slip surface.
The program allows to analyse a slope stability according to theory of limit state or EN1997-1,
design approach 3. In the frame we enter partial factor on internal friction γM,ϕ and partial
factor on effective cohesion γM,c, which reduce soil parameters. If we use reduction
according to EN 1997 (γM,ϕ = 1,25, γM,c = 1,25), the slope is satisfactory for FS=1,00.
-992-
Frame "Stability"
-993-
Plot of equivalent plastic strain - slip surface
Setting Basic Parameters of Slope Stability Analysis

The safety factor analysis is based on the assumption that the total load applied to the
soil/rock body is introduced in a single load step. The actual factor of safety is evaluated using
the method of reduction of strength parameters c, φ. Regarding this the factor of safety is
defined as a scalar multiplier that reduces the original parameters c, φ to arrive at the state of
failure.
Mathematically, the factor of safety is expressed as:
where: φ
original -the original value of the angle of internal friction
φ
failure -the value of the angle of internal friction at failure
Searching for the critical value of the factor of safety requires a systematic modification
(reduction) of strength parameters c, φ leading to failure. In the framework of the NRM the
state of failure is determined as the state for which the solution fails to converge. The process
of searching for critical c, φ is driven by the following parameters.
1. Reduction - reduction factor (scalar multiplier) to reduce parameters c, φ. During the
course of analysis this parameter is progressively updated.
-994-
2. Min. reduction factor - the limit value, below which the value of reduction factor
should not fall during the searching process. This parameter ensures that the
computation will not continue for needless low values of the reduction factor. It is one of
the parameters to terminate the searching process.
3. Reduction of soil parameters - this parameter allows us to define which of the
parameters c, φ should be reduced. The default setting assumes that both parameters
are reduced at the same time.
Basic parameters of slope stability analysis
Setting Driving Parameters of Relaxation of Reduction

Factor
Similar to standard analysis the program adaptively adjusts the value of reduction factor.
Providing the solution fails to converge for a given set of parameters c, φ, the reduction factor
is relaxed and the analysis is restarted. This approach is driven by the parameters set in the
"Analysis settings" - tab Newton Raphson.
The "Relaxation factor" serves to reduce the current value of the Reduction factor of
parameters c, φ. The analysis is terminated once the value of reduction factor drops below the
minimum one or the maximum number of allowable reductions is exceeded. When selecting
the NRM the program allows us to determine the parameters c, φ which bring a soil body to a
stable state in cases, where the solution with the original parameters c, φ was not found. The
program then precedes in the opposite way so that parameters c, φ are systematically
increased until the stable solution is found.
-995-
Parameters driving the process of reduction of strength parameters c, φ
No Reduction Regions
Frame "No Reduction Regions" contains table of defined regions where the strength
parameters are not reduced during stability analysis.
Input of the regions is identical to standard input of interfaces.
In stability analysis we can define regions in which the strength parameters phi a c are not
reduced. The regions without reduction are input in chosen construction stage by a polygonal
boundary. The reduction of strength parameters is prevented in every finite element that is - at
least partially - positioned within the region.
The regions without reduction of strength parameters are helpful in situations where the
stability analysis does not lead to global shear surface and the failure kinematics together with
the value of factor of safety is unreliable.
The feature is applicable to all material models admissible in stability analysis, i.e.
• Mohr-Coulomb
• Modified Mohr-Coulomb
• Drucker-Prager
Other material models are not allowed in stability analysis.
Earthquake
-996-
For the reason of successful converged analysis it is necessary to define an area, where the
slip surface is predicted. In this area the horizontal and vertical acceleration acts on all finite
elements (see picture). The finite elements outside this area are not affected by the
earthquake. This area should not touch the edges of the task, otherwise analysis does not
have to find a solution.
The frame contains a table with a list of entered points. Input of regions is identical to
standard input of interfaces.
If not provided by measurements, the coefficients kh and kv can be calculated following the
Frame "Earthquake"
Outputs
This chapter describes the work with outputs (export document, printing pictures) in GEO5
programs using the toolbar "Outputs".
GEO5 programs allows to create output document with saved pictures from any mode of
input or analyses. The pictures can be printed or exported too.
• Print and Export Document
• Print and Export Desktop View
Work with pictures is described on pages:
-997-
• Adding Pictures
• List of Pictures
Page properties can be defined in each output document:

• Settings Header and Footer
• Page Properties
• Page Numbering
The information about the company can be input and print in output document:
• About the Company
Adding Pictures
The program allows to store the current picture in all modes. Press the "Add picture" button
on the vertical control bar "Outputs". This opens the "New picture" dialog window and inserts
the current view on the desktop into the window.
The picture is always linked to a certain input mode or analysis. (The current mode is displayed
next to the picture name). When printing a document the picture is automatically added to a
specific mode in the tree.
The program allows to define the picture either for a specific stage of construction (or for the
current analysis) or adjusting the setting such that the picture is added to the document in all
stages of construction (or all analyses). The latter option is assumed when selecting "all" in
the "Stages" combo list (or "Analysis" list).
Checkbox "Whole page picture" allows to use whole page picture in the document.
Warning: All input pictures are automatically regenerated whenever modifying data.
The "Picture settings" frame in bottom part of the dialog window further allows to adjust
colors and style of lines (object) drawing. Settings in this part of the frame is taken from the
drawing settings for the desktop. The function of the frame is the same as the desktop
visualization settings and is described in "Drawing Settings".
The "OK" button stores the picture into the "Picture list". It can then be opened and modified
at any time.
The picture can also be printed out from this window by pressing the "Print" button, which
opens a dialog window for printing and exporting desktop view. If the picture is active over all
stages (or all analyses), then all possible combinations of pictures are printed all at once.
-998-
Dialog window "New picture"
-999-
Tool bar "Outputs"
List of Pictures
Stored pictures by the "New picture" dialog window are ordered in the table in a "List of
pictures". The "List of pictures" dialog window is opened using the button on the vertical
control bar "Outputs". The table of the list of pictures contains the picture name and
description, the mode in which it was created and stage of construction or the analysis number.
Individual pictures can be edited using the "Modify" button, which opens the "Edit picture"
dialog window (this window corresponds to the "New picture" dialog window both in the way it
looks and the way it functions).
These pictures can be printed out from the window by pressing the "Print" button that opens a
dialog window for printing and exporting desktop view. Providing the picture is active over all
stages of construction (over all analyses, respectively) then the program prints all possible
combinations of the picture. If more pictures are selected then all are printed out.
-1000-
Dialog window "List of pictures"
-1001-
Tool bar "Outputs"
Print and Export Document

The "Print and export document" dialog window can be opened either from the control
menu (items "Files", "Print document") or using the "Outputs" button on the control bar. The
page print preview with a generated text appears in the window.
This window generates the output document including pictures stored in the "Picture list". The
document is always up to date - the program creates the document again based on input
data (even with regenerated pictures) whenever opening this window.
The dialog window contains its own Control bar - Print and Export with buttons used when
customizing the apperance of the pages (header and footer definition, page properties, page
numbering), print and export of the document.
Only specific parts of the document including pictures can be generated by checking the
corresponding "tree" item in the left part of the window. Selecting or deselecting an arbitrary
item prompts the program to regenerate the document automatically. The mouse scroll wheel
or scroll bar on the right can also be used to view the document.
The button part of the dialog window displays current information (defined page size, current
document page and the total number of pages).
-1002-
Dialog window "Print and export document"
-1003-
Tool bar "Outputs"
Print and Export Desktop View

This dialog window allows to print and export one or more pictures. Three options are available
to open this window:
• Using the control menu (items "Files", "Print picture") or the button on the vertical
control bar "Outputs".
• Using the "New picture" dialog window by pressing the "Print" button.
• Using the "List of pictures" dialog window by pressing the "Print" button.
The window may contain more than one picture at the same time (when printing more
construction stages or analyses) when printing more pictures from the list. Each picture is
printed on a separate page. The picture preview can be adjusted by the buttons on the tool bar
or by mouse scroll wheel.
The dialog window contains its own Control bar - Print and Export. with buttons used when
customizing the apperance of the pages (header and footer definition, page properties, page
numbering), print and export of the document.
The bottom part of the dialog window displays current information (defined page size, current
document page and the total number of pages).
-1004-
Dialog window "Print and Export Desktop View"
-1005-
Tool bar "Outputs"
Control bar - Print and Export

The control bar of the "Print and export document" and "Print and export desktop view" dialog
windows contains the following control elements:
Control bar "Print and export"

Individual control elements function as follows:
Save Opens the "Save as" dialog window allowing to save the
file in formats *.PDF, *.RTF or *.TXT.
Print Opens the dialog window for "Print".
-1006-
Open and Edit Opens text editor (associated in the Windows system with
*.RTF extenison) that allows to edit the page manually.
Send Opens a dialog window for mail client and adds the picture
as an attachement in *.PDF format.
Color Style Determines the style of picture view (color, gray scale,
black & white).
Page Setup Opens the "Page setup" dialog window that allows to
specify the page style (size, edges, orientation).
Header and Opens the "Header and footer" dialog window that allows
Footer to input the document headers and footers.
Page Numbering Opens the "Page numbering" dialog window that allows to
input the document page numbering.
Note: The document can be scrolled using the mouse
wheel, or the slider in the right part of the window.
Copy Copies the selected picture (text) to clipboard -
parameters are set in the "Options" dialog window - tab
"Copy to clipboard".
Select All Selects all elements of the document (text and pictures).
Cancel selection Cancels entire selection (picture, text).
Note: It is possible to select any part of the document.

This is done by moving the mouse over the desired text
while keeping the left mouse button pressed.
Page width Fits the page to maximum width of the document dialog
window.
Two Pages Sets the size of the pages, so that two pages are displayed
in the dialog window.
One Page Modifies the page size such that the entire page in the
dialog window is visible.
More Pages Sets the size of the pages, so that more pages are
displayed in the dialog window.
Book Displays the document in a format of a book.
Note: Zooming any page of the document can be done

by holding CTRL and rotating the mouse wheel.
-1007-
Page Setup
The dialog window allows to set the page layout (paper format, print orientation and edges).
The "Default", selection "Save settings as default" option sets the page properties as
default for the newly created data. The assumed default setting is common for all our
programs. Different computer users may use different settings. Selection "Adopt default
settings" enables to adopt the default settings of the GEO5 programs to any opened task,
which had the settings different.
Dialog window "Page setup"
Setting Header and Footer

The dialog window allows to define properties of the document header and footer. The "print
header (footer)" check box determines whether to print the document header (footer).
Header and footer lines may contain an arbitrary text and inserted objects implicitly defined by
the program. These objects receive program information such as:
• From the "Company data" dialog window (company name, logo, address)
• From the "Project" frame (name and task description, author)
• From the document system data (date, time, page numbering)
Objects can be input using the "Insert" button (the button opens a list of objects). The button
is active only if the cursor is found in one of the line that allows to insert text (object). Inserted
objects are written in an internal format different from other text and placed in curly brackets.
The program allows to defin various headers for the first page or odd and even pages,
respectively. Individual headers are in such a case defined in separate tabs.
The "Default", selection "Save settings as default" option sets the input header and footer
parameters as default for the newly created data. The assumed default setting is common
for all our programs. Different computer users may use different settings. Selection "Adopt
default settings" enables to adopt the default settings of the GEO5 programs to any opened
task, which had the settings different.
Writing format and the resulting view are evident from the following pictures.
-1008-
Dialog window "Header and footer"
View of the document header and footer
Page Numbering
This dialog window allows to set page numbering. The combo list allows to define the
numbering style (Arabic digits, Roman digits, using symbols). A constant text can be placed
both in front and behind the page number. The "Numbering from" option allows to start the
-1009-
page numbering from an arbitrary number.

The "Default", selection "Save settings as default" option sets the input page numbering
properties as default for the newly created data. The assumed default setting is common
for all our programs. Different computer users may use different settings. Selection "Adopt
default settings" enables to adopt the default settings of the GEO5 programs to any opened
task, which had the settings different.
Dialog window "Page numbering"
About the Company

The dialog window is launched from the managing menu (items "Settings", "Company").
The "Basic data" tab allows to specify the basic information about the company. The input
data is used by the program when printing and exporting documents (pictures), in the
document header and footer.
The "Company logo" tab allows to load the company logo. The "Load" button opens a dialog
window which allows to open the picture in various formats (*.JPG, *.JPEG, *.JPE, *.BMP,
*.ICO, *.EMF, *.WMF).
The "Employees" tab allows to input a list of program users (employees). When filling the
name list it is no longer necessary fill the author's name in the frame "Project".
-1010-
Dialog window "About company" - tab "Basic data"
Dialog window "About company" - tab "Company logo"
-1011-
Dialog window "About company" - tab "Employees"
Theory
The theoretical part of the help contains all theoretical basis employed in computations within
GEO5 programs.
Stress in a Soil Body

Calculation of the stress in soil in our software is described in the following chapters:
• Geostatic stress in soil body, computation of uplift pressure
• Effective / total stress
• Stress increment due to surcharge
• Stress increment under footing
Geostatic Stress, Uplift Pressure

Stress analysis is based on the existence of soil layers specified by the user during input. The
program further inserts fictitious layers at the locations where the stress and lateral pressure
th
(GWT, points of construction, etc.) change. The normal stress in the i layer is computed
according to:
where: hi - thickness of the i

th
layer
-1012-
γi - unit weight of soil
If the layer is found below the ground water table, the unit weight of soil below the water
table is specified with the help of input parameters of the soil as follows:
• for option "Standard" from expression:
where: γsat - saturated unit weight of soil

- for option "Compute from porosity" from expression:
where: n - porosity
γs - specific weight of soil
where: V - volume of soil

Vp - volume of voids
Gd - weight of dry soil
3
Unit weight of water is assumed in the program equal to 10 kN/m or 0.00625 ksi.
Assuming inclined ground behind the structure (β ≠ 0) and layered subsoil the angle β, when
th
computingthe coefficient of earth pressure K, is reduced in the i layer using the following
expression:
where: γ - unit weight of the soil in the first layer under ground
γi - th
unit weight of the soil in the i layer under ground
Effective/Total Stress in a Soil

Vertical normal stress σz is defined as:
where: σz - vertical normal total stress

γef - submerged unit weight of soil
z - depth bellow the ground surface
-1013-
This expression in its generalized form describes so called concept of effective stress:
where: σ - total stress (overall)

σef - effective stress (active)
u - neutral stress (pore water pressure)
Total, effective and neutral stress in the soil

Effective stress concept is valid only for normal stress σ, since the shear stress τ is not
transferred by the water so that it is effective. The total stress is determined using the basic
tools of theoretical mechanics, the effective stress is then determined as a difference between
the total stress and neutral (pore) pressure (i.e. always by calculation, it can never be
measured). Pore pressures are determined using laboratory or in-situ testing or by calculation.
To decide whether to use the total or effective stresses is no simple. The following table may
provide some general recommendations valid for majority of cases. We should realize that the
total stress depends on the way the soil is loaded by its self weight and external effects. As for
the pore pressure we assume that for flowing pore water the pore equals to hydrodynamic
pressure and to hydrostatic pressure otherwise. For partial saturated soils with higher degree
of it is necessary to account for the fact that the pore pressure evolves both in water and air
bubbles.
Assume conditions Drained layer Undrained layer
short - term effective stress total stress
long - term effective stress effective stress
In layered subsoil with different unit weight of soils in individual horizontal layers the vertical
total stress is determined as a sum of weight of all layers above the investigated point and the
pore pressure:
where: σz - vertical normal total stress
-1014-

- unit weight of soil in natural state for soils above the GWT and dry layers
- unit weight of soil below water in other cases
d - depth of the ground water table below the ground surface
z - depth bellow the ground surface
Increment of Earth Pressure due to Surcharge

Earth pressure increment in a soil or rock body due to surcharge is computed using the theory
of elastic subspace (Boussinesq).
Earth pressure increment in the point inside the soil or rock body due to an infinite strip
surcharge is obtained from the following scheme:
Computation of earth pressure due to infinite strip surcharge
A trapezoidal surcharge is automatically subdivided in the program into ten segments.

Individual segments are treated as strip surcharges. The resulting earth pressure is a sum of
partial surcharges from individual segments.
Stress increment due to concentrated surcharge is computed as follows:
Surcharge related to point "O"
-1015-
where:
Increment of Earth Pressure under Footing

In the program "Spread footing", the stress distribution below foundation is determined by
combining the basic load diagrams:
Chart of foundation load
-1016-
Earth Pressures
GEO5 software considers following earth pressure categories:
• active earth pressure
• passive earth pressure
• earth pressure at rest
When computing earth pressures, the program allows to distinguish between effective and
total stress state and to establish several ways of calculation of uplift pressure. In addition, it
is possible to account for the following effects having on the earth pressure magnitude:
• influence of surcharge
• influence of water pressure
• influence of broken terrain
• friction between soil and back of structure
• adhesion of soil
• influence of earth wedge at cantilever jumps
• influence of earthquake
The following sign convention is used in the program, text and presented expressions.
When specifying rocks, it is also necessary to input both cohesion of rock c and the angle of
internal friction of rock φ. These values can be obtained either from a geological survey or from
the table of recommended values.
Sign Convention
The following sign convention is used in the program, text and presented expressions.
-1017-
Sign convention for calculation of earth pressures

• inclination of the ground surface β is positive, when the ground rises upwards from the
wall
• inclination of the back of structure α is positive, when the toe of the wall (at the back face)
is placed in the direction of the soil body when measured from the vertical line constructed
from the upper point of the structure
• friction between the soil and back of structure δ is positive, if the resultant of earth
pressure (thus also earth pressure) and normal to the back of structure form an angle
measured in the clockwise direction
Active Earth Pressure

Active earth pressure is the smallest limiting lateral pressure developed at the onset of shear
failure by wall moving away from the soil in the direction of the acting earth pressure (minimal
wall rotation necessary for the evolution of active earth pressure is about 2 mrad, i.e.
2 mm/mofthe wall height).
The following theories and approaches are implemented for the computation of active earth
pressure assuming effective stress state:
• The Mazindrani theory (Rankine)
• The Coulomb theory
• The Müller-Breslau theory
• The Caquot theory
• The Absi theory
For cohesive soils the tension cutoff condition is accepted, i.e. if due to cohesion the negative
value of active earth pressure is developed or, according to more strict requirements, the value
of "Minimum dimensioning pressure" is exceeded, the value of active earth pressure drops
down to zero or set equal to the "Minimum dimensioning pressure".
The program also allows for running the analysis in total stresses.
-1018-
Active Earth Pressure - The Mazindrani Theory

(Rankine)
Active earth pressure is given by the following formula:
where: σz - vertical geostatic stress

Ka - coefficient of active earth pressure due to Rankine
β - slope inclination
γ - weight of soil
z - assumed depth
- coefficient of active earth pressure due to Mazindrani
where: β - slope inclination

φ - angle of internal friction of soil
c - cohesion of soil
Assuming cohesionless soils (c = 0) and horizontal ground surface (β = 0) yields the Rankine
solution, for which the active earth pressure is provided by:
and the coefficient of active earth pressure becomes:
where: φ - angle of internal friction of soil
Horizontal and vertical components of the active earth pressure become:
where: σa - active earth pressure

δ - angle of friction between structure and soil
α - back face inclination of the structure
Literature:
Mazindrani, Z.H., and Ganjali, M.H. 1997. Lateral earth pressure problem of cohesive backfill
with inclined surface. Journal of Geotechnical and Geoenvironmental Engineering, ASCE,
123(2): 110-112.
-1019-
Active Earth Pressure - The Coulomb Theory


cef - effective cohesion of soil
Ka - coefficient of active earth pressure
Kac - coefficient of active earth pressure due to cohesion
The coefficient of active earth pressure Ka is given by:
The coefficient of active earth pressure Kac is given by:
for:
for:


-1020-
Active Earth Pressure - The Müller-Breslau Theory


The coefficient of active earth pressure Ka is given by:

δ - angle of friction betweem structure and soil
for:
for:

-1021-

Literature:
Müller-Breslau's Erddruck auf Stutzmauern,Stuttgart: Alfred Kroner-Verlag, 1906 (German).
Active Earth Pressure - The Caquot Theory


The following analytical solution (Boussinesque, Caquot) is implemented to compute the

coefficient of active earth pressure Ka:
where: Ka - coefficient of active earth pressure due to Caquot

Coulomb - coefficient of active earth pressure due to Coulomb
Ka
ρ - conversion coefficient - see further
where: β - slope inclination behind the structure

for:
-1022-
for:


Active Earth Pressure - The Absi Theory


The program takes values of the coefficient of active earth pressure Ka from a database, built
upon the values published in the book: Kérisel, Absi: Active and passive earth Pressure Tables,
3rd Ed. A.A. Balkema, 1990 ISBN 90 6191886 3.
for:
for:
-1023-


Literature:
Kérisel, Absi: Active and Passive Earth Pressure Tables, 3rd ed., Balkema, 1990 ISBN 90
6191886 3.
Active Earth Pressure - Total Stress

When determining the active earth pressure in cohesive fully saturated soils, in which case the
consolidation is usually prevented (undrained conditions), the horizontal normal total stress σx
receives the form:
where: σx - horizontal total stress (normal)

σz - vertical normal total stress
Kuc - coefficient of earth pressure
cu - total cohesion of soil
The coefficient of earth pressure Kuc is given by:
where: Kuc - coefficient of earth pressure

au - total adhesion of soil to the structure
Passive Earth Pressure

Passive earth pressure is the highest limiting lateral pressure developed at the onset of shear
failure by wall moving (penetrating) in the direction opposite to the direction of acting earth
pressure (minimal wall rotation necessary for the evolution of passive earth pressure is about
10 mrad, i.e. 10 mm/m of the wall height). In most expressions used to compute the passive
earth pressure the sign convention is assumed such that the usual values of δ corresponding to
-1024-
vertical direction of the friction resultant are negative. The program, however, assumes these
values to be positive. A seldom variant with friction acting upwards is not considered in the
program.
The following theories and approaches are implemented for the computation of passive earth
pressure assuming effective stress state:
• The Rankine and Mazindrani theory
• The Coulomb theory
• The Caquot - Kérisel theory
• The Müller - Breslau theory
• The Absi theory
• The Sokolovski theory
The program also allows for running the analysis in total stresses.
Passive Earth Pressure - The Rankine and Mazindrani

Theory
Passive earth pressure follows from the following formula:

Kp - coefficient of passive earth pressure due to Rankine
γ - weight of soil
z - assumed depth
- coefficient of passive earth pressure due to Mazindrani
The coefficient of passive earth pressure Kp is given by:

If there is no friction (δ = 0) between the structure and cohesionless soils (c = 0), the ground
surface is horizontal (β = 0) and the resulting slip surafce is also plane with the slope:
The Mazindrani theory then reduces to the Rankine theory. The coefficient of passive earth
pressure is then provided by:
-1025-
Passive earth pressure σp by Rankine for cohesionless soils is given:
where: γ - unit weight of soil

z - assumed depth
Kp - coefficient of passive earth pressure due to Rankine
Literature:
Mazindrani, Z.H., and Ganjali, M.H. 1997. Lateral earth pressure problem of cohesive backfill
with inclined surface. Journal of Geotechnical and Geoenvironmental Engineering, ASCE,
123(2): 110-112.
Passive Earth Pressure - The Coulomb Theory

where: σz - effective vertical geostatic stress

Kp - coefficient of passive earth pressure due to Coulomb

The vertical σpv and horizontal σph components of passive earth pressure are given by:
where: δ - angle of friction between structure and soil

-1026-
Passive Earth Pressure - The Caquot - Kérisel Theory

where K - coefficient of passive earth pressure for δ = -φ, see the table
: p
ψ - reduction coefficient ψ for |δ| < φ, see the table
σ - vertical geostatic stress
z
The vertical σpv and horizontal σph components of passive earth pressureare given by:

Coefficient of Passive Earth Pressure Kp

Coefficient of passive earth pressure Kp for δ = -φ
α φ Kp when β°
[°] [°]
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45
10 1,1 1,4 1,5

7 1 3
15 1,3 1,7 1,9 2,0

9 0 2 6
20 1,7 2,0 2,4 2,7 2,92

1 6 2 1
25 2,1 2,6 2,9 3,6 4,22 4,4

4 1 6 6 3
-30 30 2,7 3,4 4,1 5,0 5,96 6,9 7,4

8 2 6 1 4 0
35 3,7 4,7 5,8 7,2 8,76 10, 12, 13,60

5 3 7 1 60 50
40 5,3 6,8 8,7 11, 13,70 17, 24, 25,40 28,40

1 7 7 00 20 60
-1027-
45 8,0 10, 14, 18, 23,80 30, 38. 49,10 60,70 69,
5 70 20 40 50 90 10
10 1,3 1,5 1,7

6 8 0
15 1,6 1,9 2,2 2,3

8 7 0 8
20 2,1 2,5 2,9 3,2 3,51

3 2 2 2
25 2,7 3,3 3,9 4,6 5,29 5,5

8 4 9 0 7
-20 30 3,7 4,6 5,5 6,6 7,84 9,1 9,7

8 1 6 1 2 7
35 5,3 6,6 8,2 10, 12,20 14, 17, 19,00

6 9 6 10 80 40
40 8,0 10, 12, 16, 20,00 25, 36, 37,80 42,20

7 40 00 50 50 50
45 13, 17, 22, 29, 38,30 48, 62, 78,80 97,30 11

20 50 90 80 90 30 1,0
0
10 1,5 1,7 1,8

2 2 3
15 1,9 2,2 2,5 2,6

5 3 7 6
20 2,5 2,9 3,4 3,7 4,09

7 8 2 5
25 3,5 4,1 4,9 5,6 6,45 6,8

0 4 0 2 1
-10 30 4,9 6,0 7,1 8,5 10,10 11, 12,

8 1 9 1 70 60
35 7,4 9,2 11, 13, 16,70 20, 23, 26,00

7 4 30 80 10 70
40 12, 15, 19, 24, 29,80 37, 53, 55,10 61,60

00 40 40 10 10 20
45 21, 27, 36, 47, 60,60 77, 98, 124,00 153,00 17

20 90 50 20 30 20 6,0
0
10 1,6 1,8 1,9
-1028-
4 1 3
15 2,1 2,4 2,7 2,9

9 6 3 1
20 3,0 3,4 3,9 4,4 4,66

1 4 1 2
25 4,2 5,0 5,8 6,7 7,71 8,1

9 2 1 2 6
0 30 6,4 7,6 9,1 10, 12,70 14, 15,

2 9 3 80 80 90
35 10, 12, 15, 18, 22,30 26, 31, 34,90

20 60 30 60 90 70
40 17, 22, 28, 34, 42,90 53, 76, 79,10 88,70

50 30 00 80 30 40
45 33, 44, 57, 74, 94,70 12 153 174,00 240,00 27

50 10 40 10 0,0 ,00 5,0
0 0
10 1,7 1,8 1,9

3 7 8
15 2,4 2,6 2,9 3,1

0 5 3 2
20 3,4 3,9 4,4 4,9 5,23

5 0 0 6
10 25 5,1 5,9 6,9 7,9 9,11 9,6

7 9 0 5 7
30 8,1 9,6 11, 13, 15,90 18, 19,

7 9 40 50 50 90
35 13, 16, 20, 24, 29,80 35, 42, 46,6

80 90 50 80 80 30 0
40 25, 32, 40, 49, 61,70 76, 110 113, 127,00

50 20 40 90 40 ,00 00
45 52, 69, 90, 116 148,00 18 239 303, 375,00 431,00

90 40 00 ,00 8,0 ,00 00
0
10 1,7 1,8 2,0

8 9 1
15 2,5 2,8 3,1 3,3

8 2 1 0
-1029-
20 3,9 4,3 4,9 5,5 5,83

0 8 2 3
20 25 6,1 7,1 8,1 9,3 10,70 11,

8 2 7 9 40
30 10, 12, 14, 16, 20,00 23, 25,

40 30 40 90 20 00
35 18, 22, 27, 33, 40,00 48, 56, 62,5

70 80 60 30 00 80 0
40 37, 46, 58, 72, 89,30 11 158 164, 185,00

20 90 60 50 1,0 ,00 00
0
45 84, 110 143 184 234,00 29 378 478, 592,00 680,00

00 ,00 ,00 ,00 7,0 ,00 00
0
10 1,7 1,8 2,0

8 9 0
15 2,7 2,9 3,2 3,4

2 6 6 5
20 4,3 4,8 5,4 6,1 6,47

5 8 6 4
30 25 7,3 8,4 9,6 11, 12,70 13,

3 3 5 10 50
30 13, 15, 18, 21, 25,20 29, 31,

10 50 20 40 30 60
35 25, 31, 37, 45, 54,20 65, 77, 84,8

50 00 50 20 20 00 0
40 54, 68, 86, 107 131,00 16 232 241, 271,00

60 80 00 ,00 2,0 ,00 00
0
45 135 176 228 293 374,00 47 604 763, 945,00 1090,0

,00 ,00 ,00 ,00 5,0 ,00 00 0
0
Reduction Coefficient of Passive Earth Pressure

Reduction coefficient ψ for |δ| < φ
-1030-
φ [°] ψ for |δ| < φ
5 1.0 0.8 0.6 0.4 0.2 0.0
10 1.00 0.989 0.962 0.929 0.898 0.864
15 1.00 0.979 0.934 0.881 0.830 0.775
20 1.00 0.968 0.901 0.824 0.752 0.678
25 1.00 0.954 0.860 0.759 0.666 0.574
30 1.00 0.937 0.811 0.686 0.574 0.467
35 1.00 0.916 0.752 0.603 0.475 0.362
40 1.00 0.886 0.682 0.512 0.375 0.262
45 1.00 0.848 0.600 0.414 0.276 0.174
Passive Earth Pressure - The Müller - Breslau Theory

where: K - coefficient of passive earth pressure

p

The vertical σpv and horizontal σph components of passive earth pressure are given by:
-1031-
Literature:
Müller-Breslau's Erddruck auf Stutzmauern,Stuttgart: Alfred Kroner-Verlag, 1906 (German).
Passive Earth Pressure - The Absi Theory

where: Kp - coefficient of passive earth pressure

The program takes values of the coefficient Kp from a database, built upon the tabulated
values published in the book: Kérisel, Absi: Active and passive earth Pressure Tables, 3rd Ed.
A.A. Balkema, 1990 ISBN 90 6191886 3.
The vertical σpv and horizontal σph components of passive earth pressureare given by:

Literature:
Kérisel, Absi: Active and Passive Earth Pressure Tables, 3rd ed., Balkema, 1990 ISBN 90
6191886 3.
Passive Earth Pressure - The Sokolovski Theory

where: Kpg - passive earth pressure coefficient for cohesionless soils

Kpc - passive earth pressure coefficient due to cohesion
Kpp - passive earth pressure coefficient due to surcharge
Individual expressions for determining the magnitude of passive earth pressure and slip
surface are introduced in the sequel; the meaning of individual variables is evident from Fig.:
-1032-
Passive eart pressure slip surface after Sokolovski

Angles describing the slip surface:

δp - angle of friction between structure and soil
Slip surface radius vector:
Provided that ω < 0 the both straight edges of the zone r1 and r2 numerically overlap and
-1033-
resulting in the plane slip surface developed in the overlapping region. The coefficients of
passive earth pressure Kpg, Kpp, Kpc then follow from:

δp - angle of friction between structure and soil
Auxiliary variables: ipg, ipp, ipc, gpg, gpp, gpc, tpg, tpp, tpc
f
o , ,
r
:
, ,
, ,
where:
For soils with zero value for the angle of internal friction the following expressions are
employed to determine the coefficients of passive earth pressure:
where:
-1034-
Literature:
Sokolovski, V.V., 1960. Statics of Soil Media,Butterworth, London.
Passive Earth Pressure - Total Stress

When determining the passive earth pressure in cohesive fully saturated soils, in which case
the consolidation is usually prevented (undrained conditions), the horizontal normal total
stress σx receives the form:
where: σx - horizontal total stress (normal)

Kuc - coefficient of earth pressure
The coefficient of earth pressure Kuc is given by:
where: Kuc - coefficient of earth pressure

au - total adhesion of soil to the structure
Earth Pressure at Rest

Earth pressure at rest rest is the horizontal pressure acting on the rigid structure. It is usually
assumed in cases, when it is necessary to minimize the lateral and horizontal deformation of
the sheeted soil (e.g. when laterally supporting a structure in the excavation pit up to depth
below the current foundation or in general when casing soil with structures sensitive to non-
uniform settlement), or when structures loaded by earth pressures are due to some
technological reasons extremely rigid and do not allow for deformation in the direction of load
necessary to mobilize the active earth pressure.
Earth pressure at rest is given by:
For cohesive soils the Terzaghi formula for computing Kr is implemented in the program:
For cohesionless soils the Jáky expression is used:
-1035-
When computing the pressure at rest for cohesive soils σr using the Jáky formula for the
determination of coefficient of earth pressure at rest Kr, it is recommended to use the alternate
angle of internal friction φn.
The way of computing the earth pressure at rest can be therefore influenced by the selection
of the type of soil (cohesive, cohesionless) when inputting its parameters. Even typically
cohesionless soil (sand, gravel) must be introduced as cohesive if we wish to compute the
pressure at rest with the help of the Poisson ratio and vice versa.
For overconsolidated soils the expression proposed by Schmertmann to compute the
coefficient of earth pressure at rest Kr is used:
where: Kr - coefficient of earth pressure at rest

OCR - overconsolidation ratio
The value of the coefficient of earth pressure at rest can be input also directly.
The program calculates the influence of the inclined ground surface or the back of structure
and increase of pressure at rest from the surcharge.
Earth Pressure at Rest for an Inclined Ground Surface

or Inclined Back of the Structure
For inclined ground surface behind the structure (0° < β ≤ φ) the earth pressure at rest assumes
the form:

σz - vertical geostatic stress
Kr - coefficient of earth pressure at rest
For inclined back of wall the values of earth pressure at rest are derived from:
where: α - back face inclination of the structure

Normal and tangential components are given by:
-1036-

The deviation angle from the normal line to the wall δ reads:

Increased Active Pressure

The increased active pressure is calculated using k coefficient.
The magnitude of the pressure is calculated by the formula:
where: σr - pressure at rest

σa - active earth pressure
k - coefficient of increased active pressure
If the value of coefficient k=1, then the acting pressure is equal to the pressure at rest. If the
value of coefficient k=0, then the acting pressure is equal to the active pressure.
Distribution of Earth Pressures in case of Broken

Terrain
Figures show the procedure of earth pressure analysis in the case of sloping terrain. The
resulting shape of earth pressure distribution acting on the construction is obtained from the
sum of triangular distributions developed by individual effects acting on the construction.
-1037-
Principle of the earth pressure computation in the case of broken terrain
Principle of the earth pressure computation in the case of broken terrain for β > φ
Influence of Water
The influence of ground water can be reflected using one of the following variants:
Without ground water, water is not considered
Hydrostatic pressure, ground water behind structure
-1038-
Hydrostatic pressure, ground water behind and in front of structure
Hydrodynamic pressure
Special distribution of water pressure
Without Ground Water, Water is not Considered

In this option the influence of ground water is not considered.

Complementary information:
If there are fine soils at and below the level of GWT, one should carefully assess an influence of
full saturation in the region of capillary attraction. The capillary attraction is in the analysis
reflected only by increased degree of saturation, and therefore the value of γsat is inserted into
parameters of soils.
To distinguish regions with different degree of saturation, one may insert several layers of the
same soil with different unit weights. Negative pore pressures are not considered. However, for
layers with different degree of saturation it is possible to use different values of shear
resistance influenced by suction (difference in pore pressure of water and gas ( ua - uw).
Hydrostatic Pressure, Ground Water behind the

Structure
Hydrostatic pressure, ground water behind structure
The heel of a structure is sunk into impermeable subsoil so that the water flow below the
structure is prevented. Water is found behind the back of structure only. There is no water
acting on the front face. Such a case may occur when water in front of structure flow freely
due to gravity or deep drainage is used. The back of structure is loaded by the hydrostatic
pressure:
where: γw - unit weight of water

hw - water tables difference
-1039-
Action of hydrostatic pressure
Hydrostatic Pressure, Ground Water behind and in

front of the Structure
Hydrostatic pressure, ground water behind and in front of structure
The heel of a structure is sunk into impermeable subsoil so that the water flow below the
structure is prevented. The load due water is assumed both in front of and behind the
structure. The water in front of structure is removed either with the help of gravity effects or is
shallowly lowered by pumping. Both the face and back of structure is loaded by hydrostatic
pressure due to difference in water tables (h1 and h2). The dimension hw represents the
difference in water tables at the back and in front of structure - see figure:
-1040-
Action of hydrostatic pressure
Hydrodynamic Pressure
Hydrodynamic pressure
The heel of a structure is sunk into permeable subsoil, which allows free water flow below the
structure - see figure. The unit weight of soil lifted by uplift pressure γsu is modified to account
for flow pressure. These modifications then depend on the direction of water flow.
-1041-
Action of hydrodynamic pressure

When computing the earth pressure in the area of descending flow the program introduces the
following value of the unit weight of soil:
and in the area of ascending flow the following value:
where: γsu - unit weight of submerged soil

Δγ - alteration of unit weight of soil
i - an average seepage gradient
An average hydraulic slope is given:
where: i - an average seepage gradient

hw - water tables difference
dd - seepage path downwards
du - seepage path upwards
If the change of unit weight of soil Δγ provided by:
where: i - an average seepage gradient

Is greater than the unit weight of saturated soil γsu, then the leaching appears in front of
structure - as a consequence of water flow the soil behaves as weightless and thus cannot
transmit any load. The program then prompts a warning message and further assumes the
value of γ = 0. The result therefore no longer corresponds to the original input - is safer.
Special Distribution of Water Pressure

Special distribution of water pressure
This option allows an independent (manual) input of distribution of load due to water at the
back and in front of structure using ordinates of pore pressure at different depths. The
variation of pressure between individual values is linear. At the same time it is necessary to
input levels of tables of full saturation of a soil at the back h1 and in front h2 of structure
including possible decrease of unit weight δy in front of structure due to water flow.
Example: Two separated horizon lines of ground water.
There are two permeable layers (sand or gravel) with one impermeable layer of clay in
between, which causes separation of two hydraulic horizon lines - see figure:
-1042-
Example of pore pressure distribution

The variation of pore pressure above the clay layer is driven by free ground water table GWT1.
The distribution of pore pressure below the clay layer results from ratio in the lower separated
ground water table GWT2, where the ground water is stressed. The pore pressure distribution
in clay is approximately linear.
The capillary attraction is in the analysis reflected only by increased degree of saturation, and
therefore the value of γsat is inserted into parameters of soils.
To distinguish regions with different degree of saturation, one may insert several layers of the
same soil with different unit weights. Negative pore pressures are not considered. However, for
layers with different degree of saturation it is possible to introduce values of shear resistance
influenced by suction.
Uplift Pressure in Footing Bottom

The variation of uplift pressure in the footing bottom due to difference in water tables is
assumed according to expected effect linear, parabolic or is not taken into account.
-1043-
Uplift pressure in footing bottom
Influence of Tensile Cracks

The program makes it possible to account for the influence of tensile surface cracks filled with
water. The analysis procedure is evident from the figure. The depth of tensile cracks is the only
input parameter.
Influence of tensile cracks
Minimum Dimensioning Pressure

When determining the magnitude and distribution of earth pressures it is very difficult to
qualify proportions of individual effects. This situation leads to uncertainty in the determination
of earth pressure loading diagram. In reality we have to use in the design the most adverse
distribution in favor of the safety of structure. For example, in case of braced structures in
cohesive soils when using reasonable values of strength parameters of soil along the entire
structure we may encounter tensile stresses in the upper part of the structure - see figure.
Such tensile stresses, however, cannot be exerted on the sheeting structure (consequence of
separation of soil due to technology of construction, isolation and drainage layer). In favor of
the safe design of sheeting structure particularly in subsurface regions, where tensile stresses
are developed during computation of the active earth pressure, the program offers the
possibility to call the option "Minimum dimensioning pressure" in the analysis.
To determine the minimum dimensioning pressure the program employs for layers of cohesive
soils as the minimal value of the coefficient of active earth pressure an alternate coefficient Ka
= 0,2. Therefore it is ensured that the value of the computed active earth pressure will not drop
below 20% of the vertical pressure (Ka ≥ 0.2) - see figure. Application of the minimum
dimensioning pressure assumes for example the possibility of increasing the lateral pressure
due to filling of joint behind the sheeting structure with rain water. If the option of minimum
dimensioning pressure is not selected the program simply assumes tension cutoff ( Ka ≥ 0.0).
-1044-
Minimum dimensioning pressure
Earth - Pressure Wedge

Providing a structure with a cantilever jump (foundation slab of cantilever wall, modification for
reduction of earth pressures) is considered when computing earth pressures it is possible to
compute earth pressures acting either on the real back of structure with the input angle of
friction δ ≤ 2/3φ or on an alternate back of structure. The alternate back of sheeting structure
replaces the real broken one by a slip plane passing from the upper point of the back of wall
towards the outer upper point of the jump and forms an earth wedge - see figure. A fully
mobilized angle of friction δ = φ is assumed along this plane. The weight of earth wedge
created under this alternate back further contributes to load applied to the structure. To
introduce the alternate back of structure into the analysis it is necessary to select in the
program "Earth pressures" the option "Consider developing of earth-pressure wedge".
In other programs the earth wedge is introduced automatically.
Calculation with and without earth-pressure wedge
-1045-
Determination of earth-pressure wedge in case of active earth pressure

The slip plane of the earth-pressure wedge is inclined from the horizontal line by angle υa given
by:

h - height of earth wedge
The shape of the earth wedge in the layered subsoil is determined such that for individual
layers of soil above the wall foundation the program computes the angle υa, which then serves
to determine the angle υas. Next, the program determines an intersection of the line drawn
under the angle υas from the upper right point of the foundation block with the next layer. The
procedure continues by drawing another line starting from the previously determined
intersection and inclined by the angle υas. The procedure is terminated when the line intersects
the terrain or wall surface, respectively. The wedge shape is further assumed in the form of
triangle (intersection with wall) or rectangle (intersection with terrain).
-1046-
Surcharge
The following types of surcharges are implemented in the program:
Active earth pressure
• Surface surcharge
• Strip surcharge
• Trapezoidal surcharge
• Concentrated surcharge
• Line surcharge
• Horizontal surcharge
Earth pressure at rest
• Strip surcharge
• Trapezoidal surcharge
• Concentrated surcharge
• Horizontal surcharge
Passive earth pressure
Surface Surcharge - Active Earth Pressure

The increment of active earth pressure at rest due to surface surcharge is given by:
where: p - vertical uniform load

The vertical uniform load p applied to the ground surface induces therefore over the entire
height of the structure a constant increment of active earth pressure - see figure:
-1047-
Increment of active earth pressure due to vertical uniform ground surface surcharge
Strip Surcharge - Active Earth Pressure

For vertical strip load fa acting parallel with structure on the ground surface along an infinitely
long strip the trapezoidal increment of active earth pressure applied to the structure over a
given segment hf is assumed - see figure.
Diagram of increment of active earth pressure due to strip load fa

This segment is determined by intersection of the structure and lines drawn from the edge
points of the strip load having slopes associated with angles φ and ϑa. The angle ϑa
corresponding to critical slip plane follows from:
The formula is described in more detail in section "Active earth pressure - line surcharge".
Variation of pressure increment is trapezoidal; the larger intensity of Δσfs is applied at the
upper end while the smaller intensity of Δσfi at the bottom end. The two increments are given
by:
where: fa - magnitude of strip surcharge

b - width of the strip surcharge acting normal to the structure
hf - section loaded by active earth pressure increment
-1048-
where: ϑa - angle of critical slip plane

The resultant of the increment of active earth pressure due to strip load fa is provided by:

fa - magnitude of strip surcharge
b - width of the strip surcharge
For non-homogeneous soils the program proceeds as follows.
Trapezoidal Surcharge - Active Earth Pressure

The trapezoidal surcharge is subdivided in the program in ten segments. Individual segments
are treated as strip loads. The resulting earth pressure is a sum of partial surcharges derived
from individual segments.
Concentrated Surcharge - Active Earth Pressure

The concentrated load (resultant F due to surface or concentrated load - see figure) is
transformed into a line load with a limited length. If the width of surface load b is smaller than
the distance a from the back of wall (see figure) the alternate line load f having length
l+2(a+b) receives the form:
where: F - resultant due to surface or concentrated load

a - distance of load from the back of wall
l - length of load
b - width of surface load
If the width b of surface load is greater than the distance a from the back of wall (see figure)
the alternate strip load f having length l+2(a+b) and width (a+b) reads:
where: F - resultant due to surface or concentrated load

a - distance of load from the back of wall
l - length of load
-1049-
b - width of surface load
Alternate load for calculation of increment of active earth pressure

Line Surcharge - Active Earth Pressure

Vertical infinitely long line load f acting on the ground surface parallel with structure leads to a
triangular increment of active earth pressure applied to the structure over a given segment hf -
see figure:
Diagram of increment of active earth pressure due to vertical line load acting on ground
surface
Action of the line surcharge is deterimened such that two lines are drawn from the point of
-1050-
application following angles φ and ϑa (corresponding to the critical slip surface), which is
provided by:

ε - angle derived from the following formulas

h - assumed depth
For non-homogeneous soil and inclination of ground surface β smaller than the angle of
internal friction of the soil φ the value of the angle ε is given by:

The resultant of the increment of active earth pressure due to line load f is provided by:

f - magnitude of line surcharge
-1051-
Increment of earth pressure due to horizontal

surcharge
Infinitely long distributed load f acting horizontally the on the ground surface leads to a
triangular increment of active earth pressure applied to the structure over a given segment hf -
see figure:
Diagram of increment of active earth pressure due to horizontal distributed load acting on
ground surface
Range of the earth pressure contribution is determined by two lines drawn from the end points
of the distributed load with angle φ and angle ϑa (corresponding to the critical slip surface),
which is provided by:

ε - angle derived from the following formulas

-1052-

h - assumed depth
For non-homogeneous soil and inclination of ground surface β smaller than the angle of
internal friction of the soil φ the value of the angle ε is given by:

The resultant of the increment of active earth pressure due to line load f is provided by:

f - magnitude of line surcharge
Surcharge in Non-Homogeneous Soil

For non-homogeneous soil we proceed as follows:
• Compute the angle ϑa for a given soil layer.
• Determine the corresponding magnitude of force Sa and size of the corresponding pressure
diagram.
• Determine the magnitude of earth pressure acting below the bottom edge of a given layer,
and its ratio with respect to the overall pressure magnitude.
• The surcharge is reduced using the above ratio, then the location of this surcharge on the
upper edge of the subsequent layer is determined.
• Compute again the angle ϑa for the next layer and repeat the previous steps until the
bottom of a structure is reached or the surcharge is completely exhausted.
Surface Surcharge - Earth Pressure at Rest

An increment of uniformly distributed earth pressure at rest Δσr caused by the vertical surface
load applied on the ground surface behind the structure is computed using the following
formula:
-1053-
where: f - magnitude of surface surcharge

Diagram of increment of earth pressure at rest due to vertical uniform load acting on ground
surface
Strip Surcharge - Earth Pressure at Rest

Uniform strip load fa acting on the ground surface behind the structure parallel with vertical
structure (see figure) creates an increment of earth pressure at rest Δσr having the magnitude
given by:
where: fa - vertical strip surcharge

α, α1, α2 - evident from figure
The increase of the pressure can never be higher than pressure from surface surcharge of the
same magnitude.
-1054-
Increment of earth pressure due to vertical strip surcharge
Trapezoidal Surcharge - Earth Pressure at Rest

The trapezoidal surcharge is subdivided in the program in five segments. Individual segments
are treated as strip loads. The resulting earth pressure is a sum of partial surcharges derived
from individual segments.
Concentrated Surcharge - Earth Pressure at Rest

Application of concentrated force F yields an increment of earth pressure at rest Δσr acting on
the vertical structure and having the magnitude of:
where: F - concentrated force acting on ground surface

x, z - coordinates evident from figure
-1055-
Increment of earth pressure at rest due to vertical concentrated force
Surface Surcharge - Passive Earth Pressure

For passive earth pressure only an increment due to vertical uniform load fa is determined
using the formula:
where: fa - vertical surface surcharge

Kp - coefficient of passive earth pressure
The vertical uniform load q acting on the ground surface therefore results in a constant
increment of passive pressure applied over the whole length of wall - see figure.
Increment of the passive earth pressure
Influence of Earthquake
Earthquake increases the effect of active pressure and reduces the effect of passive pressure.
The theories used in our programs (Mononobe-Okabe, Arrango, JTJ 004-89, JTS 146-2012, SL
-1056-
203-97, NCMA-SRW) are derived assuming cohesionless soils without influence of water.
Therefore, all input soils are assumed cohesionless when employing these theories to address
the earthquake effects. Earthquake effects due to surcharge are not considered in the program
- the user may introduce these effects (depending on the type of surcharge) as "Applied
forces".
The coefficient kh is assumed always positive and such that its effect is always unfavorable.
The coefficient kv may receive both positive and negative value. If the equivalent acceleration
av acts downwards (from the ground surface) the inertia forces kv Ws will be exerted on the soil
wedge in the opposite direction (lifting the wedge up). The values of equivalent acceleration av
(and thus also the coefficient kv) and inertia forces kv Ws are assumed as positive. It is clearly
evident that the inertia forces act in the direction opposite to acceleration (if the acceleration is
assumed upwards - av = - kv g then the inertia force presses the soil wedge downwards: - kv Ws.
The direction with most unfavorable effects on a structure is assumed when examining the
seismic effects.
For sheeting structures it is possible to neglect the effect of vertical equivalent acceleration kv
Ws and input kv = 0.
Sign convention
The seismic angle of inertia is determined from the coefficients kh and kv (i.e. angle between
the resultant of inertia forces and the vertical line) using the formula:
where: kv - seismic coefficient of vertical acceleration

kh - seismic coefficient of horizontal acceleration
Pressure from seismic effects

Increment of active earth pressure due to seismic effects (computed from the structure
bottom) follows from:
-1057-
where: γi - th
unit weight of soil in the i layer
Kae, - th
coefficient of active earth pressure (static and seismic) in the i layer
i
Ka,i - magnitude of earth pressure in the i
th
layer due to Coulomb
hi - thickness of the i
th
layer
kv - seismic coefficient of vertical acceleration
Reduction of passive pressure due to seismic load (computed from the structure bottom) is
provided by:
where: γi - th
unit weight of soil in the i layer
Kpe, - th
coefficient of passive earth pressure (static and seismic) in the i layer
i
Kp,i - magnitude of earth pressure in the i
th
layer due to Coulomb
th
layer
Active earth pressure coefficient Kae,i and passive earth pressure coefficient Kpe,i are computed
using the Mononobe-Okabe theory or the Arrango theory. If there is ground water in the soil
body the program takes that into account.
The basic assumption in the program when computing earthquake is a flat ground surface
behind structure with inclination β. If that is not the case the program approximates the shape
of terrain by a flat surface as evident from figure:
-1058-
Terrain shape approximation

Point of application of resultant force
The resultant force is automatically positioned by the program into the center of the stress
diagram. Various theories recommend, however, different locations of the resultant force -
owing to that it is possible to select the point of application of the resultant force in the range
of 0.33 - 0.7H (H is the structure height). Recommended (implicit) value is 0.66 H. Having the
resultant force the program determines the trapezoidal shape of stress keeping both the input
point of application of the resultant force and its magnitude.
Mononobe-Okabe Theory
The coefficient Kae for active earth pressure is given by:
The coefficient Kpe for passive earth pressure is given by:

H - height of the structure
-1059-

ψ - seismic inertia angle
Deviation of seismic forces ψ must be for active earth pressure always less or equal to the
difference of the angle of internal friction and the ground surface inclination (i.e. φ - β). If the
values ψ of is greater the program assumes the value ψ = φ - β. In case of passive earth
pressure the value of deviation of seismic forces ψ must be always less or equal to the sum of
the angle of internal friction and the ground surface inclination (i.e. φ + β). The values of
computed and modified angle ψ can be visualized in the output - in latter case the word
MODIFIED is also displayed.
Example of the program output

Literature:
Mononobe N, Matsuo H 1929, On the determination of earth pressure during earthquakes. In
Proc. Of the World Engineering Conf., Vol. 9, str. 176.
Okabe S., 1926 General theory of earth pressure. Journal of the Japanese Society of Civil
Engineers, Tokyo, Japan 12 (1).
Arrango Theory
The program follows the Coulomb theory to compute the values of Ka and Kp while taking into
* *
account the dynamic values (α , β ).
For active earth pressure:
For passive earth pressure:

ψ - seismic forces inclination
The coefficients of earth pressures Kae and Kpe are found by multiplying the coefficients Fae
and Fpe by the values of Ka and Kp, respectively.
-1060-

ψ - seismic forces inclination
* *
If the value of the angle β becomes larger than φ the program assumes the value (β = φ).
*
The values of computed and modified angle β can be visualized in the output - in latter case
the word MODIFIED is also displayed. It is the user's responsibility to check in such case
whether the obtained results are realistic.
Example of the program output

Literature:
Design of sheet pile walls, Pile Buck Inc., Vero Beach, Florida, www.pilebuck.com.
NCMA - SRW
The calculation of dynamic forces is adpoted from the NCMA Design Manual for Segmental
Retaining Walls 3rd Edition.
It is based on Mononobe-Okabe theory, but dynamic effect of active earth pressure acting on
the wall is redistributed uniformly along the height of wall (reinforced soil body). The next
difference in this method is reduction of length of reinforced soil by half. The horizontal seismic
force is then calculated from this reduced length.
-1061-
Influence of Water
When examining the influence of ground water on the magnitudes of earth pressure the
program differentiates between confined and unconfined water. Hydrodynamic pressure acting
on the front face of the wall is calculated, if the wall is flooded at the front face side.
Confined water
-3
This type is used in soils with lower permeability - app. below the value of k = 1x10 cm/s. In
such soils the water flow is influenced, e.g. by actual grains (by their shape and roughness) or
by resistance of fraction of adhesive water. General formulas proposed by Mononobe-Okabe or
Arrango are used to analyze seismic effects. The only difference appears in substituting the
*
value of the seismic angle ψ by ψ :
where: γsat - unit weight of fully saturated soil

γsu - unit weight of submerged soil
Unconfined water
-1
This type is used in soils with higher permeability - app. above the value of k > 1x10 cm/s. In
such soils it is assumed that water flow in pores is more or less independent of soil grains (e.g.
turbulent flow in coarse grain soils). General formulas proposed by Mononobe-Okabe or
Arrango are used to analyze seismic effects. The only difference appears in substituting the
+
value of the seismic angle ψe by ψe :
where: γd - unit weight of dry soil

γsu - unit weight of submerged soil
GS - specific gravity of soil particles
where: ρS - density of the soil solids

ρw - density of water
-1062-
Apart from dynamic pressure the structure is also loaded by hydrodynamic pressure caused by
free water manifested by dynamic pressure applied to the structures. The actual parabolic
distribution is in the program approximated by the trapezoidal distribution.
The resultant of hydrodynamic pressure behind the structure Pwd is distant by ywd from the
heel of structure:
where: H - height of the structure
and its magnitude follows from:

Hydrodynamic pressure acting on the front face of the wall

The resultant of hydrodynamic pressure on the front face of the wall Pwd is distant by ywd
from the heel of structure:
where: H - height of the structure
and its magnitude follows from:

EN 1998-5 Seismic Effects

If the coefficients kh and kv are not obtained from measurements it is necessary, providing the
analysis is carried out according to 1998-5 Eurocode 8: Design of structures for earthquake
resistance - Part 5: Foundations, retaining structures and geotechnical aspects, to input these
coefficients as follows:
where: α - ratio of the design ground acceleration on type A ground (ag / g)

S - soil factor defined in EN 1998-1:2004, chapter 3.2.2.2
R - factor for the calculation of the horizontal seismic coefficient - see tab.
for:
-1063-
for other cases:
Type of sheeting structure R

Free gravity walls that can accept a displacement up to dr = 300αS (mm) 2
Free gravity walls that can accept a displacement up to dr = 200αS (mm) 1.5
Flexural reinforced concrete walls, anchored or braced walls, reinforced concrete walls 1
founded on vertical piles, restrained basement walls and bridge abutments
More detailed description can be found in EN 1998-5 chapter 7.3.2.2 Seismic effects
Forces from Earth Pressure at Rest Acting on the Rigid

Structure
Earth pressure at rest acts on the rigid structures (e.g. stem of the cantilever wall) in
earthquake analysis. Following resultant force of this pressure is taken into account:
where: Η - height of the structure

Resultant force acts in the half of the structure height.
Influence of Earthquake according to Chinese

Standards
Three different Chinese standards are implemented for calculation of seismic effect for wall
design which are JTJ 004-89 (Specifications of Earthquake Resistance Design for
Highway Engineering), SL 203-97 (Specification for seismic design of hydraulic
structures), JTS 146-2012 (Code for seismic Design of Water Transport Engineering).
They are all based on Mononobe-Okabe theory. The main difference between Chinese
standards and Mononobe-Okabe theory is that comprehensive influence factor Cz is introduced
in Chinese standards which reduces seismic force by about 70 %.
The advantage of choosing Chinese standards as the option for earthquake analysis is that
users only need to choose the intensity of the earthquake according to which the program
automatically assign values of other parameters appropriate with standards.
Influence of Earthquake according to JTJ 004-89

Only horizontal seismic force is considered according to JTJ 004-89.
Seismic force on structure
Seismic force acting on structure is provided by (Art. 3.1.5):
where: Eihw - seismic force acting at the center of gravity of the wall above the ith cross
section [kN/m]
-1064-
Kh - coefficient of horizontal seismic acceleration

Giw - weight of the structure above the ith cross section [kN/m]
Cz - comprehensive influence factor, usually it's 0.25
Ci - importance coefficient for seismic design
ψiw - distribution coefficient of horizontal earthquake along the wall
Recommended value of distribution coefficient ψiw (Tbl. 3.1.5):
Wall Security level Calculation diagram for ψiw

Height [m]
Highway, A class and B C class and D
class motorway class motorway
H ≤ 12 ψiw = 1 ψiw = 1
H > 12 ψiw = 1
ψiw isn't considered when H ≤ 12 m which means parameter a and b don't work when H ≤ 12 m.
a is the top value of the distribution map and b is the bottom value of the distribution map.
Seismic earth pressure
When computing seismic earth pressure, Coulomb theory is used and unite weight of soil γ,
internal friction angle of soil φ and angle of friction structure-soil δ is replaced by γ / cos θ,
sdasdasd φ - θ, δ + θ, where θ is seismic angle (Art. 3.1.6).
Seismic angel θ is determined by different option of seismic fortification intensity.
Water influence
Water influence according to Chinese standard is a little different from the water influence
according to Mononobe-Okabe or Arrango theory by reducing the water influence using
comprehensive influence factor Cz.
Seismic bearing capacity of subsoil
Seismic bearing capacity of subsoil is provided by (Art. 2.2.1):
where: faE - seismic bearing capacity of subsoil

ξa - adjusting coefficient for seismic bearing capacity
fa - characteristic value of bearing capacity which has been modified by the
geometry of foundation
The above formula is as same as Art. 4.2.3 in GB 50011-2010 (Code for seismic design of
buildings). Suggested values of ξa by different standards can be found here.
-1065-
Influence of Earthquake according to JTS 146-2012

Only horizontal seismic force is considered according to JTS 146-2012.
Calculation of seismic force acting on structure is as same as JTJ 004-89. Values of Cz can be
set from 0.2 to 0.5 suggested by Art. 5.2 in JTS 146-2012.
Distribution of seismic active pressure (Fig. 5.3.1)

The only difference between JTS 146-2012 and JTJ 004-89 is that seismic earth pressure
according to JTS 146-2012 considers the influence of cohesion.
Active seismic earth pressure is provided by (Art. 5.3.1):
where:
-1066-
w-overall active pressure acting on nth layer [kN/m]

E
ha
en
r
e
:
e-active pressure acting on the top of the nth layer [kPa]
a
n
1
e-active pressure acting on the bottom of the nth layer [kPa]
a
n
2
h-thickness of nth layer [m]
n
α-back face inclination of the structure [°]
-coefficient
K
q
q-uniform load acting on the terrain [kPa]
γ-unit weight of ith layer [kN/m3], below water - buoyant unit weight is accepted
i
h-thickness of the ith layer [m]
i
-coefficient of active pressure of nth layer
K
a
n
c-standard value of cohesion of nth layer [kPa]
n
-coefficient of seismic active pressure of nth layer
K
a
c
n
β-
slope inclination [°], and
-1067-
φ-internal friction angle of nth layer [°]

n
θ-seismic angel [°]
δ-angle of friction between structure and soil of nth layer [°]
n
Passive seismic earth pressure is provided by (Art. 5.3.2):
where:
Seismic angel θ is determined by different options of seismic fortification intensity.

Water influence
Calculation of seismic bearing capacity of subsoil is as same as JTJ 004-89.
Influence of Earthquake according to SL 203-97

Both horizontal and vertical seismic force can be considered according to SL 203-97. In SL
203-97, seismic angle θ is derived automatically from Kh, so seismic angle θ and seismic angle
blow water θ’ are not visible in the frame.
Calculation of horizontal seismic force acting on structure is as same as JTJ 004-89.
Vertical seismic force acting on structure is provided by (Art. 4.1.8):
-1068-
where: Eivw - vertical seismic force acting at the center of gravity of the wall above the ith
cross section [kN/m]
Eihw - horizontal seismic force acting at the center of gravity of the wall above the
ith cross section [kN/m]
kh - coefficient of horizontal seismic acceleration
kv - coefficient of vertical seismic acceleration, usually, it‛s ±2/3Kh (Art. 4.3.2)
Giw - weight of the structure above the ith cross section [kN/m]
C0 - meeting coefficient related to the influence of horizontal seismic effect,

usually, it‛s 0.5.

Calculation of seismic earth pressure is as same as JTJ 004-89. The only difference between SL
203-97 and JTJ 004-89 is that SL 203-97 has no "user defined - input Kh, θ" as an option for
seismic fortification intensity.
Water influence
Calculation of seismic bearing capacity of subsoil is as same as JTJ 004-89.
Seismic Fortification Intensity according to Chinese

Standards
There are three main kinds of option for seismic fortification intensity according Chinese
standards. Horizontal seismic acceleration coefficient Kh and seismic angle θ are determined
according to what option is selected for seismic fortification intensity.
• 7 degree (0.1g), 7 degree (0.15g), 8 degree (0.2g), 8 degree (0.3g), 9 degree (0.4g): Kh
and seismic angel s are determined according to corresponding seismic fortification
intensity based on standards.
• User defined - input Kh: Kh is input by user and θ is determined by (Art. 4.9.1 from SL
203-97)
• User defined - input Kh, θ: Kh and θ are both input by user.

Note: Third option is only valid for JTJ 004-89 and JTS 146-2012.
Values of Kh and θ according to corresponding seismic fortification intensity are given by the
following tables:
For JTJ 004-89 (Tbl. 1.0.7 and Tbl. 3.1.6 from JTJ 004-89)
-1069-
Seismic fortification intensity 7 degree 8 degree 9 degree
Coefficient of horizontal seismic acceleration Kh 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.30 0.40
Seismic angel θ 1.5° 2.3° 3.0° 4.5° 6.0°
Note: 7 degree (0.15g) and 8 degree (0.30g) are not from JTJ 004-89, because there are no
value for these two situations in JTJ 004-89. They are from JTS 146-2012.
For JTS 146-2012 (Tbl. 5.3.1 from JTS 146-2012)
Seismic angel θ 1.5° 2.3° 3.0° 4.5° 6.0°
For SL 203-97 (Tbl. 4.3.1 from SL 203-97)
Water Influence according to Chinese Standards

Seismic water influence can be dived into two parts - influence on seismic earth pressure and
dynamic water pressure. Similar to water influence according to Mononobe-Okabe or Arrango
theory, water influence according to Chinese standards also has two types water influence -
confined water and unconfined water. The main difference between Monobe-Okabe theory and
Chinese standards is that Chinese standards reduce the water influence using comprehensive
influence factor Cz.
Confined water
-3
This type is used in soils with lower permeability - app. below the value of k = 1*10 cm/s.
When confined water is chosen, dynamic water pressure is not considered. The only difference
from soils without water is that seismic angle used in calculation of seismic earth pressure is
replaced by seismic angle below water θ’.
Value of seismic angle below water θ’ is determined by the following two options:
1. By seismic fortification intensity - value of θ’ is provided by the following tables:
For JTJ 004-89 (Tbl. 3.1.6 from JTJ 004-89)
Coefficient of horizontal seismic acceleration Kh 0.10g 0.15g 0.20g 0.30g 0.40g
Seismic angel θ 2.5° 4.5° 5.0° 9.0° 10.0°
For JTS 146-2012 (Tbl. 5.3.1 from JTS 146-2012)
-1070-
Coefficient of horizontal seismic acceleration Kh 0.10g 0.15g 0.20g 0.30g 0.40g
Seismic angel θ’ 3.0° 4.5° 6.0° 9.0° 12.0°
2. Input seismic angle - value of θ’ is input by users. When this option is chosen, the
default value of θ’ is provided by:
If you have no idea about how to calculate the value of θ’, you can use the default.
Note: For SL 203-97, there are no additional options for confined water. θ’ is calculated
automatically according to the above formula.
Unconfined water
-1
This type is used in soils with higher permeability - app. above the value of k > 1*10 cm/s.
When unconfined water is chosen, both influence on earth pressure and dynamic water
pressure is considered.
Value of seismic angle below water θ’ is determined by the following three options:
1. By seismic fortification intensity - same to confined water.
2. Input seismic angle - same to confined water.
3. Input specific gravity of soil particles - value of θ’ is provided by:
where:
Note: For SL 203-97, there are no additional options for unconfined water. θ’ is calculated
automatically according to the above formula.
Dynamic water pressure is calculated according to the standard chosen.
For JTJ 004-89 (Art. 4.2.11 from JTJ 004-89):
where: Ew - over all dynamic water pressure acting on the structure [kN]
Ci - importance coefficient for seismic design
γw - unit weight of water [kN/m3]
d - depth of water above the heel of the structure [m]
Distribution of dynamic water pressure is constant along the structure.

For JTS 146-2012 (Art. 5.4.1 from JTS 146-2012):
-1071-
where:
where: pz - dynamic water pressure at depth Z [kPa]

η - reduction factor, for walls, it equals to 1.0
Z - distance between calculation point and water table [m]
b - width of water table [m]
For SL 203-97 (Art. 6.1.9 from SL 203-97):
where: pz - dynamic water pressure at depth Z [kPa]

ψ(Z) - distribution coefficient of dynamic water pressure at depth Z
Value of ψ(Z) is provide by the following table (Tbl. 6.1.9 from SL 203-97):
Z/d ψ(Z) Z/d ψ(Z)
0.0 0.00 0.6 0.76
0.1 0.43 0.7 0.75
0.2 0.58 0.8 0.71
0.3 0.68 0.9 0.68
0.4 0.74 1.0 0.67
0.5 0.76 - -
Importance Coefficient for Seismic Design Ci

Values of importance coefficient for seismic design Ci (Tbl. 1.0.4 from JTJ 004-89):
-1072-
The importance of the motorway Important coefficient for seismic

design Ci
Important Highway and A class motorway 1.7
Highway and A class motorway or important B class 1.3

motorway
B class motorway or important C class motorway 1.0
C class motorway or important D class motorway 0.6
Values of importance coefficient for seismic design Ci (Tbl. 1.0.4 from JTG TB02-01-
2008):
Importance of the bridge E1 seismic effect E2 seismic effect
A class 1.0 1.7
B class 0.43 (0.5) 1.3 (1.7)
C class 0.34 1.0
D class 0.23 -
Adjusting Coefficient for Seismic Bearing Capacity ξa

Values of adjusting coefficient for seismic bearing capacity ξa (Tbl. 4.2.3 from GB
50011-2010):
Name and property of the subsoil ξa
Rock, dense gravelly soil, dense gravel and coarse and medium coarse sand, 1.5
clay and silt whose fak ≥ 300 kPa
Medium and moderate dense gravelly soil, medium dense and moderate dense 1.3
gravel and coarse and medium coarse sand, dense and medium dense fine and
silty sand, clay, silt and firm loess whose 300 kPa ≤ fak < 300 kPa
Moderate dense fine and silty sand, clay, silt and plastic loess whose 100 kPa ≤ 1.1
fak < 150 kPa
Mud, mudy soil, lose sand, miscellaneous fill, newly accumulated loess and soft 1.0
loess
Note: In JTJ 004-89, it‛s table 2.2.1 which is similar to the above table.
Values of adjusting coefficient for seismic bearing capacity ξa (Tbl. 5.5.1 from JTS
146-2012):
-1073-
Subsoil ξa
Loose sand, not in liquidation status 1.0
Normal sand soil, not in liquidation status 1.3
Dense gravelly soil and bedrock 1.5
Influence of Friction between Soil and back of the

Structure
The magnitude of active or passive earth pressure, respectively, depends not only on the
selected solution theory but also on friction between the soil and the back of wall and by the
adhesion of soil to the structure face represented by the angle δ. If δ = 0 then the pressure σ
acts in the direction normal to the back of wall and the resultant of earth pressure P is also
directed in normal to the back of wall - see figure:
Distribution of earth pressure along structure for δ = 0

Providing the friction between the soil and the back of wall is considered in the analysis of
earth pressures, the earth pressure σ and also its resultant P are inclined from the back of wall
by the angle δ. Orientation of friction angles δ from normal to the back of wall must be
introduced in accord with the mutual movement of structure and soil. With increasing value of
δ the value of active earth pressure decreases, i.e. the resultant force of active earth pressure
deviates from the normal direction - see figure:
-1074-
Distribution of earth pressure along structure for δ ≠ 0

The magnitude δ can be usually found in the range of δ ≤ 1/3φ to δ = 2/3φ. The values of
orientation of the friction angle δ between the soil and the structure are stored in table of
values of δ for various interfaces and in table of recommended values for |δ| / φ. The value of δ
≤ 1/3φ can be used if assuming smooth treatment of the back of sheeting structure (foil and
coating against ground water). For untreated face it is not reasonable to exceed the value of
δ = 2/3φ. When selecting the value of δ it is necessary to reflect also other conditions,
particularly the force equation of equilibrium in the vertical direction. One should decide
whether the structure is capable of transmitting the vertical surcharge due to friction on its
back without excessive vertical deformation. Otherwise it is necessary to reduce the value of δ,
since only partial mobilization of friction on the back of wall may occur. In case of uncertainty it
is always safer to assume smaller vale of δ.
Table of Ultimate Friction Factors for Dissimilar

Materials
Values of the angle δ for different interfaces (according to the NAVFAC standards)
Interface material Friction Friction

factor tg(δ) angle δ [°]
Mass concrete on the following foundation

materials:
Clean sound rock 0.70 35
Clean gravel, gravel-sand mixtures, coarse sand 0.55 - 0.6 29 - 31
Clean fine to medium sand, silty medium to coarse sand, 0.45 - 0.55
silty or clayey gravel
Clean fine sand, silty or clayey fine to medium sand 0.35 - 0,45 19 - 24
Fine sandy silt, nonplastic silt 0.30 - 0.30 17 - 19
Very stiff and hard residual or preconsolidated clay 0.40 - 0.50 22 - 26
Medium stiff and stiff clay and silty clay 0.30 - 0.35 17 - 19
-1075-
Steel sheet piles against the following soils:
Clean gravel, gravel-sand mixtures, well-graded rock fill 0.40 22

with spalls
Clean sand, silty sand-gravel mixture, single size hard 0.30 17

rock fill
Silty sand, gravel or sand mixed with silt or clay 0.25 14
Fine sandy silt, nonplastic silt 0.20 11
Formed concrete or concrete sheet piling against

the following soils:
Clean gravel, gravel-sand mixture, well-graded rock fill 0.40 - 0.50 22 - 26

with spalls
Clean sand, silty sand-gravel mixture, single size hard 0.30 - 0.40 17 - 22
rock fill
Silty sand, gravel or sand mixed with silt or clay 0.30 17
Fine sandy silt, nonplastic silt 0.25 14
Various structural materials:
Dressed soft rock on dressed soft rock 0.70 35
Dressed hard rock on dressed soft rock 0.65 33
Dressed hard rock on dressed hard rock 0.55 29
Masonry on wood (Gross grain) 0.50 26
Steel on steel at sheet pile interlocks 0.30 17
Adhesion of Soil
When performing the analysis in the total stress state for active or passive earth pressure it is
necessary to consider the total (undrained) shear strength of soil cu and the adhesion a of soil
to the structure face. The value of adhesion a is usually considered as a fraction of the soil
cohesion c. The typical values of a for a given range of the cohesion c are listed in the following
table.
Common values of the adhesion of soil a
-1076-
Soil Cohesion c [kPa] Adhesion a [kPa]
Soft and very soft cohesive 0 - 12 0 - 12

soil
Cohesive soil with medium 12 - 24 12 - 24

consistency
Stiff cohesive soil 24 - 48 24 - 36
Hard cohesive soil 48 - 96 36 - 46
Parameters of Rocks
Rock parameters of orientation with respect to strength of rock in pure compression
Compressiv Strength parameter of GSI Cohesion of Angle of internal

e strength rock after Hoek rock friction of rock
[-]
of rock
σci [MPa] mi [-] [-] c [kPa] φ [ °]
150 25 75 7000 - 13000 46 - 68
80 12 50 3000 - 4000 30 - 65
50 16 75 2000 - 4000 40 - 60
30 15 65 1000 - 2000 40 - 60
20 8 30 400 - 600 20 - 44
15 10 24 300 - 500 24 - 38
5 10 20 90 - 100 23 - 28
Unlike soils (both cohesive and cohesionless) the magnitude of the angle of internal friction
(sometimes refer to as the angle of shear strength) varies and depends on the current state of
stress in the rock body. Graphically it is represented by the angle of the tangent to the
envelope of Mohr circles constructed for the ultimate stress state. The value of φ gradually
decreases with the increasing value of stress σ. If the elastic regime is exceeded (onset of
plastic deformation) we set φ = 0. As a representative value of the angle of internal friction φ
we denote the value φ0 associated with the stress σ = 0. In practical applications the part of
the Mohr envelope between tensile Rt and compressive Rd circles is usually replaced by the
tangent to both circles (see Fig.) The magnitude of the angle of internal friction then follows
from:
-1077-
Determination φ0 from Mohr circle

The angle of internal friction can be estimated by measuring angles of slip planes on remaining
parts of tested specimens together with the following formula:
Some values of orientation:

weathered sand conglomerate, lowly cracked 35 - 44°
unweathered clay slate, medium cracked 30 - 40°
unweathered tuff, medium cracked 33 - 42°
unweathered diabase 39 - 50°
unweathered phantanite, lowly cracked 45 - 52°
Analysis of Walls
Verification analysis of walls can be performed using:
• the theory of limit state (when performing the analysis according to EN 1997 or LRFD the
structure is verified in this particular way)
• the safety factor
In addition, the bearing capacity of foundation soil is examined for both cases.
Following forces are used in the verification:
• weight of wall - depends on the shape and unit weight of wall (for input use the
"Material" dialog window) - uplift pressure is introduced for walls found below the
groundwater table
• resistance on front face - when inputting the resistance on front face the corresponding
force acts as the pressure at rest, or passive pressure or reduced passive pressure
• gravity forces of earth wedges - an arbitrary number of these forces may occur depending
on the shape of structure
• active earth pressure or pressure at rest acting on the structure - the basic load of
structure due earth pressures - depending on the selected option in the frame "Settings"
the pressure is computed either with or without reduction of input soil parameters
• forces due to water effects or pore pressure, respectively
-1078-
• forces due to surcharge - a single force corresponds to each input surcharge. If the
magnitude of force due to surcharge is equal to zero (the surcharge has no effect on a
structure) then it does not appear in the picture but only in the table listing
• Applied forces - forces entering the analysis are displayed
• forces due to earthquake - several forces enter the analysis due to earthquake -
increase of earth pressure acting on a structure, reduction of passive pressure on the front
face of a structure, or force due to free water behind structure
• mesh overhangs and reinforcements are displayed and included providing they appear in
the analysis
• base anchorage of walls
Evaluation of Forces in the Footing Bottom

After computing forces acting on the structure the program determines the overall vertical Fv
and horizontal Fh forces, computes the forces acting in the footing bottom (normal force N and
shear force H):
Forces acting in the footing bottom
Verification - Limit States

Program evaluates normal and shear force in the footing bottom and then verifies the wall
against overturning and sliding. For walls with a flat footing bottom and specified jump it is
possible to account for the wall jump either in the form of pressure acting on the front face or
by considering a wall with an inclined footing bottom.
Check for overturning stability:
where: Movr - overturning moment

γo - reduction coefficient of overturning
Mres - resisting moment
-1079-
Check for slip:
where: N - normal force acting in the footing bottom

φd - design angle of internal friction of soil
cd - design cohesion of soil
d - width of wall heel
e - eccentricity
γs - reduction coefficient of sliding resistance
H - shear force acting in the footing bottom
Fres - resisting force (from georeinforcement and mesh overlap)
µ - reduction coefficient of contact base - soil
where eccentricity e:

N - normal force acting in the footing bottom
Horizontal components of forces are included in the shear force and overturning moment,
vertical components of forces are included in the normal force and resisting moment. The
resisting forces and moments also include horizontal forces from georeinforcements and
overlapping meshes.
Verification - Safety Factor

Program evaluates normal and shear force in the footing bottom and then verifies the wall
against overturning and sliding. For walls with a flat footing bottom and specified jump it is
possible to account for the wall jump either in the form of pressure acting on the front face or
by considering a wall with an inclined footing bottom.
Check for overturning stability:

SFo - safety factor for overturning
Check for slip:
-1080-

e - eccentricity
H - shear force acting in the footing bottom
SFs - safety factor foe sliding resistance
µ - reduction coefficient of contact base - soil
where eccentricity e:

N - normal force acting in the footing bottom
Horizontal components of forces are included in the shear force and overturning moment,
vertical components of forces are included in the normal force and resisting moment. The
resisting forces and moments also include horizontal forces from georeinforcements and
overlapping meshes.
Internal Sliding
This limit state evaluates the possibility of structure to slide along the reinforcement. For the
o
selected reinforcement the program searches for a critical slip surface in the range of 45 - 90
from the end of given reinforcement.
For each slip surfaces the program calculates the shear and resisting forces and performs
verification.
The shear forces include:
• active pressure on a fictitious wall
• forces due to surcharge behind the wall
The resisting forces include:
• resistance of the wall structure against slip (it is calculated as for the wall dimensioning)
• friction between reinforcement and the sliding block
• forces due to other reinforcements
-1081-
The resisting force due to friction between reinforcement and the sliding block is given by:
where: N - normal force acting on reinforcement (due to self weight of soil and
surcharge behind the fictitious wall)
φ - angle of internal friction of soil surrounding the reinforcement
Cds - coefficient of reduction of friction on reinforcement
The actual verification is then performed based on the input specified in the "Wall analysis"
tab, according to the theory of limit states and factor of safety. It has to hold:
resp.
where: Hres - resisting force

Hact - active force
SFsr - safety factor for sliding along geo-reinforcement
Reinforcements
Reinforcements or overhangs of mesh behind the wall, respectively, may considerably increase
the wall stability. The basic parameter of reinforcement is the tensile strength Rt. A design
value of this parameter is used in all programs (except for the Redi-Rock wall program), i.e.
the tensile strength of reinforcement reduced by coefficients taking into account the effect of
durability, creep, environment chemistry and installation damage. The force transmitted by
reinforcement can never exceed the assigned tensile strength Rt (a default value of 40
kN/m is used for gabions).
The second characteristic is the pull-out strength Tp. This parameter determines the
anchoring length, i.e. the required length of reinforcement in the soil, for which the
reinforcement is fully stressed attaining the value Rt. Since the realistic values of the pull-out
strength are difficult to determine, the program offers three options for their calculation,
respectively for the calculation of the force F transmitted by the reinforcement.
Length of mesh step joint or reinforcement behind blocks, respectively
-1082-
Calculate pull-out force

The pull-out force F is given by:
where: σ - normal stress due to self weight at the intersection of mesh and slip
surface
C - coefficient of interaction (0,8 by default)
l - length of mesh step joint behind the slip surface into the soil body
Computation of the angle υa is described in chapter earth wedge.

Input reinforcement anchor length lk
An anchoring length lk is specified. This parameter is determined by the shear strength
developed between the mesh and the soil gradually increasing from zero to its limit value
(measured from the end of reinforcement fixed in soil).
where: l - length of mesh step joint behind the slip surface into the soil body
lk - anchoring length of reinforcement
Rt - tensile strength
Input mesh pull-out resistance Tp

where: l - length of mesh step joint behind the slip surface into the soil body
Tp - pull-out resistance of mesh
Base Anchorage
An anchorage of wall footing can be specified in program "Cantilever Wall". It is necessary to
specify an anchor location, dimensions of a drill hole, and spacing of anchors.
Two limit states of bearing capacity are defined for an anchor:
• bearing capacity against pulling-out Re [kN/m]
• strength of anchor Rt [kN]
-1083-
Base anchorage
Bearing capacities can be either input or computed from the input values using the following
expressions:
where: Tp - pull-out resistance

d - drill hole diameter
a - ultimate bond
SFe - safety factor against pulling-out
where: Rt - strength of anchor

ds - anchor diameter
fy - yield strength of anchor
SFt - safety factor against pulling-apart
Approximate values of bearing capacity against pulling-out
-1084-
Material Ultimate Ultimate strength for specified hole diameter [kN/m]

bond
2 65 mm 75 mm 90 mm 100 mm 150 mm
[N/mm ]
Soft shale 0.21 - 42 - 169 49 - 195 59 - 234 65 - 260 98 - 391

0,83
Sandstone 0.83 - 169 - 350 195 - 407 234 - 486 260 - 543 391 - 562
1,73
Slate, Hard 0.86 - 175 - 281 202 - 325 243 - 390 270 - 433 405 - 562
Shale 1,38
Soft Limestone 1.00 - 204 - 310 235 - 358 282 - 429 314 - 477 471 - 562
1.52
Granite, Basalt 1.72 - 351 - 562 405 - 562 486 - 562 540 - 562 562 - 562
3.10
Concrete 1.38 - 281 - 562 325 - 562 390 - 562 433 - 562 562 - 562
2.76
Accounting for Wall Jump

Two options are available to account for the foundation wall jump in the analysis as shown in
the figure (programs "Cantilever Wall" and "Masonry Wall").
Options to account for wall jump

If the jump is assumed as an inclined footing bottom, then a new shape of the footing
bottom is considered and the structure front face resistance is included only up to a depth of
the wall front face.
If the jump influence is considered as a front face resistance the analysis assumes a flat
footing bottom (as if there was no jump), but the structure front face resistance included up to
a depth of jump. In such a case computation of the structure front face resistance must also
be input - otherwise the jump influence is neglected.
-1085-
The jump introduced below the wall foundation is always considered as a structure front face
resistance.
Assuming wall jump in the middle
Bearing Capacity of Foundation Soil

Verification analysis of the bearing capacity of foundation soil takes into account forces
obtained from all already performed verifications of the overall stability of structure (the theory
of limit states, safety factor). To that end, the following relationships are used:
Usually, the shape of contact stress in footing bottom is considered as a constant on reduced
length of footing.
Trapeziod shape of stress is required according to some standards. In this case, the verification
is performed for the maximum value σmax.
-1086-

e max. eccentricity of normal force
Rd - bearing capacity of foundation soil
ealw - allowable eccentricity (this value is defined in the frame "Settings" in tab
"Wall analysis")
For calculation of bearing capacity of foundation soil (in the case of assuming shallow
foundation under the wall) program allows to calculate design or service load, that acts at
the center of the footing bottom. When transferring data and results in the program "Spread
Footing" it is possible to calculate settlement and rotation of foundation correctly. For
assuming a pile foundation in the frame "Foundation" it is possible to view internal forces in
the heads of piles (for one series of piles), respectively at the center of the footing bottom (for
planar pile grid).
Dialog window "Bearing capacity"
Wall Dimensioning
After computing forces acting on the structure the program determines all internal forces in the
verified cross-section (normal force N, shear force Q and moment M) and then verifies the
cross-section bearing capacity employing one of the setting selected in the "Wall analysis" tab.
Only the forces found above the verified joint (see figure) are assumed for dimensioning.
These forces are not multiplied by any design coefficients.
-1087-
Forces entering the analysis

The front jump of wall as well as the back jump of wall is verified against the load caused by
the bending moment and shear force. Stress in the footing bottom can be assumed either
constant (CSN) or linear (EC).
Assuming linear variation of stress in the footing bottom the distribution of stress is
provided by:
or when excluding tension:
where: e - eccentricity of normal force N

d - width of wall foundation
N - normal force acting in the footing bottom (see verification according to
limit states or factor of safety, respectively)
Bending moment and shear force are determined as reaction developed on the cantilever beam
as shown in figure:
Internal forces acting on wall jump

Verification of the back jump of wall (top tensile reinforcement in the wall jump,
respectively) is performed only in some countries and usually is not required. The programs
"Cantilever wall" and "Reinforced wall" allow in version 5.5 for designing the reinforcement
in the back jump of wall. The cross-section is then assumed to be loaded by the self weight of
structure, earth wedge, surcharge, anchorage force and the force associated with contact
pressure in the soil. Forces due to pressure are accounted for only if having a negative impact.
-1088-
Forces introduced by the user are not reflected at all.

The cross-section is checked against the load caused by the bending moment and shear force.
Counterfort/Buttress Wall Dimensioning

After computing forces acting on the structure the program determines all internal forces in the
verified cross-section (shear force Q and moment M) and then verifies the cross-section
bearing capacity employing one of the setting selected in the "Wall analysis" tab.
Wall stem - horizontal direction
Maximal moment at the center of the span between counterforts/buttresses at the front side of
the wall stem:
Maximal moment at the counterfort/buttress at the back side of the wall stem:
Maximal shear force:
where: σpi - average stress at the back side of the wall stem
l - counterfort/buttress spacing
Wall stem - vertical direction

Maximal moment at the center of wall height at the front side of the wall stem:
Maximal moment at the bottom at the back side of the wall stem:
where: σH - stress at the bottom at the back side of the wall stem
H - wall height
l - counterfort/buttress spacing
Wall jump - buttress wall

Maximal moment at the center of the span between buttresses at the upper side of the wall
jump:
Maximal moment at the buttress at the bottom side of the wall jump:
-1089-
where: σj1 - maximal stress under wall jump

l - buttress spacing
Wall heel - counterfort wall

Maximal moment at the center of the span between counterforts at the upper side of the wall
heel:
Maximal moment at the counterfort at the bottom side of the wall heel:
where: σj - maximal stress under wall heel

l - counterfort spacing
Counterfort / Buttress of the wall

Counterfort / Buttress is verified as rectangular cross-section. Calculation of internal forces is
same as for wall stem of cantilever wall. Internal forces are multiplied by the loading width l+b
(counterfort/buttress spacing + counterfort/buttress thickness).
Internal forces at places of other checks (Wall heel - buttress wall, Wall jump - counterfort
wall) are calculated same as for cantilever wall.
Internal Stability of a Gabion

The internal stability of gabion wall can be examined with the help of:
• the theory of limit states
• factor of safety
Verification of joints between individual blocks is performed in the "Dimensioning" frame. The
structure above the block is loaded by active pressure and corresponding forces are
determined in the same way as for the verification of the entire wall. A loose filling is used in
the analysis - not hand-placed rockfill - but its effect can be simulated using a very high angle
of internal friction. It can be assumed that after some time due to action of filling aggregate
the stress in meshes will drop down. Individual sections of the gabion wall are checked for the
maximum normal and shear stress. With the help of these variables it is possible to modify the
slope of structure face by creating terraces or by increasing the slope of face of wall α.
Assuming load applied to the bottom block is schematically represented as:
-1090-
Load on the bottom block

Normal stress in the center of the bottom block is given by:
where: N - normal force acting on the bottom block

B - width of upper block
e - eccentricity
M - moment acting on the bottom block
h - height of bottom block
γ - unit weight of the bottom block material
α - gabion slope
Pressure acting on the wall of the bottom block is determined as an increased active
pressure:
where: φd - design angle of internal friction of the bottom block material

cd - design cohesion of the bottom block material
γ - unit weight of material of the bottom block
-1091-

B - width of upper block
α - gabion slope
T - average value of pressure acting on face of the bottom block
σ - maximal normal stress acting on the bottom block
Widths of meshes of the bottom block per one running meter of the gabion wall are:
where: Dupp - width of upper mesh between blocks loaded in tension

Dtotal - overall width of meshes loaded in compression T
v - spacing of vertical meshes
The program allows for analysis of gabions with both simple and double mesh placed between
blocks. For double meshes the input tensile strength of mesh (frame "Material" - the "Edit
material" dialog window) should be twice as large as the value assumed for simple meshes.
Geometry of gabions
-1092-
Internal Stability of a Gabion Wall - Safety Factor

The following cases are assumed when examining the internal stability of the gabion wall using
the concept of factor of safety:
1) Check for overturning stability:

SFo - safety factor for overturning
2) Check for slip:
where: N - normal force

d - width of block
e - eccentricity
H - shear force
SFs - safety factor for sliding resistance
µ - reduction coefficient
3) Check for bearing capacity with respect to the lateral pressure:
where: T - average value of pressure acting on face of the bottom block

S - force per one running meter of the joint
Su - joint bearing capacity (for input use the frame "Material")
SFn - safety factor mesh strength (for input use the "Wall analysis" tab -
default value is 1.5)
b - width = 1 m of structure width
h height of the block
Dtotal overall width of meshes loaded in compression T
4) Check for bearing capacityof joint between blocks:
-1093-
where: Nd - tensile force per one running meter of the upper joint
Nu - strength of mesh (for input use the frame "Material")
SFn - safety factor mesh strength (for input use the "Wall analysis" tab -
default value is 1.5)
Qtr - shear force transmitted by friction and cohesion between blocks
γf - reduction coefficient of friction between blocks (for input use the "Wall
analysis" tab)
h - height of the block
Dtotal - overall width of meshes loaded in compression T
Dupp - width of upper mesh between blocks loaded in tension
Internal stability of a Gabion Wall - Limit States

Reduced parameters of the gabion material, which depend on the coefficients set in the "Wall
analysis" tab, are used in the verification analysis.
1) Check for overturning stability:

2) Check for slip:

d - width of block
e - eccentricity
γs - reduction coefficient of sliding resistance
H - shear force
-1094-
µ - reduction coefficient
3) Check for bearing capacity with respect to the lateral pressure:
where: T - average value of pressure acting on the face of bottom block

S - force per one running meter of the joint
Su - joint bearing capacity (for input use the "Material" frame)
b - width = 1m of structure width
h - height of the block
Dtota - overall width of meshes loaded in compression T
l
4) Check for bearing capacityof joint between blocks:
where: Nd - tensile force per one running meter of the upper joint of the bottom block
Nu - strength of mesh (for input use the frame "Material")
Qtr - shear force transmitted by friction and cohesion between blocks
γt - reduction coefficient of friction between blocks (for input use the "Wall
analysis")
h height of the block
Dtota overall width of meshes loaded in compression T
l
Dupp width of upper mesh between blocks loaded in tension
Calculating Abutment Forces

An abutment is analyzed per 1 m (1ft). All forces entering the analysis are therefore adjusted in
the program as follows:
• the abutment self weight, assumed per 1 m (1ft), is calculated from the input transverse
cross-section
• reactions inserted by the bridge and the approach slab are input in kN (kpi) using
the values for the whole abutment, these values are in the analysis divided by
the abutment length
-1095-
• soil pressure is determined per 1 m (1ft) and then multiplied by the ratio length of load
due to soil / abutment length,
• weight of soil wedges is determined per 1 m (1ft) and then multiplied by the
ratio length of load due to soil / abutment length,
• surcharge is determined per 1 m (1ft) and then multiplied by the ratio length of load
due to soil / abutment length,
• input forces and front face resistance are assumed per 1 m without reduction
• wing walls - the wing walls self-weight is computed from their geometry; before
introduced in the stem design and foundation verification it is divided by the abutment
length (it is the user responsibility to either include or exclude the effect of wing walls in
from the analysis).
Computation of individual abutment forces is described in more detail in chapter "Wall
analyses".
All forces acting in the foundation joint that are introduced in the verification analysis (except
for the front face resistance) are multiplied by the ratio abutment length / foundation
length.
Geometry of bridge abutment
Reduced Passive Earth Pressure

Evolution of passive earth pressure σp corresponds to the maximal displacement of a structure
pushed into the soil. Such a displacement might not, however, occur (e.g. in the case of fixed
sheeting structures) and the structure is loaded by the reduced passive earth pressure σps. The
value of reduced passive earth pressure σps can range from the value of earth pressure at rest
σr (in the case of zero deformation) up to the value of passive earth pressure σp. Figure shows
the dependence of values of earth pressure of a cohesionless soil (soil resistance) on the actual
displacement d to maximal displacement dmax ratio (when activating passing earth pressure
σp).
-1096-
Dependence of earth pressure values on the ratio of actual structure deformation
Nailed Slope
The program "Nailed Slope" allows the following verifications:
• Verification of structure internal stability (plane or broken slip surface, bearing capacity of
nails)
• Verification of fictitious wall - the same as gravity wall verification
• Verification of structure concrete cover (dimensioning)
• Verification of overall stability using the program "Slope Stability"
Analysis of Internal Stability

An internal stability of a structure is checked assuming two types of a slip surface:
• Plane slip surface
Plane slip surface

• Broken slip surface
-1097-
Broken slip surface

In both cases a specific slip surface is examined for a variation of angle ϑ.
When running an optimization analysis the calculation is carried out for all benches with a
variation of the angle of slip surface ν changing from 1 up to 89 degrees with a one degree
step.
A verification analysis of internal stability can be performed using either the factor of safety or
the theory of limit states depending on the setting in the "Wall analysis" tab.
The analysis checks whether a ratio of resisting and shear (driving) forces acting on a slip
surface is greater than the input factor of safety. The following forces are employed:
Shear forces:
• component of gravity force parallel to slip surface
• in case of broken slip surface - component of active earth pressure acting on vertical part
of structure and parallel to slip surface (pressure is determined without reduction of input
parameters)
• horizontal forces due to earthquake
Resisting forces:
• soil friction and cohesion along slip surface
• sum of forces transmitted by nails
Analysis of Bearing Capacity of the Nails

For each nail the following bearing capacities are either computed or input:
Rf - nail head strength
Rt - nail strength against breaking
Tp - pull-out nail bearing capacity
Strength characteristics of a nail represent the basic parameters to compute the total
bearing capacity of a nail.
The nail strength against breaking follows from:
where: Rt - strength against breaking
-1098-
ds - nail diameter
fy - strength of nail material
SFt - factor of safety against breaking
The pull-out nail bearing capacity is calculated by one of the following ways:
1. calculate from skin friction:
where: Tp - pull-out nail bearing capacity [kN/m]

d - hole diameter
gs - skin friction, given either as parameter of the nail or as soil parameter
SFe - factor of safety against pull-out
2. calculate from effective stress
where:

d - hole diameter
φ - effective angle of internal friction of soil
c - effective cohesion of soil
3. calculate according to HA 68/94

d - hole diameter
σn - average radial effective stress
-1099-
Average radial effective stress σn is calculated by following formula:
where:
Nail head strength is evaluated by formula:
where: l - nail length

Smax - maximum spacing of nails in a structure
SFf - factor of safety of nail head strength
If the nail is not anchored to the structure cover, it is possible to set the nail head strength to
zero.
Recommended Values of Skin Friction

The table is based on field and laboratory tests.
Skin friction: Classic drilled nails
1)
qs,k [kPa] according to EA Pfähle
Cohesionless soils Cohesive soils Rocks
2) 2 3) 2 4) 2
qc [MN/m ] cu [kN/m ] qu,k [MN/m ]
7.5 15 25 60 150 250 0.5 5 20
55 -80 105 - 130 30 - 40 50 -65 65 - 85 70 - 500 500 -

140 -170 250 -1000 2000
Notes:
1) Determination of skin friction should be part of geological survey
2) Cone resistance, CPT test (according to DIN EN ISO 22476-1)
3) Total cohesion of soil
-1100-
4) Uniaxial compression strength

Literature:
EA-Pfähle, ISBN: 978-3-433-03005-9
Values in the table based on soil and rock classification.

Estimated bond strength of soil nails in soil and rock (source: Elias a Juran, 1991)
Material Construction Soil / rock type Ultimate skin

method friction qs [kPa]
Rock Rotary drilled Marl / limestone 300 - 400
Phyllite 100 - 300
Chalk 500 - 600
Soft dolomite 400 - 600
Fissured dolomite 600 - 1000
Weathered 200 - 300

sandstone
Weathered shale 100 - 150
Weathered schist 100 - 175
Basalt 500 - 600
Slate / hard shale 300 - 400
Cohesionless Rotary drilled Sand / gravel 100 - 180

soils
Silty sand 100 - 150
Silt 40 - 120
Piedmont residual 40 - 120
Fine colluvium 75 - 150
Driven casing Sand / gravel

-low overburden 190 - 240
-high overburden 280 - 430
Dense moraine 380 - 480
Colluvium 100 - 180
Augered Silty sand fill 20 - 40
-1101-
Silty fine sand 55 - 90
Silty clayey sand 60 - 140
Jet grouted Sand 380
Sand gravel 700
Fine - grained Rotary drilled Silty clay 35 - 50

soils
Driven casing Clayey silt 90 - 140
Augered Loess 25 - 75
Soft clay 20 - 30
Stiff clay 40 - 60
Stiff clayey silt 40 - 100
Calcareous sandy 90 - 140

clay
Note: Convert values in kPa to psf by multiplying by 20.9. Convert values in kPa to psi by
multiplying by 0.145.
Total Bearing Capacity of a Nail

Bearing capacity of nail is determined based on the location of its intersection with a slip
surface. If a nail is found completely in front of the slip surface, then it does not enter the
calculation. If a nail crosses the slip surface, then its bearing capacity is determined as:
where: x - nail length behind slip surface in direction of soil body

y - nail length in front of slip surface
Rf - nail cap bearing capacity
-1102-
Distribution of tensile force along nail
Verification - Factor of Safety

The analysis checks whether a ratio of resisting and shear (driving) forces acting on a slip
surface is greater than the input factor of safety.
A factor of safety on the input slips forces is thus provided by:
where: G - gravity force

Sa,vert - vertical component of active pressure
Sa,hor - horizontal component of active pressure
di - length of ith section slip surface
d - length of slip surface

Fh,n - bearing capacity of nth nail behind slip surface per 1 running meter
ci - cohesion of ith soil layer
φi - angle o internal friction of ith layer
υ - inclination of slip surface
-1103-
α - inclination of nails from horizontal direction
Verification - Theory of Limit States

The analysis checks whether the passive (resisting) forces Fp acting on a slip surface are
greater than the active (shear) forces Fa:
where: G - gravity force

Sa,vert - vertical component of active pressure
Sa,hor - horizontal component of active pressure
di - length of ith section slip surface
d - length of slip surface

Fh,n - bearing capacity of nth nail behind slip surface per 1 running meter
ci - cohesion of ith soil layer
φi - angle of internal friction of ith layer
υ - inclination of slip surface

α - inclination of nails from horizontal direction
Nail Force
The magnitude of active earth pressure is reduced using a coefficient kn. The recommended
(experimentally determined) value is kn = 0,85.
Forces transmitted by individual nails are determined such that a particular portion of the
calculated earth pressure is assigned to a given bench. Each nail is then loaded by the
corresponding portion of the active earth pressure.
-1104-
Forces transmitted by individual nails

The nail force is provided by:
where: b - nail spacing

α - nail inclination
kn - reduction coefficient
Ta,hor - active earth pressure acting on a given bench
Dimensioning of Concrete Cover

The concrete cover of a nailed slope is designed to sustain an active earth pressure. So,
the structure is assumed to be subdivided into individual intermediate design strips.
In the vertical direction the nail cap is modeled as a support and joint between benches as
an internal hinge.
In the horizontal direction the program generates (by default) a structure with five supports
uniformly loaded by the magnitude of active pressure up to a depth of the nail cap.
The program further allows for the verification of concrete cover reinfocement of a structure
loaded by the bending moment.
Constructing scheme of the model design including load is evident from the figure:
-1105-
Dimensioning of concrete cover
Excavation Design
GEO5 enables a complete design and analysis of vertical sheeting structure of many types.
Retaining walls can be anchored, strutted or non-anchored.
The basic program for analysis of anchored or strutted retaining walls is "Sheeting Check". It
allows calculations of real structure behavior using stages of construction, calculations of
deformation and pressures acting upon the structure, verification of internal anchor stability
and verification of steel, plastic, timber or reinforced concrete cross-sections.
The "Sheeting Design" program is designated for a fast design of non-anchored structures, and
basic design of anchored structures. The program calculates the required length of structure in
soil and internal forces on structure. The verification of cross-section (concrete, steel, timber,
plastic) can be performed.
Special case of shoring structure made in the slope to prevent a landslide is the row of anti-
slide piles. The program "Anti-slide Pile" allows analysis of this structure.
Cross-Sections Input
Combo list in the dialog window "Edit section" contains individual structural types of shoring
walls:
• Pile curtain
-1106-
• Reinforced concrete rectangular wall

• Sheet pile wall
• Steel I cross-section
• Plastic sheet pile (vinyl)
• User input of cross-sectional characteristics
Some types of cross-sections can be saved in "User's catalog" (button "User's catalog").
Dialog window "Edit section"
Pile Curtain
The Pile curtain requires input of:
• Cross-section name (default name is generated by program, it can be changed using
"User def." check box)
• Coefficient of pressure reduction below ditch bottom - this coefficient is used for
reduction of pressures below ditch bottom for calculation of braced sheeting - it can be
either input or calculated automatically (for classical non-braced sheeting this coefficient
-1107-
is equal to 1.0)
• Cross-section type (circle, square)
• Pile diameter d and their spacing a
• Material of pile (concrete, wood)
Parameters input - pile curtain
Reinforced Concrete Rectangular Wall

The Reinforced concrete rectangular wall requires input of:
• Wall thickness h
-1108-
Parameters input - reinforced concrete rectangular wall
Sheet Pile
The Sheet pile requires input of:
• Cross-section type - it is selected in the dialog window "Catalog of profiles" (button
"Catalog")
The catalog of profiles contains a lot of classes of sheet piles and casings from different
manufacturers (see below). If you use different types of products, please contact us
([email protected]), we will implement it into our catalog in the program.
-1109-
Parameters input - sheet pile

Literature:
Implemented sheet piles in our catalog
Steel sheet piles:
• Vítkovice steel - Product catalog of sheet piles
• Arcelor Mittal - Steel Sheet Piling, General Catalogue 2012
• ThyssenKrupp Bautechnik - Sheet Piling Handbook
• Chinese standard GB/T 20933-2014 Hot rolled sheet pile
• Bethlehem Steel Sheet Piling
• Gerdau Steel Sheet Piling
Steel sheet piles cold formed:
• Mer Lion Metals - Cold Formed Steel Sheet Piles Catalogue
Trench sheeting:
• ThyssenKrupp Bautechnik - Kaltgewalzte Spundwandprofile – Kanaldielen
Sheet piles O WOM/WOF:
• Mer Lion Metals - Steel Sheet Piles Catalogue
• PilePro Group Company - Sheet Pile Connectors
Plastic Sheet Pile (Vinyl)

The Plastic sheet pile requires input of:
-1110-

• Section length l
"Catalog")
The catalog of profiles contains a lot of classes of sheet piles and casings from different
manufacturers (see below). If you use different types of products, please contact us
([email protected]), we will implement it into our catalog in the program.
Parameters input - plastic sheet pile

Plastic sheet piles are very soft for bending and their deformations are much higher then
deformation of steel or concrete structures. Standard method for determination of modulus of
subgrade reaction (Schmitt) cannot be used for plastic material. If the Schmitt method is
selected, program automatically switch to method "Vinyl" . In this case modulus of
subgrade reaction is calculated from Oedometric modulus of soil - kh = 2/3 Eoed.
Other methods remain the same as for other types of cross section.
The verification of the bearing capacity of plastic sheet pile can be carried out in the frame
"Dimensioning".
Literature:
• Katalog Everlast Synthetic Products, LLC - can be found at
https://everlastseawalls.com/seawall-products/vinyl-sheet-piling
Steel I-section
The Steel I-section requires input of:
-1111-

either input or calculated automatically (for classical non-braced sheeting this coefficient is
equal to 1.0)
• Spacing of profiles
"Catalog"), or in the dialog window "Cross-section editor" (button "Welded")
Parameters input - steel I-section
Steel 2xU-profile
The Steel 2xU-profile requires input of:
either input or calculated automatically (for classical non-braced sheeting this coefficient is
equal to 1.0)
-1112-
• Spacing of profiles
"Catalog"), or in the dialog window "Cross-section editor" (button "Welded")
Parameters input - steel 2xU-section
User Input of A, I, E, G
In the case of user input of geometry it is necessary to enter values of sectional ( A,I) and
material (E,G) properties.
-1113-
Input of sectional (A, I) and material properties (E, G)

In the case of verification of steel cross-section (check box "Verify steel cross-section") the
input of value of sectional modulus (W) is required. Material parameters (E, G) are then
transfered from the frame "Material".
The cross-section can be verified only for bending + compression.
-1114-
Input of sectional and material properties
User Catalog
The user catalog allows the user to define and store own cross-sections and their
characteristics that appear in a sheeting structure. At first use of the catalog (has not been yet
created) the program prompts a warning message that no catalog was found. Then, pressing
the button "OK" opens the "Save as" dialog window that allows to enter the catalog name and
saving it into a specified location by pressing the "Save" button (by default a folder used for
saving the project data is assumed).
The program allows the user to create more than one catalog. The next catalog is created by
pressing the "New" button - the program asks, whether the current catalog should be replaced
(the currently loaded catalog is not deleted!) and saves the new catalog under a new
name. The "Open" button allows for load an arbitrary user catalog and by pressing the "Save
as" button for saving it under a different name.
"Export TXT" button allows for exporting of currently loaded user catalog to text file.
-1115-
Dialog window at first use - user catalog of cross-sections

The "User's catalog" dialog window contains a table listing the user defined cross-sections.
The “Add item” button opens the “New catalog item” dialog window that allows for
specifying and subsequent saving of characteristics of a new cross-section into the catalog.
Buttons “Edit item” and “Remove item” serve to edit individual items in the table.
The "Accept current" button accepts the current cross-sectional characteristics of a cross-
section specified in the "New section" dialog window and opens the "New catalog item"
dialog window that allows for modifying and saving the current cross-section.
Dialog windows "User's catalog" and "New catalog item"
Automatic Calculation of the Coefficient of Pressure

Reduction Below Ditch Bottom
For automatic calculation, the coefficient of pressure reduction below ditch bottom k [-] is
determined as follows:
• circular pile curtain (a)
k = 0.9 (1.5d + 0.5)/a (d ≤ 1 m)
k = 0.9 (d + 1)/a (d > 1 m)
• rectangular pile curtain or steel I-section (b)

k = (1.5b + 0.5)/a (b ≤ 1 m)
k = (b + 1)/a (b > 1 m)
Note: If coefficient k > 1, then k = 1.

where: d - pile diameter
-1116-
b - footprint of rectangular pile, or flange width of steel I-section

a - spacing of soldier beams, or spacing between piles
The coefficient of pressure reduction below ditch bottom k
Sheeting Design
Analyses in the program "Sheeting design" can be divided into three groups:
• Analysis of non-anchored walls (e.g. sheet pile wall)
• Analysis of anchored walls fixed at heel
• Analysis of anchored walls simply supported at heel
It is also possible to analyze soldier pile walls (braced sheeting) using this program.
Analysis of Sheet Pile Wall

A pile sheeting wall is analyzed using a standard approach that account for the effect of earth
pressures. In general, the active earth pressure develops behind the structure while the
passive earth pressure appears in front of the structure.
Based on the theory of limit states the program searches in an iterative way a point on the
wall to satisfy the moment equation of equilibrium in the form:
Once this is accomplished, the program continues by determining the wall heel location for
which the equilibrium of shear forces is fulfilled (computation of depth of fixed end). The
overall length of the analyzed structure is found this way.
When applying approach based on the factor of safety the program searches, in an iterative
way, a point to get:
It is obvious that the distribution of internal forces resulting from this approach is not very
realistic. In some countries, however, this approach is required.
The computation can be driven either by choosing a minimal dimensioning pressure or by
reduction of passive pressure. Assuming the actual magnitude of the passive earth pressure
provides deformations of the analyzed structure, which cannot usually occur. The actual
passive pressure can attain for walls free of deformation the value of pressure at rest as well
as all intermediate values up to the value of passive pressure for fully deformed wall (rotation
app. 10 mRad - i.e. deformation 10 mm per 1 m of structure height). Therefore it is reasonable
to consider reduced values of the passive earth pressure by setting the value of the
"Coefficient of reduction of passive pressure" to less than or equal to one. The following
-1117-
values are recommended:

• 0.67 reduces deformations app. by one half
• 0.50 approximately corresponds to deformation of structure loaded by increased active
earth pressure
• 0.33 approximately corresponds to deformation of structure loaded by the pressure at
rest, structure reaches app. 20 percent of its original deformations
Analysis of Anchored Wall Fixed in Heel

Anchored wall fixed in heel is analyzed as a continuous beam using the deformation variant of
the finite element method in order to comply with the assumption of heel fixed in the soil. The
actual analysis is preceded by the determination of load due to earth pressure applied to the
structure. The pressure acting on the back of a structure is assumed to be the active pressure,
while the front face is loaded by the passive pressure.
The passive pressure can be reduced with the help ofthe coefficient of reduction of passive
pressure. Assuming the actual magnitude of the passive earth pressure provides deformations
of the analyzed structure, which cannot usually occur. The actual passive pressure can attain
for walls free of deformation the value of pressure at rest as well as all intermediate values up
to the value of passive pressure for fully deformed wall (rotation app. 10 mRad - i.e.
deformation 10 mm per 1 m of structure height). Therefore it is reasonable to consider reduced
values of the passive earth pressure setting the value of the "Coefficient of reduction of
passive pressure" to less than or equal to one. The following values are recommended:
• 0.33 deformations attain approximately twenty percent of their original values
The program offers two options to determine active pressure:
• calculation from input soil parameters, water, surcharge, terrain including introduction of
the minimum dimensioning pressure
• inputting an arbitrary distribution of earth pressure up to the depth of zero point (this way
it is possible to introduce an arbitrary redistribution of earth pressure)
Zero-value point, i.e. the point at which the overall pressure equals zero is determined by the
following expression:
where: u - depth of zero-value point

σa - magnitude of active pressure behind structure at the ditch bottom
K - coefficient of overall pressure
γ - unit weight of soil below the ditch bottom
The analysis of structure fixed at heel assumes that the point of zero load N (at depth u) is
identical with the point of zero moment. For the actual analysis the structure is divided into
two parts - an upper part (upper beam) up to zero-value point and a lower beam:
-1118-
Analysis of anchored wall fixed in heel

The upper beam is analyzed first together with evaluation of anchor forces F and the reaction
force R at the zero-value point. Then, the lower beam length x is determined such that the
moment equilibrium condition with respect to the heel is satisfied (the beam is loaded by the
reaction R and by the difference of earth pressures). To satisfy the shear force equilibrium the
computed length of fixed end is extended by the value Δx as shown in figure:
Determination of the extension of the length of wall by Δx
Analysis of Anchored Wall Simply Supported at Heel

Anchored wall simply supported at heel is analyzed as a continuous beam using the
deformation variant of the finite element method in order to comply with the assumption of
simply supported structure at heel. The actual analysis is preceded by the determination of
load due to earth pressure applied to the structure. The pressure acting on the back of a
structure is assumed as active presure, while the front face is loaded by passive pressure.
The passive pressure can be reduced with the help ofthe coefficient of reduction of passive
pressure. Assuming the actual magnitude of the passive earth pressure provides deformations
of the analyzed structure, which cannot usually occur. The actual passive pressure can attain
for walls free of deformation the value of pressure at rest as well as all intermediate values up
to the value of passive pressure for fully deformed wall (rotation app. 10 mRad - i.e.
deformation 10 mm per 1 m of structure height). Therefore it is reasonable to consider reduced
values of the passive earth pressure setting the value of the "Coefficient of reduction of
passive pressure" to less than or equal to one. The following values are recommended:
• 0.33 deformations attain approximately twenty percent of their original values
-1119-
The program offers two options to determine active pressure:

• calculation from input soil parameters, water, surcharge, terrain including introduction of
the minimum dimensioning pressure
• inputting an arbitrary distribution of earth pressure up to the depth of zero point (this way
it is possible to introduce an arbitrary redistribution of earth pressure).
Zero-value point, i.e. the point at which the overall pressure equals zero is determined by the
following expression:
where: u - depth of zero-value point

σa - magnitude of active pressure behind structure at the ditch bottom
K - coefficient of overall pressure
γ - unit weight of soil below the ditch bottom
For simply supported structures it is assumed that the moment and shear force are zero at the
heel. The program first places the end of a structure into the zero-value point, and then it
looks for the end beam location x, where the above condition is fulfilled (see Fig.). Solution
procedure for multiplied anchored walls is identical.
Analysis of anchored wall simply supported at heel
Sheeting Check
The program verifies the input structure using the method of dependent pressures or using the
spring method according to JGJ 120-2012. The load applied to the structure is derived from its
deformation, which allows to realistically model its behavior and provides cost effective
designs. The analysis correctly accounts for the construction process such as individual
stages of progressive construction of the wall (stages of constructions) including gradual
evolution of deformations and post-stressing of anchors. Program can model any kind of
braced sheeting too.
The use of the method of dependent pressures requires determination of the modulus of
subsoil reaction, which is assumed either linear or nonlinear.
The program also allows the user to check internal stability of the anchorage system.
The actual analysis is carried out using the deformation variant of the finite element method.
-1120-
Displacements, internal forces and the modulus of subsoil reaction are evaluated at individual
nodes.
The following procedure for dividing the structure into finite elements is assumed:
• First, the nodes are inserted into all topological points of a structure (starting and end
points, points of location of anchors, points of soil removal, points of changes of cross-
sectional parameters).
• Based on selected subdivision the program computes the remaining nodes such that all
elements attain approximately the same size.
A value of the modulus of subsoil reaction is assigned to each element - it is considered as the
Winkler spring of the elastic subsoil. Supports are placed onto already deformed structure -
each support then represents a forced displacement applied to the structure.
In the construction stage, where are introduce, prestressed anchors are modeled as force.
(variant I in Fig). In other construction stages the anchors are modeled springs of stiffness k
(variant II. in Fig) and force:
Model of prestressed anchor

Non-prestressed anchors are model always as spring in all construction stages. THe force in
the anchor is computed from deformation of the structure and anchor stiffness:
Model of non-prestressed anchor

The change of anchor force due to deformation is provided by:
-1121-
where: v - horizontal distance between anchors

Δw- deformation increment the point of anchor application
E - anchor Young’s modulus
A - anchor cross-sectional area
l - anchor length
k - anchor stiffness
α - anchor inclination
Literature:
Hurych, P.: Metoda zavislych tlaku. Sbornik konference "Automatizacia projektovania", Vysoke
Tatry, 1978.
Anchor Types
The program allows to enter prestressed and non-prestressed anchors and calculate their
bearing capacity.
If the verification of anchor is not required, anchor type can be selected as "not specified". In
this case we just enter only information necessary for analysis of whole structure (geometry,
stiffness).
-1122-
Anchor input - without verification of bearing capacity

The program allows to enter and verify these types of anchors:
• prestressed bars
• strand
• helical
• non-prestressed bars
• deadman
• Strength of anchor Rt (all types)
• Pull-out resistance (soil) Re (bars and strand)
• Pull-out resistance (grouting) Rc (prestressed bars and strand)
-1123-
Anchor input - verification of bearing capacity
Prestressed Bar
The "Prestressed bar" is selected as an "Anchor type" in the combo list in the dialog window
"New anchor".
The Prestressed bar anchor requires input of:
• Production set - user defined (the user input of parameters) or the anchor from the
catalog (VSL, DYWIDAG...)
• Location of anchor - depth, length, root length, slope...
• Stiffness of anchor - anchor diameter ds or area of anchor A, elasticity modulus E
• Pre-stressing force
• Parameters for verification of anchor (Strength of anchor, Pull-out resistance (soil),
Pull-out resistance (grouting))
-1124-
Anchor parameters input

Literature:
Implemented anchors in the catalog
• VSL Systems Ltd. - VSL Ground Anchor Systems - web brochure
• Dywidag- Systems International - Dywidag Bar Anchors, Dywidag Strand anchors - web
brochures
Strand Anchor
The "Strand anchor" is selected as an "Anchor type" in the combo list in the dialog window
"New anchor".
The Strand anchor requires input of:
• Location of anchor - depth, length, root length, slope...
• Stiffness of anchor - diameter of strand d1 (or area of strand A1), Number of strands n
and elasticity modulus E
• Pre-stressing force
• Parameters for verification of anchor (Strength of anchor, Pull-out resistance (soil),
Pull-out resistance (grouting))
-1125-

Literature:
• Dywidag- Systems International - Dywidag Bar Anchors, Dywidag Strand anchors - web
brochures
Helical Anchor
The "Helical anchor" is selected as an "Anchor type" in the combo list in the dialog window
"New anchor".
The Helical anchor requires input of:
catalog (Helical Anchors, Mac Lean, Chance...). The anchors from the catalog are specified
by the other parameters (type of shaft, Nr. of helix, thickness and material of helix)
- if the selected combination is not manufactured, the name of anchor is empty and
editing cannot be finished
• Location of anchor - depth, length, slope...
• Type of shaft profile - circle (pipe), square
• Stiffness of anchor - elasticity modulus E
• Parameters for verification of anchor (Strength of anchor, Pull-out resistance from soil
is decribed below)
-1126-

Calculation of pull out resistance from soil:
Option "input"
This option is required for user defined anchors. It is necessary to enter value of pull out
resistance from soil Re [kN, lbf]. The table with dimensions and locations of each helix is only
for the visualization of the anchor and internal stabillity check.
Option "calculate"
This option is available only for anchors from the catalog. The dimensions and locations of each
helix is determined by manufacturer. The pull out resistance from soil is calculated according
this formula:
where: n - number of helix

Rh,i - maximal bearing capacity of helix, determined by manufacturer
σz - geostatical stress
Nc,Nq - Meyerhof´s coefficients for bearing capacity
-1127-
Ai - the area of helix
where: φ - angle of internal friction (for φ = 0 is Nc = 2+π)
Literature:
• Helical Anchors, Inc. - Product Catalog
• MacLean-Dixie - Helical Foundation Syastems - Engineering Reference Manual
• Chance - Civil Construction Product Catalog, Vol. I.
Non-Prestressed Bar
The "Non-prestressed bar" is selected as an "Anchor type" in the combo list in the dialog
window "New anchor".
The non-prestressed bar anchor requires input of:
• Location of anchor - depth, length, slope...
• Parameters for verification of anchor (Strength of anchor, Pull-out resistance (soil))

Literature:
-1128-

• Minova Bohemia, s.r.o. - Injekční zavrtávací a kotevní tyče MAI SDA R a T, Technický list
Deadman
The "Deadman" is selected as an "Anchor type" in the combo list in the dialog window "New
anchor".
The deadman anchor requires input of:
• Location of anchor - depth, length, spacing
• Parameters for verification of anchor (Strength of anchor, Pull-out resistance from soil
is decribed below)
Deadman parameters input

Deadman analysis
The deadman consists of a bar with specified length and anchor element.
The pull out resistance from soil is equal to the passive resistance along the height of
anchoring element, which is reduced by coefficient k:
For h = 0:
For h ≥ b - bD:
-1129-
where: h - height of the overburden over the anchor element

bD - width of anchor element
b - spacing between anchor elements
hD - height of anchor element
zB - depth of bottom edge of anchor element
The coefficient k is interpolated for the intermediate values of h.

Calculation of the overburden over the anchor element:
where: z - depth of deadman
The full pull out resistance is activated if active and passive earth wedges do not intersect.
The minimum length of the bar for full pull out resistance is computed as follows:
where: φ - angle of internal friction

h - height of shoring structure
In the case that the length of bar l is shorter then minimum length of bar lmin, the passive
pressure is considered from the intersection of active and passive earth wedges.
The principle of determining the minimum length for deadman´s bar
-1130-
Anchor Strength
The method of analysis is selected in the section "Tension strength".
Setting of analysis for anchor strength

Option "calculate"
The calculation is same for all types of anchors according to formula:
where: fu - design strength of material

A - area of the shaft of the anchor
Option "input"
It is necessary to enter value of tension strength Rt [kN, lbf]
In the case of strand anchors it is necessary to enter area of one strand (option "input
area" - total area is calculated according to formula:
where: A1 - area of one strand

n - number of strands
In the case that the diameter of strand is entered (option "input diameter"), the total area is
calculated according to formula:
where: ds - diameter of one strand

n - number of strands
-1131-
Strand anchor parameters input
Pull-out Resistance (Soil)

The method of analysis is selected in the section "Pull out resistance (soil)".
Setting of analysis for pull out resistance (soil)

Analysis for prestressed bar, strand and non-prestressed bar anchors
Option "calculate from effective stress"
where: d - diameter of root
-1132-
lk - root length
σz - geostatical stress
Option "calculate from skin friction"
where: d - diameter of root

lk - root length
f - skin shear
Option "input bearing capacity per unit length"
where: Re, bm - pull out resistance from soil per unit

lk - root length
Option "input"
The total value of pull out resistance (soil) is entered Re [kN, lbf]
Pull-out Resistance (Grouting)

The method of analysis is selected in the section "Pull out resistance (grouting)".
Setting of analysis for pull out resistance (grouting)

This bearing capacity determine a pull out resistance from the root and it is calculated equally
for prestressed bar and strand anchors.
Option "Calculate from shear strength"

where: ds (d1) - diameter of anchor bar (strand diameter corresponding to the strand area)
lk - root length
τ - shear strength between anchor bar and grouting
-1133-
Option "Calculate from concrete strength"

It is same analysis as in previous case, the shear strength τ is calculated from the parameters
of concrete according to the different standards:
• EN 1992-1-1 (EC2)
where: η1 - coefficient of cohesion (1,0 for good conditions of cohesion, 0,7 in other
cases)
fctd - concrete strength in tension - obtained from fck by formulas; ≤ C60/75 value
• ACI 318-11
where: fc' - concrete strength in compression
• GB 50010-2010
where: α - coefficient of reinforcement type

1,47 – 7-strand
1,56 – 3-strand
1,79 – plain reinforcement bar
1,92 – ribbed steel wire
ft design concrete strength in tension; ≤ C60 value
Option "input bearing capacity per unit length"
where: Rc, bm - pull out resistance [kN/bm, lbf/ft] from grouting per unit length
LK - root length
Option "input"
The value of pull out resistance (grouting) is entered Rc [kN, lbf]
Method of Dependent Pressures

The basic assumption of the method is that the soil or rock in the vicinity of wall behaves as
ideally elastic-plastic Winkler material. This material is determined by the modulus of subsoil
reaction kh, which characterizes the deformation in the elastic region and by additional limiting
deformations. When exceeding these deformations the material behaves as ideally plastic.
The following assumptions are used:
• The pressure acting on a wall may attain an arbitrary value between active and passive
pressure - but it cannot fall outside of these boundaries.
• The pressure at rest acts on an undeformed structure (w = 0).
-1134-
The pressure acting on a deformed structure is given by:
σ = σa for: σ < σa
σ = σp for: σ > σp
where: σr - pressure at rest
kh - modulus of subsoil reaction
w - deformation of structure
σa - active earth pressure
σp - passive earth pressure
The computational procedure is as follows:

• The modulus of subsoil reaction kh is assigned to all elements and the structure is loaded
by the pressure at rest - see figure:
Scheme of structure before first iteration

• The analysis is carried out and the condition for allowable magnitudes of pressures acting
on the wall is checked. In locations at which these conditions are violated the program
assigns the value of kh = 0 and the wall is loaded by active or passive pressure,
respectively - see figure:
Scheme of structure during the iteration process

The above iteration procedure continues until all required conditions are satisfied.
-1135-
In analyses of subsequent stages of construction the program accounts for plastic deformation
of the wall. This is also the reason for specifying individual stages of construction that
comply with the actual construction process.
Literature:
Bartak, J.: Progresivni postupy navrhovani pazenych stavebnich jam. VUT Brno, 1991.
Hurych, P.: Metoda zavislych tlaku. Sbornik konference "Automatizacia projektovania", Vysoke
Tatry, 1978.
Spring Method According to JGJ 120-2012

This method is used for analysis of sheeting structures and it is based on the Chinese standard
JGJ 120-2012 (Technical specification for retaining and protection of building foundation
excavations). In principle, this theory is similar to calculation according to the method of
dependent pressures, the difference is in consideration of earth pressures. The following figure
shows that behind the wall (outside of the foundation pit) acts active earth pressure pa or
earth pressure at rest p0 (it's defined in the "Settings" frame).
In front of the wall there are considered springs (defined by using the modulus of subsoil
reaction), which models reaction of the soil in a horizontal direction. In case of the attainment
of ultimate pressures a limiting of the size of springs is the same as for method of dependent
pressures.
Principle of spring method acording to JGJ 120-2012 for solution of sheeting structures - (a)
non-anchored structure, (b) anchored or strutted structure
Literature:
excavations).
Modulus of Subsoil Reaction

The following options are available in the program to introduce the modulus of subsoil
reaction:
• in the form of distribution (input distribution of the modulus of subsoil reaction kh in
front and behind the structure is input)
• as a soil parameter with a respective value (either linear or nonlinear - curve)
-1136-
• according to Schmitt
• according to Chadeisson
• according to CUR 166
• iterate by using deformation characteristics of soils
• input results of pressuremeter test (according to NF P 94-282, according to Menard)
• input results of dilatometric test (DMT)
• according to Chinese standards ("c", "k" or "m" method)
The modulus of horizontal reaction of a soil body generally corresponds to spring stiffness in
the Winkler model describing the relation between load applied to a rigid slab and the resulting
soil deformation in the form:
where: p - load acting along slab-soil interface

k - stiffness of Winkler spring
y - translation of slab into subsoil
Definition of the modulus of subsoil reaction
Modulus of Subsoil Reaction According to Schmitt

This analysis of the modulus of subsoil reaction builds on the relation between oedometric
modulus and bending stiffness of the structure introduced by Schmitt in Revue Francaise de
Géotechnique no. 71 and 74:
where: EI - 2
bending stiffness of the structure [MNm /m]
Eoed - oedometric modulus [MPa]
This method is not available for the structures from plastic sheet piles.
Literature:
Schmitt, P. (1995): "Estimating the coefficient of subgrade reaction for diaphragm wall and
sheet pile wall design", in French. Revue Française de Géotechnique, N. 71, 2° trimestre 1995,
3-10.
-1137-
Modulus of Subsoil Reaction According to Chadeisson

Based on the measurements on sheeting structures in different soils and computation of a
displacement of the structure needed to mobilize the limit value of passive pressure R.
Chadeisson (1961) and A. Monnet (1994) derived expression for the determination of the
modulus of subsoil reaction in the form:
where: EI - 2
bending stiffness of the structure [kNm /m]
γ - 3
unit weight of soil [kN/m ]
Kp - coefficient of passive earth pressure [-]
K0 - coefficient of earth pressure at rest [-]
c' - effective cohesion of soil [kPa]
Ap - coefficient of influence of cohesion (1 - 15) [-]
Literature:
th
Chadeisson, R. (1961): Parois continues moulées dans le sols. Proceedings of the 5 European
Conference on Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering,Vol. 2. Dunod, Paris, 563-568".
K. J. Bakker, A. Bezuijen, W. Broere, E. A. Kwast: Geotechnical Aspects of Underground
Construction in Soft Ground: Proceedings of the 5th International Symposium TC28.
Amsterdam, the Netherlands, 15-17 June 2005. CRC Press, 2013, pp. 616, ISBN:
0415889138, 9780415889131.
Monnet, A.: Module de réaction, coefficient de décompression, au sujet des paramètres utilisés
dans la méthode de calcul élastoplastique, Revue française de Géotechnique, 65, 1994, pp. 67
- 72.
Mitew, M.: Numerical analysis of displacements of a diaphragm wall. Warsaw University of
Technology, Poland.
N. M. ILIEŞ, T. A. HULPUȘ, A. POPA: Design of Anchored Walls: The Influence of Design
Approaches and Design Methods. Technical University of Cluj Napoca, Faculty of Civil
Engineering, Romania, 2010.
Modulus of Subsoil Reaction According to CUR 166

The following table stores the values of the modulus of subsoil reaction derived from
experimental measurements carried out in Netherlands (described in CUR 166). The table
offers secant modules, which are in the program directly transformed into secant modules of
subsoil reaction - see nonlinear modulus of subsoil reaction.
-1138-
3 3 3
kh,1 [kN/m ] kh,2 [kN/m ] kh,3 [kN/m ]
p0 < ph< 0,5 ppas 0,5 ppas ≤ ph ≤0,8 0,8 ppas ≤ ph ≤
ppas 1,0ppas
Sand
loose 12000 - 27000 6000 - 13500 3000 - 6750

medium dense 20000 - 45000 10000 - 22500 5000 - 11250
dense 40000 - 90000 20000 - 45000 10000 - 22500
Clay
soft 2000 - 4500 800 - 1800 500 - 1125

stiff 4000 - 9000 2000 - 4500 800 - 1800
very stiff 6000 - 13500 4000 - 9000 2000 - 4500
Peat
soft 1000 - 2250 500 - 1125 250 - 560

stiff 2000 - 4500 800 - 1800 500 - 1125
where: p0 - value of pressure at rest [kN/m2]
ppas - passive pressure [kN/m2]
ph - horizontal pressure corresponding to a given displacement of a structure

2
[kN/m ]
Diagram of determination of the modulus of subsoil reaction

Literature:
CUR 166 Damwandconstructies, available at Civieltechnisch Centrum Uitvoering Research en
Regelgeving: P.O.Box 420, 2800 AK Gouda (NL).
Modulus of Subsoil Reaction Determined from Iteration

The program allows automatic calculation of the modulus of subsoil reaction from
deformational characteristics of soil from iteration process. The procedure builds on the
assumption that deformation of the elastic subspace characterized by the deformation modulus
-1139-
Edef [MPa] when changing the stress state associated with the change of earth pressures is the
same as deformation of the underground wall.
3
The goal therefore is to find such values of kh [MN/m ] so that the continuity of deformations of
wall and adjacent soil is maintained. Plastic deformation of structure is not considered
when performing analysis with kh manual iteration. While the analysis of modulus kh with
automatic iteration plastic deformation of structure is considered. Principle of manual
th
iteration is schematically cleared by computing the modulus of subsoil reaction of the i
segment of wall free of anchor, see figure:
th
Determination of modulus of subsoil reaction of i segment
For change of stress σr - σ the program determines uniform load σol [MPa] of individual
th
segments of a structure. Next, the overall change of stress passing the i segment (
[MPa*m]) is computed. This change is caused by additional load of the soil body due to
segments 1 to n (σol,1 - σol,n). The overall change of stress Δσi is reduced by structural strength
mi*σor,i [MPa]. The new value of the spring stiffness then follows from:
where: Edef - deformation modulus of elastic subspace [MPa]

σol - uniform load applied to segments of structure [MPa]
- overall change of stress behind ith segment of structure [MPa m]
*
The change of stress inside the soil body is determined according to Boussinesque. Inserting
the new value of k directly into the next calculation would cause instable iteration - therefore
the value of k that is introduced into the next analysis of the wall is determined from the
original value of kp and the new value of kn of the modulus of subsoil reaction.
where: kp - 3
original value of modulus of subsoil reaction [MN/m ]
kn - 3
new value of modulus of subsoil reaction [MN/m ]
-1140-
th
Maximum of modulus of subsoil reaction of the i layer is limited by the value:
where: Edef,i - deformation modulus of ith layer [MPa]
The manual iterative procedure used when computing the modulus of subsoil reaction is as
follows:
1. Determine the matrix of influence values for deriving change of stress in a depth of the
th
soil body passing the i segment of a structure due to surcharge caused by the change
of stress in other segments.
2. The first approximation of the modulus kh in front of the wall is introduced - a triangular
3
distribution of values at the wall heel kh = 10 MN/m is assumed.
3. Perform analysis of the wall (sheeting structure).
4. Compute new values of kh and determine new values for the next analysis.
5. The dialog window to check the iteration appears and the program waits till the next
command. If the next n iterations are selected, the steps 3 and 4 are repeated n-times
to arrive again at the step No. 5. The analysis is terminated in this dialog window by
pressing the "Stop" button.
This manual iterative process is controlled by the user - he or she has to decide whether the
results make sense. Automatic iterative procedure is performed without entering of further
iterations for calculation of modulus kh.
Literature:
Bartak J.: Progresivni postupy navrhovani pazenych stavebnich jam, VUT Brno, 1991.
Modulus of Subsoil Reaction According to Menard

Based on the results from experimental measurements (pressiometer) of soil response loaded
by rigid slab Menard derived the following expression for modulus of subsoil reaction:
where: EM - pressuremeter (Menard) modulus, if necessary it can be substituted by

oedometric modulus of soil [MPa]
a - characteristic length depending on a depth of fixed-end structure, according
to Menard assumed at a depth of 2/3 of length of fixed-end structure below
final depth of sheeted ditch
α - rheological coefficient of soil
Approximate values of rheological coefficient of soil α
-1141-
Clay Silt Sand Gravel
Overconsolidated 1 2/3 1/2 1/3
Normally 2/3 1/2 1/3 1/4

consolidated
Non-consolidated 1/2 1/2 1/3 1/4
Literature:
Menard, L. (1975): "The Menard Pressuremeter: Interpretation and Application of the
Pressuremeter Test Results to Foundations Design", Sols-Soils, No. 26, Paris, France.
Modulus of Subsoil Reaction According to NF P 94-282

The modulus of subsoil reaction kh according to NF P94-282:2009-03 depends on bending
stiffness of sheeting structure Estr Istr and pressuremeter (Menard) modulus EM. The modulus
of subsoil reaction is given by the following formula:
where: kh - modulus of subsoil reaction [MN/m3]
EM - pressuremeter modulus according to Menard [MPa]

α - empirical coefficient depending on type of soil, or type of rock [-]
Estr Istr - bending stiffness of sheeting structure [MNm2]
B0 - characteristic (unit) length of sheeting structure [1 rm]

E - modulus of elasticity of material of sheeting structure [MPa]
I - moment of inertia [m4/m]
Approximate values of empirical coefficient α [-] for various types of soils
-1142-
Type of soil Peat Clay Silt Sand Gravel
α EM/pLM α EM/pLM α EM/pLM α EM/pLM α
Overconsolidat - > 16 1 > 14 2/3 > 12 1/2 > 10 1/3

ed
Normally 1 9 - 16 2/3 8 -14 1/2 7 -12 1/3 6 -10 1/4

consolidated
Non- - 7-9 1/2 5-8 1-2 5 -7 1-3 - -

consolidated
Approximate values of empirical coefficient α [-] for various types of rocks (according
to degree of violation)
Type of rock α [-]
Intact, strong 2/3
Slightly impaired, unweathered 1/2
Very poor, weathered 1/3
Metamorphic 2/3
Literature:
NF P94-282: March 2009, pp. 142 – 146.
Modulus of Subsoil Reaction Specified by Dilatometric

Test (DMT)
3
Modulus of subsoil reaction kh [MN/m ] is determined by the following formula:
where: kh - modulus of subsoil reaction [MN/m3]
MDMT - constrained modulus obtained from DMT [MPa]

B - characteristic length of sheeting structure (coefficient of reduction) [1 rm]
Values of coefficient B are depending on the depth of the excavation H [m], constrained
modulus MDMT [MPa] and spacing of props.
-1143-
Graphs for determination of coefficient B (source: [2], Figure 7, pp. 999)

Literature:
Monaco, P. and Marchetti, S..: Evaluation of the coefficient of subgrade reaction for design of
multi-propped diaphragm walls from DMT moduli. Millpress, Rotterdam, 2004, pp. 993 – 1002,
ISBN 90 5966 009 9.
Modulus of Subsoil Reaction According to Chinese

standards
The calculation of modulus of subsoil reaction according to Chinese standards is based on the
JGJ 120-2012 standard (Technical specification for retaining and protection of building
foundation excavations) for "m" method.
For "m" method, the modulus of subsoil reaction kh is given by the following formula:
where: m - proportional coefficient of modulus of subsoil reaction [kN/m4]
z - depth of the calculation point from the original ground [m]

h - depth of the calculation point from the ditch bottom at current stage of
construction [m]
From previous formula it’s obvious that calculation of modulus kh is linear with depth of point
during the analysis.
Proportional coefficient m should be determined from pile test with horizontal load. If there
are no test data, Chinese standard JGJ 120-2012 suggest an empirical formula to estimate
this coefficient:
where: c - cohesion (shear strength) of soil [kPa]

φ - angle of internal friction of soil [°]
vb - horizontal displacement of sheeting structure at the ditch bottom [mm]; when
the displacement is smaller than 10 mm, then vb = 10 mm
Other methods ("c" method and "k" method) are not published in JGJ 120-2012 standard,
but they are based on practical experience and they are used in China profusely. Then the
modulus of subsoil reaction kh is given by the following formula:
-1144-
3.5
If exponent n = 0,5, it's "c" method and then a = c (kN/m ).
3
If exponent n = 0, it's "k" method and then, a = K (kN/m ).
It’s obvious that for "m" method, n = 1.
Literature:
excavations).
Nonlinear Modulus of Subsoil Reaction

Nonlinear model describes dependence of the modulus of subsoil reaction kh - i.e. change of kh
in between the threshold values corresponding to failure due to passive earth pressure Tp and
active earth pressure Ta - see figure (the modulus of subsoil reaction is given by the slope of
the curve; for pore pressure at rest acting on a structure it is possible to consider the value of
kh1). This model also accounts for spring supports and forced deflections of the structure,
various boundary conditions, application of struts and anchors, etc.
Interaction model to determine kh

The values of the modulus of subsoil reaction can be derived subsequently from the values of
secant modules of subsoil reaction (CUR 166) - see figure:
Interaction model to determine kh - CUR 166
-1145-
Soldier Pile Wall (Braced Sheeting)

When analyzing braced sheeting (pile curtain, steel I-section or user input of A, I, E, G)
the following approach is adopted to determine the earth pressures:
Up to the depth of ditch the pressures are determined with respect to 1 rm of the structure
width. Below the ditch bottom the earth pressures are multiplied by the coefficient of reduction
k (the "Coefficient of pressure reduction below ditch bottom"). This coefficient can be
input (in the frame "Geometry" as a parameter of the section of a structure) or automatically
calculated.
If "Landfill of soil" above the ditch (frame "Excavation") is input, then the pressures within
this section are computed with respect to the whole width of wall (k = 1).
The coefficient of pressure reduction below ditch bottom k can be approximately
determined (for very conservative design) according to:
where: a - longitudinal spacing of soldier beams, or spacing between

piles
d - width of soldier beam, or diameter of pile
Real value of the coefficient k also depends on the soil type and space effect of earth
pressure. Real values of this coefficient (based on experiments) are two to three-times
higher than values calculated with the help of the previous formula.
Braced sheeting - schematic view of retaining structure
-1146-
Strengthening of the Soil

The program can model strenghtening of the soil at the heel of sheeting structure. The
strenghtening of the soil is performed after installation of piles, or walls which are grouted at
the base of the wall. The decisive parameters are height of strengthened soil hs, or width
of strengthened soil ws and parameters of strengthened soil (φ, c).
The principle of solution is shown in the following figure.
Strenghtening of the soil at the base of sheeting structure - graphic presentation of the
principle of solution
The principle of calculation for strenghtening of the soil at the base of sheeting structure is
described herein:
where: N - new layer of strengthened soil

μ - ratio (auxiliary parameter)
Xi - th
arbitrary parameter at i layer of soil
Xoi - original parameter at i
th
layer of soil
XN - new parameter of strengthened soil
ws - width of strengthened soil [m]
hs - height of strengthened soil [m]
-1147-
Internal Stability of Anchors

The internal stability of an anchorage system of sheeting is determined for each layer
independently. The verification analysis determines an anchor force, which equilibrates the
system of forces acting on a block of soil. The block is outlined by sheeting, terrain, line
connecting the heel of sheeting with anchor root and by a vertical line passing through the
center of anchor root and terrain.
The theoretical footing of sheeting construction is the point where the sum of horizontal forces
under the bottom of the construction pit is equal to zero. If this point lies under the footing of
the sheeting wall, the theoretical point is the footing of this wall.
The analysis is performed per one running meter of a sheeting structure. Anchor forces are
therefore computed with respect to their spacing in individual layers.
Analysis of internal stability

th
Scheme for verification of the i layer of anchors is shown in the figure. The force equilibrium
for the block ABCD is being determined. The following forces enter the analysis:
EA - resultant of active earth pressure acting on sheeting (on line AD)
EAi - resultant of active earth pressure above the root of verified anchor (on line BC)
Gi - th
weight of the i the soil block ABCD; in addition, this value incorporates the
surcharge p applied on the ground surface providing the slope θi of slip surface AB is
greater than an average value of the angle of internal friction on this surface; in case
of a smaller slope of slip surface AB the ground surchage is not considered
Ci - resultant of soil cohesion on slip surface AB
Fj, Fk, - forces developed in other anchors, but some of them are not taken into account;
-1148-
… th
only "shorter" anchors (comparing with the i anchor) will contribute in the
th
equilibrium analysis of the i block; following principle is used to decide whether the
th th
given anchor (the m ) is included or excluded from equilibrium of the i block:
th th
at first the lower anchor is selected (the m or the i ); then a plane slip surface is
o
placed from the root center of the selected lower anchor; this plane is inclined 45 -
φn/2 from vertical line (line ab or Bc in the figure); φn is an average value of the
th
angle of internal friction above the root of the lower anchor; if the i root is found
th th
above the m one and the higher located root (the i ) is outside the area cut by the
th
plane slip surface, then the m anchor is included into analysis; the same example
th th th th
of including the m anchor is when the i root lies under the m one and the m
root is located inside the area cut by the slip surface; two opposite cases determine
th th th
excluded anchors from analysis; first is the i root above the m one and the i
th th th
inside the area, second is when the i root lies under the m one and the m is
outside the area; from above definition resulting that "shorter" anchor Fk is included
into analysis and "longer" anchor Fj is excluded from analysis (see figure)
Qi - reaction on slip surface AB
Fi force in the analyzed anchor, the maximum allowable magnitude of this force is the
th
result of the equilibrium analysis carried out for the i block
Solution of the equilibrium problem for a given block requires writing down vertical and
horizontal force equations of equilibrium. These represent a system of two equations to be
solved for the unknown subsoil reaction Qi and the maximum allowable magnitude of the
anchor force Fi.
As a result the program provides the maximum allowable anchor forces for each row of
anchors. These are then compared with those actually prescribed in anchors.
Failure by Heave
Failure by heave
The stability of soil against heave due to flow of water in the subsoil (HYD) is checked
according to the limit states by equation:
where: udst - unfavourable water pressure

σstb - favourable weight of soil
γh - reduction coefficient of failure by heave
The stability of soil against heave due to flow of water in the subsoil (HYD) is checked
according to the factor of safety by equation:
-1149-
where: udst - unfavourable water pressure

σstb - favourable weight of soil
SFh - safety factor for failure by heave
Failure by heave - scheme of sheeting structure

Failure by piping
Failure by piping is checked according to the limit states by equation:
where: i - hydraulic gradient

ic - critical hydraulic gradient, where ic = γsu/γw
γp - reduction coefficient of internal erosion of soil
Failure by piping is checked according to the factor of safety by equation:
where: i - hydraulic gradient

ic - critical hydraulic gradient, where ic = γsu/γw
SFp - safety factor for internal erosion of soil
Literature:
Eurocode 7: Geotechnical design - Part 1: General rules.
Terrain Settlement behind the Shoring Structure

Settlement of terrain behind the shoring structure can be analysed according to the
-1150-
following theories:
• Triangle method
• Index method
• Parabolic method
• DG/TJ08-61-2010
Triangle Method
Settlement of terrain behind the shoring structure is calculated according to the following
formula in case of triangle method:
where: δma - maximum settlement

x
sw - area formed by deformed structure and un-deformed structure
x0 - range of settlement
The range of terrain settlement x0 is defined as follows:
where: H - depth of excavation

D - length of structure below the bottom of foundation pit
-1151-
φ - weighted average internal friction angle of all soil layers that the structure
goes through
Index Method
formula in case of index method:

x
δ(x - settlement at each point within the range of settlement x0 in distance x
)
x - distance between the calculation point and the edge of the foundation pit
Note: Calculation method for the range of settlement x0 is as same as in case of triangle
method.
Parabolic Method
formula in case of parabolic method:
-1152-

x
δ(x - settlement at each point within the range of settlement x0 in distance x
)
δw1 - horizontal displacement at the top of the structure
δw2 - horizontal displacement at the bottom of the structure
Note: δmax is calculated from Peck theory, while δ(x) is assumed as a parabolic curve. It’s
obvious that the maximum value of δ(x) is not equal to δmax, but the maximum settlement is
still considered as δmax.
Note: Calculation method for the range of settlement x0 is as same as in case of triangle
method.
DG/TJ08-61-2010
Settlement of terrain behind the shoring structure is calculated according to the
DG/TJ08-61-2010 (Technical code for excavation engineering in Shanghai) and it is suitable
-1153-
for using in soft soils.

Settlement behind the sheeting differs in two parts - main influence area and secondary
influenced area.
Maximum settlement δmax is calculated as follows:

x
δhm - maximum horizontal displacement of structure
The range of settlement x0 is calculated as follows:
where: x0 - range of settlement

H - depth of excavation
Settlement at each point δ(x) in range of settlement x0 is calculated as follows:
-1154-
where: δ(x - settlement at each point within the range of settlement or influenced area
)
Literature:
DG/TJ08-61-2010 (Technical code for excavation engineering in Shanghai)
Anti-Slide Pile
Program Anti-slide pile performs analysis of anti-slide piles (calculation of internal forces +
displacement, dimensioning of pile cross-section). The analysis of structure is almost the same
as in the program "Sheeting check", the different is determination of pressures above the slip
surface and possibility to model pile fixed into the rock.
If there is for an input slope or structure found an unacceptable slip surface, then it is possible
to increase the slope stability on this surface by inserting an anti-slide pile ("Anti-Slide piles"
frame serves to perform this step in the "Slope stability" program). The pile has to be placed
such that it crosses the slip surface and its base is found sufficiently deep below the assumed
slip surface. Above the slip surface the pile is loaded by an active force T having tendency to
shift the pile and by a passive (resisting) force P stabilizing the pile (see figure below). The
difference between the passive and active forces creates a load that must be transfered by the
pile to increase stability on a input slip surface up to required value of SFs.
Scheme of active and passive forces acting on anti-slide pile

If the slope stability SF without an anti-slide pile is not sufficient, the active and passive forces
are in equilibrium - the pile is not loaded and there is no need to use it. For calculation of
forces acting on a pile it is thus important that the required factor of safety SFs is greater than
-1155-
the one calculated for a given slip surface SF without a pile, or the required safety is larger
than the one associated with a input slip surface in the absence of an anti-slide pile.
Determination of Forces Acting on an Anti-Slide Pile

Forces, acting on an anti-slide pile, are provided by the slope stability analysis.
Calculation of slope stability SF is based on the equilibrium analysis of forces acting on blocks
of soil above the slip surface. Vertical surfaces of individual blocks are subjected to action
inter-block forces Fi and their determination is one of the steps of the slope stability analysis.
If the soil blocks are exactly in the state of limit equilibrium, the inter-block forces at the
beginning and at the end of the slip surface are equal to zero. The limit factor of safety SFlim,
for which the state of limit equilibrium is reached, is considered as a real factor of safety on an
input slip surface. The distribution of inter-block forces along the sliding length is called the
pressure line. The forces acting on an anti-slide pile are determined from the distribution of
pressure lines calculated for the required factor of safety SFs.
The following figure shows different distributions of inter-block forces Fi (pressure lines).
Graph a) displays the distribution of forces Fi in the state of limit equilibrium, where zero
values of inter-block forces are found both at the beginning and at the end of the distribution.
It means that this state has been found for the value of factor of safety SFlim, which exactly
expresses the degree of safety on a input slip surface. Graph b) displays the pressure line
determined for a higher factor of safety than the one corresponding to SFlim. An assumption of
zero force Fn is adopted at the top of the slip surface and a non-zero force F0,b at the bottom
of the slip surface is subsequently recorded. This means that in order to arrive at the factor of
safety SF, the base of the slope would have to be loaded by the pressure force having the
value of F0,b. Graph c) displays the pressure line for a factor of safety SF greater than SFlim.
It results from the assumption of a zero force F0 on the bottom end of the slip surface at the
top and then an unbalanced force Fn,c is encountered. Arriving at the state of equilibrium for
the factor of safety SF would thus theoretically call for the action of a tensile force of this
magnitude at the top end of the slip surface. Graf d) shows a distribution of inter-block forces
for the case when an anti-slide pile is placed at point x. Part of the distribution corresponds to
graph c) and serves to determine the magnitude of passive force P at point x. Above the pile
the distribution according to graph b) is considered and serves to determine the active force T
at point x. The difference between P and T is the force transmitted by the anti-slide pile.
-1156-
Distribution of inter-block forces Fi

Figure caption (explanation):
a) distribution for factor of safety SF = SFlim (F0 = 0 a Fn = 0)
b) distribution for factor of safety SF > SFlim with zero value of force at the top end
c) distribution for factor of safety SF > SFlim with zero force value at the bottom end
d) distribution for factor of safety SF with anti-slide pile at point x
Distribution of Pressures Above the Slip Surface

The distribution of load applied to an anti-slide pile above the slip surface is determined from
the magnitudes of forces P and T. Constant, triangular or trapezoidal distributions are
considered (for "Anti-Slide Pile" program the distribution of active and passive forces is
introduced in the "Determination of earth pressure" frame). For the passive (resisting) force P
can also be considered a parabolic distribution, which is approximated for the simplification
by combining triangular and trapezoidal part.
-1157-
Types of distribution of load above the slip surface applied to an anti-slide pile above slip
surface
Recommendation for active force distribution
• Triangle distribution - the layers above the slip surface are made from gravel or sand
• Rectangular distribution - the layers above the slip surface are made from fine grained
soils (clay, silt)
• Trapezoidal distribution - the layers above the slip surface are made from different types
of soils
Shaft
In the frame "Analysis", program Shaft sets the load acting on the shaft.
The calculated load is then input for analysis of internal forces in the frame "Dimensioning".
Calculation of Load Acting on a Shaft

The load from earth pressure and surcharge are computed in the frame "Load analysis". The
stiffness of the shaft has a major influence on the earth pressure. Rigid structure does not
allow deformation, so the earth pressure is much higher than on the flexible shaft.
Three types of shafts can be modelled in the program:
• Flexible - spatial active pressure is considered (earth pressure, surface surcharge and local
surcharge)
• Semirigid
• Rigid - spatial pressure at rest is considered (earth pressure, surface surcharge and local
surcharge)
Ways of load determination
Load from earth pressure and surface surcharge acts as uniform load on the whole
diameter. This load causes structure stress only by normal force - bending moment on the
shaft is theoretically equal to zero. For modelling of real behavior of the shaft, the program
introduces the Reduction coefficient in compliance to the standards DIN V 4034-1 or СНиП II-
94-80. Recommended value of reduction coefficient is 25 %.
-1158-
Modification of uniform load by reduction coefficient

Load from local surcharge is considered as shown on the next picture. This load is not
modified by reduction coefficient.
Load from local surcharge

Recalculation of the load on walers
If the walers are input the program computes the load on each of them. The load depends on
the axial distance between walers as shown on the picture.
-1159-
Calculation of load on the waler

If no walers are input, the program computes load on unit depth (1 m, 1 ft).
If load is calculated, then program determines the distribution of internal forces on structure of
the shaft.
Literature:
Berezantzev, V. G.: Earth pressure on the cylindrical retaining walls, Brussels conference on
Earth pressure problems, 1958.
ČSN 73 0037: Zemní tlak na stavební konstrukce, 1990.
DIN 4085: Berechnung des Erddrucks, 1987.
Exner, K.: Hloubení jam, VŠB v Ostravě, 1986.
Cheng, Y. M.; Hu, Y. Y.: Active earth pressure on circular shaft lining obtained by simplified
slip line solution with general tangential stress coefficient. Chinese Journal of Geotechnical
Engineering, 27 (1), 110-115, 2005.
Link, H.; Lutgendorf, H.; Stoss, K.: Richtlinien zur Berechnung von Schachtauskleidungen in
nicht standfestem Gebirge, 1976.
Sedláček, M.: Zatížení kruhových šachet prostorovým zemním tlakem. Příspěvek ke konferenci
Zakládání staveb, 2014.
Snášelová, K.: Hloubení a vyztužování jam v extrémních podmínkách, ODIS VTEI pro uhelný
průmysl, 1987.
Tobar, T.; Meguid, M.: Distribution of active earth pressure on vertical shafts, Geo Halifax,
2009.
Valencia, T. T.: An experimental study of the earth pressure distribution on cylindrical shafts,
McGill University, Montreal, 2009.
Walz, B.; Pulsfort, M.: Raumliche Erddruck auf Schachtbauwerke in Abhangigkeit von der
Wandverformung, Bergische Universitat Wuppertal, 1999.
Flexible Shaft Structure

Conventional excavation method is a typical example of using the shaft with flexible
construction. Using this method, the rock is excavated in the first step and afterwards concrete
is sprayed on to hardened surface to support the rock. There are specific technological
downtime (ground excavation, shotcrete or arch timbering) with enabling stress
rearrangement in the surrounding soil and the consequent value of the earth pressure acting
-1160-
on the shaft will be equal to the active earth pressure. This fact is well described by V.G.
Berezantsev's method (1958).
Load on flexible shaft is defined using this formula:

h - depth of cross-section
q - magnitude of a surcharge
cef - shear strength of soil
where: r0 - radius of shaft

φef - angle of internal friction of soil
ξ=1
λ=1
Literature:
Berezantzev, V. G.: Earth pressure on the cylindrical retaining walls, Brussels conference on
Earth pressure problems, 1958.
Semirigid Shaft Structure

Sheet piles are a typical example of semirigid shaft support. The sheet piles are driven into
the ground in the first construction stage and then the soil is excavated. The partial soil stress
rearrangement in the shaft surrounding is permitted due to slightness of the construction. The
resulting earth pressure value acting on the shaft construction moves between active and
earth pressure.
Load on semirigid shaft is considered as an average value of load of flexible and rigid shafts.
-1161-
Rigid Shaft Structure

Shaft supported using secant pile walls is a typical example of the shaft with rigid construction.
In the first construction stage the own shaft construction is built and therefore the soil is
excavated. The load on the shaft due to earth pressure is equal to the at rest earth pressure
because the rigid construction has minimal deformations. This construction behavior is well
described by Y. M. and Y. Y. Hu theory (2005).
Load on rigid shaft is defined using this formula:

h - depth of cross-section
q - magnitude of a surcharge
cef - shear strength of soil
wh r0 -radius of shaft
ere
:
φef -angle of internal friction of soil
ratio of the depth of cut h to the radius of the shaft r0
-1162-
Literature:
Cheng, Y. M.; Hu, Y. Y.: Active earth pressure on circular shaft lining obtained by simplified
slip line solution with general tangential stress coefficient. Chinese Journal of Geotechnical
Engineering, 27 (1), 110-115, 2005.
Calculation of Internal Forces on a Shaft

(Dimensioning)
The program allows analysis of internal forces acting on the structure in horizontal and vertical
direction at an intended load acting on the shaft.
Analysis of internal forces in vertical direction
Analytical model of the structure is shown on the picture. All walers are modelled as supports.
The analysis is performed for a unit width (1 m, 1 ft) of the structure. Structures without walers
or with one waler cannot be analysed in the vertical direction.
Analytical model in vertical direction

Analysis of internal forces in horizontal direction (polygonal method)
Internal forces in the horizontal direction are computed by polygonal method, where circular
structure is divided into 72 segments. Each segment is supported by non linear spring, acting
only in compression. The stiffness of springs is equal to input modulus of subsoil reaction.
The way of analysis is shown on the picture - if the structure deforms in direction to the center,
the springs are removed from the analysis.
-1163-
Analytical model in horizontal direction
Slope Stability
Slope stability program compute stability of slopes and embankments with circular or
polygonal slip surfaces.
The slope stability problem is solved in a two dimensional environment. The soil in a slope
body can be found below the ground water table, water can also exceed the slope ground,
which can be either partially or completely flooded. The slope can be loaded by a surcharge of
a general shape either on the ground or inside the soil body. The analysis allows to include the
effect of anchors expected to support the slope or for introduction of horizontal reinforcing
elements - reinforcements or vertical elements - anti-slide piles. An earthquake can also be
accounted for in the analysis.
Two types of approaches to the stability analysis are implemented in the program - classical
analysis according to the factor of safety and the analysis following the theory of limit states.
The slip surface can be modeled in two different ways. Either as a circular one, then the user
may choose either from the Fellenius/Petterson, Bishop, Spencer, Janbu or Morgenstern-Price,
Shahunyants, ITF method, or as a polygonal one, in which case the program exploits the
Sarma, Spencer, Janbu or Morgenstern-Price, Shahunyants, ITF method.
Soil Body
The soil body is formed by a layered profile. An arbitrary number of layers can be used. Each
layer is defined by its geometry and material. The material of a layer is usually represented by
a soil with specified properties. The geostatic stress in soil body is determined during the
analysis.
A layer can be specified also as a rigid body. Such layer then represents bedrock or a sheeting
wall. The slip surface can never pass through the rigid body.
Influence of Water
Ground water can be assigned to the slope plane section using one of the five options:
1) Ground water table
The ground water table is specified as a polygon. It can be arbitrarily curved, placed totally
-1164-
within the soil body or introduced partially above the ground surface.
Presence of water influences value of pore pressure acting within a soil and reducing its shear
bearing capacity. The pore pressure is considered as the hydrostatic pressure, i.e. unit weight
of water is multiplied by reduced height of the water table:

hr - reduced height of water table
where: h - vertical distance of point, where pore pressure is calculated and point on
the water table
α - inclination of the water table
Resultant force of pore pressure at certain section of the block is used in the calculation:
where: u - pore pressure in the point

l - length of section
Below the ground water table the analysis proceeds using the unit weight of saturated soil γsat
and uplift pressure; above the ground water table the analysis assumes the input unit weight
of soil γ.
The shear forces along the slip surface are provided by:
where: T - shear force along slip surface segment

N - normal force along slip surface segment
U - pore pressure resultant along slip surface segment
φ - angle of internal friction
c - cohesion
d - length of slip surface segment
In case of total stress (entered in the "Soil" dialog window) total parameters are used and pore
pressure is considered zero.
2) Ground water table including suction
Suction table can be introduced above the input ground water table. A negative value of pore
pressure u is then assumed with the region separated by the two tables. Suction increases as
negative hydrostatic pressure from the ground water table towards the suction table.
3) Rapid draw down
Original table can be introduced above the input ground water table. Original water table
simulates state before rapid draw down.
-1165-
Rapid draw down analysis

First of all, the initial pore pressure u0 is evaluated:
where: h0 - height from original table to the point of evaluation P

Height h0 is generally the distance from point of pore pressure evaluation (P) to original water
table - this is valid for the case when original water table is under terrain surface. In case of
original water table above terrain there is used the height h0 from point P to the level of
terrain surface (profile 1 in the figure). Another case is when original water table as well as
ground water table are both above terrain - then height h0 is the distance from ground water
table to point P (profile 2 in the figure).
Second step is to calculate change of pore pressure in the area between original and ground
water table:
where: hd - height from original to ground water table

As in previous calculation of pressure, there are three possibilities how to get height hd. When
both water tables are under terrain, hdis the distance between original and ground water table.
In case of original water table above terrain, then hd is measured from ground water table to
the level of terrain (profile 1 in the figure). Last case is when both water tables are above
terrain - then height hd is zero (profile 2 in the figure).
Third step is calculation of final value of pore pressure u. Change of pore pressure Δu is
multiplied by coefficient of reduction of initial pore pressure X, which is required for all soils
(dialog window "Soils"). X coefficient of the soil in the area of point P is used (NOT soil in the
area between original and ground water table). In case of permeable soil X = 1, in other case
X = 0. Final pore pressure is evaluated as:
-1166-
where: u0 - initial pore pressure

X - coefficient of reduction of initial pore pressure
Δu - change of pore pressure
4) Coefficient of pore pressure Ru

The coefficient of pore pressure Ru represents the ratio between the pore pressure and
geostatic pressure in a soil body. In the area, where Ru is positive, entered unit weight of
saturated soil γsat is considered; in other case unit weight of soil γ is used.
The values of Ru are introduced with the help of isolines connecting points with the same value
of Ru. Linear interpolation is assumed to obtain intermediate values. Pore pressure is
established as geostatic stress reduced by coefficient Ru:
where: Ru - coefficient of pore pressure

hi - height of i
th
soil layer
γi - unit weight of i
th
soil layer
5) Pore pressure values

Ground water can be introduced directly through the pore pressure values u within the plane
section of a soil body.
In the area, where u is positive, entered unit weight of saturated soil γsat is considered; in
other case unit weight of soil γ is used.
The pore pressure values are introduced with the help of isolines connecting points with the
same value of pore pressure. Linear interpolation is assumed to obtain intermediate values.
Pore pressure values are then derived from the values of pore pressure obtained in specific
points within the slope plane section.
Surcharge
The slope stability analysis takes into account even the surcharge caused by neighboring
structures. The surcharge can be introduced either as a concentrated force or distributed load
acting either on the ground surface or inside the soil body.
Since it is usually assumed that the surcharge is caused by the weight of objects found on the
slope body, the vertical component of surcharge having the direction of weight (material
component) is added to the weight of blocks. It means that if the earthquake effects are
included this component is also multiplied by the factor of horizontal acceleration or vertical
earthquake. Material surcharge component also influences the position of block centroid. The
components that do not act in the direction of weight are assumed in equations of equilibrium
written for a given block as weightless thus neither contribute to inertia effects of the
earthquake nor position of block centroid.
The surcharge is always considered in the analysis with respect to one running meter.
Providing the surcharge, essentially acting over the area b*l, is introduced as a concentrated
force it is transformed before running the analysis into a surface load spread up to a depth of
slip surface along the slope 2:1 as displayed in figure.
-1167-
Scheme of spreading the concentrated load on the slip surface

The analysis then proceeds with the resultant of surface load p having the value:
Anchors
Anchor position is specified by head point, free length l, root length lk and by the slope α. The
anchor force is input as the pre-stressing force acting in the anchor. The head point is always
located on the ground surface; the anchor force always acts in the direction of a soil body. The
anchor force when computing equilibrium on a given block (slice) is added to the weightless
surcharge of the slope.
Two options are available to account for anchors:
1. Compute anchor lengths - analysis assumes infinite lengths of anchors (anchors are
always included in the analysis) and computes the required free lengths of anchors
(distance between the anchor head and intersection of anchor with the slip surface)
subsequently. The anchor root is then placed behind the slip surface. This approach is
used whenever we wish the anchor to be always active and thus contribute to increase
the slope stability and we need to know its minimum distance.
2. Analysis with specified lengths of anchors - the analysis takes into account only
those anchors that have their end points of roots behind the slip surface. If the slip
surface intersects the free length of anchor, calculation is carried out with full anchor
force. When slip surface intersects the anchor root, anchor force is reduced linearly,
with full force at the root begin and zero value at the end of root. This approach is used
always whenever we wish to evaluate the current state of slope with already existing
anchors, since it may happen that some of the anchors may prove to be short to
intersect the critical slip surface so that they do not contribute to increase the slope
stability.
Nails
For each nail the following bearing capacities are either computed or input:
Rf - nail head strength
-1168-
Strength characteristics of a nail represent the basic parameters to compute the total
bearing capacity of a nail.
The nail strength against breaking follows from:
where: Rt - strength against breaking

ds - nail diameter
fy - strength of nail material
The pull-out nail bearing capacity is calculated by one of the following ways:
1. calculate from skin friction:

d - hole diameter
gs - ultimate bond strength, given either as parameter of the nail or as soil
parameter.
2. calculate from effective stress
where:

d - hole diameter
3. calculate according to HA 68/94

d - hole diameter
σn - average radial effective stress
Average radial effective stress σn is calculated by following formula:
-1169-
where:
Nail head strength value to be input. If the nail head is not fixed, then the strength value
equals zero.
Reinforcements
Reinforcements are horizontal reinforcing elements, which are placed into the soil to increase
the slope stability utilizing their tensile strength. If the reinforcement intersects the slip
surface, the force developed in the reinforcement enters the force equation of equilibrium of a
given block. In the contrary case, the slope stability is not influenced.
The basic parameter of reinforcement is the tensile strength Rt. A design value of this
parameter is used - i.e. the strength of reinforcement reduced by coefficients taking into
account the effect of durability, creep and installation damage. The force transmitted by
reinforcement can never exceed the assigned tensile strength Rt.
Scheme of accounting for reinforcement

The second characteristic is the pull-out strength Tp. This parameter determines the
anchoring length, i.e. the required length of reinforcement in the soil, for which the
reinforcement is fully stressed attaining the value Rt. Since the realistic values of the pull-out
strength are difficult to determine, the program offers three options for their calculation,
respectively for the calculation of the force F transmitted by the reinforcement.
1) Calculate reinforcement bearing capacity
where: σ - normal stress due to self weight at the intersection of reinforcement and
-1170-
slip surface - see Fig.

C - coefficient of interaction (0,8 by default)
l - length of reinforcement step joint behind the slip surface into the soil body
2) Input reinforcement anchor length lk

An anchoring length lk is specified. This parameter is determined by the shear strength
developed between the reinforcement and the soil gradually increasing from zero to its limit
value (measured from the end of reinforcement fixed in soil).
where: l - length of reinforcement behind the slip surface into the soil body
lk - anchoring length of reinforcement
Rt - tensile strength
3) Input reinforcement pull-out resistance Tp

where: l - length of reinforcement behind the slip surface into the soil body
Tp - pull-out resistance of reinforcement
Forces in reinforcements determined on the basis of reinforcement strength may attain

relatively large values. Introducing these forces in the analysis yields a higher factor of safety
of a given slip surface. In case of rigorous methods (Spencer, Janbu, Morgenstern-Price) the
introduction of such forces in the reinforcements may cause the loss of convergence. This
appears mainly in cases when these forces are so high that it is not possible to achieve
equilibrium of forces acting on blocks while maintaining the principal assumptions of individual
methods, e.g. the assumption of zero moment at the end of slip surface. In such a case the
forces in reinforcements are reduced as least as possible (to the highest acceptable values) so
the method converges and attains acceptable results. The reduced values of forces are then
written out as part of the stability analysis results. However, in case of no reduction these
forces are not included in the final set of results.
Reinforcement End
The reinforcement mounting is assumed in the program either as fixed or free.
Should the slope with reinforcement fail the one of the following reinforcement failure shown in
the following figures may appear.
If the reinforcement at its starting point in front of the slip surface is fixed (for example fixed
into the structure cladding) the 3rd type of failure is prevented - pullout of the reinforcement
in front of the slip surface. The failure type 1 and 2 is always checked in the analysis, type of
failure 3 is checked only for reinforcements having free end points that allow for such a type of
failure.
-1171-
"New reinforcement" dialog window - input of end of reinforcement
Breaking of reinforcement - type of failure 1
Pullout of the reinforcement behind the slip surface - type of failure 2
-1172-
Pullout of the reinforcement in front of the slip surface - type of failure 3
Anti-Slide Piles
Anti-slide piles are vertical structural elements, which increase the slope stability. If the anti-
slide pile intersects into assessed slip surface, then for the calculation of the factor of safety is
introducing passive (resisting) force P which corresponds to bearing capacity of pile Vu. This
step is accomplished by the higher value of safety factor SF.
It is assumed that the pile is always vertical. Passive (resisting) force P at the intersection
point with the slip surface is considered either in the horizontal direction or in a direction which
corresponds to the inclination of the slip surface at that location.
Presentation of the direction of passive (resisting) force

The value of passive (resisting) force P is always determined at 1 rm width of the slope with
respect to spacing between piles. Bearing capacity of pile Vu can be specified as either with a
constant value along the length of pile, or increasing linearly away from the pile base
upwards.
-1173-
Constant and linear distribution of bearing capacity Vu along the pile length
Linear increase of bearing capacity of pile is described by gradient K, which is the ratio of the
pile length, on which the ultimate bearing capacity Vu is achieved due to the length of pile
below the ground surface. If the value of gradient K approaches zero, the linear distribution of
bearing capacity Vu is close to constant distribution.
Program also determines active and passive forces acting on anti-slide piles above the slip
surface and allows to send data to the program Anti-slide pile, where other analyses can be
performed.
Influence of an Earthquake
Program allows to calculate influence of earthquake according to the following standards:
• Standard analysis
• Earthquake analysis according to the chinese standard GB 50111-2006
• Earthquake analysis according to the chinese standard NB 35047-2015
• Earthquake analysis according to the chinese standard GB 50330-2013
• Earthquake analysis according to the chinese standard JTG B02-2013
The advantage of chinese standards is to establish the intensity of the earthquake, according
to which the program automatically assigned values of the coefficient Kh appropriate
standards.
Earthquake Effect - Standard Analysis

The program allows to compute the earthquake effects with the help of two variables - factor
of horizontal acceleration Kh or the coefficient of vertical earthquake Kv.
Coefficient of vertical earthquake Kv
The coefficient of vertical earthquake either decreases (Kv > 0) or increases (Kv < 0) the unit
weight of a soil, water in a soil and material surcharge by multiplying the respective values by
-1174-
1 - Kv. It is worth to note that the coefficient Kv may receive both positive and negative value
and in case of sufficiently large coefficient of horizontal acceleration the slope relieve ( Kv > 0)
is more unfavorable than the surcharge.
Factor of horizontal acceleration Kh
In a general case the computation is carried out assuming a zero value of the factor Kh. This
constant, however, can be exploited to simulate the effect of earthquake by setting a non-zero
value. This value represents a ratio between horizontal and gravity accelerations. Increasing
the factor Kh results in a corresponding decrease of the safety factor SF.
The coefficient of horizontal acceleration introduces into the analysis an additional horizontal
force acting in the center of gravity of a respective block with the magnitude Kh*Wi, where Wi
is the block overall weight including the material component of the slope surcharge.
The following table lists the values of the factor Kh that correspond to different degrees of
earthquake based on M-C-S scale.
M-C-S degree Horizontal Factor of horizontal

acceleration acceleration
(MSK-64) 2
[mm/s ] Kh
1 0,0 - 2,5 0,0 - 0.00025
2 2,5 - 5,0 0,00025 - 0.0005
3 5,0 - 10,0 0,0005 - 0.001
4 10,0 - 25,0 0,001 - 0.0025
5 25,0 - 50,0 0,0025 - 0.005
6 50,0 - 100,0 0,005 - 0.01
7 100,0 - 250,0 0,01 - 0.025
8 250,0 - 500,0 0,025 - 0.05
9 500,0 - 1000, 0,05 - 0.1

0
10 1000,0 - 2500, 0,1 - 0.25

0
11 2500,0 - 5000, 0,25 - 0.5

0
12 >5000, >0.5
0
Earthquake Analysis According to GB 50111-2006

Earthquake effects are in stability analysis represented by horizontal and vertical forces acting
at the centers of gravity of individual soil blocks. Magnitude of these forces is related to the
-1175-
weight of soil blocks and is calculated using horizontal and vertical earthquake coefficients.
Horizontal earthquake force is always oriented out form the slope massif. Vertical force can be
directed upwards or downwards, the orientation is defined by the sign of the force.
Horizontal earthquake force Ehs is given by formula:
and vertical earthquake force Evs is determined by:
where: Ci - importance coefficient for seismic design

Cz - comprehensive influence factor
C0 - meeting coefficient related to the influence of horizontal seismic effect
Kv - coefficient of vertical seismic acceleration
Gs - weight of the soil block
Earthquake Analysis According to NB 35047-2015

Earthquake coefficients are depended on position gravity center of each block. Therefore the
coefficients have individual and different values for each one of soil blocks. Horizontal
earthquake force is always oriented out form the slope massif. Vertical force can be directed
upwards or downwards, the orientation is defined by the sign of the force.
kde: Ci - importance coefficient for seismic design

C0 - meeting coefficient related to the influence of horizontal seismic effect
αi - dynamic distribution coefficient of block i
There are two types of dynamic distribution used for determining of αi value: inverted
trapezoid and polygonal. Method for setting αi value could be seen at Figure.
-1176-
Determination of dynamic distribution coefficient αi

Height H of the range of αi is given by points B and T. The bottom point B is the lowest point
of terrain above the slip surface and the top point T is the highest point of terrain above the
slip surface. Gi denotes gravity center points of individual blocks and Eih, Eiv are horizontal and
vertical earthquake forces.
Earthquake Analysis According to GB 50330-2013

Horizontal earthquake force is always oriented out form the slope massif. Vertical force can be
directed upwards or downwards, the orientation is defined by the sign of the force.
where: Ci - importance coefficient for seismic design

αw - complex factor of horizontal acceleration
ag - complex factor of vertical acceleration
Earthquake Analysis According to JTG B02-2013

Earthquake coefficients are depended on position gravity center of each block. Therefore the
coefficients have individual and different values for each one of soil blocks. Horizontal
earthquake force is always oriented out form the slope massif. Vertical force can be directed
upwards or downwards, the orientation is defined by the sign of the force.
-1177-
kde: Ci - importance coefficient for seismic design

ψi - dynamic distribution coefficient of block i
Method for setting ψi value could be seen at Figure.
Determination of dynamic distribution coefficient ψi

Height H of the range of ψi is given by points B and T. The bottom point B is the lowest point
of terrain above the slip surface and the top point T is the highest point of terrain above the
slip surface. Gi denotes gravity center points of individual blocks and Eih, Eiv are horizontal and
vertical earthquake forces.
Verification According to EN 1997

When running the verification analysis according to EN 1997 the choice of a given "Design
approach" and "Partial factors" is important. Forces and loads are reduced in all design
approaches.
The value of capacity utilization Vu is calculated and then it is compared to 100%. The value of
capacity utilization is given by:
where: Ma - sliding moment

Mp - resisting moment
In case of design approach 2 the resisting moment Mp is determined from non-reduced soil
parameters but considering the reduction of resistance on the slip surface using the coefficient
γRs.
In case of design approach 1 and design approach 3 the program reduces for the
determination of the overall resisting moment Mp the strength parameters of soil (angle of
internal friction and cohesion).
-1178-
Analysis According to the Theory of Limit States /

Safety Factor
The verification parameters are input in the "Stability analysis" tab. The structure can be
verified according to the factor of safety or the theory of limit states.
Verification according to the theory of limit states:
Soil parameteres (angle of internal friction, cohesion) are in this case reduced using the
design coefficients introduced in the "Stability analysis" tab.
The value of utilization Vu is calculated and then compared with the value of 100%. The value of
utilization is given by:

The resisting moment Mp is determined considering the reduction with the help of overall
stability of construction γs.
Verification according to the factor of safety:

SFs - factor of safety
Polygonal Slip Surface

Solution of the slope stability problem adopting the polygonal slip surface is based on the
determination of the limit state of forces acting on the soil body above the slip surface. To
introduce these forces the slip surface above is subdivided into blocks by dividing planes.
Typically, these planes are assumed vertical, but this is not a required condition, e.g. the
Sarma method considers generally inclined planes.
-1179-
Static scheme of block

The figure shows forces acting on individual blocks of soil. If the region above the slip surface
is divided in blocks, then for the evaluation of unknowns we have: n normal forces Ni acting on
individual segments and corresponding n shear forces Ti; n-1 normal forces between blocks Ei
and corresponding n-1 shear forces Xi ; n-1 values of zi representing the points of application of
forces Ei, n values of li representing the points of application of forces Ni and one value of the
factor of safety SF. Forces Xi can be in some methods replaced by the values of inclination of
forces Ei.
To following set of equations is available to solve the problem of equilibrium: n horizontal and n
vertical equations of equilibrium written for individual blocks, n moment equations of
equilibrium for individual blocks and n relations between Ni and Ti forces developed on blocks
according to the Mohr-Coulomb theory. In total there are 4n equations for 6n-2 unknowns. This
suggests that 2n-2 unknowns must be chosen a prior. Individual methods differ from each
other in the way these values are selected.
Most often points of application of individual forces acting between blocks or their inclinations
are selected. Solving the problem of equilibrium it proceeds in an iterative manner, where the
selected values must allow for satisfying both the equilibrium and kinematical admissibility of
the obtained solution.
The program allows for adopting one of the following methods:
• Sarma
• Spencer
• Janbu
• Morgenstern-Price
• Shahunyants
• ITF Method
Optimization of polygonal slip surface searches the most critical surface (the lowest safety
factor SF).
-1180-
Sarma
The Sarma method falls within a category of general sliced methods of limit states. It is based
on fulfilling the force and moment equilibrium conditions on individual blocks. The blocks are
created by dividing the soil region above the potential slip surface by planes, which may have
in general experience a different inclination. Forces acting on individual blocks are displayed in
the following figure.
Static scheme - Sarma method

Here, Ei ,Xi represent the normal and shear forces between blocks. Ni ,Ti are normal and shear
forces on segments of a slip surface. Wi is the block weight and Kh*Wi is the horizontal force
that is used to achieve in the Sarma method the limit state. Generally inclined surcharge can
be introduced in each block. This surcharge is included in the analysis together with the
surcharge due to water having the free water table above the terrain, and with forces in
anchors. All these forces are projected along the horizontal and vertical directions, which are
then summed up into components Fxi and Fyi.
Kh is a constant named the factor of horizontal acceleration and it is introduced into the
analysis in order to satisfy the equilibrium on individual blocks. There is a relationship between
Kh and the factor of slope stability SF allowing for the safety factor computation. In ordinary
cases the analysis proceeds with the value of Kh equal to zero. A non-zero value of Kh is used
to simulate the horizontal surcharge, e.g. due to earthquake (see below).
Analysis process
Computation of limit equilibrium
The computation of limit equilibrium requires the solution of 6n - 1 unknowns, where n stands
for the number of blocks dividing the soil region above the potential slip surface. These are:
Ei - forces developed between blocks
Ni - normal forces acting on slip surface
Ti - shear forces acting on a slip surface
Xi - shear forces developed between blocks
zi - locations of points of applications of forces
-1181-
li - locations of points of applications of forces

Kh - factor of horizontal acceleration
5n - 1 equations are available for the required unknowns. In particular, we have:

a)horizontal force equations of equilibrium on blocks:
b)vertical force equations of equilibrium on blocks:
c) moment equations of equilibrium on blocks:
where rxi and ryi are arms of forces Fxi and Fyi
d) relationship between the normal and shear forces according to the Mohr-Coulomb
theory:
where: P*W - resultant force of pore pressure on dividing planes

i
- average value of internal friction angle on dividing plane
- average value of cohesion on dividing plane
It is evident that n - 1 must be selected (estimated) a priory. Relatively small error is received
when estimating the points of application of forces Ei. The problem then becomes statically
determined. Solving the resulting system of equations finally provides the values of all
remaining unknowns. The principal result of this analysis is the determination of the factor of
horizontal acceleration Kh.
Computation of factor of slope stability SF
The factor of slope stability SF is introduced in the analysis such as to reduce the soil strength
parameters c and tgφ. Equilibrium analysis is then performed for the reduced parameters to
arrive at the factor of horizontal acceleration Kh pertinent to a given factor of slope stability SF.
This iteration is repeated until the factor Kh reaches either zero or a specified value.
Influence of external load
The analyzed slope can be loaded on its ground by inclined load having generally trapezoidal
shape. This load enters the analysis such that its vertical material component (if having the
direction of weight) is added to the weight of a corresponding block. This results in change of
both the slice weight and its center of gravity. Providing the vertical component acts against
the direction of gravity it is added to force Fyi. The horizontal component is added to force Fxi.
Literature:
Sarma, S. K.: Stability analysis of embankments and slopes,Géotechnique 23, 423-433, 1973.
-1182-
Spencer
The Spencer method is a general method of slices developed on the basis of limit equilibrium.
It requires satisfying equilibrium of forces and moments acting on individual blocks. The blocks
are created by dividing the soil above the slip surface by dividing planes. Forces acting on
individual blocks are displayed in the following figure.
Static scheme - Spencer method

Each block is assumed to contribute due to the following forces:
Wi - block weight, including material surcharge having the character of weight including
the influence of the coefficient of vertical earthquake Kv
Kh*Wi - horizontal inertia force representing the effect of earthquake, Kh is the factor of
horizontal acceleration during earthquake
Ni - normal force on the slip surface
Ti - shear force on the slip surface
Ei , - forces exerted by neighboring blocks, they are inclined from horizontal plane by
Ei+1 angle δ
Fxi,Fyi - other horizontal and vertical forces acting on block

M1i - moment of forces Fx , Fy rotating about point M, which is the center of the ith
i i
segment of slip surface
Ui - pore pressure resultant on the ith segment of slip surface
The following assumptions are introduced in the Spencer method to calculate the limit
equilibrium of forces and moment on individual blocks:
• dividing planes between blocks are always vertical
th
• the line of action of weight of block Wi passes through the center of the i segment of slip
surface represented by point M
th
• the normal force Ni is acting in the center of the i segment of slip surface, at point M
• inclination of forces Ei acting between blocks is constant for all blocks and equals to δ,
-1183-
only at slip surface end points is δ = 0

The solution adopts the following expressions:
(
1
)
(
2
)
(
3
)
(
4
)
(
5
)
where: φi - angle of internal friction of soil on the slip surface segment

ci - soil cohesion on the slip surface segment
αi - inclination of the slip surface segment
Equation (1) represents the relationship between effective and total value of the normal force
acting on the slip surface. Equation (2) corresponds to the Mohr-Coulomb condition
representing the relation between the normal and shear forces on a given segment of the slip
surface. Equation (3) represents the force equation of equilibrium in the direction normal to
th th
the i segment of the slip surface, whereas Equation (4) represents equilibrium along the i
segment of the slip surface. SF is the factor of safety, which is used to reduce the soil
parameters. Equation (5) corresponds to the moment equation of equilibrium about point M,
where ygi is the vertical coordinate of the point of application of the weight of block and yM is
the vertical coordinate of point M. Modifying equations (3) and (4) provides the following
recursive formula:
This formula allows to calculate all forces Ei acting between blocks for given values of δi and
SF. This solution assumes that at the slip surface origin the value of E is known and equal to E1
= 0.
Additional recursive formula follows from the moment equation of equilibrium (5) as:
This formula allows us calculating for a given value of δ all arms z of forces acting between
blocks, knowing the value on the left at the slip surface origin, where z1 = 0.
The factor of safety SF is determined by employing the following iteration process:
-1184-
1. The initial value of δ is set to zero δ = 0.

2. The factor of safety SF for a given value of δ follows from equation (6), while assuming
the value of En+1 = 0 at the end of the slip surface.
3. The value of δ is provided by equation (7) using the values of E determined in the
previous step with the requirement of having the moment on the last block equal to
zero. Equation (7) does not provide the value of zn+1 as it is equal to zero. For this
value the moment equation of equilibrium (5) must be satisfied.
4. Steps 2 and 3 are then repeated until the value of δ does not change.
For the process of iteration to be stable it is necessary to avoid unstable solutions. Such
instabilities occur at points where division by zero in expressions (6) and (7) takes place. In
equation (7), division by zero is encountered for δ = π/2 or δ = -π/2. Therefore, the value of
angle δ must be found in the interval (-π/2 ; π/2).
Division by zero in expression (6) appears when:
Another check preventing numerical unstability is verification of parameter mα - following

condition must be satisfied:
Therefore before iteration run it is required to find the highest of critical values SFmin satisfying
above mentioned conditions. Values below this critical value SFmin are in area of unstable
solution, therefore iteration begins by setting SF to a value "just" above SFmin and all result
values of SF from iteration runs are higher than SFmin.
Generally rigorous methods converge worse than the simpler methods (Bishop, Fellenius).
Examples with convergence problems include too steep sections of slip surface, complex
geometry, a significant jump in surcharge etc. If no result is obtained, we recommend slight
change of input data, e.g. less steep slip surface, input more points into the slip surface etc. or
using of some of the simpler methods.
Literature:
Spencer, E. 1967. A method of analysis of the stability of embankments assuming parallel
interslice forces. Géotechnique, 17(1): 11-26.
Janbu
Janbu is a general method of slices developed on the basis of limit equilibrium. It requires
satisfying equilibrium of forces and moments acting on individual blocks (only moment
equilibrium at last uppermost block is not satisfied). The blocks are created by dividing the soil
above the slip surface by dividing planes. Forces acting on individual blocks are displayed in
the following figure:
-1185-
Static scheme - Janbu method

Each block is assumed to contribute due to the following forces:
Wi - block weight, including material surcharge having the character of weight including
the influence of the coefficient of vertical earthquake Kv
Kh*Wi - horizontal inertia force representing the effect of earthquake, Kh is the factor of
horizontal acceleration during earthquake
Ni - normal force on the slip surface
Ti - shear force on the slip surface
Ei , - forces exerted by neighboring blocks, they are inclined from horizontal plane by
Ei+1 angle δi resp. δi+1 and lie at the height zi resp. zi+1 above slip surface
Fxi,Fyi - other horizontal and vertical forces acting on block

M1i - moment from forces Fx , Fy rotating about point M, which is the center of the ith
i i
segment of slip surface
Ui - pore pressure resultant on the ith segment of slip surface
The following assumptions are introduced in the Janbu method to calculate the limit
th
th
• position zi of forces Ei acting between blocks is assumed, at slip surface end points is z = 0
Choice of position zi can have significant infuence on convergency of method. If we make a bad
assumption of position zi for a given slope, it can become impossible to satisfy equilibrium
conditions (algorithm does not converge). Heights zi above slip surface are set approximately
to one third of height of interface between the blocks. In case of unsatisfying equilibrium
conditions algorithm changes heights to a different position, e.g. slightly higher within passive
zone, near the toe, and lower within active zone, near the crest of slope.
-1186-
The solution adopts the following expressions:

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)

Equation (1) represents the relationship between effective and total value of the normal force
acting on the slip surface. Equation (2) corresponds to the Mohr-Coulomb condition
representing the relation between the normal and shear forces on a given segment of the slip
surface. Equation (3) represents the force equation of equilibrium in the direction normal to
th th
the i segment of the slip surface, whereas Equation (4) represents equilibrium along the i
segment of the slip surface. SF is the factor of safety, which is used to reduce the soil
parameters. Equation (5) corresponds to the moment equation of equilibrium about point M,
where ygi is the vertical coordinate of the point of application of the weight of block and yM is
the vertical coordinate of point M.
Modifying equations (3) and (4) provides the following recursive formula (6):
(
6
)
-1187-
This formula allows calculating all forces Ei acting between blocks for given values of δiand SF.
This solution assumes that at the slip surface origin the value of E is known and equal to E1=0.
Formula for calculating angles δi (7) follows from the moment equation of equilibrium (5) as:
(
7
)
This formula allows us calculating for a given value of δ all arms zi of forces acting between
blocks, knowing the value on the left at the slip surface origin, where z1 = 0.
The factor of safety FS is determined by employing the following iteration process:
1. The initial value of angles are set to zero δi = 0 and positions zi to approximately one
third of interface height.
2. The factor of safety FS for a given value of δi follows from equation (6), while assuming
3. The value of δi is provided by equation (7) using the values of Ei determined in the
previous step.
4. Steps 2 and 3 are then repeated until the value of FS does not change.
It is necessary to avoid unstable solutions for successful iteration process. Such instabilities
occur at points where division by zero in expression (6) takes place, i.e.:

Literature:
-1188-
Janbu, N. 1954. Application of Composite Slip Surface for Stability Analysis. European
Conference on Stability Analysis, Stockholm, Sweden.
Janbu, N. 1973. Slope Stability Computations. Embankment Dam Engineering - Casagrande
Volume, R.C. Hirschfeld and S.J. Poulos, eds., John Wiley and Sons, New York, pp 47-86.
Morgenstern-Price
Morgenstern-Price is a general method of slices developed on the basis of limit equilibrium. It
requires satisfying equilibrium of forces and moments acting on individual blocks. The blocks
are created by dividing the soil above the slip surface by dividing planes. Forces acting on
individual blocks are displayed in the following figure:
Static scheme - Morgenstern-Price method

Each block is assumed to contribute due to the same forces as in Spencer method. The
following assumptions are introduced in the Morgenstern-Price method to calculate the limit
th
th
• inclination of forces Ei acting between blocks is different on each block (δi) at slip surface
end points is δ = 0
The only difference between Spencer and Morgenstern-Price method is shown in the above list
of assumptions. Choice of inclination angles δi of forces Ei acting between the blocks is realized
with the help of Half-sine function - one of the functions in the following figure is automatically
chosen. This choice of the shape of function has a minor influence on final results, but suitable
choice can improve the convergency of method. Functional value of Half-sine function f(xi) at
boundary point xi multiplied by parameter λ results the value of inclination angle δi.
-1189-
Half-sine function
The solution adopts the expressions (1) - (5), shown in Spencer method, i.e.:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)

• (1) relationship between effective and total value of the normal force acting on the slip
surface
• (2) Mohr-Coulomb condition representing the relation between the normal and shear
forces on a given segment of the slip surface (Ni a Ti)
-1190-
th
• (3) force equation of equilibrium in the direction normal to the i segment of the slip
surface
th
• (4) force equation of equilibrium along the i segment of the slip surface
• (5) moment equation of equilibrium about point M
Modifying force equations (3) and (4) provides the following recursive formula (6):
(
6
)
This formula allows calculating all forces Ei acting between blocks for given values of δi and SF.
This solution assumes that at the slip surface origin the value of E is known and equal to E1 =
0.
Additional recursive formula (7) follows from the moment equation of equilibrium (5) as:
(
7
)
This formula allows to calculate all arms zi of forces acting between blocks for a given values of
δi, knowing the value on the left at the slip surface origin, where z1 = 0.
The factor of safety SF is determined by employing the following iteration process:
1. The initial value of angles δi is set according to Half-sine function (δi = λ*f(xi)).
2. The factor of safety SF for a given value of δi follows from equation (6), while assuming
3. The value of δi is provided by equation (7) using the values of Ei determined in the
previous step with the requirement of having the moment on the last block equal to
zero. Functional values f(xi) are same all the time during the iteration, only parameter λ
is iterated. Equation (7) does not provide the value of zn+1 as it is equal to zero. For
this value the moment equation of equilibrium (5) must be satisfied.
4. Steps 2 and 3 are then repeated until the value of δi (resp. parameter λ) does not
change.
It is necessary to avoid unstable solutions for successful iteration process. Such instabilities
occur at points where division by zero in expressions (6) and (7) takes place. In equation (7),
division by zero is encountered for δi= π/2 or δi = -π/2. Therefore, the value of angle δimust be
found in the interval (-π/2 ; π/2).
Division by zero in expression (6) appears when:
-1191-

Literature:
Morgenstern, N.R., and Price, V.E. 1965. The analysis of the stability of general slip surfaces.
Géotechnique, 15(1): 79-93.
Morgenstern, N.R., and Price, V.E. 1967. A numerical method for solving the equations of
stability of general slip surfaces. Computer Journal, 9: 388-393.
Zhu, D.Y., Lee, C.F., Qian, Q.H., and Chen, G.R. 2005. A concise algorithm for computing the
factor of safety using the Morgenstern-Price method. Canadian Geotechnical Journal, 42(1):
272-278.
Shahunyants
The Shahunyants method is a general method of slices developed on the basis of limit
equilibrium. It requires satisfying equilibrium of forces and moments acting on individual
blocks. The blocks are created by dividing the soil above the slip surface by dividing planes.
Forces acting on individual blocks are displayed in the following figure:
-1192-
Static scheme - Shahunyants method

Each block assumes action of the following forces:
where: Pyi - resultant of vertical forces acting on a given block (block weight, block
surcharge, earthquake, anchor forces, …)
Pxi - resultant of horizontal forces on a given block (block surcharge,
earthquake, anchor forces, geo-reinforcements, …)
Ei+1, Ei - forces developed between blocks
Ni - reaction below the block normal to the slip surface segment
Ti - friction force on the slip surface segment
li - length of the slip surface segment
φi - angle of internal friction of soil on the slip surface segment
The following assumptions are adopted in the Shahunyants method to calculate the limit state
on a given block:
• slope of forces Ei acting between blocks is zero, forces act horizontally
Solution procedure:
Forces Pyi and Pxi are first transformed with the help of expressions (1) and (2) into directions
of forces Ti and Ni. For a positive angle αi (the same way as in the schema) the force PNi acts
in the direction opposite to Ni, the force PQi acts in the direction opposite to Ti.
(1)
(2)
The forces acting along the slip surface segment are related by:
(3)
where: Ui - pore pressure on the slip surface segment
The force equations of equilibrium are fulfilled on the block:

The equilibrium condition in the direction normal to the slip surface segment:
(4)
The equilibrium condition in the direction parallel to the slip surface segment:
(5)
-1193-
Introducing Eq. (3) into Eq. (5) gives:
(6)
Next, substituting Eq. (4) into Eq. (6) gives:
(7)
After some algebra:
(8)
Exploiting the following mathematical expression:
(9)
yields Eq. (8) in the form:
(10)
This can be modified as:
(11)
to provide the recurrent expression for Ei forces acting between blocks as:
(12)
At this stage the analysis enters the factor of safety Ku. The factor of safety is the value which
bring the forces acting on individual blocks of soil into the state of limit states. This is achieved
by multiplying active forces, i.e. forces contributing to sliding of the soil mass above the slip
surface, by the factor of safety. Active forces are in Eq. (12) contained within the term PQi.
This term contains on the one hand active forces that contribute to sliding and on the other
hand forces that resist to sliding. The contributing forces will be denoted as PQi,sd whereas the
resisting forces as PQi,ud. Eq. (12) then becomes:
-1194-
(13)
Providing the value of PQi is positive then it contributes to sliding and will be assumed as
active force PQi,sd. Providing the value of PQi is negative then it resists to sliding and will be
assumed as force PQi,ud. Therefore subtracting the value PQi,ud, which is negative, in Eq. (13)
means essentially adding the positive value, so we can formally write:
(14)
At the slip surface origin the value of E0 = 0. The value of E1 is then given by:
(15)
The value of E2 is then given by:
(16)
Similarly we may determine the values of all forces acting between blocks. It further holds at
the end point of the slip surface we have En = 0. Exploiting the previous expressions this can
be written as:
(17)
This equation directly provides the factor of safety Ku in the form:
(18)
ITF Method (Imbalance Thrust Force Method)

The ITF method is a limit state method. It builds up on the equation of equilibrium of forces
acting on individual blocks and does not consider the moment equation of equilibrium. The
bases of the method and adopted assumptions are evident from following figure.
-1195-
Fig. 1 Forces acting on a block - ITF Method

Consider the following assumptions to concerning the forces acting on the block:
where: Wi - th
weight of the i block, the weight of a part of the block below the
ground water is determined from the saturated unit weight of soil γsat
Fyi - represents the remaining vertical load acting on the block
Fxi - represents the remaining horizontal load acting on the block
Fi, Fi+1 - forces acting between blocks along directions given by angles αi and
αi+1
Fig. 2 Scheme of pore pressure action on block

Ui - pore pressure resultant on slip surface segment
UVi,UVi+ - pore presure resultants on dividing planes between blocks
1
The forces UVi and UVi+1 are included in horizontal forces Fxi.
-1196-
The force equation of equilibrium in the direction normal to the segment of the slip surface
provides:
The forces on the segment of a slip surface are related by
where: φi - angle of internal friction of soil

ci - soil cohesion
li - th
length of the slip surface segment associated with the i block
th
The force equation of equilibrium in the direction of the i segment of the slip surface (given
by angle αi) yields the force Fi acting between blocks in the form:
Introducing Eqs.(1) and (2) into Eq. (3) provides:
and after some formal algebra we arrive at the resulting form of the equation of equilibrium
as:
The equilibrium condition will be fulfilled by introducing the factor of safety SFS into the
analysis such that the strength parameters of a given soil c and tanφ are divided by this value.
Eq. (4) then becomes
Eq. (5) then gives the searched factor of safety SF through the process of iteration. This
process proceeds such that the force Fn equal to 0 kN is applied at the highest (end) point of
the slip surface. The forces Fi acting in between blocks are determined for a given value of the
factor of safety SF from Eq. (5). This step is repeated for various values of SF until we find
such SF for which the force F0 at the slope base becomes equal to 0 kN. No tension is assumed
along the slip surface. If the equilibrium condition requires the value of normal force Ni being
negative, which means that the soil is loaded in tension, then the value of this force is set
equal to zero in the next iteration step and the shear force Ti acting on a given segment is
determined based on the soil cohesion only.
The ITF method is quite sensitive with respect to the shape of the slip surface. In case the slip
surface contains sharp segment discontinuities the resulting factor of safety is generally larger
as compare to reality. It is recommended that the slope difference between adjacent segments
of the slip surface be less than 10˚. This is checked automatically by the program and if the
-1197-
slope difference is found greater the programs prompts a warning that the results might be
overestimated. This is usually not the problem of a circular slip surface but should be kept in
mind in case of polygonal slip surfaces.
ITF Method - explicit solution
The explicit solution of the ITF method assumes a different way of introducing the factor of
safety into the analysis. The mathematical solution then does not require iterations and the
resulting factor of safety is calculated directly in one step. With this approach the resulting
factor of safety is typically higher which may the solution totally devalued, particularly in cases
concerning polygonal slip surfaces with large slope differences of adjacent segments.
The solution exploits Eq. (4) to which the factor of safety SF is introduced such that it
multiplies the active components of forces, i.e. the components acting in the sliding direction.
The equilibrium condition then becomes :
For lucidity we introduce the component of active forces as:
and next the component of passive forces as:
and an auxiliary function:
Eq. (6) can be then written in more compact form as:
The next step assumes the known force Fn=0 to provide expressions of forces between blocks
F in the form:
Etc….
And since the force on the bottom origin of the slip surface should be equal to 0 kN, we get the
final form of the factor of safety SF as:
-1198-
Surplus sliding force

Surplus sliding force Fn is introduced as a force acting in the bottom point of slip surface - see
picture. With this force, the limit equilibrium can be reached for desired value of design safety
factor Fsd and its value can be useful for design of a retaining wall.The surplus sliding force has
a reasonable value if the design safety factor is higher than the actual one. When the actual
safety factor is high enough (the slope stability is acceptable), surplus sliding force value is
equal to zero.
Surplus sliding force Fn

The surplus sliding force can also be used as a criterion of optimization. In that case, the
optimization process searches the slip surface with maximum value of surplus sliding force.
This kind of optimization process can be used, if the slope stability for actual slip surface is not
acceptable, because in case of acceptable slip surface, the surplus sliding force is not
calculated (equals zero). For acceptable slip surface stability, optimization process uses as
criterion the factor of stability FS only.
Optimization of Polygonal Slip Surface

The slip surface optimization proceeds such that the program changes subsequently locations
of individual points of this surface and checks, which change of location of a given point results
in the maximal reduction of the factor of slope stability SF. The end points of the optimized slip
surface are moved on the ground surface, internal points are moved in the vertical and
horizontal directions. The step size is initially selected as one tenth of the smallest distance of
neighboring points along the slip surface. With every new run the step size is reduced by one
half. Location of points of slip surface is optimized subsequently from the left to the right and it
is completed when there was no point moved in the last run.
When optimizing the polygonal slip surface the iteration process may suffer from falling into
the local minimum (with respect to gradual evolution of locations of nodal points) so not
always the process is terminated by locating the critical slip surface. Especially in case of
complex slope profile it is therefore advantageous to introduce several locations of the initial
slip surface. Combination with the approach used for circular slip surfaces is also
recommended. Therefore, the critical slip surface assuming circular shape is found first and the
result is then used to define the initial polygonal slip surface.
The optimization process can be restricted by various constraints. This becomes advantageous
especially if we wish the searched slip to pass through a certain region or to bypass this
region. The restriction on the optimization process can be performed in two different ways:
-1199-
1. Optimization restrictions are specified as a set of segments in a soil body. The optimized
slip surface is then forced to bypass these segments during optimization.
2. Another way of restricting the optimization process is to fix location of selected points
along the optimized slip surface or allow for moving these points only in one of two
directions, either vertically or horizontally.
For ITF method, the surplus sliding force can be used as the criterion of optimization. In that
case, the optimization process searches the slip surface with maximum value of surplus sliding
force Fn instead of the minimum stability factor FS. This optimization criterion can be applied
when the actual slip surface is not acceptable. For acceptable slip surface the optimization
process uses the stability factor FS only.
Changing the Inclination of Dividing Planes

Changing inclination of dividing planes is applied for Sarma’s method only. It is evident from
figure that the planes dividing individual blocks do not have to be vertical and not even
mutually parallel. In the first stage of analysis when the optimization procedure moves points
along the slip surface it assumes vertical alignment of dividing planes. To arrive at even
smaller value of the slope stability it is possible to change the mutual alignment of dividing
planes. This process is again performed in several runs with limited value of rotation step and
this step is again reduced in the course of optimization. This stage of optimization is
o
terminated once the rotation step drops below the value of 1 and no change of rotation
occurred during the last optimization run.
Static scheme - Sarma method
Circular Slip Surface

All methods of limit equilibrium assume that the soil body above the slip surface is subdivided
into blocks (dividing planes between blocks are always vertical). Forces acting on individual
blocks are displayed in figure.
-1200-
Static scheme of slice

Here, Xi and Ei are the shear and normal forces acting between individual blocks, Ti and Ni are
the shear and normal forces on individual segments of the slip surface, Wi are weights of
individual blocks.
Individual methods of slices differ in their assumptions of satisfying the force equations of
equilibrium and the moment equation of equilibrium with respect to the center O.
The program allows for adopting one of the following methods:
• Fellenius / Petterson
• Bishop
• Spencer
• Janbu
• Morgenstern-Price
• Shahunyants
• ITF Method
Ground water specified within the slope body (using one of the five options) influences the
analysis in two different ways. First when computing the weight of a soil block and second
when determining the shear forces. Note that the effective soil parameters are used to relate
the normal and shear forces.
Introducing anchor forces and water above the ground surface into the analysis
Anchor forces are considered as external load applied to the slope. They are taken with respect
to one running meter [kN/m] and introduced into the moment equation of equilibrium. These
forces should contribute to additional stability, if that cannot be achieved in a different way.
There is no limitation to the magnitudes of anchor forces and therefore it is necessary to work
with realistic values.
Influence of water above the ground surface is considered as set forces acting perpendicular
on the ground surface together with pore pressure along the slip surface, which is derived
depending on the depth of slip surface measured from the ground water table. The forces
acting on the ground surface enter the moment equation of equilibrium as forces acting on
respective arms measured towards the center of the slip surface.
Optimization of circular slip surface searches the most critical surface (the lowest SF).
-1201-
Fellenius / Petterson
The simplest method of slices assumes only the overall moment equation of equilibrium written
with respect to the center of the slip surface. The shear and normal forces between blocks Xi
and Ei are neglected. The factor of safety SF follows directly from the following expression:
where: ui - pore pressure within block

ci,φi - effective values of soil parameters
Wi - block weight
Ni - normal force on the segment of the slip surface
αi - inclination of the segment of the slip surface
li - length of the segment of the slip surface
Literature:
Petterson KE (1955) The early history of circular sliding surfaces. Geotechnique 5:275-296.
Bishop
The simplified Bishop method assumes zero Xi forces between blocks. The method is based on
satisfying the moment equation of equilibrium and the vertical force equation of equilibrium.
The factor of safety SF is found through a successive iteration of the following expression:
where: ui - pore pressure within block

ci,φi - effective values of soil parameters
Wi - block weight
αi - inclination of the segment of the slip surface
bi - horizontal width of the block
Literature:
Bishop, A.W. (1955) "The Use of the Slip Circle in the Stability Analysis of Slopes",
Geotechnique, Great Britain, Vol. 5, No. 1, Mar., pp. 7-17.
Spencer
This method assumes non-zero forces between blocks. The resultants of shear and normal
forces acting between blocks have constant inclinations. The Spencer method is a rigorous
method in a sense that it satisfies all three equations of equilibrium - the force equations of
equilibrium in the horizontal and vertical directions and the moment equation of equilibrium.
-1202-
The factor of safety SF is found through the iteration of inclination of forces acting between
blocks and the factor of safety SF. Further details can be found in section describing the
analysis of polygonal slip surface.
Janbu
Janbu method assumes non-zero forces between blocks. Method satisfies the force equations
of equilibrium in the horizontal and vertical directions for all blocks and the moment equation
of equilibrium for all but the last (uppermost) slice. Assumption of this method is choice of
position of forces acting between the blocks. The factor of safety SF is found through the
iteration of forces acting between blocks and then inclinations of these forces are calculated.
Further details can be found in section describing the analysis of polygonal slip surface.
Morgenstern-Price
This method assumes non-zero forces between blocks. The resultants of shear and normal
forces acting between blocks have different inclinations at each block (shape of Half-sine
function). Morgenstern-Price is a rigorous method in a sense that it satisfies all three equations
of equilibrium - the force equations of equilibrium in the horizontal and vertical directions and
the moment equation of equilibrium. The factor of safety SF is found through the iteration of
inclination of forces acting between blocks and the factor of safety SF. Further details can be
found in section describing the analysis of polygonal slip surface.
Shahunyants
ITF Method (Imbalance Thrust Force Method)

Optimization of Circular Slip Surface

The goal of the optimization process is to locate a slip surface with the smallest factor of slope
stability SF. The circular slip surface is specified in terms of 3 points: two points on the ground
surface and one inside the soil body. Each point on the surface has one degree of freedom
while the internal point has two degrees of freedom. The slip surface is defined in terms of four
independent parameters. Searching for such a set of parameters that yields the most critical
results requires sensitivity analysis resulting in a matrix of changes of parameters that allows
fast and reliable optimization procedure. The slip surface that gives the smallest factor of slope
stability is taken as the critical one. Parameters of individual slip surfaces and results from
optimization runs can be displayed in output document.
This approach usually succeeds in finding the critical slip surface without encountering the
problem of falling into a local minimum during iteration. It therefore appears as a suitable
starting point when optimizing general slip surfaces such as the polygonal slip surface.
The optimization process can be restricted by various constraints. This becomes advantageous
especially if we wish the searched slip surface to pass through a certain region or to bypass
this region. The restriction on the optimization process can be performed in two different ways:
1. Optimization restrictions are specified as a set of segments in a soil body. The optimized
slip surface is then forced to bypass these segments during optimization.
-1203-
2. Another way of restricting the optimization process is to fix location of left or right end
point of the optimized slip surface.
For ITF methods, the surplus sliding force can be used as the criterion of optimization. In that
case, the optimization process searches the slip surface with maximum value of surplus sliding
force Fn instead of the minimum stability factor FS. This optimization criterion can be applied
when the actual slip surface is not acceptable. For acceptable slip surface the optimization
process uses the stability factor FS only.
Foliation
Soils can be introduced with foliation. It means that along an angle specified in terms of a
certain interval, which in turn is introduced as one of the soil parameters <Starting Slope;
End Slope> the soil experiences significantly different (usually worse) parameters ( c a φ).
If the slope of a slip surface segment or the slope of interface between blocks is assumed
within the interval <Starting Slope; End Slope>, the analysis proceeds with the modified
parameters of c and φ.
Influence of Tensile Cracks

The program makes it possible to account for the influence of tensile cracks that appear on
terrain surface and are filled with water h. The only input parameter is the depth of tensile
cracks. The effect of cracks is incorporated when calculating normal and shear forces in
sections of a slip surface containing cracks - in a section with tensile cracks the shear strength
parameters are set to zero (c = 0, φ = 0). Next, a horizontal force F due to presence water in a
tensile crack is introduced in the analysis (see figure):
Influence of tensile cracks
Rock Stability
Program for stability analysis of rock slope treats the following types of failure of rock faces:
• Sliding on the plane slip surface
• Translation on the polygonal slip surface
• Fall of the rock wedge
-1204-
Failure of a rock face due to sliding on the plane slip surface
Translation on the polygonal slip surface
Fall of the rock wedge
Plane Slip Surface

Failure on the plane slip surface is manifested by a rock block sliding down along this surface.
The rock wedge can be specified with a tension crack. The solution procedure of stability
requires determination of the normal force N acting on the slip surface, the shear force Tact
(active) and the resisting shear force Tres (passive).
-1205-
Forces on the slip surface

The shear strength parameters and the normal force N acting on the slip surface are the main
input data for the determination of the resisting shear forces Tres. Calculation of the active
shear force Tact and the normal force N is further influenced by the own weight of block
(depends on the geometry and unit weight of rock), anchorage, surcharge, influence of water
and seismic effects. The active force Tact and the normal force N are determined as a sum of all
forces entering the analysis.
The program offers several types of plane slip surfaces:
• Smooth
• Undulated
• Stepped
The resulting verification can be carried out either according to the selected verification
methodology based on the input in the "Settings" frame.
Stepped Slip Surface

If the rock body contains a system of parallel discontinuous cracks inclined to the top face of a
rock and the second system is indistinctive, then it is possible to consider a formation of a
stepped (jagged) slip surface in the rock body. This surface can be introduced into the
program using the Calla and Nicholas theory, which increases resistance on the steppet slip
surface by Δτ.
where: σn - normal stress acting in the direction normal to the slip surface
ν - waviness angle
T - effective tensile strength of steps in the intact rock
k - part of the height ht associated with steps in the intact rock (not
created by a secondary system of planes)
ht - normal height of stepped wedge resting on an inclined plane of
principal system of discontinuity planes
T0 - tensile strength of intact rock
-1206-
Stepped slip surface

Literature:
W.S. Dershowitz, H.H. Einstein - Characterizing rock joint geometry with joint system models
Journal Rock Mechanics and Rock Engineering, Springer Wien ISSN 0723-2632 , Issue Volume
21, Number 1 / January, 1988 Pages 21-51.
Tensile Strength of Rock

Tensile strength Te is 20 to 30x smaller than the strength of rock in simple compression σc.
Strength in simple tension To for selected intact rocks [MPa]
Basalt 3 - 18
Gneiss 7 - 16
Granite 11 - 21
Limestone 3-5
Marble 7 - 12
Quarzite 4 - 23
Sandstone 5 - 11
Schist 5 - 12
Slate 2 - 17
Tuff 2-4
Undulated Slip Surface

If undulated surface is considered (on scale 1 to 10 m) - it is possible to account for slip
-1207-
surface waviness by angle ν:
where: α - slip surface gradient

αi - gradient of the i-th fault of slip surface
The waviness increases the tensile strength τ on slip surface by Δτ:
where: σn - normal stress acting in the direction normal to the slip surface
ν - waviness angle
Undulated slip surface

Literature:
Miller, S.M. (1988). Modeling Shear Strength at Low Normal Stresses for Enhanced Rock Slope
Engineering, Proc. Of 39th Highway Geology Symp, 346-356.
Anchorage of Rock Slope

Two types of anchors can be defined when running the slope stability analysis on a plane slip
surface:
Active
An active anchor is represented by a pre-stressed anchor, for which the anchor forces are
activated before the sliding of a rock block takes place. The normal force increases the normal
stress on a slip surface and as such also the resisting forces; the tangent component of the
normal force is either added to or subtracted from the shear (active) forces.
Passive
A passive anchor is activated by sliding of a rock block (i.e. not pre-stressed anchors). The
normal force increases the normal stress on a slip surface and as such also the resisting
forces; the tangent component of the normal force is added to the resisting forces.
-1208-
Resolution of anchor force
Surcharge of Rock Slope

The surcharge resultant is determined first. The normal component of the resultant force
increases the normal stress on a slip surface and as such also the resisting forces Tres, the
tangent component is either added to or subtracted from the shear (active) forces Tact.
Resolution of surcharge
Influence of Water Acting on Slip Surface

The following options to account for water effects are available in the program:
-1209-
Hydrostatic pressure, GWT above toe of slope
Hydrostatic pressure, GWT on tension crack
Hydrostatic pressure, GWT on tension crack, max
Hydrostatic pressure, water acting on tension crack only
Own water force acting on slip surface only
Own water force behavior
GWT Above Slope Toe

Hydrostatic pressure, GWT above toe of slope
The slip surface is either entirely or partially below the ground water table (water can not
outlow from slip surface), the maximal water pressure is at the toe of face.
Hydrostatic pressure on slip surface

The value of water pressure u at the heel of slope is given by:
-1210-

ht - height of GWT above toe of slope
The resulting compressive water force acting in the direction normal to the slip surface is given
by:

ht - height of GWT above toe of slope
α - deflection of slip surface from horizontal
GWT on Tension Crack

GTW on tension crack
The slip surface is entirely below the ground water table; the GWT either intersects the tension
crack or is aligned with terrain, the maximal value of uplift pressure is at the toe of face.
Hydrostatic pressure on slip surface and on tension crack, max. value at the toe of slope
The value of uplift pressure u at the intersection of slip surface and tension crack is given by:

ht - height of GWT above the line of intersection of slip surface and tension
crack
The resulting compressive water force V acting in the direction normal to the tension crack is
given by:
-1211-

crack
φ - deflection of tension crack from vertical
The value of hydrostatic pressure u1 at the toe of slope is given by:

Hw - height of GWT above toe of slope
The resulting compressive water force U acting in the direction normal to the slip surface is
given:
where: u - water pressure acting on the line of intersection of slip surface and tension
crack
u1 - water pressure at toe of slope
crack
GWT on Tension Crack, Max. Tens. Crack

GWT on tension crack
The slip surface is entirely below the ground water table, the GWT either intersects the tension
crack or is aligned with terrain (water can outflow at the slope heel), the maximal value of
uplift pressure is at the intersection of tension crack and slip surface.
-1212-
Hydrostatic pressure on slip surface and on tension crack


crack
given by:

crack
The resulting value of pressure u1 at the toe of slope is equal to zero.

The resulting compressive water force U acting in the direction normal to the tension crack is
given:
where: u - water pressure acting on the line of intersection of slip surface and tension
crack
crack
-1213-
Water Acting Only on Tension Crack

Water acting on tension crack only
The slip surface is fully dry (seepage is not possible); the GWT either intersects the tension
crack or is aligned with terrain, the maximal value of uplift pressure is at the intersection of
slip surface and tension crack.
Water acting on tension crack only


crack
given by:

crack
The value of water pressure acting on slip surface is equal to zero.
Own Water Force Acting Only on Slip Surface

Own water force acting on slip surface only
The program allows for a manual input of the constant value of water pressure ps [kPa] acting
-1214-
on a slip surface.
Own value of water pressure acting on slip surface
Own Water Force Behavior

Own water force behavior
The program allows for a manual input of the constant value of water pressure pt [kPa] acting
on the slip surface and pt [kPa] acting on a tension crack.
Own values of water pressure on slip surface and on tension crack
Polygonal Slip Surface

The program performs stability analysis of rock blocks moving along the polygonal slip surface.
Owing to the complexity of the general solution the program admits the following assumptions:
• Motion of rock blocks is only translational.
• Blocks translate along the polygonal slip surface formed either by planar planes or planes
with moderate waviness.
-1215-
• Rock blocks are divided by joints with known directions.

• Actual deformation of rock mass inside the blocks is negligible.
• Failure on the polygonal slip surface and along joints is driven by the Mohr-Coulomb
failure criterion.
• The same factor of safety is assumed for whole polygonal slip surface.
• All rock blocks are in contact (opening of joints is not allowed).
The Mohr-Coulomb shear strength parameters on the slip surface and on joints separating
individual block are the main input data for the determination of stability of rock blocks. The
solution is further influenced by the weight of block (depends on the geometry of block and
unit weight of rock), anchorage, surcharge acting on the bloks, influence of water and seismic
effects.
The basic theoretical grounds of the solution are described here.
Polygonal slip surface
Geometry of Rock Block

The block geometry is determined by the gradient α, by the length of a given slip surface l and
by the gradient of a dividing joints φ separating the subsequent block as well as by the
gradient α and the length l of the top face of external surface of a rock slope (natural profile).
Lengths of planes can be defined either by the total length or by the lengths of their horizontal
and vertical projections. It is necessary to ensure the condition that all rock blocks are in
contact (the opening between joints is not allowed).
th
Geometry of the i element
-1216-
Anchor Forces, Surcharge

It is possible to introduce anchor forces and surcharges of rock blocks. The resultant of forces
th
Pi [kN/m] acting on the i block is then determined. All forces acting on the block including the
water pressure on the slip surface and the block separating joints are taken into account.
Surcharge acting on the block
It is possible to input surface, strip and trapezoidal surcharge of terrain. The program then
determines their effect on individual rock blocks.
Anchor forces
The applied anchor force is adjusted per 1 m run based on the specified horizontal spacing of
anchors.
th
External forces acting on the i element
Influence of Water
Influnce of water can be considered using following options: general shape of GWT,
horizontal GWT or directly by water acting on the blocks.
General shape of GWT
General shape of GWT is entered as a polygon. The pore pressure (stress) on the slip surface
is considered linearly according to the equation: u = γw * zw.
zw - height of GWT above slip surface in the joints
The resultant forces U (force due to water on slip surface) or Fv (force due to water on internal
slip surface acting on the submerge part of joint per metre of width) are calculated from the
pore pressure load diagrams.
-1217-
Forces from the water acting on block - water can flow freely of the gap
Forces from the water acting on block - water can't flow of the gap
Horizontal GWT
The horizontal GWT is entered by constant height hw over heel of the slope (from the origin of
the coordinate system). Influence of water is considered from the water level (GWT) to a given
point on the vertical.
Water entered on blocks
The water pressure along the joints and on the slip surface can be taken into account. It is
introduced as external load:
Force due to water on internal slip surface (water between blocks) Fv
It must be introduced into the analysis whenever the presence of water in the joints between
blocks is expected. It is applied as a resultant force Fv in kN (the pressure acting on the
immerse part of the joint per 1m run is considered).
Force due to water on external slip surface (uplift pressure) U
It is defined as hydrostatic pressure on each slip surface of the polygon (external slip surface)
separately and introduced as an external load (uplift pressure) U in kN, which can be reduced
depending on the slip surface permeability (the pressure acting on the immerse part of the slip
surface per 1m run is considered).
-1218-
Water forces acting on a rock block
Solution Procedure
Principle of calculation of rock slope stability for polygonal slip surface is shown in following
figure.
Forces acting on multiple-block sliding surface

Suppose D1 is the vector representing the resultant of all the disturbing forces acting on block
no. 1 given by:
where: W1 - vector due to self weight of block which is acting vertically downwards
E1 - vector of external force due to earthquake
U1 - force vector due to uplift water force which acts normally to the sliding
-1219-
surface
V1 - vector of water force in tension cracks
If N1 denotes the unit vector for N1 and the angle of friction for plane no. 1 is ϕ1, block 1 would
be an active and unstable block if the resultant falls outside the friction cone of plane no. 1
such that:
where: R1 - net resultant unit force of disturbing and resisting forces acting on block no.
1
N1 - unit vector representing the upward normal of plane no. 1
ϕm1 - mobilized angle of internal friction
For an active block, there will be a net transfer of interaction force from block 1 to the next
lower block 2. The interaction force is denoted by vector I12 given by:
where: K1 - reaction force for block 1 which acts at an angle ϕ1 away from the normal of
sliding plane 1 for the condition of equilibrium according to the Fig. 1
A similar method of analysis may be conducted for block 2 in addition to which an equal and
opposite interaction force I12 has to be taken into account. The net resultant force vector R2 is
given by:
where: D2 - resultant of all the disturbing forces acting on block no. 2

Cm2 - vector denoting the mobilised shear force
B2 - vector denoting the resultant of external resisting forces acting on block 1
contributed by rock bolts or sprayed concrete
I12 - interaction force vector from block 1 to the next lower block 2
The stability analysis is hence conducted in a sequential manner for all blocks ranging from the
uppermost block 1 until the lowest block n. The entire system of blocks is deemed to be stable
if the resultant force of the lowest block lies within the friction cone of the sliding surface. In
Figure 1, for example, where the lowest block is numbered 3, the entire system of blocks
would be stable, with passive blocks supporting the active blocks of the system, provided that:
where: R3 - net resultant unit force of disturbing and resisting forces acting on block no.
3
N3 - unit vector representing the upward normal of plane no. 3
ϕm3 - mobilized angle of internal friction
Cone Friction Concept

Friction cone concept is a combination of kinematic and kinetic calculation method, which is
-1220-
used to find potential slip surface of failure. The principle of solution is shown in the following
figure.
The friction cone concept for a block resting on an inclined plane (polygonal slip surface)
The resistant forces are described using following condition:
where: A - block area resting on the slip surface

c - cohesion on the sliding surface
W - vector due to self weight of block (self weight resultant of the rock block)
N normal to the slip plane
ϕ - angle of internal friction
Literature:
Goodman, R. E.: Introduction to Rock Mechanics: John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1989, 562 p.
Rock Wedge
The program performs stability analysis of a rock wedge that is wedged in between two
surfaces (planes) and slides in the direction of the line of interaction (tray) of these planes.
The rock wedge can be specified with a tension crack. Gradient of this intersection must be
considerably larger than the angle of internal friction dividing planes, whereas the falling line of
both dividing planes must be directed towards the line of intersection. It is further assumed
that the tray is located in a stable rock body.
The solution requires determination of the normal force N, the shear force Tact (active) and
the resisting (passive) shear force Tres acting on slip surfaces A1 and A2. The active force
Tact and the normal force N are obtained as a summation all forces entering the analysis after
performing the space resolution of these forces.
The Mohr-Coulomb shear strength parameters and the normal force N acting on the slip
-1221-
surface are the main input data for the determination of the resisting shear forces Tres.
Calculation of the active shear force Tact and the normal force N is further influenced by the
weight of wedge (depends on the geometry of wedge and unit weight of rock), anchorage of
wedge, surcharge acting on the wedge, influence of water and seismic effects.
The resulting verification can be carried out according to the selected verification methodology
based on the input in the "Settings" frame.
Components acting on a rock wedge
Geometry of Rock Wedge

Entering geometry of a rock wedge using either gradient or falling line gradient direction
requires definition of space orientation of the rock face, terrain (top face), slip surfaces N1 and
N2 and/or tension crack, such that:
• Gradient of surface (gradient angle) is an inclination angle α representing inclination of
surface from horizontal (it may receive values from 0° to 90°). In the case of overhanging
slope (the edge of slope is before the slope toe - wall tends from edge to the rock mass),
then it must be checked button "Overhang rock face" and gradient of the face φ is
considered in the half plane of the rock mass. Program checks the possibility of
overturning failure of the rock mass with the overhang rock face. If the option of an earth
wedge overturning is realistic, program notifies to the user in listing of the results.
Howewer, program does not make a real evaluation of the overturning or rotation of the
rock wedge.
-1222-
a) Pendulous rock face b) Overhang rock face

• Gradient direction (falling line) is an angle b between horizontal projection of the line
normal to the strike direction measured as an azimuth angle from the north in the
clockwise direction (the falling line corresponds to inclination of the plane), it may receive
values from 0° to 360°.
The program when defining space orientation of planes displays these planes using a
stereographic projection.
Description of orientation of surfaces - using gradient and direction
Stereographic Projection
When defining geometry of the wedge and slip surfaces using space projection, the program
displays individual surfaces with the help of great circles (in equal are net) of Lambert's
hemispherical projection.
Principle of Stereographic projection (Lambert's projection)

Markland test utilizes a stereographic projection of the great circle for the kinematic possibility
of the rock wedge failure. The geometry of the rock wedge is plotted on the stereographic
projection using the great circle representing the slope face and discontinuities of slip surface 1
and 2 (see figure). The friction circle is plotted on the projection too, the friction angle on the
discontinuities is measured from the north and the circle center is the center of the
stereograph. The zone between the great circle representing the slope face and the friction
circle is shaded area on the figure. When the plunge of the line of intersection of two
discontinuities (1 and 2) is in the shaded area, then the failure is cinematically possible.
-1223-
Kinematic possibility of the rock wedge (Markland's test plot in a stereographic projection)
View of the geometry of the rock wedge is supplement by elements of Markland's test plot.
This makes it possible to assess the stereographic projection of the kinematics of the rock
wedge.
Markland's test plot
-1224-
Influence of Ground Water

By default the program performs the stability analysis of a rock wedge without considering
ground water. If interested on the influence of ground water on a rock wedge it is necessary to
introduce the height of GWT from the line of intersection of slip surfaces and rock face (the
GWT takes an arbitrary position over the entire height of a rock wedge). The program assumes
that water can flow freely discontinuities located below the GWT (no restrictions, e.g. due to
ice blocks, are considered).
The water pressure acts in the direction normal to the slip surfaces against normal components
of the passive forces. If the height yw above the point of maximal pressure Pmax is equal or
larger than Z/2 and it is fully contained by the rock wedge, then its value is assumed to be
equal to Z/2 (case A). If the height yw above the point of maximal pressure Pmax is less than
Z/2 (case B), then its value reduced as:
where: L* - length of the line of intersection of slip surfaces A1, A2

α1 - gradient of rock face
δ - gradient of the of line of intersection of slip surfaces
The resulting water pressure on slip surfaces 1 and 2 is given by:
where: Z - height of GWT above the line of intersection of slip surfaces and rock face
Pma - maximal water pressure on the line of intersection of slip surfaces
x
γw - 3
unit weight of water (≈ 10 kN/m )
A1 - are of the wetted part of the slip surface 1

w
A2 - area of the wetted part of the slip surface 2

w
Distribution of water pressure on the line of intersection of slip surfaces

If a tension crack is found either entirely or partially below the GWT, then the influence of
water pressure is reflected both on slip surfaces 1 and 2 through forces P1and P2acting on
intersection of these surfaces and on tension crack through force P3 acting in the direction
normal to the tension crack.
-1225-
Distribution of water pressure when considering GWT in tension crack
Resolution of Acting Forces

Forces acting on a rock wedge (weight of rock wedge, external load, anchor force) are resolved
into directions normal to planes A1 and A2 (the block is wedged in between these surfaces) and
into the direction of their intersection. The resolution of forces results into the normal forces
N1, N2 acting on planes A1 and A2, resisting (passive) forces Tres1, Tres2 acting along planes A1
and A2.
This step further generates the shear (active) force Tact acting in the direction of the line of
intersection of slip surfaces. The resulting shear (active) forceTact is obtained as a sum of
individual shear forces Tact,i.
The resisting (passive) forceTres is found by summing up the components Tres1, Tres2 (e.g.
due to external load) and friction forces on planes A1 and A2 due to normal forces:
where: c1 -cohesion on slip surface A1

c2 -cohesion on slip surface A2
φ1 -angle of internal friction on slip surface A1
φ2 -angle of internal friction on slip surface A2
Tres1 -resisting forces on slip surface As
Tres2 -resisting forces on slip surface A2
-1226-
Space resolution of self weight of earth wedge W
Verification
Verification can be carried out either according to the selected verification methodology based
on the input in the "Settings" frame.
Verification According to the Factor of Safety

When performing verification according to the factor of safety the program directly determines
the value of the factor of safety SF. Verification condition has the form:
where: Tact -shear forces along the slip surface

Tres -passive forces along the slip surface
SF -safety factor
SFs -required safety factor (input in the "Stability analysis" tab)
Typical values are e.g. - for walls of foundation pits SFs = 1.1 to 1.25, - for rock cuts of
highways SFs = 1.2 to 1.5, etc.
Verification According to the Theory of Limit States

When performing verification according to the theory of limit states the program reduces
material parameters of rocks (angle of internal friction or tangent of the angle of internal
friction, cohesion) using partial coefficients entered in the "Stability analysis" tab. Verification
condition has the form:
-1227-
where: Tact -shear forces along the slip surface (active)

Tres -passive forces along the slip surface
γs -reduction coefficient of overall stability of construction (input in the
"Stability analysis")
When analyzing the polygonal slip surface the program compares the calculated value with
the value corresponding to the fully stressed design (state of equilibrium with zero
reserve). Verification condition has the form:
where: SF - factor of safety calculated with the reduced material parameters

SFs - coefficient of the overall stability of the structure
Rock - Shear Resistance Criteria

The shear strength is the basic criterion to determine resisting passive forces. The resisting
force is given by the following expression:
where: τ - shear strength on the slip surface

l - length of the slip surface
The shear strength for the planar slip surface can be written as:
• Mohr - Coulomb
• Hoek - Brown
• Barton - Bandis
Mohr - Coulomb
The shear strength τ [kPa] according to Mohr-Coulomb is given by equation:
where: N - normal force acting on the slip surface

l - length of the slip surface
c - cohesion of rock on the slip surface
φ - angle of internal friction of rock on the slip surface
Approximate ranges of parameters of the Mohr-Coulomb failure criterion for selected soils are
given here.
Mohr - Coulomb Parameters

If possible the strength parameters should be determined in-situ measurements. The results of
in-situ and laboratory experiments show that the angle of internal friction is found for majority
of discontinuities in the rock mass in the range of 27° to 47°. Approximate values of the angle
-1228-
of internal friction φ and cohesion c for rocks based on the RMR classification are stored in the
following table:
Rock class I II III IV V
RMR 100 - 81 80 - 61 60 - 41 40 - 21 < 20
Angle of internal > 45 35 - 45 25 - 45 15 - 25 < 15

friction φ [°]
Cohesion c [kPa] > 400 300- 400 200 - 300 100 - 200 < 100
Hoek - Brown
Hoek-Brown failure criterion describes the failure of a rock mass (based on the performed
analyses of hundreds of underground structures and rock slopes) as:
where: σ1ef - major principal stress during rock failure

σ3ef - minor principal stress during rock failure
σc - strength of the intact rock in simple compression
σci - uniaxial compressive strength of intact pieces of rock
mb,s - nonlinear material constant depending on the rock quality
a - coefficient depending on the rock breaking
Basic parameters of the modified Hoek-Brown model should be determined from in-situ and
laboratory measurements. To become more acquainted with this model, a brief list of ranges of
individual parameters is provided. If rock mass classification using GSI is known then it is
possible to let the program to determine the H-B parameters by itself.
For actual analysis the H-B parameters are transformed into the M-C parameters. The solution
procedure then becomes identical to that of the Mohr-Coulomb criterion.
For conversion of Hoek-Brown parameters is used solution according to Hoek, Carranza-Torres
and Corkum (2002) in case of the analysis of rock slope stability:
Angle of internal friction φ:
Cohesion (shear strength) c:
where:
-1229-
The maximum value of a smaller principal stress σ‘3max is given by:
where: γ - unit weight of rock

H - height of rock slope
σc - strength of the intact rock in simple compression, or uniaxial
compressive strength of intact rock mass
Literature:
Stability analysis of rock slopes with a modified Hoek-Brown failure criterion, ANG Xiao-Li ;
LIANG LI ; YIN Jian-Hua International journal for numerical and analytical methods in
geomechanics. ISSN 0363-9061, 2004, vol. 28, no2, pp. 181-190.
Hoek E, Carranza-Torres CT, Corkum B.: Hoek–Brown failure criterion—2002 edition.
Proceedings of the 5th North American Rock Mechanics Symposium, Toronto, Canada, vol. 1,
2002, pp. 267 – 273.
Parameters Hoek - Brown

Parameter of rock breaking a
Parameter a is an exponent receiving values from 0.5 to 0.65 (for the original Hoek-Brown
condition it is equal to 0.5) and depends on the degree of rock breaking.
Nonlinear parameters mb = m, s for a = 0.5
(index r denotes residual values)
-1230-
Carbonate Argillaceous Arenaceous Fine grained Coarse

rocks with rocks - rocks - igneous metamorphi
well mudstone, sandstone, crystalline c and
developed siltstone, quartzite rocks - igneous
cleavage - shale, slate andesite, rocks -
dolomite, dolerite, gabbro,
limestone, basalt, gneiss,
marble rhyolite granite
Intact rock m = 7.00 m = 10.00 m = 15.00 m = 17.00 m = 25.00

material,
Laboratory
s = 1.00 s = 1.00 s = 1.00 s = 1.00 s = 1.00
specimens
have no
discontinuities,
mr = 7.00 mr = 10.00 mr = 15.00 mr = 17.00 mr = 25.00
RMR = 100,
Q = 500
sr = 1.00 sr = 1.00 s = 1.00 s = 1.00 s = 1.00
Very good m = 2.40 m = 3.43 m = 5.14 m = 5.82 m = 8.56

quality rock
mass,
s = 0.082 s = 0.082 s = 0.082 s = 0.082 s = 0.082
Rocks without
isolated blocks
with non-
mr = 4.10 mr = 5.85 mr = 8.78 mr = 9.95 mr = 14.63
weathered
discontinuities,
RMR = 85, sr = 0.189 sr = 0.189 sr = 0.189 sr = 0.189 sr = 0.189
Q = 100
Good quality m = 0.575 m = 0.821 m = 1.231 m = 1.395 m = 2.052

rock mass,
Slightly
s = 0.00293 s = 0.00293 s = 0.00293 s = 0.00293 s = 0.00293
damaged rocks
with non-
weathered
mr = 2.006 mr = 2.865 mr = 4.298 mr = 4.871 mr = 7.163
discontinuities
spaced from 1
to 3 m,
sr = 0.0205 sr = 0.0205 sr = 0.0205 sr = 0.0205 sr = 0.0205
RMR = 65,
Q = 10
Fair quality m = 0.128 m = 0.183 m = 0.275 m = 0.311 m = 0.458

rock mass,
Partially
s = 0.00009 s = 0.00009 s = 0.00009 s = 0.00009 s = 0.00009
weathered
discontinuities
spaced from
mr = 0.947 mr = 1.353 mr = 2.030 mr = 2.301 mr = 3.383
0.3 to 1 m,
-1231-
RMR = 44,
Q=1 sr = 0.00198 sr = 0.00198 sr = 0.00198 sr = 0.00198 sr = 0.00198
Poor quality m = 0.029 m = 0.041 m = 0.061 m = 0.069 m = 0.102

rock mass,
Numerous
s = 0.000003 s = 0.000003 s = 0.000003 s = 0.000003 s = 0.000003
weathered
discontinuities
spaced from 30
mr = 0.447 mr = 0.639 mr = 0.959 mr = 1.087 mr = 1.598
to 500 mm,
RMR = 23,
sr = 0.00019 sr = 0.00019 sr = 0.00019 sr = 0.00019 sr = 0.00019
Q = 0.1
Very poor m = 0.007 m = 0.010 m = 0.015 m = 0.017 m = 0.025

quality rock
mass,
s = 0.0000001 s = 0.0000001 s = 0.0000001 s = 0.0000001 s = 0.0000001
Numerous
extremely
weathered
mr = 0.219 mr = 0.313 mr = 0.469 mr = 0.532 mr = 0.782
discontinuities
with filling
spaced by less
sr = 0.00002 sr = 0.00002 sr = 0.00002 sr = 0.00002 sr = 0.00002
than 50 mm,
fine grained
waste rock,
RMR = 3,
Q = 0.01
Strength of rocks in simple compression σc, Poisson's ratio ν and unit weight of rock γ
-1232-
Rock Types of rock (examples) Strengt Poisson's Bulk weight

strengt h ratio of rock γ
h
σc ν 3
[kN/m ]
[MPa]
Solid most hard solid rock, intact, >150 0.10 28.00 - 30.00
rock compact and dense quartz
rock and basalt, other
extraordinary hard rocks
Highly very hard granit rock, quartz 100 - 0.15 26.00 - 27.00
hard porphyry, very hard granite, 150
rock hard flinty shale, quartzite,
very hard sand rock and very
hard cacite
Hard granite, very hard sandstone 80 - 100 0.20 25.00 - 26.00

rock and calcite, quarzite lode, hard
conglomerate, very hard ore,
hard limestone, marble,
dolomite, pyrite
Rock sandstone, ore, medium sandy 50 - 80 0.25 24.00

shale, flagstone
Medium hard mudstone, softer sand 20 - 50 0.25 - 0.30 23.00 - 24.00

rock rock and calcite, chalky clay
Soft rock shale, soft limestone, calk, salt 5 - 20 0.3 - 0.35 22.00 - 26.00
rock, frozen ground, anthracite,
marl, remoulded sandstone,
soft conglomerate, ground with
fels
Weak compact clay, soil eluvium, 0.5 - 5 0.35 - 0.40 20.00 - 22.0
soil black coal
18.00 - 2
Calculation of Hoek-Brown Parameters

If rock mass is descripted using GSI (Geological Structure Index) is known then it is possible to
let the program to determine the H-B parameters as follows:
where: GSI - Geological Structure Index
-1233-
D - damage coefficient of rock mass

mi - strength material constant of the intact rock for peak conditions
Values of damage coefficient D for rock slope
Description of rock mass Suggested

value of
coefficient D
Small scale blasting in engineering slopes 0.7

results in modest rock mass damage,
particularly if controlled blasting is used.
However, stress relief results in some
disturbance.
(Good blasting).
Small scale blasting in engineering slopes 1

results in modest rock mass damage,
particularly if controlled blasting is used.
However, stress relief results in some
disturbance.
(Poor blasting).
Very large open pit mine slopes significant 1

disturbance due to heavy production
blasting and due to stress relief from
overburden removal.
(Production blasting).
In some softer rocks excavation can be 0.7

carried out by ripping and dozing and the
degree of damage to the slope is less.
(Mechanical excavation).
Approximate vlaues of strength material constant of the intact rock mi (after Hoek)
-1234-
Type of rock Representative rocks mi [-]
Limestone rocks with well Dolomite, calcite, marble ≈7

developed crystalline
cleavage
Consolidated clayey rocks Mudstone, siltstone, silty ≈ 10

shale, slate
Sandy rocks with solid Sandstone, quarzite ≈ 15

crystals and poorly
developed crystalline
cleavage
Fine grained igneous Andesite, dolerite, ≈ 17

crystalline rocks diabase, rhyolite
Coarse grained and Amphibolite, gabbro, ≈ 25

metamorphic rocks gneiss, granite, diorite
Barton - Bandis
The Barton-Bandis shear strength failure criterion for the rock mass takes the following form:
where: JRC - joint roughness coefficient

σn - normal stress acting on the surface of the rock joint
JCS - joint compressive strength
φb - basic angle of internal friction of the slip surface
If possible the shear strength parameters should be determined from in-situ measurements.
Approximate ranges of parameters of the Barton-Bandis failure criterion are given here.
Barton - Bandis Parameters

Joint roughness coefficient JRC
If the value of JRC cannot be determined by direct measurements on the joint surface, it is
possible to obtain this value from the Barton graph (see figure) showing the variation of the
coefficient JRC as a function of length of profile and roughness depth.
-1235-
Diagram to determine JRC (after Barton)

Rock joint roughness profiles showing the typical range of JRC are plotted next.
-1236-
Rock joint roughness profiles showing the typical range of JRC (Barton & Chubey 1977)
Compressive strength of discontinuity JCS
Methods allowing us to determine the compressive strength of discontinuity (slip surface) JCS
are generally recommended by ISRM. The value of JCS can be obtained from the Deer-Miller
graph showing its dependence on the rock strength found from the Schmidt hammer
measurements, see figure below.
-1237-
Basic angle of internal friction on slip surface φb

The basic value of the angle of internal friction on the surface is approximately equal to the
residual value φr . Nevertheless, it can be generally measured in laboratories using shear
measurement devices (typical area of the specimen is 50*50 mm). Typical ranges of the basic
angle of internal friction for weathered rock surfaces are 25° to 35°.
Unit Weight of Rocks

Unit weight or rock γ
-1238-
Rock Rock category (examples) Unit weight

strengt of rock γ
h 3
[kN/m ]
Solid most hard solid rock, intact, 28.0 - 30.0

rock compact and dense quartz
rock and basalt, other
extraordinary hard rocks
Highly very hard granit rock, quartz 26.0 - 27.0

hard porphyry, very hard granite,
rock hard flinty shale, quartzite,
very hard sand rock and very
hard cacite
Hard granite, very hard sandstone 25.0 - 26.0

rock and calcite, quarzite lode, hard
conglomerate, very hard ore,
hard limestone, marble,
dolomite, pyrite
Rock sandstone, ore, medium sandy 24.0

shale, flagstone
Medium hard mudstone, softer sand 23.0 - 24.0

rock rock and calcite, chalky clay
Soft rock shale, soft limestone, calk, salt 22.0 - 26.0

rock, frozen ground, anthracite,
marl, remoulded sandstone,
soft conglomerate, ground with
fels
Weak compact clay, soil eluvium, 20.0 - 22.0

soil black coal
18.0 - 20.0
Influence of Seismic Effects

The programs takes into account the earthquake effects using two variables - factor of
horizontal acceleration Kh and factor of vertical acceleration Kv.
The factor of acceleration is a dimensionless number, which represents the seismic acceleration
as a fraction of the gravity acceleration. Earthquake effects are introduced through the seismic
force S, which is determined by multiplying the weight of the rock subjected to earthquake (i.e.
rock block) by the factor of acceleration. When assuming seismic effects only in the horizontal
direction the seismic force is given by:
where: Kh - factor of horizontal acceleration

W - weight of the rock body
-1239-
The seismic force always acts in the center of gravity of the rock body. Usually, only seismic
effects in the horizontal direction are considered. Nevertheless, the program also allows for
treating the vertical direction (with the help of vertical factor of acceleration Kv). Effects in
both directions are then combined.
M_C_S grade Horizo Factor of horizontal

ntal acceleration
accele
ration
((MSK-64) 2
[mm/s ] Kh
1 0.0 - 0.0 - 0.00025

2.5
2 2.5 - 0.00025 - 0.0005

5.0
3 5.0 - 0.0005 - 0.001

10.0
4 10.0 - 0.001 - 0.0025

25.0
5 25.0 0.0025 - 0.005

-50.0
6 50.0 - 0.005 - 0.01

100.0
7 100.0 - 0.01 - 0.025

250.0
8 250.0 - 0.025 - 0.05

500.0
9 500.0 0.05 -0.1

-1000.
0
10 1000.0 0.1 -0.25

-2500.
0
11 2500.0 0.25 -0.5

-5000.
0
12 > > 0.5

5000.0
The values of factor Kh correspond to individual degrees of earthquake according to

M-C-S scale
-1240-
MSE Wall
The program allows the following verifications:
Verification
The program verifies the external stability of so called fictitious structure consisting of the
structure front face and a curve bounding the geo-reinforcements end points. The fictitious
structure is loaded by calculated forces acting on the structure and checked for overturning
and slip - similarly to the verification of a gravity wall.
Dimensioning
From the calculated forces acting on a structure, the program determines the forces in the
checker cross-section. Only the forces above the checked joint (see figure) are taken into
account. Reinforcements introduce stabilizing forces which equal to the lower value of the two
bearing capacities (against tearing and pull-out). The actual verification for overturning and
slip follows aftewords. The program also allows for an automatic verification of the most
critical cross-section.
Bearing capacity
The bearing capacity of foundation soil below a fictitious structure is verified. The constant
stress in the foundation joint is determined from all forces acting on a structure and calculated
in the "Verification" frame. In case of the input foundation the bearing capacity is determined
from all forces calculated in the "Dimensioning" frame (the option "Entire wall" must be
selected).
Slip on georeinforcement
The slip of a reinforced soil block along a geo-reinforcement is verified. The reinforced block
is bounded the wall front face, the checked geo-reinforcement, a vertical line passing through
the geo-reinforcement end point and terrain. The block is loaded by an active earth pressure
and by stabilizing forces due to geo-reinforcements exceeding the boundary of the reinforced
block and by other forces. The program also allows to automatically verificate sliding along
individual reinforcements and find the most critical result.
Internal stability
Strength of reinforcement and pull-out resistence are checked.
Global stability
The program allows to verify the overall slope stability along a circular slip surface. The slip
surface can be automatically optimized, i.e. the program automatically selects the verification
along the most critical surface. The actual slope stability analysis can be carried out with the
help of two slice methods: Spencer (rigorous, more accurate method) and Bishop (more
conservative, simpler, more easily finds the solution satisfying equilibrium conditions).
Slope stability
Verification of overall (global) stability by the "Slope stability" program.
Internal Stability
Geo-reinforcement force
Determination of forces in geo-reinforcements is performed by splitting and assigning the
calculated earth pressure to individual layers. Each reinforcement accommodates part of the
active pressure, which acts in the corresponding layer, i.e. force developed in the
reinforcement Fx = ΣTa,hor.
-1241-
Forces transmitted by individual reinforcements

Shape of slip surface depends on selected standard of calculation.
Analysis of internal stability varies by type of geo-reinforcements:
• extensible reinforcements (Standard - straight slip surface, AASHTO - Extensible, FHWA
NHI-10-024)
• inextensible reinforcements (AASHTO - Inextensible, JTGD30 - 2004 Highway China Code,
TB 10025 Railway China Code, BS 8006 - Coherent Gravity Method)
Earth pressure is considered as an active for extensible reinforcements, or as a combination of
pressures for inextensible reinforcements.
Reinforcement strength check
Long-term design strength of geo-reinforcement Rt is calculated from the input parameters of
the geo-reinforcement:
where: Rt - long-term design strength of reinforcement

Tult - short-term characteristic strength of geo-reinforcement
RFC - reduction coefficient of long-term deformation of reinforcement (determined
R based on geo-reinforcement lifetime)
RFD - reduction coefficient of durability of reinforcement (determined based on soil

pH)
RFI - reduction coefficient of failure of reinforcement when inserting into the soil
D (determined based on the grain sizes of soil)
FSU - overall coefficient of model uncertainty

NC
Reinforcement bearing capacity against pull-out

Resistance of reinforcement against pull-out from the earth body is calculated from the input
parameters of the geo-reinforcement and the normal force acting in the direction normal to its
area:
-1242-
where: Tp - bearing capacity against tearing

L - reinforcement length (from front face to its end)
Ci - coefficient of interaction between soil and geo-reinforcement
Verification of bearing capacity of reinforcement against pull-out can be carried out according
to the factor of safety or the theory of limit states.
Verification - Safety Factor

The main advantage of this verification is lucidity and uniqueness, since neither soil
parameters nor acting forces are reduced.
Check for tearing:
where: Fx - force developed in reinforcement

Rt - long-term design strength of reinforcement
SFst - safety factor for geo-reinforcement strength (input in the "Wall analysis"
tab)
Check for pull-out:

Tp - bearing capacity of reinforcement against pull-out
SFpo - safety factor for pull out resistance of geo-reinforcement (input in the
frame "Wall analysis" tab)
Verification - Limit States

The soil parameters are reduced depending on the setting in the "Wall analysis" tab. The
result is the reinforcement utilization compared with 100 %.
Check for tearing:
-1243-
Rt - long-term design strength of reinforcement against tearing
Check for pull-out:

Tp - bearing capacity of reinforcement against pull-out
Shapes of Slip Surfaces

Slip surface has a different shape according to the selected standard of calculation:
• Straight slip surface - Standard, AASHTO - Extensible, FHWA NHI-10-024
• Broken slip surface - AASHTO - Inextensible, JTGD30 - 2004 Highway China Code, TB
10025 Railway China Code, BS 8006 - Coherent Gravity Method.
-1244-
Shapes of slip surfaces according to the individual standards of calculation
Extensible Reinforcements - Active Earth Pressure

Active earth pressure is considered in the calculation of internal stability for extensible
reinforcements (Standard - straight slip surface, AASHTO - Extensible, FHWA NHI-10-024).
The program allows to multiply the calculated earth pressure by coefficient kr/ka (according to
the AASHTO standards). Recommended values are shown in the following picture.
-1245-
Variation of the coefficient of horizontal stress ratio kr/ka with depth for extensible
reinforcements
Literature:
AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications 2004 (SI).
Inextensible Reinforcements - Combination of Earth

Pressures
Combination of active earth pressure and earth pressure at rest is considered in the calculation
of internal stability for inextensible reinforcements (AASHTO - Inextensible, JTGD30 - 2004
Highway China Code, TB 10025 Railway China Code, BS 8006 - Coherent Gravity Method).
-1246-
Determination of failure plane location and variation of earth pressure coefficients Ka, Ko with
depth for inextensible reinforcements
Literature:
AASHTO Highway Bridges.
Foundation Bearing Capacity

The vertical bearing capacity of the foundation soil is verified according to the theory of limit
states using the following inequality:
or based on the factor of safety as:
where: σ - extreme design contact stress at the footing bottom

Rd - design bearing capacity of foundation soil
γRV - coefficient of vertical bearing capacity of foundation (for input use the
"Spread Footing" tab)
SFv - safety factor for vertical bearing capacity
Extreme design contact stress at the footing bottom is assumed the form:
-1247-
where: V - extreme design vertical force

Aef - effective area of foundation
The vertical bearing capacity of the foundation soil Rd is determined for three basic types of
foundation conditions:
• Drained subsoil
• Undrained subsoil
• Bedrock
The above computations are applicable only for the homogeneous soil. If there is a non-
homogeneous soil under the footing bottom (or there is ground water present), then the
inserted profile is transformed into a homogeneous one.
Bearing Capacity on Drained Subsoil

One of the following approaches is available to assess the bearing capacity of a foundation if
drained conditions are assumed:
• standard analysis
• according to CSN 73 1001 "Základová pùda pod plošnými základy" approved 8.6. 1987
• according to Polish standard PN-81 B - 03020 "Grunty budowiane, Posudowienie
bezpošrednie budowli, Obliczenia statyczne i projekktowanie" from year 1982
• according to Indian standard IS:6403-1981 "Code of Practice for Determination of Bearing
Capacity of Shallow Foundations" from year 1981
• according to EC 7-1 (EN 1997-1:2003) "Design of geotechnical structures - Part 1:
General rules"
• according to NCMA Segmental retaining walls manual, second edition
• according to Chinese standard GB 50007-2002
• according to Russian standard SNiP 2.02.01-83
• according to Danish standard DS/EN 1997-1 DK NA:2013
• according to DPWH standard "Design Guidelines, Criteria and Standards: Volume 2C –
Geological and Geotechnical Investigation - Annex G: Geotechnical Formulas"
All approaches incorporate coefficients due to Brinch - Hansen (see standard analysis) to
account for inclined ground surface and inclined footing bottom.
Assuming drained conditions during construction the soil below spread footing deforms
including both shear and volumetric deformations. In such a case the strength of soil is
assumed in terms of effective values of the angle of internal friction φef and the effective
cohesion cef. It is also assumed that there is an effective stress in the soil equal to the total
stress (consolidated state). Effective parameters φef, cef represent the peak strength
parameters.
Owing to the fact that the choice of drained conditions depends on a number of factors (rate of
load, soil permeability, degree of saturations and degree of overconsolidation) it is the
designer's responsibility to decide, depending on the actual problem being solved, if the
-1248-
effective parameters should be used.

During seismic analysis, the program performs the calculation of bearing capacity for both
cases - with and without seismic effect. The resultant bearing capacity is lower from these two
values.
Analysis of Seismic Bearing Capacity

Seismic bearing capacity of shallow foundation is calculated according to the following
formula:
where: pLE - seismic bearing capacity

γ unit weight of soil
d depth of footing bottom
B width of foundation
NC - seismic bearing factors
E,
Nq
E,
NγE
where: KA - seismic coefficients of earth pressures

E,
KP
E
ρAE - angle of failure
φ angle of internal friction
-1249-
where: kh - seismic coefficient of horizontal acceleration

Note: If the angle α is negative, i.e. φ < θ, then the seismic bearing capacity is pLE = 0.
References:
Richards Jr., R.; et al. SEISMIC BEARING CAPACITY AND SETTLEMENTS OF FOUNDATION.
J.Geotech. Engrg. 1993, 4 (119)
Das, B. M. Principles of Soil Dynamics, 3rd ed.; California State University: Sacramento, 2016.
Standard Analysis
By default the solution based on J. Brinch - Hansen theory is used, where the bearing capacity
of foundation soil follows from:
where:
coefficients of bearing capacity:

for:
for:
coefficients of influence of depth of

foundation:
-1250-
coefficients of slope of footing bottom:
coefficients of influence of slope of terrain:
Notation of angles and coefficients b,g

where: c - cohesion of soil
q0 - equivalent uniform load accounting for the influence of foundation
depth
d - depth of footing bottom
γ - unit weight of soil above the footing bottom
b - width of foundation
Nc,Nd,Nb - coefficient of bearing capacity
sc,sd,sb - coefficients of shape of foundation
dc,dd,db - coefficients of influence of foundation depth
ic,id,ib - coefficients of influence of slope of load
-1251-
gc,gd,gb - coefficients of influence of slope of terrain

l - length of foundation
δ - angle of deviation of the resultant force from the vertical direction
β - slope of terrain
α - slope of footing bottom
Bearing Capacity on Undrained Subsoil

One of the following approaches is available to assess the bearing capacity of a foundation if
undrained conditions are assumed:
• standard analysis
• according to CSN 73 1001 "Základová pùda pod plošnými základy" approved 8.6. 1987
• according to Indian standard IS:6403-1981 "Code of Practice for Determination of Bearing
Capacity of Shallow Foundations" from year 1981
• according to EC 7-1 (EN 1997-1:2003) "Design of geotechnical structures - Part 1:
General rules"
• according to Danish standard DS/EN 1997-1 DK NA:2013
In addition the coefficients due to Brinch - Hansen are used to account for inclined footing
bottom (see standard analysis).
In case of undrained conditions it is assumed that during construction the spread footing
undergoes an instantaneous settlement accompanied by shear deformations of soil in absence
of volumetric changes. When the structure is completed the soil experiences both primary and
secondary consolidation accompanied by volumetric changes. The influence of neutral stress
appears in the reduction of soil strength. The strength of soil is then presented in terms of
total values of the angle of internal friction φu and the total cohesion cu (these parameters can
be considered as the minimal ones). Depending on the degree of consolidation the value of the
total angle of internal friction φu ranges from 0 to φef, the total cohesion cu is greater than cef.
Owing to the fact that the choice of undrained conditions depends on a number of factors (rate
of load, soil permeability, degree of saturations and degree of overconsolidation) it is the
designer's responsibility to decide, depending on the actual problem being solved, if the
effective parameters should be used. Nevertheless, the total parameters are generally used for
fine-grained soil.
Standard Analysis
The following formula is used by default:
with dimensionless coefficients:
-1252-
where: cu - total cohesion of soil

l - length of foundation
d - depth of foundation
δ - angle of deviation of the resultant force from the vertical direction
α - slope of footing bottom from horizontal direction
q - overburden pressure at the level of foundation base
Bearing Capacity of Foundation on Bedrock

The following methods can be used to compute the design bearing capacity Rd of the
foundation with a horizontal footing bottom supported by the rock mass composed of rocks or
weak rocks:
• Standard approach
• Solution according to CSN 73 1001
• Solution according to EC 7-1
Standard Analysis
The bearing capacity of foundation soil composed of rocks or weak rocks is found from the
1
expression proposed by Xiao-Li Yang and Jian-Hua Yin :
where:
where: s - nonlinear parameter depending on rock properties (according to Hoek

and Brown)
-1253-
GSI - Geological Strength Index

D - coefficient reflecting damage of a rock mass
Ns, Nq, - coefficients of bearing capacity depending on the angle of internal
Nγ friction
Ns - coefficient of strength of a rock depending on GSI and strength

parameter mi
φ - angle of internal friction of rock
σc - uniaxial compressive strength of rock > 0,5 MPa
q0 - equivalent uniform load accounting for the influence of foundation
depth
γ2 - unit weight of soil above the footing bottom
1
Xiao-Li Yang, Jian-Hua Yin: Upper bound solution for ultimate bearing capacity with a
modified Hoek-Brown failure criterion, International Journal of Rock Mechanics & Mining
Sciences 42 (2005),str. 550-560.
Solution According to CSN 73 1001

The bearing capacity of foundation soil composed of rocks or weak rocks follows from articles
97 - 99 of standard CSN 73 1001 "Foundation soil below spread footing" approved 8.6.
1987.
As input parameters the analysis requires the unit weight of soil γ, uniaxial compression
strength σc, Poisson's ratio ν and deformation modulus Edef.
Analysis According to EC 7-1 (EN 1997-1:2003)

The bearing capacity of the foundation Rd with a horizontal footing bottom is determined
according to a design method for the derivation of expected bearing capacity of spread
footings resting on a bedrock outlined in a supplement G (informative) EC 7-1 (EN 1997-
1:2003) "Design of geotechnical structures - Part 1: General rules". For low strength or
damaged rocks with closed discontinuities including chalks with low porosity less than 35% the
derivation of expected bearing capacity follows from classification of rocks into groups of rocks
stored in the table below. The analysis further requires an input of discontinuity spacing Sd,
unit weight of rock γ, Poisson's ratio ν and uniaxial compressive strength σc. It is assumed that
the structure is able to transmit a settlement equal to 0,5 % of the foundation width. The
expected values of bearing capacity for other settlements can be estimated using direct
proportion. For weak and broken rocks with opened or filled discontinuities it is recommended
to use lower values than the expected ones.
Rock groups
-1254-
Group Type of rock
1 Pure limestones and dolomites

Carbonate sandstones of low porosity
2 Igneous
Oolitic and marly limestones
Well cemented sandstones
Indurated carbonate mudstones
Metamorphic rocks, including slates and schist (flat
cleavage / foliation)
3 Very marly limestones

Poorly cemented sandstones
Slates and schist (steep cleavage / foliation)
4 Uncemented mudstones and shales
Literature:
Eurocode 7:Geotechnical design - Part 1:General rules.
Parameters to Compute Foundation Bearing Capacity

Parameters to compute vertical bearing capacity of a foundation resting on bedrock
The following parameters are used in the program to compute the foundation vertical bearing
capacity:
• values of coefficient D reflecting a state of damage of a rock mass
• values of strength parameter mi
• strength of rocks in simple compression σc
• Poisson's ratio of rocks ν
• unit weight of rocks γ
Estimating disturbance coefficient D
-1255-
Description of rock mass Suggested value of D
Rock mass, intact strong rock, excavation by 0

blasting or by open TBM
Rock mass, poor quality rock, mechanical 0

excavation with minimal disturbance
Rock mass, poor rock, mechanical excavation, 0.5

significant floor heave, temporary invert or
horizontal geometry of excavation sequence
Rock mass,very poor rock often very altered, 0.8

local damage of surrounding rock (app. 3
m)
Rock slope or rock outcrop, modification with 0.7

controlled blasting
Rock slope or rock outcrop, modification with 1.0

blasting results to the some disturbance
Open pit mines, excavation with blasting 1.0
Open pit mines, mechanical excavation 0.7
Values of strength parameter mi
Type of rock Representative rocks mi [-]
Carbonate rocks with well Dolomite, limestone and ≈7

developed cleavage marble
Lithified argillaceous rocks Mudstone, siltstone shale, ≈ 10

slate
Arenaceous rock with Sandstone and quartzite ≈ 15

strong crystal and poorly
developed crystal
cleavage
Fine grained polymineralic Andesite, dolerite, ≈ 17

igneous crystalline rocks diabase, rhyolite
Coarse grained Amphibolite, gabbro, ≈ 25

polymineralic igneous and gneiss, granite and quartz
metamorphic rocks diorite
Uniaxial compressive strength σc, Poisson's ratio ν and Unit weight of rock γ
-1256-
Strength of Types of rock Uniaxial Poisson's Unit weight of rock

rocks (examples) compr. ratio 3
strength γ [kN/m ]
ν
σc [MPa]
Extremely hard Very hard, intact >150 0.10 28.00 - 30.00

rock rock strong and
solid quartzite,
basalt and other
extremely hard
rock
Very hard rock Very hard granite, 100 - 150 0.15 26.00 - 27.00
quartz porphyry,
quartz slate, very
hard sandstones
and limestones
Hard rock Solid and compact 80 - 100 0.20 25.00 - 26.00

granite, very hard
sandstone and
limestone, silicious
iron veins, hard
pudding stones,
very hard iron ores
hard calcite, not
very hard granite,
hard sandstone,
marble, dolomite,
pyrite
Fairly hard rock Normal sandstone, 50 - 80 0.25 24.00

medium hard iron
ore, sandy shale,
flagstone
Medium hard rock Hard mudstones, 20 - 50 0.25 - 0.30 23 - 24.00

not very hard
sandstones and
calcite, soft
flagstone, not very
hard shales, dense
marl
Fairly weak rock Soft schist, soft 5 - 20 0.30 - 0.35 22.00 - 26.00
limestones, chalk,
rock salt, frost
soils, anthracite,
normal marl,
disturbed
sandstones, soft
flagstones and
soils with
-1257-
aggregates
Weak rock Compact clay, hard 0.5 - 5 0.35 - 0.40 22.00 - 18.00
soil (eluvium with
soil texture)
Horizontal Bearing Capacity of Foundation

The foundation horizontal bearing capacity is verified according to the theory of limit states
using the following inequality:
or based on the factor of safety as:
where:
where: ψd - angle of internal friction between foundation and soil

ad - cohesion between foundation and soil
Aef - effective area of foundation
Spd - earth resistance
Hx,Hy - components of horizontal force
Q - extreme design vertical force
γRH - coefficient of horizontal bearing capacity of foundation (for input use
the "Spread Footing" tab)
SF - safety factor
When adopting the analysis methodology according to EN 1997 the term with cohesion ( ad*
Aef) is excluded for drained conditions whereas the term with friction between foundation and
soil (Q*tanψd) is excluded for undrained conditions.
The analysis depends on the design angle of internal friction below the footing bottom φd, the
design value of cohesion below the footing bottom cd and the design value of earth resistance
Spd. If the soil-footing frictional angle and the soil-footing cohesion are less than the values of
soil below the footing bottom, then it is necessary to use those values.
The earth resistance is assumed as displayed in figure:
-1258-
Earth resistance
The earth resistance Spd is found with the help of the reduction of passive earth pressure or
pressure at rest employing influence coefficients:
where: Sp - passive earth pressure, pressure at rest or reduced passive pressure

γmR - coefficient of reduction of earth resistance (for input used the "Spread
Footing" tab) - for the analysis according to CSN it assumes the value γmR
= 1.5 for passive pressure, γmR = 1.3 for pressure at rest
Coefficients of earth pressures are clear from the following formulas:

for passive pressure:
for pressure at rest in drained soils:
for pressure at rest in other soils:
When determining the reduced passive pressure, the resultant force includes contributions
due to the passive pressure and pressure at rest.
The passive pressure can be considered, if the deformation needed for its activation does not
cause unallowable stresses or deformations in upper structure.
Homogenization of Layered Subsoil

If the soil below the footing bottom is inhomogeneous (or if there is ground water present)
then the input profile is transformed into a homogeneous soil based on the Prandtl slip surface
(see Fig.), which represents the type and location of failure of the foundation.
-1259-
The Prandtl slip surface

Determination of equivalent values of φ (angle of internal friction), c (cohesion of soil) γ (unit
weight of soil below footing bottom) is evident from the following formulas. The unit weight of
soil above foundation is derived in the same way.
Procedure for computation of auxiliary values
-1260-
Effective Area
When solving the problem of eccentrically loaded foundations the program offers two options
to deal with an effective dimension of the foundation area:
• a rectangular shape of effective area is assumed
• general shape of effective area is assumed
Rectangular shape
A simplified solution is used in such cases. In case of axial eccentricity (bending moment acts
in one plane only) the analysis assumes a uniform distribution of contact stress σ applied only
over a portion of the foundation l1, which is less by twice the eccentricity e compared to the
total length l.
Determination of effective area in case of axial eccentricity

An effective area (b*l1) is assumed to compute the contact stress, so that we have:
In case of a general eccentric load (foundation is loaded by the vertical force V and by bending
moments M1 and M2 the load is replaced by a single force with given eccentricities:
The size of effective area follows from the condition that the force V must act eccentrically:
General shape of contact stress

In case of an eccentric load the effective area is determined from the assumption that the
resultant force V must act in the center of gravity of the compressive area. The theoretically
correct solution appears in Fig.
-1261-
Determination of contact stress for general eccentricity - general shape

Owing to a considerable complexity in determining the exact location of the neutral axis, which
in turn is decisive when computing the effective area, the program follows the solution
1)
proposed by Highter a Anders , where the effective areas are derived with help of graphs.
1)
Highter, W.H. - Anders,J.C.: Dimensioning Footings Subjected to Eccentric Loads Journal of
Geotechnical Engineering. ASCE, Vol. 111, No GT5, pp 659 - 665.
Determination of Cross-Sectional Internal Forces

Longitudinal reinforcement of a foundation is checked for the load due to bending
moment and shear force. The stress in the footing bottom is assumed as linear. Stresses in
individual directions x, y are determined independently.
When the linear distribution of stress in the footing bottom is considered the distribution of
stress over the cross-section is provided by:
or when excluding tension:
where: e - eccentricity of normal force N

d - width of foundation
N - normal force acting at the footing bottom
Bending moment and shear force are determined as reaction developed on the cantilever beam
as shown in figure:
-1262-
Internal forces acting on wall jump

Internal forces in the cross-section corresponding to constant distribution of stress are
provided by:
where: σ - maximal stress in the footing bottom

dv - length of jump
e - eccentricity of normal force N
d - width of wall foundation
N - normal force acting at the footing bottom
Verification of Foundation Eccentricity

st
Verification of foundation eccentricity is carried out for the 1 LS (foundation bearing capacity)
nd
and the 2 LS (foundation settlement) analysis.
During analysis the program performs verification for the following cases:
• maximum eccentricity in the direction of base length: ex ≤ ealw
• maximum eccentricity in the direction of base width: ey ≤ ealw
• maximum overall eccentricity: et ≤ ealw
The value of maximum allowable foundation eccentricity ealw is input in the "Settings" frame,
tab "Spread Footing".
The value of overall eccentricity et is provided by:
where: ex - maximum eccentricity in the direction of base length

ey - maximum eccentricity in the direction of base width
Procedure for calculating eccentricities needed for the determination an effective area of off-
center (eccentrically) loaded foundation is described in more detail here.
For a shallow foundation resting on a rock foundation or for a concrete slab type of foundation
it is necessary in some cases to adopt different values of limit eccentricities.
-1263-
Analysis of Uplift
The analysis of a spread footing in tension is performed when the load due to a negative
normal force N (the force acts upwards) is assumed. The verification of such a footing is
carried out according to the corresponding verification methodology. During the analysis the
program compares the maximum tensile force Nt,max with the uplift resistance Rt. The program
considers the following three methods of the calculation of bearing capacity (uplift resistance
Rt) of footing:
• cone method
• DL/T 5219-2005
Standard Approach
The uplift resistance Rt combines the self weight of the soil overburden and footing + friction
along the footing walls + fictitious (substitute) block of soil above the footing. The "Bearing
cap." frame in the "Verification on uplift" dialog window allows to input the design angle of
friction of overburden φd and the design cohesion of overburden cd.
Dialog window "Verification on uplift" - standard approach

The vertical bearing capacity check - spread footing in tension (uplift resistance) follows from:
where: σx - earth pressure at rest due to overburden

φd - design angle of internal friction of overburden
cd - design cohesion of overburden
p - footing perimeter
Gp - self weight of foundation
-1264-
Verification on uplift - standard approach
Cone Method
The uplift resistance Rt combines the footing self weight and the self weight of the soil
overburden in the shape of cone as evident from the following figure.
Basis of the cone method

The "Bearing cap." frame in the "Verification on uplift" dialog window serves to input the
cone angle α. When calculating the uplift resistance Rt it is also possible to account for the
influence of a neighbour foundation either in one or both directions that reduces the volume of
the soil cone.
-1265-
Dialog window "Verification on uplift" - cone method
Influence of a neighbour foundation
DL/T 5219 - 2005

This type of verification originates from the Chinese standard DL/T 5219 - 2005. Unlike the
cone method and the standard approach it introduces a critical depth hc, which depends on the
type of soil and the shape of foundation. The "Verification on uplift" dialog window allows
either inputting the critical depth hc directly or it can be determined by the program depending
on the input type of soil and the shape of foundation according to table 6.3.1-1 - Critical
depth hc.
Table 6.3.1-1 with the values of a critical depth based on the Chinese standard DL/T
5219-2005
-1266-
Type of soil Natural state of soil Critical depth hc for tensile foundation
Circular foundation Square foundation
Sand or Silt Dense ~ Slightly dense 2.5D 3.0B
Clay Hard ~ Stiff 2.0D 2.5B
Plastic 1.5D 2.0B
Soft - plastic 1.2D 1.5B
Note 1: For rectangular foundation, if the ration between length L' and width B is smaller than
3, claculate hc as circular foundation and D = 0,6*(B+L').
Note 2: The soil must be in a natural state.
The "Bearing cap." frame in the "Verification on uplift" dialog window serves to specify as
another input parameter the cone angle α. The influence of a neighbour foundation is described
in the cone method. The inclination of column θ has no influence on the calculation of bearing
capacity of a footing in tension (the uplift resistance).
Dialog window "Verification on uplift" - DL/T 5219-2005
-1267-
Verification of footing in tension according to DL/T 5219-2005
Pile Analysis
Analyses available in the program "Pile" can be divided into three main groups:
• Analysis of vertical bearing capacity
• Pile settlement
• Analysis of horizontal bearing capacity
Vertical Bearing Capacity

Analysis of pile vertical resistance can be carried out using:
• Analytical solution
• Spring method
Analytical Solution
The analytical solution assumes that the pile total compressive resistance Rc is derived as a
sum of the pile base resistance Rb and the pile shaft resistance Rs (developed due to friction of
the surrounding soil along the shaft). The following generally accepted methods are
implemented into the program:
• NAVFAC DM 7.2
• Tomlinson
• Effective stress method
• CSN 73 1002
For the above specified methods it is possible to choose one of the following verification
methodologies:
• Classical way
• EN 1997-1
-1268-
When running the compression pile analysis, the pile self-weight is introduced depending on
the setting in the frame "Load". As for the tensile pile, the pile self-weight is always taken
into account automatically. Based on the input load the program itself performs the verification
analysis for either compression or tensile pile.
NAVFAC DM 7.2
Calculation of vertical pile resistance is performed according to the publication: NAVFAC DM
7.2, Foundation and Earth Structures, U.S. Department of the Navy 1984, where all
approaches are described in more detail. The analysis provides the pile base resistance Rb and
the pile shaft resistance Rs.
For non-cohesive, the program takes into account the critical depth.
Pile Base Resistance

Pile base resistance for non-cohesive soils is given by:
where: σefb - effective stress on the pile base

Nq - bearing capacity factor
Ab - area of pile base
The bearing capacity factor Nq is back calculated by the program; however, its values can be
manually modified.
For cohesive soils the following expression holds:
where: cu - undrained shear strength at the base

Ab - area of pile base
Pile Shaft Resistance

Pile shaft resistance for non-cohesive soils is given by:
where: Kj - th
coefficient of lateral earth pressure in the j layer
σef, j - effective strength of soil in the j
th
layer
δj - pile skin friction angle (between pile material and surrounding soil in the
th
j layer)
Asj - th
area of pile shaft in the j layer
The lateral earth pressure coefficient K is back calculated by the program; however, its values
can be manually modified in the "Add new soils" dialog window.
For cohesive soils the following expression holds:
-1269-
where: αj - skin friction coefficient in the j

th
layer
cu, j - undrained cohesion in th j
th
layer
Asj - th
area of pile shaft in the j layer
Bearing Capacity Factor Nq

Reference values of the bearing capacity factor Nq are listed in the table. If jet grouting is used
°
when constructing the pile, then the maximum angle of internal friction φ is equal to 28 .
Bearing capacity factor Nq
Angle of internal friction 26 28 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

φ[°]
Bearing capacity factor Nq 10 15 21 24 29 35 42 50 62 77 86 12 14

for driven piles 0 5
Bearing capacity factor 5 8 10 12 14 17 21 25 30 38 43 60 72

Nq for bored piles
Literature:
NAVFAC DM 7.2, Foundation and Earth Structures, U.S. Department of the Navy, 1984.
Coefficient of Lateral Earth Pressure K

The soil around a driven pile is compressed during construction and the lateral earth pressure
of this soil acting on the pile skin is greater than the earth pressure at rest (given by
coefficient K0) and smaller than the maximum earth pressure (passive earth pressure given
by coefficient Kp):
Reference values of the coefficient of lateral earth pressure K are listed later in the table. The
coefficient of lateral earth pressure K is approximated as follows:
where: K0 - coefficient of earth pressure at rest
φ - angle of soil shear resistance

-1270-
Pressure on the pile

Reference values of the lateral earth pressure coefficient K
Type of pile K for compression K for tensile -

piles uplifted piles
Driven H-piles 0.5 - 1.0 0.3 - 0.5
Driven displacement piles 1.0 - 1.5 0.6 - 1.0

(round and square)
Driven displacement 1.5 - 2.0 1.0 - 1.3

tapered piles
Driven jetted piles 0.4 - 0.9 0.3 - 0.6
Bored piles (less than 0.7 0.4

70cm)
Literature:
Friction Angle on Pile Skin

Reference values of friction angle between the pile skin material and the surrounding non-
cohesive soil are listed in the following table:
Friction angle on pile δ [˚]
Pile material δ [˚]
Steel piles 20
Timber piles 0.75φ
Steel reinforced concrete 0.75φ

piles
-1271-
Literature:
Adhesion Coefficient
Reference values of the adhesion coefficient α are listed in the following table:
Empirical adhesion coefficient α
Pile material Soil consistency Cohesion range Adhesion

coefficient α [-]
cu [kPa]
Timber and concrete Very soft 0 - 12 0.00 - 1.00

piles
Soft 12 - 24 1.00 - 0.96
Medium stiff 24 - 48 0.96 - 0.75
Stiff 48 - 96 0.75 - 0.48
Very stiff 96 - 192 0.48 - 0.33
Steel piles Very soft 0 - 12 0.00 - 1.00
Soft 12 - 24 1.00 - 0.92
Medium stiff 24 - 48 0.92 - 0.70
Stiff 48 - 96 0.70 - 0.36
Very stiff 96 - 192 0.36 - 0.19
Literature:
Critical Depth
For non-cohesive soils the skin friction does not increases infinitely with depth as e.g.
effective stress, but from a certain so called critical depth it acquires a constant value - see
the following figure, where dc is the critical depth, Sc is the skin friction at critical depth and d
is the pile diameter. Similar rule holds also for the pile base resistance in non-cohesive soils,
where the same values of the critical depth dc are considered for simplicity.
-1272-
Critical depth
The reference value of the critical depth for soft sand is 10d (d is the pile diameter or its
width), for medium compact sand and compact sand the values are 15d and 20d, respectively.
The coefficient of critical depth kdc can be specified in the "Ver. capacity". The critical depth
follows from:
where: kdc - critical depth coefficient

d - pile diameter
Tomlinson
This widely used method adopts undrained shear strength parameters to calculate the pile
bearing capacity. It further assumes that the pile shaft resistance depends on the pressure due
to overburden surcharge.
The pile shaft resistance is given by:
where: ca, j - adhesion in the jth layer (shear stress between the pile skin and the
surrounding soil)
As, j - area of pile shaft in the jth layer
αj - empirical adhesion coefficient (depends on the type of soil, type of pile,

th
etc.) in the j layer
cu, j - undrained cohesion in the j-th layer (undrained shear strength)
The empirical adhesion coefficient α is back calculated by the program. Its values, however,
can be manually adjusted in the "Add new soil" dialog window.
The pile base resistance is given by:
where: qb - unit pile base resistance

Ab - pile base area
-1273-
cu - undrained shear strength
Adhesion Coefficient
The empirical adhesion coefficient α takes into account the behavior of soil around the pile skin
and depends on the pile material, quality of the pile skin surface and the type of surrounding
soil. Values of this coefficient are introduced into the program employing the following graph
taken from M.J. Tomlinson: Pile Design and Construction Practice.
Graph to determine adhesion coefficient
Effective Length
The effective length D determines the pile length, which effectively transfers the load from the
pile into the soil. If the whole pile is placed into the resistant soil, in which the load is
transferred by skin friction, then the effective length corresponds to the pile length below
terrain - see Fig. A. In case of layered medium, highly compressible layers (in which the load is
not transferred into the soil by skin friction) and the layers above are not counted into the
effective length D - see Fig. B. Introduction of effective length into the analysis and its
magnitude are set in the frame "Vertical capacity".
Fig. A Effective length in resistant soils
-1274-
Fig. B Effective length in layered medium
Effective Stress Method

The effective stress method allows to calculate the vertical bearing capacity of an isolated pile
in both cohesive and non-cohesive soils. This method is suitable for drained conditions - i.e.
conditions that prevail after sufficient time passed the construction.
The pile shaft resistance is given by:
where: qs, j - shaft resistance in the j

th
layer
βp,j - coefficients according to Bjerrum and Burland in the j
th
layer
σ0, j - average effective stress due to overburden acting along the pile in the j
th
layer
Asj - pile shaft area in the j
th
layer
The pile base resistance is given by:
where: qp - unit pile base resistance

Ab - pile base area
Np - pile base resistance coefficient (according Fellenius)
σp - effective stress due to overburden acting at pile base
Coefficients of Pile Bearing Capacity

Recommended ranges of values of coefficients of pile base resistance Np and coefficient β are
listed in the following table. The coefficient β is usually found in the given range, it seldom
exceeds the value 1,0.
Range of coefficients Np and β (Fellenius, 1991)
-1275-
Type of soil φef Np β
Clay 25 - 30 3 - 30 0.23 - 0.40
Silt 28 - 34 20 - 40 0.27 - 0.50
Sand 32 - 40 30 - 150 0.30 - 0.60
Gravel 35 - 45 60 - 300 0.35 - 0.80
Literature:
Felenius, B.H.: Foundation Engineering Handbook, Editor H.S. Fang, Van Nostrand Reinhold
Publisher, New York, 1991, 511 - 536.
CSN 73 1002
There are two methods implemented in the program to compute the pile vertical bearing
capacity following the Commentary to the CSN 73 1002 standard "Pile foundation":
• Analysis according to the theory of the 1st group of limit states
The solution procedure is described in the Commentary to the CSN 73 1002 standard "Pile
foundation" in Chapter 3 "Design" part B - general solution according to the theory of the 1st
group of limit states (pp. 15). All computational approaches are based on formulas presented
therein. The original geostatic stress σor is assumed from the finished grade. The coefficient of
conditions of the behavior of foundation soil is considered for the depth z (measured from the
finished grade).
The effective pile length used for the computation of skin bearing capacity is reduced by a
segment:
• Analysis of pile resting on incompressible subsoil

Analysis of a pile resting on incompressible subsoil (rocks class R1, R2) is based on part G -
Analysis of vertical bearing capacity Rc according to CSN 73 1004 - Commentary to CSN 73
1002 "Pilotové základy". The description begins in page 27 titled "Piles resting on
incompressible subsoil". The solution procedures used in the program are identical. The
influence coefficient of settlement Iwp is interpolated from Table 16, which is also built-in the
program.
If checking the option "analysis according to CSN 73 1002" in the "Piles" tab the
verification analysis is carried out exclusively according to CSN 73 1002 and other coefficients
ate not used. Providing this option is not checked the verification is performed based on the
selected methodology adopting particular coefficients.
-1276-
Literature:
Československá státní norma ČSN 73 1002 Pilotové základy, Normalizační institut, Praha,
1987.
Československá státní norma ČSN 73 1004 Velkoprůměrové piloty, Normalizační institut,
Praha, 1981.
Verification
Verification of pile bearing capacity depends on the verification methodology selected in the
"Piles" tab:
• verification according to the factor of safety
• verification according to the theory of limit states
• verification according to EN 1997
Actual analyses (e.g. assessment of the pile base resistance) are the same for both options -
they differ only by incorporation of design coefficients, combinations and in the way of
demonstrating the structure safety. Design coefficients (verification parameters) are specified
in the "Piles" tab.
If the verification analysis according to CSN 73 1002 is selected, the verification is carried
out exclusively according to the Commentary to CSN 73 1002.

When running the verification analysis according to the theory of limit states, it is possible to
introduce the required values of design coefficients in the "Piles" tab.
The program performs verification of the compression pile as:
where: Rc - pile compressive resistance

Rb - pile base resistance
Rs - pile shaft resistance
γb - partial factor on pile base resistance
γs - partial factor on pile shaft resistance
Vd - extreme vertical load acting on a pile
Wp - pile self-weight
For tension pile the following verification applies:
where: Rsdt - pile tensile resistance

Rs - pile shaft resistance
-1277-
γst - partial factor on tensile pile shaft resistance

Vd - extreme vertical load acting on a pile
Design Coefficients
The "Piles" tab allows to specify two groups of design (partial) coefficients:
Partial factors on soil parameters
γmφ - reduction coefficient of internal friction
γmc - reduction coefficient of cohesion
γmγ - coefficient of unit weight
It is also possible to choose reduction of tgφ.

Partial factors on pile resistance
γb - reduction coefficient of base resistance
γs - reduction coefficient of shaft resistance
γt - reduction coefficient of total resistance
γst - reduction coefficient of resistance in tension
The values of individual coefficients are listed in corresponding standards.
Verification According to the Safety Factors

When running the verification analysis according to the factor of safety, it is possible to
introduce the required value of factor safety SF for the vertical bearing capacity in the "Piles"
tab.
The program performs verification of vertical bearing capacity of compression pile as:
where: Vd - extreme vertical load acting on a pile

Rc - pile compressive resistance
Wp - pile self-weight (introduction into the analysis based on the setting
in the frame "Load")
and for tension pile:
where: Vd - extreme vertical load acting on a pile
-1278-
Rst - pile tensile resistance

Vertical Bearing Capacity - Spring Method

The program module "Pile - spring method" is part of the "Pile" program. It allows to
calculate the pile vertical bearing capacity in general layered subsoil. This analysis provides the
load-settlement curve and distributions of forces and displacements developed along the pile.
The main advantage of this module is availability of the required input parameters of soils
around the pile - the user is asked to specify the angle of internal friction, cohesion, unit
weight and deformation modulus of a given soil.
The solution procedure in the module "Pile - spring method" is based on a semi-analytical
approach. The response of soil surrounding the pile follows from the well known solution of
layered subsoil as a generalization of the Winkler-Pasternak model. The elastic rigid plastic
response in shear is assumed along the pile-soil interface in view of the Mohr-Coulomb failure
criterion. The normal stress acting on the pile is determined from the geostatic stress and soil
(concrete mixture) pressure at rest.
The influence of water in the vicinity of pile is not only introduced into the shear bearing
capacity of the pile skin, but also affects the depth of influence zone below the pile heel.
Providing the pile reaches incompressible subsoil the spring method cannot be used.
The pile settlement can also be influenced by the settlement of the surrounding terrain. In
particular, settlement of soil may reduce the pile bearing capacity. The pile settlement
increases without increasing load. This phenomenon is modeled in the program as so called
negative skin friction.
The analysis may also account for the influence of technological process of pile construction on
the stiffness of pile foundation.
The solution procedure consists of several steps:
1. In analysis the pile subdivided into a number of segments. Subdivision into individual
segments complies with the condition that the ratio between the pile segment and its
diameter should be approximately equal to 2.5. The minimum number of segments is
10.
2. Each segment is in the analysis characterized by a spring. The spring stiffness serves to
model both the shear resistance of skin and at the pile heel the stiffness of soil below
the pile heel.
3. For each segment the limit value of shear force Tlim transmitted by the skin is
determined.
4. The pile is loaded at its top end by increments of the vertical load. For each load
increment the magnitude of spring force for each segment is determined. However, it
cannot exceed the limit value of skin friction Tlim. It is clear that for a certain load level
all springs will no longer be able to increase their force and with additional load increase
the pile becomes supported by the base spring only. This spring has no restriction on
the transmitted force.
5. As a result the analysis provides the load-settlement curve, forces developed in the pile
and a graph showing variation of shear as a function of deformation at a given location.
-1279-
Load-Settlement Curve
The Load-settlement curve describes the variation of vertical load Q as a function of the pile
settlement.
By default the program offers the construction of this curve for the maximal value of
settlement equal to 25 mm. This magnitude, however, can be adjusted up to the value of
100 mm before running the calculation. An example showing a typical shape of the load-
settlement curve appears in the figure.
Load-settlement curve of single pile
Shear Strength of Skin

For each segment of the analyzed pile the program determines the limiting value of the force
that can be transmitted by the pile skin at the location of a given segment. Its value depends
on the geostatic stress σz found at a depth of a given segment.

h - depth below the ground surface
Summation sign denotes that σz is summed over individual layers of the soil.
The allowable shear stress is then given by:
where: c - cohesion of soil at the location of beam

φ - angle of internal friction of soil at the location of beam
k - coefficient of increase of allowable skin friction due to technology
If the beam is found below the ground water table, the allowable skin friction is then reduced
-1280-
to receive the form:
where: u - pore pressure below the ground water table
The allowable shear force then follows from:
where: O - length of perimeter of pile skin

l - length of pile beam
Coefficient of Increase of Limit Skin Friction

A specific input parameter is the coefficient of increase of limit skin friction k due to applied
technology of construction. By default the value of this coefficient is set equal to 1.0. There is
no recommendation by standard for its specific value - its adjustment depends solely on the
practical experiences of the designer. It has been found from the in situ measurements on real
piles that the value of k is usually greater than 1.0 and may reach the value of 1.5.
Theoretically, however, it may attain values even less than 1.0.
Depth of Deformation Zone

The assumed depth of influence is a variable, which considerably influences the stiffness of soil
below the pile heel. It is one of the input parameters for the determination of parameters C1
and C2 of the Winkler-Pasternak model. The deeper the influence zone the smaller the stiffness
of subsoil. When the depth of influence zone approaches in the limit zero the stiffness of
subsoil tends to infinity.
The depth of influence zone depends both on subsoil parameters and magnitude of the applied
surcharge, thus on stress below the pile heel. The program assumes that the depth of
influence zone is found in the location, where the stress below the heel equals the geostatic
stress. Such an idea is depicted in the following figure:
-1281-
Determination of the depth of influence zone below the pile heel

For digital determination of the depth of influence zone H serves the function F(β). Its
distribution appears in figure. This function was derived using the above assumptions and in
the program appears in the form of table. Its application is evident from the following steps.
The values of F(β) are determined for the current value of stress fz below the pile heel and for
the original geostatic stress γh. For this value of F(β) we determine the parameter β. This value
serves to determine for the actual value Poisson's ratio ν and pile diameter r the corresponding
depth of influence zone H.
Variation of function F(β)
-1282-
The depth of influence zone can be affected by the presence of ground water. In such s case its
determination is outlined in following figure:
Determination of the depth of influence zone below the pile heel including water
For digital determination of the depth of influence zone H is then used the function G(β). Its
distribution appears in figure. In the analysis this function is exploited in the similar way as
function F(β). The only difference when determining the values of G(β) appears in the use of
hydrostatic pressure γw*hw.
-1283-
Variation of function G(β)
Incompressible Subsoil
At a certain depth below the ground surface it is possible to specify incompressible subsoil. If
the pile exceeds this specified depth the spring method cannot be used, because the pile is
assumed rigid and therefore no deformation can developed in its surrounding. If there is
incompressible subsoil below the pile heel but not deeper than the depth of influence zone
below the heel, the depth of influence zone for the stiffness computation is reduced such that
the influence zone reaches the incompressible subsoil. This way also the incompressible subsoil
below the base increases its stiffness and consequently also the bearing capacity of the pile
base. If the incompressible subsoil is found below the depth of influence zone, it does not
influence the analyzed pile.

A negative skin friction is a phenomenon that arises from a settlement of soil in the vicinity of
a pile. The soil deforming around the pile tends to pull the pile downwards thus reducing its
bearing capacity for a given pile settlement.
The input parameters for assessing the influence of negative skin friction is the settlement of
ground surface w and a depth of influence zone of this deformation h. For a uniformly
distributed load around the pile the value of w should be measured in the distance equal to
-1284-
three times the pile diameter from its outer face. The value then represents the depth
influenced by the ground surface settlement and below which the soil is assumed
incompressible with no deformation.
Computation of negative skin friction is carried out first while determining the limit shear
forces transmitted by the pile skin Tlim. The solution procedure assumes that the soil
settlement decreases linearly with depth from the value of w on the ground surface up to 0 at
a depth of h. The specific value of the soil settlement is therefore assumed for each level below
the ground surface till the depth of h. The forces developed in springs of pile segments due to
their deformation are determined and then subtracted from Tlim to reduce the bearing capacity
of the pile skin.
From the presented theory it is evident that for large settlement w or large depth h the values
of Tlim may drop down to zero. In extreme cases the negative skin friction may completely
eliminate the skin bearing capacity so that the pile is then supported only by the elastic subsoil
below the pile heel.
Influence of Technology
The pile bearing capacity is considerably influenced by technological processes applied during
construction. The module "Pile - Spring method" allows to specify the technology of pile
construction. The mobilized skin friction and the resistance at the pile heel are then reduced
with the help of reduction coefficients depending on the selected technology. The values of
these coefficients follow from the Dutch standard NEN 6743 Pile foundation.
Apart from technologies offered by the program and corresponding coefficients the users are
free to assign to these coefficients their own values. This way the users may introduce their
own practical experiences or information provided by other sources into the analysis.
Shear Resistance on Skin

The shear resistance on pile skin is in the analysis represented by the stiffness of springs
supporting individual pile segments. This stiffness is associated with material parameters of
the Winkler-Pasternak model C1 and C2. The values of C1 and C2 are determined from
parameter Edef. They depend on the depth of influence zone, which varies with the pile
deformation (settlement). The variability of influence zone is in the analysis determined such
that for zero deformation it receives the value of 1x the pile diameter and for deformation at
the onset of skin failure equals kx the pile diameter, where k is the specified value, resp. 2,5.
The decisive parameter for the determination of magnitudes of C1 and C2 is the deformation
modulus. Caution must be taken when estimating the value of Edef from deformational
characteristics of soil using standards. In particular, in case of long piles we are essentially
dealing with deep seated foundations and the soil at the pile heel will certainly experiences
higher stiffness than that proposed by the standard for spread footings. This holds particularly
for cohesive soils. The most reliable estimates are of course those obtained directly from
experimental measurements.
Formulas given below serve to determine the stiffness of springs representing the shear
resistance of pile skin as a function of computed parameters of the elastic subsoil. They
depend on the shape of cross-section and for the implemented cross-sections they receive the
following forms:
Circle:
-1285-
where: r - radius of pile cross-section

C1, C2 - subsoil parameters
K1(αr), K2(αr) - values of the modified Bessel functions
Parameter α attains the value:
Rectangle:
where a,b are lengths of rectangle edges and C1,C2are subsoil parameters and kred is the
reduction coefficient, which reduces the stiffness with respect to slenderness of the rectangle.
It receives the following values
where ais the length of a shorter edge of the rectangle and His the depth of influence zone.
Cross, "I-section":
For these cross-sections the stiffness is derived from the stiffness of rectangular cross-section
reduced by subtracting the stiffness corresponding to four "removed" parts of the cross-
section.
a1, b1 - evident from the following figure
-1286-
Stiffness of Subsoil Below the Pile Heel

The soil stiffness below the pile heel follows from the value of stiffness of the Winkler model
C1. The value of C1 is determined for soil parameters Edef and ν at the location of pile heel.
The value of C1 further depends on the depth of influence zone beneath the heel.
The spring stiffness introduced at the pile base is then provided by:
where: A - cross-sectional area at the pile heel
Distributions of Forces Acting on a Pile

Apart from the load-settlement curve it is also possible to keep track of the distribution of
normal force in the pile and the distribution of shear force developed along the pile skin. The
normal forces decreases from the top to the bottom as the load is gradually taken by the shear
force developed along the pile skin. Unlike the normal force the shear force thus increases
from the top to the bottom. Both forces are evaluated in relative values related to the
magnitude of vertical load.
Distribution of internal forces acting on pile
-1287-
Dependence of Shear on Deformation

At an arbitrary (selected) depth it is possible to view the distribution of skin friction as a
function of displacement (settlement) of a given point of the pile. This graph shows the process
of gradual reduction of shear stiffness of pile skin until zero with increasing deformation. This
dependency is initially linear, particularly in stage, where the spring force does not exceed the
value Tlim. When this value is exceeded the spring stiffness starts to gradually decrease
manifested by the flattening of the curve.
Dependence of shear on displacement (settlement) of pile
Pile Settlement
Two options are available to perform the pile settlement analysis:
• Nonlinear theory (Masopust)
• Linear theory (Poulos)
Nonlinear Theory (Masopust)

The nonlinear theory constructs load-settlement curve assuming that evolution of settlement
as a function of resistance up to full mobilization of skin friction can be represented by
parabola. After that the relationship is linear as displayed in figure. This method was derived
from equations of regression curves constructed on the basis of statistical analysis of the
results of static loading tests of piles and for the determination of vertical bearing capacity it
employs regression coefficients. Further details are provided herein.
-1288-
Load-settlement curve of pile

Literature:
st
Masopust, J.: Vrtane piloty. 1 edition, Prague, Cenek a Jezek, 1994, 263 p.
st
Masopust, J., Glisnikova, V.: Zakladani staveb Modul M01. 1 edition, Brno, AN CERM, 2007,
182 p., ISBN 978-80-7204-538-9.
Approach According to Masopust

The load-settlement curve of single pile is constructed in the following way:
1) The ultimate skin friction qs is determined as follows:
where: a,b - regression coefficient of the specific skin friction

vi - depth from terrain up to the middle of the i
th
layer [m]
di - th
pile diameter in the i layer [m]
and pile skin bearing capacity is the provided by:
where: m1 - load type coefficient

m2 - shaft protection coefficient
di - pile diameter in the i
th
layer [m]
hi - th
thickness of the i layer [m]
qsi th
ultimate skin friction in the i layer [MPa]
2) The pile base bearing capacity qb follows from:
-1289-
where: e, f - regression coefficients below pile base

D - pile length inside soils [m]
db - pile base diameter [m]
3) The proportion of applied load transferred to pile base β is written as:
where: qb - pile base bearing capacity [MPa]

- weighted average of ultimate skin friction [MPa]
D - pile length inside soils [m]

db pile base diameter [m]
The load at mobilization of skin friction Rsy is then given by:
where: Rs -pile skin bearing capacity [N]

β -proportion of applied load transferred to pile base [-]
4) The load at the shaft resistance activation (= mobilization of skin friction) Rsy is
given by:
where: Is - settlement-influence factor

Rsy - load at the mobilization of skin friction [N]
d - pile diameter [m]
Es - secant modulus of soil along the pile shaft [MPa]
5) The load at the pile base for the prescribed settlement (for limiting settlement of
25 mm) follows from:
where: β - proportion of applied load transferred to pile base [-]

Rsy - load at the mobilization of skin friction [N]
slim - limit settlement (usually prescribed as 25 mm) [m]
-1290-
sy settlement at shaft resistance activation [m]
and the pile resistance attributed to a given limit settlement slim is then provided by:
where: Rb,lim - load on pile base for prescribed settlement [N]

Rs - pile shaft resistance [N]
Approach according to Masopust

Literature:
st
st
182 p., ISBN 978-80-7204-538-9.
Regression Coefficients
The specific skin friction depends on regression coefficients a, b. The pile base resistance (at
the full mobilization of skin friction) depends on the regression coefficients e, f. The values of
these regression coefficients were derived from equations of regression curves constructed on
the basis of statistical analysis of the results of approximately 350 static loading tests of piles.
The dialog window for entering regression coefficients can be displayed in the frame
"Settlement" using the "Edit a, b", "Edit e, f" buttons. When editing the dialog window displays
the recommended values of regression coefficients for various types of soils and rocks.
-1291-
Dialog window "Input for load settlement curve" - input of regression coefficients a, b (e, f)
Coefficients m1, m2
Load type coefficient m1 :
- for service load 0.7
- for extreme load 1.0
Shaft protection coefficient m2 :

- for concreting in dry shaft or under water 1.0
- for concreting with bentonite slurry 0.9
- for PVC sheet pile protection (thickness over 0.7 mm) 0.7
- for sheet pile protection and B system mesh 0.5
- for steel casing tube protection 0.15
Literature:
st
182 p., ISBN 978-80-7204-538-9.
-1292-
Secant Modulus of Soil Es

Value of secant modulus of soil Es depends on pile diameter d and thickness of an individual
layers of the soil hi. The values of this modulus should be determined experimentally from pile-
load tests.
For cohesionless soils its value also depends on the index of relative density Id, for cohesive
soils this value depends on the index of consistency Ic. Value of secant modulus of soil Es
increases with depth (thickness of soil layer).
Issue 60 in [2] states that the cumulative value of this module (applicable to all soil types
along the shaft and the base of large-diameter pile) is given by following equation:
where: Is - settlement-influence factor [-]

Q - relevant value of load (force) measured during the pile-loading test [N]
s - relevant value of pile settlement measured during the pile-loading test [m]
Values of secant modules Esi for various types of soils and different pile diameters and depths
of piles are shown in the following tables [3]. Intermediate values of secant modulus of soil Es
can be interpolated linearly.
Secant modulus of soil Es located in rocks and weak rocks
h (m) d (m)
0.6 1.0 1.5
R3 R4 R5 R3 R4 R5 R3 R4 R5
1.5 50.3 28.2 20.2 72.3 35.0 24.7 85.5 33.5 22.3
3.0 64.5 43.1 30.8 105.5 57.3 41.0 138.3 58.8 41.2
5.0 - 58.2 41.3 - 75.3 54.8 - 87.9 63.7
10.0 - 87.5 61.6 - 114.5 83.2 - 133.0 97.0
Secant modulus of soil Es located in cohesionless soils
-1293-
h (m) d (m)
0.6 1.0 1.5
Id
0.5 0.7 0.9 0.5 0.7 0.9 0.5 0.7 0.9
1.5 11.0 13.7 28.3 12.8 15.8 30.6 13.0 15.3 29.0
3.0 15.5 20.2 44.5 18.4 25.0 47.8 19.4 24.5 52.5
5.0 18.8 26.6 56.1 22.8 32.5 69.1 24.5 36.0 78.2
10.0 23.8 36.6 72.1 29.8 47.8 93.4 32.6 54.0 107.3
Secant modulus of soil Es located in cohesive soils
h (m) d (m)
0.6 1.0 1.5
Ic
0.5 ≥ 1.0 0.5 ≥ 1.0 0.5 ≥ 1.0
1.5 6.9 13.2 7.9 13.4 8.6 12.3
3.0 10.0 22.0 12.5 23.9 13.7 23.0
5.0 12.5 31.2 15.9 35.4 18.4 36.7
10.0 15.5 44.3 21.3 51.3 24.6 57.4
The dialog window for entering the secant modulus Es can be displayed in the frame
"Settlement" using the "Edit Es" button. When editing the window displays the recommended
values of the secant modulus of soil Es.
-1294-
Dialog window "Input for load settlement curve" - Secant modulus of soil Es [MPa]
Literature:
[1] CSN 73 1002: Pilotove zaklady. Praha, UNM, 1988, 28 p.
[2] CSN 73 1004: Velkoprumerove piloty. Praha, UNM, 1981, 56 p.
st
[3] Masopust, J., Glisnikova, V.: Zakladani staveb Modul M01. 1 edition, Brno, AN CERM,
2007, 182 p., ISBN 978-80-7204-538-9.
st
[4] Pochman, R., Simek, J.: Pilotove zaklady - Komentar k CSN 73 1002. 1 edition, Prague,
Vydavatelstvi norem, 1989, 80 p.
Settlement-Influence Factor Is
The settlement-influence factor depends on the depth of pile below the surface of a resistant
layer D and the pile diameter d. The settlement-influence factor of pile Is is given by:
where: I0 - base settlement-influence factor

Rk - correction factor for pile compressibility
Rh - correction factor for finite depth of layer on a rigid base
-1295-
Linear Theory (Poulos)

Analysis of the load-settlement curve of single pile or pile group is based on the solution
described in the book Pile Foundations Analysis and Design (H. G. Poulos et. E. H. Davis,
1980) and is based on the theory of elasticity and modifications attributed to in-situ
measurements. Foundation soil is therefore characterized by the modulus of elasticity E and by
the Poisson's ratio ν. This method allows the construction of the load-settlement curve for pile
foundations (single pile, pile group).
The basic input parameters of the analysis are pile base bearing capacity Rbu and pile skin
bearing capacity Rsu. Ultimate bearing capacity of pile foundation, respectively ultimate load is
given by equation Pu = Rsu + Rbu. These values are obtained by the program from the analysis
of vertical bearing capacity of single pile or pile group and it depends on the selected method
of analysis. All partial factors of the analysis are assumed equal to 1.0 so that the resulting
resistance is greater than the one obtained from actual bearing capacity analysis.
During the analysis of settlement of single pile or pile group according to Poulos method
(1980) program don't consider influence of additional compression of the pile shaft -
that is why displacement of pile material is neglected.
Constructing of load-settlement curve of pile foundation according to Poulos method

Literature:
Poulos, H. G. et. Davis, E. H.: Pile Foundations Analysis and Design. New York: John Wiley and
Sons, 1980, chapter 5, pp. 71 - 108.
Settlement of Piles According to Poulos

The basic assumption of the analysis is the determination of the load at the shaft resistance
activation Rsy. At this point the shaft resistance no longer increases, further load is taken by
the pile base only. This force is given by equation:
-1296-
where: Rs -pile shaft resistance [N]

β -proportion of applied load transferred to pile base [-]
The proportion of applied load transferred to pile base β is provided by:
where: β0 - base-load proportion for incompressible pile

Ck - correction factor for pile compressibility
Cν - correction factor for Poisson's ratio of soil
Cb - correction factor for stiffness of bearing stratum
The corresponding value of settlement sy at shaft resistance activation Rsy is given by:
where: I - settlement-influence factor [-]

Es - average value of secant modulus of soil along the pile shaft [MPa]
Rsy - load at the shaft resistance activation [N]
The settlement-influence factor I is given by:
where: I0 - basic settlement-influence factor

Rk - correction factor for pile compressibility
Rb - correction factor for stiffness of bearing stratum
Rv - correction factor for Poisson's ratio of soil
The overall limit settlement slim is provided by:
where: I - settlement-influence factor [-]

Rbu - ultimate pile base bearing capacity [N]
β - proportion of applied load transferred to pile base [-]
Es average value of secant modulus of soil along the pile shaft [MPa]
Literature:
-1297-
Sons, 1980, chapters 5.3 and 5.4, pp. 84 - 100.
Secant Modulus of Soil Es

In the literature, it appears double marking of soil modulu Es. According to the Poulos et. Davis
(1980) this parameter is referred as the modulus elasticity of soil (Young's modulus),
while Briaud (2001) and Gopal Ranjan (2000) named this parameter as the secant modulus
of soil. Both titles of this modulus Es has the same meaning. However, the soil behaves
elastically only in the field of small strains (generally it is a heterogeneous material), and thus
is more appropriate to speak rather about the secant modulus of soil Es.
Modulus of elasticity of soil E is obtained from the deviator stress-axial strain curve. The
undrained modulus, Eu is obtained from the undrained triaxial test data while the drained
modulus Ed is obtained from the drained test conditions.
At the initial stage of the stress-strain curve is nearly linear dependence, but elastic strain of
soils is a very small due to overall value of the strain. There are defined several types of
modules - tangent modulus of soil, secant modulus of soil and initial tangent modulus.
The introduction of this simplifying assumption is possible to use the theory of elasticity for
detecting of stress-strain state in soils.
Distribution of idealized stress-strain curve and determination of individual types of soil

modules
Secant modulus of soil Es is defined as the ratio of difference in deviator of normal stress to
the corresponding axial strain of soil according to the following equation:
Lambe et. Whitman (1969) say that the elastic modulus for a soil is usually the secant
modulus from zero deviator of normal stress to a deviator stress equal to one-half or one-third
of the peak deviator stress.
The secant modulus Es decreases as the strain level increases because the stress-strain curve
has a downward curvature. There are three means of obtaining this parameter:
• laboratory triaxial tests (from calculation based on the tangent modulus of soil)
• pile-load test
• empirical correlations based on previous experience
-1298-
Typical range of values for the static stress-strain (secant) modulus Es for selected soils - field
values depend on stress history, water content, density (Gopal Ranjan et. Rao, 2000):
Type of soil Consistency or Density of soil Modulus

Es [MPa]
Silt Very soft 0.2 - 2
Clay Very soft 2 - 15
Soft 5 - 25
Firm, medium 15 - 50
Hard 50 - 100
Sandy 25 - 250
Loess sand Silty 7 - 21
Loose 10 - 24
Dense 48 - 80
Sand and gravel Loose 50 - 145
Dense 100 - 190
Literature:
Briaud, J.-L.: Introduction to Soil Moduli. Geotechnical News, June 2001, BiTech Publishers
Ltd, Richmond, B.C., Canada.
Gopal Ranjan et. A. S. R. Rao: Basic and Applied Soil Mechanics. New Age International, 2000,
chapter 10.11, pp. 328 - 330. ISBN: 8122412238, 9788122412239.
Lambe, T. W. et. Whitman, V. R.: Soil Mechanics. New York: John Wiley and Sons, 1969, 576
p. ISBN: 978-0-471-51192-2.
Sons, 1980, chapter 5.5, pp. 101 - 104.
Correction Factor for Soil Poisson's Ratio Rv

The correction factor for the influence of Poisson's ratio Rν accounts for the influence of
reduction of Poisson’s ratio ν of soils surrounding the pile on the values of pile settlement for
constant modulus of elasticity of these soils. These values are generally presented as a
function of Poisson’s ratio of the surrounding soil νs for various pile-stiffness factor K. These
graphs are implemented in the program in a digital format.
-1299-
Poisson’s ratio correction factor for settlement Rν

Literature:
Sons, 1980, chapter 5.3.3, pp. 89 (figure 5.21).
Correction Factor for Stiffness of Bearing Stratum Rb

The values of the correction factor Rb are generally presented as a function of the ratio of
modulus of elasticity of pile and secant modulus of soil at the pile base and the surrounding
soil (Eb /Es) for various pile-stiffness factor K and various pile length to pile diameter ratios
(l/d). These graphs are implemented in the program in a digital format.
Base modulus correction factor for settlement Rb (L/d = 10)
-1300-
Base modulus correction factor for settlement Rb (L/d = 5)

Literature:
Base-Load Proportion for Incompressible Pile BETAo

The base-load proportion for incompressible pile β0 represents the influence of compression of
elastic half-space, which adopts the load transferred by the pile from incompressible soil. The
values of this coefficient are generally presented as a function of the pile length to pile
diameter ratio (l/d) for various pile base diameter to pile diameter ratios (db/d). These graphs
are implemented in the program in a digital format.
-1301-
Proportion of base load β0

Literature:
Correction Factor for Pile Compressibility Ck

The values of the factor Ck are generally presented as a function of the pile-stiffness factor K
for various pile length to pile diameter ratios (l/d). These graphs are implemented in the
program in a digital format.
-1302-
Compressibility correction factor for base load Ck

Literature:
Correction Factor for Poisson's Ratio of Soil Cv

The values of the factor Cν are generally presented as a function of Poisson's ratio of the
surrounding soil νs for various pile-stiffness factor K. These graphs are implemented in the
program in a digital format.
Poisson's ratio correction factor for base load Cν
-1303-
Literature:
Correction Factor for Stiffness of Bearing Stratum Cb

The values of the factor Cb are generally presented as a function of the ratio of modulus of
elasticity of pile and secant modulus of soil at the pile base and the surrounding soil (Eb /Es)
for various pile-stiffness factor K and various pile length to pile diameter ratios (l/d). These
graphs are implemented in the program in a digital format.
Base modulus correction factor for base load Cb (L/d = 10)
-1304-
Base modulus correction factor for base load Cb (L/d = 5)

Literature:
Sons, 1980, chapter 5.3.3, pp. 87 - 88 (figure 5.14).
Pile-Stiffness Factor K
The pile-stiffness factor is defined as:
where: Ep - elastic modulus of pile material [MPa]

Es - average value of secant modulus of soil along the pile shaft [MPa]
Ra - ratio of area of pile section to area bounded by pile outer-circumference [-]
where: A1 - 2
average area of cross-section of pile [m ]
A2 - 2
area of pile shaft [m ]
(for stiff piles Ra= 1)
Basic Settlement-Influence Factor Io

The basic settlement-influence factor Io depends on the pile length l and diameter d and the
values of this coefficient are generally provided by the following graph also showing their
ranges:
-1305-
Basic settlement-influence factor Io

These graphs are implemented in the program in a digital format.
Literature:
Correction Factor for Pile Compressibility Rk

The correction factor Rk represents the pile stiffness in dependence on the pile-stiffness factor
K for various ratios of the pile length to pile diameter (l/d). Its values are provided by the
following graphs, that are implemented in the program in a digital format.
-1306-
Compressibility correction factor for settlement Rk

Literature:
Correction Factor for Finite Depth of Layer on a Rigid

Base Rh
The correction factor Rh represents the influence of incompressible layer below the pile base.
Its values are presented in the literature graphically for various pile length to pile diameter
ratios (l/d) and ratios of pile length to thickness of compressible layer above the
incompressible layer (l/hor h/l). These graphs are implemented in the program in a digital
format.
-1307-
Depth correction factor for settlement Rh

Literature:
Horizontal Bearing Capacity - Elastic Subsoil (p-y

Method)
Horizontal bearing capacity of a pile, dimensioning
The horizontally loaded pile is analyzed using the finite element method as a beam on elastic
Winkler foundation. The soil parameters along the pile are represented by the modulus of
subsoil reaction. By default the pile is subdivided into 30 segments. For each segment the
program determines the values of the modulus of subsoil reaction, internal forces and
deformation (displacements). The program also allows for dimensioning of the steel-reinforced
concrete pile based on the method specified in the frame "Settings" and on the parameters
input in the "Piles" tab.
The program also enables to analyze a pile loaded by the prescribed displacements
(translation or rotation of the pile head). In such a case the analysis is carried out only with
the prescribed displacement. The input mechanical load is excluded.
The following options for inputting the modulus of subsoil reaction are available in the
program:
• by distribution (distribution of the modulus of subsoil reaction along the pile is specified)
• constant distribution
• linear distribution (Bowles)
• according to CSN 73 1004
• according to Matlock and Reese
• according to Vesic
-1308-
In general, the modulus of subsoil reaction corresponds to the spring stiffness in the Winkler
model. This model describes settlement of a rigid slab as a function of the applied load. The
corresponding relationship is represented by the following formula:
where: p - load acting along slab-soil interface

k - stiffness of Winkler spring
y - translation (displacement) of slab into subsoil
Definition of the modulus of subsoil reaction
Constant Distribution of Modulus of Subsoil Reaction

th
The modulus of subsoil reaction of the i layer is provided by:
where: Edef - deformation modulus of soil [MPa]

r - reduced width of pile [m], which is given by equation:
where: d - pile diameter [m]

β - angle of dispersion - is input with respect to the angle of internal friction
in the range of φ/4 ÷ φ
Literature:
st
Pochman, R., Simek, J.: Pilotove zaklady - Komentar k CSN 73 1002. 1 edition, Prague,
Linear Modulus of Subsoil Reaction

The modulus of subsoil reaction at a depth z is given by equation:

l - length of pile [m]
-1309-
k - 3
soil parameter (modulus) according to Bowles [MN/m ]
r - reduced width of pile [m], which is given by equation:

β - angle of dispersion - is input with respect to the angle of internal friction
in the range of φ/4 ÷ φ
3
Representative range of values of lateral modulus k [MN/m ] according to Bowles:
dense sandy gravel 220 - 400
medium dense gravel 155 - 300
medium-graded sand 110 - 280
fine sand 80 - 200
stiff clay 60 - 220
saturated stiff clay 30 - 110
plastic clay 40 - 140
saturated plastic clay 10 - 80
soft clay 2 - 40
Literature:
th
Bowles, J. E.: Foundations Analysis and Design. 5 edition, New York: McGraw-Hill Book
Company, 1997, ISBN 0-07-118844-4, chapter 16-15.2, s. 941 (table 16-4).
st
Pochman, R., Simek, J.: Pilotove zaklady - Komentar k CSN 73 1002. 1 edition, Prague,
Modulus of Subsoil Reaction According to CSN 73 1004

The modulus of subsoil reaction for cohesive soil assumes the form:
where: Edef - deformation modulus of soil [MPa]

For cohesionless soil it is given by:
where: nh - 3
modulus of horizontal compressibility [MN/m ]
-1310-

z depth of a given section from finished grade [m]
Approximate values of modulus of horizontal compressibility nh for cohesionless

soils:
Soil nh [MN/m ]
3
Relative density of soil ID [-] 0.3 0.5 0.9
Dry sand and gravel 2.5 7.0 18.0

Wet sand and gravel 1.5 4.5 11.0
Literature:
CSN 73 1004: Velkoprumerove piloty. Praha, UNM, 1981, 56 p.
st
Modulus of Subsoil Reaction According to Matlock and

Reese
This method is applicable for cohesionless soils. The modulus of subsoil reaction is given by
equation:
where: nh - 3
modulus of horizontal compressibility [MN/m ]
z - depth of a given section from finished grade [m]
Approximate values of modulus of horizontal compressibility nh for cohesionless

soils:
-1311-
Soil nh [MN/m ]
3
- density
Dry sand and gravel

- loose 1.8 - 2.2
- medium dense 5.5 - 7.0
- dense 15.0 - 18.0
Wet sand and gravel

- loose 1.0 - 1.4
- medium dense 3.5 - 4.5
- dense 9.0 - 12.0
Literature:
Reese, L. C. et. Matlock, H.: Non-Dimensional Solutions for Laterally Loaded Piles with Soil
Modulus Assumed Proportional to Depth. University of Texas, Austin, 1956.
Reese, L. C. et. Matlock, H.: Generalized Solutions for Laterally Loaded Piles. Journal of the
Soil Mechanics and Foundations Division, ASCE 86, No. 5, 1960, pp. 63 - 91.
Reese, L. C. et. Matlock, H.: Foundation analysis of offshore pile-supported structures.
th
Proceedings of the 5 International Conference, ISSMFE, Paris, Vol. 2, 1961, pp. 91-7
Modulus of Subsoil Reaction According to Vesic

The modulus of subsoil reaction is provided by:
where: Ep - modulus of elasticity of pile [MPa]

Ip - 4
moment of inertia of pile [m ]
Es - modulus of elasticity of soil [MPa]
ν - Poisson's ratio [-]
Literature:
Sons, 1980, chapter 8.2.3, pp. 174 (equation 8.43).
Vesic, A. S.: Bending of Beams Resting on Isotropic Elastic Solid. JSMFD, ASCE, vol. 87, 1961,
EM 2: pp. 35 - 53.
Vesic, A.S.: Design of Pile Foundations. National Cooperative Highway Research Program
Synthesis 42, Transportation Research Board, Washington D.C., 1977.
-1312-
Pile Horizontal Bearing Capacity - Brom’s Method

Analysis of a single pile according to Broms is described in Broms, 1964. This method
exclusively assumes a pile in the homogeneous soil. Thus the analysis method does not
allow for layered subsoil. The type of analysis of the pile horizontal bearing capacity is specified
in the "Settings" frame, tab "Piles".
When adopting the Broms method for the analysis of horizontal bearing capacity the program
disregards up now input soil layers. The soil parameters are specified in the "Horizontal bearing
capacity" frame based on the type of soil (cohesive, cohesionless).
The input parameters for the analysis of pile horizontal bearing capacity are the pile material
characteristics (modulus of elasticity and strength of a given material), pile geometry (pile
length l and its diameter d) and also the pile load due to shear force and bending moment.
The coefficient of pile stiffness β for cohesive soils is given by:
where: E*I - bending stiffness of pile section [MNm2]
kh - modulus of subsoil reaction [MNm3]
d - diameter of a single pile [m] - in case of a pile with a circular variable

cross-section the calculation of parameter β assumes a constant value of
the pile diameter d1 input in the "Geometry" frame
The coefficient of pile stiffness η for cohesionless soils follows from:
where: E*I - bending stiffness of pile section [MNm2]
nh - coefficient of soil modulus variation [MNm3]
The program automatically determines whether to consider a long or a short pile based on the
ratios β*l (for cohesive soils) and η*l (for cohesionless soils), respectively. Because
literature offers different criteria for different types of piles, the program allows the user to
define them. For an intermediate pile length the verification analysis considers both short and
long piles and then program automatically chooses the result with the lowest value of the pile
horizontal bearing capacity Qu.
-1313-
Dialog window "Pile type criteria"

Type of pile criteria (long, short, medium) are considered according to the following
conditions:
• free head: for long piles it holds β*l > 2,5 ; for short piles then β*l < 2,5
• restrained: for long piles it holds β*l > 1,5 ; for short piles then β*l < 1,5
Type of pile (pile head support) can be considered in two ways:
• free head - rotation at pile head is not constrained
• restrained - pile is constrained against rotation at its head. In such cases we typically
deal with piles that are part of a planar pile grid or a pile group.
Another important input parameter is the flexure bearing capacity. This quantity is
automatically back calculated by the program using the following relation:
where: Wy - section modulus of the pile section [m3]
f - strength of the pile material [MPa]

γk - reduction coefficient of cross-section strength [-] - the cross-section bearing
capacity is according to different standards pre-multiplied by different safety
coefficients. This coefficient enables to adapt the program to these
standards.
In case of a steel-reinforced concrete pile the flexure bearing capacity Mu depends on the
amount of designed steel.
The reduction coefficient of bearing capacity γQu reduces the overall magnitude of the single
pile horizontal bearing capacity as:
where: Qu - horizontal bearing capacity of a single pile [kN]

γQu - reduction coefficient of bearing capacity [-]
The result of an analysis is horizontal bearing capacity of a single pile Qu, respectively Qu,red
and displacement of a pile at the terrain surface u.
-1314-
Literature:
[1] BROMS, BENGT. B.: Lateral Resistance of Piles in Cohesive Soils. Proceedings of the
American Society of Civil Engineers, Journal of the Soil Mechanics and Foundations Division,
Vol. 90, SM2, 1964.
[2] BROMS, BENGT. B.: Lateral Resistance of Piles in Cohesionless Soils. Proceedings of the
American Society of Civil Engineers, Journal of the Soil Mechanics and Foundations Division,
vol. 90 SM3, 1964.
Pile CPT
The program Pile CPT allows to verify the bearing capacity and settlement of a single pile or a
group of piles based on the results of penetration tests - CPTs.
The main objective is to determine the base and shaft bearing capacities. This analysis can be
carried according to the following standards and approaches:
• EN 1997-2
• NEN 6743
• LCPC (Bustamante)
• Schmertmann
For all methods the essential input parameters are dimensionless coefficients adjusting the
magnitude of bearing capacity and shaft friction, respectively. Different notation of these
parameters can be encountered in various publications. The following notation is used in
program Pile CPT:
αp -pile base coefficient
αs -shaft friction coefficient
These coefficients are automatically calculated based on the type pile and the surrounding soil
- these parameters can be, however, also specified manually (αp can be entered in the
"Geometry" input mode, αs as a soil parameter).
When analyzing rectangular piles the pile shape coefficient s is introduced to reduce the base
bearing capacity. When analyzing piles with enlargement the expanded pile base coefficient β is
introduced to adjust the expanded base bearing capacity. When calculating the base bearing
capacity the program automatically accounts for the influence of the change of terrain
elevation.
The program allows for the calculation of load-settlement curve and pile settlement for a given
load. This analysis adopts the values of calculated base and shaft bearing capacities and
follows the NEN 6743 standard. A negative skin friction can also be taken into account when
calculating pile settlement.
Verification of a pile bearing capacity depends on the verification methodology selected in the
"Pile CPT" tab.
Bearing Capacity
The maximum bearing capacity of a single pile based on the values of tip resistance qc of the
th
i cone penetration test is given by:
-1315-
where: Fmax, i -maximum bearing capacity of the pile from ith CPT
Fmax,base,i -maximum base resistance from ith CPT
Fmax,shaft,i -maximum shaft resistance from ith CPT
If performing the analysis according to the factor of safety or the limit states theory, the
bearing capacity of a single pile is obtained as an arithmetic average of n calculated bearing
capacities:
If performing the analysis according to EN 1997-2, final bearing capacity depends on

correlation factors ξ3 and ξ4.
If performing the analysis according to the NEN 6743 standard then the approach for more
CPTs is different and follows directly the NEN 6743 standard (article 5.3.2.2).
The maximum pile base resistance Fmax,base is provided by:
where: Abase -pile base cross-sectional area

pmax, base -maximum pressure at pile base from CPT results
The maximum shaft resistance Fmax,shaft is provided by:
where: Op -pile periphery in bearing soil

pmax, shaft -maximum force on shaft (friction) from CPT results
ΔL -pile length, either length of actived shaft friction or length of expanded
base
z -vertical dimension alog pile axis
Actual calculation of the maximum pressure at pile base pmax,base and the maximum force
developed along the shaft pmax,shaft (determined according to the selected type of analysis
selected in the "Pile CPT" tab).
EN 1997-2
The EN 1997-2 standard determines the maximum pressure at pile base (maximum
th
resistance) pmax, base from the corresponding i penetration test as follows:
where: qc, I, mean -mean from values qc, I (see Addenum D.7 in EN 1997-2)
-1316-
qc, II, mean -mean of the minimum cone tip resistances qc, II (see Addenum B4
in EN 1997-3)
qc, III, mean -mean of the cone tip resistance qc, III (see Addenum B4 in EN 1997-
3)
αp -pile base coefficient (pile class factor)
s -pile shape coefficient
β -expaned pile base coefficient
The maximum value of penetration pressure qc is limited by the value of 15 MPa. In

cohesionless soils the analysis takes into account the influence of overconsolidation (OCR).
The maximum shaft friction (shaft resistance) pmax, shaft is given by:
where: αs -shaft friction coefficient

qc, z, a -tip resistance at depth h
Literature:
EN 1997-2 Geotechnical design. Ground investigation and testing.
NEN 6743
The NEN 6743 "Piled Foundations" standard determines the maximum pressure at pile base
th
pmax, base from the corresponding i penetration test as follows:
kde: qc, I, mean -mean of the cone tip resistance qc, I (see article 5.3.3.3 in NEN 6743
standard)
qc, II, mean -mean of the minimum cone tip resistance qc, II (see article 5.3.3.3 in
NEN 6743 standard)
qc, III ,mean -mean of the cone tip resistance qc, III (see article 5.3.3.3 in NEN 6743
standard)
αp -pile base coefficient
s -pile shape coefficient
β -expanded pile base coefficient
The maximum value of penetration pressure qc is limited by the value of 15 MPa. In

cohesionless soils the analysis takes into account the influence of overconsolidation (OCR).
The maximum shaft friction pmax, shaft is given by:
-1317-
qc, z, a -tip resistance at depth h
Literature:
NEN 6743:1991/A1:1997, Geotechniek - Berekeningsmethode voor funderingen op palen -
Drukpalen.
LCPC (Bustamante)
The LCPC - Laboratoire Central des Ponts et Chausees method (also known as Bustamante
method based on the works of Bustamante and Gianeselli) determines the maximum
pressure at pile base pmax, base as follows:
where: αp -pile base coefficient

qc, eq -equivalent average cone tip resistence
The maximum shaft friction pmax, shaft is given by:

qc, z, a -tip resistence
Determination of Equivalent Average Cone Tip Resistance

An equivalent average cone tip resistance is obtained in the following way:
1) Calculate the average tip resistance qc, mean at the tip of the pile by averaging qc values
over a zone ranging from 1.5d below the pile tip to 1.5d above the pile tip (d is the pile
diameter)
2) Eliminate qc values in the zone which are higher than 1.3 multiple of the mean of the cone
tip resistance qc, mean and those are lower than 0.7 multiple of the mean of the cone tip
resistance qc, mean as shown in figure
3) Calculate the equivalent average cone tip resistance qc, eq by averaging the remaining cone
tip resistance qc values over the same zone that were not eliminated (i.e. from values in
the range 0.7 to 1.3 multiple of the cone tip resistance qc, mean).
-1318-
Determination of equivalent average cone tip resistance qc, eq

Literature:
Tom Lunne, Peter K. Robertson, John J.M. Powell: Cone Penetration Testing in Geotechnical
Practice, Spon Press, 1997, London.
Schmertmann
The Schmertmann method determines the maximum pressure at pile base pmax, base as
follows:
where: αp -pile base coefficient

qupr -modified equivalent average cone tip resistance
where: qc1, qc2 -minimum value of mean of the cone tip resistance
In cohesionless soils the analysis takes into account the influence of overconsolidation (OCR).
The maximum shaft friction pmax,shaft is given by following formulas:
• for cohesionless soils:
where: K -correlation coefficient of skin friction

-mean value of penetrometer sleeve local friction fs in the interval
-1319-
given by bracket subscript

As -area of the pile shaft surface in given interval
d -diameter of pile
D -embedded pile length
• for cohesive soils:
where: αs,i -shaft friction coefficient according Tomlinson in the ith layer
-mean value of penetrometer sleeve local friction f in the ith layer

s
As,i -area of the pile shaft surface in the ith layer
Literature:
Schmertmann J.H.: Guidelines for Cone Penetration Test, Performance and deign, U.S.
Departments of Transportation, report No. FHWA-TS-78-209, Washington,D.C., 1978.
Determination of Average Cone Tip Resistance

The minimum mean value of the cone tip resistance qc s determined by the minimum value of
the mean of the cone tip resistance qc over the influenced zone ranging from 0.7d to 4d below
the pile base (d is the pile diameter). The minimum mean value of the cone tip resistance qc2
is determined over the influence zone extending from 8d above the pile base (d is the pile
diameter). The procedure for obtaining the mean value of the cone tip resistance qc1, qc2 is as
follows (see figure):
1) determine two averages of the cone stress within the zone below the pile base, one for a
zone depth of 0.7d and one for 0.4d along the path "a" through "b". The smaller of the two
is retained. (The zone height 0.7d applies to where the cone stress increases with depth
below the pile base).
2) determine the smallest cone stress within the zone used for the Step 1
3) determine the average of the two values per Steps 1 and 2. Step 4 is determining the
average cone stress in the zone
4) determine the average cone stress in the zone 8d above the pile base that gives the value
qc. Finally, the average of the Step 3 and Step 4 values is determined.
-1320-
Determination of average cone tip resistance qc1, qc2
Correlation Coefficient K
Correlation coefficient of skin friction K is entered in the "Pile CPT" tab. Value of this coefficient
is equal to ratio of unit pile shaft resistance and unit penetrometer sleeve local friction.
Correlation coefficient K can be expressed for example by function of embedded pile length -
see following graphs.
-1321-
Function of embedded pile length (D - embedded pile length, b - pile width or diameter)
Literature:
FHWA HI 97-013: Design and Construction of Driven Pile Foundations, Workshop manual -
Volume 1, National Highway institute.

A negative skin friction is an effect that arises as a result of the settlement of soil around the
pile. A soil deforming around the pile tends to pull the pile down thus reducing its bearing
capacity. In extreme cases this effect may completely eliminate the influence of shaft friction.
The pile is then supported only by elastic subsoil below the pile base.
The negative skin friction Fs,nk,rep is given by:
where: Op -pile periphery

n -number of layers in the negative friction zone
hi -depth of ith layer
K0,i,rep -representative value of the coefficient of earth pressure at rest

δi,rep -friction between soil and pile at ith layer
φi,rep -representative value of the angle of internal friction at ithlayer
-1322-
σv,i-1,rep -horizontal stress in soil at i-1 layer

σv,1,rep -horizontal stress in soil at ith layer
pi,a,rep -surcharge at ith layer
Δσi,v,w,rep -change of vertical stress σ at ith layer

v
the following
relation holds:
If a slip surface is defined then the value of negative skin friction Fs,nk,rep is provide by:
where: Op -pile periphery

hi -depth of ith layer
ci,rep -representative cohesion of slip surface

3 2
- for bitumen 10*10 N/m
3 2
- for bentonite 20*10 N/m
3 2
- for synthetic material 50*10 N/m
The value of representative cohesion along a slip surface can also be introduced directly by the
user.
Shaft Friction Coefficient ALFAs

The coefficient reducing the shaft friction αs differs based on the applied method and the type
of soil. The values of this coefficients are built into the program according to EN 1997-2 and
NEN 6743 standards.
The values for sands and sands with gravel are listed in the following table:
Piles NEN EN
6743 1997-2
αs [-] αs [-]
prefabricated driven piles or steel piles 0.010 0.010
Franki piles 0.014 0.012
driven wooden piles 0.012 0.012
vibrating or vibropressed 0.012 0.012
cast in place screw piles 0.009 0.009
prefabricated screw piles 0.009 0.009
cast in place screw piles with additional grouting 0.006 0.006
-1323-
prefabricated screw piles with additional grouting 0.006 0.006
steel tubular piles 0.0075 0.0075
Continuous Flight Auger piles (CFA) 0.006 0.006
bored piles or piles sheeted by bentonite suspense 0.006 0.006
bored piles with steel casing 0.005 0.005
For very coarse-grained sands and gravels the above values are reduced in both methods
by a reduction coefficient (coarse-grained sand 0.75, gravel 0.5).
For peat the value of αs = 0 is considered.
For clay and silt the values of αs according to the EN 1997-2 are listed in the following table:
Type of soil qc [MPa] αs [-]
clay >3 < 0.030
clay <3 < 0.020
silt < 0.025
For clay and silt the values of αs according to the NEN 6743 are listed in the following table:
qc [MPa] αs [-]
>1 0.035
<1 0.0 depth to quintuple of pile diameter
0.025 depth from 5 to 20 multiple of pile diameter
0,035 depth over 20 multiple of pile diameter
If the LCPC (Bustamante) method is used the shaft friction coefficient αs is used depending
on the tip resistance qc (orientation values are available in the following table).
Orientation values of the shaft friction coefficient αs based on the cone tip resistance
qc
-1324-
LCPC Cone stress (tip αs αs Maximum

(Bustamante) resistance) shaft
for piles of for piles of
Soil type resistance
qc [MPa] type "A" type "B"
[kPa]
Clay <1 0.033 0.033 15
1 < qc < 5 0.025 0.011 35
5 < qc 0.017 0.008 35
Sand qc< 5 0.010 0.008 35
5 < qc < 12 0.010 0.005 80
12 < qc 0.007 0.005 120
Type "A" includes these types of technology of installation of piles:

• screw (cast in place, prefabricated, cast in place with additional grouting, prefabricated
with additional grouting, CFA piles, bored or piles sheeted by bentonite suspense)
Type "B" includes these types of technology of installation of piles:
• driven (prefabricated or steel, wooden)
• Franki piles
• vibrating
• steel tubular
• bored with steel casing
When using Schmertmann method, coefficient αs reducing shaft friction according to
Tomlinson is considered. Values used in program are derived from following graph mentioned
in publication M. J. Tomlinson: Pile Design and Construction Practice (1994).
-1325-
Literature:
th
Tomlinson M. J.: Pile Design and Construction Practice, 4 edition, Taylor and Francis, 1994,
ISBN 0 419 18450 3.
Influence of Overconsolidation (OCR)

For sand and gravel the maximum pressure at pile base pmax,base (determined according to the
selected type of analysis selected in the "Pile CPT" tab) is reduced depending on the value of
overconsolidation OCR (defined as a soil parameter in the frame "Soils") as follows:
Analysis accroding to EC 7-3, NEN 6743:
• for all cohesionless soils the maximum pressure at pile base pmax,base is 15 MPa
• for OCR ≤ 2 no reduction is performed
• for 2 < OCR ≤ 4 the maximum pressure at pile base pmax,base is multiplied by 0.67
• for OCR > 4 the maximum pressure at pile base pmax,base is multiplied by 0,50
When using the Schmertmann method the reduction is performed according to the
following graph:
-1326-
Reduction of equivalent mean cone tip resistance according to OCR (Schmertman)
Coefficient of Influence of Pile Shape s

This coefficient represents the influence of a rectangular pile cross-section, the b/a ratio in
particular. Its values are evident from the following graph (function of b/a):
Graph to determine pile shape coefficient s (a - length of the smallest side, b - the largest side)
Coefficient of Influence of Pile Widened Base BETA

This coefficient denoted as β represents the influence of an expanded pile base, its values are
evident from the following figure:
-1327-
(as a function of ):
Graph to determine the coefficient β

where: H -pile length [m]
Deq -equivalent pile diameter at pile base [m]
deq -equivalent pile shank diameter [m]
Coefficient of Reduction of a Pile Base Bearing

Capacity ALFA p
The coefficient of reduction of pile base bearing capacity αp identifies the type of pile. Its
values are determined from one of the available calculation methods or they can be entered
manually by the user.
For NEN 6743 and EN 1997-2 methods the following built-in values of the coefficient αp are
available:
Piles αp
[-]
prefabricated driven piles or steel piles 1.0
Franki pile 1.0
driving wooden pile 1.0
-1328-
Vibrating 1.0
cast in place screw piles 0.9
prefabricated screw pile 0.8
cast in place screw piles with additional grouting 0.9
prefabricated screw pile with additional grouting 0.8
steel tubular piles 1.0
continuous Flight Auger (CFA) 0.8
bored piles or piles sheeted by bentonite suspense 0.5
bored piles with steel casing 0.5
For LCPC and Schmertmann the coefficient is back-calculated based on the value of cone
resistance qc (the values are presented in the following table):
Orientation values of the coefficient αp based on the cone resistance qc
LCPC Cone resistance αp αp

(Bustamante)
qc [MPa] for bored for driven
Soil type
piles piles
Clay <1 0.04 0.50
1 < qc < 5 0.35 0.45
5 < qc 0.45 0.55
Sand qc < 12 0.40 0.50
13 < qc 0.30 0.40
Pile Group
Analysis of a group of piles depends on the structure stiffness. The basic assumption is that
for a stiff structure all piles experience the same settlement, while for a compliant structure
each pile deforms independently - no interaction is assumed.
The maximum bearing capacity of a rigid pile foundation is given by:
where: M -number of piles in the pile foundation

Fr,max,rep -single pile bearing capacity in the pile foundation
If adopting the NEN6743 standard then a coefficient of capacity reduction ξ is introduced into
the analysis depending on the number piles M and the number of CPTs (article 5.3.2.1). The
maximum bearing capacity of a compliant pile foundation is determined according to the
-1329-
bearing capacity of the most stressed pile in the group as:
where: Fr,i -bearing capacity of pile in the group
Calculation of Pile Base Settlement

The magnitude of pile head settlement w1,d is determined as follows:
where: wbase,d -pile base settlement due to acting force
wbase,d,1 -pile base settlement due to force acting at base

wbase,d,2 -pile base settlement due to force acting on the shaft
wel,d -pile settlement due to elastic compression
The magnitudes of settlements wbase,.d,1 and wbase,d21 are determined from built-in graphs
according to the NEN6743 standard. The value wel,d is given by:
where: L -pile length

Fmean,d -mean of force acting on the pile
Aplast -pile shank cross-sectional area
Ep,mat,d -modulus of elasticity of pile material
Graphs to Calculate Settlement

Graphs to calculate settlement are taken from the NEN6743 standard (article 6.2.1), which
allow us to determine:
• Pile settlement due to base vertical force (pile settlement in percentage of the equivalent
pile diameter plotted as a function of the base vertical force given in percentage of the
maximum base resistance Fmax,base).
• Pile settlement due to shaft force (pile settlement in mm plotted as a function of the shaft
force given in percentage of the maximum shaft resistance Fmax,shaft).
-1330-
Graph to determine wbase,d,1 (1 - driven piles, 2 - continuous auger, 3 - bored piles)
Graph to determine wbase,d,2 (1 - driven piles, 2 - continuous auger, 3 - bored piles)
Calculation of Load-Settlement Curve

One of the program outputs is a load diagram of vertically loaded pile - load-settlement
-1331-
curve, which plots the pile vertical settlement as a function of the applied load.
The load-settlement curve is determined as a sum of the settlements due to forces at the pile
base and on the shaft derived from graphs used to calculate the pile settlement. A typical
example of the load-settlement curve appears in the following figure.
Load-settlement curve
Verification
Verification of pile (or group of piles) bearing capacity depends on the verification
methodology selected in the "Pile CPT" tab:
• verification according to the EN 1997-2
• verification according to the factor of safety or the theory of limit states
• verification according to the NEN 6743
In settlement calculation it is possible to use either a load-settlement curve or a load-
displacement curve when adopting the NEN 6743 standard.
Verification According to EN 1997-2

Program determines the base and shaft bearing capacities. Result is n values of total bearing
capacities for n CPTs:
where: Rc,i -bearing capacity from ith CPT
-1332-
Rcd,i -design bearing capacity from ith CPT
Rb,i -base bearing capacity from ith CPT
Rs,i -shaft bearing capacity from ith CPT
γb -partial factor on base resistance (it's defined in the "Piles CPT" tab)
γs -partial factor on shaft resistance (it's defined in the "Piles CPT" tab)
Total bearing capacity is determined from:
where: Rc, min -minimal bearing capacity

Rc, -average value of bearing capacity from all CPTs
mean
Partial factor on model uncertainty γcal is defined in "Settings" frame (default value is 1).
Correlation coefficients ξ3 and ξ4 are either set automatically according to number of CPTs, or
are specified in the frame "Settings". For constructions with sufficient stiffness and resistance
the correlation coefficients can be reduced by value 1.1 (result cannot be less than 1.0 after
dividing).
Verification of pile is given by following formula:
where: Fs,d -design load

Rc,d -design pile bearing capacity
Correlation Coefficients for Evaluating of Bearing

Capacity of Piles from CPTs
Correlation coefficients ξ for evaluating of bearing capacity from CPTs (n - number of
CPTs)
ξ for n = 1 2 3 4 5 7 10
ξ3 1.4 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.2 1.2 1.2

0 5 3 1 9 7 5
ξ4 1.4 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.1 1.1 1.0

0 7 3 0 5 2 8
-1333-
Verification According to the Safety Factor

The verification analysis according to factor of safety is selected in the "Pile CPT" tab. This
frame also allows to define the required factor of safety for bearing capacity. Pile verification
then assumes the form:
where: Fs,d -pile load

SFb -safety factor for bearing capacity
Fr,d -pile bearing capacity
Verification According to Limit States

The verification according to limit states is selected in the "Pile CPT" tab, including setting of
pile bearing capacity reduction coefficient. When using the NEN 6743 standard the program
automatically performs the verification analysis as specified by this standard and therefore the
frame "Settings" is not accessible. Pile verification for the first limit state assumes the
formula:
where: Fs,d -design pile load

γt -reduction coefficient of bearing capacity
Fr,d -design pile bearing capacity
Spread Footing CPT

This program is used for the design and verification of spread footings based on data from field
tests (CPT, SPT, PMT).
The program performs an analysis for:
• vertical bearing capacity
• settlement
• longitudinal and shear reinforcement (punching)
Bearing capacity analysis

The bearing capacity of foundation soil can be calculated according to the CPT, SPT or PMT
tests.
The bearing capacity determined from the CPT tests:
-1334-
• "Meyerhof" method
• "Schmertmann" method
• "Skempton" method
The bearing capacity determined from the SPT tests:

• "Meyerhof" method
The bearing capacity determined from the PMT tests:

• "NF P94-261"
Meyerhof Method (CPT)

This solution for cohesionless soils use a Meyerhof theory, where the bearing capacity of
foundation soil is given by a formula:
It is recommended to use a safety factor FS = 3 when calculating the bearing capacity

using this method.
where: Rd - bearing capacity of foundation soil
qc - average value of cone penetration resistance measured at depths from
footing base to 1,5*bef bellow the footing base
bef - effective footing width
Cw1,Cw2 - GWT influence factors
Ri - load inclination factor
The formula is derived for imperial units [tsf, ft] - the program calculates automatically in the
units used in the program.
GWT influence factors Cw1 and Cw2 are determined as follows:
hGWT = 0 (water in the terrain level) -> Cw1 = Cw2 = 0,5
hGWT = d (water in the depth of footing bottom) -> Cw1 = 0,5; Cw2 = 1
hGWT > d + 1,5*bef -> Cw1 = Cw2 = 1
kde: hGWT - depth of ground water table from the terrain
Intermediate values Cw1 and Cw2 are interpolated.

Load inclination factor Ri is interpolated according to the following table:
H/V Ri
d/bef = 0 d/bef = 1 d/bef = 5
-1335-
0.10 0.75 0.80 0.85
0.15 0.65 0.75 0.80
0.20 0.55 0.65 0.70
0.25 0.50 0.55 0.65
0.30 0.40 0.50 0.55
0.35 0.35 0.45 0.50
0.40 0.30 0.35 0.45
0.45 0.25 0.30 0.40
0.50 0.20 0.25 0.30
0.55 0.15 0.20 0.25
0.60 0.10 0.15 0.20
where: H - horizontal component of resultant load

V - vertical component of resultant load
This method should not be used for ratio H/V > 0,6.
The influence of inclined terrain and inclined footing bottom is considered same way as
in Schmertmann method.
Literature:
FHWA-SA-91-043: THE CONE PENETROMETER TEST
Bridge Engineering Handbook (Wai-Fah Chen, Lian Duan, 1999)
Schmertmann Method (CPT)

This solution for cohesionless soils use a Schmertmann theory, where the bearing
capacity of foundation soil is given by a formula:

using this method.
where: Rd - bearing capacity of foundation soil
Kq, Kγ - reduction factors
γ - unit weight of the soil in the footing bottom
Nq, Nγ - bearing capacity factors
-1336-
The formula is derived for imperial units [tsf, tcf, ft] - the program calculates automatically in
the units used in the program.
where: qc1 - average value of cone penetration resistance measured at depths from
footing base to 0.5*bef bellow the footing base
qc2 - average value of cone penetration resistance measured from the depth
0.5*bef bellow the footing base to 1.5*bef bellow the footing base
where: iq, iγ - load inclination factors

sq , sγ - footing shape factors
dq - footing depth factor
bq, bγ - footing bottom inclination factor
gq, gγ - ground inclination factor
Inclination factors iq and iγ are determined as follows:
where: H - horizontal component of resultant load

lef - effective footing length
θ - angle between horizontal component of resultant load H and longer
axis of footing (in the direction lef)
-1337-
determination of angle θ
This method should not be used for ratio H/V > 0.4.
Footing shape factors sq and sγ are determined as follows:
where: φ - angle of internal friction in the footing bottom
Footing depth factor dq is determined as follows:
Footing bottom inclination factor bq and bγ are determined as follows:
where: η - angle of footing bottom inclination
Ground inclination factor gq and gγ are determined as follows:
where: β - angle of ground inclination
Literature:
Skempton Method (CPT)

This solution for cohesive soils use a Skempton theory, where the bearing capacity of
foundation soil is given by a formula:
-1338-
using this method.

Where: Rd - bearing capacity of foundation soil
Kc - load inclination factor
Nc - Skempton bearing capacity factor
Su - undrained shear strength
γ - unit weight of the soil in the footing bottom
Where: H - horizontal component of resultant load

This method should not be used for ratio H/V > 0,4.
Skempton bearing capacity factor Nc depends on the ratio of effective width bef and
effective length lef and on the ratio of footing bottom depth d and effective width bef.
Determination of Nc factor (From Peck, Hanson a Thornburn, 1974)
-1339-
Undrained shear strength Su is determined as follows:
Where: qc - average value of cone penetration resistance

σv0 - average value of vertical stress measured at depths from footing
base to 1,5.bef bellow the footing base
Nk - Cone factor (range <10;20>)
Where: qc1 - average value of cone penetration resistance measured at depths from
footing base to 0,5.bef bellow the footing base
qc2 - average value of cone penetration resistance measured from the depth
0,5.bef bellow the footing base to 1,5.bef bellow the footing base
Literature:
Meyerhof Method (SPT)

This solution for cohesive and cohesionless soils use a Meyerhof theory, where the
bearing capacity of foundation soil is given by a formula:

using this method.
N - average value of SPT blow counts measured at depths from footing
base to 1.5*bef bellow the footing base
Cw1,Cw2 - GWT influence factors
Ri - load inclination factor
In saturated very fine or silty sands, the measured SPT blow count for Ni > 15 should be
corrected as follows:
-1340-
This corellation can be performed automatically in the frame "Analysis".

GWT influence factors Cw1 and Cw2 are determined as follows:
hGWT = 0 (water in the terrain level) -> Cw1 = Cw2 = 0.5
hGWT = d (water in the depth of footing bottom) -> Cw1 = 0.5; Cw2 = 1
hGWT > d + 1,5*bef -> Cw1 = Cw2 = 1
Where: hGWT - depth of ground water table from the terrain
Intermediate values Cw1 and Cw2 are interpolated.

Load inclination factor Ri is interpolated according to the following table:
H/V Ri
d/bef = 0 d/bef = 1 d/bef = 5
0.10 0.75 0.80 0.85
0.15 0.65 0.75 0.80
0.20 0.55 0.65 0.70
0.25 0.50 0.55 0.65
0.30 0.40 0.50 0.55
0.35 0.35 0.45 0.50
0.40 0.30 0.35 0.45
0.45 0.25 0.30 0.40
0.50 0.20 0.25 0.30
0.55 0.15 0.20 0.25
0.60 0.10 0.15 0.20
Where: H - horizontal component of resultant load

This method should not be used for ratio H/V > 0.6.
Literature:
-1341-
NF P94-261 (PMT)
This solution for cohesive and cohesionless soils use a theory from the French standard NF
P94-261, where the bearing capacity of foundation soil is given by a formula:

using this method.
*
p le - equivalent net limit pressure
kp - bearing capacity factor

iδ - load inclination factor
ig - ground inclination factor
*
Equivalent net limit pressure ple is a geometric average of values of pressiometric limit
pressure from the footing bottom to the depth of hr.
Depth hr depends on type of load (design/service), geometry of foundation and eccentricity of

load:
-1342-
design load service load
Strip footing
Circle footing
Spread footing
Bearing capacity factor kp depends on type of soil, geometry of foundation (ratio L/B) and
equivalent embedding depth De.
Equivalent embedding depth De is calculated as follows:
or:
Values pLM,i for determining equivalent embedding depth De are measured between terrain
and foundation bottom.
If De/B < 2 :
-1343-
Calculation Kp for strip, circle or square foundation:
Calculation Kp for spread footing (ratio L/B)
Coefficients a, b, c, kp0 and kpmax depend on type of soil according the table:
Soil category Variation curve of the bearing Expression of kp

factor
a b c kp0 kpmax
(De/B=0)
Clays & silts Strip footing (B/L = 0) Q1 0.20 0.02 1.30 0.80 1.022
Square footing (B/L = 1) Q2 0.30 0.02 1.50 0.80 1.123
Sand & gravels Strip footing (B/L = 0) Q3 0.30 0.05 2.00 1.00 1.393
Chalk Strip footing (B/L = 0) Q5 0.28 0.22 2.80 0.80 1.517
Marls Strip footing (B/L = 0) Q7 0.20 0.20 3.00 0.80 1.399

Calcareous...
Load inclination factor iδ is calculated as follows:
If δd < π/4:
If δd ≥ π/4:
Literature:
NF P94-261
Settlement analysis
The settlement of spread footing can be calculated according to the CPT, SPT or PMT tests.
-1344-
The settlement determined from the CPT tests:

• "Schmertmann" method
The settlement determined from the SPT tests:

• "NAVFAC DM7" method
The settlement determined from the PMT tests:

• "NF P94-261"
Schmertmann Method (CPT)

Settlement of spread footing using CPT tests according to Schmertmann theory is based
on the formula:
Where: s - settlement of spread footing

C1 - correction factor for footing depth
C2 - correction factor for creep settlement
σol - stress in the footing bottom
Izi - strain influence factor at the center of the i
th
sublayer
th
sublayer
χ - modulus factor
qci - average value of cone penetration resistance in the i
th
sublayer
Correction factor for footing depth C1 is determined as follows:
Where: σor - geostatic stress in the footing bottom
Correction factor for creep settlement C2 is determined as follows:
Where: tyr - time in years after the application of load
Modulus factor χ depends on the ratio of footing length l and footing width b:
-1345-
l/b = 1 -> χ = 2,5

l/b = 10 -> χ = 3,5
Intermediate values χ are interpolated.
Strain influence factor Iz is located on the horizontal axis of following chart. Depth below the
footing base is located on the vertical axis.
Determination of Iz factor (Schmertmann, 1978)

Diagram of the factor Iz also depends on the ratio of footing length l and footing width b.
For the ratio l/b = 1 maximum value of strain influence factor Izp is in the depth b/2 bellow the
footing bottom and overall settlement is calculated to the depth 2b bellow the footing bottom.
For the ratio l/b = 10 maximum value of strain influence factor Izp is in the depth b bellow the
footing bottom and overall settlement is calculated to the depth 4b bellow the footing bottom.
Maximum value of strain influence factor Izp is determined as follows:
Where: σzp - geostatic stress in the depth of b/2 (for ratio l/b = 1) or b (l/b = 10)
bellow the footing bottom
Strain influence factor Iz is interpolated for intermediate values of ratio l/b (1 < l/b < 10).
Literature:
Schmertmann, J.H. (1970). Static cone to compute static settlement over sand. ASCE Journal
of SoilMechanics & Foundations Division, 96 (3), 1011-1043.
Schmertmann, J.H., Hartmann, J.P. and Brown, P.R. (1978). Improved strain influence factor
diagrams,ASCE Journal of the Geotechnical Engineering Division, 104 (GT8), 113
-1346-
NAVFAC DM7 Method (SPT)

Settlement of spread footing using SPT tests according to NAVFAC DM7 method is based
on the formula:
Where: s - settlement of spread footing

C - footing width factor
σ - stress in the footing bottom
Kv - modulus of subgrade reaction
b - footing width
Cw - GWT influence factor
Footing width factor C is determined as follows:
b < 20 ft -> C = 4
b > 40 ft -> C = 2
Intermediate values C are interpolated.
GWT influence factor Cw is determined as follows:
GWT is located between the terrain level and depth of 1,5.bef bellow the footing bottom:
GWT is located bellow the depth of 1,5.bef bellow the footing bottom:
Where: hGWT - depth of ground water table from the terrain

Modulus of subgrade reaction Kv depends on relative density factor ID:
-1347-
Determination of modulus Kv (Navfac, 1982)

Relative density factor ID is determined as follows:
σzp ≤ 1,5*ksf:
σzp > 1,5*ksf:
Where: N - uncorrected blowcount at a depth of b/2 under the footing bottom

σzp - geostatic stress at a depth of b/2 under the footing bottom
The formula is derived for imperial units [ksf] - the program calculates automatically in the
Literature:
Navfac, 1982
-1348-
NF P94-261 (PMT)
Settlement of spread footing using PMTs according to NF P94-261 method is based on the
formula:
where: s - overall settlement

Ec, Ed - equivalent pressiometric modulus
α - rheological coefficient
q - stress in the footing bottom
λ c, λ d - shape coefficients
B - footing width
B0 - reference width (0,6 m)
Approximate values of rheological coefficient α for soils:
Clay Silt Sand Gravel
Overconsolidated 1 2/3 1/2 1/3
Normally 2/3 1/2 1/3 1/4

consolidated
Non-consolidated 1/2 1/2 1/3 1/4
Approximate values of rheological coefficient α for rocks:
Rocks
Type α
Almost intact 2/3
Normally fractured 1/2
Very fractured 1/3
Very altered 2/3
Shape coefficients λc, λd are interpolated according to the following table:
L/B circle squar 2 3 5 20

e
λd 1 1,12 1,53 1,78 2,14 2,65
λc 1 1,1 1,2 1,3 1,4 1,5
Equivalent pressiometric modulus Ec and Ed are determined according to the pressiometric

modulus measured in layers of B/2 thickness below the foundation bottom.
-1349-
Modul Ec is determined as an average pressiometric modulus in first layer of B/2 thickness

below the foundation bottom.
Determination of modulus Ed depends on overall depth of PMT (dPMT).
Literature:
ČSN EN 1997-2 Annex E
NF P94-261
Menard, L. (1975): "The Menard Pressuremeter: Interpretation and Application of the
Pressuremeter Test Results to Foundations Design", Sols-Soils, No. 26, Paris, France.
-1350-
Pile Group
Analyses performed in the "Pile Group" program can be divided into two groups:
• Analytical solution - calculation of the vertical bearing capacity of a pile group for cohesive
and cohesionless soils and the determination of settlement
• Analysis of a pile group using the spring method together with the determination of
reinforcement of piles
Analytical Solution
Analysis of the vertical bearing capacity of a pile group can be performed for:
• cohesionless soil (analysis for drained conditions)
• cohesive soil (analysis for undrained conditions)
The actual verification analysis is carried out according to the factors of safety or the theory of
limit states.
The verification is performed for the vertical load only. Load due to moments and shear
forces is not considered. To account for horizontal actions of the pile group calls for choosing
the spring method in the frame "Settings".
The analytical methods also allow for calculating the pile group settlement.
Cohesionless Soil (Analysis for Drained Conditions)

The same methods as for the analysis of an isolated pile are used to calculate the vertical
bearing capacity of a pile group:
• NAVFAC DM 7.2
• Effective stress
• CSN 73 1002
The pile group vertical bearing capacity is provided by:
where: n - number of piles in a group

Rc - vertical bearing capacity of an isolated pile
ηg - pile group efficiency
limit states.
Efficiency of a Pile Group

UFC 3-220-01A
• for axial spacing of piles in the group: 3d
• for axial spacing of piles in the group: 6d

La Barré (CSN 73 1002):
-1351-
where: nx -number of piles in the x direction

ny -number of piles in the y direction
ψ -angle having tangent , expressed in degrees
s -axial spacing of piles
d -diameter of piles
Seiler-Keeney formula:
where: nx - number of piles in the x direction

ny - number of piles in the y direction
s - axial spacing of piles
Input efficiency
User-defined input of the degree of efficiency in the range of 0.5 - 1.0.
Literature:
st
Pochman, R.; Simek, J.: Pilotove zaklady - Komentar k CSN 73 1002. 1 edition, Prague,
Unified Facilities Criteria (UFC 3-220-01A): Design of deep foundations - Technical
instructions, Chapter 5-3, 1997.
Venkatramaiah, C.: Geotechnical Engineering. Second edition, New Delhi (India): New Age
International Publishers, 1995.
Cohesive Soil (Analysis for Undrained Conditions)

The bearing capacity of an earth block is provided by:
where: l -length of piles

bx,by -plane dimensions of the base of an earth body in the form of a block
cus -average undrained shear strength along the piles ( )
cub -undrained shear strength at the base of piles
Ncg -cohesion group bearing capacity factor
-1352-
w
h
e for condition:
r
e
:
for condition:
where: bx -minimum width of pile group (shorter layout size of the pile cap)
Note: The earth body is represented by a block with its base given by a plane containing feet
of individual piles and having vertical walls found in the distance of one pile diameter from the
axes of outer piles. This earth block subjected to overall load caused by the pile group resists
by shear along the walls - skin friction and by bearing capacity at its base.
limit states.
Analysis According to the Safety Factor

When performing the analysis according to the factor of safety the program carries out the
verification analysis for a pile group in compression:
where: Rg -vertical bearing capacity of a pile group

Vd -maximum vertical force (including the pile cap self weight)
Wp -self weight of piles (only when the option "Consider the self weight of
pile" is checked)
SFcp -factor of safety for a pile group in compression
Analysis According to the Theory of Limit States

When performing the analysis according to the theory of limit states the program carries out
the verification analysis for a pile group in a cohesionless soil:

n -number of piles in the group
Rc -vertical bearing capacity of an isolated pile (Rb + Rs)
γt reduction coefficient of total resistance
ηg -pile group efficiency
-1353-
pile" is checked)
When performing the analysis according to the theory of limit states the program carries out
the verification analysis for a pile group in a cohesive soil:

pile" is checked)
γt -reduction coefficient of total resistance
When performing the verification analysis according to EN 1997-1 the pile group vertical
bearing capacity in a cohesive soil is reduced by the coefficient of base resistance ( γt = γb).
Pile Group Settlement

Cohesionless soil
The analysis of a pile group in a cohesionless soil is developed based on the linear theory of
settlement (Poulos). The load-settlement curve for a pile group and the value of the total
settlement sg is increased by so-called group settlement factor gf.
An immediate settlement of the pile group increased by the group settlement factor is provided
by:
where: sg -pile group settlement

gf -group settlement factor for a cohesionless soil (according to Pile Buck Inc.
1992)
s0 -settlement of a single pile (determined, e.g. from the load-settlement
curve)
d -pile diameter
bx -minimum width of pile group
Cohesive soil
The pile group settlement in a cohesive soil is determined as the settlement of a substitute
foundation at a depth of 0,67*L, having a width B and a length B'.
Analyses to calculate settlement are described in more detail in "Settlement analysis".
-1354-
Scheme of substitute foundation - settlement of pile group in cohesive soil
Spring Method
The pile group is analyzed using the Finite Element Method. The pile cap is considered as
infinitely stiff. A general load is applied in the center of the cap and can be imported from an
arbitrary program that performs static analysis.
The piles analyzed according to figure:
-1355-
Modeling piles
Four options to model piles are available in the frame "Settings":
1. Floating piles - compute the stiffness of springs from soil parameters
2. Floating piles - input the stiffness of springs
3. Piles resting on the rock subgrade
4. Piles fixed into the rock subgrade
All options require inputting the "Horizontal modulus of subsoil reaction" characterizing the pile
behavior in the transverse direction. Floating piles further require determining the stiffness of
vertical springs. The program allows for back calculation of this stiffness from the available soil
parameters and the typical load. They can be also input directly in the frame "Vertical springs".
Either hinge or fixed-type connection of a pile to the pile cap can be considered.
-1356-
Connecting pile to the pile-cap (selected in the frame "Settings")

The own analysis of structure is performed using the finite element method (FEM). Each pile is
divided into ten elements. For each element the program defines the magnitude of horizontal
and vertical springs. In comparison to an single pile, the stiffness of horizontal and vertical
springs are further reduced for both the inner and outer piles - the horizontal stiffness is
reduced by the coefficients equal to 0,5 and 0,25 for the outer and inner piles, respectively; the
shear stiffness is reduced by the coefficients equal to 0,5 and 0,1 for the outer and inner piles,
respectively. These reductions well represent the real behavior of a pile group. The springs at
the pile-base are not reduced.
Calculation of Stiffness of Vertical Springs

When back calculating the stiffnesses of vertical springs it is necessary to input a typical load
in the frame "Vertical springs" that will serve to the determine the spring stiffnesses. This load
should be selected such as to characterize the structure behavior as close as possible.
The stiffnesses are determined as follows:
1. Typical load is applied to individual piles
2. The stiffness of shear vertical springs distributed along the pile is calculated depending
on the soil parameters.
3. The stiffness of vertical spring at the pile-base is calculated depending on the stiffness
of the subsoil below the pile-base and the depth of influence zone. For tensile piles this
stiffness is equal to zero.
These stiffnesses are further adjusted according to their location in the pile group - the shear
stiffness is reduced by the coefficients equal to 0.5 and 0.1 for the outer and inner piles,
respectively.
Micropile
The program performs verification analysis of micropiles (reinforced by steel tube)
• based on limit states
• based on factor of safety
-1357-
Both the root section and micropile tube (micropile cross-section) are examined for both
cases. When examining the micropile tube the analysis may include excpected lifetime of the
micropile.
Verification Based on Safety Factor

The program performs verification analysis of the micropile tube and root:
Verification of the cross-section (tube)
Both, internal stability of section and coupled section bearing capacity, are verified.
1. Internal stability of section
where: Ncr -standard critical normal force, calculated in dependence on the method
set in the "Micropiles" tab
Nmax -maximal normal force, entered in the frame "Load"
SFf -critical force safety factor, entered in the "Micropiles" tab
2. Coupled section bearing capacity
where: Rs -standard strength of steel, entered in the frame "Material"

σs -stress in steel, calculated according to the way of load (section loaded
only by normal force or by combination of bending moment and normal
force)
SFs -safety factor of section resistance, entered in the "Micropiles" tab
Verification of the root
where: Q -standard root bearing capacity, calculated in dependence on used method

(see "Bearing capacity of the micropile root section")
Nmax -maximal normal force, entered in the frame "Load"
SFr -root resistance safety factor, entered in the "Micropiles" tab
Verification Based on Limit States

The program performs verification analysis of the micropile tube and root:
Verification of the cross-section (tube)
-1358-
Both, internal stability of section and coupled section bearing capacity, are verified.
1. Internal stability of section
where: Nmax -maximal normal force, entered in the frame "Load"

Ncrd -design critical normal force
where: Ncr -standard critical normal force, calculated in dependence on the method
γmf -reduction coefficient of critical force, entered in the "Micropiles" tab (limit
states)
2. Coupled section bearing capacity
where: σs -stress in steel, calculated according to the way of load (section loaded
only by normal force or by combination of bending moment and normal
force)
Rsd -design strength of steel
where: Rs -standard strength of steel, entered in the frame "Material"

γss -reliability coefficient of steel, entered in the "Micropiles" tab (limit states)
Verification of the root
where: Nmax -maximal normal force, entered in the frame "Load"

Qrd -design root bearing capacity
where: Q -standard root bearing capacity, calculated in dependence on used method

(see "Bearing capacity of the micropile root section")
γr -reduction coefficient of root resistance, entered in the "Micropiles" tab
(limit states)
Verification of the Micropile Tube

When calculating the tube bearing capacity (micropile cross-section) the program differentiates
between a micropile loaded in tension or in compression.
-1359-
In case of tension the program determines coupled section bearing capacity (strength of
cement mixture is not considered).
In case of compression the program examines both, coupled section bearing capacity and
internal stability of section, depending on the method set in the "Micropiles" tab.
Coupled Section Bearing Capacity

In the case of coupled section bearing capacity, the micropile tube is examined against the
failure due to load caused by normal force or by combination of bending moment and normal
force.
When determining the coupled section bearing capacity it is possible to involve influence of the
expected life time of the micropile.
Micropile Lifetime
The micropile life time is introduced by reducing the area of the reinforcing tube using the
reduction coefficient of the influence of corrosion of steel tube re and coefficient Fut taking into
account connection of the micropile and the surrounding soil.
where: D -external diameter of reinforcing tube

t -wall thickness of reinforcing tube
Fut -coefficient taking into account connection of micropile and surrounding soil
(0,5 -1,0)
re -coefficient of influence of corrosion of steel tube
Literature:
BS EN 14199:2005 Execution of special geotechnical works. Micropiles British-Adopted
European Standard / 30-Mar-2005 / 52 pages ISBN: 0580457249.
Coefficient of the Influence of Corrosion

Coefficient of influence of corrosion of steel tube re [mm] (based on EN 14199)
-1360-
Type of soil Required life time of micropile [years]
5 25 50 75 100
Soils in natural deposition 0.00 0.30 0.60 0.90 1.20
Soils in natural deposition 0.15 0.75 1.50 2.25 3.00

contaminated
Organic soils 0.20 1.00 1.75 2.50 3.25
Loose soils 0.18 0.70 1.20 1.70 2.20
Special soils (containing 0.50 2.00 3.25 4.50 5.75

soluble salts)
Note: Values of the coefficient of influence of corrosion of steel tube re are for intermediate
values.
Bearing Capacity of Cross-Section Loaded by Normal

Force
Tension normal force
In case of tension force, the stress in steel part of cross section is calculated using following
formula:
where: σs - stress in steel

N - normal force acting in section
As - area of the steel part of the micropile cross-section
Compressive normal force

Bearing capacity of the cross-section in compression, reduced by buckling coefficient, is
determined as:
where: χ - buckling coefficient

As - area of the steel part of the micropile cross-section
Ac - area of the cement mixture part of the micropile cross-section
Rs - design strength of steel
d
Rc - design strength of cement mixture in compression
d
Design strengths are equal to standard values in the verification based on the factor of safety.
-1361-
Design strengths of steel and cement mixture are calculated in the verification based on the
theory of limit states as follows:
where: Rs - standard strength of steel, entered in the frame "Material"

γss - reduction coefficient of steel strength, entered in the "Micropiles" tab
Rc - standard strength of cement mixture in compression, entered in the frame
"Material"
γsc - reduction coefficient for cement mixture, entered in the "Micropiles" tab
The stress in the steel part of the cross-section is determined as:
where: N - normal force acting in section

Nc,u - bearing capacity of the cross-section in compression, reduced by
influence of buckling
Rsd - design strength of steel
Bearing Capacity of Cross-Section Loaded by

Combination of Bending Moment and Normal Force
A cross-section loaded by combination of bending moment and normal force requires the
determination of neutral axis, dividing the cross-section into tensile and compressed part.
When searching the position of neutral axis, influence of buckling is included, i.e. normal force
is increased by dividing it by coefficient of buckling χ. The neutral axis is searched following the
procedure known from the dimensioning of concrete cross-sections, reinforced by steel, as a
limit equilibrium method. Compression is transmitted by a part of a steel tube and cement
mixture filling. Tension is taken by the remaining part of the steel tube, cement mixture in
tension is not considered.
The bearing capacity in bending is determined by the following formula:
where: Rs - design strength of steel

d
As, - area of the tensile part of the steel micropile cross-section
t
As, - area of the compressed part of the steel micropile cross-section
c
-1362-
Ac, - area of the compressed part of the cement mixture cross-section

c
ts,t - location of the center of tensile steel part
ts,c - location of the center of compressed steel part
tc,c - location of the center of compressed cement mixture part
Rc - design strength of cement mixture in compression
d
Design strengths are equal to standard values in the verification based on the factor of safety.
Design strengths of steel and cement mixture are calculated in the verification based on the
theory of limit states as follows:

γss - reliability coefficient of steel, entered in the "Micropiles" tab
Rc - standard strength of cement mixture in compression, entered in the frame
"Material"
γsc - reliability coefficient of cement mixture, entered in the "Micropiles" tab
The stress in the steel part of the cross-section is determined as:
where: M - bending moment acting in section

Mu - bearing capacity in bending
Rsd - design strength of steel
Influence of Buckling
The analysis is preceded by the determination of characteristics of an ideal cross-section, in
which the effect of cement mixture cross-section is transformed into steel. Slenderness of
element is determined as:
where: lcr - element buckling length

i - radius of gyration of the ideal cross-section
-1363-
where: E - modulus of elasticity of the ideal cross-section

I - moment of inertia of the ideal cross-section
Ncr - standard critical normal force, calculated in dependence on the method
Recounted slenderness λp is determined next:
where: Rsd - design strength of steel (in calculation based on factor of safety design
strength is equal to standard strength)

γss - reliability coefficient of steel, entered in the "Micropiles" tab (limit
states)
Buckling coefficient χ is determined according to slenderness λp with the help of following

formulas:
Internal Stability of Section

Internal stability of section examines the failure of a micropile due to buckling into the
surrounding soil. The crucial step for the determination of internal stability of section is the
calculation of the normal force Ncr that depends on the micropile length, the surrounding soil
and other effects. User can choose one of the following solution methods in the "Micropiles" tab
for calculating critical normal force Ncr:
• Geometric method (Euler)
• Salas theory
• Véas-Souche theory
-1364-
Geometric Method (Euler)

The soil surrounding the micropile is represented in the program by the modulus of subsoil
reaction Ep (Winkler constant k) defined by the user in the frame "Verification of cross-
section". A model of a structure is displayed in the figure.
Model of structure
For a micropile in compression it is expected that a varying number of half waves occurs
depending on the geometry and stiffness of the structure and surrounding soil, respectively.
The solution of this case arises from the equation of bending of a straight beam.
After some manipulations the bending equation can be expressed as:
where:
-1365-
Integration constants are found from four boundary conditions depending on the assumed end
point supports.
Assuming hinges on both ends the following equation can be derived:
providing the number of half waves in the form:
where: Ei - modulus of elasticity of ideal cross-section

Ii - moment of inertia of ideal cross-section
lp - micropile length
Ep - modulus of subsoil reaction
n - number of half waves
Assuming hinge on the one side and fixed end on the other side the following equation
holds:
providing the number of half waves in the form:

lp - micropile length
Ep - modulus of subsoil reaction
n - number of half waves
Force Ncr is determined from the following equation by iterations:
-1366-

Ncr - critical normal force
lcr - buckling length of micropile cross-section in compression
Salas Theory
The critical force Ncr for basic support conditions in the micropile head (determining micropile
deflection) follows from:
where: Ea*Ia -bending stiffness of micropile reinforcing tube

l -free length of micropile length
lef -length of fictitious fixed end
A -constat reflecting the type of support in micropile head
where: f -coefficient depending on the ratio of modulus of elasticity of soil in

micropile head and base
le -elastic length of micropile given by:
where: Ea*Ia -bending stiffness of micropile reinforcing tube

El -modulus of elasticiy of soil in the micropile base
Literature:
Jiménez Salas J.A. a kol:Geotecnica y Cimientos III, Capitulo 3, Rueda, Madrid (Spanish).
Constant A Reflecting the Type of Support in the Micropile

Head
Constant A reflecting the type of support in the micropile head
-1367-
Type of support in the micropile head A [-]
Hinged 2.045
Free 0.25
Fixed 4.0
Horizontally movable 1.0
Coefficient f
Coefficient f
Eo / El
1)
[-] f [-]
0 1.70
0.5 1.25
1 1.00
1)
Eo - the modulus of elasticity of soil below terrain surface (at the micropile head)
El - the modulus of elasticity of soil at the micropile root
Véas-Souche Theory
Calculation of the force Nc follows from graphs published by Véas and Souche (see literature).
The graphs for the determination of the critical normal force Ncr are constructed for
dimesionless quatitites ω,m:
where: lP -micropile length

Ea*Ia -bending stiffness of micropile reinforcing tube
ω -ratio of free length of micropile (from beginning of base) and its length in
soil
Erd -design value of modulus of horizontal reaction
where: Er -reaction of soil in horizontal direction

Fw -coefficient reducing the value of Er (Fw = 1.25)
-1368-
Literature:
Véase, Souche: Étude du fla,berment de pieux partiellernent immergés dans offrant
latéralement une réaction élastique pure, Annales de I’ITBTP, No. 423, Sene Soils et
Foundations, 187, mars - avril 1984, str. 38 - 60 (French).
Modulus of Horizontal Reaction of Subsoil

The soil surrounding the micropile can be represented using horizontal springs along micropile
characterized by the Winkler constant kh. For buckling of micropile into the soil in the direction
of the x axis it is possible to write:
where: ph -reaction of soil caused by the displacement of micropile in direction of x

axis (soil in compression)
kh -stiffness of Winkler spring (modulus of subsoil reaction Ep)
x -shift of micropile in direction of x axis
Providing we consider the reaction of soil to pressing of micropile per one meter run of the
micropile we arrive at:
where: Er -reaction of soil in horizontal direction

ph -reaction of soil caused by shift of micropile in direction of x axis per one
meter run of micropile
x shift of micropile in direction of x axis
3
The above equations identify the relation between the modulus of subsoil reaction Ep [kN/m ]
2
and the reaction of soil in the horizontal direction Er [kN/m ] (assuming constant Er in the soil):
where: D -diameter of micropile

kh -stiffness of Winkler spring (modulus of subsoil reaction Ep)
Reaction of soil in the horizontal direction Er can be post calculated based on the knowledge of
the pressuremeter modulus Em.
Calculation of the Modulus of Horizontal Reaction of Subsoil Er

The modulus of horizontal reaction of subsoil can be determined when knowing the
pressuremeter modulus Em and coefficient αp as:
-1369-
kde: Em - pressuremeter (Menard) modulus [MPa]

αp - rheological factor of soil (see the table below)
Reference values Em and Plim
Soils Em[Mpa] Plim [MPa]
cohesionless loose 0 - 3.5 0 - 0.5
medium dense 3.5 - 12 0.5 - 1.5
dense 12 - 22.5 0.5 - 2.5
very dense > 22.5 > 2.5
cohesive slush 0 - 2.5 0 - 0.2
soft 2.5 - 5 0.2 - 0.4
stiff 5 - 12 0.4 - 0.8
solid 12 - 25 0.8 - 1.6
hard > 25 > 16
Values of rheological factor αp for various soil conditions
Type of soil Peat Clay, silt Sediment Sand Sand and

gravel
αp Em / αp Em / αp Em / αp Em / αp
Plim Plim Plim Plim
preconsolida 1 > 16 1.0 > 14 0.67 > 12 0.5 > 10 0.33

ted
normally 1 9 - 16 0.67 8 - 14 0.5 7 - 12 0.33 6 - 10 0.25

consolidated
underconsoli - 7-9 0.5 5-8 0.5 5-7 0.5 - 0.25

dated
Literature:
th
Menard, L. F.: Proceedings of the 6 International Conference on Soil Mechanics and
Foundation Engineering, Montreal, Vol. 2, 1965, pp. 295 - 299 (table 2.29 a 2.30).
Values of the Modulus of Subsoil Reaction Ep

3
Values of the modulus of subsoil reaction Ep = kh [MN/m ]
Soil Ep Min/Max [MN/m ]

3 Average value kh = Ep
-1370-
3
[MN/m ]
soft clay 2-5 3.5
stiff clay 3-8 5.5
solid clay 6 - 16 11
sand naturally wet loose 6 - 13 9.5
sand naturally wet medium 20 - 40 30

dense
sand naturally wet dense 45 - 90 67.5
sand aquiferous loose 4-8 6
sand aquiferous medium 10 - 20 15

dense
sand aquiferous dense 30 - 60 45
sandy clay soft 3-6 4.5
sand clay stiff 5-9 7
sandy clay solid 8 - 17 12.5
clayey sand wet loose 4-9 6.5
clayey sand wet medium 12 - 32 22

dense
clayey sand wet dense 24 - 44 34
clayey sand aquiferous loose 3.5 - 6.5 5
clayey sand aquiferous 7 - 11 9

medium dense
clayey sand aquiferous 11.5 - 13.5 12.5

dense
Bearing Capacity of the Micropile Root Section

The micropile bearing capacity can be determined computationally using one of the approaches
available in the literature and standards. The program "Micropile" provides a set of methods
representing the basic approaches to the solution of bearing capacity of the micropile root. The
analysis is accrued out according to setting in the "Micropiles" tab employing one of the
following procedures:
Lizzi theory - average limit friction on root skin is specified
Littlejohn theory - grouting pressure is specified
-1371-
Zweck theory - method depends on geostatic stress and soil parameters of surrounding
soil
Bowles theory method depends on geostatic stress and soil parameters of surrounding
soil
Véas theory - the way the micropile is built and soil parameters of surrounding soil are
specified
root in rock - rock parameters of surrounding soil are specified
Bustamante - method depends on parameters of SPT or pressuremeter tests (PMT)
Lizzi Theory
The Lizzi method is currently the most popular method used. The root bearing capacity is
provided by:
where: d -root diameter

l -root length
τm -average limit skin friction
J -coefficient reflecting influence of borehole
Coefficient J reflects the influence of the borehole diameter - it ranges from 1.0 for hole up to
100 mm and 0.8 for hole from 200 mm.
Average limit skin friction of the micropile root can be found in the literature. The program
contains three tables with reference values of limit skin friction. The first one is created by the
program authors using various literature sources, the second one contains values of τm
according to DIN 4128, and the third one includes values published in by Klein and Mišov
(Inženýrské stavby, 1984). Third table contains measured values of skin friction of anchor
roots for various soils, root diameters, number if groutings, etc. - using this table yields rather
realistic results.
Literature:
Lizzi, F. (1982). "The pali radice (root piles)". Symposium on soil and rockimprovement
techniques including geotextiles, reinforced earth and modern pilingmethods, Bangkok, D-3.
Skin Friction of the Micropile Root

Reference values of limit skin friction (recommend by the authors)
Soil Skin frition [kPa]
soft clay 40 - 60
stiff clay 65 - 85
solid clay 130 - 170
sand naturally wet, loose 110 - 150
-1372-
sand naturally wet, medium dense 140 - 180
sand maturally wet, dense 170 - 230
aquiferous sand, loose 80 - 130
aquiferous sand, medium dense 120 - 160
aquiferous sand, dense 160 - 200
sandy clay, soft 50 - 70
sandy clay, stiff 75 - 95
sandy clay, solid 125 - 165
clayey sand, wet, loose 90 - 135
clayey sand, wet, medium dense 135 - 165
clayey sand, wet, dense 150 - 170
clayey sand, aquiferous, loose 80 - 105
clayey sand, aquiferous, medium dense 90 - 130
clayey sand, aquiferous, dense 115 - 155
Values of limit skin friction according to DIN 4128
Soil Average limit skin friction
piles in piles in tension

compression [kPa] [kPa]
medium to coarse-grain 200 100

sand
sand and gravel sand 150 80
cohesive soils 100 50
Recommended parameters of anchor roots (Mišove, Klein, Inženýrské stavby 5/1986)
-1373-
Type of support of Final Number Root Root Skin friction

micropile in head of diameter length
grouting [kPa]
groutings
[mm] [m]
press.
[MPa]
bedrock - 0 120 5-3 1000 - 1600
semirock 0.5 - 3.0 0-1 120 - 220 7-3 300 - 1000
gravel, injectable soils 1,0 1-2 250 - 400 7-5 250 - 320
gravel, non-injectable 2.0 - 4.0 1-2 280 - 350 7-5 230

soils
medium and fine-grain 1.5 - 4.0 2-3 220 - 350 12 - 7 150 - 180
sand
cohesive stiff and solid 1.5 - 3.0 1-3 200 - 280 17 - 8 130 - 190
soils
cohesive solid to rigid 1.0 - 2.5 2-3 150 - 400 20 - 9 100 - 130
plastic soils
cohesive soft plastic soils 0.5 - 2.0 3-4 300 - 450 27 - 13.5 50 - 70
Littlejohn Theory
When using the Littlejohn method the root bearing capacity is provided by:

l -root length
pi -magnitude of grouting pressure
It follows from experimental measurements of micropiles that their bearing capacity also
depends on the course of grouting and on the grouting pressure (grouting course often
governs the micropile bearing capacity). The bearing capacity considerably increases with
repeated grouting. Grouting pressures range from 0.1 to 3 Mpa, in some case they may reach
up to 8 Mpa. The Littlejohn method gives the bearing capacity directly proportional to the
grouting pressure.
Literature:
LITTLEJOHN, G. S. y BRUCE, D. A. (1975).: "Rock Anchors - State of the Art. Part 1. Design".
En Ground Engineering, Vol. 8, N° 4.
Zweck Theory
The Zweck and Bowles methods were developed for the analysis of anchor roots - they depend
mainly on the geostatic stress in the location of the micropile root. These methods arise from
the same priciples - the pressure magnitude is however reduced using the coefficient of
-1374-
pressure at rest Ko.

l -root length
Ko -magnitude of pressure at rest
σz -average geostatic stress at the micropile root
φ -average value of friction angle at the micropile root
Bowles Theory
The Bowles solution allows incorporating the influence of the cohesion on the root bearing
capacity - therefore it is more suitable for cohesive soils.

l -root length
Ko -coefficient of pressure at rest
σz -average geostatic stress at the micropile root
φ -average magnitude of angle of internal friction at the micropile root
Literature:
J.E. Bowles - Foundation Analysis and Design, McGraw Hill book Company.
Véas Theory
This solution takes into account the effect of geostatic stress at the micropile root and course
of grouting.
Bearing capacity of the micropile root is provided by:
where: Rbk -bearing capacity of the micropile root

Rsk -skin bearing capacity of the micropile root
Micropile skin bearing capacity:
-1375-
where: n -number of layers passed by the micropile root

Asi -area of wall of the micropile base in the ith layer
qsi -skin friction in the ith layer
Bearing capacity of the micropile root is provided by:
Skin friction qs at a depth of z below the terrain surface:
where: z -depth z bellow the terrain surface, where the magnitude of skin friction is
determined
c -effective cohesion of soil at a depth of z
δ -friction angle along the interfave of the micropile root and the soil at a depth of z:
φ' -effective angle of internal friction of soil at a depth of z

σh(z -horizontal component of geostatic stress at a depth of z:
)
-for grouting course of type IR and IRS (with monitoring of grouting pressure) and
depth z ≥ 5 m:
-other cases:
Ko -coefficient of earth pressure at rest

-for normally consolidated soils:
-for overconsolidated soils:
σv(z -vertical component of geostatic stress at a depth of z
-1376-
)
pi -grouting pressure for grouting course of type IR and IRS and depth
z ≥ 5 m, in other cases pi = 0
Fc, -coefficients of type of application of micropile
Fφ
Literature:
Véase, Souche: Étude du fla,berment de pieux partiellernent immergés dans offrant
latéralement une réaction élastique pure, Annales de I’ITBTP, No. 423, Sene Soils et
Foundations, 187, mars - avril 1984, str. 38 - 60 (French).
Coefficients of Type of Application of Micropile

Coefficients of type of application of micropile
Type of application of Fc [-] Fφ [-]

micropile
Newly constructed 1.50 1.50

foundations
Existing foundations 1.20 1.20
Bearing Capacity of the Root in Rock

This solution is suitable for the mircopile root reaching into rocks with index RQD > 60 or
having the strength in simple compression σc > 20 MPa (ISRM < III). The root bearing
capacity is given by:
where: As -area of wall of micropile root

qsr -skin friction in rock
Ab -area of the micropile root
qbr -bearing capacity of the microple root in rock
Literature:
Guía para el proyecto y la ejecución de micropilotes en obras de carretera, Ministerio de
fomento, 2005 (Spanish).
Skin Friction and Bearing Capacity of the Micropile Root

in Rock
Skin friction in rock qsr and bearing capacity of the micropile root in rock qbr
-1377-
Type of rock qsr [MPa] qbr [MPa]

1)1
Sediments 0.15 - 0.40 0.07σc
Slates and fylits 0.20 - 0.30 0.07σc
Sandstones 0.30 - 0.45 0.07σc
Lime stones and dolomites 0.40 - 0.50 0.10σc
granites, basalts 0.40 - 0.60 0.10σc
1)
σc - strength in simple tension MPa
Bustamante (SPT, Pressiometer PMT)

The analysis of bearing capacity of the micropile root section is based on the results of
standard penetration tests (SPT) or pressuremeter tests (PMT).
The magnitude of skin friction of the micropile root qs [MPa] is available from the graphs
according to Bustamante, which depend on the type of soil and the injection technology.
Shaft resistance of the micropile root Rs follows from:
where: dr -diameter of the micropile root

lr -length of the micropile root
qs -skin friction of the micropile root (value determined from the graph)
Base resistance of the micropile root Rb may not be considered in the analysis or is taken
as:
where: Rs -Shaft resistance of the micropile root
Base resistance of the micropile root Rb is assumed in the program in the form:
where: Ap -croos-section area of the base of the micropile root

kp -soil factor in the vicinity of the base of the micropile root
pLM -limit pressure according to Menard
Skin Friction of the Micropile Root - Graphs

The analysis of shaft resistance of the micropile root Rs depends considerably on the type of
injection of micropile root. The following options of injection are considered in the program:
-1378-
• IRS: repeated selective injection of the micropile root over sleeves performed locally
(Tube-á-Manchette),
• IGU: unified global pressure injection (Looped Tube Systems).
The following graphs for the analysis of skin friction of the micropile root qs [MPa] are built
in the program:
-1379-
The displayed graphs consider on the horizontal axis the limit pressure pLM determined from
the pressuremeter tests (PMT). In case of SPT tests the same graphs are used, but the limit
pressure pLM [MPa] is then determined as the n-multiple of the number of blows N for the
interval of penetration depth d = 0.3 m, i.e. SPT [N/0.3 m]. For individual types of soils the
values of limit pressure pLM according to Menard are as follows:
• sand, gravel, silt and weak rock: pLM = SPT / 20,
• clays: pLM = SPT / 15.
For example, for the sandy soil and the value of the multiple of number of blows SPT = 120 the
limit pressure is given by pLM = SPT / 20 = 120 / 20 = 6.0 MPa.
Next, for example, for the clayey soil and the value of the multiple of number of blows SPT =
30 the limit pressure is provided by pLM = SPT / 15 = 30/15 = 2.0 MPa.
The vertical axis provides the value of skin friction of the micropile root qs depending on the
value of limit pressure pLM and the applied type of injection (IRS or IGU, respectively).
-1380-
Field Testing
The "Stratigraphy" program and some other GEO5 programs use as input parameters for the
analysis these types of field tests:
• CPT - Cone penetration tests - "Pile CPT" and "Spread footing CPT"
• DPT - Dynamic probe test
• SPT - Standard penetration tests - "Micropile" and "Spread footing CPT"
• PMT - Pressuremeter tests - "Sheeting Check", "Anti-Slide Pile", "Micropile" and "Spread
footing CPT"
• DMT - Dilatometric tests - "Spread footing", "Sheeting Check" and "Anti-Slide Pile"
CPT (Cone Penetration Tests)

The cone penetration test (CPT, CPTu) is based on pushing a penetration cone using a
system of penetration rods with constant velocity (20 - 25 mm/s) into the soil. During the
penetration test the values of the cone resistance qc and the local skin friction fs,
respectively are recorded. The cone resistance thus represents in general the resistance
against penetration of a cone spike into the soil (subsoil). The diameter of the tip of cone spike
is typically in the range of 25 - 50 mm.
The cone resistance qc represents the ratio of the measured force on the cone tip Qc and the
area of normal projection of the cone tip Ac.
The local skin friction fs represents the ratio of the measured force on the friction of sleeve
Fs and the area of its skin As.
The result of cone penetration test is its distribution plotted as a graph.
Cone penetration tests (CPT) serve as an input parameter for the analyses in the "Pile CPT"
and "Spread Footing CPT" programs and for stratigraphic modelling in the "Stratigraphy"
program.
The CPT can be imported into the program using the "Import" button. The procedure of an
import of table data (*.txt) is more described herein.
The name of the test and the depth of the first point of the CPT is entered in the "New field
test" dialog window. In the "Stratigraphy" program, input of coordinates x, y, z is required.
The values of measured cone resistance qc are entered in the table.
When calculating the pile bearing capacity according to Schmertmann theory, local friction fs
must be entered.
When performing classification of soils, the values of pore pressure u2 must be entered. If the
pore pressure was not measured (CPTu), it can be calculated from input GWT by pressing
button "Calculate u2".
-1381-

Literature:
EN ISO 22476-1: Geotechnical investigation and testing - Field testing. Part 1: Electrical cone
and piezocone penetration test, 2013.
EN ISO 22476-12: Geotechnical investigation and testing - Field testing. Part 12: Mechanical
cone penetration test (CPTM), 2009.
Roy E. Hunt: Geotechnical Engineering Investigation Handbook, Second Edition (CRC Press,
2005)
Classification of Soils According to Robertson

During classification of soils according to Robertson (1986 or 2010) it is not necessary to input
parameters of soils, the program performs this step automatically with their assignment to the
geological profile. For this reason, the assessment of the performed CPT is very fast and
especially clear.
Classification of soils according to Robertson (1986 or 2010) is based on the measured values
of penetration resistance qc, local skin friction fs, pore pressure u2 respectively. Based on the
corrected value of the cone resistance qt = qc + u2 * (1 - a), or percentage ratio qc /pa and
friction ratio Rf = fs /qt program automatically performs the assignment of soil behavior type
(SBT) according to the following graphs. pa - atmospheric pressure = 100 kPa (= 1 tsf).
-1382-
Non-normalized CPT Soil Behavior Type (SBT) chart according to Robertson, 1986 (source:
Robertson et al., 1986)
Soil classification according to Robertson, 1986 (source: Robertson et al., 1986)
Zone Soil Behavior Type (SBT)
1 Sensitive fine grained
2 Organic material
3 Clay
4 Silty Clay to clay
5 Clayey silt to silty clay
6 Sandy silt to clayey silt
7 Silty sand to sandy silt
8 Sand to silty sand
9 Sand
10 Gravelly sand to sand
11 Very stiff fine grained *
12 Sand to clayey sand *
* Overconsolidated or cemented soil
-1383-
Non-normalized CPT Soil Behavior Type (SBT) chart according to Robertson, 2010 (source:
[4], Figure 21, pp. 26)
Soil classification according to Robertson, 2010 (source: [6], Figure 21, pp. 26)
Zone Soil Behavior Type (SBT)
1 Sensitive, fine grained
2 Organic soils - clay
3 Clay - silty clay to clay
4 Silt mixtures - clayey silt to silty clay
5 Sand mixtures - silty sand to sandy silt
6 Sands - clean sand to silty sand
7 Gravelly sand to dense sand
8 Very stiff sand to clayey sand *
9 Very stiff fine grained *
* Heavily overconsolidated or cemented

A newer classification of soils according to Robertson (2010) contains a smaller number of
individual classes of soils than the original soil classification from 1986. However, the
classification of soils according to Robertson (2010) is now more accurate and more used in
the world.
If it's chosen option "calculate" for unit weight of soil in the frame "Soil Classification", then
the unit weight of soil γ is determined by the following formula:
-1384-
where: γw -unit weight of water (≈10) [kN/m3]
pa -atmospheric pressure (≈100) [kPa]
where: Rf -friction ratio between skin friction and cone resistance
Dimensionless soil unit weight γ/γw based on CPTs (source: [4], Figure 28, pp. 36)
th
Input of the thickness of soil layers influences what is the minimum thickness of layer of the i
soil. In the case of the zero layer of soil there are assigned all layers of soils based on the
soil classification according to Robertson (1986 or 2010) into geological profile.
When is input a non-zero minimum thickness of layer, then the number of layers of soil is
reduced in the geological profile. The layout and number of soil layers affects the vertical
bearing capacity and settlement of pile or spread footing investigated by CPT.
Literature:
[1] EN ISO 22476-1: Geotechnical investigation and testing - Field testing. Part 1: Electrical
cone and piezocone penetration test, 2013.
[2] EN ISO 22476-12: Geotechnical investigation and testing - Field testing. Part 12:
Mechanical cone penetration test (CPTM), 2009.
[3] Robertson, P. K.: Interpretation of Cone Penetration Tests – a unified approach. Canadian
Geotechnical Journal, 2009, No. 46, pp. 1337 – 1355.
[4] Robertson, P. K. and Cabal, K. L.: Guide to Cone Penetration Testing for Geotechnical
th
Engineering. Gregg Drilling & Testing, Inc., USA, 6 edition, 2014, 133 p.
-1385-
Coefficient of Penetrometer (Net Area Ratio)

This coeficient α [-] represents the net area ratio which is determined from from calibration
measurement at laboratory (the effort to eliminate the adverse effects of friction sleeve and
unequal cone tip). Typical values of this coefficient are in the range from 0.7 to 0.85.
Unequal end area effects on cone tip and friction sleeve (source: [4], Figure 20, pp. 22)
Literature:
[1] EN ISO 22476-1: Geotechnical investigation and testing - Field testing. Part 1: Electrical
cone and piezocone penetration test, 2013.
[2] EN ISO 22476-12: Geotechnical investigation and testing - Field testing. Part 12:
Mechanical cone penetration test (CPTM), 2009.
[3] Robertson, P. K.: Interpretation of Cone Penetration Tests – a unified approach. Canadian
Geotechnical Journal, 2009, No. 46, pp. 1337 – 1355.
[4] Robertson, P. K. and Cabal, K. L.: Guide to Cone Penetration Testing for Geotechnical
th
Engineering. Gregg Drilling & Testing, Inc., USA, 6 edition, 2014, 133 p.
Import CPT
The program "Pile CPT", "Spread Footing CPT" and "Stratigraphy" allows for importing the
CPT results in several formats.
The "Import CPT" dialog window contains a table with the list of imported tests. The combo
lists serve to select the type of file and the desired system of units.
*.ods
*.spe - a data format used in Czech and Slovak Republic, originally from the
GeProDo software
-1386-
*.cpt - a text file standard particularly for Netherlands (used e.g., in

programs Geodelft M-Serie), which serves to input elevations of
individual points and values of penetration resistance (may contain
more CPTs)
*.cpt - a text file Geotech AB CPT
*.cpt - a text file Gouda Geo CPT
*.cpt - a text file Hogentogler CPT
*.gef - GEF (Geotechnical Exchange Format) is a general language structure
for storing and transferring of geotechnical information.
https://publicwiki.deltares.nl/display/STREAM/GEF-CPT
*.ags a format used for transferring of geotechnical information in Great
Britain.
http://www.agsdataformat.com/datatransferv4/intro.php
A TXT format allows for selecting a particular system of units to store data of the test. When
importing the program automatically converts the adopted system of units to the one used in
the program.
For a correct calculation the test must be introduced into the soil body - therefore the window
requires us to input an elevation of the original ground. The particular test is then inserted
into the soil body according to its specified elevation. If no elevation is given the origin of the
test is automatically placed on the original ground.
Providing you use a certain standard of a CPT text file not supported by the program, feel free
to contact us at [email protected] - it will be introduced into the forthcoming version.
Dialog window "Import" (cone penetration test)
DPT (Dynamic Penetration Test)

The result of dynamic probe test (SPT) is number of blows N, needed to penetrate a cone
device to the soil or rock by a so called interval of penetration depth.
The Interval of penetration depth differs according to the type of dynamic probe test:
• DPL – dynamic probing light
• DPM – dynamic probing medium
-1387-
• DPH – dynamic probing heavy

• DPSH - A – dynamic probing superheavy
• DPSH - B – dynamic probing superheavy
The interval of penetration depth is 100 mm for DPL, DPM and DPH and 100 or 200 mm for
DPSH - A or DPSH - B tests.
The necessary torque moment to rotation by 1,5 turns or to reaching its maximum value
should be also recorded and writen down at least after each 1,0 m of test. This value serves to
elimination of shear friction.
The result of DPT is its process plotted as a graph. The evaluation of DPTs are used as input
parameters for the stratigraphic modelling in the "Stratigraphy" program.
The results of DPTs can be imported into the program as .txt data.
The name of the test and the depth of the first point of the DPT is entered in the "New field
test" dialog window. In the "Stratigraphy" program, input of coordinations x, y, z is required.
The number of blows and moment is entered in the table.
-1388-

Literature:
EN ISO 22476-3: Geotechnical investigation and testing - Field testing. Part 2: Dynamic
probing test, 2005.
2005)
SPT (Standard Penetration Test)

The result of Standard penetration test (SPT) is number of blows N (penetration
resistance), needed to penetrate a sampling device to the soil or rock by a so called Interval
of penetration depth 0,3 m (1 ft).
The number of blows N measured during the SPT test is correlated for the reason of various
testing devices and for influence of weight of overburden in sands. Corrected (correlated)
-1389-
value N60 is used in calculations.

Correlated number of blows N60 is calculated according this equation:
where: Er -Energetic ratio of testing device

N -number of blows measured during SPT test
CN -correlation for vertical stress
λ -user’s correlation
Energetic ratio of testing device Er represents the ratio of real energy Emeas and the
calculated energy Etheor of the ram. It is not a necessary to use a correlation for a standard
SPT device (Mohr), because efficiency of its machine is 60 % and correlation is performed to
this value (the values measured during SPT test are used).
Correlation CN for vertical stress σ'V - represents the influence of weight of overburden in
sands. The values of the correction factor CN greater than 1.5 should not be used (according to
EN ISO 22476-3 recommendations).
Table of built in types of correlations
Type Type of Relative compactness lp Correlation factor CN

consolidation [%]
Type 1 - EN Normally 40 - 60
ISO 22476-3 consolidated
(Tab. A2)
Type 2 - EN 60 - 80
ISO 22476-3
(Tab. A2)
Type 3 - EN Over- -
(Tab. A2)
Type 4 - EN Normally -
sands
Type 5 - FHWA - -
(1998), Peck
(1974)
where: σ'V - Effective vertical stress
User’s correlation λ [-] - represents the loss of energy due to the length of the system of
rods, the impact of borehole diameter, or the influence of the sampling device.
The result of SPT is its process plotted as a graph. The evaluation of standard penetration
tests are used as input parameters for the analyses in the "Micropile" and "Spread Footing
CPT" programs and for stratigraphic modelling in the "Stratigraphy" program.
-1390-
Standard penetration tests can be imported into the program as .txt data.
The name of the test and the depth of the first point of the SPT is entered in the "New field
The number of blows is entered in the table.

Literature:
EN ISO 22476-3: Geotechnical investigation and testing - Field testing. Part 3: Standard
penetration test, 2005.
2005)
PMT (Pressuremeter Test)

The Pressuremeter test (PMT) consists of pressuremeter probe placed in the tested soil and
gradually filled with water. The subsequent swelling of soil or rock around the hole is
determined as a dependence of the measured volume of water on the pressure increment that
is gradually increased in a priory defined time intervals.
The pressuremeter test provides the following parameters as a function of depth:
• pressuremeter (Menard) modulus Em - is obtained from the pressuremeter test and
depends on the type of sheath of probe (rubber sleeve, perforated casing).
• limit pressure pLM - represents an increment of water pressure in the testing probe
-1391-
depending on the volume change of soil or rock, respectively.

The result of pressuremeter test is its process plotted as a graph. The evaluation of
pressuremeter tests (PMT) are used as input parameters for the analyses in the "Sheeting
Check", "Anti-Slide Pile", "Micropile" and "Spread Footing CPT" programs and for stratigraphic
modelling in the "Stratigraphy" program.
The results of pressuremeter tests (PMT) can be imported into the program as .txt data.
The name of the test and the depth of the first point of the PMT is entered in the "New field
The limit pressure pLM and the Menard modulus Em are entered in the table.

Literature:
EN ISO 22476-4: Geotechnical investigation and testing - Field testing. Part 4: Menard
pressuremeter test, 2005.
2005)
DMT (Dilatometric Test)

The dilatometric test (DMT) is performed by using a dilatometer, which operates on the
principle of verification values by using the displacements of the inductive sensors (with a
sensitivity of up to 0.001 mm). The advantage of these tests is a more accurate description of
displacement and deformation of foundation soil.
-1392-
General Layout of Dilatometer Test (source: [1], Figure 2, pp. 10)

The result of dilatometric test is its process plotted as a graph. The evaluation of dilatometric
tests (DMT) are used as input parameters for the analyses in the "Spread Footing", "Sheeting
Check" and "Anti-Slide Pile" programs and for stratigraphic modelling in the "Stratigraphy"
program.
The results of dilatometric test (DMT) are imported into the program by inserting the file in
format UNI (*.uni). It is a standardized and universal format for import of the measured
data obtained from dilatometric tests, which is used in the world.
The name of the test and the depth of the first point of the DMT is entered in the "New field
The constrained soil modulus MDMT is entered in the table.
-1393-

Literature:
Marchetti, S., Monaco, P., Totani, G. & Calabrese, M.: The Flat Dilatometer Test (DMT) in soil
investigations. A Report by the ISSMGE Committee TC16, University of L'Aquila, Italy, 2001,
48 p.
2005)
EN ISO 22476-11: Geotechnical investigation and testing - Field testing. Part 11: Flat
dilatometer test
Settlement Analysis
One of the following methods is available to compute settlement:
-1394-
• Using the oedometric modulus

• Using the compression constant
• Using the compression index
• According to NEN (Buismann, Ladde)
• Using the Soft soil model
• According to Janbu theory
• Using the DMT (constrained modulus)
The program offers two options to constrain the depth of influence zone:
• Exploiting the theory of structural strength
• Using the percentage of the magnitude of geostatic stress
The theory of elasticity (Boussinesq theory) is employed to determine stress in a soil state in
all methods available for the settlement analysis.
General theories of settlement serve as bases in all the above methods.
When computing settlement below the footing bottom the programs first calculates the stress
in the footing bottom and then determines the overall settlement and rotation of foundation.
The general approach in all theories draws on subdividing the subsoil into layers of a different
thickness based on the depth below the footing bottom or ground surface. Vertical deformation
of each layer is then computed - the overall settlement is then defined as a sum of partial
settlements of individual layers within the influence zone (deformations below the influence
zone are either zero or neglected):
where: s - settlement
si - settlement of the i
th
layer
Stress in the Footing Bottom

The stress in the footing bottom can be assumed as:
• rectangular (uniform in the footing bottom)
• general (trapezoidal) with different edge values
General distribution of stress follows from figure:
-1395-
Stress in the footing bottom

where:
where: Q - vertical load of footing

l,b - footing width and length
eb - load eccentricity
M - moment acting on the footing
H - horizontal force
N - normal force at eccentric footing
p - column axis offset from the footing center
If in some points the stress becomes negative, the program continues with adjusted
dimensions b*l while excluding tension from the analysis. Before computing the stress
distribution due to surcharge the stress in the footing bottom is reduced by the geostatic stress
in the following way:
There are three options in the program to specify the geostatic stress in the footing bottom:
• From the original ground It is therefore considered, whether the footing bottom in the
open pit measured from the original ground is free of stress for the time less than needed
for soil bulking and subsequent loss of stress in the subsoil.
• From the finished grade The same assumptions as above apply.
• Not considered at all.
-1396-
Overall Settlement and Rotation of Foundation

The foundation settlement is substantially influenced by the overall stiffness of the system
represented by foundation structure and foundation soil given by:
where: Ebasic -modulus of elasticity of footing

t -foundation thickness
Edef, av -weighted average of the deformation modulus up to depth of influence
zone
l -footing dimension in the direction of searched stiffness
For k > 1 the foundation is assumed to be rigid and as a representative point for the
determination of its settlement is assumed the characteristic point (distant by 0.37 times
the foundation dimension from its axis).
For k < 1 the foundation structure is assumed to be compliant and as a representative point for
the determination of foundation settlement is assumed the foundation center point.
The foundation rotation is determined from the difference of settlements of center and of
individual edges.
Rotation of spread footing - principle calculation
Influence of Foundation Depth and Incompressible

Subsoil
When computing settlement it is possible to account for the influence of foundation depth
by introducing the reduction coefficient κ1:
-1397-
for strip footing:
for spread footing:
where: d - depth of footing bottom

z - depth under footing bottom
Influence of incompressible layer is introduced into the analysis by the reduction

coefficient κ2:
where: zic - depth of rigid base under footing bottom

Incorporating the above coefficients allows transformation of the vertical component of

stress σz such that the actual depth is replaced by a substitute value zr given by:
where: κ1 - coefficient of footing bottom depth

κ2 - coefficient of rigid base
Influence of Sand-Gravel Cushion

If the sand-gravel cushion is specified below the spread footing, the material parameters X in
individual layers are computed in the following way:
For layer ha,i:
where: Xi - th
material parameters at i layer
Xc - material parameters of sand-gravel cushion
For layer hb,i:
where: Ac - area of sand-gravel cushion

Xc - material parameters of sand-gravel cushion
-1398-
Xb,i - material parameters of b,i layer

bi - th
cushion widths in the i layer
li - th
cushion length in the i layer
Analysis Xi in the sand-gravel cushion
Analysis Using the Oedometric Modulus

th
Equation to compute compression of an i soil layer below foundation having a thickness h
arises from the definition of oedometric modulus Eoed:
where: σz,i - th
vertical component of incremetal stress in the middle of i layer
th
layer
Eoed,i - th
oedometric modulus of the i layer
The oedometric modulus Eoed can be specified for each soil either as constant or with the help
of an oedometric curve (σef/ε relation). When using the oedometric curve the program assumes
for each layer the value of Eoed corresponding to a given range of original and final stress. If
the value of oedometric modulus Eoed is not available, it is possible to input the deformation
modulus Edef and the program carries out the respective transformation.
where:
-1399-

Edef - deformation modulus
Analysis Using the Compression Constant

th
Equation to compute compression of an i soil layer below foundation having a thickness h
arises from the definition of compression constant C:
where: σor,i - vertical component of original geostatic stress in the middle of ith layer
σz,i - vertical component of incremental stress (e.g. stress due to structure

surcharge) inducing layer compression
hi - thickness of the ith layer
Ci - compression constant in the ith layer
The program allows for inputting either the compression constant Ci or the compression
constant C10 (the program itself carries out the transformation).
Analysis Using the Compression Index

th
Equation for settlement when employing the compression index Cc of the i layer arises from
the formula:
where: σor,i - vertical component of geostatic stress in the middle of i

th
layer
eo - initial void ratio
th
layer
Cc,i - th
compression index in the i layer
Analysis According to NEN (Buismann, Ladd)

This method computes both the primary and secondary settlement. When computing the
method accounts for overconsolidated soils and differentiates between two possible cases:
• Sum of the current vertical effective stress in the soil and stress due to external surcharge
-1400-
is less than the preconsolidation pressure so that only additional surcharge is considered.
• Sum of the current vertical effective stress in the soil and stress due to external surcharge
is greater than the preconsolidation pressure so that the primary consolidation is set on
again. The primary settlement is then larger when compared to the first case.
Primary settlement
th
Primary settlement of the i layer of overconsolidated soil (OCR> 1) is provided by:
for: σor+ σz ≤ σp (sum of the current vertical stress and its increment is less than the
preconsolidation pressure):
for: σor+ σz > σp (sum of the current vertical stress and its increment is greater than the

th
layer
σp,i - preconsolidation pressure in the i
th
layer
th
layer
Cc,i - th
compression index in the i layer
Cr,i - recompression index in the i
th
layer
th
Primary settlement of the i layer of normally consolidated soil (OCR= 1) reads:

th
layer
th
layer
Cc,i - th
compression index the i layer
Secondary settlement
th
Secondary settlement of the i layer assumes the form:
for: σor+ σz ≤ σp (sum of the current vertical stress and its increment is less than the
-1401-
for: σor+ σz > σp (sum of the current vertical stress and its increment is greater than the
where: hi - th
thickness of the i layer
Cαr,i - secondary compression index below preconsolidation pressure in the i
th
layer
Cα - index of secondary compression in the i
th
layer
tp - time to terminate primary consolidation
ts - time required for secondary settlement
If we specify the value of preconsolidation index of secondary compression the same as for the
index of secondary compression, the program does not take into account in the computation of
secondary settlement the effect of preconsolidation pressure.
Literature:
Netherlandish standard NEN6740, 1991, Geotechniek TGB1990 Basisen en belastingen,
Nederlands normalisatie-Institut.
Analysis Using the Soft Soil Model

The analysis employs the modified compression index λ and is based on the Soft soil elastic-
plastic model developed in university of Cambridge. The soil deformation assumes the
volumetric strain to be linearly dependent on the change of effective mean stress ε plotted in
th
natural logarithmic scale. The settlement of the i layer is then provided by:
where: σor,i - vertical component of geostatic stress in the middle of ith layer

λ - modified compression index in the ith layer
The analysis requires inputting the modified compression index λ usually obtained from triaxial
laboratory measurements.
If the modified compression index λ is not known, it is possible to specify the compression
index CC together with an average value of the void ratio e (if that is also not know it is
-1402-
sufficient to provide the initial void ratio eo) and the program then performs an approximate
computation of the modified compression index λ using the available information.
Literature:
Burland J.B. The yielding and dilatation of clay (correspondence), Géotechnique, 15 (2),1965,
str. 211-214.
Analysis According to the Janbu Theory

It is based on principles of nonlinear elastic deformation, where the stress-strain relationship is
described by a function of two dimensionless parameters unique for a given soil. The
parameters are the exponent j and the Janbu modulus m. Equations describing the settlement
are obtained by specifying ε from the definition of deformation modulus Et and by subsequent
integration. The program allows the user to compute settlement for the following types of soil:
• Cohesionless soils
• Coarse - grained soil
• Sands and silts
• Overconsolidated sands and silts
• Cohesive soils
• Overconsolidated cohesive soils
Literature:
Method of settlement computation for various types of soils, Soil Mechanics and foundation
engineering, Springer, 7 (3), 1970, str, 201-206.
Analysis for Cohesionless Soils

For cohesionless soils the stress exponent is not equal to zero. For layered subsoil the resulting
settlement equals to the sum of partial settlements of individual layers:
where: σor,i - th
vertical component of geostatic stress in the middle of i layer
ji - th
stress exponent in the i layer
mi - Janbu modulus in the i
th
layer
hi - th
Analysis for Coarse-Grained Soils

For dense coarse-grained soils (e.g. ice soil) the stress-deformation (settlement) relationship is
usually assumed as "elastic", i.e. the stress exponent j is equal to one. Thus for j = 1 and the
-1403-
reference stress σr = 100 kPa the resulting settlement equals to the sum of partial settlements
of individual layers:
where: σz,i - vertical component of incremental stress (e.g. stress due to structure
surcharge) inducing layer compression - i.e. change of effective stress
mi - Janbu modulus in the ith layer
Analysis for Sands and Silts

For sands and silts the stress exponent j receives the value around 0,5, for the reference
stress σr = 100 kPa the resulting settlement equals to the sum of partial settlements of
individual layers. It can be derived from the following formula:
where: σor,i vertical component of geostatic stress in the middle of ith layer
σz,i vertical component of incremental stress (e.g. stress due to structure

mi th
Janbu modulus in the i layer
hi th
Analysis for Overconsolidated Sands and Silts

Providing the final stress in soil exceeds the preconsolidation pressure ( σor+ σz > σp), the
settlement of layered subsoil is found from the following equation:

th
layer
th
layer
mi - th
Janbu modulus in the i layer
mr,i - Janbu modulus of recompression in the i
th
layer
th
layer
If the stress due to surcharge does not cause the final stress to exceed the preconsolidation
pressure (σor+ σz ≤ σp), it is possible to assume the following forms of equations for the
-1404-
computation of settlement of layered sand or silt subsoil:

th
layer
th
layer
mr,i - Janbu modulus of recompression in the i
th
layer
th
layer
Analysis for Cohesive Soils

In case of cohesive soils the stress exponent is equal to zero. For normally consolidated soils
we obtain from the definition of the tangent modulus of deformation (by modification and
subsequent integration) Et equation for the settlement of layered subsoil formed by cohesive
soils in the form:
where: σor,i - vertical component of geostatic stress in the middle of ith layer

mi - Janbu modulus in the ith layer
Analysis for Overconsolidated Cohesive Soils

Most cohesive soils in the original order except very young or organic clays are
overconsolidated. If the final stress in the soil exceeds overconsolidation stress (σor+ σz > σp)
than the settlement of the layered subsoil composites from cohesive soils is computed from
following relation:
for: σor+ σz > σp
for: σor+ σz ≤ σp
where: σor,i - th
vertical component of geostatic stress in the middle of i layer
-1405-
σp,i - th
preconsolidation pressure in the i layer
mi - Janbu modulus in the i
th
layer
mr,i - th
Janbu modulus of recompression in the i layer
hi - th
Settlement Analysis Using DMT (Constrained Soil

Modulus)
Constrained modulus MDMT is defined as the vertical drained confined tangent modulus at
σvo. Modulus MDMT is obtained from dilatometric tests (DMT).
If the value of the constrained modulus MDMT is not available, it is possible to input the
coefficient of volume compressibility mV (determined from the oedometric test) and the
program carries out the respective transformation:
where: MDMT - constrained modulus

mV - coefficient of volume compressibility
The analysis employs the constrained modulus MDMT or coefficient of volume

compressibility mV and is based on Marchetti theory. This approach being based on linear
elasticity, provides a settlement proportional to the load and is unable to provide non linear
predictions.
th
The settlement of the i layer is then provided by:
where: σz,i - th
vertical component of incremental stress in the middle of i layer
th
layer
MDMT - constrained modulus
Literature:
Marchetti, S., Monaco, P., Totani, G. & Calabrese, M.: The Flat Dilatometer Test (DMT) in soil
investigations. A Report by the ISSMGE Committee TC16, University of L'Aquila, Italy, 2001,
48 p.
Theory of Settlement
If the stress change in the soil or in the currently build earth structure, caused by ground
surface surcharge, is known, it is possible to determine the soil deformation. The soil
-1406-
deformation is generally inclined and its vertical component is termed the settlement. In
general, the settlement is non-stationary dependent on time, which means that it does not
occur immediately after introducing the surcharge, but it rather depends on consolidation
characteristics of a soil. Permeable, less compressible soils (sand, gravel) deform fast, while
saturated, low permeability clayey soils experience gradual deformation called consolidation.
Time dependent settlement of soils

Applied load yields settlement, which can be subdivided based on time dependent response
into three separate components:
• Instantaneous settlement (initial)
• Primary settlement (consolidation)
• Secondary settlement (creep)
Instantaneous settlement
During instantaneous settlement the soil experiences only shear deformation resulting into
change in shape without volumetric deformation. The loss of pore pressure in the soil is zero.
Primary settlement
This stage of soil deformation is characterized by skeleton deformation due to motion and
compression of grains manifested by volume changes. If the pores are filled with water
(particularly in case of low permeability soils), the water will be carried away from squeezed
pores into locations with lower pressure (the soil will undergo consolidation). The consolidation
primary settlement is therefore time dependent and is terminated by reaching zero pore
pressure.
Secondary settlement
When the primary consolidation is over the skeleton deformation will no longer cause the
change in pore pressure (theoretically at infinite time). With increasing pressure the grains
may become so closely packed that they will start to deform themselves and the volumetric
changes will continue - this is referred to as creep deformation of skeleton or secondary
consolidation (settlement). Unlike the primary consolidation the secondary consolidation
proceeds under constant effective stress. Particularly in case of soft plastic or squash soils the
secondary consolidation should not be neglected - in case of overconsolidated soils it may
represent app. 10% of the overall settlement, for normally consolidated soils even app. 20%.
-1407-
Primary Settlement
The final primary settlement s is often is often substituted by the term settlement. Most of the
computational approaches can be attached to one of the two groups:
• Linear elastic deformation
• Nonlinear elastic deformation
Linear elastic deformation
The linear stress-strain relationship follows the Hook law:
where: ε - induced deformation of the soil layer

Δσef - induced change of effective stress in the soil layer
E - Young's modulus in the soil layer
The applicability of Young's modulus E of elasticity is substantiated only in cases, in which the
stressed soil is allowed to stretch in the horizontal direction. This, however, is acceptable only
for small spread foundations. When applying the load over a larger area, the stressed soil
cannot, except for its edges, to deform sideways and experiences therefore only a vertical
(one-dimensional) strain related to the oedometric modulus Eoed, that is larger than the elastic
modulus E.
The settlement of a soil layer s is determined by multiplying the deformation of a soil layer ε
by the layer thickness (height) Ho:
where: ε - deformation of the soil layer

Ho - thickness of the soil layer
In case of layered subsoil we get the total settlement by summing up settlements of individual
layers:
where: s - settlement of the layered subsoil

εi - th
deformation of the i soil layer
Hoi - th
thickness of the i soil layer
Nonlinear elastic deformation

For most soils the stress-strain relationship is nonlinear and often influenced by the load
history. This nonlinearity cannot be neglected, particularly when computing the settlement of
fine-grained soils (silts, clays). Clearly, the procedure based on application of Young's modulus
of elasticity is not generally applicable. Even if employing the stress dependent oedometric
modulus of deformation, it will not be possible to receive reasonable estimates of the behavior
of certain overconsolidated soils. Nonlinear elastic deformation is generally modeled using the
void ratio and deformation characteristics derived from one-dimensional deformation of a soil
sample (e.g. compression constant, compression index, etc.).
-1408-
The procedure for the computation of settlement of a compressible saturated soil layer using
the void e is described on the following soil element having the height Ho and the width B = 1
m:
Analysis of settlement from phase diagram

Owing to the fact that the soil is a three phase medium (it contains solid particles and pore
filled with fluid and gas) it is possible to describe the solid particles (rock particles and mineral
grains) by their volume Vs (and assumed to be equal to unity), while the porous phase can be
described using the void ratio e.
The soil element is subjected on its upper surface to a uniform load q causing the change in
stress inside the sample and also the vertical displacement ΔH, which in turn leads to the
reduction of pores Vp and therefore also to the reduction of void ratio (from its original value
eo to a new value e). The vertical strain ε of a soil sample is given by the ratio of ΔH to the
original sample height Ho, and can be expressed using the void ratio e:
where: ε - vertical relative compression

ΔH - vertical deformation
Ho - origin height of the element
s - settlement
e - void ratio
Δe - change of void ratio
-1409-
By modifying this equation we arrive at the formula describing the sample settlement with the
help of void ratio:
where: ε - vertical relative compression

Ho - origin height of the element
s - settlement
e - void ratio
Δe - change of void ratio
Secondary Settlement
To describe a gradual creep of soil during secondary settlement the program employs the
Buissman method (it incorporates the index of secondary compression Cα derived by Ladd).
From observations suggesting that the soil deformation follows a linear path when plotted in
semi-logarithmic scale against time Buissman proposed the variation of ε due to long-term
stress in the form:
where: ε - total deformation

εp - deformation associated with primary consolidation
εs - deformation associated with secondary consolidation
t - time of consolidation
t0 - refereference time
Time dependent variation of strain (primary and secondary consolidation)
-1410-
Consolidation Analysis
Program allows analysis of consolidation when set in the frame "Settings". Consolidated layer,
formed by impermeable, resp. lower permeable soil, subsequently settles with increasing time.
Consolidation affects values of pore pressure. Soil parameters influencing consolidation
analysis are entered in the frame "Soils", other consolidation parameters are set in the frame
"Analysis" in individual construction stages.
Consolidation coefficient, depended on the soil properties, is calculated:
where: Eoed - oedometric modulus of deformation

k - coefficient of permeability
When the consolidated layer is composed from non-homogeneous soil, coefficient cv is

evaluated as average of soil coefficients.
Consolidation analysis is also influenced by time factors, which are depended on the path of
water outflow. This path is equal to the thickness of the consolidated layer in case of only one
direction outflow (upwards or downwards) or half of the thickness in case of both directions
outflow (upwards and downwards). Real time factor is evaluated according to the following
formula:
where: cv - consolidation coefficient

t - real time
H - drainage path
Time factor of build duration is influenced by duration of load action. When the whole load is
introduced at the beginning of stage, build time is equal to zero. When load linearly increases
during stage duration, then build time is equal to the time of stage duration. Time factor of
build duration is calculated by formula:
where: cv - consolidation coefficient

tc - build time
H - drainage path
Degree of consolidation is evaluated by following formulas:

fo
r:
-1411-
fo
r:
w
he
re
:
where: Tv - real time factor

Tc - time factor of build duration
Original value of deformation in consolidated layer in certain construction stage is multiplied by

corresponding degree of consolidation Uav to obtain result value of deformation:
where: εfin - result value of deformation

ε - original value of deformation
Uav - degree of consolidation
Consolidation analysis also influences pore pressure values in consolidated layer. In the time of
introducing the load action, pore pressure values are the highest. When time increases to
theoretical infinity, pore pressure decreases to zero.
Pore pressure:
fo
r:
fo
r:
w
he
re
:
where: Tv - real time factor

Tc - time factor of build duration
H - drainage path
z - depth, where value of pore pressure is evaluated
u0 - change of effective stress compared to previous stage (load)
Literature:
Braja M. Das. Advanced Soil Mechanics; Taylor & Francis: London, 2008.pp278 - 316Verruijt
A. Soil Mechanics, Delft University of Technology, 2010, pp97-123.
http://geo.verruijt.net/software/SoilMechBook.pd.
-1412-
Determination of the Influence Zone Depth

From the theoretical point of view when applying a load on the ground surface we may expect
the change of stress in subsoil into an infinite depth. The soil, however, deforms only up to a
certain depth - within so called influenced zone.
The program offers two options to specify the influence zone:
• Using the theory of structural strength
• By specifying a certain percentage of the primary geostatic stress
Theory of Structural Strength

The structural strength represents the resistance of soil against deformation for a load at the
onset of failure of its internal structure. With decreasing coefficient m the soil responds tends
to be linear.
If the structural strength is accounted for during settlement analysis, then:
a) the influence zone is characterized by the depth below the footing bottom at which the
increment of vertical stress σz becomes equal to the structural strength of soil (determined by
multiplying the original geostatic stress σor by the coefficient m):
where: m - coefficient of structural strength

σor - original geostatic stress
b) when computing the settlement of a layer, the increment of vertical stress σz due to
surcharge and reduced by the structural strength of soil is provided by:

σz - incremetal stress in the middle layer
and the settlement s then follows from the stress denoted in figure by hatching and is given
by:

σz - incremetal stress in the middle layer
-1413-
Depth of influnece zone based on theory of structural strength (area of effective surcharge is
hatched)
Method of Restriction of the Primary Stress Magnitude

If we assume in the settlement analysis the constrains in terms of the percentage of primary
geostatic stress, then:
a) the influence zone is represented by a depth below the footing bottom where the
incremental stress σz reaches a certain percentage of the original geostatic stress:
where: x% - considered magnitude of the geostatic stress

σo - geostatic stress
b) the settlement s is derived from stress value denoted in figure by hatching and it receives
the form:
where: σz - incremetal stress

σor - geostatic stress
-1414-
Depth of influence zone given by constraining the magnitude of primary stress
Characteristics of Settlement Analyses

Depending on the selected solution method the program employs for the computation of
settlement the following characteristics that may differ by the type of experiment needed for
their determination or in the way of representation of measured variables:
• Compression index Cc
• Oedometric modulus Eoed
• Deformation modulus Edef
• Compression constant C
• Compression constant C10
• Void ratio e
• Recompression index Cr
• Janbu characteristics
• Correcting coefficient m
• Modified compression index λ
• Index of secondary compression Cα
• Overconsolidation index of secondary compression Cαr
Compression Index
It describes variation of the void ratio e as a function of the change of effective stress σef
plotted in the logarithmic scale:
-1415-
Void ratio e versus effective stress σef

It therefore represents a deformation characteristic of overconsolidated soil:
where: Δe - variation of void ratio

Δlogσef - variation of effective stress
Range of compression index Cc (Naval Facilities Engineering Command Soil

MechanicsDESIGN MANUAL 7.01)
A typical range of the compression index is from 0.1 to 10. Approximate values for
homogeneous sand for the load range from 95 kPa to 3926 kPa attain the values from 0.05 to
0.06 for loose state and 0.02 to 0.03 for dense state. For silts this value is 0.20.
For lightly overconsolidated clays and silts tested in USA Louisiana Kaufmann and
Shermann (1964) present the following values:
-1416-
Soil Effective Final Compression

consolidation effective index Cc [-]
stress σcef [kPa] stress in the
soil σef [kPa]
CL soft clay 160 200 0.34
CL hard clay 170 250 0.44
ML silt of low plasticity 230 350 0.16
CH clay of high plasticity 280 350 0.84
CH soft clay with silt 340 290 0.52

layers
Prof. Juan M.Pestana-Nascimento (University of California, Berkeley) offers the

following typical values of the compression index Cc:
Soil Compression index Cc

[-]
Normal consolidated clays 0.20 - 0.50
Chicago clay with silt (CL) 0.15 - 0.30
Boston blue clay (CL) 0.30 - 0.50
Vickburgs clay - dray falls into lumps (CH) 0.3 - 0.6
Swedish clay (CL - CH) 1-3
Canada clay from Leda (CL - CH) 1-4
Mexico City clay (MH) 7 - 10
Organic clays (OH) 4 and more
Peats (Pt) 10 - 15
Organic silts and claye silts (ML - MH) 1.5 - 4.0
San Francisco sediments (CL) 0.4 - 1.2
Clay in the old San Francisco Bay 0.7 - 0.9
Bangkok clay (CH) 0.4
In addition, there are empirical expressions available to determine approximate

values of Cc for silts, clays and organic soils; their applicability, however, is more or
less local:
-1417-
Soil Equations Reference
Transformed clays Skempton 1944
Clays Nishida 1956
Brazilian clays Cozzolino 1961

Sao Paulo clays
New York clays Terzaghi a Peck 1948
Clays of low plasticity Sowers 1970
Taipei clays and silts Moh a kol. 1989
Clays Pestana 1994
Oedometric Modulus
If the results from oedometric test are represented in terms of oedometric curve ( Δε = f(Δσef )),
it becomes evident that for each point on the curve we receive a different ratio σef /ε.
Determination of oedometric modulus Eoed

If the stress-strain curve is replaced for a certain interval of two neighboring stresses σ1ef - σ2ef
by a secant line, it is acceptable to assume a linear behavior of soil within this interval and
-1418-
represent the soil compressibility by as Δσef/Δε - called the oedometric modulus of

deformation. The oedometric modulus of deformation is therefore a secant modulus linked to a
certain stress interval σ1ef - σ2ef selected on the stress-strain diagram Δε = (Δσef ):
In general, the oedometric modulus of deformation Eoed tends to decrease its value with the
increasing stress interval. Therefore we should consider for each layer a specific value of Eoed
pertinent to a given stress interval (from original to final stress state). This is reflected in the
program by the way of inputting Eoed, where it is possible to specify for each soil the respective
oedometric curve (σef/ε diagram).
Practical experience, however, suggests (e.g. for clays) a several orders of magnitude
difference between the value of Eoed derived from the deformation modulus Edef and that
provided by the in situ measured loading curve.
The relation between Edef and Eoed is provided by:

Ede - deformation modulus
f
Approximate range of values of oedometric modulus of deformation Eoed for individual

soils and typical stress range (prof. I. Vanicek: Soil mechanics):
Soil Oedometric modulus Eoed

[MPa]
gravels 60 - 600
medium dense sands to dense 7 - 130

sands
cohesive 2 - 30
Literature:
th
Vanicek, I.: Geomechanika 10: mechanika zemin. 3 edition, Prague, CTU, 2000, 229 s., ISBN
80-01-01437-1.
Compression Constant
When plotting the effective vertical stress against the vertical strain in the semi-logarithmic
scale we often arrive at a linear dependency.
-1419-
Detemination of compression constant C

Slope of this curve is one of the soil parameters particularly in case of one-dimensional
deformation and is referred to as the compression constant C:
where: σ1ef - initial effective stress of soil in oedometer

σ2ef - final effective stress of soil in oedometer
Margins of compression constant C (J.Šimek: Mechanika zemin)
Soil Compression constant C

[-]
Loess silt 15 - 45
Clay 30 - 120
Silts 60 - 150
Medium dense and dense sands 150 - 200
Sand with gravel > 250
Compression Constant 10
In engineering practice the natural logarithm with base is sometimes replaced by logarithm
with base 10 when plotting the stress σef. In this case it is common to denote the compression
constant with subscript 10: C10. Since it holds:
-1420-
it is possible to derive a relationship between compression constant C and C10:
Arnold Verruijt (Soil Mechanics) offers the following values of compression constant:
Soil C C10
Sand 50 - 500 20 - 200
Silt 25 - 125 10 - 50
Clay 10 - 100 4 - 40
Peat 2 - 25 1 - 10
Literature:
Arnold Verruijt: Soil mechanics, Delft University of Technology, 2001, 2006,
http://geo.verruijt.net/.
Void Ratio
The void ratio e describes porosity of a soil and is provided by:
where: Vp - volume of voids

Vs - volume of solid grains
Ranges of void ratio e (Braja M. DAS: Principles of Foundation Engineering)
Soil Void ratio e [-]
Poorly graded sand with loose density 0.8
Well graded dense sand 0.45
Loose density sand with angular particles 0.65
Dense density sand with angular particles 0.4
Stiff clay 0.6
Soft clay 0.9 - 1.4
Loess 0.9
Soft organic clay 2.5 - 3.2
Glacial till 0.3
-1421-
Recompression Index
The recompression index Cr is determined from the graph representing the variation of void
ratio e as a function of the effective stress σef plotted in the logarithmic scale for unloading -
reloading sequence:
Determination of recompression index Cr
where: Δe - change of void ratio for the unloading-reloading curve

Δlogσef - change of effective stress for the unloading-reloading curve
If no results from either laboratory or in situ measurements are available, the recompression
index Cr can be approximately derived from:
where: Cc - compression constant
Janbu Characteristics
Values of the Janbu modulus m and of stress exponent j (according Canadian Foundation
Engineering Manual 1992)
Soil Janbu modulus m Stress index

j
Very dense to dense till, glacial 1000 - 300 1

till
Gravel 400 - 40 0.5
-1422-
Dense sand 400 - 250 0.5
Medium condition sand 250 - 150 0.5
Loose sand 150 - 100 0.5
Dense silt 200 - 80 0.5
Medium condition silt 80 - 60 0.5
Loose silt 60 - 40 0.5
Hard to very stiff clay 60 - 20 0
Medium to stiff clay 20 - 10 0
Soft claye silt 10 - 5 0
Soft marine clays 20 - 5 0
Organic clays 20 - 5 0
Peats 5-1 0
Influence of Load History

The load history has a substantial influence on the distribution of deformation curve and
therefore also on the values of deformation characteristics. The following figure displays the
deformation curve (Δe = f(Δσef) diagram) derived from oedometric loading test corresponding,
e.g. to natural dense sandy soil.
Load history a) Deformation curve for clayey soils from oedometric test b) Simplified
interpretation of deformation curve
The soil sample was gradually loaded to reach the stress level σbef, the stress-strain
relationship (σbef - ε) within the section a-b is linear and is denoted as primary or virgin (i.e.,
relative compression is encountered). Upon exceeding the stress level σbef the sample was
elastically unloaded and the soil moved up the b-c section of the deformation curve. Upon
reloading the soil moved down the b-c section till reaching the original stress σbef prior to
unloading. When loading beyond σbef the deformation curve aproaches asymptotically within
the d-e section the primary line accompanied by inelastic deformation of a soil sample. Such a
-1423-
complex stress-strain curve is often simplified by the idealized deformation curve (fig. b). Such
a curve characterizes so called overconsolidated soils, which were in the past subjected large
stresses and subsequently unloaded. The overconsolidation ratio (OCR) then represents the
ratio between the maximum preconsolidation stress the soil has ever experienced and the
current vertical stress. Overconsolidated soils typicaly follow the deformation curve given by
points c-d-e. The change in slope along this line (given app. by point d) corresponds either to
the vertical geostatic stress σo (normally consolidated soils) or to preconsolidation pressure σc
(overconsolidated soils). This point influences the soil deformation, which is smaller within the
c-d section when compared to the d-e section (where for the large degree of overconsolidation
the soil deformation increases). Additional deformation characteristics such as deformation
modulus upon unloading Ee, one-dimensional swelling index Ce, recompression index Cr, etc.
were introduced to describe such a complex soil behavior. Currently the most often used
parameter is the recompression index Cr suitable for the computation of settlement of
overconsolidated soils.
Coefficient m
Correction coefficient of surcharge due to structural strength m determines the structural
strength of soil.
Values of the correction coefficient of surcharge m
Type of fundamental soil m
Very compressible fine soils class F1 -F8 0.1

- with deformation modulus Edef < 4 MPa
- nonoverconsoludated
- soft to hard consistency
(all 3 attributes must be fullfiled),
filling, made - ground
secondary and tertiary sedimets
rocks class R1, R2
fine soils class F1-F8, not belonging to coefficient 0.2

m = 0.1 or 0.4 or 0.6
sands and gravels class S1, S2, G1, G2 under GWT
rock class R3, R4
Sands and gravels class S1, S2, G1, G2 0.3

above GWT
sands and gravels with clay, silt or fine soil admixture
soils class S3, S4, S5, G3, G4, G5
rocks class R5, R6
eluvium of igneous and metanorphic rocks 0.4
-1424-
Modified Compression Index

The analysis employing the Soft soil model builds on the elastic-plastic model developed in the
university in Cambridge. Here, the vertical deformation of soil ε assumes linear dependence on
the logarithmic variation of effective stress in a soil. Application of this model requires an
introduction of the modified compression index λ usually obtained from triaxial tests.
If the modified compression index λ is not available from laboratory measurements, it can be
approximately found from the compression index CC:
where: CC - compression index

e - average void ratio (if this value is not available, it can be approximately
substituted by the initial void ratio eo)
Index of Secondary Compression

The index of secondary compression is proportional to the logarithm of time and the slope of
primary consolidation (it is strongly dependent on the final effective stress in soil):
where: Cα - index of secondary compression

α - deformation of a soil layer
t1 - initial time of a period of monitoring (measured from the start of
consolidation)
t2 - final time of a period of monitoring
Determining the value of index of secondary compression Cα requires either laboratory (e.g.
one-dimensional consolidation in oedometer) or in-situ measurements:
Determination of index of secondary compression Cα

Ranges of values of index of secondary compression Cα
sand 0.00003 - 0.00006
silty loess 0.0004
clay 0.01
The ratio between the index of secondary compression Cα and the compression index Cc is
-1425-
approximately constant for most of the normally consolidated clays for load typical in
engineering practice. Its average value is 0.05.
Variation of natural moisture of soil as a function of the index of secondary compression Cα
derived by Mesri appears in figure:
Variation of natural moisture of soil as a function of the index of secondary compression Cα

after Mesri
1 Whangamarino clay
2 Mexico City clay
3 Calcareous organic silt
4 Leda clay
5 Norwegian plastic clay
6 Amorphous and fibous peat
7 Canadian muskeg
8 Organic marine deposits
9 Boston blue clay
10 Chicago blue clay
-1426-
11 Organic silty clay
Overconsolidation Index of Secondary Compression

The overconsolidation index of secondary compression depends on laboratory measurements
(e.g. one-dimensional consolidation) and is proportional to the logarithm of time and slope of
virgin consolidation line providing the preconsolidation pressure was not exceeded:
where: Cαr - overconsolidation index of secondary compression

ε - deformation of a soil layer
t1 - initial time of a period of monitoring (measured from the onset of
consolidation)
t2 - final time of a period of monitoring
Ground Loss
Analyses performed in the program "Ground Loss" can be divided into the following groups:
• Analysis of the shape of subsidence trough above excavations
• Analysis of failure of buildings
The failure analysis of building is based on the shape of subsidence trough.
Analysis of Subsidence Trough

The analysis of subsidence trough consists of several sequential steps:
• Determination of the maximum settlement and dimensions of subsidence trough for
individual excavations
• Analysis of the shape of subsidence trough
• Back calculation of the shape and dimensions of subsidence trough providing it is
calculated at a given depth below the terrain surface
• Determination of the overall shape of subsidence trough for more excavations
• Post-processing of other variables (horizontal deformation, slope)
The analysis of maximum settlement and dimensions of subsidence trough can be carried out
using either the theory of volume loss or the classic theories (Peck, Fazekas, Limanov).
Volume Loss
The volume loss method is a semi-empirical method based partially on theoretical grounds.
The method introduces, although indirectly, the basic parameters of excavation into the
analysis (these include mechanical parameters of a medium, technological effects of
excavation, excavation lining etc) using 2 comprehensive parameters (coefficient k for
determination of inflection point and a percentage of volume loss VL). These
parameters uniquely define the shape of subsidence trough and are determined empirically
-1427-
from years of experience.
Settlement expressed in terms volumes

The maximum settlement Smax, and location of inflection point Linf are provided by the
following expressions:
where: A - excavation area

Z - depth of center point of excavation
k - coefficient to calculate inflection point (material constant)
VL - percentage of volume loss
The roof deformation ua follows from:
where: r- excavation radius

-
V percentage of volume loss
L
Literature:
http://www.groundloss.com/
Recommended Values of Parameters for Volume Loss

Analysis
Data needed for the determination of subsidence trough using the volume loss method:
Coefficient to calculate inflection point k
-1428-
Soil or rock k
cohesionless soil 0.3
normaly consolidated clay 0.5
overconsolidated clay 0.6 - 0.7
clay slate 0.6 - 0.8
quartzite 0.8 - 0.9
Percentage of volume loss VL
Technology VL
TBM 0.5 - 1
Sequential excavation method 0.8 - 1.5
Several relationships were also derived to determine the value of lost volume VL based on
stability ratio N defined by Broms and Bennermarkem:
where: σ- overall stress along excavation axis

v
σ- excavation lining resistance (if lining is installed)
t
S- undrained stiffness of clay
u
For N < 2 the soil/rock in the vicinity of excavation is assumed elastic and stable. For
local plastic zones begin to develop in the vicinity of excavation, for a large plastic
zone develops around excavation and for N = 6 the loss of stability of tunnel face occurs.
Figure shows the dependence of stability ration and lost volume VL.
-1429-
Literature:
Broms, B.B., Bennemark, H., 1967. Stability of clay at vertical openings. ASCE, Journal of Soil
Mechanics and Foundation Engineering Division, SMI 93, 71-94.
Classic Theory
Convergence analysis of an excavation and calculation of the maximum settlement in a
homogeneous body are the same for all classic theories. The subsidence trough analyses
then differ depending on the assumed theory (Peck, Fazekas, Limanov).
When calculating settlement the program first determines the radial load of a circular
excavation as:
where: σ- geostatic stress in center of excavation

z
- coefficient of pressure at rest of cohesive soil
K
r
The roof ua and the bottom ub deformations of excavation follow from:
where: Z- depth of center point of excavation

r- excavation radius
- modulus of elasticity of rock/soil in vicinity of excavation
E
ν- Poisson's ratio of rock/soil in vicinity of excavation
-1430-
The maximum terrain settlement and the length of subsidence trough are determined as
follows:

- modulus of elasticity of rock/soil in vicinity of excavation
E
ν- Poisson's number of rock/soil in vicinity of excavation
When the tunnel roof displacement is prescribed the maximum settlement is provided by
the following expression:

u- tunnel roof displacement
a
ν- Poisson's number of rock/soil in vicinity of excavation
Analysis for Layered Subsoil

When determining a settlement of layered subsoil the program first calculates the settlement
at the interface between the first layer above excavation and other layers of overburden Sint
and determines the length of subsidence trough along layers interfaces. In this case the
approach complies with the one used for a homogeneous soil.
Next (as shown in Figure) the program determines the length of subsidence trough L at the
terrain surface.
-1431-
Analysis of settlement for layered subsoil

The next computation differs depending on the selected analysis theory:
Solution according to Limanov
Limanov described the horizontal displacement above excavation with the help of lost area F:
where: L - length of subsidence trough

F - volume loss of soil per 1m run determined from:
where: Lint - length of subsidence trough along interfaces above excavation

Sint - settlement of respective interface
Solution according to Fazekas

Fazekas described the horizontal displacement above excavation using the following
expression:
where: L - length of subsidence trough

Lint - length of subsidence trough along interfaces above excavation
Solution according to Peck

Peck described the horizontal displacement above excavation using the following expression:
-1432-
where: Lint - length of subsidence trough along interfaces above excavation

Linf - distance of inflection point of subsidence trough from excavation axis at
terrain surface
Literature:
Széchy, Károly, The art of tunelling, Budapest : Akadémiai Kiadó, 1966.
Shape of Subsidence Trough

The program offers two particular shapes of subsidence troughs - according to Gauss or
Aversin.
Curve based on Gauss
A number of studies carried out both in the USA and Great Britain proved that the transverse
shape of subsidence trough can be well approximated using the Gauss function. This
assumption then allows us to determine the horizontal displacement at a distance x from the
vertical axis of symmetry as:
where: Si - settlement at point with coordinate xi

Smax - maximum terrain settlement
Linf - distance of inflection point
Curve based on Aversin

Aversin derived, based on visual inspection and measurements of underground structures in
Russia, the following expression for the shape of subsidence trough:
kde: Si - settlement at point with coordinate xi

Smax - maximum terrain settlement
L - reach of subsidence trough
Literature:
Széchy, Károly, The art of tunelling, Budapest : Akadémiai Kiadó, 1966.
Coefficient of Calculation of Inflection Point

When the classical methods are used the input coefficient kinf allows the determination of the
-1433-
inflection point location based on Linf = L/kinf. In this case the coefficient kinf represents a very
important input parameter strongly influencing the shape and slope of subsidence trough. Its
value depends on the average soil or rock, respectively, in overburden - literature offers the
values of kinf in the range 2.1 - 4.0.
Based on a series of FEM calculations the following values are recommended:
- gravel soil G1-G3 kinf = 3.5
- sand and gravel soil S1-S5,G4,G5, rocks R5-R6 kinf = 3.0
- fine-grained soil F1-F4 kinf = 2.5
- fine-grained soil F5-F8 kinf = 2.1
The coefficient for calculation of inflection point is input in the frame "Settings".
Subsidence Trough with Several Excavations

The principal of superposition is used when calculating the settlement caused by structured or
multiple excavations. Based on input parameters the program first determines subsidence
troughs and horizontal displacements for individual excavations. The overall subsidence trough
is determined subsequently.
Other variables, horizontal strain and gradient of subsidence trough, are post-processed from
the overall subsidence trough.
Analysis of Subsidence Trough in Depth

A linear interpolation between the maximal value of the settlement Smax at a terrain surface
and the displacement of roof excavation ua is used to calculate the maximum settlement S at a
depth h below the terrain surface in a homogeneous body.
Analysis of subsidence trough at a depth

The width of subsidence trough at an overburden l is provided by:
-1434-
where: L - length of subsidence trough at terrain surface

r - excavation radius
Z - depth of center point
z - analysis depth
The values l and S are then used to determine the shape of subsidence trough in overburden
above an excavation.
Calculation of Other Variables

A vertical settlement is accompanied by the evolution of horizontal displacements which may
cause damage to nearby buildings. The horizontal displacement can be derived from the
vertical settlement providing the resulting displacement vectors are directed into the center of
excavation. In such a case the horizontal displacement of the soil is provided by the following
equation:
where: x - distance of point x from axis of excavation

s(x) - settlement at point x
The horizontal displacements are determined in a differential way along the x axis and in the
transverse direction they can be expressed using the following equation:
where: x - distance of point x from axis of excavation

s(x) - settlement at point x
Linf - distance of inflection point
Analysis of Failure of Buildings

The program first determines the shape and dimensions of subsidence trough and then
performs analysis of their influence on buildings.
The program offers four types of analysis:
• Determination of tensile cracks
• Determination of gradient damage
• Determination of a relative deflection of buildings (hogging, sagging)
• Analysis of the input section of a building
-1435-
Tensile Cracks
One of the causes responsible for the damage of buildings is the horizontal tensile strain. The
program highlights individual parts of a building with a color pattern that corresponds to a
given class of damage. The maximum value of tensile strain is provided in the text output.
The program offers predefined zones of damage for masonry buildings. These values can be
modified in the frame "Stage settings". Considerable experience with a number of tunnels
excavated below build-up areas allowed for elaborating the relationship between the shape of
subsidence trough and damage of buildings to such precision that based on this it is now
possible to estimate an extent of compensations for possible damage caused by excavation
with accuracy acceptable for both preparation of contractual documents and for contractors
preparing proposals for excavation of tunnels.
Recommended values for masonry buildings from one to six floors are given in the following
table.
Horizontal strains (per mille)
Proportional h.s. (per Damage Description

mille)
0.2 - 0.5 Microcracks Microcracks
0.5 - 0.75 Little damage - superficial Cracks in plaster
0.75 - 1.0 Little damage Small cracks in walls
1.0 - 1.8 Medium damage, functional Cracks in walls, problems

with windows and doors
1.8 - Large damage Wide open cracks in bearing

walls and beams
Gradient Damage
One of the causes leading to the damage of buildings is the slope subsidence trough. The
program highlights individual parts of a building with a color pattern that corresponds to a
given class of damage. The maximum value of tensile strain is provided in the text output.
The program offers predefined zones of damage for masonry buildings. These values can be
modified in the frame "Stage settings". Considerable experience with a number of tunnels
excavated below build-up areas allowed for elaborating the relationship between the shape of
subsidence trough and damage of buildings to such precision that based on this it is now
possible to estimate an extent of compensations for possible damage caused by excavation
with accuracy acceptable for both preparation of contractual documents and for contractors
preparing proposals for excavation of tunnels.
Recommended values for masonry buildings from one to six floors are given in the following
table.
Gradient
-1436-
Gradient Damage Description
1:1200 - 800 Microcracks Microcracks
1:800 - 500 Little damage - superficial Cracks in plaster
1:500 - 300 Little damage Small cracks in walls
1:300 - 150 Medium damage, functional Cracks in walls, problems

with windows and doors
1:150 - 0 Large damage Wide open cracks in bearing

walls and beams
Relative Deflection
Definition of the term relative deflection is evident from the figure. The program searches
regions on buildings with the maximum relative deflection both upwards and downwards.
Clearly, from the damage of building point of view the most critical is the relative deflection
upwards leading to "tensile opening" of building.
Relative deflection
Verification of the maximum relative deflection is left to the user - the following tables list the
ultimate values recommended by literature.
Type of Type of Ultimate relative deflection Δ/l

structure damage
Burland and Wroth Meyerhof Polshin a ÈSN
Tokar 73 1001
Unreinforce Cracks in For L/H = 1 - 0.0004 0.0004 0.0004 0.0015

d bearing walls
For L/H = 5 - 0.0008
walls
Cracks in For L/H = 1 - 0.0002 - - -
bearing
For L/H = 5 - 0.0004
structures
Failure of a Section of a Building

In a given section the program determines the following variables:
-1437-
• maximum tensile strain

• maximum gradient
• maximum relative deflection
• relative gradient between input points of a building
Evaluation of the analyzed section is left to the user - the following tables list the
recommended ultimate values of relative rotation and deflection.
Type of Type of Ultimate relative gradient

structure damage
Skempton Meyerhof Polshin a Bjerrum ÈSN
Tokar 73 1001
Frame Structural 1/150 1/250 1/200 1/150

structures
and Cracks in 1/300 1/500 1/500 1/500 1/500
reinforced walls
bearing
walls
Type of Type of Ultimate relative deflection Δ/l

structure damage
Burland and Wroth Meyerhof Polshin a ÈSN
Tokar 73 1001
Unreinforce Cracks in For L/H = 1 - 0.0004 0.0004 0.0004 0.0015

d bearing walls
For L/H = 5 - 0.0008
walls
Cracks in For L/H = 1 - 0.0002 - - -
bearing
For L/H = 5 - 0.0004
structures.
Concrete Structures
Concrete structures can by analyzed according to folowing standards:
• EN 1992-1-1 (EC 2) or EN 1992-2
• CSN 73 1201R
• CSN 73 6206 (only for Abutment)
• PN-B-03264:2002
• BS 8110:1997
• IS 456
• ACI 318-11
• AS 3600-2001
• SNiP 52-101-2003
• GB 50010-2002
-1438-
• NZS 3101-2006
• CSA A23.3-14
• NBR 6118-2014
EN 1992-1-1 (EC2) or EN 1992-2

This help contains the following computationals methods:
• Materials, coefficients, notation
• Standard values of coefficients
• Verification of rectangular cross-section made from plain concrete
• Verification of rectangular RC cross-section
• Verification of circular RC cross-section
• Verification of spread footing for punching shear
• Design of longitudinal reinforcement for slabs
• Design of shear reinforcement for slabs
• Verification of Crack Width
Materials, Coefficients, Notation

The following notation for material parameters is used:
fck - characteristic value of cylindrical compressive strength of concrete
fcd - design compressive strength of concrete
fcm - average value of compressive strength of concrete
fctm average value of tensile strength of concrete
fctk0,05 - lower value of the characteristic tensile strength of concrete
fctd - design tensile strength of concrete
fyk - characteristic tensile strength of steel bar
fyd - design tensile strength of steel bar
The characteristic compressive strength of concrete is the basic input parameter given by the
class of concrete - it serves to derive the remaining coefficients of reliability (Tbl. 3.1).
for: fck ≤ 50 Mpa
for: fck > 50 Mpa
-1439-
Standard values of coefficients αcc, γc, αct, γs are built-in the program - these values can also
be input by the user depending on the selected National annex.
The most common notation for geometrical parameters:
b - cross-section width
h - cross-section depth
d - effective depth of cross-section
z - lever arm (arm of internal forces)
Standard Values of Coefficients

The standard contains a number of coefficients, which can be adjusted in National annexes.
The table provides description of individual coefficients, their values and corresponding artical
of the standard. In some cases the formula contains a variable, which has no symbol in the
standard - in such a case the variable in the expression is denoted by X.
Coefficient Value Annotations Article
γc 1,5 2.4.2.4
γs 1,15 2.4.2.4
αcc 1 3.1.6
αct 1 3.1.6
αcc,pl 0,8 12.3.1
αct,pl 0,8 12.3.1
k 1,5 12.6.3
ρmin 0,0013 9.2.1.1
X 0,26 9.2.1.1
-1440-
ρmax 0,04 9.2.1.1
ρmin 0,002 9.5.2
X 0,1 9.5.2
ρmax 0,04 9.5.2
X 0,18 6.2.2
νmin - 6.2.2
X 0,5 6.2.2
ν - 6.2.2
cotg θmin 1 6.2.3
cotg θmax 2,5 6.2.3
National Annex Czech Republic (CSN EN 1992-1-1 - 2010)
αct,pl 0,7 12.3.1
other values are standard

National Annex Slovakia (STN EN 1992-1-1 - 2008)
all values are standard
National Annex Poland (PN EN 1992-1-1 - 2008)
γc 1,4 2.4.2.4
cotg θmax 2,0 6.2.3

National Annex Norway (NS EN 1992-1-1 - 2004)
αcc 0,85 3.1.6
αct 0,85 3.1.6
-1441-
EN 1992-2 - 2007
αcc 0,85 3.1.6
Verification of Rectangular Cross-Section Made of Plain

Concrete
The cross-section is rectangular, loaded by the bending moment MEd, normal force NEd
(applied in the cross-section centroid) and by the shear force VEd.The shear strength is
provided by (Art. 12.6.3):
where: Acc - compressed area of concrete
Standard value of the coefficient k is built-in the program (Art. 12.6.3) - this value can also be
adjusted in the program based on the selected National annex.
Strength of concrete cross-section subject to the combination of bending moment and normal
force is derived from the following expressions (Art. 12.6.1) depending on the normal force
eccentricity e:
As the greater of:
Formula express the strength with linear stress-strain diagram of cross-section without the
crack.
-1442-
Minimal values of eccentricity are from article 6.1(3).
Standard values of coefficients αcc,pl, αct,pl, γc are built-in the program - these values can also
be input by the user depending on the selected National annex.
Interaction diagram N-M

Usage ratio of concrete cross-section subject to the combination of bending moment and
normal force is determined as |0L| / |0R1| or |1L| / |1R2|. Where L is load, R1 is strength with
prescribed eccentricity and R2 is strength with prescribed normal force.
Verification of Rectangular RC Cross-Section

The cross-section is rectangular, unilaterally reinforced and loaded by the bending moment and
normal compression force. The program verifies a reinforced concrete section using the
method of limit deformation. The maximum allowable strain of concrete in compression is
0.002 to 0.0035. Compression reinforcement is not taken into account. Minimum eccentricity is
applied: (Art. 6.1(3)):
The computed degree of reinforcement is checked using the following expressions (Art.
-1443-
9.2.1.1):
Standard values of coefficients ρmin, ρmax are built-in the program - these values can also be
input by the user depending on the selected National annex.

normal force is determined as |0L| / |0R|. Where L is load and R is strength with prescribed
eccentricity.
Bending without normal force
The cross-section is rectangular, reinforced on one side and loaded by the bending moment
MEd.
The permissible moment for a given area of reinforcements As reads (Art. 6.1, Art. 3.1.7(3)):
-1444-
The limit location of neutral axis is found from (Art. 5.6.3(2)):

xmax = 0.45d for concrete C40/45 and lower
xmax = 0.35d for concrete C45/50 and higher
Shear
First, the program computes the ultimate shear strength of concrete VRd,c (Art. 6.2.2(1)).
where:
If the ultimate shear strength of concrete is exceeded, the ultimate shear strength VRd,max is
checked (Art. 6.2.3(3)).
Next, the necessary reinforcement area is given by (Art. 6.2.3(3)):
Standard values of coefficients ν, νmax are built-in the program - these values can also be input
by the user depending on the selected National annex.
Verification of Circular RC Cross-Section

The program verifies a reinforced concrete pile using the method of limit deformation. The
maximum allowable strain of concrete in compression is 0.002 - 0.0035. Concrete strength
η*fcd is reduced by ten percent due to shape of cross-section (Art. 3.1.7).
The degree of reinforcement is checked using the formula:
• Pile (Art. 9.8.5)
Ac ≤ 0.5m
2 ρmin = 0.005
-1445-
2 2 2
0.5m < Ac ≤ 1m ρmin = 0.0025m /Ac
Ac ≥ 1m
2 ρmin = 0.0025
where: Ac - cross-section area of pile
• Column - check for dominant compression (Art. 9.5.2)
• Beam - check for dominant bending (Art. 9.2.1.1)

As - cross sectional area of reinforcement

-1446-
eccentricity.
Shear
First, the program computes the ultimate shear strength of concrete VRd,c (Art. 6.2.2(1)).
Formulas are from Art. 6.2.2(1), where the section width (bw) is replaced by 0.88*d and
effective depth (d) is replaced 0.8*d.
where:
If the ultimate shear strength of concrete is exceeded, the ultimate shear strength VRd,max and
strength of reinforced section VRd,s are checked (Art. 6.2.3(3)).
Standard values of coefficients ν, νmin are built-in the program - these values can also be input
Verification of Spread Footing for Punching Shear

It is loaded by the prescribed moments MEdx, MEdy and by the shear force VEd provided by:
where: A - area of footing

V - assigned vertical force developed in column
At - hatched area in fig.
-1447-
Dimensioning of shear reinforcement area At

The program constructs control sections at distances "a" from 0,5d to 2d in case of footing
without shear reinforcement. In case of reinforced footing, the distances are from 0,5d to
4d, where d is the effective depth of footing. The shear reinforcement is considered in
control sections, which are in the distance of less than 2d from the column. The control
sections are considered in intervals of 0,25d.
The load stress vEd in each control section is found using 6.4.3 (3),
the punching shear resistance of footing without shear reinforcement vRd,c follows from 6.4.4
(2)
and if necessary the punching shear resistance of reinforced footing vRd,cs is given by 6.4.5
(1).
Furthermore, the compression chord resistance at the column perimeter vRd,max is

calculated according to 6.4.5 (3). vRd,max depends on column dimensions and the footing
thickness.
-1448-
For vEd < vRd,c no shear reinforcement is needed.

For vEd > vRd,c and vEd < vRd,max the shear reinforcement must be introduced.
For vEd > vRd,max the shear reinforcement cannot be designed. It is therefore necessary to
increase the cross-section height.
The control section with the worst ratio of load and resistance is considered as critical and
marked in the program.
Design of Longitudinal Reinforcement for Slabs

The design of reinforcement is performed for load caused by the bending moment MEd. The
program provides the required area of tensile and compressive (if needed) reinforcement. It
takes into account conditions for the minimum and maximum degree of reinforcement in a
given cross-section. First, the program determines the location of neutral axis as (Art. 3.1.7,
Art. 6.1):
Providing the location of neutral axis is less than the allowable one (x < xmax), the program
determines the area of tensile reinforcement Ast from the expression:
Providing the location of neutral axis is greater than the allowable one (x > xmax), the program
determines the areas of both compressive Asc and tensile Ast reinforcement from the
expressions:
The limit location of neutral axis is found from (Art. 5.6.3(2)):

xmax = 0.45d for concrete C40/45 and lower
xmax = 0.35d for concrete C45/50 and higher
9.3.1.1):
-1449-
If the maximum degree of total reinforcement ρmax is exceeded, the program informs the user
that the longitudinal reinforcement cannot be designed for a given cross-section.
Design of Shear Reinforcement for Slabs

The program allows determination of the required amount of shear reinforcement form by
stirrups and bends, respectively.
First, the program computes the ultimate shear strength in a given section - the shear force
transmitted by concrete VRd,c (Art. 6.2.2(1)) and the maximum allowable shear force VRd,max
(Art. 6.2.3(3)).
where:
As for stirrups the necessary reinforcement area is given by (Art. 6.2.3(3)):
As for bends the necessary reinforcement area is given by (Art. 6.2.3(4)):
Verification of Crack Width

Crack width is evaluated according to chapter 7.3.4 of standard.
-1450-
First, the maximal tension stress in concrete is calculated at ideal section. If the stress is less
than concrete tension strength fctm than cracks don't develop.
If not fulfilled than the crack width is determined according to:
where
where σs is stress in tensile reinforcement determined at ideal section with crack
If the distance of reinforcement bar is less or equal than 5(c+ϕ/2):
where: k1 = 0,8
k2 = 0,5
k3 = 3,4
k4 = 0,425
c - cover
ϕ - reinforcement bar diameter
If the distance of reinforcement bars is greater than 5(c+ϕ/2):
CSN 73 1201 R
-1451-

Rbd - design compressive strength of concrete
Rbtd - design tensile strength of concrete
γu - coefficient of the shape of cross-section
Coefficient γu is given by equation (Art. 5.2.2):

he - effective depth of cross-section

Concrete
The cross-section is rectangular, loaded by the bending moment M, normal force N (applied in
the cross-section centroid) and by the shear force Q. The cross-section bearing capacity
subjected to bending moment is given by (Art. 5.2.5):
The shear strength is provided by (Art. 5.3.3, Appendix 9):
force is derived from the following expressions depending on the normal force eccentricity e
(Art. 5.2.5):
for:
-1452-
The ultimate bearing capacity is checket using the following formula (Art. 5.2.5.5):


method of limit deformation (Art. 5.2.8). The maximum allowable strain of concrete in
compression is 0.0025. Compression reinforcement is not taken into account.
3.1.4.3, Art. 3.1.4.6):
-1453-

eccentricity.
Md.
The ultimate moment is provided by (Art. 5.2.7):
The program further checks whether the location of neutral axis x is less than the limit location
of neutral axis xlim given by (Art. 5.2.7.1):
Shear
First, the program computes the ultimate shear strength of concrete Qbu (Art. 5.3.3, Appendix
9).
-1454-
where: for: h ≥ 0.3m is: κq = 1.25

for: h > 0.15m je κq = 1.50
for: h < 0.15m je κq = 1.60
If the ultimate shear strength of concrete is exceeded, the ultimate shear strength Qmax is
checked (Art. 5.3.2.1).
Next, the necessary reinforcement area is given by (Art. 5.3.4):
where (Art. 5.3.5):
The magnitude of c is bounded by the following expression:

The program verifies a reinforced concrete pile using the method of limit deformation (Art.
5.2.8). The maximum allowable strain of concrete in compression is 0,0025. The degree of
reinforcement is checked using the formula:
• Column - check for dominant compression (Art. 3.1.4.3, Art. 3.1.4.6)
• Beam - check for dominant bending
-1455-
As - reinforcement area

eccentricity.
Shear
First, the program computes the ultimate shear strength of concrete Qbu (Art. 5.3.3, Appendix
9).
where: for: 0.88d ≥ 0.3m is: κq = 1.25

for: 0.88d > 0.15m is κq = 1.50
for: 0.88d < 0.15m is κq = 1.60
If the ultimate shear strength of concrete is exceeded, the ultimate shear strength Qmax and
strength of reinforced section Qu are checked (Art. 5.3.2.1).
where (Art. 5.3.5):
-1456-

The program allows to verify spread footing for punching shear or for the design of shear
reinforcement. The critical section loaded in shear Ucr is distant from the column edge by one
half of the footing thickness. It is loaded by the prescribed moments Mx, My and by the shear
force Qr provided by:

Q - assigned vertical force developed in column

The program computes the maximal shear force Qdmax developed in the critical section, the
shear force transmitted by concrete with no shear reinforcement Qbu, and the maximal
allowable force Qmax:
where for: is: or else:
For Qdmax < Qbu no shear reinforcement is needed.

For Qdmax > Qbuand Qdmax < Qmax the shear reinforcement must be introduced. The ultimate
shear force is given by:
-1457-
where: Ucr - critical cross-section span

α - is angle of bends
As - overall area of bends in footing
For Qdmax > Qmax the shear reinforcement cannot be designed. It is therefore necessary to

The design of reinforcement is performed for load caused by the bending moment M. The
given cross-section. First, the program determines the location of neutral axis as:
Providing the location of neutral axis is less than the allowable one (x < xlim), the program
Providing the location of neutral axis is greater than the allowable one (x > xlim), the program
expressions:
The limit location of neutral axis is found from:
The computed degree of reinforcement is checked using the following expressions:
-1458-
If the maximum degree of tensile reinforcement (μst,max = 0.03) or total reinforcement (μmax =
0.04), respectively, is exceeded, the program informs the user that the longitudinal
reinforcement cannot be designed for a given cross-section.

transmitted by concrete Qbu and the maximum allowable shear force Qmax.
where: for: h ≥ 0.3m is: κq = 1.25

for: h > 0.15m je κq = 1.50
for: h < 0.15m je κq = 1.60
As for stirrups the necessary reinforcement area is given by:
As for bends the necessary reinforcement area is given by:
where:
CSN 73 6206
When selecting "CSN 73 6206", frame "Analysis methods", the verification analysis of
-1459-
decisive joints is performed according to the standard CSN 73 6206 "Design of concrete and
steel reinforced concrete bridge structures", including changes a-10/1989 a Z2/1994. The
program allows to verify cross-sections from plain concrete or single-ended steel reinforced
concrete. All calculations related to concrete are carried out using the theory of allowable
stresses.
The main difference when compared to other standards appears in the dimensioning of
concrete joints where the earth pressure is computed always without reduction of input
parameters independently of the input in the frame "Settings".
When performing the verification analysis of cross-sections made either from plain or steel
reinforced concrete it is possible input the coefficient of allowable stress according to art.
47 CSN 73 6206 to increase the material allowable stress.
The following joints can be verified by the program:
Abutment stem - foundation, construction joint - the cross-section can be made either
from plain or steel reinforced concrete. The joint is verified for the load due to normal force
and bending moment. The allowable stresses of concrete, steel and concrete in concentric
pressure are checked. In case of reinforced concrete the program also checks the degree of
reinforcement, cross-sections from plain concrete are then checked for overturning ( h/2e <
1.35) and translation (N*f<1.5); friction concrete-concrete is assumed as f = 0.5).
Closure wall - bearing block - the cross-section is verified for the load due to normal force
and bending moment. The steel reinforced concrete cross-section is always assumed. The
allowable stresses of concrete and steel and the degree of reinforcement are checked.
Wing wall - abutment - the joint can be made either from concrete or steel reinforced
concrete. The allowable stresses of concrete, steel and concrete in concentric pressure are
checked. In case of reinforced concrete the program also checks the degree of reinforcement.
Front jump of abutment foundation - the front jump of abutment is verified according to its
projection. In case of jump projection v < 0.5hz (hz is the height of foundation jump) the
program checks the magnitude of stress in principal tension due to forces developed in the
above-foundation joint. The stress is determined as:
where: d - width of above-foundation joint

M,N - moment and normal force in above-foundation joint
In case of jump projection v > 0.5 hz the jump is analyzed as cantilever bended by the reaction
(stress) of foundation soil. The joint can be made either from concrete or steel reinforced
concrete. The allowable stresses of concrete, steel and concrete in concentric pressure are
checked. In case of reinforced concrete the program also checks the degree of reinforcement.
PN-B-03264:2002
-1460-


fck - characteristic compressive strength of concrete
fctk - characteristic tensile strength of concrete
fyk - characteristic tensile strength of steel bar
fctm - mean tensile strength of steel bar
where: αcc = 1
αct = 1
γc = 1.5 -for reinforced concrete structures
γc = 1.8 -for concrete strustures

where: b -cross-section width
h -cross-section depth
d -effective depth of cross-section
z -lever arm (arm of internal forces)

Concrete
The cross-section is rectangular, loaded by the bending moment MSd, normal force NSd (applied
in the cross-section centroid) and by the shear force VSd. The cross-section bearing capacity
subjected to bending moment is given by:
-1461-
The shear strength is provided by:
where:
force is derived from the following expressions depending on the normal force eccentricity e:
As the greater of:
where:

-1462-

0.002 - 0.0035. Compression reinforcement is not taken into account.
where:

eccentricity.
MSd.
The permissible moment for a given area of reinforcements As reads:
-1463-
of neutral axis xlim given by:
where:
Shear
First, the program computes the ultimate shear strength of concrete VRd1.
where:
If the ultimate shear strength of concrete is exceeded, the ultimate shear strength VRd2 is
checked.
where:
Next, the necessary reinforcement area is given by:

maximum allowable strain of concrete in compression is 0.002 - 0.0035. The degree of
• Column - check for dominant compression
-1464-


eccentricity.

The critical section loaded in shear u is distant from the column edge by one half of the footing
thickness. It is loaded by the prescribed moments Mx, My and by the shear force NSd provided
by:
-1465-


The program computes the maximal shear force NSd developed in the critical section, the shear
force transmitted by concrete with no shear reinforcement NRd1 and the maximal allowable
force NRd,max:
For NSd < NRd no shear reinforcement is needed.

For NSd >NRd and NSd < NRd,max the shear reinforcement must be introduced. The ultimate
shear force is given by:
where: u - critical cross-section span

Asw - overall area of bends in footing
For NSd >NRd,max the shear reinforcement cannot be designed. It is therefore necessary to

The design of reinforcement is performed for load caused by the bending moment MSd. The
-1466-
expressions:
where:
where:

-1467-
transmitted by concrete VRd1 and the maximum allowable shear force VRd2.
where:
where:
BS 8110:1997
• Verification of rectangular cross-section made of plain concrete

fcu - characteristic strength of concrete
fy - characteristic strength of reinforcement
fyd - design strength of steel in tension
-1468-
class of concrete.
All computations are carried out according to the theory of limit states.

Concrete
the cross-section centroid) and by the shear force V.
force with eccentricity e is derived from the following expressions:
where: νc - is the design value of shear stress in concrete for degree of longitudinal
reinforcement ρ = 0 (see: Verification of spread footing for punching shear)
-1469-

normal force is determined as |0L| / |0R1| or |1L| / |1R2|. Where L is loading, R1 is strength with

0,002 - 0,0035. Compression reinforcement is not taken into account. Minimum eccentricity is
applied:
where:
2
- for fy = 460 N/mm
2
- for fy = 250 N/mm

eccentricity.
-1470-
Mu.
of neutral axis xmax given by:
Shear
First, the program computes the ultimate shear strength of concrete Vc.
where:
2 1/3
The νc values are for fcu above 25 N/mm multiplied by (fcu / 25)
If the ultimate shear strength of concrete is exceeded, the ultimate shear strength Vmax is
checked.
where:

maximum allowable strain of concrete in compression is 0,002 - 0,0035.
-1471-
ρmax = 0,04
ρmin = 0,0013 - for fy = 460 N/mm
2
ρmin = 0,0024 - for fy = 250 N/mm

2
ρmax = 0,06
ρmin = 0,004


eccentricity.

The critical section loaded in shear Ucr is distant from the column edge by one half of the
footing thickness. It is loaded by the prescribed moments Mx, My and by the shear force V
provided by:
-1472-


The program computes the maximum shear force V developed in the critical section, the shear
force transmitted by concrete with no shear reinforcement Vc, and the maximal allowable force
Vu:
where:
2 1/3
2
or 5 N/m
where: νu -is ultimate shear stress
For V < Vc no shear reinforcement is needed.

For V > Vcand Vc < Vu it is necessary to design shear reinforcement. The permissable shear
force is given by:
where: u -critical cross-section span
-1473-
α -angle of bends
Aus -overall area of bends in footing
For V > Vu the shear reinforcement cannot be designed. It is therefore necessary to increase
the cross-section depth.

The design of reinforcement is performed for load caused by the bending moment Md. The
expressions:
where:
2
- for fy = 460 N/mm
2
- for fy = 250 N/mm
-1474-
If the maximum degree of reinforcement ρmax is exceeded, the program informs the user that
the longitudinal reinforcement cannot be designed for a given cross-section.

transmitted by concrete Vc and the maximum allowable shear force Vmax.
where:
2 1/3
where:
IS 456
-1475-

fck - characteristic cube compressive strength of concrete
fctk - characteristic tensile strength of concrete
fy - characteristic strength of steel bar
class of concrete - it serves to derive the remaining coefficients of reliability.

Verification of Rectangular Cross-Sections Made of

Plain Concrete
the cross-section centroid) and by the shear force V:
where: τc - is the design value of stress in concrete obtained from table 19 of the IS456
standard for degree of longitudinal reinforcement ρ = 0.
-1476-
force with eccentricity e is derived from the following expressions:
where:


0.002 - 0.0035. Compression reinforcement is not taken into account. Minimum eccentricity is
applied:
-1477-

eccentricity.
The cross-section is rectangular, reinforced on one side and loaded by the bending moment M.
xmax = 0.53d - for steel Fe 250

-1478-
Shear
First, the program computes the ultimate shear strength of concrete Vuc.
where: τc is determined according to table 19 standard IS 456 : 2000.

If the ultimate shear strength of concrete is exceeded, the ultimate shear strength Vuc,max is
checked.
where: τc,max is determined according to table 20 standard IS 456 : 2000.

where:

maximum allowable strain of concrete in compression is 0.002 - 0.0035.

-1479-

eccentricity.

The critical section loaded in shear Ucr is distant from the column edge by one half of the
footing thickness. It is loaded by the prescribed moments Mx, My and by the shear force Vr
provided by:

-1480-

The program computes the maximum shear force V developed in the critical section, the shear
Vmax:
where:
where: cx, cy - are dimensions of footing column

For V < Vc no shear reinforcement is needed.
For V > Vc and V< Vmax it is necessary to design shear reinforcement. The permissable shear
force is given by:
where: u -critical cross-section span

α -is angle of bends
Asv -overall area of bends in footing
For V > Vmax the shear reinforcement cannot be designed. It is therefore necessary to increase
the cross-section depth.

The design of reinforcement is performed for load caused by the bending moment Mrd. The
-1481-
expressions:

xmax = 0.53d for steel Fe 250
If the maximum degree of tensile reinforcement (ρt,max = 0.04) or total reinforcement (ρmax =
0.08), respectively, is exceeded, the program informs the user that the longitudinal
reinforcement cannot be designed for a given cross-section.

transmitted by concrete Vcu and the maximum allowable shear force Vuc,max.
where: τc is determined according to table 19 standard IS 456 : 2000.
where: τc,max is determined according to table 20 standard IS 456 : 2000.

-1482-
where:
ACI 318-11

f'c - specified compressive strength of concrete
Ec - modulus of elasticity of concrete
fy - specified yield strength of reinforcing steel
The modulus of elasticity is provided by (Art. 8.5.1):


Concrete
The cross-section is rectangular, loaded by the bending moment M, normal force P (applied in
the cross-section centroid) and by the shear force Vn.
The shear strength is provided by (Art. 22.5.4, Art. 9.3.5):
-1483-
force is derived from the following expressions (Art. 22.5.3, Art. 9.3.5):
for compression side:
where:
for tension side:
where:

method of limit deformation (Art. 10.3, Art. 10.4). The maximum allowable strain of concrete
in compression is 0.003. Compression reinforcement is not taken into account.
10.5.1):
-1484-

eccentricity.
Mu.
The ultimate moment is provided by (Ch. 10, Art. 10.2.7.3, Art. 9.3.2.1):
Shear
First, the program computes the ultimate shear strength of concrete Vc (Art. 11.2.1.1).
-1485-
checked (Art. 11.2.1.1 + Art. 11.4.7.9).
Next, the necessary reinforcement area is given by (Art. 11.4.7):
where (Art. 11.4.2, Art. 9.3.2.3):

10.3, Art. 10.4). The maximum allowable strain of concrete in compression is 0,003. The
degree of reinforcement is checked using the formula:
• Column - check for dominant compression (Art. 10.9.1)
• Beam - check for dominant bending (Art. 10.5.1)

-1486-

eccentricity.
Shear
First, the program computes the ultimate shear strength of concrete Vc (Art. 11.2.1.1, Art.
11.2.3).
If the ultimate shear strength of concrete is exceeded, the ultimate shear strength Vmax and
strength of reinforced section Vs are checked (Art. 11.2.1.1 + Art. 11.4.7.9, Art. 11.2.3, Art.
11.4.7.2).
where (Art. 11.4.2, Art. 9.3.2.3):

reinforcement. The critical section loaded in shear bo is distant from the column edge by one
force Vu provided by:
-1487-


The program computes the maximal shear force Vu developed in the critical section, the shear
force transmitted by concrete with no shear reinforcement Vc as minimum of values (Art.
11.11.2.1):
where βc is ratio of log side to short side od column.
where αs = 40 - inner column

30 - edge column
20 - corner column
and the maximal allowable force Vmax (Art. 11.11.3.2):
For Vu < ϕ×Vc no shear reinforcement is needed.

For Vu > ϕ×Vc and Vu < ϕ×Vmax the shear reinforcement must be introduced. The ultimate shear
force is given by (Art. 11.11.3.1):
where: bo - critical cross-section span
-1488-
Av - overall area of bends in footing
For Vu > ϕ×Vmax the shear reinforcement cannot be designed. It is therefore necessary to

Providing the location of neutral axis is less than the allowable one (x < xlim), the program
Providing the location of neutral axis is greater than the allowable one (x > xlim), the program
expressions:
where:
-1489-

transmitted by concrete Vc (Art. 11.2.1.1) and the maximum allowable shear force Vmax (Art.
11.2.1.1 + Art. 11.4.7.9).
As for stirrups the necessary reinforcement area is given by (Art. 11.4.7.2):
As for hooks the necessary reinforcement area is given by (Art. 11.4.7.4):
where (Art. 11.4.2, Art. 9.3.2.3):
AS 3600 - 2001

f 'c - characteristic compressive cylinder strength of concrete at 28 days
Ec - mean value of the modulus of elasticity of concrete at 28 days
f 'cf - characteristic flexural tensile strength of concrete
f 'ct - characteristic principal tensile strength of concrete
fsy - yield strength of reinforcing steel
-1490-
class of concrete.
D - cross-section depth
Verification of Rectangular Cross-Sections Made of

Plain Concrete
the cross-section centroid) and by the shear force V.
force is derived from the following expressions:
where:
where: Ag - loaded area

0.002 - 0.0035. Compression reinforcement is not taken into account.
-1491-
where:

eccentricity.
The program further checks whether the neutral axis parameter ku is less than the limit value:
-1492-
where: x - depth of neutral axis

Shear
The program further checks ultimate shear strength:
where:

where: D - pile diameter
-1493-

eccentricity.

The program allows to verify spread footing for punching shear. The critical section loaded in
shear Ucr is distant from the column edge by one half of the footing thickness. It is loaded by
*
the prescribed moments Mx, My and by the shear force V provided by:

-1494-

The program checks, whether the cross-section bursting strength is sufficient according to the
relation:
where:
where: βh - the ratio of the longest overall dimension of the effective loaded area, Y, to
the overall dimension, X, measured perpendicular to Y
a - the dimension of the critical shear perimeter measured parallel to the
*
direction of M v
M v- the bending moment transferred from the slab to a support in the direction
*
being considered
The analysis is carried out independently in directions x and y, as the decisive one the lower
value of Vu is accepted.

-1495-
Providing the location of neutral axis is less than the allowable one (x < ku*d), the program
Providing the location of neutral axis is greater than the allowable one (x > ku*d), the program
determines the areas of both compressive (Asc) and tensile (Ast) reinforcement from the
expressions:
where:
where:

transmitted by concrete Vuc and the maximum allowable shear force Vu,max.
where:
-1496-
where:
SNiP 52-101-2003

Rb - design compressive strength of concrete
Rbt - design tensile strength of concrete
Rsc - design compressive strength of steel
Rs - design tensile strength of steel bar

he - effective depth of cross-section
-1497-

Concrete
the cross-section centroid) and by the shear force Q. The cross-section bearing capacity
subjected to bending moment is given by:
for:

-1498-

0.002 to 0.0035. Compression reinforcement is not taken into account.

eccentricity.
The ultimate moment is provided by:
of neutral axis xR given by:
-1499-
Shear
First, the program computes the ultimate shear strength of concrete Qb.
If the ultimate shear strength of concrete is exceeded, the ultimate shear strength Qmax is
checked.
where:


-1500-

eccentricity.

force F provided by:

-1501-

The program computes the maximal shear force F developed in the critical section, the shear
force transmitted by concrete with no shear reinforcement Fb,ult, and the maximal allowable
force Fult,max:
For F< Fb,ult no shear reinforcement is needed.

For F > Fb,ult and F < Fult,max the shear reinforcement must be introduced. The ultimate shear
force is given by:
where: Vcr - critical cross-section span

As - overall area of bends in footing
For F> Fult,max the shear reinforcement cannot be designed. It is therefore necessary to

expressions:
-1502-

transmitted by concrete Qb and the maximum allowable shear force Qmax.
where:
GB 50010-2010
-1503-

fc - design compressive strength of concrete
ft - design axial tensile strength of concrete
f 'y - design compressive strength of steel bar
fy - design tensile strength of steel bar

h0 - effective depth of cross-section

Concrete
the cross-section centroid) and by the shear force V. The cross-section bearing capacity
subjected to bending moment is given by (Art. D.3):
where (Art. 7.2.4, Art. D.2.2):
The shear strength is provided by (Art. 6.3.3):
force is derived from the following expressions depending on the normal force eccentricity e0
(Art. D.2.1):
As the greater of:
where (Art. D.2.1):
-1504-


method of limit deformation (Art. 6.2.1). The maximum allowable strain of concrete in
compression is 0.002 to 0.0033. Compression reinforcement is not taken into account.
The computed degree of reinforcement is checked using the following expressions (Art. 8.5.1):
-1505-

eccentricity.
α1 = 1 for: ≤ C50
α1 = 0.94 for: ≥ C80, intermediate values are obtained using linear interpolation method (Art.
6.2.6).
The program further checks whether the depth of compression zone x is less than the limit
depth of compression zone ξb*h0 given by (Art. 6.2.7):
β1 = 0.8 for: ≤ C50

β1 = 0.74 for: ≥ C80, intermediate values are obtained using linear interpolation method (Art.
6.2.6).
Shear
First, the program computes the ultimate shear strength of concrete Vc:
For flexural element (Art. 6.3.3):
-1506-
For compression element (Art. 6.3.12):
For tension element (Art. 6.3.14):
checked (Art. 6.3.1).
for h0/b ≤ 4
for h0/b ≥ 6
intermediate values are obtained using linear interpolation method

βc = 1 for: ≤ C50
βc = 0.8 for: ≥ C80, intermediate values are obtained using linear interpolation method.
Next, the necessary reinforcement area is given by (Art. 6.3.4).

6.2.1). The maximum allowable strain of concrete in compression is 0.002 - 0.0033. The
degree of reinforcement is checked using the formula:
• Column - check for dominant compression (Art. 8.5.1, Art. 9.3.1)
for steel strength grade greater or equal to 500 MPa
for steel strength grade greater or equal to 400 MPa
for steel strength grade less than 335 MPa
ρmin is increased by 0.001 for concrete strength grade greater than C60
-1507-


eccentricity.
Shear
First, the program computes the ultimate shear strength of concrete Vc:
For flexural element (Art. 6.3.3, Art. 6.3.15):
For compression element (Art. 6.3.12, Art. 6.3.15):
For tension element (Art. 6.3.14, Art. 6.3.15):
If the ultimate shear strength of concrete is exceeded, the ultimate shear strength Vmax (Art.
6.3.1, Art. 6.3.15) and strength of reinforced section Vs are checked (Art. 6.3.4, Art. 6.3.12,
Art. 6.3.14, Art. 6.3.15).
-1508-
for h0/b ≤ 4
for h0/b ≥ 6
βc = 1 for: ≤ C50

force Fl provided by:


The program computes the maximal shear force Fl developed in the critical section (the
influence of unbalanced bending moment is added according to Appendix F of standard
GB50010-2010), the shear force transmitted by concrete with no shear reinforcement Fc (Art.
6.5.1), and the maximal allowable force Fmax (Art. 6.5.3). The shear forces are related to the
unit length of critical section.
-1509-
βh = 0.9 for h ≥ 2000mm

βh = 1 for h ≤ 800mm, intermediate values are obtained using linear interpolation method.
where βs is the size ratio of long side and short side of action area.
where αs: 40 - for interior column

30 - for edge column
20 - for corner column
For Fl < Fc no shear reinforcement is needed.

For Fl > Fc and Fl < Fmax the shear reinforcement must be introduced. The ultimate shear force
is given by:
where: um - critical cross-section span

Asb - area of bends in unit length of critical section
u
For Fl > Fmax the shear reinforcement cannot be designed. It is therefore necessary to increase
the cross-section height.
Additional check according to article 8.2.9 of standard GB50007-2011 is done for narrow
footing or strip footing.
where:
b0 is average width of footing.

-1510-
given cross-section. First, the program determines the depth of compression zone as (Art.
6.2.10):
Providing the depth of compression zone is less than the allowable one (x < ξbh0), the program
Providing the depth of compression zone is greater than the allowable one (x > ξbh0), the
program determines the areas of both compressive Asc and tensile Ast reinforcement from the
expressions:
The limit depth of compression zone ξbh0 is found from (Art. 6.2.7):
The computed degree of reinforcement is checked using the following expressions (Art. 8.5.1):

transmitted by concrete Vc (Art. 6.3.3) and the maximum allowable shear force Vmax (Art.
6.3.1).
where:
-1511-
for h0/b ≤ 4
for h0/b ≥ 6
intermediate values are obtained using linear interpolation method

βc = 1 for: ≤ C50
As for stirrups the necessary reinforcement area is given by (Art. 6.3.4):
As for bends the necessary reinforcement area is given by (Art. 6.3.5):
NZS 3101-2006

f 'c - specified compressive strength of concrete
fy - lower characteristic yield strength of reinforcing steel
-1512-
class of concrete.

Concrete
* *
The cross-section is rectangular, loaded by the bending moment M , normal force N (applied
*
in the cross-section centroid) and by the shear force V . The shear strength is provided by:
where:
for cross-sections with height smaller than 200mm
for cross-sections with height greater than 400mm
intermediate values are obtained using linear interpolation method.

'
fc is limited to value 50MPa.
Where Nn is determined as the greater of:
'
for fc < 55MPa is α1 = 0.85
for concrete with greater strength is
-1513-


0.003. Compression reinforcement is not taken into account.
-1514-

eccentricity.
*
M .
The ultimate moment is provided by:
'
for fc < 55 MPa is α1 = 0.85
'
for fc < 30 MPa is β1 = 0.85
The program further checks whether the location of neutral axis c is less than the limit location
of neutral axis 0.75*cb given by:
-1515-
Shear
where:
for cross-sections with height smaller than 200 mm
vc is computed acording to following formulas for cross-sections with height greater than 400
mm, intermediate values are obtained using linear interpolation method.
'
where ρw is degree of reinforcement and fc is limited to value 50 MPa.
checked.

maximum allowable strain of concrete in compression is 0.003.
• Pile
Ag < 0.5m
2 ρmin = 2.4 / fy
-1516-
Ag > 2m
2 ρmin = 1.2 / fy
where: Ag - cross-section area of pile
intermediate values are calculated according to:


-1517-
eccentricity.
Shear
where:
vc is computed acording to following formulas for cross-sections with height greater than
400mm, intermediate values are obtained using linear interpolation method.
'
where ρw is degree of reinforcement and fc is limited to value 50 MPa.
strength of reinforced section Vs are checked.

* *
half of the footing thickness. It is loaded by the prescribed moments M x, M y and by the shear
*
force V provided by:

-1518-

*
The program computes the maximal shear force V developed in the critical section, the shear
Vmax:
where:
where αs: 20 - for interior column

15 - for edge column
10 - for corner column
βc c is the ratio of the long side to the short side of the critical section
*
For V < ϕVc no shear reinforcement is needed.
* *
For V > ϕVc and V < ϕVmax the shear reinforcement must be introduced. The ultimate shear
force is given by:

*
For V > ϕVmax the shear reinforcement cannot be designed. It is therefore necessary to
-1519-

*
The design of reinforcement is performed for load caused by the bending moment M . The
Providing the location of neutral axis is less than the allowable one (c < 0.75cb), the program
Providing the location of neutral axis is greater than the allowable one (c > 0.75cb), the
program determines the areas of both compressive Asc and tensile Ast reinforcement from the
expressions:

transmitted by concrete Vc and the maximum allowable shear force Vmax.
where:
-1520-
vc is computed acording to following formulas for cross-sections with height greater than
400mm, intermediate values are obtained using linear interpolation method.
'
where ρw is degree of reinforcement and fc is limited to value 50MPa.
CSA A23.3-14

f 'c - specified compressive strength of concrete
fr - modulus of rupture of concrete
fy - specified yield strength of reinforcing steel
-1521-


Concrete
The cross-section is rectangular, loaded by the bending moment Mf, normal force Pf (applied in
the cross-section centroid) and by the shear force Vf. The cross-section bearing capacity
where (Art. 8.4.2, Art. 8.6.4):
The shear strength is provided by (Art. 22.6.5):
where:
force is derived from the following expressions depending on the normal force eccentricity e ≥
0.1h (Art. 22.6.5):
As the greater of:
where (Art. 8.4.2):
-1522-


method of limit deformation (Art. 10.1). The maximum allowable strain of concrete in
compression is 0.0035. Compression reinforcement is not taken into account.
10.5.1.2):
-1523-

eccentricity.
The cross-section is rectangular, reinforced on one side and loaded by the bending moment Mf.
The ultimate moment is provided by (Art. 10.1.7, 8.4.2, 8.4.3):
The program further checks whether the location of neutral axis c is less than the limit location
of neutral axis cmax given by (Art. 10.5.2):
Shear
First, the program computes the ultimate shear strength of concrete Vc (Art. 11.3.4):
-1524-
where
checked (Art. 11.3.3):
Next, the necessary reinforcement area is given by (Art. 11.3.5.1):

The program verifies a reinforced concrete pile using the method of limit deformation (Art
10.1). The maximum allowable strain of concrete in compression is 0.0035.
• Column - check for dominant compression (Art. 10.9.1, 10.9.2)

-1525-

eccentricity.
Shear
First, the program computes the ultimate shear strength of concrete Vc. Formulas are from Art.
11.3.4, where the section width (b) is replaced by 0.88d and effective depth (dv) is replaced
0.8*0.9d.
where
strength of reinforced section Vs are checked (Art. 11.5.1).

force Vf provided by:
-1526-


The program computes the maximal shear force Vf developed in the critical section, the shear
force transmitted by concrete with no shear reinforcement Vc as minimum of values (Art.
13.3.4.1):
where βc is ratio of log side to short side od column.
where αs = 4 - inner column

3 - edge column
2 - corner column
where
and the maximal allowable force Vmax (Art. 13.3.9.2):
For Vf < Vc no shear reinforcement is needed.

For Vf > Vc and Vf < Vmax the shear reinforcement must be introduced. The ultimate shear force
is given by (Art. 13.3.9.4):
-1527-

For Vf > Vmax the shear reinforcement cannot be designed. It is therefore necessary to increase

The design of reinforcement is performed for load caused by the bending moment Mf. The
given cross-section. First, the program determines the location of neutral axis as (Art 10.1):
Providing the location of neutral axis is less than the allowable one (cmax), the program
Providing the location of neutral axis is greater than the allowable one (cmax), the program
expressions:
The limit location of neutral axis cmax is found from (Art. 10.5.2):
10.5.1.2):
-1528-

transmitted by concrete Vc (Art. 11.3.4) and the maximum allowable shear force Vmax (Art.
11.3.3).
where:
As for bends the necessary reinforcement area is given by (Art. 11.3.5.1):
NBR 6118-2014

fck - characteristic value of cylindrical compressive strength of concrete
fctm average value of tensile strength of concrete
fctd - design axial tensile strength of concrete
-1529-
fyk - characteristic tension strength of steel bar

fyd - design tension strength of steel bar
class of concrete - it serves to derive the remaining coefficients of reliability (Ch. 8.2).
for fck ≤ 50 MPa
for fck > 50 MPa
for fck ≤ 50 MPa
for fck > 50 MPa


Concrete
The cross-section is rectangular, loaded by the bending moment MSd, normal force NSd (applied
in the cross-section centroid) and by the shear force VSd. The cross-section bearing capacity
where:
The shear strength is provided by (Art. 24.5.2.3, 24.5.5.1):
-1530-
where: Acc - compressed area of concrete
force is derived from the following expressions depending on the normal force eccentricity e
(Art. 24.5.2):
As the greater of:
where:

-1531-

method of limit deformation (Art. 17.2). The maximum allowable strain of concrete in
compression is 0.0035 (Art. 8.2.10.1). Compression reinforcement is not taken into account.
17.3.5.2.1, 17.3.5.2.4, ρmin taken from table 17.3):

eccentricity.
MSd.
-1532-
Shear
First, the program computes the ultimate shear strength of concrete VRd1 (Art. 17.4.2.2 -
Model I):
where
If the ultimate shear strength of concrete is exceeded, the ultimate shear strength VRd2 is
checked (Art. 17.4.2.2):
Next, the necessary reinforcement area is given by (Art. 17.4.2.2):

The program verifies a reinforced concrete pile using the method of limit deformation (Art
17.2). The maximum allowable strain of concrete in compression is 0,0035.
• Column - check for dominant compression (Art. 17.3.5.3)
• Beam - check for dominant bending (Art. 17.3.5.2)
ρmin obrained from table 17.3.
-1533-


excentricity.
Shear
First, the program computes the ultimate shear strength of concrete VRd1. Formulas are from
Art. 17.4.2.2 - Model I, where the section width (bw) is replaced by 0.88×d and effective depth
(d) is replaced 0.8×0.9×d.
where
strength of reinforced section Vs are checked (Art. 17.4.2.2).
-1534-

It is loaded by the prescribed moments MSdx, MSdy and by the shear force FSd provided by:


The program constructs control sections at distances "a" from 0,5d to 2d in case of footing
without shear reinforcement. In case of reinforced footing, the distances are from 0,5d to
4d, where d is the effective depth of footing. The shear reinforcement is considered in
control sections, which are in the distance of less than 2d from the column. The control
sections are considered in intervals of 0,25d.
The load stress τSd in each control section is found using 19.5.2,
K is obtained from table 19.2

the punching shear resistance of footing without shear reinforcement τRd1 follows from
19.5.3.2
and if necessary the punching shear resistance of reinforced footing τRd3 is given by 19.4.2,
15.5.4.
-1535-
Furthermore, the compression chord resistance at the column perimeter τRd2 is calculated
according to 19.5.3.1. τRd2 depends on column dimensions and the footing thickness.
For τSd < τRd1 no shear reinforcement is needed.

For τSd > τRd1 and τSd < τRd2 the shear reinforcement must be introduced.
For τSd > τRd2 the shear reinforcement cannot be designed. It is therefore necessary to increase
The control section with the worst ratio of load and resistance is considered as critical and
marked in the program.

The design of reinforcement is performed for load caused by the bending moment MSd. The
given cross-section. First, the program determines the location of neutral axis as (Art 17.2):
Providing the location of neutral axis is less than the allowable one (xmax), the program
Providing the location of neutral axis is greater than the allowable one (xmax), the program
expressions:
The limit location of neutral axis xmax is found from:
-1536-
10.5.1.2):

transmitted by concrete VRd1 (Art. 17.4.2.2 - Model I ) and the maximum allowable shear force
VRd2 (Art. 17.4.2.2).
where:
As for bends the necessary reinforcement area is given by (Art. 17.4.2.2):
Steel Cross-Sections Verification

Verification of steel cross-sections is carried out for two cases of load:
1. for the maximum value of bending moment and the corresponding shear force ( Mmax +
Q)
2. for the maximum shear force and the corresponding bending moment (Qmax + M)
In both cases, the load enters to the assessment with an influence of normal force, which is
-1537-
defined separately. Its value is identical for both of load cases. Internal forces are, prior to
analysis, pre-multiplied by the reduction coefficient of bearing capacity. This coefficient
represents the degree of uncertainty of the determination of theoretical values of internal
forces and as thus introduces into the analysis with such values certain reliability. The value of
this coefficient is determined solely by the user.
The "Sheeting Check" program exploits following types of analyses for steel cross section
check:
• Verification according to EN 1993-1-1 (EC 3)
• Verification according to CSN 73 1401
• Verification according to safety factor
• Verification according to GB 50017-2003
Each cross-section is checked for three types of load:
1. Check for bending moment and normal force
The analysis checks the normal stress σ developed at the edge of cross-section given by:
where: M - bending moment

W - elastic modulus of cross-section
N - normal force
A - area of cross-section
2. Check for shear

The analysis checks the shear stress τ at the cross-section center of gravity written as:
where: Q - shear force

S - 1st moment of area
I - moment of inertia
t - width (thickness) of cross-section at its center of gravity
3. Check for state of plane stress for the combination of stresses σ1 and τ1 at the
point of critical load
Equivalent stress for plane stress conditions is defined as:
All verifications are carried out assuming elastic response of the material, plasticity is not
taken into consideration.
Verification of steel I-profiles
Internal forces provide by the "Sheeting Check" program are considered per 1 m run of the
structure width. Therefore, the units of shear force Q are kN/m and of bending moments M are
-1538-
kNm/m. For dimensioning of individual I-profiles these forces are, prior to verification analysis,
automatically multiplied by their spacing a [m] to get their values at the cross-section center of
gravity, i.e. shear force Q in kN and bending moment M in kNm. The normal stress σ is checked
at the outer face of flange. The shear stress τ is checked at the center of gravity, thus at the
center of web height. The equivalent stress σk is checked in the web at the flange-web
connection (cut 1).
Verification of sheet pile wall
The verification analysis is carried out for a wall section of a unit length. All cross-sectional
parameters are therefore determined not for individual sheet piles, but for a wall section of a
unit length. The normal stress σ is checked at the outer face of back of sheet piles. The shear
stress τ is checked at the web center of gravity, thus for sheet piles of U shape at the location
of locks and for sheet piles of Z shape at the center of inclined sheet pile webs. The equivalent
stress σk is checked in the sheet pile web at the location of connection of back of sheet piles
(cut 1).
EN 1993-1-1 (EC3)
Check for bending and stress caused by normal force
The design resistance for bending is given by:
where: W - elastic modulus of cross-section

fy - steel yield stress
γM0 - partial factor for resistance of cross-section
The design resistance for compression is given by:
where: A - area of cross-section

The design values of bending moment and normal force are checked according to
and the value of utilization is provided by:
Check for shear

The design shear resistance is given by:
-1539-
where: I - moment of inertia

t - section thickness at the center of gravity
The design value of the shear force is checked according to:
State of plane stress verification:

The state of plane stress is checked exploiting the following conditions:
where: σ1 - normal stress

τ1 - shear stress
The value of utilization is provided by:
Literature:
Eurocode 3: Design of steel structures - Part 1-1: General rules and rules for buildings.
CSN 731401
The CSN 73 1401 standard (from year 1998) adopts as the material parameter the steel
design strength Rd. If this value is not determined for the used steel directly, it is back
calculated from the steel yield stress as:
where: γm - material coefficient taking value of 1.15 pro Ry ≤ 300 MPa and 1.25 for Ry >
300 MPa
Check for bending
-1540-
The normal stress σ is checked based on the following expression:
Check for shear

The shear stress τ is checked based on the following expression:
State of plane stress verification


τ1 - shear stress in the verified section
Literature:
CSN 73 1401 (1998): Design of steel structures.

Check for bending
where: fy - steel yield stress

SFs - safety factor for bearing capacity of steel cross-section
Check for shear

-1541-



When performing the analysis according to the theory of limit states the steel yield stress fy is
reduced by the coefficient of material reliability γss.
Check for bending
Check for shear


-1542-

GB 50017-2003
The GB 50017-2003 standard adopts as the material parameter the steel design compressive,
tension and bending strength f and shear strength fy. If this value is not determined for the
used steel directly, it is back calculated from the steel yield stress fy as:
where: γR - resistance sub coefficient, which is 1,087 for fy ≤ 240 MPa and 1,111 for fy >
240 MPa
Check for bending with influence of normal force

The bending stress with influence of normal force is checked according to this expression:
where: A - area of cross-section

γx - section plasticity develop factor
f - design strength of steel
Section plasticity develop factor γx depends on shape of cross-section. For I-sections, sheet
piles and casing is considered as γx = 1,05. The value of utilization is provided by:
Check for shear

-1543-


β1 - strength design value increase coefficient, which is 1,1
Timber Cross-Section Verification

Verification of timber cross-sections is carried out for load of bending moment, normal force
and shear force. Verification is carried out for chosen load or for the critical load. The critical
load is the load with maximum value of utilization.
Cross section can be checked by these ways:
• Verification according to EN 1995-1-1 (EC 5)
• Verification according to safety factor
Each cross-section is checked for two types of load:
1. Check for bending moment and normal force
The analysis checks the bending moment stress σm developed at the edge of cross-section
given by:
where: M - bending moment

and the normal force stress σn given by:

A - area of cross-section
The normal force can be either tension or compression.

2. Check for shear
-1544-
The analysis checks the shear stress τ at the cross-section center of gravity written as:
where: Q - shear force

I - moment of inertia
t - width (thickness) of cross-section at its center of gravity
EN 1995-1-1 (EC5)
Check for bending and compression
The design bending strength of timber is given by:
where: fm, k - characteristic bending strength of timber

kmod - modification factor for duration of load and moisture content
γM - partial factor for material properties
The design compressive strength of timber is given by:
where: fc, k - characteristic compressive strength of timber

The bearing capacity is checked according to:
where: σc,0,d - design compressive stress

σm,d - design bending stress
Check for bending and tension

The design tensile strength of timber is given by:
-1545-
where: ft, k - characteristic tensile strength of timber

where: σt,0,d - design tensile stress

σm,d - design bending stress
Check for shear

The design shear strength of timber is given by:
where: fv, k - characteristic shear strength of timber

where: τd - design shear stress

kcr - modification factor for shear resistance

The normal stress checking is based on the following expression:
-1546-
where: σn - normal stress caused by tension or compression

σm - bending stress
fn - tensile resp. compressive strength of timber
fm - bending strength of timber
SFs safety factor for bearing capacity of timber cross-section
Check for shear

The shear stress τ checking is based on the following expression:
where: fv - shear strength of timber

When performing the analysis according to the theory of limit states the strengths of timber
are reduced by the coefficient of material reliability γs.
The normal stress checking is based on the following expression:
where: σn - normal stress caused by tension or compression

σm - bending stress
fn - tensile resp. compressive strength of timber
fm - bending strength of timber
-1547-
Check for shear

The shear stress τ checking is based on the following expression:
where: fv - shear strength of timber
Masonry Cross-Sections Verification

Masonry structures can be checked by following standards:
• AS 3700 - Masonry Wall program
• EN 1996-1-1 - Masonry Wall program
• EN 1996-1-1 - Masonry cross-section check in Gravity Wall program
• GB 50003-2011 - Masonry cross-section check in Gravity Wall program
AS 3700 - Masonry Wall

Reinforced masonry is verified for load due to bending moment, shear force and combination
of compressive normal force and bending moment. When load due normal force is considered,
it is necessary to specify also the slenderness ratio Sr.
Design for members in compression and bending
where: Fd - the design compression force acting on the cross-section

ϕ - the capacity reduction factor - 0.75
ks - a reduction factor taken as 1.18 - 0.03*Sr but not greater than 1.0
f'uc - the characteristic uncofined compressive strength of masonry
f'm - the characteristic compressive strength of masonry
Ab - the bedded area of the masonry cross-section
fsy - the design yield strength of reinforcement
As - the total cross-sectional area of main reinforcement
Design for members in bending
-1548-
where: Md - the design bending moment acting on the cross-section of member

Asd - the portion of the cross-sectional area of the main tensile reinforcement
used for design purposes in a reinforced masonry member
the lesser of and Ast

f'm - the characteristic compressive strength of masonry
d - the effective depth of the reinforced masonry member
fuc - the characteristic uncofined compressive strength of masonry
Out-of-plane shear in wall

A reinforced wall subject to out-of-plane shear shall be such that:
but not more than:
where: Vd - the design shear force acting on the cross-section of the masonry wall
f'vm - the characteristic shear strength of reinforced masonry - 0.35 Mpa
d - the effective depth of the reinforced masonry wall
fvs - the design shear strength of main reinforcement - 17.5 Mpa
Ast - the cross-sectional area of fully anchored longitudinal reinforcement in
the tension zone of the cross-section
EN 1996-1-1 - Masonry Wall

The reinforced masonry is verified for the load caused by the combination of the compressive
normal force and the bending moment and for the load due to the shear force.
Verification for pressure and bending
Analysis assumptions (Chapter 6.6):
• plane cross-sections remain plane
• the strain of steel is the same as the strain of the attached masonry
-1549-
• the tensile strength of masonry is assumed equal to zero

• the limit strain of masonry in compression is 0.0035
• the limit strain of steel in tension is 0.01
• variation of stress as a function of strain of masonry is assumed parabolic-rectangular
• variation of stress as a function of strain of steel is assumed bounded by a horizontal
upper branch
• the properties of filling concrete are considered the same as the properties of masonry (it
is necessary to use the worse of the two materials)
• design strength of masonry (concrete) is provided by:
where: fk - characteristic strength of masonry (concrete)

γM - 1.8
• If the slenderness ratio given by the ratio of the height and the width of the wall is greater
than 12, the effect of the II-nd order theory is considered by including an additional
design bending moment given by:
where: NEd - design value of the normal force

hef - buckling height of wall
t - wall thickness
• If the slenderness ratio is greater than 27, then it is not possible to perform the analysis
and it is necessary by changing geometry to obtain more favorable slenderness ratio.
Verification for shear
Chapter 6.7, Appendix J
where: VEd - design value of the shear force

fvd - design value of the shear strength of masonry (concrete)
ρ - longitudinal reinforcement ratio
t - wall thickness
l - wall length - 1 running meter
-1550-
EN 1996-1-1 - Gravity Wall

The masonry is verified for the load caused by the combination of the compressive normal
force and the bending moment and for the load due to the shear force.
Verification of compression bearing capacity
Chapter 6.1.2.1
where: NEd - design value of normal force

NRd - compression bearing capacity
Ac - compressed area of cross section
fk - characteristic value of compressive strength of masonry
γM - partial factor of masonry
b - width of cross section
h - height of cross section
e - excentricity of normal force
MEd - design value of bending moment

-1551-
prescribed excentricity and R2 is strength with prescribed normal force.

Verification of shear bearing capacity
Chapter 6.2
where: VEd - design value of shear force

VRd - shear bearing capacity
fvk - characteristic value of shear strength of masonry
fvko - characteristic value of original shear strength of masonry
fb - compressive strength of masonry unit
GB 50003-2011 - Gravity Wall

The masonry is verified for the load caused by the combination of the compressive normal
force and the bending moment and for the load due to the shear force.
Verification of compression bearing capacity
Non-seismic design situation (Art 5.1.1):
Seismic design situation (Art 10.1):
where: γ0 - coefficient of importance of structure

N - design value of normal force
f - design value of compressive strength of masonry
A - area of cross section
φ - influence factor due to eccentricity of normal force and depth-
thickness ratio of structure
γRE - seismic adjusting coefficient for compressive strength of masonry
φ is provided by:
When β ≤ 3 (Art D.0.1-1)
When β > 3 (Art D.0.1-2, D.0.1-3)
-1552-
where: e - eccentricity of normal force acting on the cross section

B - depth of the cross section
φ0 - stability coefficient of structure loaded with axial pressure
α - coefficient due to strength grade of mortar
β - depth-thickness ratio of structure
β is provided by:
where: γβ - adjusting coefficient of depth-thickness ratio based on the type of

masonry material
H - height of the structure above cross section
Verification of shear bearing capacity

Non-seismic design situation (Art. 5.5.1-1):
Seismic design situation (Art. 10.1):
When γG ≤ 1.2 (Art 5.5.1-2):
When γG ≥ 1.35 (Art 5.5.1-3):
Intermediate values are interpolated.

where: γ0 - coefficient of importance of structure
V - design value of shear force
fv - design value of shear strength of masonry
A - area of cross section
σ0 - average value of normal stress on cross section
-1553-
f - design value of compressive strength of masonry

γG - partial factor for permanent actions
α - correction factor; when γG ≤ 1.2: α = 0.64; γG ≥ 1.35: α = 0.66
Intermediate values are interpolated
μ - influence factor for shear-compression load
γRE - seismic adjusting coefficient for shear strength of masonry
Plastic Sheet Pile Verification

Verification of vinyl sheet piles
The manufacturer of vinyl sheet piles ESP (Everlast Synthetic Products) states that verification
of vinyl sheet piles shall be performed for bending and shear. Bending is verified for maximum
moment Mmax, shear is verified for maximum shear force Qmax. Internal forces are calculated
per unit.
Calculated internal forces can be multiplied by the reduction coefficent of bearing capacity
before the verification. This coefficent reflects the degree of uncertainty of determining the
theoretical values of the internal forces and brings into the calculation security.
Bending verification:
Bearing capacity for bending is calculated according to formula:
kde: Mmax - maximum value of bending moment

Mu - bending bearing capacity
The value of bending bearing capacity Mu is determined per unit and given by the
manufacturer of profiles.
Utilization of cross-section is calculated according to formula:
Shear verification:
Shear bearing capacity is calculated according to formula:
kde: Qmax - maximum value of shear force

Qu - shear bearing capacity
The value of shear bearing capacity Qu is determined per unit and given by the manufacturer
of profiles.
Utilization of cross-section is calculated according to formula:
-1554-
The vinyl strength:

The bearing capacities of the profile are given for the material with ultimate tension strength fu
= 6300 psi (43,44 MPa). The user can change this value. If the strength is changed by the
user, the values of bearing capacities are recalculated in a ratio corresponding to changed
value of strength.
Literature:
Implemented sheet piles in our catalog
• Catalog firmy Everlast Synthetic Products, LLC
(online: https://everlastseawalls.com/seawall-products/vinyl-sheet-piling)
-1555-
Index
3D Visualization...........................................................................................................42
About the Company....................................................................................................998
ACI 318-11.....................................................................................................1134, 1438
Activation..................................................................................................................851
Active Dimensions and Objects.......................................................................................43
Active Earth Pressure..................................................................................................436
Add.......41, 49, 51, 54-58, 75-78, 80, 81, 90, 91, 94, 112, 120, 133, 154-156, 158, 161, 166,
170, 171, 173, 178, 180, 191, 194, 198, 199, 201, 206, 208, 216-219, 221, 226, 228, 238,
239, 241, 242, 244, 249, 251, 260-264, 266, 271, 273, 282, 285, 287, 288, 290, 296, 298,
307, 309, 311, 312, 314, 317, 326, 327, 329, 330, 332, 339, 341, 357, 358, 360, 363-365,
367, 370, 371, 380, 384, 386, 388, 393-397, 411, 416, 417, 425-428, 437-440, 442, 444,
450, 451, 454, 456, 458-462, 473, 474, 477, 482, 483, 495, 497, 503, 505, 508, 511, 512,
514, 518, 520, 532, 534, 536, 538, 543, 551, 552, 556, 557, 559, 562, 569-571, 573, 574,
588, 589, 593, 595, 598, 605, 608, 613, 616-618, 631-633, 635, 638, 646-652, 658, 660,
661, 668, 669, 671, 674-680, 685, 697-699, 703, 705, 706, 708, 710, 712, 713, 716, 717,
722, 726, 727, 731, 733, 734, 736, 743, 745, 753, 755, 759, 763, 778-780, 789, 793, 795,
798, 800, 801, 804, 809, 812, 814, 817, 827, 830, 835, 837-839, 868, 870, 901-903, 905,
906, 915, 918-921, 929, 939, 947-950, 952, 956, 957, 962, 965, 975, 990, 991, 998, 1116,
1184, 1191, 1269, 1273, 1316, 1317, 1424, 1510
Administrator. 54, 119-122, 133, 154, 166, 190, 216, 237, 260, 281, 307, 326, 356, 368, 380,
411, 437, 450, 473, 503, 532, 551, 569, 588, 605, 631, 645, 703, 726, 778
Analysis.68, 93-97, 122, 127-131, 133, 136, 139, 142-144, 146, 148-151, 153, 154, 159-162,
164, 165, 176-178, 181, 184, 187, 189, 204-206, 209, 211, 213, 215, 224-226, 229, 231,
233, 236, 247-249, 252, 255, 257, 259, 269-271, 274, 276, 278, 281, 294-296, 299, 301,
304, 306, 315-318, 320, 321, 324, 325, 337-339, 342, 344, 345, 349, 350, 353, 355, 357,
369, 370, 372-375, 379-381, 383, 384, 388, 391-393, 398, 400-404, 410-412, 414, 415, 420,
423-425, 429, 431-434, 436, 438, 446, 447, 449, 465, 467-471, 485-487, 499-502, 506, 515,
516, 518, 521, 523, 524, 527, 531, 535, 545, 550, 565, 568, 572, 604, 626, 627, 644, 689,
690, 702, 715, 724, 725, 736-742, 748, 749, 851, 855, 860, 879, 957, 968, 976-978, 986,
987, 992, 995, 998, 1117, 1119, 1120, 1132, 1148, 1158, 1163, 1168, 1181, 1189, 1202,
1242, 1268, 1276, 1296, 1297, 1299-1308, 1310, 1312, 1313, 1326, 1329, 1341, 1351,
1375, 1399, 1409, 1411, 1427, 1432, 1434, 1435, 1459, 1549
Analytical Solution......................................................................................................568
Anchors 122, 130, 355, 363, 364, 378, 379, 395, 396, 408-410, 427, 428, 435, 436, 449, 458,
459, 471, 483, 484, 497-499, 851, 852, 934, 936, 937, 952, 953, 1125, 1126, 1128, 1374
Anti-Slide Pile......124, 126, 152, 383, 384, 409, 410, 414, 415, 419, 449, 450, 461, 534, 555,
1157, 1381, 1392, 1393
Application Window.......................................................................................................42
Applied Forces............................165, 189, 215, 236, 259, 280, 324, 355, 378, 410, 471, 501
Assign.......74, 77, 93, 109, 113, 153, 158, 159, 165, 173, 174, 189, 201, 202, 215, 221, 222,
236, 244, 245, 259, 266, 267, 280, 290, 291, 305, 314, 315, 324, 332, 333, 355, 360, 361,
378, 389, 390, 410, 421, 422, 436, 442, 443, 449, 456-458, 501, 514, 515, 530, 536, 537,
550, 552, 559, 560, 568, 573, 574, 587, 595, 596, 604, 618, 619, 630, 637, 638, 702, 703,
710, 711, 725, 733, 734, 740, 744, 745, 751, 754, 755, 802, 816, 850, 851, 903, 929, 933,
-1556-
934
Backfill. .56, 165, 175, 176, 189, 203, 204, 215, 223, 224, 236, 246, 247, 259, 268, 269, 280,
293, 294
Barton - Bandis.................................................................................................475, 1228
Base Anchorage..................................................................................................165, 236
Basic data. . .156, 158, 171, 173, 199, 201, 219, 221, 242, 244, 264, 266, 288, 290, 312, 314,
330, 332, 358, 360, 384, 386, 416, 417, 440, 442, 454, 456, 512, 514, 534, 536, 559, 571,
573, 593, 595, 616, 618, 633, 635, 708, 710, 733, 751, 752, 756, 757, 761, 1010, 1011
Beam Loads...............................................................................................................851
Beams.............................................644, 661, 662, 851, 903, 934-936, 939-941, 948, 1312
Bearing capacity. .165, 185, 186, 189, 190, 211, 213, 215, 231, 233, 236, 237, 256, 257, 259,
276, 278, 280, 281, 302, 303, 305, 321, 322, 324, 325, 344, 346-348, 351, 352, 501, 524-
526, 530, 531, 545, 547, 548, 566, 568, 587, 601, 602, 604, 628, 629, 1087, 1102, 1173,
1241, 1248, 1252, 1270, 1343, 1358, 1359, 1361, 1375, 1376, 1554
Bishop.........................................449, 466, 528, 1164, 1185, 1188, 1192, 1201, 1202, 1241
Blocks..........................................................................236, 324, 326, 327, 480, 501, 1215
Borehole...........................................751, 761, 762, 775, 789, 791, 809, 814, 818, 832, 833
BS 8110:1997..........................................................................................................1438
Buildings............................................................................................................740, 742
Bustamante (SPT, Pressiometer PMT)............................................................................132
Combination SLS..................................................................................644, 686, 702, 723
Combination ULS.........................................................................................644, 681, 702
Concentrated Surcharge - Earth Pressure at Rest............................................................436
Concrete Structures...........................165, 190, 237, 281, 306, 325, 379, 410, 531, 568, 604
Consolidation......................................................................153, 850, 860-862, 1411, 1412
Construction....49, 74, 116, 118, 213, 257, 303, 375, 407, 434, 587, 596, 598, 751, 765, 766,
773, 775, 776, 785-787, 805, 814, 851, 905, 928, 1101, 1128, 1138, 1274, 1322, 1325, 1326
Contact Types............................................................................................................850
Contacts.......................................................................................851, 903, 904, 947, 948
Control bar - Print and Export............................................................................1002, 1004
Control Menu...............................................................................................................42
Coordinate systems....................................................................................................752
Copy to Clipboard...................................................................................................43, 75
CPT.....122, 131, 132, 135, 136, 153, 185, 186, 212, 231, 232, 256, 276, 277, 302, 321, 322,
346, 347, 351, 352, 383, 414, 525, 526, 550-557, 559, 566, 587, 589, 590, 592-594, 598-
601, 641, 642, 779, 789, 791, 792, 794, 796, 798-801, 834, 1100, 1315, 1316, 1321, 1326,
1329, 1332-1334, 1344, 1345, 1381-1387, 1390, 1392
Creation of a Geological Model......................................................................................805
Creation of a New Layer into the Model.........................................................................805
Creation of a Terrain Model..........................................................................................805
-1557-
Creation of Soil Lens............................................................................................805, 840

Creation of User-defined Template................................................................................779
CSA A23.3-14...........................................................................................................1439
CSN 73 1002.130, 133, 569, 572, 580, 624, 1268, 1276, 1277, 1295, 1309, 1310, 1351, 1352
CSN 73 6206..................................................................................304, 1438, 1459, 1460
Damage.............................................................................741, 747, 749, 750, 1436, 1437
Deadman.................................................................................................................1129
Design Approaches....................................................................................................1138
Determination of the Influence Zone Depth....................................................................702
DG/TJ08-61-2010............................................................................126, 1151, 1153, 1155
Dialog Windows............................................................................................................43
Dimensioning. . .94, 145, 151, 165, 187-189, 213-215, 233, 234, 236, 257-259, 278-281, 283,
303-306, 323-325, 344-346, 348, 350, 351, 355, 361, 375, 376, 379, 407, 408, 410, 434-
436, 446-449, 501, 524, 525, 530, 531, 538, 549, 550, 566-568, 604, 627, 628, 644, 687,
688, 694, 695, 1090, 1106, 1111, 1158, 1241, 1262, 1448, 1457, 1466, 1473, 1481, 1488,
1495, 1502, 1509, 1519, 1527, 1535
Distributions...........................................................400, 431, 548, 603, 644, 691, 698, 699
DL/T 5219 - 2005.....................................................................................................1266
DMT........126, 378, 383, 384, 409, 415, 530, 533, 534, 756, 774, 789, 792, 796, 1137, 1143,
1144, 1381, 1392-1395, 1406
Drawing Settings 42, 51, 53, 54, 56, 78, 96, 97, 164, 184, 186, 187, 211, 212, 214, 217, 231-
234, 255, 256, 258, 262, 276-278, 301, 302, 304, 321-323, 345-347, 349, 350, 352-354,
374, 400, 431, 434, 446, 448, 466, 470, 486, 499, 523, 524, 526-529, 547-549, 566, 567,
580-583, 585, 586, 601, 602, 627, 642, 643, 689, 693, 737, 748, 749, 752, 756, 760, 761,
763, 766-768, 770, 776, 788, 790, 797, 804, 847, 848, 968, 987, 998
Drucker-Prager.........................................860, 872, 876, 882, 964, 965, 975, 984, 992, 996
DXF Import.....................................................................................75, 101-103, 106, 107
Earth Cut............................................................................................................449, 725
Earth Grading.............................................................................................................751
Earth Pressure at Rest.................................................................................................436
Earth Pressures.....47, 136, 143, 153, 165, 189, 215, 236, 259, 281, 306, 325, 356, 379, 410,
502
Earthquake...125-127, 151, 153, 162, 163, 165, 181, 182, 189, 209, 210, 215, 229, 230, 236,
252, 253, 259, 274, 275, 280, 299, 300, 305, 318, 319, 324, 342, 343, 355, 372, 373, 378,
398, 399, 410, 429, 430, 449, 464, 465, 471, 484, 485, 501, 521, 522, 530, 545, 546, 996,
997, 1056, 1057, 1064, 1174-1177, 1239
Edges.....................................................................751, 759, 760, 773, 787, 788, 805, 813
Edit.45, 47, 48, 59-61, 67, 74, 82-85, 120, 123, 168, 194, 197, 239, 240, 286, 333, 344, 349,
361, 362, 369, 381, 387, 412, 418, 428, 479-481, 506, 508, 509, 511, 542, 565, 576, 583,
608, 612, 636, 648, 664-666, 671, 680, 685, 687, 688, 712, 713, 716, 717, 722, 755, 759,
763, 768, 770, 781, 783, 791, 798-801, 805, 816, 822, 823, 829, 835-838, 841, 849, 892,
906, 907, 941, 944, 945, 947, 951, 1000, 1007, 1061, 1092, 1106, 1107, 1116, 1276, 1291,
1294, 1382, 1389, 1391, 1392, 1394
-1558-
Elastic Regions...........................................................................................................851
Embankment.....................................................68, 89, 449, 452, 453, 725, 728, 729, 1189
EN 1996-1-1 - Masonry Wall.......................................................................................1548
EN 1997-2...........................................131, 594, 1315-1317, 1323, 1324, 1328, 1332, 1350
Excavation..............................................................89, 378, 390, 391, 851, 929, 930, 1146
External Stability.................................................................................................305, 379
Fellenius / Petterson..................................................................................................1201
Field Testing................................................................................................551, 630, 773
Field Tests (Exploration Points).....................................................................................773
File.........................................................................45, 46, 100-103, 105, 114, 1002, 1004
Foliation....................................................................................................................454
Footing. .88, 122, 130, 135, 136, 139, 144, 153, 280, 285, 286, 324, 328, 329, 383, 384, 414,
415, 530-532, 534, 535, 537-539, 541, 547, 548, 550, 551, 553-555, 557, 590, 641, 642,
773, 1087, 1247, 1258, 1259, 1262, 1263, 1338, 1347, 1381, 1386, 1390, 1392, 1393
Foundation. .136, 165, 174, 175, 186, 189, 190, 202, 203, 212, 215, 222, 223, 232, 236, 237,
245, 246, 256, 259, 267, 268, 277, 280, 281, 292, 293, 302, 530, 531, 534, 537-540, 550,
561-564, 1063, 1087, 1128, 1138, 1142, 1248, 1252, 1254, 1269-1272, 1276, 1296, 1297,
1299-1308, 1310, 1312, 1315, 1317, 1322, 1346, 1350, 1369, 1370, 1375, 1377, 1421,
1422, 1430
Frames................................................................................................42, 51, 56, 90, 907
Free Area Loads..........................................................................................................644
Free Line Loads..........................................................................................................644
Free Lines..................................................................................................................850
Free Point Loads.........................................................................................................644
Free Points.................................................................................................................850
Free Refinements........................................................................................................850
Front Face.........................................165, 189, 215, 236, 259, 280, 324, 410, 422, 423, 501
GB 50010-2010.................................................................................................151, 1134
GB 50017-2003...............................................................................................1538, 1543
Generate 99, 191, 195, 509, 510, 606, 609, 684, 685, 721, 722, 751, 758, 765-767, 774, 809,
810, 831, 974
Geological Model...........................................................................774, 805, 810, 814, 839
Geological Sections..............................................................................................773, 801
Geometric Section......................................................................................................280
Geometry......51, 144, 153, 155, 165, 167, 168, 174, 182, 189, 191-196, 202, 215, 217, 218,
222, 233, 236, 238, 239, 245, 253, 259, 262, 263, 267, 280, 282-285, 292, 305, 307-310,
324, 327, 328, 355, 361, 362, 378, 386, 387, 410, 417, 418, 436, 438, 439, 471, 487-489,
491, 493, 495, 497, 499, 501, 503, 504, 530, 537, 539, 540, 543, 550, 561, 563, 564, 568,
575, 576, 584, 587, 599, 600, 604, 611, 612, 630, 635, 636, 695, 702, 705, 740, 745, 746,
1092, 1096, 1146, 1216, 1313, 1315
Geostatic Stress, Uplift Pressure...................................................................................436
-1559-
Global Stability...........................................................................................................501
Graphs.....................................................................................851, 991, 992, 1144, 1330
Ground Loss.......................................................................................153, 740, 741, 1427
GWT + NSF..................................................................................587, 590, 591, 597, 598
Heave Failure.............................................................................................................379
Hoek - Brown....................................................................................................475, 1228
Horizontal Modulus.....................................................................................................604
Import LandXML...................................................................................................75, 115
Incompressible Subsoil.................................................................................530, 568, 725
Input data...................................................................................................................90
Input of Objects and Data.............................................................................................74
Interface. .68, 74, 80, 81, 84-86, 449, 451, 452, 702, 703, 706, 707, 725, 727, 728, 845, 850,
867, 868, 908, 1075
Internal Hinges...........................................................................................................644
Internal Stability...................................................................................305, 325, 379, 501
IS 456...................................................................................................1438, 1479, 1482
Janbu.....128, 449, 466, 1164, 1171, 1180, 1185, 1186, 1189, 1201, 1203, 1395, 1403-1406,
1415, 1422
Joint Loads................................................................................................................644
Joint Refinements.......................................................................................................644
Joint Supports.....................................................................................................644, 695
Joints..................................................................................................258, 644, 646, 647
Launching.....................................................................................751, 758, 768, 770-772
LCPC (Bustamante)..................................................................131, 594, 1315, 1324, 1325
Line Flow...................................................................................................................851
Line Loads.................................................................................................................644
Line Refinement..................................................................................................644, 850
Line Supports..............................................................................................644, 695, 851
Lines...................................................................................................644, 647, 648, 850
Lining.....................................................................850, 851, 906-908, 914, 915, 934, 935
List of Pictures............................................................................................................998
Load.....101, 102, 116, 124, 131, 142-144, 146, 148-150, 164, 184, 187, 211, 213, 231, 233,
255, 257, 276, 278, 280, 282, 291, 292, 301, 304, 321, 344, 345, 349, 350, 353, 436, 446,
447, 523, 524, 527, 530, 538, 539, 550, 562, 563, 568, 574, 575, 603, 604, 613-615, 630,
638, 639, 644, 671-673, 682, 684, 701, 702, 713-718, 721, 851, 853, 908, 1010, 1091,
1158, 1159, 1161, 1162, 1262, 1269, 1278, 1280, 1289, 1292, 1312, 1332, 1335, 1341,
1344, 1351, 1358, 1359, 1423
Location.................43, 46, 702, 703, 707, 708, 843, 904, 913, 1124-1126, 1128, 1129, 1199
Macroelement Refinements..........................................................................................644
-1560-
Macroelement Subsoils................................................................................................644
Macroelements............................................................................................644, 648, 649
Material. 122, 124, 151, 154, 165, 166, 168-170, 187, 189, 191, 196-198, 214, 217, 236, 238,
240, 241, 258, 259, 261, 262, 280, 282, 286, 287, 304, 305, 307, 310, 311, 323, 326, 355,
357, 362, 363, 378, 380, 387, 388, 410, 411, 418, 419, 451, 475, 501, 503-505, 530, 532,
539, 542, 543, 549, 550, 552, 563, 565, 567-569, 576, 577, 584, 604, 605, 612, 613, 627,
630, 636, 637, 646, 673, 682, 684, 686-689, 691, 694, 697, 698, 703, 705, 715, 718, 721,
723, 724, 880, 891, 1078, 1085, 1092-1095, 1101, 1108, 1114, 1167, 1358, 1359, 1362-
1364, 1439, 1451, 1460, 1468, 1475, 1483, 1490, 1497, 1503, 1512, 1521, 1529
Measurement...............................................................................................741, 746, 747
Mesh Generation.................................................................................................644, 850
Micropile.......122, 132, 135, 136, 153, 383, 414, 554, 555, 607, 628-630, 632-634, 641, 642,
1358-1360, 1362-1364, 1371, 1375, 1381, 1390, 1392
Modelling of Fault................................................................................................805, 840
Modes.........................................................................................................................45
Modulus Kh.........................................................................................................378, 409
Modulus of Subsoil Reaction.........................................................................................568
Mohr - Coulomb.................................................................................................475, 1228
Monitors......................................................................................................851, 990, 991
Morgenstern-Price................................449, 466, 1164, 1171, 1180, 1189, 1192, 1201, 1203
Mouse Context Menu.....................................................................................................43
Mouse Functions...........................................................................................................43
MSE Wall..........................................125, 153, 325, 326, 333, 337, 347, 501, 502, 525, 530
Nailed Slope.................................................................136, 152, 305, 306, 322, 323, 1097
Nails...................................................................................................305, 449, 459, 460
NAVFAC DM 7.2....................................130, 131, 133, 569, 572, 580, 624, 1268-1272, 1351
NBR 6118-2014........................................................................................................1439
Negative Skin Friction..........................................................................................568, 604
NEN 6743...................131, 594, 602, 1285, 1315-1318, 1323, 1324, 1326, 1328, 1332, 1334
No Reduction Regions..................................................................................................996
NZS 3101-2006........................................................................................................1439
Oedometric Modulus...................................................................................................702
Openings....................................................................................................644, 649, 650
Options.....................................................................43, 44, 47, 48, 66, 71-74, 1007, 1085
Output Profiles......................................................................................773, 795, 846-848
Output Sections....................................................................................773, 795, 810, 848
Outputs.....45, 52, 66, 153, 165, 190, 216, 237, 260, 281, 306, 325, 356, 379, 410, 437, 450,
472, 502, 531, 551, 568, 588, 604, 631, 645, 702, 725, 741, 751, 773, 851, 997, 998, 1000,
1002, 1004, 1006
Page Numbering................................................................................................998, 1007
-1561-
Page Setup...............................................................................................................1007
Parameters of Rocks.....................................................................................450, 472, 531
Passive Earth Pressure......................................................................................1024, 1032
Pile......100, 122, 124, 126, 131-133, 135, 136, 139, 144, 152, 153, 185, 186, 212, 231, 232,
256, 276, 277, 302, 383, 384, 409, 410, 414, 415, 419, 449, 450, 461, 534, 553, 555, 567-
569, 571, 572, 574, 580, 582-584, 587, 589, 590, 593, 594, 604-606, 614-617, 624, 628,
629, 773, 1061, 1106-1108, 1110, 1157, 1268, 1269, 1271, 1272, 1274, 1276-1279, 1285,
1296, 1297, 1299-1308, 1312-1317, 1321-1323, 1325, 1326, 1328, 1330, 1332-1334, 1351,
1354, 1356, 1381, 1386, 1392, 1393, 1445, 1516
Plane Slip Surface.......................................................................................................471
Plasticity............................................................................................................976, 984
PMTs...................................................................................383, 414, 555, 566, 641, 1349
PN-B-03264:2002.....................................................................................................1438
Point Flow..................................................................................................................851
Point Refinement........................................................................................................850
Point Supports............................................................................................................851
Points........................................115, 195, 608, 751, 755, 756, 773, 774, 785, 787-789, 850
Polygonal Slip Surface.................................................................................................471
Pressure Determination..................................................................355, 366, 378, 410, 420
Print and Export Desktop View............................................................................997, 1005
Print and Export Document..........................................................................................997
Profile....51, 117, 153, 156, 165, 170, 171, 174, 189, 198, 199, 202, 215, 218, 219, 222, 236,
241, 242, 245, 259, 263, 264, 267, 280, 287, 288, 292, 305, 311, 312, 324, 329, 330, 355,
357, 358, 378, 380, 381, 409, 411, 412, 436, 439, 440, 501, 511, 512, 530, 532, 533, 541,
550, 552, 556, 557, 568, 570, 587, 593, 604, 616, 630, 632, 633, 740, 743, 773, 784, 789,
795, 796, 846-848
Program FEM..............................................................................................................850
Project....51, 66, 153, 154, 165, 166, 189, 190, 215, 216, 236, 237, 259, 260, 280, 281, 305,
306, 324-326, 355, 356, 378, 379, 409, 410, 436, 437, 449, 450, 471, 472, 501, 502, 530,
531, 550, 551, 568, 569, 587, 588, 604, 605, 630, 631, 644, 645, 702, 725, 726, 740, 741,
751, 773, 774, 783, 850, 854, 873-875, 881, 882, 1008, 1010
Props..............................................................355, 364, 365, 378, 396, 397, 851, 956, 957
Reinforcement.....258, 324, 334, 336, 337, 352, 354, 449, 460, 461, 501, 506, 509-511, 526-
528, 584, 694, 695, 851, 957, 958, 1082, 1170, 1241, 1242
Results.........................................................361, 626, 692-694, 724, 986, 988, 1142, 1350
Rigid Bodies...............................................................................................................850
Rigid Body.................................................................................................................449
Rock....125, 135, 136, 152, 324, 325, 343, 347, 351, 354, 410, 420, 421, 450, 471, 472, 475,
476, 484, 531, 744, 1073, 1077, 1082, 1100, 1101, 1207, 1208, 1216, 1221, 1229-1231,
1233, 1236, 1237, 1239, 1254, 1256, 1349, 1374
Root Verification.........................................................................................................630
Running Several Analyses / Verifications..........................................................................74
-1562-
Sand-Gravel Cushion...................................................................................................530
Sarma............................................................................449, 466, 1164, 1179-1182, 1200
Saved Views...........................................................................................................74, 97
Schmertmann. .131, 552, 566, 1036, 1315, 1319, 1320, 1325, 1326, 1329, 1335, 1336, 1340,
1341, 1345, 1346, 1381
Setting a Color Range...................................................................................................75
Settings 42, 51, 53-56, 71, 78, 96-98, 119-122, 133, 134, 136, 137, 141, 142, 147, 151, 153-
155, 164-167, 184, 186, 187, 189-191, 211, 212, 214-217, 231-234, 236-238, 255, 256,
258-262, 276-278, 280-282, 301, 302, 304-307, 312, 321-324, 326, 333, 337, 345-347, 349,
350, 352-357, 368, 374, 378-381, 383, 384, 388, 400, 408-412, 414, 415, 431, 434-438,
446, 448-451, 454, 466, 470-473, 486, 499, 501-503, 523, 524, 526-532, 534, 535, 537,
546-552, 566-570, 572, 578, 580-583, 585-589, 591, 597, 598, 601, 602, 604-606, 611, 616,
617, 624, 627, 628, 630-632, 642-646, 658, 660, 689, 693, 695, 702, 703, 705, 725-727,
737, 738, 740, 741, 743-745, 748, 749, 752, 756, 760, 761, 763, 766-768, 770, 773, 774,
776, 777, 788, 790, 797, 804, 807, 809, 847, 848, 850, 854, 855, 860, 868, 906, 907, 911,
912, 934, 968, 985-987, 990, 998, 1010, 1078, 1087, 1136, 1206, 1222, 1227, 1263, 1308,
1313, 1333, 1334, 1351, 1356, 1357, 1411, 1434, 1460
Settlement...49, 54, 71, 74, 100, 116, 122, 128, 153, 530-532, 534, 535, 548, 549, 568, 582,
583, 587, 602-604, 616, 625, 626, 708, 725, 727, 731, 736-738, 748, 770, 773, 864, 988,
1150-1154, 1291, 1294, 1345, 1347, 1349, 1354, 1428
Shaft.............................................................................152, 436, 1158, 1162, 1292, 1378
Shahunyants.................................................................466, 1164, 1180, 1192, 1193, 1201
Sheet Pile................................................................................................................1110
Sheeting Check. . .116, 124, 126, 136, 139, 143, 152, 355, 376, 378, 379, 383, 384, 410, 414,
415, 534, 555, 1106, 1381, 1392, 1393, 1538
Sheeting Design.....................................................136, 143, 152, 355, 356, 361, 378, 1106
Slip on Georeinforcement..............................................................................215, 325, 501
Slope Stability..........135, 136, 152, 376, 409, 449, 450, 455, 502, 773, 848-850, 1097, 1189
SNiP 52-101-2003....................................................................................................1438
Soil Body.....153, 165, 189, 215, 236, 259, 281, 306, 325, 356, 379, 410, 450, 502, 531, 551,
568, 587, 604, 725, 741
Soil Classification................................................................................550, 587, 589, 1384
Soils. 72-74, 153, 156, 157, 165, 171, 172, 174, 175, 179, 189, 199, 200, 202, 203, 207, 215,
219, 220, 222, 223, 227, 236, 242, 243, 245, 246, 250, 259, 264, 265, 267, 268, 272, 280,
288, 289, 292, 293, 297, 305, 312, 313, 324, 330, 331, 337, 340, 355, 358, 359, 378, 381,
384, 385, 390, 409, 412, 416, 436, 440, 441, 449, 454, 455, 501, 504, 512, 513, 519, 530,
534, 535, 541, 550, 552, 557, 558, 568, 571, 572, 587, 593, 594, 604, 616, 617, 630, 633,
634, 702, 703, 708, 709, 725, 731, 732, 740, 743, 744, 751, 753, 754, 773, 795, 796, 800,
801, 809, 850, 868, 869, 1142, 1166, 1204, 1315, 1326, 1350, 1361, 1369, 1370, 1377,
1411
Spencer............449, 466, 528, 1164, 1171, 1180, 1183, 1185, 1189, 1190, 1201, 1202, 1241
Spring Method....................................................................................................568, 604
SPT.. .132, 550, 552-557, 559, 566, 630, 640-642, 779, 789, 792, 796, 798, 801, 1334, 1335,
1340, 1344, 1345, 1347, 1372, 1378, 1380, 1381, 1387, 1389-1391
-1563-
Stability......122, 128, 135, 136, 152, 165, 188, 189, 214, 215, 235, 236, 258, 259, 279, 280,
304, 305, 307, 320, 323-325, 344, 349, 354, 355, 376, 377, 379, 409, 449-451, 455, 466,
471-473, 501-503, 529, 530, 773, 848-851, 855, 980, 993, 1097, 1179, 1182, 1189, 1202,
1227, 1228, 1230, 1430
Stability Analysis.......................................................................................................1189
Stage settings.....137, 145, 147, 152, 163, 183, 184, 187, 210, 230, 254, 255, 257, 275, 300,
301, 304, 319, 343, 373, 399, 430, 446, 465, 485, 522, 546, 579, 623, 736, 747, 1436
Steel 2xU-profile.......................................................................................................1112
Steel I-section..........................................................................................................1111
Structure 93, 165, 190, 237, 281, 306, 325, 379, 410, 531, 568, 597, 604, 606-611, 615, 626,
1163, 1233, 1269-1272
Subsoil....................................................68, 530, 568, 644, 702, 703, 705, 706, 725, 1074
Supports.....355, 365, 366, 378, 397, 398, 410, 428, 429, 644, 695, 702, 712, 713, 851, 950,
1121
Surcharge.....93, 145, 153, 161, 162, 165, 178, 179, 189, 206, 207, 215, 226, 227, 236, 249,
250, 259, 271, 272, 280, 283, 296, 297, 305, 317, 318, 324, 339, 340, 355, 370, 371, 378,
393, 394, 410, 425, 426, 436, 444, 445, 449, 462, 463, 471, 482, 495-497, 501, 518, 519,
530, 543, 544, 725, 734, 735, 740, 851, 852, 962, 963, 1015, 1217
Surplus sliding force..................................................................................................1199
Table Data Import.........................................................................................................75
Tables.......................................................................................43, 788, 1023, 1024, 1032
Template.............................................................45, 48, 104, 120, 121, 773, 777-779, 790
Terrain. 114, 126, 153, 156, 159, 160, 165, 170, 176, 177, 189, 198, 204, 205, 215, 218, 224,
225, 236, 241, 247, 248, 259, 263, 269, 270, 280, 287, 294, 295, 305, 311, 315, 316, 324,
329, 337, 338, 355, 357, 369, 378, 381, 391, 392, 400, 410, 412, 423, 424, 439, 471, 473-
475, 501, 511, 515, 516, 533, 556, 570, 593, 616, 632, 743, 751, 753, 768, 770-773, 775,
785, 787, 788, 805, 807, 840, 1059
Theory. 153, 165, 189, 215, 236, 259, 280, 306, 325, 356, 379, 410, 436, 450, 472, 502, 531,
551, 568, 587, 604, 630, 645, 702, 725, 741, 773
Tomlinson...............................................131, 569, 572, 580, 1268, 1274, 1320, 1325, 1326
Topology........................................................................802, 850, 851, 907, 915, 928, 934
Tunnels.........................................................................................................90, 860, 943
Values...626, 644, 691, 696-698, 884, 987, 1066, 1069, 1072, 1073, 1075, 1101, 1143, 1185,
1188, 1192, 1234, 1256, 1274, 1293, 1325, 1343, 1361, 1370, 1373, 1422, 1424
Verification..74, 93, 94, 119, 125-127, 129-134, 138, 144, 145, 164, 165, 184, 185, 187, 189,
211-213, 215, 230, 231, 233, 236, 255-257, 259, 275, 276, 278, 280, 291, 301-305, 320,
321, 324, 325, 343-347, 349-353, 379, 410, 446, 466, 501, 503, 504, 523-527, 547, 585,
630, 642, 643, 749, 1078, 1086, 1088, 1090, 1097, 1179, 1227, 1228, 1241, 1243, 1263-
1268, 1277, 1315, 1332, 1333, 1358, 1359, 1365, 1437, 1439, 1451, 1460, 1461, 1468,
1469, 1475, 1483, 1490, 1497, 1503, 1512, 1521, 1529, 1537-1539, 1544, 1549-1554
Vertical Springs..........................................................................................................604
Visualization. .42, 45, 50, 52, 54, 55, 60, 90, 98, 164, 184, 186, 187, 211, 212, 214, 231-234,
255, 256, 258, 276-278, 301, 302, 304, 321-323, 345-347, 349, 350, 352-354, 368, 374,
400, 431, 434, 446, 448, 466, 471, 486, 499, 523, 524, 526-529, 547-549, 566, 567, 580-
-1564-
583, 585, 586, 601, 602, 627, 642, 643, 691, 694, 748, 749, 752, 756, 760, 761, 763, 766-
768, 770, 788-790, 797, 804, 805, 847, 848, 906, 967, 968, 986
Water. .53, 56, 57, 68, 153, 160, 161, 165, 177, 178, 189, 205, 206, 215, 225, 226, 236, 248,
249, 259, 270, 271, 280, 295, 296, 305, 316, 317, 324, 338, 339, 355, 369, 370, 378, 392,
393, 410, 424, 425, 436, 443, 444, 449, 463, 464, 471, 478-480, 493-495, 501, 516-518,
530, 544, 545, 550, 561, 568, 577, 578, 604, 619, 620, 630, 639, 640, 702, 703, 711, 712,
725, 735, 736, 751, 760, 761, 850, 851, 861, 867, 929, 948, 969, 970, 1039, 1064, 1065,
1068, 1069, 1214, 1218, 1219
Wings..................................................................................................280, 283, 284, 303
-1565-
© Fine Ltd. 2018

www.finesoftware.eu
-1566-

Geo 5 User

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Geo 5 User

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Geo 5 User

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

User's Guide

Site view on Google Maps........................................................................................117

LRFD - Analysis of Spread Foundations..............................................................149

Surcharge - Plane and Polygonal Slip Surface.........................................................482

Module Lining - FEM....................................................................................907

Reduction Coefficient of Passive Earth Pressure.............................................1030

Verification - Theory of Limit States.................................................................1104

Modulus of Subsoil Reaction According to NF P 94-282...................................1142

Verification According to EN 1997........................................................................1178

Polygonal Slip Surface.......................................................................................1215

Bearing Capacity of Foundation on Bedrock..........................................................1253

Shear Strength of Skin...............................................................................1280

Cohesionless Soil (Analysis for Drained Conditions)...........................................1351

Skin Friction and Bearing Capacity of the Micropile Root in Rock......................1377

Characteristics of Settlement Analyses.................................................................1415

Design of Longitudinal Reinforcement for Slabs.................................................1449

Materials, Coefficients, Notation......................................................................1483

Design of Longitudinal Reinforcement for Slabs.................................................1520

Using the Help

"Help" dialog window - "Content" tab

Using the Search Function

• The searching is launching automatically by text input

Dialog window "Help" - "Search" tab

Mouse functions are described on pages:

All GEO5 programs support two sets of units (Metric / Imperial).

Clipboard functions are described on pages:

Control tools of the application window

Program tools arrangement

Control menu of a GEO5 program

Tool and Control Bars

Tool and Control Bar Location on the Desktop

Tool bar "File"

Using the button for more functions

Open file • Opens an existing file - if there is an existing task opened

Tool bar "Edit" - 1D programs

Tool bar "Edit" - 2D programs

Using the button for more functions

Paste • Opens a dialog window and pastes selected data from a

Undo (more steps) • Opens a list of steps, that can be undone.

Redo • Restores one returned step (the function is available only

Tool bar "Template"

Using the button for more functions

Edit • Opens a dialog window for template layer editing.

Tool bar "Stages"

"Stages" tool bar with analysis status color stripes

• green - there is an analysis in the construction stage which IS SATISFACTORY

• red - there is an analysis in the construction stage which IS NOT SATISFACTORY

Tool bar "Visualization" - tool bar appereance in 2D and 3D mode

3D view • Applies the 3D visualization mode.

Move displayed area • Moves the current view in an arbitrary direction - to

Pre-defined 3D view • Sets the predefined 3D view of drawing (3D view).

2D view • View in the direction of the Z-axis

Perspective view • Sets the perspective view of drawing (3D view).

Axonometric view • Sets the axonometric view of drawing (3D view).

Control bar "Frames" for switching between input data modes

Control bar "Outputs"

Button of drawing settings

Frame "Drawing Settings"

Frame "Visualization Settings" - special settings